Et200sp Manual Collection en-US

SIMATIC
ET 200SP
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Manual Collection
This document contains a compilation of all Edition 04/2016

manuals for the ET 200SP system family.
Use the bookmarks on the left edge of the Answers for industry.
screen to navigate
Distributed I/O system ___________________
Preface
___________________
Guide to documentation 1
___________________
System overview 2
SIMATIC ___________________
Application planning 3
___________________
Installation 4
ET 200SP
Distributed I/O system ___________________
Wiring 5
___________________
Configuring 6
System Manual
___________________
Basics of program execution 7
___________________
Protection 8
___________________
Configuration control (option
handling) 9
___________________
Commissioning 10
___________________
SIMATIC memory card 11
___________________
Maintenance 12
___________________
Test functions and
eliminating problems 13
___________________
Technical specifications 14
___________________
Dimension drawings A
___________________
Accessories/spare parts B
___________________
Calculating the leakage
resistance C
___________________
Service & Support D
12/2015
A5E03576849-AF
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03576849-AF Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 12/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of the documentation

This documentation provides important information on configuring, installing, wiring and
commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Basic knowledge required

A basic knowledge of automation technology is required to understand the documentation.
Validity of the documentation

This documentation applies to the distributed I/O system, ET 200SP.
Conventions
Please pay particular attention to notes highlighted as follows:
Note
Notes contain important information on the product, handling the product or on part of the
documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
Distributed I/O system

4 System Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576849-AF
Preface
Special information
Note
Important note for maintaining operational safety of your plant
Plants with safety-related features are subject to special operational safety requirements on
the part of the operator. Even suppliers are required to observe special measures during
product monitoring. This is why we inform you about product developments and features that
are or may become important for the operation of plants with regard to safety in a special
newsletter. You need to subscribe to the corresponding newsletter to ensure that you always
remain up-to-date and are able to make any necessary changes to your plant regarding
operational safety should the need arise. Please go online
(https://www.automation.siemens.com/WW/newsletter/guiThemes2Select.aspx?HTTPS=RE
DIR&subjectID=2) and register for the following newsletters:
• SIMATIC S7-300/S7-300F
• SIMATIC S7-400/S7-400H/S7-400F/FH
• SIMATIC S7-1500/SIMATIC S7-1500F
• Distributed I/O
• SIMATIC Industrial Software
Select the "Current" check box for these newsletters.
Note
When F-CPUs are used in safety mode, note the description of the fail-safe system SIMATIC
Safety Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126).
Recycling and disposal

The products are low in pollutants and can be recycled. For environmentally compliant
recycling and disposal of your electronic waste, please contact a company certified for the
disposal of electronic waste.
Additional support
● Information about the technical support available can be found in the appendix to this
documentation (Page 251).
● The technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems is
available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).
● The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).

System Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576849-AF 5
Preface
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide to documentation ........................................................................................................................ 11
2 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system? .......................................................13
2.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules? .............................................16
2.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP? ..........................................17
2.4 Components ............................................................................................................................20
3 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 26
3.1 Selecting a suitable BaseUnit .................................................................................................26
3.1.1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature
measurement ..........................................................................................................................29
3.1.2 Analog modules with temperature measurement ...................................................................30
3.2 Hardware configuration ...........................................................................................................31
3.3 Forming potential groups ........................................................................................................32
3.3.1 Basics......................................................................................................................................32
3.3.2 Forming potential groups with AC I/O modules ......................................................................35
3.3.3 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules ....................................................................36
3.4 Configuration examples for potential groups ..........................................................................37
4 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 39
4.1 Basics......................................................................................................................................39
4.2 Mounting the CPU/interface module .......................................................................................42
4.3 Installing the CM DP communication module .........................................................................44
4.4 Installing BaseUnits ................................................................................................................45
4.5 Installing the server module ....................................................................................................48
5 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 49
5.1 Rules and regulations for operation ........................................................................................49
5.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe
modules ..................................................................................................................................51
5.2.1 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) for fail-safe modules ...........................................................51
5.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules ..............................................52
5.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals ..................................................................................55
5.3 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply ........................................................55
5.4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP ................................................................................58
5.5 Wiring rules .............................................................................................................................60

Table of contents
5.6 Wiring BaseUnits.................................................................................................................... 62

5.7 Connecting cable shields ....................................................................................................... 64
5.8 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module ................................................ 66
5.9 Connecting interfaces for communication .............................................................................. 68
5.9.1 Connecting PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the bus adapter BA
2xRJ45 ................................................................................................................................... 68
5.9.2 Connecting PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BA 2xFC BusAdapter ....... 70
5.9.3 Connecting PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter......... 74
5.9.4 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter ...... 77
5.9.5 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter ......... 79
5.9.6 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA 2xLC BusAdapter ................ 81
5.9.7 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter .......... 84
5.9.8 Connecting PROFINET IO to interface module via BA LC/FC BusAdapter .......................... 86
5.9.9 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU ................................................................... 87
5.9.10 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module/communications
module CM DP ....................................................................................................................... 89
5.10 Plugging in I/O modules and BU covers ................................................................................ 90
5.11 Labeling ET 200SP ................................................................................................................ 91
5.11.1 Factory markings.................................................................................................................... 91
5.11.2 Optional markings .................................................................................................................. 93
5.11.3 Applying color identification labels ......................................................................................... 94
5.11.4 Applying labeling strips .......................................................................................................... 96
5.11.5 Applying reference identification labels ................................................................................. 96
6 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 97
6.1 Configuring ET 200SP ........................................................................................................... 97
6.2 Configuring the CPU ............................................................................................................ 100
6.2.1 Reading out the configuration .............................................................................................. 100
6.2.2 Addressing ........................................................................................................................... 102
6.2.3 Process images and process image partitions .................................................................... 104
6.2.3.1 Process image - overview .................................................................................................... 104
6.2.3.2 Automatically updating process image partitions ................................................................. 105
6.2.3.3 Update process image partitions in the user program ......................................................... 105
6.2.4 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration ................................................................. 106
6.2.4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 106
6.2.4.2 Backup from online device ................................................................................................... 108
6.2.4.3 Upload from device (software) ............................................................................................. 111
6.2.4.4 Upload device as new station .............................................................................................. 113
6.2.4.5 Snapshot of the monitor values ........................................................................................... 115
6.2.4.6 Overwrite actual values of a block with snapshot values .................................................... 117
6.3 Configuring the interface module ......................................................................................... 119
6.4 Assignment of the F-destination address for fail-safe modules ........................................... 119
7 Basics of program execution ................................................................................................................120
7.1 Events and OBs ................................................................................................................... 120
7.2 CPU overload behavior ........................................................................................................ 123
7.3 Asynchronous instructions ................................................................................................... 124

Table of contents
8 Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 133

8.1 Overview of the protective functions of the CPU ..................................................................133
8.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU...........................................................................133
8.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection .................................................136
8.4 Know-how protection ............................................................................................................137
8.5 Copy protection .....................................................................................................................140
9 Configuration control (option handling) ................................................................................................ 142
9.1 Configuring ............................................................................................................................145
9.2 Creating the control data record ...........................................................................................147
9.2.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................147
9.2.2 Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU ...........................................................................149
9.2.3 Control data record for an interface module .........................................................................151
9.2.4 Feedback data record for interface modules ........................................................................155
9.2.5 Data records and functions ...................................................................................................157
9.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU ....................................158
9.4 Behavior during operation .....................................................................................................162
9.5 Examples of configuration control .........................................................................................163
10 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 168
10.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................168
10.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO ................................................................170
10.2.1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller ......................................................................................170
10.2.2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device .............................................................................................172
10.2.3 ET 200SP as an IO device ...................................................................................................174
10.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP ...............................................................175
10.3.1 ET 200SP as a DP master ....................................................................................................175
10.3.2 ET 200SP as I-slave .............................................................................................................177
10.3.3 ET 200SP as a DP slave ......................................................................................................179
10.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots ............................................................................180
10.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU...................................................180
10.6 Operating modes of the CPU ................................................................................................182
10.6.1 STARTUP mode ...................................................................................................................182
10.6.2 STOP mode ..........................................................................................................................185
10.6.3 RUN mode ............................................................................................................................185
10.6.4 Operating mode transitions ...................................................................................................186
10.7 CPU memory reset ...............................................................................................................187
10.7.1 Automatic memory reset .......................................................................................................188
10.7.2 Manual memory reset ...........................................................................................................189
10.8 Reassigning parameters during operation ............................................................................190
10.9 Identification and maintenance data .....................................................................................191
10.9.1 Reading out and entering I&M data ......................................................................................191
10.9.2 Data record structure for I&M data .......................................................................................193
10.10 Shared commissioning of projects ........................................................................................195

Table of contents
11 SIMATIC memory card.........................................................................................................................196

11.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview ....................................................................................... 196
11.2 Setting the card type ............................................................................................................ 201
11.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards ......................................................................... 202
12 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................203
12.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules ................................................................................... 203
12.2 Changing the type of an I/O module .................................................................................... 206
12.3 Replacing an I/O module ..................................................................................................... 208
12.4 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit ........................................................................ 209
12.5 Firmware update .................................................................................................................. 211
12.6 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings ...................................... 217
12.6.1 Resetting the CPU to factory settings .................................................................................. 217
12.6.2 Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings .......................................... 219
12.6.3 Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET
button ................................................................................................................................... 220
12.7 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules .................................................................................. 222
13 Test functions and eliminating problems ...............................................................................................224
13.1 Test functions ....................................................................................................................... 224
13.2 Reading out/saving service data .......................................................................................... 227
14 Technical specifications .......................................................................................................................229
14.1 Standards and approvals ..................................................................................................... 230
14.2 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................................. 235
14.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules .............................................................. 237
14.4 Shipping and storage conditions .......................................................................................... 239
14.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions .............................................................. 239
14.6 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ........... 241
14.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres .................................... 242
A Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................................243
A.1 Shield connector .................................................................................................................. 243
A.2 Labeling strip ........................................................................................................................ 243
A.3 Reference identification labels ............................................................................................. 244
B Accessories/spare parts .......................................................................................................................245
B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules ................................ 248
C Calculating the leakage resistance .......................................................................................................249
D Service & Support ................................................................................................................................251
Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................254
Index ...................................................................................................................................................268

The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into three
areas.
This arrangement enables you to access the specific content you require.
Basic information
The system manual describes in detail the configuration, installation, wiring and
commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP. distributed I/O system. The STEP 7 online help
supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server, designing
interference-free controllers.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and supplements to the manuals are documented in a Product Information.

Guide to documentation
Manual Collection ET 200SP

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
You can find the Manual Collection on the Internet
My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
Applications examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus in individual products.
You can find application examples on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/ae).
CAx Download Manager

The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your CAx or CAe
systems.
You configure your own download package with a few clicks.
In doing so you can select:
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams, EPLAN
macro files
● Manuals, characteristics, operating manuals, certificates
● Product master data
You can find the CAx Download Manager on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/my/ww/en/CAxOnline).
TIA Selection Tool

With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select, configure and order devices for Totally
Integrated Automation (TIA).
This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known
configurators for automation technology into one tool.
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can generate a complete order list from your product
selection or product configuration.
You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/en/simatic/tia-selection-tool).

System overview 2
2.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system?
SIMATIC ET 200SP
SIMATIC ET 200SP is a scalable and highly flexible distributed I/O system for connecting
process signals to a higher-level controller via a fieldbus.
Customer benefits of the system
Figure 2-1 SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system - Customer benefits

System overview
Area of application
Thanks to its multifunctionality, the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for
a wide range of applications. Its scalable design allows you to tailor your configuration to
local requirements. Different CPUs/interface modules are available for connection to
PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP.
SIMATIC ET 200SP with CPU allows intelligent pre-processing to relieve the higher-level
controller. The CPU can also be used as standalone device.
By using fail-safe CPUs, you can implement applications for safety engineering.
Configuration and programming of your safety program takes place the same way as for
standard CPUs.
A wide range of I/O modules rounds off the product range.
SIMATIC ET 200SP is designed with degree of protection IP20 and is intended for
installation in a control cabinet.
Configuration
The SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is installed on a mounting rail. It consists of:
● CPU/interface module
● Up to 64 I/O modules which can be plugged into BaseUnits in any combination
● A server module that completes the configuration of the ET 200SP.

System overview
Configuration example
① CPU/interface module
② Light-colored BaseUnit BU..D with infeed of supply voltage
③ Dark-colored BaseUnits BU..B for extending the potential group
④ I/O module
⑤ Server module (included in the scope of supply of the CPU/interface module)
⑥ BusAdapter
⑦ Mounting rail
⑧ Reference identification label
Figure 2-2 Configuration example of the ET 200SP

System overview
2.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?
2.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?
Fail-safe automation systems

Fail-safe automation systems (F-systems) are used in systems with higher safety
requirements. F-systems control processes and ensure that they are in a safe state
immediately after shutdown. In other words, F-systems control processes in which an
immediate shutdown does not endanger persons or the environment.
Safety Integrated
Safety Integrated is the integrated safety concept for automation and drive technology from
Siemens.
Proven technologies and systems from automation technology are used for safety systems.
Safety Integrated includes the complete safety sequence, ranging from sensor, actuator and
fail-safe modules right through to the controller, including safety-related communication via
standard fieldbuses. Drives and controllers handle safety tasks in addition to their actual
functions.
Fail-safe modules
The key difference between fail-safe modules (F-modules) and standard modules is that they
have an internal two-channel design. This means the two integrated processors monitor
each other, automatically test the input and output circuits, and switch the fail-safe module to
a safe state in the event of a fault.
The F-CPU communicates with a fail-safe module via the safety-related PROFIsafe bus
profile.
Area of application of ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

By using the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with fail-safe I/O modules, you are replacing
conventional safety engineering configurations. This includes the replacement of switching
devices for emergency STOP, protective door monitors, two-hand operation, etc.

System overview
2.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?
SIMATIC Safety F-system with ET 200SP

The figure below shows an example of a configuration for a SIMATIC Safety F-system with
ET 200SP distributed I/O system and PROFINET IO. The PROFINET IO lines can be set up
with copper cable, fiber-optic cable or WLAN.
Fail-safe I/O modules and non-fail-safe I/O modules can be combined in an ET 200SP
configuration.
The fail-safe IO controller (F-CPU) exchanges safety-related and non-safety-related data
with fail-safe and non-fail-safe ET 200SP modules.
Figure 2-3 Fail-safe SIMATIC Safety automation system (sample configuration)
Fail-safe ET 200SP I/O modules

The following fail-safe I/O modules are available for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
● Fail-safe power modules are used to supply the potential group load voltage and for the
safety-related tripping of the load voltage for non-fail-safe output modules.
● Fail-safe digital input modules detect the signal states of safety-related sensors and send
the relevant safety frames to the F-CPU.
● Fail-safe digital output modules are suitable for safety-related shutdown procedures with
short circuit and cross-circuit protection up to the actuator.

System overview
Example of a configuration with fail-safe I/O modules
① Interface module
② Light-colored BaseUnitBU..D with infeed of supply voltage
③ Dark-colored BaseUnitsBU..B for conducting the potential group further
④ I/O module
⑤ Server module (ships with the interface module)
⑥ Fail-safe I/O modules
⑦ BusAdapter
⑧ Mounting rail
⑨ Reference identification label
Figure 2-4 Example of a configuration of the ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules
Hardware and software requirements

ET 200SP fail-safe modules are supported by IM155-6PN ST interface modules as of
firmware V1.1.1, IM155-6PN HF as of firmware V2.0 and IM155-6DP HF as of firmware
V1.0.
You need the STEP 7 Safety Advanced option package V12 including HSP 54 or higher to
configure and program the ET 200SP fail-safe modules with the SIMATIC Safety F-system.
You need the F-Configuration Pack V5.5 SP10 to configure and program the ET 200SP fail-
safe modules with the Distributed Safety F-system.
You need the F-Configuration Pack V5.5 SP12 to configure and program the ET 200SP fail-
safe modules with the Distributed Safety F/FH system.

System overview
Use in safety mode only

Safety mode is the F-I/O operating mode that allows safety-related communication using
safety frames.
You can only use the ET 200SP fail-safe I/O modules in safety mode. They cannot be used
in non-fail-safe mode.
Achievable safety classes

The fail-safe modules are equipped with integrated safety functions for safety mode.
You can achieve the safety classes of the table below:
● With the appropriate parameter assignment of the safety functions in STEP 7,
● With a specific combination of fail-safe and non-fail-safe I/O modules as well as
● With a special arrangement and wiring of the sensors and actuators
Table 2- 1 Safety classes that can be achieved with ET 200SP in safety mode
Safety class in safety mode

According to IEC 61508 According to ISO 13849-1:2006
SIL2 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level d
SIL3 Category 3 (PL) Performance Level e
SIL3 Category 4 (PL) Performance Level e
Additional information
The applications and wiring for the particular safety class are described in the manuals of the
fail-safe I/O modules.

System overview
2.4 Components
2.4 Components
Basic components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Table 2- 2 Basic components of the ET 200SP
Basic component Function Figure

Mounting rail in accord- The mounting rail is the rack of the ET 200SP.
ance with EN 60715 The ET 200SP is installed on the mounting
rail.
CPU/Fail-safe CPU The (F) CPU:

• Runs the user program. The F-CPU also
runs the safety program.
• Can be used as an IO controller or I-
device on PROFINET IO or as a
standalone CPU
• Links the ET 200SP to the IO devices or
the IO controller
• Exchanges data with the I/O modules via
the backplane bus.
Additional CPU functions:
• Communication via PROFIBUS DP (the
CPU can be used as a DP master or DP
slave in combination with the CM DP
communication module)
• Integrated web server
• Integrated technology
• Integrated trace functionality
• Integrated system diagnostics
• Integrated safety
• Safety mode (when using fail-safe CPUs)

System overview
2.4 Components

Communication module The communication module CM DP
CM DP
• Connects the CPU with PROFIBUS DP
• The bus connection is an RS485 interface
Interface module for The interface module:

PROFINET IO
• Can be used as IO device on
PROFINET IO
• Links the ET 200SP with the IO controller
the backplane bus.
Interface module for The interface module:

PROFIBUS DP
• Can be used as DP slave on PROFIBUS
DP
• Links the ET 200SP with the DP master
the backplane bus.

System overview
2.4 Components

BusAdapter The BusAdapters allow free selection of the
connection technology for PROFINET IO. The
following versions are available for
PROFINET CPU/interface modules:
• For standard RJ45 connector (BA 2×RJ45)
①
• For direct connection of the bus cable
(BA 2×FC) ②
• For POF/PCF fiber-optic cable (BA
2xSCRJ) ③
• As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-
optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA
SCRJ/RJ45) ④
• As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-
optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus
cable (BA SCRJ/FC) ⑤
• For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC) ⑥
• As media converter for glass fiber-optic
cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA LC/RJ45)
⑦
• As media converter for glass fiber-optic
cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus cable
(BA LC/FC) ⑧
For mixed ET 200SP/ET 200AL configuration,

you require the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
① (plugged into the BaseUnit BU-Send).
Connect the bus cable for ET-Connection to
the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.

System overview
2.4 Components

BaseUnit The BaseUnits provide the electrical and me-
chanical connection of the ET 200SP mod-
ules. Insert the I/O modules onto the
BaseUnits.
Suitable BaseUnits are available in each case
for the different requirements (see Selecting a
suitable BaseUnit (Page 26))
Fail-safe power module The fail-safe power module allows the safety-
related shutdown of digital output modules /
fail-safe digital output modules.
I/O module / fail-safe I/O The I/O module determines the function at the
module terminals. The controller detects the current
process state via the connected sensors and
actuators, and triggers the corresponding
reactions. I/O modules are divided into the
following module types:
• Digital input (DI, F-DI)
• Digital output (DQ, F-DQ)
• Analog input (AI, F-AI)
• Analog output (AQ)
• Technology module (TM)
• Communication module (CM)

System overview
2.4 Components

BU cover Insert the BU cover on the BaseUnits:
• Whose slots are not occupied by I/O mod-
ules
• Whose slots have been reserved for future
expansion (as empty slots).
You can keep a reference identification label
for the planned I/O module inside the BU
cover.
There are two versions:
• For BaseUnits with a width of 15 mm ①
• For BaseUnits with a width of 20 mm ②
Server module The server module completes the configura-
tion of the ET 200SP. The server module
includes holders for 3 spare fuses
(5 × 20 mm).
The server module ships with the
CPU/interface module.
Coding element The coding element codes the I/O module

with the BaseUnit.
• Mechanical coding element ①: Ensures
the coding
• Electronic coding element ②: This version
also has an electronic, rewritable memory
for module-specific configuration data
(such as the F-destination address for fail-
safe modules, parameter data for the IO
link master).

System overview
2.4 Components
Accessories of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Table 2- 3 Accessories of the ET 200SP
Accessories Function Figure

24 V DC connector Applying the 24 V DC supply at the connector
and connection with the IM.
Shield connection The shield connection allows the low-

impedance contacting of cable shields with
minimum installation times.
Labeling strips Attach the labeling strips to the modules for

system-specific labeling of the ET 200SP. The
labeling strips can be printed.
The labeling strips can be ordered as acces-
sories (Page 245) on a roll for thermal transfer
printers or as DIN A4 format sheets for laser
printers.
Reference identification The labels enable the reference identification
labels labeling of the ET 200SP components.
The labels can be ordered on a mat for ther-
mal transfer and inkjet printers as accessories
(Page 245).
Color identification labels The color identification labels are module-
specific and can be ordered for the process
terminals, AUX terminals and additional termi-
nals as accessories (Page 245).

3.1 Selecting a suitable BaseUnit
Overview
The BaseUnits (BU) are classified according to different types. Each BaseUnit type is
characterized by properties that match specific I/O modules (see the following tables and
images).
The BU type can be recognized by the last two digits of the article number of an I/O module.
Note
A complete overview of the possible combinations between BaseUnits and I/O modules is
available in the Product information on documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73021864).
Table 3- 1 Selection of a suitable BaseUnit
Selecting a BaseUnit I/O module Examples of suitable I/O modules for BU types
(example) I/O module (example) BaseUnit
BU type A0 Digital, fail-safe, DI 16×24VDC ST BU15-P16+A0+2D
See Digital, fail-safe, technology or com- (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0) (6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0)
communication, tech- munication module
nology or analog • 6ES7...A0
modules without tem-
• 24 V DC
perature measure-
ment (Page 29) • 15 mm wide
Analog module with- AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
out temperature (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
measurement**
• 6ES7...A1
• 24 V DC
• 15 mm wide
BU type A1 Analog module with AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4- BU15-
See Analog modules temperature meas- wire HF P16+A0+2D/T(6ES7193-
with temperature urement* (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) 6BP00-0DA1)
measurement • 6ES7...A1
(Page 30)
• 24 V DC
• 15 mm wide

Application planning
Selecting a BaseUnit I/O module Examples of suitable I/O modules for BU types
(example) I/O module (example) BaseUnit
BU type B0 Digital output module RQ 4×120VDC- BU20-P12+A4+0B
(BU..B, dark-colored with relay 230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...B0 (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
• up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type B1 Digital modules DI 4×120..230VAC ST BU20-P12+A0+4B
(BU..B, dark-colored (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1)
• 6ES7...B1
BaseUnit)
• up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type C0 Fail-safe power mod- CM AS-i Master ST BU20-P6+A2+4D
(BU..D, light-colored ule (3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...C0
• 24 V DC
• 20 mm wide
CM AS-
i Master ST/F-
CM AS-i Safety ST
• 6ES7...C1
• up to 30 V DC
• 20 mm wide
BU type C1 F-CM AS-i Safety ST F-CM AS-i Safety ST BU20-P6+A2+4B
(BU..B, dark-colored (3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1) (6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1)
BaseUnit) • 6ES7...C1
• up to 30 V DC
• 20 mm wide
BU type D0 AI Energy Meter ST AI Energy Meter ST BU20-P12+A0+0B
• 6ES7...D0 (6ES7134-6PA00-0BD0) (6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0)
• up to 400 V AC
• 20 mm wide
BU type F0 F- F- BU20-P8+A4+0B
RQ 1×24VDC/24..230 RQ 1×24VDC/24..230VA (6E7193-6BP20-0BF0)
VAC/5A C/5A
(6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0)
• 6ES7...F0
• up to 230 V AC
• 20 mm wide
* For compensation of the reference junction temperature for thermocouples. The BU type A1 is re-
quired if measuring the reference junction temperature with an internal temperature sensor or if
you need the 2×5 additional terminals.
** Analog modules with temperature measurement can be plugged on BU type A0.

Additional information on the functional assignment of the terminals and on the associated
BaseUnits can be found in the
● Manual for the relevant I/O module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
● BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521) manual.

3.1.1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without

temperature measurement
Selection of a suitable BaseUnit
① Light-colored BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from adja-
cent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light-colored BaseUnit
for feeding the supply voltage L+.
Exception: If you insert an AC I/O module or an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the
first BaseUnit in the ET 200SP configuration can be a dark-colored BaseUnit. The requirement
is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
Dark-colored BaseUnit: Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the adjacent
module on the left.
② AUX terminal: 10 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 24 V DC/10 A or as pro-
tective conductors.
Example: Multiple cable connection for DI 8×24VDC ST
Figure 3-1 Digital, fail-safe, communication, technology or analog modules without temperature
measurement

3.1.2 Analog modules with temperature measurement
Selection of a suitable BaseUnit
① Light-colored BaseUnit: Configuration of a new potential group, electrical isolation from adja-
cent module on the left. The first BaseUnit of the ET 200SP is usually a light -colored BaseUnit
for feeding the supply voltage L+.
Dark-coloredBaseUnit: Continuation of the internal power and AUX buses from the adjacent
module on the left.
② Additional terminals: 2×5 internally bridged terminals for individual use up to 24 V DC/2 A
Example: Sensor supply for AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST
Figure 3-2 Analog modules with temperature measurement

3.2 Hardware configuration
Maximum mechanical configuration

As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration of the ET 200SP
has been reached:
Table 3- 2 Maximum mechanical configuration
Properties Rule
Number of modules Maximum 12/32/64 I/O modules (depending on the
CPU/interface module used, see CPU
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9046643
9/133300) and Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5568331
6/133300) Manual)
The maximum configuration is reduced by 1 module for each
6 F-modules F-RQ 1x24 VDC/24..230VAC/5A (6ES7136-
6RA00-0BF0).
Backplane bus length of the maximum 1 m mounting width (without CPU/interface module,
ET 200SP including server module)
Maximum electrical configuration

The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the
● Power consumption of the I/O modules
● Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules
The maximum current-carrying capability of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/ground is 10 A.
Address space
The address space depends on the CPU/interface module (see CPU
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90466439/133300) Manual) and the
interface module used (see Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual):
● For PROFINET IO: dependent on the IO controller/IO device used
● For PROFIBUS DP: dependent on the DP master used

3.3 Forming potential groups
3.3.1 Basics
Introduction
Potential groups for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are formed by systematically
arranging the BaseUnits.
Requirements
When forming potential groups, the ET 200SP distinguishes between two BaseUnits:
● BaseUnits BU...D (recognizable by the light-colored terminal box and the light-colored
mounting rail release button):
– Opening of a new potential group (power and AUX bus interrupted to the left)
– Infeed of the supply voltage L+ up to an infeed current of 10 A
● BaseUnits BU...B (recognizable by the dark-colored terminal box and the dark-colored
mounting rail release button):
– Conduction of the potential group (power and AUX bus continued)
– Pick up of the supply voltage L+ for external components or loop-through with a
maximum total current of 10 A
Placing and connecting

Each BaseUnit BU...D that you install in the ET 200SP configuration opens a new potential
group and supplies all subsequent I/O modules (on BaseUnits BU...B) with the necessary
supply voltage. The first 24 V DC I/O module to the right of the CPU/interface module must
be installed on a light-colored BaseUnit BU...D. Exception: If you insert an AC I/O module or
an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the first BaseUnit in the ET 200SP configuration
can be a dark-colored BaseUnit. The requirement is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of
V3.0).
If you want to place another BaseUnit BU...D after a BaseUnit BU...B, disconnect the power
and AUX buses and open a new potential group at the same time. This allows individual
grouping of the supply voltages.

AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus)

BaseUnits with additional AUX terminals (e.g. BU15-P16+A10+2D) enable the additional
connection of a potential (up to the maximum supply voltage of the module), which is applied
via the AUX bus.
The AUX bus can be used individually:
● As PE bar (the requirements according to EN 60998-1 apply). To comply with this
standard, a maximum of 8 I/O modules may be plugged into the corresponding potential
group.
● For additionally required voltage
NOTICE
AUX bus as PE bar
If you use an AUX bus as a protective conductor bar, attach the yellow-green color
identification labels to the AUX terminals, and establish a functional connection to the
central protective conductor connection.
If you stop using the AUX bus as a protective conductor bar, make sure you remove the
yellow-green color identification labels and remove the connection to the central protective
conductor connection again.
The AUX bus is designed as follows:

● Maximum current-carrying capacity (at 60 °C ambient temperature): 10 A
● Permitted voltage: depending on the BaseUnit type (see BaseUnit manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521))
Self-assembling voltage buses

You must feed the supply voltage L+ in via BaseUnit BU...D.
Each BaseUnit BU...B allows access to the supply voltage L+ via terminals (red/blue).

Operating principle
① CPU/interface module ⑨ Self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2

② BaseUnit BU...D ⑩ AUX bus
③ BaseUnit BU...B ⑪ Supply voltage L+ (3)
④ Potential group 1 ⑫ Additionally required voltage
⑤ Potential group 2 ⑬ Supply voltage L+ (2)
⑥ Potential group 3 ⑭ Protective conductor
⑦ Backplane bus ⑮ Supply voltage L+ (1)
⑧ Server module ⑯ Supply voltage 1L+
Figure 3-3 Placing the BaseUnits
Connecting different potentials to the AUX bus
Note
If you apply different potentials to the power or AUX bus within an ET 200SP station, you
need to separate the potential groups with a BaseUnit BU...D.

3.3.2 Forming potential groups with AC I/O modules
Introduction
The AC I/O modules of the ET 200SP are required to connect sensors/actuators with
alternating voltage 24 to 230 V AC.
Requirements
BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B (BU type B1) and
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST digital input module
● DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module
Operating principle
Connect the required alternating voltage for the AC I/O modules directly at the BaseUnits
BU20-P12+A0+4B (terminals 1L, 2L/1N, 2N). Insert the AC I/O modules on the BaseUnits.
Note
Placing the BaseUnits for AC I/O modules
If you insert an AC I/O module as the first I/O module, a BaseUnit BU20-P12+A0+4B can be
the first BaseUnit to the right of the CPU/interface module in the ET 200SP configuration.
The requirement is that you use a CPU as of V3.0 or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
• The BaseUnits BU20-P12+A0+4B do not monitor the connected alternating voltage.
Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and power rating in the AC I/O
module manuals.
• Remember to take the BaseUnit type into account during configuration.
① CPU/interface module
② 24 V DC potential group
③ BaseUnits with DC I/O modules
④ BaseUnits BU 20-P12+A0+4B with AC I/O modules
⑤ Direct voltage
⑥ Alternating voltage
Figure 3-4 Placing the BaseUnits for the AC I/O modules

3.3.3 Forming potential groups with fail-safe modules
Introduction
ET 200SP distributed I/O systems can be configured using fail-safe and non-fail-safe
modules. This chapter provides an example of a mixed configuration comprising fail-safe and
non-fail-safe modules.
Example of an ET 200SP configuration with fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules

In principle, it is not necessary to operate fail-safe and non-fail-safe modules in separate
potential groups. You can divide the modules into fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential groups
and install them.
The figure below shows an example of a configuration with fail-safe and non-fail-safe
modules within a single ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
① IM 155-6 PN HF interface module

② F-module
③ Non-fail-safe module
④ Power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST
⑤ Mixed fail-safe and non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B.
You achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe for the fail-safe modules.
⑥ Non-fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU15..D and BU15..B
⑦ Fail-safe potential group with BaseUnits BU20..D and BU15..B.
Through disconnection of the self-assembling voltage bus, and thus of the non-fail-safe mod-
ules, up to SIL2/Cat.3/PLd is possible.
⑧ Server module
⑨ Self-assembling voltage buses P1/P2
Figure 3-5 ET 200SP - example of a configuration with fail-safe modules

3.4 Configuration examples for potential groups
Configuration examples with BaseUnits
Table 3- 3 Configuration examples with BaseUnits
BaseUnits Configuration
BU15-P16+A0+2D
BU15-P16+A0+2B
BU15-P16+A0+2D
BU15-P16+A0+2B
BU20-P12+A0+0B

BaseUnits Configuration
BU15-P16+A10+2D
BU15-P16+A10+2B

Installation 4
4.1 Basics
Introduction
All modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are open equipment. This means that
you may only install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in housings, cabinets or electrical
equipment rooms and in a dry environment. These housings, cabinets or electrical
equipment rooms must only be accessible with a key or tool. Access must only be possible
for personnel instructed or authorized to work with such equipment.
Installation location
Install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system into a suitable housing/control cabinet with
sufficient mechanical strength, fire protection and at least IP54 degree of protection
according to EN 60529, and take into consideration the ambient conditions for operating the
devices.
Installation position
You can mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting
position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall. The ambient temperature may be restricted
in certain installation positions. You will find more information in the section Mechanical and
climatic environmental conditions (Page 239).

Installation
4.1 Basics
Mounting rail
Mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on a mounting rail in accordance with EN 60715
(35 × 7.5 mm or 35 × 15 mm).
You need to ground the mounting rail separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you
install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail
separately.
Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of
the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using
8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system from shifting to the side.
Note
If the ET 200SP distributed IO system is exposed to increased vibrations and shock, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx.
200 mm.
The following are suitable surfaces for the mounting rails:

● Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend these in conjunction with the mounting rails in the
section Accessories/spare parts (Page 245).
Note
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, make sure that they have the
required properties for your ambient climatic conditions.

Installation
4.1 Basics
Minimum clearances
The figure below shows the minimum clearances you must observe when installing or
dismantling the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Figure 4-1 Minimum clearances

Installation
4.2 Mounting the CPU/interface module
Installation rules
Observe the following rules:
● Installation starts on the left-hand side with the CPU/interface module.
● After the CPU/interface module or at the start of each potential group, a light-colored
BaseUnit BU..D is installed with incoming supply voltage L+.
If you insert an AC I/O module or an AI Energy Meter as the first I/O module, the first
BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system configuration can be a dark-colored
BaseUnit. The requirement is that you use a CPU or IM 155-6 (as of V3.0).
● BaseUnits BU..B (with dark-colored terminal box) follow this.
● Suitable I/O modules can be connected to the BaseUnits. You will find suitable
combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules in the section Selecting a suitable BaseUnit
(Page 26)
● The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Note
Mount the ET 200SP distributed I/O system only with disconnected supply voltage.
For fail-safe ET 200SP modules:
WARNING
Protection from conductive contamination
Taking into account the environmental conditions, the devices must be protected from
conductive contamination.
This can be achieved, for example, by installing the devices in a control cabinet with the
appropriate degree of protection.
Introduction
The CPU/interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with the fieldbus
and exchanges data between the higher-level controller and the I/O modules.
Requirement
The mounting rail is fitted.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for mounting and removing the BusAdapter)

Installation
Mounting the CPU/interface module

Watch the video sequence (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95886218)
To install a CPU/interface module, follow these steps:
1. Install the CPU/interface module on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the CPU/interface module towards the back until you hear the mounting rail
release button click into place.
Figure 4-2 Mounting the CPU/interface module
Dismantling the CPU/interface module

The CPU/interface module is wired and BaseUnits are located to its right.
To remove the CPU/interface module, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU/interface module. Remove the 24 V DC
connector from the CPU/interface module.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit. At the same time, shift the
CPU/interface module parallel to the left until it detaches from the rest of the module
group.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU/interface module or
BaseUnit.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU/interface module, swivel the
CPU/interface module off of the mounting rail.
Note
It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU/interface module.

Installation
4.3 Installing the CM DP communication module
4.3 Installing the CM DP communication module
Introduction
You need the CM DP communication module to use the CPU with a DP master or DP slave.
Requirements
● The mounting rail is fitted.
● The CPU is installed.
Installing CM DP
To install the CM DP communication module, follow these steps:
1. Install the CM DP to the right of the CPU.
2. Swivel the CM DP towards the back until you hear the mounting rail release button click
into place.
3. Slide the CM DP to the left until you hear it click into the CPU.
Figure 4-3 Installing CM DP

Installation
4.4 Installing BaseUnits
Removing a CM DP
The CPU and the CM DP are wired and BaseUnits are located to its right.
To remove the CM DP communication module, follow these steps:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move
the CPU and the CM DP parallel to the left until they detach from the rest of the module
group (clearance about 16 mm).
3. Press the mounting rail release button on the CM DP and move it to the right until it
detaches from the CPU (clearance about 8 mm).
4. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CM DP, swivel the CM DP off of
the mounting rail.
Note
It is not necessary to remove the bus connector from the CM DP unless you have to replace
the CM DP.
Introduction
The BaseUnits are used for electromechanical connection between the individual ET 200SP
components. They also provide terminals for connecting external sensors, actuators and
other devices.
Requirements
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the terminal box and the encoding element)

Installation
Installing a BaseUnit
To install a BaseUnit, follow these steps:
1. Install the BaseUnit on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the BaseUnit backwards until you hear it click into the mounting rail.
3. Slide the BaseUnit parallel to the left until you hear it click into the preceding
CPU/interface module or BaseUnit.
Figure 4-4 Installing a BaseUnit

Installation
Removing a BaseUnit
To remove a BaseUnit, follow these steps:
The BaseUnit is wired and there are other BaseUnits to its right and left.
To remove a specific BaseUnit, move the neighboring modules. As soon as you have
created a clearance of about 8 mm from the neighboring BaseUnits, you can remove the
BaseUnit.
Note
The terminal box can be replaced without removing the BaseUnit. Refer to section Replacing
the terminal box on the BaseUnit (Page 209).
To remove a BaseUnit, follow these steps:

1. If present, turn off the supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
2. Loosen the wiring on the BaseUnit (with a 3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver).
3. Removing (from the right):
Press the mounting rail release button on the corresponding BaseUnit. Move the
BaseUnit parallel to the right and swivel the BaseUnit off of the mounting rail while
pressing the mounting rail release button.
Removing (from the left):
Press the mounting rail release button on the corresponding BaseUnit and on the
BaseUnit to the right of this. Move the BaseUnit parallel to the left and swivel it out of the
mounting rail while pressing the mounting rail release button.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the BaseUnit.
Figure 4-5 Removing the BaseUnit (removing from the right)

Installation
4.5 Installing the server module
4.5 Installing the server module
Introduction
The server module on the far right of the assembly/line completes the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.
Requirement
The last BaseUnit is mounted.
Installing the server module

Proceed as follows to install a server module:
1. Install the server module on the mounting rail on the right next to the last BaseUnit.
2. Swivel the server module backwards on the mounting rail.
3. Move the server module parallel to the left until you hear it click into the last preceding
BaseUnit.
Figure 4-6 Installing the server module
Removing the server module

Proceed as follows to remove a server module:
1. Press the mounting rail release button on the server module.
2. Move the server module parallel to the right.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button, swivel the server module off the
mounting rail.

Wiring 5
5.1 Rules and regulations for operation
Introduction
When installing the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, special
rules and regulations need to be adhered to depending on the area of application.
This section provides an overview of the most important rules that must be observed for the
integration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in a plant or system.
Specific application
Adhere to the safety and accident prevention regulations applying to specific applications, for
example machine protection guidelines.
EMERGENCY STOP devices

EMERGENCY STOP devices in accordance with IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 0113)
must remain effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.
Excluding hazardous plant states

Hazardous operating states must not occur when
● the plant starts up again after a voltage dip or voltage failure.
● the bus communication is resumed after a fault.
If necessary, EMERGENCY STOP must be forced!
An uncontrolled or undefined startup must not occur after the EMERGENCY STOP is
unlocked.
Line voltage
Below, everything you need to consider in terms of line voltage is described (refer to section
Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
(Page 241)):
● For fixed plants or systems without an all-pole mains disconnection switch, a mains
disconnection device (all-pole) must be available in the building installation.
● For load power supplies, the configured rated voltage range must correspond to the local
line voltage.
● For all power circuits of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the fluctuation/deviation of
the line voltage from the rated value must be within the permitted tolerance.

Wiring
5.1 Rules and regulations for operation
24 V DC supply
Below you will find a description of what you need to pay attention to with 24 V DC supply:
● For buildings: In the event of danger through overload, you must provide lightning
protection measures for external lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements).
● For 24 V DC supply lines and signal lines: If there is a risk of overvoltages, you need to
take precautions to ensure internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements,
refer to section Accessories/spare parts (Page 245)).
● For 24 V DC supply: Make sure there is safe (electrical) isolation and separate cable
routing or increased insulation of the low voltage (SELV/PELV) to electric circuits with
dangerous potentials in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41.
Protection against outside electrical influences

Below is a description of what you must pay attention to in terms of protection against
electrical impacts and/or faults:
● Make sure that the system for discharging electromagnetic interference is connected to a
protective conductor with sufficient cross-section for all plants with an ET 200SP
distributed I/O system.
● For supply, signal and bus lines, you must ensure that the laying of the lines and the
installation is correct.
● For signal and bus lines, you must ensure that a wire/cable break or a cross-circuit does
not lead to undefined states of the plant or system.
Reference
You can find more information in the Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual.

Wiring
5.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP with fail-safe modules
5.2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200SP
with fail-safe modules
5.2.1 Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) for fail-safe modules
WARNING
The fail-safe modules must be operated with safety extra low voltage (SELV, PELV).
You can find more information on safety extra-low voltage in the data sheets, for example,
of the applicable power supplies.
The fail-safe modules work with a rated voltage of 24 V DC. The tolerance range is
19.2 V DC to 28.8 V DC.
Within the overvoltage range from 32 V DC to 36 V DC, the F-modules react in a fail-safe
manner and the inputs and outputs are passivated. For overvoltages greater than 36 V DC,
the F-modules are permanently de-energized.
Use a power supply unit that does not exceed Um = 36 V DC even in the event of a fault.
For more on this, refer to the information in the data sheet on overvoltage protection in the
case of an internal error. Or implement appropriate measures to limit the voltage, e.g., use
of an overvoltage protector.
All system components that can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill
this condition.
Each additional circuit (24 V DC) used in the system must have a safety extra low voltage
(SELV, PELV). Refer to the relevant data sheets or contact the manufacturer.
Sensors and actuators with an external power supply can also be connected to F-modules.
Make sure that power is supplied to these components from safety extra-low voltage as
well. The process signal of a 24 V DC digital module may not exceed a fault voltage Um in
the event of a fault.
WARNING
Even when a fault occurs, the permissible potential difference between the supply of the
interface module (bus voltage) and the load voltage must not be exceeded.
An external direct electrical connection is one way to meet this requirement. This also
prevents potential differences from causing voltage additions at the individual voltage
sources, which would cause the fault voltage Um to be exceeded.

Wiring
Power supply requirements for compliance with NAMUR recommendations
Note
To ensure adherence to the NAMUR recommendation NE 21, IEC 61131-2 and EN 298,
only use power packs/power supply units (230 V AC → 24 V DC) with a mains buffering time
of at least 20 ms. The latest up-to-date information on PS components is available on the
Internet (https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
These requirements, of course, also apply to power packs/power supply units not
constructed using ET 200SP / S7-300-/400-/1500 technology.
5.2.2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail-safe modules
General requirements for sensors and actuators

Note the following important warning regarding safety-related use of sensors and actuators:
WARNING
Note that instrumentation with sensors and actuators bears a considerable safety
responsibility. Also bear in mind that sensors and actuators generally do not have proof-test
intervals of 20 years as defined in IEC 61508:2010 without considerable loss of safety.
The probability of hazardous faults and the rate of hazardous faults of safety functions must
comply with an SIL-defined high limit. A listing of values achieved by F-modules in the
technical specifications of the F-modules is available under "Fail-safe performance
characteristics".
To achieve the required safety class, suitably qualified sensors and actuators are
necessary.

Wiring
Additional sensor requirements

General rule: To achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLe, a single-channel sensor is adequate. However, to
achieve SIL3/Cat.3/PLe with a single-channel sensor, the sensor itself must be
SIL3/Cat.3/PLe-capable; otherwise the sensor must be connected by two channels to
achieve this safety level.
To achieve SIL3/Cat.4/PLe, sensors must be connected by two channels.
WARNING
In the case of fail-safe input modules, the value "0" is output to the F-CPU after detection of
faults. You therefore need to make sure that the sensors are implemented in such a way as
to ensure the reliable reaction of the safety program when the sensor is in the "0" state.
Example: In its safety program, an EMERGENCY-STOP sensor must achieve the
shutdown of the relevant actuator when it is in the "0" state (EMERGENCY-STOP button
pressed).
Duration requirements for sensor signals
WARNING
Observe the following requirements for sensor signals:

• To ensure the correct detection of the sensor signals via fail-safe modules with inputs,
you need to make sure that the sensor signals are output for a minimum duration.
• For pulses to be detected with certainty, the time between two signal changes (pulse
duration) must be greater than the PROFIsafe monitoring time.
Reliable detection by F-modules with inputs

The minimum duration of sensor signals for F-modules with inputs depends on the
configured input delay, the parameters of the short circuit test of the sensor supplies, and the
configured discrepancy behavior for 1oo2 evaluation. The signal must be greater than the
maximum response time of the configured application. Information on calculating the
maximum response time can be found in the section "Response times" of the relevant F-
module.
The maximum permitted switching frequency of the sensor signals results from the minimum
duration.

Wiring
Additional requirements for actuators

The fail-safe output modules test the outputs at regular intervals. The F-module briefly
switches off the activated outputs and, if necessary, switches on the deactivated outputs.
You can assign the maximum duration of the test pulses (dark and light period) with
parameters.
Fast reacting actuators may briefly drop out or be activated during the test. If your process
does not tolerate this, set the pulse duration of the light or dark test correspondingly or use
actuators that have sufficient lag.
WARNING
If the actuators switch voltages greater than 24 VDC (e.g., 230 VDC), the outputs of a fail-
safe output module and the parts carrying a higher voltage must be electrically isolated
(according to IEC 60664-1).
This is generally the case for relays and contactors. Particular attention must be paid to this
with semiconductor switching devices.
Technical specifications of sensors and actuators

Refer to the manuals of the fail-safe modules for technical specifications to assist you in
selecting sensors and actuators.

Wiring
5.3 Operating the ET 200SP on grounded incoming supply
5.2.3 Crosstalk of digital input/output signals
When fail-safe digital output and input signals are in a single cable, F-DQ modules and F-
PM-E modules may experience readback errors.
Cause: Capacitive crosstalk
During the bit pattern test of the outputs or the sensor supply of the inputs, the steep
switching edge of the output drivers caused by the coupling capacitance of the line may
result in crosstalk to other non-activated output or input channels. This may then lead to a
response of the readback circuit in these channels. The module detects a cross circuit/short
circuit and performs a safety-related shutdown.
Remedy:
● Separate cables for F-DI modules, F-DQ modules, and F-PM-E modules or non-fail-safe
DQ modules
● Separate cables for F-DQ channel and F-DI channels for the F-PM-E module
● Coupling relay or diodes in the outputs
● Disable the sensor supply test if safety class requirements allow it.
Cause: magnetic crosstalk
Note that an inductive load connected to the F-DQ channels can induce coupling of a strong
magnetic field.
Remedy:
● Separate the inductive loads spatially or shield against the magnetic field.
● Configure the readback time to 50 ms or higher.
Introduction
Below you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200SP distributed I/O
system on a grounded incoming supply (e.g. TN-S network). The specific subjects discussed
are:
● Disconnecting devices and short-circuit and overload protection according to IEC 60364
(corresponds to DIN VDE 0100) and IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 0113)
● Load power supplies and load circuits.
Grounded incoming supply

In the case of grounded incoming supplies (TN-S system) the neutral conductor (N) and the
protective conductor (PE) are each grounded. Both conductors form a part of the overvoltage
concept. When a plant is in operation, the current flows across the neutral conductor. When
a fault occurs, for example, a single ground fault between a live conductor and ground, the
current flows through the protective conductor.

Wiring
Safe electrical isolation (SELV/PELV in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41)

Load current / power supply modules with safe electrical isolation are required for the
operation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. This protection is referred to as SELV
(Safety Extra Low Voltage) / PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) according to
IEC 60364-4-41.
Configuration of ET 200SP with ungrounded reference potential

To conduct interference currents, the reference potential of the CPU/interface module and
the BaseUnits BU15...D is connected internally via an RC combination (IM/CPU:
R = 10 MΩ / C = 100 nF, BU15...D: R = 10 MΩ / C = 4 nF) with the mounting rail (protective
conductor).
● This configuration conducts high-frequency interference currents and prevents static
charges.
● It is always possible to configure an ungrounded setup of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system as the ET 200SP distributed I/O system has no fixed ground connection. The
power pack/power supply module for 24 V DC must also be ungrounded and electrically
isolated.
If you want to configure the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with grounded reference
potential, connect the 1M connection of the CPU/interface module electrically with the
protective conductor.
Short-circuit / overload protection

Various measures as protection against short-circuits and overloads are required for setting
up a full installation. The type of components and the binding protective measures depend
on which IEC (DIN VDE) regulation applies to your system configuration. The table refers to
the figure below and compares the IEC (DIN VDE) regulations.
Table 5- 1 Components and protective measures
Refer to figure IEC 60364 (DIN VDE 0100) IEC 60204 (DIN VDE 0113)
Disconnecting device for controller, ① Main switch Disconnector
sensors, and actuators
Short-circuit / overload protection: ② Single-pole protection of With grounded secondary
In groups for sensors and actuators circuits circuit: single-pole protection
otherwise: all-pole protection
③
Load current supply for AC load cir- ② Galvanic isolation by trans- Galvanic isolation by trans-
cuits with more than five items of former recommended former recommended
electromagnetic equipment

Wiring
ET 200SP in the overall configuration

The figure below shows the overall configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(load current supply and grounding concept) with supply from a TN-S network.
① Main switch
② Short-circuit / overload protection
③ The load current supply (galvanic isolation)
Figure 5-1 ET 200SP in the overall configuration

Wiring
5.4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200SP
Electrical isolation
Electrical relationships
With the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, there is electrical isolation between:
● The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
● The communication interfaces of the CPU (PROFINET) or of the interface module
(PROFINET/PROFIBUS) and all other circuit components.
The figures below show the electrical relationships of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
with the CPU and the interface module. Only the most important components are
represented in the figures.
Figure 5-2 Electrical relationships for ET 200SP with CPU

Wiring
Figure 5-3 Electrical relationships for ET 200SP with interface module (using IM 155-6 PN ST as an example)

Wiring
5.5 Wiring rules
5.5 Wiring rules
Wiring rules
Wiring rules for ... CPU/interface module (supply BaseUnits

voltage) (push-in terminal)
Permitted cable cross-sections of solid cables 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
AWG*: 24 to 13
Permitted cable Without wire end ferrule 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
cross-sections of AWG*: 24 to 13 AWG*: 24 to 14
flexible cables
With wire end ferrule (with 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm2** 0.14 mm to 1.5 mm2
plastic sleeve)*** AWG*: 24 to 16 AWG*: 26 to 16
With TWIN wire end fer- 0.5 mm to 1 mm2 0.5 to 0.75 mm2 (see below)
rule*** AWG*: 20 to 17 AWG*: 20 to 18
Stripping length of the wires 8 to 10 mm
Wire end ferrules in accordance with DIN 46228 8 and 10 mm long
with plastic sleeve***
* AWG: American Wire Gauge

** Wire end ferrules without plastic sleeve: 0.25 to 2.5 mm2/AWG: 24 to 13
*** See note on Wire end ferrules
Note
Wire end ferrules
Optimum results with respect to a high-quality and permanent electrical connection with
maximum conductor pull forces at the same time can be achieved by using crimping dies,
preferably with smooth surfaces, which are provided, for example, with rectangular and
trapezoidal crimp cross-sections.
Due to the large number of crimping dies used in the industry, we can recommend others on
request. Crimping dies with a pronounced wave profile are unsuitable.

Wiring
5.5 Wiring rules
TWIN wire end ferrules for wires of the push-in terminals

Due to the space required by TWIN wire end ferrules with 0.75 mm2 cross-section, you must
ensure a correct angle for the cable arrangement when crimping the TWIN wire end ferrule
so that the cables are optimally arranged.
① Cross-section of the terminal compartment

② Crimping TWIN wire end ferrules at the correct angle
Figure 5-4 TWIN wire end ferrules
Permissible cable temperature
Note
Permissible cable temperature
The minimum permissible cable temperature must be 30°C higher than the ambient
temperature of the ET 200SP (example: At an ambient temperature of 60°C, a connecting
cable must be rated for a temperature range of at least 90°C).
You should specify other connection types and material requirements based on the electrical
characteristics of the circuits you use and the installation environment.

Wiring
5.6 Wiring BaseUnits
Introduction
The BaseUnits connect the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to the process. The following
versions of the BaseUnits can be used:
● BaseUnits (with light-colored terminal box) for opening a potential group: BU..D
● BaseUnits (with dark-colored terminal box) for extending the potential group: BU..B
● BaseUnits with additional AUX terminals or additional terminals: BU..+10..
● BaseUnits with integrated thermal resistor for compensation of the reference junction
temperature when connecting thermocouples: BU..T
① Push-in terminal
② Spring release
③ Measuring probe (suitable probes: 1 mm diameter, length ≥ 10 mm while observing the
permitted voltage category)
④ Holder for shield connection
Figure 5-5 View of the BaseUnit
Note
The pin assignment of the BaseUnit depends on the connected I/O module. Information
on the BaseUnits and I/O modules can be found in the associated manuals.
Replacement of the terminal box on the BaseUnit is described in the section Replacing
the terminal box on the BaseUnit (Page 209).
Note
Special terminal designations in the wiring and block diagrams of the I/O
modules/BaseUnits
• RES: Reserve, these terminals must remain unconnected so that they can be used for
future expansions
• n.c.: Not connected, these terminals have no function. However, they can be
connected to potentials specifically defined for a module, for example, for the laying of
unused wires.

Wiring
Requirements
● The supply voltages are turned off.
● Follow the wiring rules.
● Color identification labels (Page 94) (optional) have been applied.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver
Tool-free connection of cables: single-wire without wire end ferrule, multi-wire (stranded) with wire
end ferrule or ultrasonically sealed
To connect a wire without tools, follow these steps:
1. Strip 8 to 10 mm of the wires.
2. Only for multi-stranded wires:
Seal or crimp the wire with wire end ferrules.
3. Insert the wire into the push-in terminal as far as it will go.
Connection of cables: multi-wire (stranded), without wire end ferrule, unprocessed

To connect a wire without a wire end ferrule, follow these steps:
2. Push with the screwdriver into the spring release.
4. Pull the screwdriver out of the spring release.
Removing wires
Using the screwdriver, press the spring release of the terminal as far as it will go and pull out
the wire.
Note
When you press the spring release, you should not pull on the wire/cable at the same time.
This prevents you from damaging the terminal.

Wiring
5.7 Connecting cable shields
Introduction
● You need the shield connector to contact cable shields (e.g. for analog modules). The
shield connector conducts interference currents on cable shields to ground via the
mounting rail. It is not necessary to contact the shield at where the cable enters the
cabinet.
● Attach the shield connector to the BaseUnit.
● The shield connector consists of a shield contact and a shield terminal.
● The shield connector is automatically connected to the functional ground (FG) of the
mounting rail after installation.
Requirements
● BaseUnit with a width of 15 mm
● The shield terminal is suitable for cables with max. ∅ 7 mm each.
Figure 5-6 Shield terminal
Required tools
● Stripping tool

Wiring
Procedure
To connect the cable shield, follow these steps:
1. If necessary, connect the supply voltage L+ and ground to the BaseUnit.
2. Press the shield contact up into the mount until you hear it click into place.
3. Remove the cable insulation material around the shield terminal.
Connect the cable to the BaseUnit and place the cable in the shield contact.
4. Insert the shield terminal into the shield contact.
5. Tighten the shield terminal with approximately 0.5 Nm.
① Mount ⑤ Insulation material removed (approx. 20

mm)
② Supply voltage L+, ground ⑥ Cable to the encoder
③ Shield contact ⑦ Shield terminal
④ Flat connector for push-on contacts
(6.3 × 0.8 mm)
Figure 5-7 Mounting the shield contact

Wiring
5.8 Connecting the supply voltage to the CPU/interface module
Introduction
The supply voltage of the CPU/interface module is supplied by means of a 4-pin connector
plug located on the front of the CPU/interface module.
Power supply unit

Only use power supply units of type SELV/PELV with safe electrically isolated functional
extra low voltage (≤ 28.8 V DC).
Connection for supply voltage (X80)

The connections have the following meaning:
① Ground of the supply voltage

② Ground of the supply voltage for looping through (permitted value 10 A)
③ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage for looping through (permitted value 10 A)
④ Spring NC contacts
⑤ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage
1L+ and 2L+ and 1M and 2M are internally jumpered.
Figure 5-8 Supply voltage connection
The maximum cross-section of the connection is 2.5 mm2. A strain relief is not present. The
connector plugs provide you with the option of looping the supply voltage through without
interruption, even when it is unplugged.
Requirements
● Only wire up the connector plug when the supply voltage is turned off.
● Follow the wiring rules (Page 60).
Required tools

Wiring
Tool-free connection of cables: single-wire without wire end ferrule, multi-wire (stranded) with wire
end ferrule or ultrasonically sealed
To connect a wire without tools, follow these steps:
2. Only for multi-stranded wires:
Seal or crimp the wire with wire end ferrules.
4. Push the wired connector plug into the plug socket of the interface module.
Connection of cables: multi-wire (stranded), without wire end ferrule, unprocessed

To connect a wire without a wire end ferrule, follow these steps:
2. Using a screwdriver, press the spring opener and insert the wire into the push-in terminal
as far as it will go.
3. Pull the screwdriver out of the spring opener.
4. Push the wired connector plug into the socket in the interface module.
Removing a wire
Using the screwdriver, press the spring opener as far as it will go and pull out the wire.

Wiring
5.9 Connecting interfaces for communication

Connect the communication interfaces of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system using the
standardized connector or directly. If you want to prepare communication cables yourself,
the interface assignment is specified in the manuals of the corresponding modules. Observe
the mounting instructions for the connectors.
5.9.1 Connecting PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the bus adapter BA
2xRJ45
Introduction
You connect PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45. To
do this, screw the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45 to the CPU/interface module and insert the
PROFINET connecting cable. You can loop PROFINET through via the integrated 2-port
switch.
Figure 5-9 Bus adapter BA 2×RJ45
Required tools
Required accessories
Please refer to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide
(http://www.profibus.com).
Mounting the bus connector

Mount the PROFINET connector according to the instructions in PROFINET Installation
Guide (http://www.profibus.com).

Wiring
Procedure
To connect PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter,
follow these steps:
1. Plug the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45 into the CPU/interface module.
2. Screw the BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter to the CPU/interface module (1 screw with 0.2 Nm
tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
3. Plug the RJ45 bus connector(s) into the PROFINET port on the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45.
Bus adapter BA 2×RJ45 mounted
① CPU
② Bus adapter BA 2×RJ45
③ PROFINET connecting cable
④ Interface module
Figure 5-10 Connecting BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45 to the CPU/interface module

Wiring
Note
Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces
Only when all connected nodes are equipped with a SELV/PELV power supply (or have
equivalent protection), is it permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in
LANs (Local Area Networks).
A data transfer point is prescribed for connection to the WAN(Wide Area Network) that
guarantees this degree of safety.
5.9.2 Connecting PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BA 2xFC

BusAdapter
Introduction
You connect PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BusAdapter BA 2×FC. To
do this, screw the BusAdapter BA 2xFC to the connected PROFINET connecting cable on
the CPU/interface module. You can loop PROFINET through via the integrated 2-port switch.
Figure 5-11 BA 2×FC BusAdapter
Required tools

Wiring
● If you use Fast Connect Cable, we recommend the Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect
Stripping Tool (6GK1901-1GA00) with green knife cassette (6GK1901-1B...). This
guarantees fast and safe stripping.
● Fast Connect Cable (recommended types):
– IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2x2 (6XV1840-2AH10)
– IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (6XV1840-3AH10)
– IE FC TP Marine Cable (6XV1840-4AH10)
– IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (6XV1870-2B)
– IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (6XV1870-2D)
– IE TP Torsion Cable 2x2 (6XV1870-2F)
– FC TP FRNC Cable GP (6XV1871-2F)
– IE FC TP Food Cable GP 2x2 (6XV1871-2L)
– IE FC TP Festoon Cable 2x2 (6XV1871-2S)
● Please refer to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide
Procedure
To connect PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BA 2xFC BusAdapter, follow
these steps:
1. Strip the sleeve of the PROFINET connecting cable as follows:
Figure 5-12 PROFINET connecting cable
2. Pull back the locking slide and fold up the cover of the connection element.
3. Pull up the wire guide as far as it will go.
4. Insert the unstripped single wires of the PROFINET connecting cable (according to the
attached color coding) into the wire guide and press the guide down firmly as far as it will
go.

Wiring
5. Close the cover of the connection element and push the locking slide forwards as far as it
will go.
6. Connect and screw the BA 2×FC BusAdapter to the CPU/interface module (1 screw with
0.2 Nm tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
① Locking slide ③ Shield contact

② Wire guide ④ PROFINET connecting cable
Figure 5-13 Connection of the PROFINET IO BusAdapter BA 2×FC to the CPU/interface module

Wiring
BA 2×FC BusAdapter mounted
① CPU
② BA 2×FC BusAdapter
④ Connection element
⑤ Interface module
Figure 5-14 Connecting the BA 2×FC BusAdapter to the CPU/interface module
Note
Installation guidelines for modules with PROFINET IO interfaces
Only when all connected nodes are equipped with a SELV/PELV power supply (or have
equivalent protection) is it permitted to operate the modules with PROFINET IO interfaces in
LANs (Local Area Networks).
A data transfer point is prescribed for connection to the WAN (Wide Area Network) that
guarantees this degree of safety.

Wiring
5.9.3 Connecting PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via BA 2xSCRJ

BusAdapter
Introduction
You can connect PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module optically with fiber-optic cables
using an SC RJ connector via the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter. To do this, screw the
BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter onto the CPU/interface module and insert the SC RJ connector.
You can loop PROFINET through optically via the integrated 2-port switch.
Figure 5-15 BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter
Required tools
● Connector for PROFINET connection: IE SC RJ POF plug
● Fiber-optic cable:
– IE POF standard cable (6XV1874-2A)
– IE POF trailing cable (6XV1874-2B)
– IE PCF standard cable (6XV1861-2A)
– IE PCF trailing cable (6XV1861-2C)
– IE PCF-GI (6XV1861-2D)

Wiring
Requirements
● Prepare the IE POF cables with the connectors IE SC RJ POF Plug or IE SC RJ PCF
Plug. For detailed information, refer to the assembly instructions POF Fiber-optic Cables
with IE Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug (A5E00351141) or PCF Fiber-optic Cables with
the IE Termination Kit SC RJ PCF Plug (A5E00835119).
● When installing the fiber-optic cable, make sure the bending radius is not less than
permitted:
– IE POF/PCF standard cable: 150 mm
– IE POF/PCF trailing cable: 60 mm
● The maximum lengths of the fiber-optic cables are as follows:
– IE POF standard cable: 50 m
– IE POF trailing cable: 50 m
– IE POF standard cable: 100 m
– IE PCF trailing cable: 100 m
– IE PCF-GI: 300 m
● If the CPU/interface module is the last device of the fiber-optic cable network, the
unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be closed with a blanking plug. When the
modules ship, the blanking plugs are inserted in the PROFINET sockets of the
BusAdapter.
Procedure
To connect PROFINET IO to the CPU/interface module via the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter,
follow these steps:
1. Plug the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter into the CPU/interface module.
2. Screw the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter to the CPU/interface module (1 screw with 0.2 Nm
3. Remove the blanking plugs from the PROFINET sockets.
4. Hold the prepared connector by the housing and insert it into the PROFINET socket on
the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter until you hear it click into place. The connectors are coded to
ensure correct connection.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to eyes
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmitter diodes. The emitted light
beam could damage your eyes.

Wiring
BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter mounted
② BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter
③ PROFINET connecting cable (fiber-optic cable)
Figure 5-16 Connecting the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter to the interface module
Reusing fiber-optic cable
Note
If you are reusing fiber-optic cables, you must shorten both fiber-optic cores by the amount
of the curved lengths and reassemble the connectors. This will prevent any attenuation
losses caused by re-bent, heavily stressed portions of the fiber-optic cores.
Reference
For more information on the installation guidelines for fiber-optic cables, refer to the
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Network Manual

Wiring
5.9.4 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA SCRJ/RJ45

BusAdapter
Introduction
You connect PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter:
● Optically coupled to fiber-optic cables (FOC) with an SC RJ connector (port 1) or
● Electrically with a standard RJ45 connector (port 2)
To do this, screw the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter onto the interface module and insert the
SC RJ connector or RJ45 plug.
You can loop through the PROFINET IO via the integrated 2-port switch. You can use any
port of the BusAdapter for feeding or for looping through. The integrated media converter
converts the signals automatically.
① Fiber-optic cable SCRJ

② RJ45
Figure 5-17 BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter
Attaching SC RJ connectors
You can find more information about the required tools, accessories, requirements and
procedures in the section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×SCRJ
BusAdapter (Page 74).
Connecting RJ45 plugs

You can find more information about the required tools, accessories and procedures in the
section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter
(Page 68).

Wiring
BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter mounted
② BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter
Figure 5-18 Connecting the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter to the interface module

Wiring
5.9.5 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA SCRJ/FC

BusAdapter
Introduction
You connect PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter:
● Optically coupled to fiber-optic cables (FOC) with an SC RJ connector (port 1) or
● Electrically with direct connection of the Fast Connect bus cable (port 2)
To do this, screw the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter with the attached Fast Connect bus cable
onto the interface module and insert the SC RJ connector.
① Fiber-optic cable SCRJ

② FastConnect FC
Figure 5-19 BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter
Attaching SC RJ connectors
procedures in the section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×SCRJ
Connecting a Fast Connect bus cable

section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×FC BusAdapter
(Page 70).

Wiring
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter mounted
② BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter
Figure 5-20 Connecting the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter to the interface module

Wiring
5.9.6 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA 2xLC BusAdapter
Introduction
Via the BA 2xLC BusAdapter, you connect the PROFINET IO to the interface module
optically with fiber-optic cables using an LC connector. To do this, screw the BA 2xLC
BusAdapter onto the interface module and insert the LC connector. You can loop PROFINET
through optically via the integrated 2-port switch.
Figure 5-21 BA 2xLC BusAdapter
Required tools
● If you prepare the FC FO cable with the IE FC FO LC plug, we recommend the FC FO
termination kit (LC) (6GK1900-0RL00-0AA0). You can cleave the glassfiber precisely
using the FC FO termination kit (LC).
CAUTION
Cleaving the glassfiber
• Wear protective glasses during the cleaving process.
• Dispose of the remaining fibers in a suitable waste container.
● Connector for PROFINET connection: IE FC FO LC Plug (10 duplex plugs: 6GK1900-

1RB00-2AB0)
● Fiber-optic cable:
– IE FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230) (6XV1847-2A)
– IE FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230) (6XV1847-2C)
– IE FC FO Robust Cable (6XV1873-5Rxx)
– IE FC FO Standard Cable (6XV1873-3Axx)

Wiring
Requirements
● Prepare the IE FC FO cable with the IE FC FO LC plug connectors. For detailed
instructions, refer to the assembly instructions Preparing IE FC FO Cable with the plug-in
connector IE FC FO LC Plug (A5E36312721).
● When installing the fiber-optic cable, make sure the bending radius is not less than
permitted:
– IE FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230): 70 mm
– IE FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230) (6XV1847-2C): 88 mm
● The maximum lengths of the fiber-optic cables are as follows:
– IE FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230): 2 km
– IE FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230): 2 km
● When the interface module is the last device of the fiber-optic cable network, the
unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be closed with a blanking plug. When the
modules ship, the blanking plugs are inserted in the PROFINET sockets of the
BusAdapter.
Procedure
To connect PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA 2xLC BusAdapter, follow these
steps:
1. Plug the BA 2xLC BusAdapter into the interface module.
2. Screw the BA 2xLC BusAdapter to the interface module (1 screw with 0.2 Nm tightening
torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
3. Remove the blanking plugs from the PROFINET sockets.
4. Hold the prepared connector by the housing and insert it into the PROFINET socket on
the BA 2xLC BusAdapter until you hear it click into place. The connectors are coded to
ensure correct connection.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to eyes
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmitter diodes. The emitted light
beam could damage your eyes.

Wiring
BA 2xLC BusAdapter mounted
② BA 2xLC BusAdapter
③ PROFINET glassfiber connecting cable
Figure 5-22 Connecting the BA 2xLC BusAdapter to the interface module
Reusing fiber-optic cable
Note
If you are reusing fiber-optic cables, you must shorten both fiber-optic cores by the amount
of the curved lengths and reassemble the connectors. This will prevent any attenuation
losses caused by re-bent, heavily stressed portions of the fiber-optic cores.
Reference
For more information on the installation guidelines for fiber-optic cables, refer to the
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Network Manual

Wiring
5.9.7 Connecting PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA LC/RJ45

BusAdapter
Introduction
You connect PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter:
● Optically coupled to glass fiber-optic cables with an LC connector (port 1) or
● Electrically with a standard RJ45 connector (port 2)
To do this, screw the BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter onto the interface module and insert the LC
connector or RJ45 plug.
① Glass fiber-optic cable LC

② RJ45
Figure 5-23 BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter
Attaching LC connectors
procedures in the section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×LC
Connecting RJ45 plugs

section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter
(Page 68).

Wiring
BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter mounted
② BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter
Figure 5-24 Connecting the BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter to the interface module

Wiring
5.9.8 Connecting PROFINET IO to interface module via BA LC/FC BusAdapter
Introduction
You connect PROFINET IO to the interface module via the BA LC/FC BusAdapter:
● Optically coupled to glass fiber-optic cables with an LC connector (port 1) or
● Electrically with direct connection of the Fast Connect bus cable (port 2)
To do this, screw the BA LC/FC BusAdapter with the attached Fast Connect bus cable onto
the interface module and insert the LC connector.
① Glass fiber-optic cable LC

② FastConnect FC
Figure 5-25 BA LC/FC BusAdapter
Attaching LC connectors
procedures in the section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×LC
Connecting a Fast Connect bus cable

section Connecting PROFINET IO to an interface module via BA 2×FC BusAdapter
(Page 70).

Wiring
BA LC/FC BusAdapter mounted
② BA LC/FC BusAdapter
Figure 5-26 Connecting the BA LC/FC BusAdapter to the interface module
5.9.9 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU
Introduction
You use the RJ-45 bus connector to connect PROFINET IO (port P3) directly to the CPU.
● Cable ties with standard width of 2.5 mm or 3.6 mm for strain relief
● Please observe the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide
Mounting the bus connector

Mount the PROFINET connector in accordance with the instructions in the PROFINET
Installation Guide (http://www.profibus.com).

Wiring
Procedure
Insert the RJ45 bus connector into the PROFINET port (port P3) on the CPU.
Note
Cable support and strain relief
If you are using a FastConnect RJ-45 bus connector with 90° cable outlet (6GK1901-1BB20-
2AA0), we recommend you provide strain relief for the PROFINET connecting cable. To do
so, you need a cable tie with a standard width of 2.5 mm or 3.6 mm.
Use it to fasten the PROFINET connecting cable directly after it exits the bus connector to
the intended cable support on the CPU (on the front directly below the PROFINET interface
X1P3).
① CPU
② PROFINET connecting cable
③ Strain relief (cable tie)
④ Cable support
⑤ FastConnect RJ45 bus connector with 90° cable outlet
⑥ PROFINET connector (port P3)
Figure 5-27 Connecting PROFINET IO (port P3) to the CPU

Wiring
5.9.10 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface

module/communications module CM DP
Introduction
Using the bus connector (RS485), connect the PROFIBUS DP to the interface
module/communications module CM DP.
Required tools
Procedure
To connect the PROFIBUS DP interface to the interface module / DP communication module
CM DP, follow these steps:
1. Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the bus connector.
2. Plug the bus connector into the PROFIBUS DP connector.
3. Securely tighten the fixing screws of the bus connector (0.3 Nm).
② PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector
③ PROFIBUS connecting cable
④ Communications module CM DP
Figure 5-28 Connect PROFIBUS DP to the interface module/communications module CM DP

Wiring
5.10 Plugging in I/O modules and BU covers
Reference
You can find additional information on the PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector in the
corresponding product information on the Internet
5.10 Plugging in I/O modules and BU covers
Introduction
● The I/O modules are plugged into the BaseUnits. They are self-coding and type-coded.
● The BU covers are fitted to BaseUnits whose slots are not equipped with I/O modules.
The BU covers have a holder for the reference identification label on the inside. For future
expansion of the ET 200SP, remove the reference identification label from the holder and
insert it into the final I/O module.
It is not possible to attach a reference identification label to the BU cover itself.
– BU cover with a width of 15 mm
– BU cover with a width of 20 mm
Requirement
Refer to the section Selecting a suitable BaseUnit (Page 26).
Plugging in I/O modules and BU covers

Install the I/O module or BU cover parallel into the BaseUnit until you hear both latches click
into place.
Figure 5-29 Plugging in I/O modules or BU covers (using an I/O module as example)

Wiring
5.11 Labeling ET 200SP
5.11.1 Factory markings
Introduction
For better orientation, the ET 200SP is equipped with various markings ex factory, which
help in the configuration and connection of the modules.
Factory markings
● Module labeling
● Color coding of the module classes
– Digital input modules: white
– Digital output modules: black
– Analog input modules: light blue
– Analog output modules: dark blue
– Technology module: turquoise
– Communication module: light gray
– Special module: mint green

Wiring
● Color coding of the potential group

– Opening the potential group: Light-colored terminal box and light-colored mounting rail
release button
– Further conduction of the potential group: Dark-colored terminal box and dark-colored
mounting rail release button
● Color coding of the spring releases
– Process terminals: gray, white
– AUX terminals: turquoise
– Additional terminals: red, blue
– Terminals for self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2: red, blue
① Module labeling
② Color coding of the module classes
③ Color coding of the potential group
④ Color coding of the spring releases (by group)
Figure 5-30 Factory markings

Wiring
5.11.2 Optional markings
Introduction
In addition to the factory markings, there are also other options for labeling and/or marking
terminals, BaseUnits and I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Optional markings
● The color identification labels are module-specific labels for color coding the potentials of
the I/O modules. A color code (Color Code, e.g. CC01) is printed on each color
identification label and I/O module. The color code allows you to read which color
identification label is required for the terminals of the associated BaseUnit directly from
the I/O module. The following versions of color coded labels are available:
– Module-specific color combinations for the process terminals (see the device manuals
I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)). The
different colors have the following meaning: Gray = input or output signal, red =
potential +, blue = ground.
– For the AUX terminals in the colors yellow-green, blue or red
– For the add-on terminals in the colors blue-red
● The reference identification labels (in accordance with EN 81346) can be inserted onto
each CPU/interface module, BusAdapter, BaseUnit and I/O module. This makes it
possible to create a fixed assignment between the reference identification label of the
BaseUnit and the I/O module.
With the standard plotter setting, the reference identification label is suitable for automatic
labeling with E-CAD systems.

Wiring
● The labeling strips can be inserted in the CPU/interface module, I/O module and BU
cover and allow identification of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. The labeling strips
can be ordered on a roll for thermal transfer printers or as DIN A4 format sheets for laser
printers.
① Reference identification labels

② Labeling strips
③ Color identification labels
Figure 5-31 Optional markings
5.11.3 Applying color identification labels
Requirements
The BaseUnits must not be wired when you apply the color identification labels.
Required tools
3 mm screwdriver (only for removing the color identification labels)

Wiring
Applying color identification labels

Press color identification labels into the terminal box of the BaseUnit.
Note
To remove the color identification labels, you must first disconnect the wiring on the
BaseUnit and then carefully lever the color identification labels out of the holder using a
screwdriver.
① Module-specific color identification labels (15 mm) for the process terminals (see I/O module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) Manual)
② Color identification labels (15 mm) for the 10 AUX terminals
③ Color identification labels (15 mm) for the 10 add-on terminals
④ Color identification labels (20 mm) for the 4 AUX terminals
⑤ Color identification labels (20 mm) for the 2 AUX terminals
Figure 5-32 Applying color identification labels
NOTICE
AUX bus as PE bar
If you use an AUX bus as a protective conductor (PE), attach the yellow-green color
identification labels to the AUX terminals.
If you stop using the AUX terminals as a protective conductor bar, remove the yellow-green
color identification labels and make sure that the system is still protected.

Wiring
5.11.4 Applying labeling strips
Procedure
Proceed as follows to install a labeling strip:
1. Label the strips.
2. Insert the labeling strip into the interface module or I/O module.
5.11.5 Applying reference identification labels
Procedure
Proceed as follows to install a reference identification label:
1. Break off the reference identification labels from the sheet.
2. Insert the reference identification labels into the opening on the CPU/interface module,
BusAdapter, BaseUnit and I/O module. The opening is located on the top of the BaseUnit
or I/O module.
Note
Reference identification label
The printable side of the reference identification label must be facing forward.
① Reference identification labels

② Opening for label
Figure 5-33 Applying reference identification labels

Configuring 6
6.1 Configuring ET 200SP
Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is configured and assigned parameters with STEP 7
(CPU/interface module, I/O modules and server module) or using configuration software of a
third-party manufacturer (interface module, I/O modules and server module).
"Configuring" is understood to mean arranging, setting and networking devices and modules
within the device or network view. STEP 7 represents modules and module racks
graphically. Just like "real" module racks, the device view allows the insertion of a defined
number of modules.
When the modules are plugged, STEP 7 automatically assigns the addresses and a unique
hardware identifier. You can change the addresses later. The hardware identifiers cannot be
changed.
When the automation system is started, the CPU/interface module compares the configured
planned configuration with the system's actual configuration. You can make parameter
settings to control the response of the CPU/interface module to errors in the hardware
configuration.
"Parameter assignment" is understood to mean setting the properties of the components
used. During parameter assignment, the hardware parameters are set and the settings for
data exchange are made:
● Properties of the modules to which parameters can be assigned
● Settings for data exchange between components
The parameters are loaded into the CPU/interface module and transferred to the
corresponding modules during startup. Modules can be replaced very easily because the set
parameters are automatically loaded into the new module during startup.

Configuring
Requirements for configuration of the CPU
Table 6- 1 Requirement for installing the CPU
Configuration software Requirements Installation information

CPU 151xSP-1 PN: • PROFINET IO STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of • PROFIBUS DP (optional): with the communication
V13 Update 3 module CM DP
CPU 151xSP F-1 PN:
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of
V13 SP1
CPU 151xSP-1PN (as of FW
version V1.8), CPU 151xSP
F-1 PN (as of FW version
V1.8):
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of
V13 SP1 Update 4
Requirements for configuration of the interface module
Table 6- 2 Requirement for installing the interface module
Configuration software Requirements Installation information

STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of • PROFINET IO: as of Support Package HSP0024 STEP 7 online help
V11 SP2*
STEP 7 as of V5.5 SP2 • PROFINET IO: GSD file GSDML-Vx.y-siemens-
Software of third-party manu- et200sp-"Date in format yyyymmdd".xml Manufacturer documentation
facturer (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/e
n/19698639/130000)
• PROFIBUS DP: GSD file SI0xxxxx.gsx
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/e
n/10805317/133300)
* The TIA Portal supports GSDML specification V2.25. The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is delivered with a GSD file
based on specification V2.3. The GSD file can be installed in the TIA Portal and used without restrictions.

Configuring
Configuration of the ET 200SP

See the STEP 7 online help or the documentation of the configuration software
manufacturer.
Note
For I/O modules that are installed on a BaseUnit BU..D (light-colored BaseUnit), you always
have to set the parameter "Potential group" to "Enable new potential group". If you do not set
this parameter correctly, the CPU/interface module goes to STOP and generates a
parameter error.
Note
For PROFIBUS with configuration via GSD file
In the configuration software, you must set for the BU covers whether these are on a light-
colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.

Configuring
6.2 Configuring the CPU
6.2.1 Reading out the configuration
Reading out the configuration of an existing station

When a connection exists to a CPU, you can load the configuration of this CPU (including
possibly present modules) from the device into your project. To do this, create a new project
and configure an "Unspecified CPU".
Figure 6-1 Unspecified CPU in the device view
In the device view (or in the network view), select the "Hardware detection" command in the
"Online" menu.
Figure 6-2 Hardware detection in the Online menu

Configuring
You can also double-click the CPU and click "Detect" in the message.
Figure 6-3 Hardware detection message in the device view
After you have selected the CPU and the PG/PC interface in the "Hardware detection for
PLC_x" dialog and have clicked the "Detect" button, STEP 7 loads the hardware
configuration including the modules from to the CPU into your project.
Figure 6-4 Result of the hardware detection in the device view
STEP 7 assigns a valid default parameter assignment for all modules. You can change the
parameter assignment subsequently.
Properties of central modules

The properties of the CPUs have special significance for system behavior. You can set the
following for a CPU using STEP 7:
● Startup behavior
● Parameter assignment of the interface(s), for example, IP address, subnet mask
● Web server, e.g. activation, user administration, and languages
● Cycle times, e.g. maximum cycle time
● System and clock memory
● Protection level for access protection with assigned password parameter
● Time-of-day settings (daylight saving time/standard time)
The properties that can be set and the corresponding value ranges are specified by STEP 7.
Fields that cannot be edited are grayed out.

Configuring
Reference
Information about the individual settings can be found in the online help and in the manuals
of the relevant CPUs.
6.2.2 Addressing
Introduction
In order to address the automation components or I/O modules, they need unique
addresses. The various address areas are explained below.
I/O address
I/O addresses (input/output addresses) are required in the user program to read inputs and
set outputs.
STEP 7 automatically assigns input and output addresses when you connect the modules.
Each module uses a continuous area in the input and/or output addresses corresponding to
its volume of input and output data.
Figure 6-5 Example with input / output addresses from STEP 7
The address areas of the modules are assigned to the process image partition 0 ("Automatic
updating") by default. This process image partition is updated in the main cycle of the CPU.
Device address (e.g. Ethernet address)

Device addresses are addresses of programmable modules with interfaces to a subnet (e.g.,
IP address or PROFIBUS address). They are required to address the various devices on a
subnet, for example, to download a user program.

Configuring
Hardware identifier
In addition to the I/O addresses, STEP 7 automatically assigns a hardware identifier which is
used to identify the modules. A hardware identifier is also assigned to submodules.
The hardware identifier consists of an integer. It is output by the system with diagnostics
alarms. The hardware identifier identifies the faulty module or the functional unit.
Figure 6-6 Example of a hardware identifier from STEP 7
You also use the hardware identifier for a series of instructions to identify the corresponding
module for the particular instruction.
STEP 7 assigns the hardware identifier and the name of the hardware identifier
automatically. It cannot be changed by the user. STEP 7 assigns the hardware identifier
when you insert components in the device view or network view. The "System constants" tab
includes all hardware identifiers and their names for the selected module.
Figure 6-7 Example of an excerpt from a default tag table in STEP 7
You will find the hardware identifiers and names of all modules in the "Default tag table" of
the PLC tags. The entries in the "Default tag table" of the PLC tags cannot be changed
either.

Configuring
6.2.3 Process images and process image partitions
6.2.3.1 Process image - overview
Process image of the inputs and outputs

The process image is a memory area of the CPU and includes an image of the signal states
of the input/output modules. At the start of the cyclic program, the CPU transfers the signal
states of the input modules to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclic
program, the CPU transfers the process image of the outputs as a signal state to the output
modules. You access this process image memory area in the user program by addressing
the operand areas inputs (I) and outputs (O).
Advantages of the process image

A process image offers the advantage that you can access a consistent image of the
process signals during cyclic program execution. If a signal state at an input module changes
during program processing, the signal state is retained in the process image. The process
image is not updated until the next cycle.
You can only assign the addresses of a module to a single process image partition.
32 process image partitions

The overall process image is subdivided into up to 32 process image partitions (PIP).
The user program updates the PIP 0 in each program cycle (automatic update). The PIP 0 is
assigned to OB 1.
You can assign the process image partitions PIP 1 to PIP 31 to the other OBs during
configuration of the input/output modules in STEP 7.

Configuring
6.2.3.2 Automatically updating process image partitions

You can assign one process image partition to each organization block. In this case, the user
program automatically updates the process image partition. The exceptions are PIP 0 and
isochronous OBs.
Updating the process image partition

The process image partition is divided into two parts:
● Process image partition of the inputs (PIPI)
● Process image partition of the outputs (PIPQ)
The CPU always updates/reads the process image partition of the inputs (PIPI) before
processing of the associated OB. The CPU outputs the process image of the outputs (PIPQ)
at the end of the OB.
The figure below illustrates the updating of the process image partitions.
Figure 6-8 Updating process image partitions
6.2.3.3 Update process image partitions in the user program

As an alternative to the automatic updating of process image partitions, you can update
process images with the "UPDAT_PI" instruction or the "UPDAT_PO" instruction. In STEP 7,
these instructions are available on the "Instructions" task card under "Extended instructions".
They can be called from any point in the program.
Requirements for updating process image partitions with the "UPDAT_PI" and "UPDAT_PO"
instructions:
● The process image partitions are not allowed to be assigned to any OB, which means
they are not allowed to be automatically updated.
● PIP 0 (automatic update) can likewise not be updated with the "UPDAT_PI" and
"UPDAT_PO" instructions.
UPDAT_PI: Update the process image partition of the inputs

With this instruction you read the signal states from the input modules into the process
image partition of the inputs (PIPI).
UPDAT_PO: Update the process image partition of the outputs

With this instruction you transfer the process image partition of the outputs to the output
modules.

Configuring
Direct I/O access to the inputs and outputs of the module

You also have direct read and write access to the I/O, as an alternative to access via the
process image, should direct access be required for programming reasons.
Reference
Additional information on process image partitions is available in the function manual, Cycle
and response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193558).
6.2.4 Backing up and restoring the CPU configuration
6.2.4.1 Overview
Backup from online device

You will make a number of changes to your plant over time, for example, add new devices,
replace existing devices or adapt the user program. If these changes result in undesirable
behavior, you can restore the plant to an earlier state. Before you load a changed
configuration to the CPU, first use the option "Backup from online device" to create a
complete backup of the current device status.
Upload from device (software)

With the option "Upload from device (software)", you load the software project data from the
CPU to an existing CPU in the project.
Upload device as new station

If you are operating a new programming device/PC in the plant, the STEP 7 project that was
used to create the plant configuration might not be available. In this case you can use the
option "Upload device as new station" to load the device's data into a project in your PG/PC.
Snapshot of the monitor values

You can use the option "Snapshot of the monitor values" to backup the current values of the
data block, in order to be able to restore the current values if necessary at a later date.

Configuring
Overview of backup types

The table below shows the backup of CPU data depending on the selected type of backup
and its specific characteristics:
Backup from online Upload from device Upload device as Snapshot of the
device (software) new station monitor values
Actual values of all DBs ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(global and instance data blocks)*
Blocks of the type OB, FC, FB and ✓ ✓ ✓ --
DB
PLC tags ✓ ✓ ✓ --
(tag names and constant names)
Technology objects ✓ ✓ ✓ --
Hardware configuration ✓ -- ✓ --
Actual values (bit memories, tim- ✓ -- -- --
ers, counters)*
Contents of the SIMATIC memory ✓ -- -- --
card
Archives, recipes ✓ -- -- --
Entries in the diagnostics buffer -- -- -- --
Current time -- -- -- --
Properties of the type of backup
Backup possible for fail-safe CPUs ✓ -- -- ✓
Backup can be edited -- ✓ ✓ ✓
Backup possible in operating mode STOP RUN, STOP RUN, STOP RUN, STOP
* Only the values of the tags that are set as retentive are backed up

Configuring
6.2.4.2 Backup from online device
Full backup of the CPU

With the option "Backup from online device" you create a full backup of the CPU in an
opened project with STEP 7. The following data are backed up:
● Actual values of all DBs
● Blocks of the type OB, FC, FB and DB
● PLC tags
● Technology objects
● Hardware configuration
● Actual values (bit memories, timers, counters)
● Contents of the SIMATIC memory card
● Archives, recipes
Note
Backup of current values
The "Backup from online device" type of backup backs up the current values of the tags that
are set as retentive. To ensure consistency of the retentive data, all write access to retentive
data must be disabled during the backup.
Actual values of the non-retentive data are reset to their start values during a transition for
STOP to RUN mode. When the CPU is backed up only these start values of non-retentive
data are then backed up.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met before you start the backup:
● The CPU has been set up in the project.
● The CPU is connected to the programming device/PC via the PROFINET interface.
Interfaces of CMs/CPs are not supported.
● The CPU must be in STOP mode.
● The hardware configuration and software to be downloaded have to be compatible with
STEP 7.
● You have the password for read access to the CPU or F-CPU, if an access level was
configured for the CPU or F-CPU.

Configuring
Procedure
To create a backup of the current configuration of a CPU, follow these steps:
1. Select the PLC station in the project tree.
2. Select the "Backup from online device" command in the "Online" menu.
You may have to enter and confirm the password for read access and confirm that the
CPU may be set to STOP mode.
Result
STEP 7 backs up the CPU saves the backup in the "Name of CPU > Online backups" folder
in the project tree. The backup is assigned the name of the CPU with the time and date of
the backup. You can rename the backup, but you cannot make any changes to the contents
of the backup.
An entry is created for each backup operation in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU.
Figure 6-9 "Online backups" folder in the project tree of STEP 7
You can create as many backups as you want and store a variety of configurations for a
CPU.

Configuring
Restoring a full backup

You can transfer to the CPU a backup made at an earlier date. The CPU restores the saved
data.
Requirements
The following requirements must be met before you start the restore:
● You have previously configured the CPU and stored a backup of the device in the project.
● The CPU must be in STOP mode.
● You have the password for read access to the CPU, if an access level was configured for
the CPU.
Procedure
To restore the data on the CPU, follow these steps:
1. Open up the folder of the device in the project tree to display the lower-level objects.
2. Open the "Online backups" folder.
3. Select the backup you want to restore.
4. In the "Online" menu, select the "Download to device" command
(you may need to enter the password for read access to the CPU)
– If you had previously established an online connection, the "Load preview" dialog
opens. The dialog includes alarms and suggests necessary actions for the download.
– If you have not already established an online connection, the "Extended download to
device" dialog opens automatically. In it, select the interfaces with which you want to
establish the online connection to the device.
5. Check the alarms in the "Load preview" dialog, and select the actions in the "Action"
column, if necessary.
WARNING
Download of backups with unknown content
If you activate the suggested actions during download and during plant operation,
malfunctions or program errors can cause severe damage and serious injuries.
Make sure that the backup contents do not include any configuration that would result in
unpredictable behavior of the plant.
6. As soon as downloading becomes possible, the "Load" button is enabled.

7. Click "Load".
The contents of the backup are transferred to the CPU and restored. The CPU is
restarted.
The "Load results" dialog opens. In this dialog, you can check whether or not the loading
operation was successful and take any further action that may be necessary.
8. Click "Finish".

Configuring
6.2.4.3 Upload from device (software)
Loading software project data from the CPU to a project

With the option "Upload from device (software)" you back up the software components from
the CPU to a project. The option uploads the following data from the CPU to a project:
● PLC tags
Requirements
Before you start with the uploading of the data from the CPU to a project, the following
requirements must be met:
Interfaces of CMs/CPs are also supported.
● The CPU is online.
● The software components that are to be loaded must be compatible with STEP 7.
● The CPU is in STOP or RUN mode.
Procedure
To upload the data to a project, follow these steps:
1. Select the required PLC station in the project tree.
2. In the "Online" menu, select the "Upload from device (software)" command.
3. In the "Upload preview" dialog window, select the check box "Continue".
4. Click the "Upload from device" button.

Configuring
Upload blocks from the CPU to a project

You use this option to load blocks from the CPU back to the offline project.
The following requirements must be met before you start to backup the blocks:
● The project associated with the user program is open.
● The blocks that are to be loaded must be compatible with STEP 7.
● The CPU is in STOP or RUN mode.
To upload all blocks from the CPU to a project, select the "Program blocks" folder in the
project tree. In the "Online" menu, select the "Upload from device (software)" command.
To upload an individual block, select the required block in the "Program blocks" folder. In the
"Online" menu, select the "Upload from device (software)" command.
When a block is uploaded, the start values from the load memory of the CPU is transferred
as start value in the offline version of the project.
A block is only uploaded from the CPU to a project if the online version of the block differs
from the offline version of the block in the project.
After you have completed the backup of blocks from the CPU, you can perform the required
changes offline and transfer the block to the CPU again. To do so, proceed as described in
the following section.

Configuring
Upload blocks from a project to the CPU

To upload one or multiple blocks to the CPU, select the "Program blocks" folder in the
project tree. Select the "Download to device" > "Software (only changes)" command from the
shortcut menu. Alternatively, select the "Download to device" command in the "Online"
menu.
The block or blocks is/are compiled consistently. The download is terminated if an error
occurs during compiling. You can only load blocks that are compiled without errors.
Note
Loading external objects
If you load blocks to the CPU which contain references to objects (other DBs, FCs, FBs,
system constants, global tags) outside the project, these blocks cannot be compiled without
errors.
WARNING
Reloading blocks while the plant is operating
Reloading blocks while the plant is operating can cause serious damage to property or
injury to persons if there are functional disturbances or program errors. Make sure that no
dangerous situations can arise before you start the actions.
6.2.4.4 Upload device as new station
Upload device as new station (hardware and software)

With this option you upload existing project data of a CPU to your project as a new station.
The option can be used, for example, to save the project data of a new plant as a new
project in your programming device/PC. "Upload device as new station (hardware and
software)" loads the following data from the CPU to your project:
● PLC tags
● Hardware configuration
Note
The type of the BaseUnit (light or dark) is not currently recognized. You need to adjust
the parameters in the properties.

Configuring
Requirements
The following requirements must be met before you can execute the option:
● The hardware configuration and software to be uploaded to the device must be
compatible with STEP 7.
● Modules present in the device from GSD (ML), HSPs, or service packs must be installed
in STEP 7 on the programing device/PC.
● A project must be open. This project can be a new (empty) project or an existing project.
Note
Upload device as new station to an existing project
When you upload a device as new station to an existing project, make sure there are no
conflicts between the name of the existing components and the components to be uploaded,
for example, the name of the CPU is already used in the existing project.
If conflicts exist, follow these steps:
• Change the names/IP addresses used in the project.
• Compile the affected stations.
• Re-start the function Upload device as new station (hardware and software)".
Procedure
To upload CPU to your project, follow these steps:
1. Select the project name in the project tree.
2. In the "Online" menu, select the "Upload the device as new station (hardware and
software)".
The "Upload device to PG/PC" dialog is opened.
3. Choose required interface type in the "Type of PG/PC interface" drop-down list.
4. Select the interface to be used from the "PG/PC interface" drop-down list.
5. Click the "Configure interface" button to the right of the "PG/PC interface" drop-down list
to adapt the settings for the selected interface.
6. Display all compatible devices by selecting the relevant option and clicking the "Start
search" command. In the accessible devices table, select the device from which you want
to upload project data.
7. Click "Load".

Configuring
6.2.4.5 Snapshot of the monitor values
Backing up actual values of all data blocks

With the option "Snapshot of the monitor values" you overwrite the start values of tags in the
offline version of a data block with actual values from the CPU. In this way, you can restore
the backed up status of the data blocks at a later date after changing the actual values.
To apply the actual values, you first generate a snapshot of tag values from the online
program. You can then apply them to the offline program.
Note
Note that the values from the snapshot are always copied. STEP 7 does not hereby check
whether all values originate from the same cycle.
The following options exist for the application of actual values from the snapshot as start
values:
● Apply the values of an opened data block
You can apply all values or only the values of the tags marked as a "Set value" as start
values in an open data block.
● Apply the values of multiple blocks in the project tree
In the project tree, you can apply all set values or all retentive values as start values.
The following requirements must be met in order to be able to back up the actual values of
data blocks:
● As least one data block has been loaded to the CPU.
● The data blocks are not write-protected.

Configuring
Apply monitored values

To apply all actual values or only the values that are marked as "set value" tags in a data
block, follow these steps:
1. Open the data block.
2. Start the monitoring by clicking the "Monitor all" button.
The "Monitor value" column is shown in the table. This shows the actual data values.
3. On the toolbar, click "Snapshot of the monitor values".
The actual monitor values are applied in the "Snapshot" column. Note here that the
monitor values can originate from various program cycles.
The following options exist to apply the actual values from the snapshot as start value in the
offline version of the data block.
● Apply individual start value
To apply an individual value as start value, select the value in the "Snapshot" column.
Use the "Copy" and "Paste" commands from the shortcut menu to copy the values and
paste them in the "Start value" column.
● Apply all values
To apply all values, click the "Copy all values from the "Snapshot" column to the "Start
value" column" button in the toolbar.
● Apply setpoint values
To apply setpoint values, click the "Copy all setpoints from the "Snapshot" column to the
"Start value" column" button in the toolbar. The selected setpoint values from the column
"Snapshot" are applied as start values.
● Apply the actual values of retentive data tags
To apply only the actual values of retentive data tags as start values, select the data
block in the project tree. In the shortcut menu, select the commands "Snapshot of monitor
values" and "Apply monitor values as start values" > "Only retain values".
● Apply actual values of multiple data blocks as start values
To apply the actual values of multiple data blocks as start values, select the data blocks
in the project tree. Select the "Snapshot of monitor values" command in the shortcut
menu. In the shortcut menu "Apply monitor values as start values" > "Only setpoints" or
"Apply monitor values as start values" > "Only retain values".

Configuring
6.2.4.6 Overwrite actual values of a block with snapshot values
Overwrite actual values with a snapshot

With the option "Copy all values from the snapshot to the actual values of the CPU" you
overwrite the actual values of a data block with momentary values. The values from the
snapshot are then written to the CPU work memory. The CPU then uses these values as
actual values in the online program.
WARNING
Changes to tag values
Changing the tag values while the plant is operating can cause serious damage to property
or injury to persons if there are functional disturbances or program errors!
• Make sure that the plant is in a safe state before you overwrite the actual values.
• Make sure that the program does not read or write the affected data during
transmission.
• You may want to use the "Modify tags" function in the watch table or in the DB editor as
an alternative.
Requirement
The following requirements must be met before you can execute the option:
● As least one block has been loaded to the CPU.
Procedure
To overwrite the actual values of a block with a snapshot, follow these steps:
1. Open the data block.
2. Start the monitoring by clicking the "Monitor all" button.
The "Monitor value" column is shown in the table. This shows the actual data values.
3. On the toolbar, click "Snapshot of the monitor values".
The actual monitor values are applied in the "Snapshot" column. Note here that the
monitor values can originate from various program cycles.
4. To apply the values, click "Copy all values from the snapshot to the actual values of the
CPU" on the toolbar.

Configuring
Dependency on the CPU mode

You can execute this function in "RUN" mode as well as in "STOP" mode. The table below
shows the reactions of the CPU in the different modes:
Table 6- 3 Reaction of the CPU depending on the mode
Action System reaction Consequences for the online program

Overwrite actual The values of all data block tags are Changing actual values can lead to inconsistencies between
values in "RUN" overwritten during operation. No dis- the program and the actual process.
mode tinction is made between retentive and If the volume of data to be transmitted is large, the values are
non-retentive values. possibly transmitted in several cycles. If the program accesses
tags before all values are completely transmitted, there is a
risk that inconsistent value combinations may be created and
processed.
The copying of the values of elementary data types can also
possibly take place over several cycles. These values are
potentially invalid until they have been completely transmitted.
Dangerous states may occur if the program accesses these
values before they have been completely transmitted.
Overwrite actual Only the actual values of the retentive Because only the data from the snapshot are transmitted,
values in tags are overwritten by the snapshot. there is a risk that inconsistent value combinations may be
"STOP" mode Non-retentive tags are initialized with created and processed.
their start values during the transition
from STOP to RUN. The values from
the snapshot are not taken into consid-
eration.

Configuring
6.3 Configuring the interface module
6.3 Configuring the interface module
Configuring
Read the STEP 7 online help and/or the documentation of the configuration software
manufacturer when configuring the interface module.
6.4 Assignment of the F-destination address for fail-safe modules

The F-destination address is saved permanently on the coding element of the ET 200SP fail-
safe modules.
Note
The supply voltage L+ must be applied to the F-module when the F-destination address is
assigned.
Note
Note the following in conjunction with configuration control:
Before you can use configuration control together with F-modules, you must assign the F-
destination address to the F-modules at the designated slots. For this, each F-module must
be inserted in the slot configured for it. The actual configuration can then differ from the
specified configuration.
For additional information on assigning the F-destination address, refer to the SIMATIC
Safety - Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) Programming and
Operating Manual and to the online help for the S7 Configuration Pack.

Basics of program execution 7
7.1 Events and OBs
Response to triggers
The occurrence of a start event results in the following reaction:
● If the event comes from an event source to which you have assigned an OB, this event
triggers the execution of the assigned OB. The event is positioned in a queue according
to its priority.
● If the event comes from an event source to which you have not assigned an OB, the CPU
executes the default system reaction.
Note
Some event sources, such as startup, pull/plug, exist even if you do not configure them.
The table below provides an overview of the start events, including the possible values for
OB priority, possible OB numbers, default system reaction and number of OBs. The table is
sorted in ascending order by OB numbers.
Types of event sources Possible priorities (default Possible OB num- Default system Number of OBs
priority) bers reaction*
Startup** 1 100, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 100
Cyclic program** 1 1, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 100
Time-of-day interrupt** 2 to 24 (2) 10 to 17, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
Time-delay interrupt** 2 to 24 (3) 20 to 23, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
Cyclic interrupt** 2 to 24 (8 to 17, frequency 30 to 38, ≥ 123 Not applicable 0 to 20
dependent)
Hardware interrupt** 2 to 26 (18) 40 to 47, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 50
Status interrupt 2 to 24 (4) 55 Ignore 0 or 1
Update interrupt 2 to 24 (4) 56 Ignore 0 or 1
Manufacturer-specific or 2 to 24 (4) 57 Ignore 0 or 1
profile-specific interrupt
Synchronous cycle interrupt 16 to 26 (21) 61 to 64, ≥ 123 Ignore 0 to 2
Time error*** 22 80 Ignore 0 or 1
Cycle monitoring time ex- STOP
ceeded once
Diagnostics interrupt 2 to 26 (5) 82 Ignore 0 or 1
Pull/plug interrupt for mod- 2 to 26 (6) 83 Ignore 0 or 1
ules
Rack error 2 to 26 (6) 86 Ignore 0 or 1
MC servo interrupt 17 to 26 (25) 91 Not applicable 0 or 1

Basics of program execution
7.1 Events and OBs
Types of event sources Possible priorities (default Possible OB num- Default system Number of OBs
priority) bers reaction*
MC interpolator interrupt 16 to 26 (24) 92 Not applicable 0 or 1
Programming error (only for 2 to 26 (7) 121 STOP 0 or 1
global error handling)
I/O access error (only for 2 to 26 (7) 122 Ignore 0 or 1
global error handling)
* If OB was not configured

** For these event sources, apart from the permanently assigned OB numbers (see column: possible OB numbers), you
can also assign OB numbers in STEP 7 from the range ≥ 123.
*** If the cycle monitoring time is exceed twice within a cycle, the CPU always switches to STOP, regardless of whether
OB80 was configured.
Assignment between event source and OBs

The type of OB determines where you make the assignment between OB and event source:
● With hardware interrupts and isochronous mode interrupts, the assignment is made
during the configuration of the hardware or when the OB is created.
● STEP 7 automatically assigns OBs 91/92 to the MC servo interrupt and MC interpolator
interrupt as soon as you add a technology object.
● For all other types of OB, the assignment is made when the OB is created, where
applicable after you have configured the event source.
For hardware interrupts, you can change an assignment which has already been made
during runtime with the instructions ATTACH and DETACH. In this case, only the actually
effective assignment changes, and not the configured assignment. The configured
assignment takes effect after loading, and at startup.
The CPU ignores hardware interrupts to which you did not assign an OB in your
configuration or which occur after the DETACH instruction. The check as to whether an OB
is assigned to an event does not take place when the associated event occurs, but only
when the hardware interrupt actually has to be executed.

7.1 Events and OBs
OB priority and runtime behavior

If you have assigned an OB to the event, the OB has the priority of the event. The CPU
supports the priority classes 1 (lowest priority) to 26 (highest priority). The following items are
essential to the processing of an event:
● The call of the assigned OB
● The update of the process image partition of the assigned OB
● The processing of the assigned OB.
The user program processes the OBs exclusively on a priority basis. This means the
program processes the OB with the highest priority first when multiple OB requests occur at
the same time. If an event occurs that has a higher priority than the currently active OB, this
OB is interrupted. The user program processes events of the same priority in order of
occurrence.
Note
Communication
Communication always has priority 15; always assign a priority >15 so that the OBs are not
interrupted by the communication.
Reference
You can find more information on organization blocks in the STEP 7 online help.

7.2 CPU overload behavior
7.2 CPU overload behavior
Requirement
For the event scenarios considered in the following section, we assume that you have
assigned an OB to each event source and that these OBs have the same priority. The
second condition, in particular, is only for the sake of a simplified representation.
Principle of CPU overload behavior

An occurring event triggers the execution of the associated OB. Depending on the OB
priority and the current processor load, a time delay may occur before the OB is executed
when there is an overload. The same event can therefore occur once or several times before
the user program processes the OB belonging to the preceding event. The CPU treats such
a situation as follows: The operating system positions the events in the order of their
occurrence into the queue for their priority level.
To control temporary overload situations, you can limit the number of pending events that
are linked from the same source. The next event is discarded as soon as the maximum
number of pending start events of a specific cyclic interrupt OB, for example, is reached.
An overload occurs when events which originate from the same source occur faster than
they can be processed by the CPU.
More detailed information is available in the following sections.
Discarding similar events or handling them later

Below, the term "similar events" refers to events from a single source, such as triggers for a
specific cyclic interrupt OB.
The OB parameter "Events to be queued" is used to specify how many similar events the
operating system places in the associated queue and therefore post-processes. If this
parameter has the value 1, for example, exactly one event is stored temporarily.
Note
The post-processing of cyclic events is often undesirable, as this can lead to an overload
with OBs of the same or lower priority. Therefore, it is generally advantageous to discard
similar events and to react to the overload situation during the next scheduled OB
processing. If the value of the "Events to be queued" parameter is low, this ensures that an
overload situation is defused rather than aggravated.
If the maximum number of start events is reached in the queue for a cyclic interrupt OB
(Cyclic interrupt), for example, each additional start event is only counted and subsequently
discarded. During the next scheduled execution of the OB, the CPU provides the number of
discarded start events in the "Event_Count" input parameter (in the start information). You
can then react appropriately to the overload situation. The CPU then sets the counter for lost
events to zero.
If the CPU discards a start event for a cyclic interrupt OB the first time, its further behavior
depends on the OB parameter "Report event overflow into diagnostics buffer": If the check
box is selected, the CPU enters the event DW#16#0002:3507 once in the diagnostics buffer
for the overload situation at this event source. The CPU suppresses additional diagnostics
buffer entries of the event DW#16#0002:3507 that refer to this event source until all events
from this source have been post-processed.

7.3 Asynchronous instructions
Threshold mechanism for time error OB request

The cyclic interrupt OB parameter "Enable time error" is used to specify whether the time
error interrupt should be called when a specific overload level is reached for similar events.
You can find the OB parameter "Enable time error" in the properties of the OB in the
"Attributes" category.
If you activate the time error OB (check box selected), use the OB parameter "Event
threshold for time error" to specify the number of similar events in the queue from which the
user program is to call the time error interrupt. If this parameter has the value 1, for example,
the CPU enters the event DW#16#0002:3502 once in the diagnostics buffer and requests
the time error OB when the second event occurs. The CPU suppresses additional
diagnostics buffer entries of the event DW#16#0002:3502 until all events from this source
have been post-processed.
In the event of an overload, you therefore have the option of programming a reaction well
before the limit is reached for similar events and thus before the events are discarded.
The following value range applies to the "Event threshold for time error" parameter: 1 ≤
"Event threshold for time error" ≤ "Events to be queued".
Difference between synchronous/asynchronous instructions

In program processing, a differentiation is made between synchronous and asynchronous
instructions.
The "synchronous" and "asynchronous" properties relate to the temporal relationship
between the call and execution of the instruction.
The following applies to synchronous instructions: When the call of a synchronous instruction
is ended, the execution is also ended.
This is different in the case of asynchronous instructions: When the call of an asynchronous
instruction is ended, the execution of the asynchronous instruction is not necessarily ended
yet. This means the execution of an asynchronous instruction can extend over multiple calls.
The CPU processes asynchronous instructions in parallel with the cyclic user program.
Asynchronous instructions occupy resources in the CPU while they are being processed.
Asynchronous instructions are usually instructions for transferring data (data records for
modules, communication data, diagnostics data).

Processing of asynchronous instructions

The figure below shows the difference between processing an asynchronous instruction and
processing a synchronous instruction. In this figure the asynchronous instruction is called
five times before the execution is completed, for example, a data record is completely
transferred.
① First call of the asynchronous instruction, start of processing

② Intermediate call of asynchronous instruction, continuation of processing
③ Last call of the asynchronous instruction, termination of processing
④ The synchronous instruction is completely processed at each call
Duration of the complete processing
Figure 7-1 Difference between synchronous and asynchronous instructions
Parallel processing of asynchronous instruction jobs

A CPU can process several asynchronous instruction jobs in parallel. The CPU processes
the jobs in parallel under the following conditions:
● Several asynchronous instruction jobs are called at the same time.
● Sufficient resources are available in the CPU.
The figure below shows the parallel processing of two jobs of the instruction WRREC. The
two instructions are processed in parallel for a specific period here.
Figure 7-2 Parallel processing of the asynchronous instruction WRREC

Assignment of call to job of the instruction

To execute an instruction over multiple calls, the CPU must be able to uniquely assign a
subsequent call to a running job of the instruction.
To assign a call to a job, the CPU uses one of the following two mechanisms, depending on
the type of the instruction:
● The instance of the instruction (with type "SFB")
● The input parameters of the instruction identifying the job. These input parameters must
match in each call during processing of the asynchronous instruction.
Example: A "Create_DB" instruction job is identified by the input parameters LOW_LIMIT,
UP_LIMIT, COUNT, ATTRIB and SRCBLK.
The following table shows which instruction you can identify with which input parameters.
Instruction Job is identified by

DPSYC_FR LADDR, GROUP, MODE
D_ACT_DP LADDR
DPNRM_DG LADDR
WR_DPARM LADDR, RECNUM
WR_REC LADDR, RECNUM
RD_REC LADDR, RECNUM
CREATE_DB LOW_LIMIT, UP_LIMIT, COUNT, ATTRIB,
SRCBLK
READ_DBL SRCBLK, DSTBLK
WRIT_DBL SRCBLK, DSTBLK
RD_DPARA LADDR, RECNUM
DP_TOPOL DP_ID

Status of an asynchronous instruction

An asynchronous instruction shows its status via the block parameters STATUS/RET_VAL
and BUSY. Many asynchronous instructions also use the block parameters DONE and
ERROR.
The figure below shows the two asynchronous instructions WRREC and CREATE_DB.
① The input parameter REQ starts the job to execute the asynchronous instruction.
② The output parameter DONE indicates that the job was completed without error.
③ The output parameter BUSY indicates whether the job is currently being processed. When
BUSY =1, a resource is assigned for the asynchronous instruction. If BUSY = 0, then the re-
source is free.
④ The output parameter ERROR indicates that an error has occurred.
⑤ The output parameter STATUS/RET_VAL provides information on the status of the job execu-
tion. The output parameter STATUS/RET_VAL receives the error information after the occur-
rence of an error.
Figure 7-3 Block parameters of asynchronous instructions using the instructions WRREC and
CREATE_DB as examples.

Summary
The table below provides you with an overview of the relationships described above. It
shows in particular the possible values of the output parameters if processing is not
completed after a call.
Note
Following every call, you must evaluate the relevant output parameters in your program.
Relationship between REQ, STATUS/RET_VAL, BUSY and DONE during a "running" job.
Seq. no. Type of call REQ STATUS/RET_VAL BUSY DONE ERROR

of the
call
1 First call 1 W#16#7001 1 0 0
Error code (for example, 0 0 1
W#16#80C3 for lack of
resources)
2 to (n - 1) Intermediate Not rele- W#16#7002 1 0 0
call vant
n Last call Not rele- W#16#0000, if no errors 0 1 0
vant have occurred.
Error code, if errors have 0 0 1
occurred
Consumption of resources
Asynchronous instructions occupy resources in the CPU while they are being processed.
The resources are limited depending on the type of CPU and instruction; the CPU can only
process a maximum number of asynchronous instruction jobs simultaneously. The resources
are available again after a job has been successfully completed or processed with an error.
Example: The instructions RDREC and WRREC can each be called 10 times with different
instances. The number of parallel running jobs per instruction is therefore limited to 10.
If the maximum number of simultaneous jobs for an instruction is exceeded, the instruction
returns the error code 80C3 (lack of resources) in the block parameter STATUS. The
execution of the job is stopped until a resource becomes free again.
Note
Lower-level asynchronous instructions
Several asynchronous instructions use one or more lower-level asynchronous instructions
for their processing. This dependence is shown in the tables below.
Please note that with multiple lower-level instructions, only one lower-level resource is
typically occupied.

Extended instructions: Maximum number of asynchronous instructions

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running instances for
asynchronous extended instructions.
Extended instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Distributed I/O
RDREC 10
RD_REC
WRREC 10
WR_REC
D_ACT_DP 8
ReconfigIOSystem uses RDREC, WRREC, D_ACT_DP,
DPSYC_FR 2
DPNRM_DG 8
DP_TOPOL 1
ASI_CTRL uses RDREC, WRREC
PROFIenergy
PE_START_END uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_CMD uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_DS3_Write_ET200S uses RDREC, WRREC
PE_WOL uses RDREC, WRREC, TUSEND, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
Module parameter assignment
RD_DPAR 10
RD_DPARA 10
RD_DPARM 10
WR_DPARM 10
Diagnostics
Get_IM_Data 10
GetStationInfo 10
Recipes and data logging
RecipeExport 10
RecipeImport 10
DataLogCreate 10
DataLogOpen 10
DataLogWrite 10
DataLogClear 10
DataLogClose 10
DataLogDelete 10
DataLogNewFile 10
Data block functions
CREATE_DB 10
READ_DBL 10
WRIT_DBL 10
DELETE_DB 10

Basic instructions: Maximum number of asynchronous instructions

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running instances for
asynchronous basic instructions
Basic instructions CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

Array DB
ReadFromArrayDBL uses READ_DBL (see Extended instructions)
WriteToArrayDBL uses READ_DBL, WRIT_DBL (see Extended instructions)
Communication: Maximum number of asynchronous instructions

The following table shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (Open User Communication) for the various CPUs.
Open User Communication CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

TSEND 64 88
TUSEND
TRCV 64 88
TURCV
TCON 64 88
TDISCON 64 88
T_RESET 64 88
T_DIAG 64 88
T_CONFIG 1
TSEND_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TCON, TDISCON
TRCV_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
TMAIL_C uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
asynchronous instructions (MODBUS TCP) for the various CPUs.
MODBUS TCP CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

CPU 1510P F-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
MB_CLIENT uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON
MB_SERVER uses TSEND, TUSEND, TRCV, TURCV, TCON, TDISCON

The table below shows the maximum number of simultaneously running jobs for
asynchronous instructions (S7 communication) for the various CPUs. The S7 communication
instructions use a common pool of resources.
S7 communication CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

PUT 192 264
GET
USEND
URCV
BSEND
BRCV
asynchronous instructions (communication processors) for the various CPUs.
Communications processors CPU 1510SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP-1 PN

PtP communication
Port_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Send_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_Config uses RDDEC, WRREC
Send_P2P uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_P2P uses RDDEC, WRREC
Receive_Reset uses RDDEC, WRREC
Signal_Get uses RDDEC, WRREC
Signal_Set uses RDDEC, WRREC
Get_Features uses RDDEC, WRREC
Set_Features uses RDDEC, WRREC
USS communication
USS_Port_Scan uses RDDEC, WRREC
MODBUS (RTU)
Modbus_Comm_Load uses RDDEC, WRREC
ET 200S serial interface
S_USSI uses CREATE_DB
SIMATIC NET
FTP_CMD uses TSEND, TRCV, TCON, TDISCON

Technology: Maximum number of asynchronous instructions

asynchronous instructions (Technology).
Technology CPU 1510SP-1 PN

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Motion Control
MC_Power 300
MC_Reset
MC_Home
MC_Halt
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_MoveJog
MC_GearIn
MC_MoveSuperimposed
You can find additional information on block parameter assignment in the STEP 7 online
help.

Protection 8
8.1 Overview of the protective functions of the CPU
Introduction
This chapter describes the following functions for protecting the ET 200SP against
unauthorized access:
● Access protection
● Know-how protection
● Copy protection
Further measures for protecting the CPU

The following measures additionally increase the protection against unauthorized access to
functions and data of the CPU from external sources and via the network:
● Deactivation of the Web server
● Deactivation of time synchronization via an NTP server
● Deactivation of PUT/GET communication
If you use the Web server, protect your ET 200SP distributed I/O system against
unauthorized access by setting password-protected access rights for specific users in the
user management.
8.2 Configuring access protection for the CPU
Introduction
The CPU offers four access levels, in order to limit access to specific functions.
By setting up the access levels and the passwords for a CPU, you limit the functions and
memory areas that are accessible without entering a password. You specify the individual
access levels as well as the entry of their associated passwords in the object properties of
the CPU.

Protection
Access levels of the CPU
Table 8- 1 Access levels of the CPU
Access levels Access restrictions

Full access (no Any user can read and change the hardware configuration and the blocks.
protection)
Read access With this access level, read-only access to the hardware configuration and the
blocks is possible without entering a password, which means you can download
the hardware configuration and blocks to the programming device. In addition, HMI
access and access to diagnostics data is possible.
Without entering the password, you cannot load any blocks or hardware configura-
tion into the CPU. Additionally, the following are not possible without the pass-
word:
• Writing test functions
• Firmware update (online)
HMI access With this access level only HMI access and access to diagnostics data is possible
without entering the password.
Without entering the password, you can neither load blocks nor the hardware
configuration into the CPU, nor load blocks and hardware configuration from the
CPU into the programming device. Additionally, the following are not possible
without the password:
• Writing test functions
• Changing the mode (RUN/STOP)
• Firmware update (online)
No access No read or write access to the hardware configuration and the blocks is possible if
(complete pro- the CPU is completely protected. HMI access is also not possible. The server
tection) function for PUT/GET communication is disabled in this access level (cannot be
changed).
Authentication with the password will again provide you full access to the CPU.
Each access level allows unrestricted access to certain functions without entering a
password, for example, identification using the "Accessible devices" function.
The CPU's default setting is "No restriction" and "No password protection". In order to protect
access to a CPU, you need to edit the properties of the CPU and set up a password. In the
default access level "Full access (no protection)" every user can read and change the
hardware configuration and the blocks. A password is not set and is also not required for
online access.
The access level of the CPU does not restrict communication between the CPUs (via the
communication functions in the blocks) unless PUT/GET communication is deactivated.
Entry of the right password allows access to all the functions that are allowed in the
corresponding level.
Note
Configuring an access level does not replace know-how protection
Configuring access levels offers a high degree of protection against unauthorized changes to
the CPU by restricting the rights to download the hardware and software configuration to the
CPU. However, blocks on the SIMATIC memory card are not write- or read-protected. Use
know-how protection to protect the code of blocks on the SIMATIC memory card.

Protection
Behavior of functions with different access levels

The STEP 7 online help includes a table which lists the online functions that are available in
the different access levels.
Selecting the access levels

To configure the access levels of a CPU, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the CPU in the Inspector window.
2. Open the "Protection" entry in the area navigation.
A table with the possible access levels is available in the Inspector window.
Figure 8-1 Possible access levels
3. Activate the desired protection level in the first column of the table. The green check
marks in the columns to the right of the access level show you which operations are still
available without entering the password.
4. In the "Enter password" column, specify a password for the access level "Full access" in
the first row. In the "Confirm password" column, enter the selected password again to
guard against incorrect entries.
Ensure that the password is sufficiently secure, i.e. does not follow a pattern that can be
recognized by a machine.
5. Assign additional passwords as needed to other access levels if the selected access level
allows you to do so.
6. Download the hardware configuration to the CPU, so that the access level will take effect.
The CPU logs the entry of the correct or incorrect password and any changes in the
configuration of the access levels by a corresponding entry in the diagnostics buffer.

Protection
8.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection
Behavior of a password-protected CPU during operation

The CPU protection takes effect after you have downloaded the settings to the CPU.
Before an online function is executed, the CPU checks the necessary permission and, if
necessary, prompts the user to enter a password. You can only execute password-protected
functions from one programming device/PC at any time. Another programming device/PC
cannot log on.
Access authorization to the protected data is in effect for the duration of the online
connection or until you rescind the access authorization manually with "Online > Delete
access rights".
Access levels for F-CPUs

For the fail-safe CPUs, there is an additional access level in addition to the four described
access levels. For additional information on this access level, refer to the description of the
fail-safe system SIMATIC Safety Programming and Operating Manual SIMATIC Safety -
Configuring and Programming
8.3 Using the user program to set additional access protection
Access protection via user program

You can also restrict access to a password-protected CPU in STEP 7 using the block
SFC 110. You can find a description of this block in the online help under the keyword
"ENDIS_PW: Limit and enable password legitimation".

Protection
8.4 Know-how protection
Application
You can use know-how protection to protect one or more OB, FB or FC blocks as well as
global data blocks in your program from unauthorized access. Enter a password to restrict
access to a block. The password offers high-level protection against unauthorized reading or
manipulation of the block.
Readable data
If a block is know-how protected, only the following data is readable without the correct
password:
● Block title, comments and block properties
● Block parameters (INPUT, OUTPUT, IN, OUT, RETURN)
● Call structure of the program
● Global tags without information on the point of use
Further actions
Further actions that can be carried out with a know-how protected block:
● Copying and deleting
● Calling in a program
● Online/offline comparison
● Load
Global data blocks and array data blocks

You can provide global data blocks (global DBs) with know-how protection. Users who do
not possess the valid password can read the global data block but not change it.
You cannot provide array data blocks (array DBs) with know-how protection.

Protection
Setting up block know-how protection

To set up block know-how protection, follow these steps:
1. Open the properties of the block in question.
2. Select the "Protection" option under "General".
Figure 8-2 Setting up block know-how protection (1)
3. Click the "Protection" button to display the "Know-how protection" dialog.
4. Click the "Define" button to open the "Define Password" dialog.
5. Enter the new password in the "New password" box. Enter the same password in the
"Confirm password" box.
6. Click "OK" to confirm your entry.
7. Close the "Know-how protection" dialog by clicking "OK".
Result: The selected blocks are now know-how protected. Know-how protected blocks are
marked with a lock in the project tree. The password entered applies to all blocks selected.

Protection
Opening know-how protected blocks

To open a know-how protected block, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the block to open the "Access protection" dialog.
2. Enter the password for the know-how protected block.
Result: The know-how-protected block is open.
Once you have opened the block, you can edit the program code and the block interface of
the block for as long as the block or STEP 7 is open. You must enter the password again the
next time you open the block. If you close the "Access protection" dialog with "Cancel", you
will be able to open the block but you cannot display the block code or edit the block.
If you copy the block or add it to a library, for example, this does not cancel the know-how
protection of the block. The copies will also be know-how-protected.
Removing block know-how protection

To remove block know-how protection, follow these steps:
1. Select the block from which you want to remove know-how protection. The protected
block must not be open in the program editor.
2. In the "Edit" menu, select the "Know-how protection" command to open the "Know-how
protection" dialog.
3. Clear the "Hide code (Know-how protection)" check box.
Figure 8-5 Removing block know-how protection (1)
4. Enter the password.
Figure 8-6 Removing block know-how protection (2)

Result: Know-how protection is removed from the selected block.

Protection
8.5 Copy protection
8.5 Copy protection
Application
Copy protection allows you to link the program or the blocks to a specific SIMATIC memory
card or CPU. By linking this program or block to the serial number of a SIMATIC memory
card or a CPU, you allow its use only in combination with this specific SIMATIC memory card
or CPU. With this function you can send a program or block electronically (e.g. by e-mail) or
by shipping a memory module.
Copy and know-how protection

If you set up copy protection for a block, you should also assign know-how protection to the
block. Without know-how protection, anyone can reset the copy protection. However, you
must first set up the copy protection because the copy protection settings are read-only on a
know-how protected block.
Setting up copy protection

To set up copy protection, follow these steps:
Figure 8-7 Setting up copy protection (1)
3. In the "Copy protection" area, select either the "Bind to serial number of the CPU" entry or
the "Bind to serial number of the memory card" entry from the drop-down list.
Figure 8-8 Setting up copy protection (2)
4. Activate the option "Serial number is inserted when downloading to a device or a memory
card" if the serial number is to be inserted automatically during the download process
(dynamic binding). Assign a password using the "Define password" button to link the use
of a block additionally to the input of a password.
Activate the option "Enter serial number" if you want to manually bind the serial number of
the CPU or the SIMATIC memory card to a block (static binding).
5. You can now set up the know-how protection for the block in the "Know-how protection"
area.

Protection
8.5 Copy protection
Note
If you download a copy-protected block to a device that does not match the specified
serial number, the entire download operation will be rejected. This means that blocks
without copy protection will also not be downloaded.
Removing copy protection

To remove copy protection, follow these steps:
1. Remove any existing know-how protection.
4. In the "Copy protection" area, select the "No binding" entry from the drop-down list.
Figure 8-9 Removing copy protection

Configuration control (option handling) 9
Introduction
Configuration control (option handling) is used to operate various standard machine
configuration levels in one project without changing the configuration or the user program.
Operating principle of configuration control

You can use configuration control to operate different standard machine configurations with
a single configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● A station master is configured in a project (maximum configuration). The station master
comprises all modules needed for all possible plant parts of a modular standard machine.
● The project's user program provides for several station options for various standard
machine configuration levels as well as selection of a station option. A station option
uses, for example, only some of the configured modules of the station master and these
modules are inserted in the slots in a different order.
● The standard machine manufacturer selects a station option for a configuration of the
standard machine. To do this, the project need not be modified, and it is not necessary to
load a modified configuration.
You use a control data record you have programmed to notify the CPU/interface module as
to which modules are missing or located on different slots in a station option as compared to
the station master. The configuration control does not have an impact on the parameter
assignment of the modules.
Configuration control allows you to flexibly vary the centralized/distributed configuration. This
is only possible if the station option can be derived from the station master.

Configuration control (option handling)
The following figure shows three configurations of a standard machine with the
corresponding station options of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Figure 9-1 Various configuration levels of a standard machine with the corresponding station
options of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Advantages
● Simple project management and commissioning by using a single STEP 7 project for all
station options.
● Simple handling for maintenance, versioning and upgrade:
● Hardware savings: Only those I/O modules are installed that are required for the
machine's current station option.
● Savings potential in the creation, commissioning and the documentation for standard
machines.
● Simple station expansion by using pre-wired empty slots. To expand, you simply
exchange the BU cover for the new model.

Procedure
To set up the configuration control, follow these steps:
Step Procedure See...

1 Enable configuration control in STEP 7 Section Configuring (Page 145)
2 Create control data record Section Creating the control data record
(Page 147)
3 Transfer control data record Section Transferring the control data
record in the startup program of the CPU
(Page 158)
Block library "OH_S71x00_Library"

The block library OH_S71x00_Library
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/#document/29430270?lc=en-WW) is available for
download from the Internet. The block library contains data types with the structure of the
control data records for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. You can implement your
flexible automation solution inexpensively with the help of these data types.

9.1 Configuring
9.1 Configuring
Requirements
Configuration control is supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with both an ET
200SP CPU and with interface modules via PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP.
Centrally for ET 200SP CPU:
● STEP 7 Professional V13 Update 3 or higher
● CPU 1510SP-1 PN/CPU 1512SP-1 PN
● Firmware version V1.6 or higher
● All modules of the CPU must be able to start up even with different configurations.
– The startup parameter "Comparison preset to actual configuration" of the CPU is set to
"Startup CPU even if mismatch" (default setting) and the module parameter
"Comparison preset to actual module" of the module is set to "From CPU" (default
setting).
or
– The module parameter "Comparison preset to actual module" for the module is set to
"Startup CPU even if mismatch".
Distributed via PROFINET IO:
● Engineering Tool (e.g. STEP 7)
● IM 155-6 PN BA/ST/HF
● You have assigned the interface module to an IO controller.
Distributed via PROFIBUS DP:
● Engineering Tool (e.g. STEP 7)
● IM 155-6 DP HF
● You have assigned the interface module to a DP master.
● The startup parameter is set to "Operate if preset configuration does not match actual
configuration"

9.1 Configuring
Required steps
Enable the "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter when
configuring the CPU/interface module in STEP 7 (TIA Portal).
● The "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter is located in the
"Configuration control" area for an ET 200SP CPU.
● The "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter is located in the
"Module parameter" area under "General" for an IM 155-5 PN interface module.
Figure 9-2 Enabling configuration control using an IM 155-6 PN HF as an example

9.2 Creating the control data record
9.2.1 Introduction
Required steps
To create a control data record for the configuration control, follow these steps:
1. Create a PLC data type which contains the structure of the control data record.
The following figure shows a PLC data type "CTR_REC", which contains the structure of
the control data record for an ET 200SP interface module.
Figure 9-3 Creating control data record 196 using an IM 155-6 PN HF as an example
2. Create a global data block.

3. In the data block, create an array that is based on the created PLC data type.
4. In the control data records, enter the slot assignments in the "Start value" column.
The figure below shows the global data block "ConfDB". The data block "ConfDB"
contains an array [0..5] of the PLC_DataType "CTR_REC".
Figure 9-4 Data block for configuration control
Rules
Observe the following rules:
● Slot entries in the control data record outside the station master are ignored by the
CPU/interface module.
● The control data record must contain the entries up to the last slot of the station option.
● Multiple configured slots may not be assigned to the same actual slot. In other words,
each station option slot may be present only once in the control data record.

9.2.2 Control data record for an ET 200SP CPU
Slot assignment
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an ET 200SP CPU:
Table 9- 1 Slot assignment
Modules Possible slots Comment

CPU 1 Slot 1 is always the CPU
I/O modules 2 - 65 Downstream of CPU
Server module 2 - 66 The server module completes the configuration of the
ET 200SP station after the CPU/the last I/O module.

Control data record

For the configuration control of an ET 200SP CPU, you define a control data record 196
V2.0, which includes a slot assignment. The maximum slot corresponds to the slot of the
server module.
The table below shows the structure of a control data record with explanations of the
individual elements.
Table 9- 2 Configuration control: Structure of control data record 196
Byte Element Code Explanation

0 Block length 4 + (number of slots × 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment 1 in the Control element
station option Contains the information on which mod-
(always 1, because the ule is inserted in which slot.
CPU is always in slot 1) The value that you need to enter in the
5 Additional function for slot 1 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the lowing rule:
station option • If the module exists in the station
7 Additional function for slot 2 option, enter the slot number of the
8 Slot 3 of the station master Slot assignment in the module.
station option • If the module exists as empty slot
9 Additional function for slot 3 (with BU cover), enter the slot number
of the module + 128. (Example: mod-
: : :
ule as empty slot on slot 3: Enter 131
4 + ((max. slot - Server module slot Server module slot as- in the control element)
1) × 2) signment in the station
option* • If the module does not exist in the
station option, enter 0.
4 + ((max. slot - Additional function for server module slot
1)× 2) + 1 Additional function
Contains information on whether a new
potential group will be opened in the
station option - by replacing a dark-
colored BaseUnit with a light-colored
BaseUnit.
• If you replace a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit with a light-colored BaseUnit,
enter 1 as additional function.
• If you accept the BaseUnit from the
station master, enter 0 as additional
function.
* The server module must be present in the station option and must not be marked as empty slot (BU cover).

9.2.3 Control data record for an interface module
Slot assignment
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an
ET 200SP interface module:

Interface module 0 The interface module (slot 0) is not an element of the configu-
ration control, but instead controls this.
Station extension 1 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
BA-Send always on slot 1.
ET 200SP I/O module 1 - 12 for IM 155-6 PN BA Downstream from the interface module
1 - 32 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 64 for IM 155-5 PN HF
Server module 1 - 13 for IM 155-6 PN BA The server module completes the configuration of the
1 - 33 for IM 155-6 PN ST, ET 200SP station after the last I/O module.
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 65 for IM 155-5 PN HF
ET 200AL I/O module 34 - 49 for IM 155-6 DP HF For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules
66 - 81 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF

Simplified control data record (V1)

For the configuration control of interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system,
you define a control data record 196 V1.0, which includes a slot assignment. The maximum
slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server module or ET 200AL I/O
module (in a mixed ET 200SP / ET 200AL configuration).
Table 9- 4 Structure of the simplified control data record V1.0

0 Block length 4 + maximum slot Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 1
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200SP
station option Contains the information on which
5 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the ET 200SP module is inserted in which
station option slot.
: : : The value that you need to enter in the
4 + (slot server Server module slot Assignment of server mod- corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
module - 1) ule slot in the station op-
tion* • If the module exists in the station
option, enter the slot number of the
module.
• If the module exists as empty slot
(with BU cover), enter the slot number
in the control element)
• If the module does not exist in the
: : : :
4 + (first slot ET First slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
200AL - 1) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
: : : module is inserted in which slot.
4 + (last slot ET Last slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the The value that you need to enter in the
200AL - 1) station option corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
• If the module exists in the station
module.

Control data record (V2)

If you change the potential groups in the station option compared to the station master,
define a control data record 196 V2.0 for the ET 200SP interface module which contains a
slot assignment. The maximum slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server
module or ET 200AL I/O module (in a mixed ET 200SP / ET 200AL configuration).
Table 9- 5 Structure of control data record 196 V2.0

0 Block length 4 + (maximum slot x 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 of the station master Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200SP
station option Contains the information on which
5 Additional function for slot 1 ET 200SP module is inserted in which
6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the slot.
station option The value that you need to enter in the
7 Additional function for slot 2 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
lowing rule:
8 Slot 3 of the station master Slot assignment in the
station option • If the module exists in the station
9 Additional function for slot 3
module.
: : :
• If the module exists as empty slot
4 + ((server module Server module slot Server module slot as- (with BU cover), enter the slot number
slot - 1) × 2) signment in the station
option*
4 + ((server module Additional function for server module slot in the control element)
slot - 1) × 2) + 1
Additional function
Contains information on whether a new
potential group will be opened in the
station option - by replacing a dark-
colored BaseUnit with a light-colored
BaseUnit.
• If you replace a dark-colored Ba-
seUnit with a light-colored BaseUnit,
enter 1 as additional function.
• If you accept the BaseUnit from the
station master, enter 0 as additional
function.


: : : :
4 + ((first slot First slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the Control element ET 200AL
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) station option Contains information on which ET 200AL
4 + ((first slot Reserved module is inserted in which slot.
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) The value that you need to enter in the
+1 corresponding byte depends on the fol-
: : : lowing rule:
4 + ((last slot Last slot ET 200AL Slot assignment in the • If the module exists in the station
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) station option option, enter the slot number of the
4 + ((last slot Reserved module.
ET 200AL - 1) x 2) • If the module does not exist in the
+1 station option, enter 0.
Note
If a BU cover or no I/O module is plugged on a light-colored BaseUnit, you should enter 1 in
the additional function for the slot.
The function "Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" requires proper assignment of
the slots to a shared supply voltage L+ (potential group). All light-colored BaseUnits must be
known to the interface module. By entering 1 in the additional function, you make a light-
colored BaseUnit known to the interface module, even if an I/O module is not inserted.
Combination of configuration control and shared device (for PROFINET)

The configuration control function in a shared device is therefore only for the I/O modules of
the IO controller to which the interface module has subscribed. I/O modules that are
assigned to no controller or a different controller behave like a station without activated
configuration control.
You cannot make any change to the slot assignment for modules that are assigned to
another IO controller or are not assigned to an IO controller (shared device on module level).
The CPU assumes a one-to-one assignment for the modules.
If additional IO controllers subscribe to a module intended for configuration control (shared
device on submodule level), only one-to-one assignment is permitted for this module. It is not
possible to deselect such a module using the control data record (code 0 for this slot in the
control data record). This means the combination of "Configuration control" and "Shared
device on submodule level" is only possible to a limited extent.
Please note that all modules affected by the configuration control including all assigned
submodules are reset when you change the module assignment. Submodules that are
assigned to a second IO controller are affected as well.

9.2.4 Feedback data record for interface modules
Operating principle
The feedback data record informs you about the accuracy of the module assignment and
gives you the option of detecting assignment errors in the control data record. The feedback
data record is mapped via a separate data record 197 V2.0. The feedback data record exists
only with configured configuration control.
Slot assignment
The feedback data record refers to the configured station configuration and always includes
the maximum configuration limits. The maximum configuration limits comprise 13/49/81 slots
depending on the interface module in use. Partial reading of the feedback data record is
possible.
The following table shows the slot assignment of the modules:

Station extension 1 For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules, BA-Send is
BA-Send always on slot 1.
ET 200SP I/O module 1 - 12 for IM 155-6 PN BA Downstream from the interface module
1 - 32 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 64 for IM 155-5 PN HF
Server module 1 - 13 for IM 155-6 PN BA The server module completes the configuration of the
1 - 33 for IM 155-6 PN ST, ET 200SP station after the last I/O module.
IM 155-6 DP HF
1 - 65 for IM 155-5 PN HF
ET 200AL I/O module 34 - 49 for IM 155-6 DP HF For mixed configuration with ET 200AL modules
66 - 81 for IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF

Feedback data record
Table 9- 7 Feedback data record

0 Block length 4 + (number of slots x 2) Header
1 Block ID 197
2 Version 2
3 0
4 Slot 1 status 0/1 Status = 1:
5 Reserved 0 • Module from station master is
6 Slot 2 status 0/1 inserted in the station option
7 Reserved 0 • Slot is marked as not availa-
: : : ble in the control data record
4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) Max. slot status 0/1 Status = 0:
4 + ((max. slot - 1)× 2) + 1 Reserved 0 • Module pulled

• Incorrect module inserted in
the station option*
* Not possible if the slot is marked as not available.
Note
The data in the feedback data record is always mapped for all modules. In a shared device
configuration, it is therefore irrelevant which IO controller the respective modules are
assigned to.
As long as no control data record has been sent, a one-to-one module assignment is
assumed for the compilation of data record 197 (station master → station option).

Error messages
In case of error, the RDREC instruction returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter while reading the feedback data record:
Table 9- 8 Error messages
Error code Meaning

80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 197 is not
correct.
80B5H Configuration control not configured
80B8H Parameter error
The following events cause a parameter error:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 197)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit was set
• Multiple slots in the station master are assigned to the same
slot in the station option
9.2.5 Data records and functions
Supported data records and functions

The table below shows a comparison of the supported data records and functions depending
on the CPU/interface module used.
CPU... Interface module (IM...)

Supported data rec- 1510SP-1 PN 1512SP-1 PN 155-6 PN HF 155-6 PN ST 155-6 PN BA 155-6 DP HF
ords and functions 1510SP F-1 PN 1512SP F-1 PN
Control data record ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(V2)
Simplified control data -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ --
record (V1)
Read back control data ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
record *
Read feedback data -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
record
* You can read back the control data record with the RDREC instruction.

9.3 Transferring control data record in the startup program of the CPU
Required steps
Transfer the created control data record 196 to the CPU/the interface module using the
instruction WRREC (Write data record) instruction.
Parameters of the instruction WRREC

Below, you will find explanations of individual parameters of the WRREC instruction which
you must supply with specific values in the configuration control context. You can find
additional information on the WRREC instruction in the STEP 7 online help.
ID Hardware identifier
• Use the HW identifier of the CPU for the configuration control for centrally ar-
ranged modules.
If you have selected the CPU in the network view or device view, the HW identifier
is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window.
Use the value of the system constant "Local~Configuration".
• Use the HW identifier of the interface module for the configuration control for dis-
tributed I/O.
If you have selected the interface module in the network view or device view, the
HW identifier is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window.
Use the value of the system constant "<Name_of_the_interface_module>~Head".
INDEX Data record number: 196 (decimal)
RECORD Control data record to be transferred.
See the section Creating the control data record (Page 147) for the structure of the
control data record.

Error messages
In case of error, the instruction WRREC returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter:
Error code Meaning

80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 196 is not
correct.
80B5H Configuration control parameters not assigned.
80E2H Data record was transferred in the wrong OB context. The data
record must be transferred in the startup program.
A parameter error is caused by:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 196)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit was set
• A station master slot was assigned an invalid slot in the station
option
• Multiple slots in the station master are assigned to the same
slot in the station option
• For shared device on submodule level: Violation of defined
restrictions
Selection of the station option in the user program

In order for the CPU to know which station option you want to operate, you must set up a
selection option between the various control data records in the user program. You can
implement the selection, for example, via an Int tag which references an array element.
Note that the tag for selecting the control data record must be located in the retentive
memory area. If the tag is not retentive it will be initialized during the startup of the CPU and
thus be unavailable for selection of the station option.

Special aspects relating to the transfer of the control data record to the CPU
● If you have enabled configuration control, the CPU is not ready for operation without a
control data record. The CPU returns from startup to STOP if a valid control data record is
not transferred in the startup OB. The central I/O is not initialized in this case. The cause
for the STOP mode is entered in the diagnostics buffer.
Note
If an incorrect control data record is transferred to the CPU in the startup OB, the startup
of the CPU may be prevented.
In this case, perform a reset to factory settings of the CPU and then transfer a correct
control data record.
● The CPU processes the WRREC instruction for transfer of the control data record
asynchronously. For this reason, you must call WRREC in the startup OB repeatedly in a
loop until the output parameters "BUSY" or "DONE" indicate that the data record has
been transferred.
– Tip: To program the loop, use the SCL programming language with the REPEAT ...
UNTIL instruction.
REPEAT
"WRREC_DB"(REQ := "start_config_control",
ID := "Local~Configuration",
INDEX := 196,
LEN := "conf_LEN",
DONE => "conf_DONE",
BUSY => "conf_BUSY",
RECORD := "ConfDB".ConfigControl["ConfDB".Option],
//Selection of control data record
ERROR => "conf_ERROR",
STATUS => "conf_STATUS");
UNTIL NOT "conf_BUSY"
END_REPEAT;
– In the graphical programming languages, you implement the loop using instructions for
program control.

Example in FBD: Use the LABEL (jump label) and JMP (jump at RLO=1) instructions
to program a loop.
Figure 9-5 WRREC
● The control data record is stored retentively in the CPU. Note:

– The retentivity of the control data record is independent of the retentivity settings in the
STEP 7 memory area. This means that the memory area in which the control data
record is configured does not have to be configured as retentive for this purpose.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration, the original data record
196 is deleted and the new data record 196 is saved retentively. The CPU will then
restart with the modified configuration.

9.4 Behavior during operation
Special aspects relating to the transfer of the control data record to the interface module
● If you have enabled configuration control, the ET 200SP station is not ready for operation
without a control data record. As long as no valid control data record has been
transferred, the I/O modules are considered as failed by the CPU and exhibit substitute
value behavior. The interface module continues to exchange data.
● The control data record is stored retentively in the interface module. Note:
– If there have been no changes to the configuration, you do not need to rewrite the
control data record 196 during restart.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration to the interface module, it
will result in a station failure in the distributed I/O system. The original data record 196
is deleted and the new data record 196 is saved retentively. The station will then
restart with the modified configuration.
9.4 Behavior during operation
Effect of discrepancy between station master and station option

For the online display and for the display in the diagnostics buffer (module OK or module
faulty), the station master is always used and not the differing station option.
Example: A module supplies diagnostic information. This module is configured in slot 4 in the
station master, but is inserted in slot 3 in the station option (missing module; see example in
the next section). The online view (station master) shows a faulty module in slot 4. In the real
configuration, the module in slot 3 indicates an error via an LED display.
Response when modules are missing

If modules are entered as not present in the control data record, the automation system
behaves as follows:
● Modules designated as not present in the control data record do not supply diagnostics
and their status is always OK. The value status is OK.
● Direct write access to the outputs that are not present or write access to the process
image of the outputs that are not present: Remains without effect; no access error is
signaled.
● Direct read access to the inputs that are not present or read access to the process image
of the inputs that are not present: Value "0" is supplied; no access error is signaled.
● Write data record to module that is not present: Remains without effect; no error is
signaled.
● Read data record from module that is not present: An error is signaled because a valid
data record cannot be returned.

9.5 Examples of configuration control

A station master consisting of an interface module, three I/O modules and the server module
is configured in STEP 7 in the following section.
Four station options are derived from the station master with the configuration control:
● Station option 1 with module that is not present
● Station option 2 with modified order of modules
● Station option 3 with empty slot
● Station option 4: Opening a new potential group

Station option 1 with module that is not present

The module that is located in slot 3 in the station master is not present in the station option 1.
Slot 3 must be designated in the control data record accordingly with 0 (= not present). The
server module is located in slot 3 in the station option.
Figure 9-6 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 1 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7

Station option 2 with modified order of modules

The order of the modules at slots 2 and 3 is interchanged.
record in STEP 7

Station option 3 with empty slot

The module that is located in slot 3 in the station master occupies an empty slot with
BU cover in the station option. Enter the value 130 in slot 3 in the control data record.
record in STEP 7

Station option 4: Opening a new potential group

A new potential group is opened at slot 3 of station option 4. Compared to the station master,
a dark-colored BaseUnit is replaced by a light-colored BaseUnit. Enter the value 1 as
additional function.
record in STEP 7

Commissioning 10
10.1 Overview
Introduction
This section includes information on the following topics:
● Commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO
● Commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system on the PROFIBUS DP
● Startup of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with empty slots
● Removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card
● Operating modes of the CPU
● CPU memory reset
● Reassigning parameters during operation
● Identification and maintenance data
Commissioning requirements
Note
Performing tests
You must ensure the safety of your plant. You therefore need to run a complete functional
test and make the necessary safety checks before the final commissioning of a plant.
Also allow for any possible foreseeable errors in the tests. This avoids endangering persons
or equipment during operation.

Commissioning
10.1 Overview
PRONETA
SIEMENS PRONETA is a PC-based software tool that is provided free-of-charge, which
simplifies the commissioning of PROFINET plants by performing the following tasks:
● Topology overview that automatically scans PROFINET and displays all connected
components. This overview can be exported in the form of a device list. You have the
option of "initializing" the components and performing other simple configuration tasks, as
well as comparing the actual configuration with a reference plant.
● IO Check to quickly test the wiring of a plant and the module configuration of the
components. By reading and writing the inputs and outputs, PRONETA makes sure that
the distributed I/O devices with their sensors and actuators are wired correctly.
PRONETA can create test profile templates and store test logs to document the test
results.
● All tasks can be performed even before a CPU is integrated into the network. Moreover,
since no other engineering tools or hardware are required, PRONETA enables a fast and
convenient check of a plant configuration at an early stage.
Additional information about PRONETA can be found here
SIMATIC Automation Tool

SIMATIC Automation Tool is a free, PC-based software tool which supports you during
commissioning of the S7-1500 automation system/ET 200MP and ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
You carry out commissioning and service activities with this tool independent of the TIA
Portal.
It offers the following functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet plant network and identification of all connected
devices
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) und station name (PROFINET device)
● Transfer of the date and programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
modules
● Program download to the CPU (not F-programs)
● Switchover of the operating modes RUN/STOP
● Backup and restore of projects (not F-projects)
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out of service data
● Reset to factory settings
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
● Documentation/backup of the configuration in standard text .csv or encrypted and
password-protected .sat file
Additional information on the SIMATIC Automation Tool is available here
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/98161300).

Commissioning
10.2 Commissioning the ET 200SP for PROFINET IO
Requirements
● The CPU/interface module is in the "Factory settings" status or has been reset to factory
settings (see section Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)).
● For CPU: The SIMATIC memory card is as delivered or has been formatted.
10.2.1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO controller, you require the
CPU 151xSP-1 PN.
Figure 10-1 ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller

Commissioning
Commissioning procedure
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system CPU as an IO controller for
PROFINET IO, we recommend the following procedure:
Table 10- 1 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP CPU as an IO controller for PROFINET IO
Step Procedure See ...

1 Installing ET 200SP Section Installation (Page 39)
2 Connecting ET 200SP Section Wiring (Page 49)
• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
• Sensors and actuators
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the IO Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
controller memory card on the CPU (Page 180)
4 Configuring the IO controller1 Section Configuring (Page 97)
5 Switching on supply voltages for the IO CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
controller (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) manual
6 Switching on supply voltages for IO devices Documentation of the IO device
7 Downloading the configuration to the IO STEP 7 online help
controller
8 Switching IO controller to RUN mode CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/
9 Checking LEDs CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
10 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful: Mon-
itoring and modifying tags, testing with
program status, forcing, controlling the
outputs. See section Test functions and
eliminating problems (Page 224)
1 The IO devices are configured with the IO controller.

Commissioning
10.2.2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device
You need the CPU 151xSP-1 PN to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-device.
Figure 10-2 ET 200SP CPU as an I-device

Commissioning
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-device on the
Table 10- 2 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an I-device on the PROFINET IO

• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the I-device Section Removing/inserting a
SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
(Page 180)
4 Configuring the I-device Section Configuring (Page 97)
5 Switching on supply voltages for the IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
6 Switching on supply voltages for I-device and IO CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
devices (http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual and documentation of
the IO devices
7 Download configuration to the I-device STEP 7 online help
8 Switching IO controller and I-device to RUN Documentation of the IO controller
mode and CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
(http://support.automation.siemens
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
.com/WW/view/en/90466439/1333
00) manual
10 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. See
section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 224)

Commissioning
10.2.3 ET 200SP as an IO device
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO device, you need the IM 155-6 PNxx
interface module.
Figure 10-3 ET 200SP as an IO device
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an IO device on the
Table 10- 3 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an IO device for PROFINET IO

• Supply voltages
• PROFINET IO
4 Configuring IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
5 Switching on supply voltages for the IO controller Documentation of the IO controller
6 Switching on supply voltages for IO devices Interface module
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) Manual
7 Downloading the configuration to the IO controller STEP 7 online help
8 Switching IO controller to RUN mode Documentation of the IO controller

Commissioning
10.3 Commissioning the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP

9 Checking LEDs Interface module
.com/WW/view/en/55683316/1333
00) Manual
10 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful:
Monitoring and modifying tags,
testing with program status, forc-
ing, controlling the outputs. Refer
to section Test functions and elimi-
nating problems (Page 224)
Requirements
● The CPU/interface module is in the "Factory settings" status or has been reset to factory
settings (see section Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)).
● For CPU: The SIMATIC memory card is as delivered or has been formatted.
10.3.1 ET 200SP as a DP master
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP master, you need the CPU 151xSP-
1 PN and the CM DP communication module.
Figure 10-4 ET 200SP as a DP master

Commissioning
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP master on PROFIBUS DP, we
recommend the following procedure:
Table 10- 4 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as a DP master on the PROFIBUS DP

1 Installing ET 200SP (with CPU and CM DP) Section Installation (Page 39)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
3 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the DP Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
master (CPU) memory card on the CPU (Page 180)
4 Configuring DP master (including CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
PROFIBUS address) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) and CM
DP manual
5 Switching on supply voltages for DP master CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP slaves Documentation of the DP slave
7 Download configuration to the DP master STEP 7 online help
8 Switching DP master to RUN CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
outputs. See section Test functions and
eliminating problems (Page 224)

Commissioning
10.3.2 ET 200SP as I-slave
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as I-slave, you need the CPU 151xSP-1 PN and
the CM DP communication module.
Figure 10-5 ET 200SP as I-slave

Commissioning
For commissioning of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as an I-slave on the
PROFIBUS DP, we recommend the following procedure:
Table 10- 5 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as an I-slave for PROFIBUS DP

1 Installing ET 200SP (with CPU and CM DP) Section Installation (Page 39)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
3 Configuring DP master (including Documentation of the DP master
PROFIBUS address)
4 Inserting a SIMATIC memory card in the I- Section Removing/inserting a SIMATIC
slave (CPU) memory card on the CPU (Page 180)
5 Configuring I-slave (including PROFIBUS CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
address) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) and CM
DP manual
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP master Documentation of the DP master
7 Switching on supply voltages for I-slaves CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
8 Loading configuration in the DP master and STEP 7 online help
I-slaves
9 Switching DP master and I-slaves to RUN Documentation of the DP master and
CPU 15xxSP-1 PN
outputs. See the Test functions and fault
resolution
WW/view/en/90466439/133300) section
See also
Wiring (Page 49)

Commissioning
10.3.3 ET 200SP as a DP slave
To use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP slave, you need the IM 155-6 DP HF.
Figure 10-6 ET 200SP as a DP slave
To commission the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP, we
recommend the following procedure:
Table 10- 6 Procedure for commissioning the ET 200SP as a DP master for PROFIBUS DP

1 Installing ET 200SP (with Section Installation (Page 39)
IM 155-6 DP HF)
2 Setting the PROFIBUS address on the Section Interface module
interface module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
W/view/en/55683316/133300)
• Supply voltages
• PROFIBUS DP
4 Configuring DP master (including Documentation of the DP master
PROFIBUS address)
5 Switching on supply voltages for DP Documentation of the DP master
master
6 Switching on supply voltages for DP Interface module
slaves (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
W/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual

Commissioning
10.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots

7 Download configuration to the DP mas- STEP 7 online help
ter
8 Switching DP master to RUN Documentation of the DP master
9 Checking LEDs Interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
W/view/en/55683316/133300) Manual
10 Testing inputs and outputs The following functions are helpful: Monitor-
ing and modifying tags, testing with program
status, forcing, controlling the outputs. Refer
to section Test functions and eliminating
problems (Page 224)
10.4 Startup of the ET 200SP with empty slots
Procedure
You can configure the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with any number of empty slots.
To build the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with any number of empty slots, follow these
steps:
1. Cover all empty slots with BU covers.
2. Finish the configuration with a server module.
Special consideration: A "Module missing in slot x" diagnostic message is generated by the
CPU/interface module for empty slots in which I/O modules are configured.
10.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
Requirement
The CPU only supports pre-formatted SIMATIC memory cards. If necessary, delete all
previously stored data before using the SIMATIC memory card. Additional information about
deleting the contents of the SIMATIC memory card can be found in the section, SIMATIC
memory card - overview (Page 196).
In order to work with the SIMATIC memory card, first ensure that the SIMATIC memory card
is not write-protected. If it is, move the slider out of the lock position.

Commissioning
10.5 Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card on the CPU
Inserting the SIMATIC memory card

To insert a SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Ensure that the CPU is either switched off or in STOP mode.
2. Insert the SIMATIC memory card, as depicted on the CPU, into the slot for the SIMATIC
memory card.
Figure 10-7 Slot for the SIMATIC memory card
3. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with light pressure into the CPU, until the SIMATIC
memory card latches.
Removing the SIMATIC memory card

To remove a SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Switch the CPU to STOP mode.
2. Press the SIMATIC memory card into the CPU with light pressure. After audible
unlatching of the SIMATIC memory card, remove it.
Reactions after removing/inserting the SIMATIC memory card

Inserting and removing the SIMATIC memory card in STOP, STARTUP or RUN mode
triggers a re-evaluation of the SIMATIC memory card. The CPU compares the content of the
configuration on the SIMATIC memory card with the backed-up retentive data. If the backed-
up retentive data matches the data of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card, the
retentive data is retained. If the data differs, the CPU automatically performs a memory reset
(which means the retentive data is deleted) and then goes to STOP.
The CPU evaluates the SIMATIC memory card and indicates this by the RUN/STOP LED
flashing.
Reference
Additional information on the SIMATIC memory card can be found in the section SIMATIC
memory card (Page 196).

Commissioning
10.6 Operating modes of the CPU
Introduction
Operating modes describe the status of the CPU. The following operating modes are
possible using the mode selector:
● STARTUP
● RUN
● STOP
In these operating modes, the CPU can communicate, for example, via the PROFINET
interface.
The status LEDs on the front of the CPU indicate the current operating mode.
10.6.1 STARTUP mode
Function
Before the CPU starts to execute the cyclic user program, a startup program is executed.
By suitably programming startup OBs, you can specify initialization tags for your cyclic
program in the startup program. You have the option of programming no, one or several
startup OBs.
Special features during startup

Note the following points regarding the STARTUP mode:
● All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings for the particular I/O
module: They provide a substitute value as set in the parameters or retain the last value
output and bring the controlled process to a safe operational status.
● The process image is initialized.
The process image is not updated.
In order to read the current state from inputs during STARTUP, you can access inputs
directly via I/O access.
In order to initialize outputs during STARTUP, values can be written via the process
image or via direct I/O access. The values are output at the outputs during the transition
to the RUN mode.
● The CPU always starts up in warm restart mode.
– The non-retentive bit memory, timers and counters are initialized.
– The non-retentive tags in data blocks are initialized.
● During startup, cycle time monitoring is not yet running

Commissioning
● The startup OBs are executed in the order of the startup OB numbers. All startup OBs
that you have programmed are executed, regardless of the selected startup mode.
● The following OBs can be started during startup, if a corresponding event occurs:
– OB 82: Diagnostics interrupt
– OB 83: Pull/plug interrupt for modules
– OB 86: Rack error
– OB 121: Programming error (only for global error handling)
– OB 122: I/O access error (only for global error handling)
You can find a description of how to use global and local error handling in the STEP 7
online help.
No other OBs can be started until after the transition to RUN mode.
Response when expected and actual configurations do not match

The configuration downloaded to the CPU represents the expected configuration. The actual
configuration is the actual configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system. If the
expected configuration and the actual configuration do not match, the setting of the
"Comparison preset to actual configuration" parameter determines the reaction of the CPU
(see section Operating mode transitions (Page 186)).
Canceling a startup
If errors occur during startup, the CPU cancels the startup and returns to STOP mode.
The CPU does not execute a startup or cancels a startup under the following conditions:
● If no SIMATIC memory card is inserted or an invalid SIMATIC memory card is inserted.
● If no hardware configuration has been downloaded.

Commissioning
Setting the startup behavior

To set the startup behavior, follow these steps:
1. In the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor, select the CPU.
2. In the properties under "General" select the "Startup" area.
Figure 10-8 Setting the startup behavior
① Sets the startup type after POWER ON

② Defines the startup behavior when a module in a slot does not correspond to the config-
ured module. You can set this parameter centrally, on the CPU or for each module.
When you change the setting for a module, the setting made centrally for this module no
longer applies.
• Startup CPU only if compatible: In this setting a module on a configured slot has to be
compatible with the configured module. Compatible means that the module matches
in terms of the number of inputs and outputs and with respect to its electrical and
functional properties.
• Startup CPU even if mismatch: With this setting the CPU starts up regardless of the
type of module plugged in.
③ Specifies a maximum period (default: 60000 ms) in which the I/O must be ready for op-
eration. The CPU changes to RUN.
If the central and distributed I/O is not ready for operation within the configuration time,
the startup characteristics of the CPU depends on the setting of the "Comparison preset
to actual configuration" parameter.

Commissioning
Example for the "Comparison preset to actual configuration" parameter

"Startup CPU only if compatible":
The input module DI 16x24VDC ST with 16 digital inputs is a compatible replacement for the
input module DI 8x24VDC ST with 8 digital inputs, because the pin assignment and all the
electrical and functional properties match.
"Startup CPU even if mismatch":
Instead of a configured digital input module, you insert an analog output module or no
module is present in this slot and thus in all subsequent slots. Although the configured inputs
cannot be accessed, the CPU starts up.
Note that the user program cannot function correctly in this case and take the appropriate
measures.
10.6.2 STOP mode
Function
The CPU does not execute the user program in STOP mode.
All outputs are disabled or react according to the parameter settings for the particular I/O
module: They provide a substitute value as set in the parameters or retain the last value
output keeping the controlled process in a safe operating status.
10.6.3 RUN mode
Function
In "RUN" mode the cyclic, time-driven, and interrupt-driven program is executed. Addresses
that are in the "Automatic Update" process image are automatically updated in each program
cycle. See also the section Process images and process image partitions (Page 104).
Execution of the user program

Once the CPU has read the inputs, the cyclic program is executed from the first instruction to
the last instruction.
If you have configured a minimum cycle time, the CPU will not end the cycle until this
minimum cycle time is finished even if the user program is completed sooner.
A cycle monitoring time is set to ensure that the cyclic program is completed within a
specified time. You can change the cycle monitoring time to suit your requirements. If the
cyclic program has not finished running within this time, the system responds with a time
error.
Further events such as hardware interrupts and diagnostics interrupts can interrupt the cyclic
program flow and prolong the cycle time.

Commissioning
Reference
Further information about cycle and response times is available in the Function Manual
Cycle and response times (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193558).
10.6.4 Operating mode transitions
Operating modes and operating mode transitions

The following figure shows the operating modes and the operating mode transitions:
Figure 10-9 Operating modes and operating mode transitions
The table below shows the effects of the operating mode transitions:
Table 10- 7 Operating mode transitions
No. Operating mode transitions Effect

① POWER ON → After switching on, the CPU switches to "STARTUP" Non-retentive memory is cleared,
STARTUP mode if: and the content of non-retentive
DBs is reset to the start values of
• The hardware configuration and program blocks are
the load memory. Retentive
consistent.
memory and retentive DB con-
• The "Warm restart-RUN" startup type is set tents are retained.
or
• The "Warm restart mode before POWER OFF" is
set and was in RUN mode before POWER OFF.
② POWER ON → After switching on, the CPU goes to "STOP" mode if: Non-retentive memory is cleared,
STOP and the content of non-retentive
inconsistent
or memory and retentive DB con-
tents are retained.
• The "No restart" startup type is set.
③ STOP → STARTUP The CPU switches to "STARTUP" mode if: Non-retentive memory is cleared,
and the content of non-retentive
consistent.
• The programming device sets the CPU to "RUN" memory and retentive DB con-
and the mode selector is in the RUN setting tents are retained.
or
• The mode selector is switched from STOP to RUN.

Commissioning
10.7 CPU memory reset
No. Operating mode transitions Effect

④ STARTUP → STOP The CPU returns to the "STOP" mode in the following
cases of "STARTUP":
• The CPU detects an error during startup.
• The programming device or the mode selector sets
the CPU to "STOP".
• A STOP command is executed in the Startup OB.
⑤ STARTUP → RUN The CPU goes to the "RUN" mode in the following
cases of "START-UP":
• The CPU has initialized the PLC tags.
• The CPU has executed the startup blocks success-
fully.
⑥ RUN → STOP The CPU returns to the "STOP" mode in the following
cases of "RUN":
• An error is detected that prevents continued pro-
cessing.
• A STOP command is executed in the user program.
• The programming device or the mode selector sets
the CPU to "STOP".
Basics of a memory reset

A memory reset on the CPU is possible only in the STOP mode.
When memory is reset, the CPU is changed to a so-called "initial status".
This means that:
● An existing online connection between your programming device/PC and the CPU is
terminated.
● The content of the work memory and the retentive and non-retentive data (applies only to
manual memory reset by the user) are deleted.
● The diagnostics buffer, time of day, and IP address are retained.
● Subsequently the CPU is initialized with the loaded project data (hardware configuration,
code and data blocks, force jobs). The CPU copies this data from the load memory to the
work memory.
Result:
– If you set an IP address in the hardware configuration ("Set IP address in the project"
option) and a SIMATIC memory card with the project is in the CPU, this IP address is
valid after the memory reset.
– Data blocks no longer have current values but rather their configured start values.
– Force jobs remain active.

Commissioning
How can I tell if the CPU is performing a memory reset?

The RUN/STOP LED flashes yellow at 2 Hz. After completion the CPU goes into STOP
mode, and the RUN/STOP LED is switched on (permanently lit yellow).
Result after memory reset

The following table provides an overview of the contents of the memory objects after
memory reset.
Memory object Content

Actual values of the data blocks, instance data blocks Initialized
Bit memory, timers and counters Initialized
Retentive tags from technology objects Retained
(for example, adjustment values of absolute encoders)*
Diagnostics buffer entries (retentive area) Retained
Diagnostics buffer entries (non-retentive area) Initialized
IP address Retained
Counter readings of the runtime meters Retained
Time of day Retained
* The retentive tags from technology objects are retained but the content of specific tags is partly re-
initialized.
10.7.1 Automatic memory reset
Possible cause of an automatic memory reset

The CPU executes an automatic memory reset if an error occurs that prevents normal
further processing.
Causes for such errors can be:
● User program is too large, and cannot be completely loaded into work memory.
● The project data on the SIMATIC memory card is corrupt, for example, because a file was
deleted.
● If you remove or insert the SIMATIC memory card and the backed-up retentive data
differs in structure from that of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card.

Commissioning
10.7.2 Manual memory reset
Reason for a manual memory reset

A memory reset is required to reset the CPU to its "original state".
CPU memory reset

There are two options for performing a CPU memory reset:
● Using the mode selector
● Using STEP 7
Procedure using the mode selector
Note
Memory reset ↔ Reset to factory settings
The operation described below also reflects the procedure for resetting to factory settings:
• Selector operation with inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes a memory reset
• Selector operation without inserted SIMATIC memory card: CPU executes reset to factory
settings
To reset the CPU memory using the mode selector, proceed as follows:
1. Set the mode selector to the STOP position.
Result: The RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the selector in this position until the
RUN/STOP LED lights up for the 2nd time and remains continuously lit (this takes three
seconds). After this, release the switch.
3. Within the next three seconds, switch the mode selector back to the MRES position, and
then back to STOP again.
Result: The CPU executes memory reset.
Procedure using STEP 7

For a memory reset of the CPU using STEP 7 proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Online Tools" task card of the CPU.
2. Click the "MRES" button in the "CPU control panel" pane.
3. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result: The CPU switches to STOP mode and performs a memory reset.

Commissioning
10.8 Reassigning parameters during operation
10.8 Reassigning parameters during operation
Introduction
You have the option of reassigning the parameters for the ET 200SP I/O modules during
operation.
Changing parameters during operation

You make the parameter settings of the I/O modules using data records. Each I/O module
has a separate data record. The instruction "WRREC" applies the changed parameters to
the I/O module.
If you are using the CPU as an I-device, you reassign the parameters of the I/O modules via
the I-device.
Note
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can evaluate OB83 for this
purpose. After inserting a module, the CPU does not call OB83 until the module has started
up and its parameters are assigned. This ensures the execution of the data record
operations without errors.
Note
You need to transfer the new parameters with the "WRREC" instruction after a POWER
OFF/POWER ON of the ET 200SP.
Instruction for parameter assignment

The following instruction is provided for assigning parameters to the I/O module in the user
program:
Instruction Application
"WRREC" Transfer the modifiable parameters to the addressed ET 200SP module.
Error message
In the event of an error, the following return values are reported:
Table 10- 8 Error message
Error code Meaning

80E0H Error in header information
80E1H Parameter error

Commissioning
10.9 Identification and maintenance data
Reference
You will find the setup of the parameter data record in the manuals of the I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/55679691/133300).
10.9.1 Reading out and entering I&M data
I&M data
I&M identification data is information which is stored on the module either as read-only data
(I-data) or read/write data (M-data).
Identification data (I&M0): Manufacturer information about the module that can only be read
and is in part also printed on the housing of the module, for example, article number and
serial number.
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3): Plant-dependent information, e.g. installation location.
Maintenance data is created during configuration and written to the module.
All modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system support identification data (I&M0 to
I&M3).
The I&M identification data supports you in the following activities:
● Checking the plant configuration
● Locating hardware changes in a plant
● Correcting errors in a plant
Modules can be clearly identified online using the I&M identification data.
STEP 7 allows you to read the identification I&M data (see STEP 7 online help).
Note
The BusAdapter and the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF support the identification data
I&M0 to I&M4 (signature).
Options for reading out I&M data

● Via the user program
● Using STEP 7 or HMI devices
● Via the Web server of the CPU

Commissioning
Procedure for reading I&M data by means of the user program

In order to read the I&M data of the modules in the user program, use the RDREC
instruction.
The data record structure for modules that are distributed and accessible via PROFINET IO/
PROFIBUS DP is described in the section Structure of the data record for I&M data
(Page 193).
Procedure for reading the I&M data using STEP 7

Requirements: There must be an online connection to the CPU/interface module.
To read I&M data using STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. In the project tree, under "Distributed I/O" select the IO device IM 155-6 PN ST (for
example).
2. Select > IO device > Online & diagnostics > Identification & Maintenance.
Procedure for input of maintenance data using STEP 7

STEP 7 assigns a default module name. You can enter the following information:
● Plant designation (I&M1)
● Location identifier (I&M1)
● Installation date (I&M2)
● Additional information (I&M3)
To enter maintenance data via STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. In the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor, select the interface module, for
example.
2. In the properties under "General", select the "Identification & Maintenance" area and
enter the data.
During the loading of the hardware configuration, the I&M data is also loaded.
Procedure for reading I&M data via the web server

The procedure is described in detail in the Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) Function Manual.

Commissioning
10.9.2 Data record structure for I&M data
Reading I&M data records (distributed via PROFINET IO)

You can directly access specific identification data by selecting Read data record (RDREC
instruction). You obtain the corresponding part of the identification data under the relevant
data record index.
The data records are structured as follows:
Table 10- 9 Basic structure of data records with I&M identification data
Content Length (bytes) Coding (hex)

Header information
BlockType 2 I&M0: 0020H
I&M1: 0021H
I&M2: 0022H
I&M3: 0023H
BlockLength 2 I&M0: 0038H
I&M1: 0038H
I&M2: 0012H
I&M3: 0038H
BlockVersionHigh 1 01
BlockVersionLow 1 00
Identification data
Identification data I&M0/Index AFF0H: 54
(see table below) I&M1/Index AFF1H: 54
I&M2/Index AFF2H: 16
I&M3/Index AFF3H: 54
Table 10- 10 Data record structure for I&M identification data
Identification data Access Default Explanation

Identification data 0: (data record index AFF0 hex)
VendorIDHigh Read (1 byte) 00H This is where the name of the manufac-
VendorIDLow Read (1 byte) 2AH turer is stored (42D = SIEMENS AG).
Order_ID Read (20 bytes) 6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 Article number of the module (e.g. of the
interface module)
IM_SERIAL_NUMBER Read (16 bytes) - Serial number (device-specific)
IM_HARDWARE_REVISION Read (2 bytes) 1 Corresponding HW version
IM_SOFTWARE_REVISION Read Firmware version Provides information about the firmware
(1 byte) V version of the module
• SWRevisionPrefix
• IM_SWRevision_Functional_ (1 byte) 00 - FFH

Enhancement
• IM_SWRevision_Bug_Fix (1 byte) 00 - FFH

Commissioning
Identification data Access Default Explanation

• IM_SWRevision_Internal_ (1 byte) 00 - FFH
Change
IM_REVISION_COUNTER Read (2 bytes) 0000H Provides information about parameter
changes on the module
(not used)
IM_PROFILE_ID Read (2 bytes) 0000H Generic Device
IM_PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE Read (2 bytes) 0005H Interface module/bus adapter
0003H I/O modules
0001H CPU
IM_VERSION Read 0101H Provides information on the version of
(1 byte) the identification data
• IM_Version_Major
(0101H = Version 1.1)
• IM_Version_Minor (1 byte)
IM_SUPPORTED Read (2 bytes) 000EH Provides information about the available

identification data (I&M1 to I&M3)
Maintenance data 1: (data record index AFF1 hex)
IM_TAG_FUNCTION Read/write (32 - Enter a module identifier here that is
bytes) unique plant-wide.
IM_TAG_LOCATION Read/write (22 - Enter the installation location of the mod-
bytes) ule here.
IM_DATE Read/write (16 YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM Enter the installation date of the module
bytes) here.
IM_DESCRIPTOR Read/write (54 - Enter a comment describing the module.
bytes)
Reading I&M data records with data record 255 (distributed via PROFIBUS DP)
The modules support standardized access to identification data via DS 255 (index 65000 to
65003). For further information on the DS 255 data structure, refer to the specifications of the
Profile Guidelines Part 1: Identification & Maintenance Functions - Order No.: 3.502,
version 1.2 dated October 2009.

Commissioning
10.10 Shared commissioning of projects
10.10 Shared commissioning of projects
Team Engineering
In Team Engineering several users from various engineering systems work on a project at
the same time and access one ET 200SP CPU.
The users can edit separate parts of a master project independently of one another at the
same time. The changes of the other editors are displayed in a synchronization dialog during
the loading of the configuration in the CPU and synchronized automatically, if possible.
Certain online functions can also be executed at the same time from several engineering
systems on a shared CPU, such as:
● Monitoring blocks on the CPU
● Modifying blocks on the CPU
● Trace functions
You can find detailed information on the topic of Team Engineering in the STEP 7 online
help.

SIMATIC memory card 11
11.1 SIMATIC memory card - overview
Introduction
The CPU uses a SIMATIC memory card as the program memory. The SIMATIC memory
card is a preformatted memory card compatible with the Windows file system. The memory
card is available in different memory sizes and can be used for the following purposes:
● Transportable data carrier
● Program card
● Firmware update card
● Service data card
A commercially available SD card reader is required to write/read the SIMATIC memory card
with the programming device/PC. This is used, for example, to copy files directly to the
SIMATIC memory card using the Windows Explorer.
The SIMATIC memory card is mandatory to operate the CPU.

SIMATIC memory card
Labeling of the SIMATIC memory card
① Article number
② Serial number
③ Product version
④ Memory size
⑤ Slider for enabling write protection:
• Slider up: not write-protected
• Slider down: write-protected
Figure 11-1 Labeling of the SIMATIC memory card

SIMATIC memory card
Folders and files on the SIMATIC memory card

The following folders and files can be found on the SIMATIC memory card:
Table 11- 1 Folder structure
Folder Description
FWUPDATE.S7S Firmware update files for CPU and I/O modules
SIMATIC.S7S User program, i.e. all blocks (OBs, FCs, FBs, DBs) and system
blocks, project data of the CPU
SIMATIC.HMI HMI-relevant data
DataLogs DataLog files
Recipes Recipe files
Table 11- 2 File structure
File type Description

S7_JOB.S7S Job file
SIMATIC.HMI\Backup\*.psb Panel backup files
SIMATICHMI_Backups_DMS. Protected file (required to use panel backup files in STEP 7)
bin
__LOG__ Protected system file (required in order to use the card)
crdinfo.bin Protected system file (required in order to use the card)
DUMP.S7S Service data file
*.pdf, *.txt, *.csv, etc. Additional files with different formats that you can also store in folders
of the SIMATIC memory card
Use the serial number for copy protection

You can set up copy protection for CPUs which binds execution of the block to a specific
SIMATIC memory card. Configuration is carried out in STEP 7 in the properties of the block
"Bind to serial number of the SIMATIC memory card".
The user can then only execute the block if it is on the SIMATIC memory card with the
specified serial number.

SIMATIC memory card
Removing a SIMATIC memory card

Only remove the SIMATIC memory card in the POWER OFF or STOP state of the CPU.
Make sure that no writing functions (e.g. loading/deleting a block) are active in STOP mode,
or were active at POWER OFF. To do this, disconnect the communication connections.
If you remove the SIMATIC memory card during a write process, the following problems can
occur:
● The data contents of a file are incomplete.
● The file is no longer readable, or no longer exists.
● The entire content of the card is corrupted.
Removing the SIMATIC memory card from the CPU in STOP, STARTUP or RUN mode
triggers a re-evaluation of the SIMATIC memory card. The CPU compares the content of the
configuration on the SIMATIC memory card with the backed-up retentive data. If the backed-
up retentive data matches the data of the configuration on the SIMATIC memory card, the
retentive data is retained. If the data differs, the CPU automatically performs a memory reset
(which means the CPU deletes the retentive data) and then goes to STOP.
Removing a SIMATIC memory card from Windows computers

If you are using the card in a commercially available card reader under Windows, use the
"Eject" function before you remove the card from the card reader. If you remove the card
without using the "Eject" function, you may lose data.
Deleting the contents of the SIMATIC memory card

You have the following options for deleting the content of the SIMATIC memory card:
● Delete files using Windows Explorer
● Format with STEP 7
Note
If you format the card with Windows utilities, you will render the SIMATIC memory card
unusable as a storage medium for a CPU.
Deletion of files and folders is permitted, with the exception of the "__LOG__" and
"crdinfo.bin" system files. The CPU needs these system files. When you delete the files, you
will no longer be able to use the SIMATIC memory card with the CPU.
If you have deleted the "__LOG__" and "crdinfo.bin" system files, format the SIMATIC
memory card as described in the following section.

SIMATIC memory card
Formatting a SIMATIC memory card
Note
Formatting of a SIMATIC memory card may only be carried out in a CPU; otherwise the
SIMATIC memory card cannot be used in the CPU.
If you want to format the SIMATIC memory card using STEP 7, an online connection to the
relevant CPU must exist. The CPU is in STOP mode.
Proceed as follows to format a SIMATIC memory card:
1. Open the Online and Diagnostics view of the CPU (either from the project context or via
"Accessible devices").
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Format memory card" group.
3. Click the "Format" button.
4. Click "Yes" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result:
● The SIMATIC memory card is formatted for use in the CPU.
● The data on the CPU is deleted with the exception of the IP address.
Service life of a SIMATIC memory card

The service life of a SIMATIC memory card depends essentially on the following factors:
● Number of delete/write cycles
● External influences, such as ambient temperature
At an ambient temperature of up to 60 °C, at least 50,000 delete/write processes are
possible on the SIMATIC memory card (see Technical specifications of the individual SMCs).

SIMATIC memory card
11.2 Setting the card type
11.2 Setting the card type
Setting the card type

You can use the SIMATIC memory card as a program card or as a firmware update card.
Procedure
To set the card type, follow these steps:
1. To set the card type, insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of the
programming device.
2. Select the "SIMATIC Card Reader" folder in the project tree.
3. In the properties of the selected SIMATIC memory card, specify the card type:
● Program card
You use a program card as an external load memory for the CPU. It contains the entire
user program for the CPU. The user program is transferred from the load memory to the
work memory and runs there. When you remove the SIMATIC memory card with the user
program, the CPU goes into STOP mode.
The following folder is created on the SIMATIC memory card: SIMATIC.S7
● Firmware update card
You can save firmware for CPUs and for I/O modules on a SIMATIC memory card. It is
thus possible to perform a firmware update with the help of a specifically prepared
SIMATIC memory card.
The following folder is created on the SIMATIC memory card: FWUPDATE.S7S
Reference
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help.

SIMATIC memory card
11.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards
11.3 Data transfer with SIMATIC memory cards
Transferring objects from the project to a SIMATIC memory card

When the SIMATIC memory card is inserted into the programming device or into an external
card reader, you can transfer objects from the project tree (STEP 7) to the SIMATIC memory
card as follows:
● Individual blocks (multiple selection possible)
In this case, the transfer is consistent, i.e. the function takes dependencies between
blocks due to block calls into account.
● CPU folder
In this case, all runtime-relevant objects including blocks and the hardware configuration
are transferred onto the SIMATIC memory card - just as when downloading.
To perform a transfer, you can transfer the objects by dragging and dropping, or use the
"Card Reader/USB memory > Write to memory card" command in the "Project" menu.
Firmware update using a SIMATIC memory card

You can find information on how to perform a firmware update using a SIMATIC memory
card in the section Firmware update (Page 211).
Reference
For additional information about the SIMATIC memory card, refer to the STEP 7 online help.

Maintenance 12
12.1 Removing and inserting I/O modules
Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports removal and insertion of I/O modules during
operation (RUN mode).
Requirements
The following table describes which modules you may insert and remove under which
conditions:
Table 12- 1 Removal and insertion of modules
Modules Removal and insertion Conditions

CPU No ---
BusAdapter No ---
CM DP module No ---
Interface module No ---
I/O modules Yes • Digital output modules: only when load is switched off
• Digital modules: For load voltage above the safe extra-low
voltage: only with switched off load voltage supply
• Technology modules: only with switched off supply voltage L+
• AI Energy Meter ST:
– only when measuring voltage on primary side is switched
off, or
– without the special current transformer terminal, measuring
voltage and load current must be through the converters,
which means the machine or the load must be switched off
in the process. With the special terminal, the process can
continue because the current transformer is isolated safely.
However, the measuring voltage on the module at the con-
nections UL1-UL3 still needs to be isolated.
Server module No ---

Maintenance
NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert digital output modules with the load switched on or technology
modules with the supply voltage switched on, this can result in hazardous system states.
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system or the connected sensors may be damaged as a
result.
Therefore, a digital output module may only be inserted and removed when the load is
switched off and a technology module may only be inserted and removed when the supply
voltage is switched off.
NOTICE
Risk of hazardous system states
If you remove and insert the AI Energy Meter ST with the primary-side voltage switched on
at the current transformer, this can result in hazardous system states.
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system may be damaged as a result.
• For this reason, remove and insert the AI Energy Meter ST only when the measuring
voltage on the primary side is switched off
or
• Only when a special current transformer terminal is used which short-circuits the
secondary end of the transformer when a module is removed. Do not remove or insert
the AI Energy Meter ST until you have removed this current transformer terminal. With
the special terminal, the process can continue because the current transformer is
isolated safely. However, the measuring voltage on the module at the connections UL1-
UL3 still needs to be isolated.
Operating principle with CPU/HF interface module

You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The CPU/interface
module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation.
NOTICE
Reaction of the CPU when removing and inserting the ET 200SP server module
Please note that the backplane bus is deactivated when you remove the server module,
regardless of the CPU operating state. Also note that the outputs do not adopt their
configured substitute value behavior when you remove the server module.
This means you should not remove the server module in the CPU operating states
STARTUP, RUN and STOP. If you have nevertheless removed the server module, perform
a POWER OFF/POWER ON after you have inserted the server module once again.

Maintenance
Operating principle with BusAdapter/CM DP module

It is not permitted to remove or insert the BusAdapter/CM DP module when the supply
voltage is switched on. If you remove the BusAdapter/CM DP module unintentionally after
startup of the CPU, the supply voltage of the BusAdapter/CM DP module is switched off
automatically. To switch on the supply voltage again, you need to perform a
POWER OFF/POWER ON after inserting the BusAdapter/CM DP module.
Operating principle with ST, BA interface module

1. You can remove one I/O module during operation. If you remove another I/O module, this
results in a station stop of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
– All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail → substitute value
behavior.
– The interface module continues to exchange data with the IO controller and report
diagnostics.
Note
If you want to replace several I/O modules during operation, you must replace them
one after the other.
2. If you insert all but one of the I/O modules withdrawn during operation, all I/O modules will
start up again.
Note
I/O modules inserted in empty slots and then removed are also regarded as withdrawn
during operation.
3. After a POWER OFF/POWER ON of the supply voltage 1L+ of the interface module, all
available I/O modules start up again in keeping with the configuration. The evaluation of
the I/O modules removed during operation starts again (see 1).

Maintenance
12.2 Changing the type of an I/O module
Removing I/O modules

To remove an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the I/O module.
2. Pull the I/O module out of the BaseUnit, parallel in a forward direction.
Figure 12-1 Removing I/O modules
See also
Interface modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55683316/133300)
Introduction
The coding element is a two-part element. When shipped from the factory, both parts are in
the I/O module. When an I/O module is installed for the first time, a part of the coding
element clicks into the BaseUnit. This mechanically prevents the insertion of a different
module type.
There are two versions of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system:
● Mechanical coding element: Ensures the mechanical coding described above.
● Electronic coding element: In addition to the above-mentioned mechanical coding, this
version also has an electronic, rewritable memory for module-specific configuration data
(such as the F-destination address for fail-safe modules, parameter data for IO link
master).

Maintenance
Requirement
Refer to section Application planning (Page 26).
NOTICE
Do not manipulate the coding element
Making changes to the coding element may cause dangerous conditions in your plant
and/or result in damage to the outputs of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
To avoid physical damage, do not manipulate the coding.
Changing the type of an I/O module

You have already removed the I/O module.
To make a type change for an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Push the coding element out of the BaseUnit using a screwdriver.
2. Put the coding element back onto the removed I/O module.
3. Insert the new I/O module (other module type) into the BaseUnit until you hear it click into
place.
4. Label the new I/O module.
① Coding element
Figure 12-2 Changing the type of an I/O module

Maintenance
12.3 Replacing an I/O module
12.3 Replacing an I/O module
Introduction
When an I/O module is installed for the first time, a part of the coding element clicks into the
BaseUnit. When you replace an I/O module with the same type of module, the correct coding
element is already present in the BaseUnit.
Requirement
Refer to section Application planning (Page 26).
Replacing an I/O module

You have already removed the I/O module.
To replace an I/O module, follow these steps:
1. Remove the coding element (part) from the underside of the new I/O module.
2. Insert the new I/O module (same module type) into the BaseUnit until you hear it click into
place.
3. Mark the new I/O module (labeling strip, equipment labeling plate).

Maintenance
12.4 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit
Introduction
The terminal box is part of the BaseUnit. You can replace the terminal box if necessary. You
do not need to dismantle the BaseUnit to do this.
The power and AUX buses of the potential group are not interrupted when you replace the
terminal box.
Requirements
● The BaseUnit is mounted, wired and fitted with an I/O module.
● The terminal may only be replaced when the supply voltage is switched off.
Required tools
Procedure
To replace the terminal box on a BaseUnit, follow these steps:
1. If present, turn off the supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
2. Simultaneously press the top and bottom release buttons of the I/O module and pull the
module out of the BaseUnit.
3. Disconnect the wiring on the BaseUnit.
4. The release button of the terminal box is located on the underside of the BaseUnit. Use a
screwdriver to push in the small opening at an angle from above.
5. Swivel the screwdriver slightly upwards to loosen the locking mechanism of the terminal
box and lever the terminal box up out of the BaseUnit at the same time.
6. Remove the coding element (part) from the terminal box and press it onto the coding
element (part) of the I/O module that you removed in the second step.
7. Insert the new terminal box into the BaseUnit at the top and swivel it downwards until it
clips into the BaseUnit.
8. Wire up the BaseUnit.

Maintenance
9. Insert the I/O module into the BaseUnit.

10.Switch on a supply voltage on the BaseUnit.
Figure 12-3 Replacing the terminal box on the BaseUnit

Maintenance
12.5 Firmware update
Introduction
During operation it may be necessary to update the firmware (e.g. to extend the available
functions).
Update the firmware of the CPU/interface module and the I/O modules using firmware files.
The retentive data is retained after the firmware has been updated.

Maintenance
Requirement
● You have downloaded the file(s) for the firmware update from the Product Support
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps) web page.
On this web page, select:
– Automation Technology > Automation Systems > Industrial Automation Systems
SIMATIC > SIMATIC ET 200 I/O Systems > ET 200 systems for the cabinet >
ET 200SP.
Figure 12-4 ET 200SP in the product tree
From there, navigate to the specific type of module that you want to update. To continue,
click on the "Software downloads" link under "Support". Save the desired firmware update
files.
Figure 12-5 Selecting the software downloads

Maintenance
● Before installing the firmware update, make sure that the modules are not being used.
Note
Firmware update of I/O modules
The L+ supply voltage must be present on the module at the start of and during the firmware
update.
Additional requirement for fail-safe modules
WARNING
Check the firmware version for fail-safe approval
When using a new firmware version, always check that the version is approved for use in
the module in question.
The attachments of the certificate
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49368678/134200) for SIMATIC
Safety specify the firmware version that is approved.

Maintenance
Options for the firmware update

The following options are available for updating firmware:
● Online via PROFINET IO/PROFIBUS DP (with STEP 7)
● Using a SIMATIC memory card (possible for CPU and central I/O modules)
● Via the integrated Web server (possible for CPU as well as central and distributed I/O
modules)
Note
Firmware files of the CPU
If you perform a CPU update with STEP 7, you require STEP 7 (TIA Portal as of V13 Update
3).
The table below provides an overview of the media that can be used to update the firmware
of a specific module.
Table 12- 2 Overview of firmware update options
Firmware update CPU Interface module I/O module

STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 Up- ✓ ✓ ✓
date 3
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) -- ✓ ✓
STEP 7 (as of V5.5 SP2)* -- ✓ ✓
SIMATIC memory card ✓ -- ✓
Web server of the CPU ✓ -- ✓
* If the firmware files are only available in this format, you can also install the files using STEP 7
(TIA Portal) but not the SIMATIC memory card or the Web server.
Installation of the firmware update
WARNING
Risk of impermissible system states
The CPU switches to STOP mode or the interface module to "station failure" as a result of
the firmware update being installed. STOP or station failure can have an adverse effect on
the operation of an online process or a machine.
Unexpected operation of a process or a machine can lead to fatal or severe injuries and/or
to material damages.
Make sure that the CPU/interface module is not executing any active process before
installing the firmware update.

Maintenance

Proceed as follows to perform an online firmware update with STEP 7:
1. Select the module in the device view.
2. Select the "Online & diagnostics" command from the shortcut menu.
3. Select the "Firmware update" group in the "Functions" folder.
4. Click the "Browse" button to select the path to the firmware update files in the "Firmware
update" area.
5. Select the suitable firmware file. The table in the firmware update area lists all modules
for which an update is possible with the selected firmware file.
6. Click the "Run update" button. If the module can interpret the selected file, the file is
downloaded to the module.
Updating the firmware
The "Run firmware after update" check box is always selected.
When the loading process is complete, the CPU adopts the firmware and then operates with
this new firmware.
Note
If a firmware update is interrupted, you need to remove and insert the module before starting
the firmware update again.
Procedure using the SIMATIC memory card

Proceed as follows to perform a firmware update via the SIMATIC memory card:
1. Insert a SIMATIC memory card into an SD card reader of your programming device /
computer.
2. To store the update file on the SIMATIC memory card, select the SIMATIC memory card
in the "Card Reader/USB memory" folder in the project tree.
3. Select the "Card Reader/USB memory > Create firmware update memory card"
command in the "Project" menu.
4. Use a file selection dialog to navigate to the firmware update file. In a further step you can
decide whether you want to delete the content of the SIMATIC memory card or whether
you want to add the firmware update files to the SIMATIC memory card.
5. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with the firmware update files into the CPU.
Point to note when updating firmware for analog modules and the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-
Link communication module
If you want to update firmware for analog modules or the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link
communication module, you must supply a load current of 24 V DC to the modules through
the infeed element.

Maintenance
Procedure
1. Remove any inserted SIMATIC memory card.
2. Insert the SIMATIC memory card with the firmware update files into the CPU.
3. The firmware update begins shortly after the SIMATIC memory card has been plugged in.
4. Remove the SIMATIC memory card after the firmware update has been completed.
The RUN LED on the CPU lights up yellow, the MAINT LED flashes yellow.
If you then use the SIMATIC memory card as program card, delete the firmware update files
manually.
Note
If your hardware configuration contains several modules, the CPU updates all affected
modules in the slot sequence, which means in ascending order of the module position in the
STEP 7 device configuration.
Procedure using the Web server

The procedure is described in the Web server
Behavior during the firmware update

Note the following behavior of the relevant I/O module when carrying out a firmware update:
● The DIAG LED display flashes red.
● The I/O module retains its current diagnostic status.
● Diagnostics alarm: Channel temporarily not available (error code 31D)
● All outputs are in a current-free/voltage-free state
Behavior after the firmware update

After the firmware update, check the firmware version of the updated module.
Reference
You can find more information on the procedure in the STEP 7 online help.

Maintenance
12.6 Resetting CPU/interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings
12.6.1 Resetting the CPU to factory settings
Function
The CPU can be reset to its delivery state using "Reset to factory settings". The function
deletes all information saved internally on the CPU.
Recommendation:
If you want to remove a PROFINET CPU and use it elsewhere with a different program, or
put it into storage, we recommend that you reset the CPU to its factory settings. When
restoring factory settings, remember that the IP address parameters are also deleted.
Options for resetting a CPU to factory settings

The following options are available for resetting the CPU to its factory settings:
● Using STEP 7

Make sure that there is no SIMATIC memory card in the CPU and that the CPU is in STOP
mode (the RUN/STOP LED is lit yellow).
Perform a reset to factory settings when there is no SIMATIC memory card inserted as
follows:
1. Set the mode selector to the STOP position.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the mode selector in this position until
the RUN/STOP LED lights up for the 2nd time and remains continuously lit (after three
3. Within the next three seconds, switch the mode selector back to the MRES position, and
then back to STOP again.
Result: The CPU executes the "Reset to factory settings", during which time the RUN/STOP
LED flashes yellow. When the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow, the CPU has been reset to
factory settings and is in the STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in
the diagnostics buffer.

Maintenance

Make sure that an online connection to the CPU exists.
To reset a CPU to factory settings using STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Open the Online and Diagnostics view of the CPU.
2. In the "Functions" folder, select the "Reset to factory settings" group.
3. If you want to keep the IP address, select the "Retain IP address" option button. If you
want to delete the IP address, select the "Reset IP address" option button.
4. Click the "Reset" button.
5. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompts.
Result: The CPU executes the "Reset to factory settings", during which time the RUN/STOP
LED flashes yellow. When the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow, the CPU has been reset to
factory settings and is in the STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in
the diagnostics buffer.
Result after resetting to factory settings

The following table provides an overview of the contents of the memory objects after the
reset to factory settings.
Table 12- 3 Result after resetting to factory settings
Memory object Content

Bit memory, timers and counters Initialized
Certain retentive tags from technology objects Initialized
(e.g. adjustment values of absolute encoders)
Diagnostics buffer entries (retentive area) Initialized
Counter readings of the runtime meters Initialized
Time of day Initialized
If a SIMATIC memory card was inserted prior to the factory reset, the CPU downloads the
configuration contained on the SIMATIC memory card (hardware and software). A
configured IP address then becomes valid again.
Reference
Additional information on the topic "Resetting to factory settings" can be found in the
Structure and use of the CPU memory
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193101) function manual, section on
memory areas and retentivity, and in the STEP 7 online help.

Maintenance
12.6.2 Resetting interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings
Function
The "Reset to factory settings" function returns the interface module (PROFINET) to its
delivery state.
Reset options
● Using STEP 7 (online via PROFINET IO)
● Using a reset button on the interface module (on rear). Exception: The reset button is not
available on the IM 155-6 PN BA. See section Resetting the interface module
(PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a RESET button (Page 220).

To reset an interface module to factory settings using STEP 7, follow these steps:
Make sure that an online connection to the interface module exists.
1. Open the online and diagnostics view of the interface module.
3. Click the "Reset" button.
4. Click "OK" in response to the confirmation prompt.
Result: The interface module then performs a "Reset to factory settings".

Maintenance
Result after resetting to factory settings

The following table shows the values of the interface module properties after a factory reset:
Table 12- 4 Properties of the interface module as shipped
Properties Value
Parameters Default setting
IP address Not available
(can be configured when resetting: "Retain IP ad-
dress"/"Delete IP address")
Device name Not available
MAC address Available
I&M data Identification data (I&M0) available
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3, 4) not available
Firmware version Available
Note
Failure of downstream stations is possible
Downstream stations on a bus segment can fail when the factory settings are restored on an
interface module.
Note
Substitute value behavior of the inserted I/O modules on reset to factory settings
The I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system do not have the configured status
after a reset to factory settings.
Reference
You will find more information on the procedure in the STEP 7 online help.
12.6.3 Resetting the interface module (PROFINET IO) to factory settings with a
RESET button
Requirement
The supply voltage to the interface module is turned on.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (for resetting with a RESET button)

Maintenance
Procedure
To reset an interface module to factory settings using the RESET button, follow these steps:
1. Remove the interface module from the mounting rail (see Mounting the CPU/interface
module (Page 42)) and swivel it downwards.
2. The RESET button is located on the rear of the interface module behind a small opening:
Press a screwdriver into the small opening for at least 3 seconds to activate the RESET
button.
3. Install the interface module back on the mounting rail (see Mounting the CPU/interface
module (Page 42)).
4. Check the LED display of the interface module to see whether the reset was successful:
RUN LED flashes for 3 seconds, ERROR and MAINT LED are off.
5. Assign parameters to the interface module again.
① Rear of the interface module

② RESET button
Figure 12-6 RESET button

Maintenance
12.7 Fault reactions with fail-safe modules
Safe state (safety concept)

The basic principle behind the safety concept is the existence of a safe state for all process
variables.
Note
For digital F-modules, this safe state is the value "0". This applies to both sensors and
actuators.
Fault reactions and startup of the F-system

The safety function means that fail-safe modules use substitute values (safe state) instead of
process values (passivation of the fail-safe module) in the following situations:
● When the F-system is started up
● If errors are detected during safety-related communication between the F-CPU and the F-
module via the PROFIsafe safety protocol (communication error)
● If F-I/O faults or channel faults are detected (e.g., wire break, discrepancy error)
Detected faults are written to the diagnostic buffer of the F-CPU and communicated to the
safety program in the F-CPU.
F-modules cannot save errors as retentive data. After a POWER OFF / POWER ON, any
faults still existing are detected again during startup. However, you have the option of saving
faults in your safety program.
WARNING
For channels that you set to "deactivated" in STEP 7, no diagnostic response or error
handling is triggered when a channel fault occurs, not even when such a channel is
affected indirectly by a channel group fault ("Channel activated/deactivated" parameter).
Remedying faults in the F-system

To remedy faults in your F-system, follow the procedure described in IEC 61508-1:2010
section 7.15.2.4 and IEC 61508-2:2010 section 7.6.2.1 e.
The following steps must be performed:
1. Diagnosing and repairing the fault
2. Revalidation of the safety function
3. Recording in the service report

Maintenance
Substitute value output for fail-safe modules

In the case of F-modules with inputs, if there is passivation, the F-system provides substitute
values (0) for the safety program instead of the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs.
In the case of F-modules with outputs, if there is passivation, the F-system transfers
substitute values (0) to the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the
safety program. The output channels are de-energized. This also applies when the F-CPU
goes into STOP mode. Assignment of substitute values is not possible.
Depending on which F-system you are using and the type of fault that occurred (F-I/O fault,
channel fault or communication error), substitute values are used either for the relevant
channel only or for all channels of the relevant fail-safe module.
Reintegration of a fail-safe module

The system changes from fail-safe to process values (reintegration of an F-module) either
automatically or only after user acknowledgment in the safety program. If channel faults
occur, it may be necessary to remove and reinsert the F-module. A detailed listing of faults
requiring removal and insertion of the F-module can be found in the section Diagnostic
messages of the respective F-module.
After reintegration, the following occurs:
● In the case of an F-module with inputs, the process data pending at the fail-safe inputs is
made available to the safety program
● In the case of an F-module with outputs, the output values provided in the safety program
are again transferred to the fail-safe outputs
Additional information on passivation and reintegration

For additional information on passivation and reintegration of F-I/O, refer to the SIMATIC
Safety, Configuring and Programming
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54110126) manual.
Reaction of the F-module with inputs to communication errors

F-modules with inputs respond differently to communication errors compared to other errors.
If a communication error is detected, the current process values remain set at the inputs of
the F-module. There is no passivation of the channels. The current process values are
passivated in the F-CPU.

Test functions and eliminating problems 13
13.1 Test functions
Introduction
You have the option of testing the operation of your user program on the CPU. You can then
monitor signal states and values of tags and can assign values to tags to simulate specific
situations in the running of the program.
Note
Using test functions
The use of test functions can influence the program execution time and thus the cycle and
response times of the controller to a slight extent (a few milliseconds).
Requirements
● There is an online connection to the relevant CPU.
● An executable program is in the CPU.
Test options
● Testing with program status
● Testing with a watch table
● Testing with a force table
● Testing with the LED flash test
● Testing with the trace and logic analyzer function
Testing with program status

The program status allows you to monitor the execution of the program. You can display the
values of operands and the results of logic operations (RLO) allowing you to recognize and
fix logical errors in your program.

Test functions and eliminating problems
13.1 Test functions
Testing with watch tables

The following functions are available in the watch table:
● Monitoring of tags
Using the watch tables, you can monitor the current values of the individual tags of a user
program or a CPU on the programming device or PC.
The following operand areas can be monitored:
– Inputs and outputs (process image) and bit memory
– Contents of data blocks
– Peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs
– Timers and counters
● Modifying tags
Use this function to assign fixed values to the individual tags of a user program or CPU.
Modifying is also possible for testing with program status.
The following operand areas are modifiable:
– Inputs and outputs (process image) and bit memory
– Peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs (for example, %I0.0:P, %Q0.0:P)
– Timers and counters
● "Enable peripheral outputs" and "Modify now"
These two functions enable you to assign fixed values to individual peripheral outputs of
a CPU in the STOP mode. You can also use them to check your wiring.

13.1 Test functions
Testing with the force table

The following functions are available in the force table.
● Monitoring of tags
Using the force tables, you can display the current values of the individual tags of a user
program or a CPU on the programming device or PC. You can monitor the table with or
without a trigger condition.
You can monitor the following tags:
– Bit memory
– Peripheral inputs (e.g. %I0.0:P)
● Forcing of peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs
You can force individual peripheral inputs or peripheral outputs.
– Peripheral inputs: Forcing of peripheral inputs (for example %I0.0:P) represents the
"bypassing" of sensors/inputs by specifying fixed values to the program. Instead of the
actual input value (via process image or via direct access) the program receives the
force value.
– Peripheral outputs: Forcing of peripheral outputs (for example %Q0.0:P) represents
the "bypassing" of the complete program by setting fixed values for the actuators.
Difference between modifying and forcing

The fundamental difference between the modifying and forcing functions consists in the
storage behavior:
● Modifying: Modifying of tags is an online function and is not stored in the CPU. You can
end modifying of tags in the watch table or by disconnecting the online connection.
● Forcing: A force job is written to the SIMATIC memory card and is retained after a
POWER OFF. You can only end the forcing of peripheral inputs and peripheral outputs in
the force table.
Testing with the LED flash test

In many online dialogs, you can perform an LED flash test. This function is useful, for
example, when you are not sure which device in the hardware configuration corresponds to
the device currently selected in the software.
When you click the "Flash LED" button, an LED flashes on the currently selected device. On
the CPU, the following LEDs flash: RUN/STOP LED, ERROR LED and MAINT LED. The
LEDs continue to flash until you terminate the flash test.

13.2 Reading out/saving service data
Testing with the trace and logic analyzer function

The trace function is used to record the CPU tags, depending on the settable trigger
conditions. Tags are, for example, the drive parameters or system and user tags of a CPU.
The CPU saves the recordings. You can display and evaluate the recordings with STEP 7, if
necessary.
The trace function can be called from the CPU's folder in the project tree, under the name
"Traces".
Simulation
With STEP 7 you can run and test the hardware and software of the project in a simulated
environment. Start the simulation using the menu command "Online" > "Simulation" > "Start".
Reference
You can find more information on test functions in the STEP 7 online help.
Further information about testing with trace and logic analyzer functions is available in the
Function Manual Using the trace and logic analyzer function
Introduction
In addition to the contents of the diagnostics buffer, the service data contains a wide range of
extra information about the internal status of the CPU. If a problem occurs the CPU that
cannot be solved with other methods, send the service data to our Service & Support team.
The service data allows Service & Support to run fast analysis of the problems that have
occurred.
Requirement
You can read service data with:
● the Web server
● STEP 7
● SIMATIC memory card

Procedure using the Web server

To read service data using the Web server, follow these steps:
1. Open a Web browser that is suitable for communication with the CPU.
2. Enter the following address in the address bar of the Web browser:
https://<CPU IP address>/save_service_data.html, e.g.
https://172.23.15.3/save_service_data.html
3. The service data page will appear on your screen, with a button for saving the service
data.
Figure 13-1 Reading out service data with the Web server
4. Save the service data locally on your PC/programming device, by clicking "Save
ServiceData".
Result: The CPU saves the data to a .dmp file with the following naming convention:
"<Article number> <serial number> <time stamp>.dmp". The file name cannot be changed.

A description of how to save service data is available under the keyword "Save service data"
in STEP 7 online help.
Procedure using the SIMATIC memory card

Use the SIMATIC memory card to read out the service data only if you are no longer able to
communicate with the CPU via Ethernet. In all other cases it is preferable to read out the
service data via the Web server or STEP 7.
To read service data using the SIMATIC memory card, follow these steps:
1. Insert the SIMATIC memory card into the card reader of your PC / programming device.
2. Open the job file S7_JOB.S7S in an editor.
3. Overwrite the entry PROGRAM with the string DUMP in the editor.
Do not use any spaces/line breaks/quotation marks to ensure that the file size is exactly
4 bytes.
4. Save the file under the existing file name.
5. Make sure that the SIMATIC memory card is not write-protected and insert it in the card
slot of the CPU.
Result: The CPU writes the service data file DUMP.S7S to the SIMATIC memory card and
remains in STOP mode.
The transfer of the service data has been completed as soon as the STOP LED stops
flashing and lights up continuously. If the transfer was successful, only the STOP LED lights
up. If the transfer was not successful, the STOP LED lights up and the ERROR LED flashes.
In case of an error, the CPU stores a text file with a note on the error that occurred in the
DUMP.S7S folder.

Introduction
This chapter lists the technical specifications of the system:
● The standards and test values that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system complies with
and fulfills.
● The test criteria according to which the ET 200SP distributed I/O system was tested.
Technical specifications for the modules

The technical specifications of the individual modules can be found in the manuals of the
modules themselves. In the event of deviations between the statements in this document
and the manuals, the statements in the manuals take priority.

Technical specifications
14.1 Standards and approvals
Currently valid markings and approvals
Note
Information on the components of the ET 200SP
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the components of the ET 200SP
Safety information
WARNING
Personal injury and damage to property may occur
In hazardous areas, personal injury and damage to property may occur if you disconnect
plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP distributed I/O system when disconnecting
plug-in connections in hazardous areas.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV 2 can become invalid.
WARNING
Area of application
This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-hazardous
areas.

CE marking
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements and protection targets of the
following EC directives and complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for
programmable logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European
Community:
● 2006/95/EC "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (Low-
Voltage Directive)
● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
● For ET 200SP fail-safe modules, the following also applies: 2006/42/EC "Machinery
Directive"
The EC declarations of conformity are available for the responsible authorities at:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Factory Automation
DF FA AS DH AMB
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
These are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, keyword
"Declaration of Conformity".
cULus approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
OR

cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 (ANSI/ISA 82.02.01)
CSA C22.2 No. 213
CSA C22.2 No. 1010-1
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
ATEX approval
According to EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type
of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)

IECEx approval
According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type
of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements)
Marking for Australia and New Zealand
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the standard
AS/NZS CISPR 16.
Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP

Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency
interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
Marking for the Eurasian Customs Union

EAC (Eurasian Conformity)
Customs Union of Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan
Declaration of conformity with the technical requirements of the Customs Union (TR CU).
IEC 61131
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements and criteria of the standard
IEC 61131-2 (Programmable logic controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests).
PROFINET standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158 Type 10.
PROFIBUS standard

IO-Link standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61131-9.
Shipbuilding approval
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Use in industrial environments

SIMATIC products are designed for use in industry.
Table 14- 1 Use in industrial environments
Area of applica- Interference emission requirements Interference immunity requirements

tion
Industry EN 61000-6-4:2011 EN 61000-6-2:2005
Use in residential areas
Note
The ET 200SP is intended for use in industrial areas; use in residential areas may have an
impact on radio/TV reception.
If you want to use the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in residential areas, you must ensure
that its radio frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with
EN 55011.
Suitable measures for achieving RF interference level Class B include, for example:
● Installation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in grounded control cabinets/control
boxes
● Use of filters in the supply lines
Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

14.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
Among other things, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system also meets the requirements of the
EMC legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite is that the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical
equipment.
EMC in accordance with NE21

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the EMC specifications of the NAMUR
recommendation NE21.
Pulse-shaped disturbance variables

The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with regard to pulse-shaped disturbance variables.
Table 14- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance variables
Pulse-shaped disturbance variable Tested with Corresponds to

degree of se-
verity
Electrostatic discharge in accord- Air discharge: ± 8 kV 3
ance with IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: ± 6 kV 3
Burst pulses (fast transients) in ±2 kV (power supply line) 3
accordance with IEC 61000-4-4 ±2 kV (signal line >30 m) 3
±1 kV (signal line <30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see Function manual Designing interference-
free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566))
• Asymmetric coupling ±2 kV (power supply lines)
DC with protective elements
3
±2 kV (signal lines/data lines only >30 m) with
protective elements if necessary
• Symmetric coupling ±1 kV (power supply line) DC with protective
elements
±1 kV (signal line/data line only >30 m) with
protective elements if necessary

Sinusoidal disturbance variables

The tables below show the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables.
● RF radiation
Table 14- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation
RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 Corresponds to degree

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated of severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 2.7 GHz 3
10 V/m 3 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)
● RF coupling
Table 14- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling
RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 Corresponds to degree

of severity
(10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance
Emission of radio frequency interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55016: Limit class A,
group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).
Table 14- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55016
Frequency Interference emission

30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m) QP
230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m) QP
Interference emission via the AC power supply in accordance with EN 55016: Limit class A,
Group 1.
Table 14- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply in accordance with EN 55016
Frequency Interference emission

0.15 MHz to 0.5 MHz < 79 dB (µV/m)Q
< 66 dB (µV/m) M
0.5 MHz to 30 MHz < 73 dB (µV/m)Q
< 60 dB (µV/m) M

14.3 Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-safe modules
Protecting ET 200SP with fail-safe modules against overvoltages

If your equipment requires protection from overvoltage, we recommend that you use an
external protective circuit (surge filter) between the load voltage power supply and the load
voltage input of the BaseUnits to ensure surge immunity for the ET 200SP with fail-safe
modules.
Note
Lightning protection measures always require a case-by-case examination of the entire
plant. Almost complete protection from overvoltages, however, can only be achieved if the
entire building surroundings have been designed for overvoltage protection. In particular, this
involves structural measures in the building design phase.
For detailed information regarding overvoltage protection, we recommend that you contact
your Siemens representative or a company specializing in lightning protection.

The following figure shows an example configuration with fail-safe modules. Voltage is
supplied by 1 power supply unit. Note, however, that the total current of the modules fed by
the power supply unit must not exceed the permissible limits. You can also use multiple
power supply units.
Figure 14-1 External protective circuit (surge filter) for ET 200SP with fail-safe modules

14.4 Shipping and storage conditions
Name Part number of Dehn Co.

A = BVT AD 24 918 402
B = DCO RK D 5 24 919 986
C = DEHNconnect DCO RK E 60 919 990
Introduction
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system exceeds requirements in terms of shipping and
storage conditions according to IEC 61131-2. The following information applies to modules
that are shipped and/or stored in their original packaging.
Table 14- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules
Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds with an altitude
of -1000 m to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal oscillations according to 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Impact according to IEC 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
14.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Operating conditions
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations.
The operating conditions exceed requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)

14.5 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions
Mechanical environmental conditions

The following table shows the mechanical environmental conditions in the form of sinusoidal
vibrations.
Table 14- 8 Mechanical environmental conditions
Frequency band ET 200SP with ET 200SP with ET 200SP with ET 200SP with digital
BusAdapters BA 2×FC, BusAdapters BA 2×RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA output module F-RQ
BA 2xSCRJ, BA BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5
SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC and LC/RJ45 A
BA LC/FC
5 ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration
10 ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude --- --- ---
60 ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz 5 g constant acceleration
Tests of mechanical environmental conditions

The following table provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the
tests of environmental mechanical conditions.
Table 14- 9 Tests of mechanical environmental conditions
Condition tested Test standard Comment

Vibration Vibration test accord- Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 oc-
ing to IEC 60068-2-6 tave/minute.
(sinusoidal) BA 2×RJ45, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA LC/RJ45, IM 155-6 PN BA, digital output
module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
BA 2×FC, BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/FC, BA 2xLC, BA LC/FC
• 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude
• 60 Hz ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz, 5 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three verti-
cally aligned axes
Shock Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three verti-
cally aligned axes
Continuous shock1 Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 1000 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of three
vertically aligned axes
1 Does not apply to digital output module F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A

14.6 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
Climatic environmental conditions

The table below shows the permissible climatic environmental conditions for the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system:
Table 14- 10 Climatic environmental conditions
Environmental conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature: -
horiz. mounting position: 0 to 60 °C
vertical mounting position: 0 to 50 °C
Permitted temperature 10 K/h -
change
Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation, corresponds to rela-
tive humidity (RH) stress grade 2 in accord-
ance with IEC 61131 part 2
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 to
2000 m
Concentration of pollutants SO2: <0.5 ppm; -
RH <60%, no condensation
H2S: <0.1 ppm;
RH <60%, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -
14.6 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and

rated voltage
Insulation
The insulation is designed in accordance with the requirements of EN 61131-2:2007.
Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: II
Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets protection class I and includes parts of
protection classes II and III.
The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for a functional earth FE.
Recommendation: For a configuration immune to interference, the line for the ground should
have a cross-section > 6 mm2.
The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor
connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I.

14.7 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres
Degree of protection IP20

Degree of protection IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all modules of the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system, which means:
● Protection against contact with standard probes
● Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm
● No protection against water
Rated voltage for operation

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding
tolerances listed in the following table.
Note the supply voltage of each module when selecting the rated voltage.
Table 14- 11 Rated voltage for operation
Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1
18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2
120 V AC 93 to 132 V AC
230 V AC 187 to 264 V AC
1 Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation according to
IEC 60364-4-41
2 Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g. as in the case of three-phase bridge power rectification

See product information "Use of subassemblies/modules in Zone 2 Hazardous Area"

Dimension drawings A
A.1 Shield connector
Dimensional diagram of the shield connector
Figure A-1 Dimensional diagram of the shield connector
A.2 Labeling strip
Dimensional diagram of labeling strips and roll
Figure A-2 Dimensional diagram of labeling strips and roll

Dimension drawings
A.3 Reference identification labels
A.3 Reference identification labels
Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet
Figure A-3 Dimensional diagram of reference identification label and sheet

Accessories/spare parts B
Accessories for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Table B- 1 Accessories, general
Accessories, general Packing unit Article number

BusAdapter
• BA 2×RJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard 1 unit 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Ethernet socket)
• BA 2×FC (PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect 1 unit 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

Ethernet connection)
• BA 2×SCRJ (PROFINET BusAdapter with POF/PCF 1 unit 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0

fiber-optic cable connection)
• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET 1 unit 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0

BusAdapter with POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ stand-
ard RJ45 connector)
• BA SCRJ/FC (media converter, PROFINET 1 unit 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0

BusAdapter with POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct
connection of bus cable)
• BA 2xLC (PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber- 1 unit 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0

optic cable connection)
• BA LC/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapt- 1 unit 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0

er with glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 con-
nector)
• BA LC/FC (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter 1 unit 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0

with glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of bus
cable)
• BA-Send 1xFC (for the station expansion via ET- 1 unit 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0
Connection, mixed configuration ET 200SP/ET 200AL)
Cover for the BusAdapter interface 5 units 6ES7591-3AA00-0AA0
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector 1 unit 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0
Server module (spare part) 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
BU cover
• 15 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0
• 20 mm wide 5 units 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0
24 V DC connector 10 units 6ES7193-4JB00-0AA0

Shield connection for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield 5 units 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0
terminals)

Accessories/spare parts
Accessories, general Packing unit Article number

Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules)
• Roll, light gray (with a total of 500 labeling strips) 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0
• Roll, yellow (with a total of 500 labeling strips) 1 unit 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0
• DIN A4 sheets, light gray (with a total of 1000 labeling 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0
strips)
• DIN A4 sheets, yellow (with a total of 1000 labeling 10 units 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0

strips)
Electronic coding element (type H) 5 units 6ES7193-6EH00-1AA0
Mounting rails, tinned steel strip
• Length: 483 mm 1 unit 6ES5710-8MA11
Table B- 2 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 15 mm wide
Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), Packing unit Article number
15 mm wide
16 process terminals (see I/O module manual)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 10 units 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 16); color 10 units 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0

code CC01
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to 16); color 10 units 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0

code CC02
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), gray 10 units 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0

(terminals 13 to 16); color code CC03
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to 12), blue 10 units 6ES7193-6CP04-2MA0

• Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 and 14), 10 units 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0

blue (terminals 15 and 16)
10 AUX terminals (for BU15-P16+A10+2D, BU15-P16+A10+2B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 10A); color code CC71 10 units 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0
• Red (terminals 1A to 10A); color code CC72 10 units 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0
• Blue (terminals 1A to 10A); color code CC73 10 units 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0
10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T)

• Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals 1 to 5C); 10 units 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0
color code CC74

Table B- 3 Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), 20 mm wide
Accessories, color identification labels (push-in terminals), Packing unit Article number
20 mm wide
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to 8), blue 10 units 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 and 10), blue 10 units 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0
(terminals 11 and 12), color code CC42
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), blue (terminal 10 units 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0
6); color code CC51
• Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals 3 and 4), 10 units 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0
blue (terminal 6); color code CC52
4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 4A); color code CC81 10 units 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0
• Red (terminals 1A to 4A); color code CC82 10 units 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0
• Blue (terminals 1A to 4A); color code CC83 10 units 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0

• Yellow-green (terminals 1A and 2A); color code CC84 10 units 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0
• Red (terminals 1A and 2A); color code CC85 10 units 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0
• Blue (terminals 1A and 2A); color code CC86 10 units 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0
Table B- 4 SIMATIC memory card accessories
Capacity Packing unit Article number

4 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LCxx-0AA0
12 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LExx-0AA0
24 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LFxx-0AA0
256 MB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LL02-0AA0
2 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LPxx-0AA0
32 GB 1 unit 6ES7954-8LT02-0AA0
Components for lightning protection (lightning protection zone transition 0B to 1, 1 to 2 and 2 to 3)

You must install overvoltage protection devices in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system for
lightning protection purposes. You can find more information in the Designing interference-
free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function
manual.

B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules
Online catalog
Additional article numbers for ET 200SP can be found on the Internet
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and online ordering system.
B.1 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection for fail-safe modules
Overvoltage arrestors for fail-safe modules
Note
This section only lists the overvoltage arrestors that may be used to protect the fail-safe
modules.
Be sure to observe the detailed information on lightning protection and overvoltage
protection of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in Electromagnetic compatibility of fail-
safe modules (Page 237).
Components for overvoltage protection of fail-safe modules (lightning protection zone

transition 0B to 1)
The overvoltage arrestors are only required for unshielded cables. The Configuring
interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)
Function Manual lists the overvoltage arrestors which you may use for fail-safe modules.

Calculating the leakage resistance C
Introduction
If you wish to protect the ET 200SP using a ground-fault detector or a residual current circuit
breaker, then you need the leakage resistance to select the correct safety components.
Ohmic resistance
When determining the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP, you must take into account the
ohmic resistance from the RC combination of the module in question:
Table C- 1 Ohmic resistance
Module Ohmic resistance from RC network

CPU/interface module 10 MΩ (±5 %)
BaseUnit BU15...D 10 MΩ (±5 %)
Formula
You can calculate the leakage resistance of the ET 200SP using the following formula if you
protect all of the modules listed above with one ground-fault detector:
RET200SP = Rmodule / N
RET200SP = Leakage resistance of the ET 200SP
Rmodule = Leakage resistance of a module
N = Number of BaseUnits BU15...D and interface module in the ET 200SP
RCPU/IM = RBU15...D = RModule = 9.5 MΩ

RCPU/IM = Leakage resistance of CP/interface module
RBU15...D = Leakage resistance of the BaseUnit BU15...D
If you protect the modules listed above within an ET 200SP with several ground-fault
detectors, you must determine the leakage resistance for each individual ground-fault
detector.

Calculating the leakage resistance
Example
The structure of an ET 200SP consists of an IM 155-6 PN ST, two BaseUnits BU15...D and
various input and output modules. The entire ET 200SP is protected with one ground-fault
detector:
Figure C-1 Calculation example for leakage resistance

Service & Support D
The unmatched complete service for the entire life cycle

For machine constructors, solution providers and plant operators: The service offering from
Siemens Industry Automation and Drive Technologies includes comprehensive services for a
wide range of different users in all sectors of the manufacturing and process industry.
To accompany our products and systems, we offer integrated and structured services that
provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant – from
planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and
modernization.
Our Service & Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and
drive technology from Siemens. We provide direct on-site support in more than 100 countries
through all phases of the life cycle of your machines and plants.
You have an experienced team of specialists at your side to provide active support and
bundled know-how. Regular training courses and intensive contact among our employees –
even across continents – ensure reliable service in the most diverse areas

Service & Support
Online Support
The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service &
Support at any time and from any location in the world.
You can find Online Support at the following address Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Technical Consulting
Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis,
definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the
creation of the automation solution.
Technical Support
Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all
our products and systems.
You can find Technical Support at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request).
Training
Extend your competitive edge – through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer.
You can find the training courses we offer at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).
Engineering Support
Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your
requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project.
Field Service
Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance – to ensure that
your machines and plants are always available.
Spare parts
In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly
increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill
from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains.
Repairs
Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to
reduce both to a minimum – with our worldwide repair facilities.

Service & Support
Optimization
During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing
productivity or reducing costs.
To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services.
Modernization
You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization – with comprehensive
services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning.
Service programs
Our service programs are selected service packages for an automation and drives system or
product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth
coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems.
The services of a Service Program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately.
Examples of service programs:
● Service contracts
● Plant IT Security Services
● Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering
● SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services
● SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence
● SIMATIC Remote Support Services
Advantages at a glance:
● Reduced downtimes for increased productivity
● Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services
● Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned
● Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times
● Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks
● Comprehensive service from a single source, fewer interfaces and greater expertise
Contact
At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training,
service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products supplied by Industry
Automation and Drive Technologies.
You can find your personal contact in our contacts database on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner).

Glossary
1oo1 evaluation
Type of → sensor evaluation – in the case of the 1oo1 evaluation, there → is one sensor with
a 1-channel connection to the F module.
1oo2 evaluation
Type of → sensor evaluation – in the case of 1oo2 evaluation , two input channels are
assigned one two-channel sensor or two one-channel sensors. The input signals are
compared internally for equivalence or nonequivalence.
Acknowledgment time
During the acknowledgment time, the → F-I/O acknowledge the sign of life specified by the →
F-CPU. The acknowledgment time is included in the calculation of the → monitoring time and
→ response time of the overall fail-safe system.
Actuator
Actuators can be power relays or contactors for switching on loads, or they can be loads
themselves (e.g., directly controlled solenoid valves).
Automation system
Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process
sequences of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The
automation system consists of different components and integrated system functions
depending on the automation task.
AUX bus
Self-assembling bus, can be used individually, for example, as a protective conductor bus or
for additional required voltage.
Availability
Availability is the probability that a system is functional at a specific point in time. Availability
can be increased by redundancy, e.g., by using multiple -> sensors at thesame measuring
point.

Glossary
BaseUnit
BaseUnits realize the electrical and mechanical connection of the I/O modules with the
interface module and the server module.
The inserted I/O module determines the signals at the terminals of the BaseUnits.
Depending on the selected BaseUnit, only certain terminals are available.
BaseUnit, dark-colored
Conduction of the internal power and AUX buses from the left adjacent module to the
subsequent modules on the right.
BaseUnit, light-colored
Inserted as first BaseUnit and opens a new potential group with electrical isolation. The
power and AUX buses are separate from the adjacent module on the left. It feeds the supply
voltage.
Baud rate
Data transmission rate; indicates the number of bits transmitted per second (baud rate = bit
rate).
BU cover
Cover for unused slots on the BaseUnit or placeholder for planned I/O modules. For a future
expansion, the reference identification label of the planned I/O module can be kept here.
Bus
Joint transmission path to which all participants of a fieldbus system are connected; has two
defined ends.
BusAdapter
Enables free selection of the connection technology for the PROFINET fieldbus.
Channel fault
Channel-specific fault, such as a wire break or short circuit.
In channel-specific passivation, the affected channel is either automatically reintegrated or
the fail-safe module must be removed and reinserted after the fault has been eliminated.
Channel group
The channels of a module are grouped together in a channel group. Certain parameters in
STEP 7 can only be assigned to channel groups, rather than to individual channels.

Glossary
Channel number
Channel numbers are used to uniquely identify the inputs and outputs of a module and to
assign channel-specific diagnostic messages.
Channel-specific passivation
With this type of passivation, only the affected channel is passivated in the event of a →
channel fault. In the event of a → module fault, all channels of the → fail-safe module are
passivated.
Configuration
Systematic arrangement of the individual modules.
Configuration control
Function that enables a flexible adjustment of the actual configuration based on a configured
maximum configuration via the user program. Input, output and diagnostics addresses
remain unchanged.
Connecting to common potential

Configuring a new potential group for which a new infeed is set up for the supply voltage.
Connection plug
Physical connection between device and cable.
CPU
The CPU uses the integrated system power supply to supply the electronics of the modules
via the backplane bus. The CPU contains the operating system and executes the user
program. The user program is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the
work memory of the CPU. The PROFINET interfaces of the CPU establish an Industrial
Ethernet connection. The CPUs of the ET 200SP support operation as an IO controller, I-
device or standalone CPU.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRC signature
The validity of the process values in the safety frame, the accuracy of the assigned address
references, and the safety-related parameters are validated by means of the CRC signature
in the safety frame.

Glossary
Crimping
Procedure in which two components, e.g. wire end ferrule and cable, are connected with
each other by plastic strain.
Dark period
Dark periods occur during shutdown tests and complete bit pattern tests. The fail-safe output
module switches test-related zero signals to the active output. This output is then briefly
disabled (= dark period). An adequate carrier → actuator will not respond to this and will
remain activated.
Derating
See temperature characteristics
Device name
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name.
An IO device is delivered without a device name. An IO device can only be addressed by the
IO controller after it has been assigned a device name via the PG/PC or via the topology,
e.g. for the transfer of configuration data (such as IP address) during startup or for the
exchange of user data during cyclic operation.
Diagnostics
Monitoring functions for the recognition, localization, classification, display and further
evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This
increases the availability of plants because commissioning times and downtimes are
reduced.
Discrepancy analysis
The discrepancy analysis for equivalence/non-equivalence is used for fail-safe applications
to prevent errors from time differences between two signals for the same function. The
discrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input
signals (when testing for non-equivalence: the same levels). A check is performed to
determine whether the difference (for nonequivalence testing: the same levels) has
disappeared after an assignable time period, the so-called discrepancy time. If not, this
means that a discrepancy error exists.
The discrepancy analysis compares the two input signals of the 1oo2 sensor evaluation in
the fail-safe input module.
Discrepancy time
Configurable time for the → discrepancy analysis. If the discrepancy time is set too high, the
fault detection time and → fault reaction time are extended unnecessarily. If the discrepancy
time is set too low, availability is decreased unnecessarily since a discrepancy error is
detected when, in reality, no error exists.

Glossary

System with input and output modules that are configured on a distributed basis, far away
from the CPU controlling them.
DP
→ Distributed I/O system
Earth
Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (potential equalization conductor) that brings the bodies of electrical
equipment and other conductive bodies to the same or almost the same potential, in order to
prevent disruptive or dangerous voltages between these bodies.
Fail-safe modules
ET 200SP modules with integrated safety functions that can be used for safety-related
operation (safety mode).
Fail-safe systems
Fail-safe systems (F-systems) remain in a safe state or immediately assume another safe
state as soon as particular failures occur.
Fault response time

The maximum fault response time of an F-system defines the interval between the
occurrence of any fault and a safe reaction at all affected fail-safe outputs.
For → F-systems overall: The maximum fault response time defines the interval between the
occurrence of any fault at any → F-I/O and the safe reaction at the corresponding fail-safe
output.
For digital inputs: The maximum fault response time defines the interval between the
occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the backplane bus.
For digital outputs: The maximum fault response time defines the interval between the
occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction at the digital output.

Glossary
Fault tolerance time

The fault tolerance time of a process is the time a process can be left unattended without risk
to life and limb of the operating personnel, or damage to the environment.
Any type of F-system control is tolerated within this fault tolerance time, i.e. the → F-system
can control its processes incorrectly or even not at all. The fault tolerance time depends on
the type of process and must be determined on a case-by-case basis.
F-CPU
An F-CPU is a central processing unit with fail-safe capability that is permitted for use in
SIMATIC Safety. A standard user program can also be run on the F-CPU.
F-I/O
Collective name for fail-safe inputs and outputs available in SIMATIC S7 for integration into
the SIMATIC Safety F-system. Available F-I/O modules:
● Fail-safe I/O module for ET 200eco
● Fail-safe signal modules S7-300 (F-SMs)
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200S
● Fail-safe modules for ET 200SP
● Fail-safe DP standard slaves
● Fail-safe PA field devices
● Fail-safe IO devices
Firmware update
Upgrade of firmware for modules (interface modules, I/O modules etc.), e.g. after function
extensions, to the newest firmware version (update).
F-monitoring time
→ PROFIsafe monitoring time
F-Systems
→ fail-safe systems
Functional ground
Functional ground is a low-impedance current path between electric circuits and ground. It is
not designed as a safety measure but instead, for example, as a measure to improve
interference immunity.

Glossary
Ground
All interconnected, inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous
contact voltage, even in the event of a fault.
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode by
means of a grounding system.
GSD file
As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET device that
are necessary for its configuration in XML format.
I/O modules
All modules that can be operated with a CPU or an interface module.
Identification data
Information that is saved in modules and that supports the user in checking the plant
configuration and locating hardware changes.
Interface module
Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O
system via a fieldbus to the CPU (IO controller) and prepares the data for and from I/O
modules.
IO-Link
IO-Link is a point-to-point connection to conventional and intelligent sensors/actuators by
unshielded standard cables in proven 3-wire technology. IO-Link is downward compatible to
all DI/DQ sensors/actuators. Switching status channel and data channel are designed in
proven 24 V DC technology.
Line
All the modules attached to a mounting rail.
Load current supply

Supply of modules like the interface module, power supply modules, I/O modules, and (if
applicable) sensors and actuators.

Glossary
MAC address
Device identification unique worldwide, which is already assigned to each PROFINET device
in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes for the
device ID (serial number). The MAC address is usually legible on the device.
Module fault
Module faults can be external faults (e.g. missing load voltage) or internal faults (e.g.
processor failure). Internal faults always require module replacement.
Monitoring time
→ PROFIsafe monitoring time
M-switch
Each fail-safe digital output of ET 200SP F-modules consists of a P-switch DO-Px (current
sourcing) and an M-switch DO-Mx (current sinking). The load is connected between the P-
switch and M-switch. The two switches are always activated so that voltage is applied to the
load.
Node
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. IO device via PROFINET IO.
Nonequivalent sensor
A nonequivalent → sensor is a two-way switch that is connected to two inputs of an → F-I/O
(via 2 channels) in → fail-safe systems (for → 1oo2 evaluation of sensor signals).
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment is the transfer of parameters from the IO controller/DP master to the
IO device/DP slave.
Passivation
If an → F-I/O module detects a fault it switches either the affected channel or all channels to
a → safe state, i.e. the channels of this F-I/O module are passivated. The F-I/O module
signals the detected faults to the → F-CPU.
When passivating channels at F-I/O with inputs, the → F-System provides fail-safe values for
the → safety program instead of the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs.
When passivating channels at F-I/O with outputs, the F-system returns fail-safe values (0) to
the fail-safe outputs instead of the output values provided by the safety program.

Glossary
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage
Performance Level
Performance Level (PL) according to ISO 13849-1:2006 or EN ISO 13849-1:2008
Potential group
Group of I/O modules that are jointly supplied with voltage.
Prewiring
Wiring the electrics on a mounting rail before the I/O modules are connected.
Process image (I/O)

The CPU transfers the values from the input and output modules to this memory area. At the
start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the input modules are transmitted to the
process image input. At the end of the cyclic program, the process image output is
transmitted as signal state to the output modules.
Product version (ES) = Functional status (FS)

The product version or functional status provides information on the hardware version of the
module.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, process and fieldbus standard that is specified in IEC 61158 Type 3. It
specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a bit-serial fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is available with the following protocols: DP (= Distributed Periphery), FMS (=
Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation) or TF (= Technological
Functions).
PROFINET
PROcess FIeld NETwork, open industrial Ethernet standard which continues PROFIBUS
and Industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation and engineering
model by PROFIBUS International e.V., defined as an automation standard.
PROFINET IO controller
Device used to address connected I/O devices (e.g. distributed I/O systems). This means:
The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned I/O devices. The IO
controller often corresponds to the CPU in which the automation program is running.

Glossary
PROFINET IO
Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the
scope of PROFINET.
PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device that can be assigned to one or more IO controllers (e.g. distributed
I/O system, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches).
PROFIsafe
Safety-oriented PROFINET I/O bus profile for communication between the → safety program
and the → F-I/O module in a → fail-safe system.
PROFIsafe address
Every → fail-safe module has a PROFIsafe address. You have to configure the PROFIsafe
address.
PROFIsafe monitoring time

Monitoring time for safety-related communication between the F-CPU and F-I/O
Proof-test interval
Period after which a component must be forced to fail-safe state, that is, it is either replaced
with an unused component, or is proven faultless.
Provider-Consumer principle
Principle of data communication on the PROFINET IO: in contrast to PROFIBUS, both
parties are independent providers when sending data.
P-switch
→ M-switch
Push-in terminal
Terminal for the tool-free connection of wires.
Redundancy, availability-enhancing
Multiple instances of components with the objective of maintaining component functionality in
the event of hardware faults.

Glossary
Redundancy, safety-enhancing
Multiple availability of components with the aim of exposing hardware faults based on
comparison; such as → 1oo2 evaluation in → fail-safe modules.
Reference identification
In accordance with EN 81346, a specific object is clearly referenced in relation to the system
to whose components the object belongs. Thus, unique identification of the modules in the
entire system is possible.
Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the participating circuits are considered and/or
measured.
Reintegration
After the elimination of a fault, it is necessary to ensure the reintegration (depassivation) of
the → F-I/O. Reintegration (switchover from fail-safe values to process values) occurs either
automatically or only after a user acknowledgment in the safety program.
In the case of a fail-safe input module, the process values pending at the fail-safe inputs are
made available to thesafety program again after reintegration. In the case of a fail-safe
output module, the → fail-safe system transfers the output values in the safety program to the
fail-safe outputs again.
Safe state
The basic principle of the safety concept in F-systems is the existence of a safe state for all
process variables. For the digital F-I/O, for example, the safe state is the value "0".
Safety class
Safety level (Safety Integrity Level) SIL according to IEC 61508:2010. The higher the Safety
Integrity Level, the more rigid the measures for prevention of systematic faults and for
management of systematic faults and hardware failures.
The fail-safe modules support operation in safety mode up to safety class SIL3.
Safety frame
In safety mode, data are transferred between the → F-CPU and → F-I/O in a safety frame.
Safety function
A mechanism integrated in the → F-CPU and → F-I/O that enables their use in → the fail-safe
system SIMATIC Safety.
According to IEC 61508:2010: A safety function is implemented by a safety system in order
to maintain or force a system safe state in the event of a specific fault.

Glossary
Safety mode
Operating mode of → F-I/O that enables → safety-related communication via → safety frames.
→ ET 200SP fail-safe modules can only used in safety mode.
Safety program
Safety-related user program
Safety-related communication
Communication used to exchange fail-safe data.
Self-assembling voltage buses

Two internal, self-assembling buses (P1 and P2) that supply the I/O modules with voltage.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
Sensor evaluation
There are two types of sensor evaluation:
→ 1oo1 evaluation – sensor signal is read once
→ 1oo2 evaluation – sensor signal is read in twice by the same F-module and compared
internally
Sensors
Sensors are used for accurate detection of digital and analog signals as well as routes,
positions, velocities, rotational speeds, masses, etc.
Server module
The server module completes the configuration of the ET 200SP.
SIL
Safety Integrated Level → safety class
Slave station
A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master.

Glossary
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for diagnosing
and also configuring the Ethernet infrastructure.
In the office area and in automation technology, devices support a wide range of
manufacturers on the Ethernet SNMP.
SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applications
with PROFINET.
Standard mode
Operating mode of F-I/O in which standard communication is possible by means of → safety
frames, but not → safety-related communication.
Fail-safe ET 200SP modules can only be operated in safety mode.
Switch
PROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passive
cable - the bus.
By contrast, Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each communication
node is interconnected directly with precisely one other communication node.
If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication node
is connected to the port of an active network component - the switch. Other communications
devices (including switches) can then be connected to the other ports of the switch. The
connection between a communication node and the switch remains a point-to-point
connection.
The task of a switch is thus to regenerate and distribute received signals. The switch "learns"
the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches and only
forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or switch.
A switch has a specific number of connections (ports). You connect at most one PROFINET
device or additional switch to each port.
Technology object
A technology object supports you in the configuration and commissioning of a technological
function.
The properties of real objects are represented by the technology objects in the controller.
Real objects can be, for example, controlled systems or drives.
The technology object includes all data of the real object that is required for its open-loop or
closed-loop control, and it signals the status information.
TIA Portal
Totally Integrated Automation Portal
The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation.
The software optimizes all operating, machine and process sequences.

Glossary
Total current
Sum of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.
TWIN wire end ferrule

Wire end ferrule for two cables
Value status
The value status is the binary additional information of a digital signal. The value status is
entered in the process image of the input and provides information on the validity of the
signal.

Index
Components
ET 200SP at a glance, 20
2 In accordance with DIN VDE regulation, 56
Configuration, 14
24 V DC supply, 50
Basics, 100
2xSCRJ BusAdapter, 74
Electrical, 58
On grounded reference potential, 55
Configuration control, 142
A
Configuration example, 170, 172, 174, 175, 177, 179
Accessories, 245 Configuration software, 97
Addressing, 102 Configuring, 97
Basics, 102 Properties of the CPUs, 101
Approvals, 230 Connecting
AUX bus (AUX(iliary) bus), 33 Bus adapter BA 2xRJ45 to interface module, 68
Cable shield, 64
Connecting BA 2xSCJR/FC BusAdapter, 79
B Connecting BA LC/FC BusAdapter, 86
Connecting BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter, 84
BA 2xLC BusAdapter, 81
Connecting BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter, 77
BaseUnit, 23, 26
Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45, 68
Modules with temperature measurement, 30
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP interface to the
Modules without temperature measurement, 29
interface module, 89
Mounting, dismantling, 45
Control data record, 152
Potential group, 32, 35
S7-1500, 150
Replacing the terminal box, 209
CPU
Types, 26
Backup/restore contents, 107
wiring, 62
Reading out service data, 227
Wiring rules, 60
Reset to factory settings, 217
BU cover
Description, 24
Installation, 90
D
BusAdapter, 22
Degree of protection, 242
Dimensional diagram
C Labeling strip, 243
Reference identification label, 244
Cable shield, 64
Shield connector, 243
Changing type
Coding element, 206
I/O module, 207
E
Climatic environmental conditions, 241
Color identification label, 93 Electrical isolation, 58
Description, 25 Electrical relationships, 58
Installing, 94 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 235
Commissioning, 168, 170, 175 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility), 235
Removing/inserting a SIMATIC memory card, 180 EMERGENCY STOP devices, 49
Reset to factory settings, 220 Environmental conditions
Startup, 180 Climatic, 241
Mechanical, 240

Index
ET 200SP Reset to factory settings, 220

Area of application, 14 Wiring rules, 60
Commissioning, 168
Components, 20
Configuration example, 15, 18 L
Configuring, 97
Labeling strip
Overall configuration, 57
Dimensional diagram, 243
Rules and regulations for operation, 49
Labeling strips, 25
Selecting a BaseUnit, 26
Installing, 96
Short-circuit / overload protection, 56
Leakage resistance, 249
Example
Lightning protection, 50
ET 200SP configuration, 15, 18
Line voltage, 49
Leakage resistance, 250
Potential group, configuration, 37
M
F Maintenance, 203
Changing type, 207
Factory settings, 217
Firmware update, 211
Firmware update, 211
Reading out service data, 227
Removal and insertion, 203
Replacing modules, 208
G
Grounding Reset to factory settings, 217
Configuration on grounded reference potential, 55 Test functions, 224
Graphical overview of ET 200SP, 57 Marking, 91
Color coding, factory setting, 91
Optional, 93
I Maximum configuration, 31
Mechanical environmental conditions, 240
I/O module, 23
Memory reset
Changing type, 207
Automatic, 188
Inserting or removing, 203
Basics, 187
Installation, 90
Manual, 189
replace, 208
Minimum clearances, 41
Identification data, 191
Mounting rail, 20, 40
Incoming supply, grounded, 55
Installation
BaseUnit, 45
O
BU cover, 90
I/O module, 90, 203 OBs, 120
Installation position, 39 Event source, 121
Interface module, 42 Overload behavior, 123
Minimum clearances, 41 Priorities, 120
Mounting rail, 40 Priorities and runtime behavior, 122
Rules, 42 Queue, 120
Server module, 48 Similar events, 123
Installation position, 39 Start events, 120
Insulation, 241 Threshold mechanism, 124
Interface module, 21 Time error OB, 124
Connecting the supply voltage, 66 Operating modes
Mounting, dismantling, 42 Basics, 182
RESET, 220 Operating mode transitions, 186

Index
RUN, 185 Reset to factory settings, 220

Setting the startup behavior, 184 with RESET button, 220
STARTUP, 182
STOP, 185
Option handling, (See configuration control) S
Overall configuration, 57
Safe electrical isolation, 56
Overload behavior, 123
Server module, 24
Overview, graphic
Mounting, dismantling, 48
Grounding the ET 200SP, 57
Service & Support, 251
Shield connection
Description, 25
P
Shield connector
PELV, 56 Dimensional diagram, 243
Potential group Shipping conditions, 239
Configuration example, 37 Short-circuit and overload protection according to
Forming, 32, 35 DIN VDE regulation, 56
Operating principle, graphical overview, 34, 35 SIMATIC ET 200SP, 13
Process image SIMATIC memory card, 196, 201
Inputs and outputs, 104 Basics, 196
Process image partition Firmware card, 201
Updating in the user program, 105 Program card, 201
updating, automatically, 105 SIMATIC Memory Card, 202
PROFINET IO, 168 Possible applications, 202
Connecting BA LC/FC BusAdapter, 86 Updating firmware, 202
Connecting BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter, 84 Spare parts, 245
Connecting BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter, 79 Standards, 230
Connecting BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter, 77 Starting up the ET 200SP, 180
Connecting BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45, 68 Storage conditions, 239
Protection, 133, 138, 140 Supply voltage, 66
Access levels, 134 Connecting, 66
Behavior of a password-protected CPU, 136 Potential group, 32, 35
Copy protection, 140
Know-how protection, 138
Protection class, 241, 241 T
Climatic environmental conditions, 241
R
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 235
Rated voltage, 242 Mechanical environmental conditions, 240
Reading out service data, 227 Shipping and storage conditions, 239
Reassigning parameters, 190 Standards and approvals, 230
Reference identification label, 25, 93 Test functions, 224
Dimensional diagram, 244 Test voltage, 241
Installing, 96
Remove, 203
Replacement W
Coding element, 208
Wiring
I/O module, 208
BA LC/FC BusAdapter to interface module, 86
Terminal box on the BaseUnit, 209
BaseUnits, 62
Connecting BA 2xSCRJ/FC BusAdapter to interface
RESET, 220
module, 79

Index
Connecting BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter to interface

module, 84
Connecting BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter to interface
module, 77
General rules for ET 200SP, 49
Rules, 60
Z
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmosphere, 242

Product information on the ___________________
Preface
Module overview of
documentation of the ET 200SP ___________________
ET 200SP 1
distributed I/O system Supplements to ET 200SP
SIMATIC
___________________
documentation 2
ET 200SP
Product information on the documentation of the
Product Information
04/2016
A5E03799595-AS
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03799595-AS Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2016.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Validity
This product information supplements the documentation for the ET 200SP and takes
precedence over our system manuals, function manuals and product manuals.
Product information on the documentation of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Product Information, 04/2016, A5E03799595-AS 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Module overview of ET 200SP ................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules ............................................................ 5
1.2 CPUs ...................................................................................................................................... 11
1.3 Interface modules................................................................................................................... 13
1.4 BaseUnits ............................................................................................................................... 14
1.5 I/O modules ............................................................................................................................ 15
1.6 Motor starters ......................................................................................................................... 17
1.7 Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 18
2 Supplements to ET 200SP documentation ............................................................................................ 22
2.1 Function manuals ................................................................................................................... 22
2.2 System manual ...................................................................................................................... 22
2.3 CPU manuals ......................................................................................................................... 23
2.4 Interface module manuals ...................................................................................................... 28
2.5 I/O module manuals ............................................................................................................... 31
2.5.1 Digital module device manuals .............................................................................................. 33
2.5.2 Analog module device manuals ............................................................................................. 36
2.5.3 Communications module manuals ......................................................................................... 45

4 Product Information, 04/2016, A5E03799595-AS
Module overview of ET 200SP 1
1.1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules
Contents
This product information includes amendments and corrections to the documentation of the
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679227/133300).
Which I/O modules / motor starters fit on a BaseUnit?

The following table provides an overview of the I/O modules / motor starters that fit on the
corresponding compatible BaseUnits:
Table 1- 1 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules
I/O module BaseUnit BU15- BaseUnit BU20- Color-coded
BU type A0 BU type A1 BU type B0 BU type B1 BU type BU type BU type D0 BU type label for
C0 C1 process
P16+A10+2D P16+A0+12D/T P12+A4+0B P12+A0+4B P12+A0+0B F0
terminals
P16+A0+2D P16+A0+2D/T P6+A2+4D P6+A2+4B P8+A4+0B
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
Digital I/O modules
DI ✓ CC00
16x24VDC
ST
DI 8x24VDC ✓ CC01
ST
DI 8x24VDC ✓ CC01
HF
DI 8x24VDC ✓ CC01
HS

Module overview of ET 200SP
C0 C1 process
terminals
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
DI 8x24VDC ✓ CC01
BA
DI 8x24VDC ✓ CC02
SRC BA
DI ✓ CC01
8xNAMUR
HF
DI ✓ CC41
4x120..230V
AC ST
DQ ✓ CC00
16x24VDC/0.
5A ST
DQ ✓ CC02
4x24VDC/2A
ST
DQ ✓ CC02
8x24VDC/0.5
ST
DQ ✓ CC02
8x24VDC/0.5
A HF
DQ ✓ CC02
8x24VDC/0.5
A BA

C0 C1 process
terminals
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
DQ ✓ CC01
8x24VDC/0.5
A SNK BA
DQ ✓ CC41
4x24..230VA
C/2A ST
DQ ✓ CC02
4x24VDC/2A
HF
DQ ✓ CC00
4x24VDC/2A
HS
RQ ✓ CC00
4x24VUC/2A
CO ST
RQ ✓ ✓ --- ---
4x120VDC-
230VAC/5A
NO ST
RQ ✓ ✓ --- ---
4x120VDC-
230VAC/5A
NO MA ST
Analog I/O modules
AI 4xRTD/TC ✓ ✓ CC00
2-/3-/4-wire
HF
AI 8xRTD/TC ✓ ✓ CC00
2-wire HF

C0 C1 process
terminals
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
AI 8xU BA ✓ ✓ CC02
AI 2xU ST ✓ ✓ CC00
AI 2xI 2-/4- ✓ ✓ CC05

wire ST
AI 4xU/I 2- ✓ ✓ CC03
wire ST
AI 2xU/I 2-/4- ✓ ✓ CC03

wire HF
AI 2xU/I 2-/4- ✓ ✓ CC00

wire HS
AI 8xI 2-/4- ✓ ✓ CC01

wire BA
AI 4xI 2-/4- ✓ ✓ CC03

wire ST
AI 4xI 2-wire ✓ ✓ CC03

4...20mA
HART

C0 C1 process
terminals
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
AQ 2xU ST ✓ ✓ CC00
AQ 2xI ST ✓ ✓ CC00
AQ 4xU/I ST ✓ ✓ CC00
AQ 2xU/I HS ✓ ✓ CC00
AQ 2xU/I HF ✓ ✓ CC00
AI Energy ✓ --- ---

Meter
400VAC ST
AI Energy ✓ --- ---
Meter
480VAC ST
Fail-safe modules
F-PM-E ✓ CC52
24VDC/8A
PPM ST
F-DI ✓ CC01
8x24VDC HF
F-DQ ✓ CC02
4x24VDC/2A
PM HF

C0 C1 process
terminals
P16+A10+2B P16+A0+12B/T
P16+A0+2B P16+A0+2B/T
F-RQ ✓ CC42
1x24VDC/24.
.230VAC/5A
Communication modules
CM 4xIO- ✓ CC04
Link
CM AS-i ✓ --- ---

Master ST
F-CM AS-i ✓ ✓ --- ---
Safety ST
CM PtP ✓ --- ---
Technology modules
TM Count ✓ --- ---
1x24V
TM PosInput ✓ --- ---
1
TM Timer ✓ --- ---
DIDQ
10x24V
TM Pulse ✓ --- ---
2x24V
SIWAREX ✓ --- ---
WP321

1.2 CPUs
Table 1- 2 Possible combinations of BaseUnits and motor starters
Motor starters BaseUnit BU30- Color-coded label for

MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 process terminals
with infeed 24 V DC with infeed 500 V with infeed 24 V without infeed

and 500 V AC AC DC
Direct starter
DS 0.3 - 1 A ✓ --- ---
DS 0.9 - 3 A ✓ --- ---
DS 2.8 - 9 A ✓ --- ---
Reversing starter
RS 0.3 - 1 A ✓ --- ---
RS 0.9 - 3 A ✓ --- ---
RS 2.8 - 9 A ✓ --- ---
1.2 CPUs
CPUs
CPU Number in pack Article number

CPU 1510SP-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7510-1DJ0x-0AB0
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7510-1SJ0x-0AB0
CPU 1512SP-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7512-1DK0x-0AB0
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN with server module Pack of 1 6ES7512-1SK0x-0AB0
CPU 1515SP PC with server module Pack of 1 6ES7677-2AAxx-0xx0
Important differences between CPUs...PN

Features CPU 1510SP-1 CPU 1510SP F-1 CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
PN PN
Bus connection PROFINET: PROFINET:
BusAdapter (port 1, 2) BusAdapter (port 1, 2)
• BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware version • BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware version 1.6)
1.6) • BA 2xFC (as of firmware version V1.6)
• BA 2xFC (as of firmware version • BA 2xSCRJ (as of firmware V1.8)1
V1.6)
• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as of firmware V1.8)1
RJ45, integrated (port 3)
• BA SCRJ/FC (as of firmware V1.8)1
RJ45, integrated (port 3)
PROFIBUS:
PROFIBUS DP connection socket via CM DP communication module
Number of modules 64
Data work memory 750 KB 750 KB 1 MB 1 MB

1.2 CPUs
Important differences between CPUs...PN

Features CPU 1510SP-1 CPU 1510SP F-1 CPU 1512SP-1 PN CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
PN PN
Code work memory 100 KB 150 KB 200 KB 300 KB
Address space 1280 bytes
Multi hot-swapping Yes
Can be used for safety No Yes No Yes
applications (supports
PROFIsafe V2.0)
1 Only with article numbers 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0 and 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0
Note
The CM AS-i Master ST and F-CM AS-i Safety ST communication modules are supported as
of firmware V1.8 of the CPUs. Note the following additional requirements:
CM AS-i Master ST:
• Firmware version of the CM AS-i Master ST: V1.1
• STEP 7 (TIA Portal): as of V13 SP1 Update 4
F-CM AS-i Safety ST
• Firmware version of the CM AS-i Safety ST: V1.0
• STEP 7 (TIA Portal): as of V13 SP1 Update 4 and HSP0070 V3.0

1.3 Interface modules
1.3 Interface modules
Interface modules
Interface modules Number in pack Article number

Interface module IM 155-6 PN BA Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Interface module IM 155-6 PN ST
• with BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 and server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0
• with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0
Interface module IM 155-6 PN HF with server module Pack of 1 6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0

Interface module IM 155-6 DP HF with PROFIBUS FastConnect Pack of 1 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0) and server module
Important differences between the interface modules

Features IM 155-6 PN IM 155-6 PN ST IM 155-6 PN HF IM 155-6 DP HF
BA
Bus connection PROFINET: PROFINET: PROFINET: PROFIBUS:
2xRJ45, inte- BusAdapter BusAdapter PROFIBUS DP
grated connection sock-
• BA 2xRJ45 (as of • BA 2xRJ45 (as of firmware V2.0)
et
firmware V1.0) • BA 2xFC (as of firmware V2.0)
• BA 2xFC (as of • BA 2xSCRJ (as of firmware V2.2)
firmware V1.0)
• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (as of firmware
V3.1)
• BA SCRJ/FC (as of firmware
V3.1)
• BA 2xLC (as of firmware V3.3)
• BA LC/RJ45 (as of firmware V3.3)
• BA LC/FC (as of firmware V3.3)
Number of modules 12 32 64 32
RESET button No Yes Yes Not necessary
Address space (I/O 32 bytes 798 bytes 1440 bytes 244 bytes
data)
Multi hot-swapping No No Yes Yes
Table 1- 3 Station expansion via ET-Connection (mixed configuration ET 200SP/ET 200AL)
Modules Number in pack Article number

BU-Send Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
BA-Send 1xFC Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0

1.4 BaseUnits
1.4 BaseUnits
BaseUnits
Table 1- 4 BaseUnits for I/O modules
BU type BaseUnits (short name) Color-coded labels* Packaging unit Article number
A0 BU15-P16+A10+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0DA0
A10: CC71 to CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2DA0
A0 BU15-P16+A0+2D P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2DA0
A0 BU15-P16+A10+2B P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BA0
A10: CC71 to CC73 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2BA0
A0 BU15-P16+A0+2B P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP00-2BA0
A1 BU15-P16+A0+12D/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP40-0DA1
12D: CC74
A1 BU15-P16+A0+2D/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0DA1
A1 BU15-P16+A0+12B/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP40-0BA1
12B: CC74
A1 BU15-P16+A0+2B/T P16: CC00 to CC05 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BA1
B0 BU20-P12+A4+0B A4: CC81 to CC83 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB0
Pack of 10 6ES7193-6BP20-2BB0
B1 BU20-P12+A0+4B P12: CC41 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BB1
C0 BU20-P6+A2+4D P6: CC51, CC52 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0DC0
A2: CC84 to CC86
C1 BU20-P6+A2+4B P6: CC51 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BC1
A2: CC84 to CC86
D0 BU20-P12+A0+0B --- Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0
F0 BU20-P8+A4+0B P8: CC42 Pack of 1 6ES7193-6BP20-0BF0
* not shipped with the BaseUnit
Table 1- 5 BaseUnits for motor starters
BU type BaseUnits (short name) Color-coded labels Packaging unit Article number
MS1 BU30-MS1 --- Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0AP0
MS2 BU30-MS2 --- Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0CP0
MS3 BU30-MS3 --- Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0BP0
MS4 BU30-MS4 --- Pack of 1 3RK1908-0AP00-0DP0

1.5 I/O modules
1.5 I/O modules
I/O modules
Digital I/O modules Number in pack Article number

DI 16x24VDC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BH00-2BA0
DI 8x24VDC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BF00-2BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
DI 8x24VDC HS Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
DI 8xNAMUR HF Pack of 1 6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
DI 8x24VDC BA Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0
Pack of 10 6ES7131-6BF00-2AA0
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA Pack of 1 6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0
DI 4x120..230VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BH00-2BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BF00-2BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BF00-2AA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A SNK BA Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6BD20-2BA0
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6FD00-2BB1
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS Pack of 1 6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1
Pack of 10 6ES7132-6HD00-2BB1
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Pack of 1 6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1

1.5 I/O modules
Analog I/O modules Number in pack Article number

AI 8xU BA Pack of 1 6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
AI 2xU ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1
Pack of 10 6ES7134-6HD00-2BA1
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS Pack of 1 6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Pack of 10 6ES7134-6JF00-2CA1
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF Pack of 1 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
Pack of 10 6ES7134-6JD00-2CA1
AI 4xI 2-wire 4...20mA HART Pack of 1 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
AQ 2xU ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1
AQ 2xI ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1
AQ 4xU/I ST Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
AQ 2xU/I HF Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1
AQ 2xU/I HS Pack of 1 6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1
AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST Pack of 1 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
Fail-safe modules Number in pack Article number

F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST Pack of 1 6ES7136-6PA00-0BC0
F-DI 8x24VDC HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6BA00-0CA0
F-DQ 4x24VDC/2A PM HF Pack of 1 6ES7136-6DB00-0CA0
F-RQ 1x24VDC/24..230VAC/5A Pack of 1 6ES7136-6RA00-0BF0
Communication modules Number in pack Article number

CM 4xIO-Link Pack of 1 6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0
CM AS-i Master ST Pack of 1 3RK7137-6SA00-0BC1
F-CM AS-i Safety ST Pack of 1 3RK7136-6SC00-0BC1
CM PtP Pack of 1 6ES7137-6AA00-0BA0
CM DP (for CPU) Pack of 1 6ES7545-5DA00-0AB0

1.6 Motor starters
Technology module Number in pack Article number

TM Count 1x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6AA00-0BA0
TM PosInput 1 Pack of 1 6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0
TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6CG00-0BA0
TM Pulse 2x24V Pack of 1 6ES7138-6DB00-0BB1
SIWAREX WP321 Pack of 1 7MH4138-6AA00-0BA0
1.6 Motor starters
Motor starters
Direct starter Packaging unit Article number

DS 0.3 - 1 A Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AB00-0CP0
DS 0.9 - 3 A Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AC00-0CP0
DS 2.8 - 9 A Pack of 1 3RK1308-0AD00-0CP0
Reversing starter Packaging unit Article number

RS 0.3 - 1 A Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0
RS 0.9 - 3 A Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BC00-0CP0
RS 2.8 - 9 A Pack of 1 3RK1308-0BD00-0CP0

1.7 Accessories
1.7 Accessories
Accessories
General accessories Packaging unit Article number

BusAdapter
• BA 2×RJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Ethernet socket)
• BA 2×FC (PROFINET BusAdapter with FastConnect Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

• BA 2xSCRJ (PROFINET BusAdapter with POF/PCF Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0

fiber-optic cable connection)
• BA SCRJ/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0

BusAdapter with fiber-optic cable FOC ⇔ standard
RJ45 connector)
• BA SCRJ/FC (media converter, PROFINET Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0

BusAdapter with fiber-optic cable FOC ⇔ direct con-
nection of bus cable)
• BA 2xLC (PROFINET BusAdapter with glass fiber- Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0

optic cable connection)
• BA LC/RJ45 (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapt- Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0

er with glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 con-
nector)
• BA LC/FC (media converter, PROFINET BusAdapter Pack of 1 6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0

with glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of bus
cable)
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus Pack of 1 6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0
connector
Server module (spare part) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
BU cover
• 15 mm wide Pack of 5 6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0
• 20 mm wide Pack of 5 6ES7133-6CV20-1AM0
Shield connector for BaseUnit (shield contacts and shield Pack of 5 6ES7193-6SC00-1AM0
terminals)
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Labeling strips (for labeling the I/O modules)
• Roll, light gray (with a total of 500 labeling strips) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6LR10-0AA0
• Roll, yellow (with a total of 500 labeling strips) Pack of 1 6ES7193-6LR10-0AG0
• DIN A4 sheets, light gray (with a total of 1000 labeling Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LA10-0AA0
strips)

1.7 Accessories
General accessories Packaging unit Article number

• DIN A4 sheets, yellow (with a total of 1000 labeling Pack of 10 6ES7193-6LA10-0AG0
strips)
Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip
• Length: 483 mm Pack of 1 6ES5710-8MA11
Accessories color-coded labels (push-in ter- Packaging unit Article number

minals), 15 mm wide
16 process terminals (see manual for I/O module)
• Gray (terminals 1 to 16); color code CC00 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP00-2MA0
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0

16); color code CC01
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), blue (terminals 9 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0

16); color code CC02

12), gray (terminals 13 to 16); color code
CC03

1.7 Accessories

minals), 15 mm wide
12), blue (terminals 13 to 16); color code
CC04
• Gray (terminals 1 to 12), red (terminals 13 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP05-2MA0

and 14), blue (terminals 15 and 16);
color code CC05

• Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 10A); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP71-2AA0
code CC71
• Red (terminals 1A to 10A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP72-2AA0

CC72
• Blue (terminals 1A to 10A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP73-2AA0

CC73
10 add-on terminals (for BU15-P16+A0+12D/T, BU15-P16+A0+12B/T)

• Red (terminals 1B to 5B), blue (terminals Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP74-2AA0
1C to 5C); color code CC74

minals), 20 mm wide
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminals 5 to Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
8), blue (terminals 9 to 12); color code
CC41
• Gray (terminals 1 to 8), red (terminals 9 Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP42-2MB0

and 10), blue (terminals 11 and 12), color
code CC42

1.7 Accessories

minals), 20 mm wide
• Gray (terminals 1 to 4), red (terminal 5), Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP51-2MC0
blue (terminal 6); color code CC51
• Gray (terminals 1, 2 and 5), red (terminals Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP52-2MC0

3 and 4), blue (terminal 6); color code
CC52
4 AUX terminals (for BU20-P12+A4+0B)
• Yellow-green (terminals 1A to 4A); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP81-2AB0
code CC81
• Red (terminals 1A to 4A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP82-2AB0

CC82
• Blue (terminals 1A to 4A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP83-2AB0

CC83
• Yellow-green (terminals 1A and 2A); color Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP84-2AC0
code CC84
• Red (terminals 1A and 2A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP85-2AC0

CC85
• Blue (terminals 1A and 2A); color code Pack of 10 6ES7193-6CP86-2AC0

CC86
Accessories for motor starter Packaging unit Article number

3DI / LC module Pack of 1 3RK1908-1AA00-0BP0
Fan Pack of 1 3RW4928-8VB00
Additional mechanical bracket for BaseUnit Pack of 1 3RK1908-1EA00-1BP0
Cover for an empty BaseUnit Pack of 1 3RK1908-1CA00-0BP0
Touch protection cover for infeed bus Pack of 1 3RK1908-1DA00-2BP0

Supplements to ET 200SP documentation 2
2.1 Function manuals
Function manuals for the CPUs

The following function manuals apply to CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ0x-0AB0),
CPU1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SK0x-0AB0), CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK0x-0AB0)
and CPU1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK0x-0AB0):
Topic Documentation Most important contents

Memory concept Structure and use of the CPU • Structure
memory
• Application
(http://support.automation.siemens.
com/WW/view/en/59193101)
Trace and logic analyzer Using the trace and logic analyzer • Software user interface
function function
• Operation
com/WW/view/en/64897128) • Devices
Communication Web server • Basics
• Functions
• Operation
Cycle and response times Cycle and response times • Basics
• Calculations
2.2 System manual
System Manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O system, Edition 07/2014

Section 14.1 Standards and approvals
Note
Shipbuilding approval
A shipbuilding approval is currently not available for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
Keep this in mind when operating the ET 200SP in combination with ET 200AL via an ET
connection.

Supplements to ET 200SP documentation
2.3 CPU manuals
2.3 CPU manuals
Manuals CPU 1512SP-1 PN, edition 12/2014; CPU 1512SP F-1 PN, edition 12/2014;
As of firmware V1.8 and STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V13 SP1 Update 4, the CPUs
● CPU1512SP -1 PN: 6ES7512-1DK01-0AB0
● CPU1512SP F-1 PN: 6ES7512-1SK01-0AB0
support the following BusAdapters:
● BA 2×SCRJ
● BA SCRJ/RJ45
● BA SCRJ/FC
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

The following table shows the signal names and description of the terminal assignment for
the BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter.
Table 2- 1 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ
View Signal Description

name
① Receiver / Receive Data
② Sender / Transmit Data

2.3 CPU manuals
Table 2- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ
6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO
SCRJ 2
Cable length
• PCF 100 m
• Plastic FOC (POF) 50 m
• PCF-GI 300 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 50 g

2.3 CPU manuals
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

the BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter.
Table 2- 3 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45
View Signal name Description

1 TD Transmit Data +
2 TD_N Transmit Data –
3 RD Receive Data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive Data –
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
Table 2- 4 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45
6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45)
RJ45 Yes; 1 x
SCRJ 1
Cable length
• PCF 100 m
• PCF-GI 300 m
• Copper cables 100 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

2.3 CPU manuals
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter.
The I/Os of the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter are shown individually for a clearer overview.
Table 2- 5 Terminal assignment PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

1 TD Transmit Data +
2 TD_N Transmit Data –
3 RD Receive Data +
4 RD_N Receive Data -
Table 2- 6 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC
6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC)
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1 x
SCRJ 1
Cable length
• PCF 100 m
• PCF-GI 300 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

2.3 CPU manuals
MT1/MT2 LEDs on BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45, BA SCRJ/FC
Table 2- 7 Status and error displays of MT1/MT2 LEDs
LED Meaning Remedy

MT1/MT2*
No error ---
Off
• Fiber-optic error Causes and measures for the transmission route:
On • Maintenance demanded: Attenuation • Replacement of fiber-optic cable if damaged or
through the fiber-optic cable is so high aged
that operation will soon no longer be • Correct installation of the PROFINET connect-
possible. or/PROFINET connections
• Adherence to maximum length of 50 m for POF
cable or 100 m for PCF cable
• Secure fit of the FOC connector.
* Only available on BusAdapter BA 2xSCRJ

2.4 Interface module manuals
Configuration notes on interface modules depending on the I/O modules
Module IM 155-6 IM 155-6 PN ST IM 155-6 PN HF IM 155-DP HF

PN BA
Firm- V3.2 V1. V1. V3. V3. V2. V2. V2. V3. V3. V3. V1. V1. V3. V3.
ware 0 1 1 3 0 1 2 0 1 3 0 1 0 1
version
AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
AI 2xU ST V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓
AI 8xU BA V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓
AI Energy Meter V3.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
400VAC ST
AI Energy Meter V4.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
480VAC ST
AQ 2xI ST V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
AQ 2xU ST V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
DI 8x24VDC BA V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓
DI 8x24VDC HS V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓
DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DI 16x24VDC ST V1.1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS V1.0 ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
RQ 4x120VDC- V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
230VAC/5A NO MA ST
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA V1.0 ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓ --- --- --- ✓ ✓ ✓ --- --- ✓ ✓
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A V1.1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ST
--- This combination is not permitted in the configuration

IM 155-6 PN ST manual, Edition 12/2015

Response times
The response time of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of:
● Backplane bus cycle time and
● Operating system processing
Note
Validity of the formula
The following formula applies to the ET 200SP backplane bus.
The following formula does not apply to the ET-Connection bus.
Backplane bus cycle time

The backplane bus cycle time is the time the interface module requires to output new output
data, read new input data and then copy the data to the PROFINET send buffer.
The backplane bus cycle time is the result of the update time configured for the interface
module as IO device and is at least 1 ms.
● If the configured update time ≥ 1 ms, the backplane bus cycle time is equal to the
configured update time.
● If the configured update time < 1 ms, the backplane bus cycle time is the product of an
integer multiple of the configured update time.
Table 2- 8 Example calculation
Configured update time Backplane bus cycle time (integer multiple, minimum 1 ms)
250 µs 4 x 250 μs = 1000 μs
750 µs 2 x 750 μs = 1500 μs
1000 μs 1000 μs
2000 μs 2000 μs

Operating system processing time

The operating system processing time is calculated based on the following formula:
Operating system processing time output
Operating system processing time_output[μs] = 147 + 3.775 number_m + 0.275 bytes_out
Operating system processing time input
Operating system processing time_input[μs] = 158.3 + 2.325 number_m + 0.325 bytes_in
Explanation of the parameters:

number_m: Total number of all modules (incl. server module)
bytes_out: Sum of all output bytes
bytes_in: Sum of all input bytes
Calculating the response time

Response time output
The response time output of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of:
● Operating system processing time_output.
Response time input
The response time input of the IM 155-6 PN ST is made up of:
● Operating system processing time_input.

2.5 I/O module manuals
Configuration notes on the I/O modules

(supplement to Product overview section in the manual)
I/O module Order number Firmware STEP 7 (TIA STEP 7 V5.5

version Portal) SP3
Digital input modules DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00- V1.1.0 HSP0162 HSP0229 V6.0
0BA0 V13 SP1 or
higher
DI 8x24VDC BA 6ES7131-6BF00- V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0229 V5.0
0AA0
DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0229 V4.0
0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7131-6BF00- V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0229 V6.0
0CA0 as of V13 SP1
Update 4
DI 8x24VDC HS 6ES7131-6BF00- V1.0.0 HSP0127 HSP0229 V5.0
0DA0
Digital output modules DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA 6ES7132-6BF00- V1.0.0 HSP0162 HSP0230 V6.0
0AA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0230 V4.0
0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0230 V4.0
0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 6ES7132-6BH00- V1.1.0 HSP0162 HSP0230 V6.0
ST 0BA0 V13 SP1 or
higher
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7132-6BF00- V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0230 V6.0
0CA0 as of V13 SP1
Update 4
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF 6ES7132-6BD20- V2.0.0 HSP0163 HSP0230 V6.0
0CA0 as of V13 SP1
Update 4
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS 6ES7132-6BD20- V1.0.0 HSP0127 HSP0230 V5.0
0DA0
RQ 4x120VDC- 6ES7132-6HD00- V1.0.0 HSP0128 HSP0232 V5.0
230VAC/5A NO ST 0BB1
RQ 4x120VDC- 6ES7132-6MD00- V1.0.0 HSP0162 HSP0232 V6.0
230VAC/5A NO MA 0BB1 V13 SP1 or
ST higher

I/O module Order number Firmware STEP 7 (TIA STEP 7 V5.5

version Portal) SP3
Analog input modules AI 8xU BA 6ES7134-6FF00- V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0227 V5.0
0AA1
AI 2xU ST 6ES7134-6FB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0227 V6.0
0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA 6ES7134- V1.0.0 HSP0126 HSP0227 V5.0
6GF000AA1
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0227 V4.0
0BA1
AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0227 V6.0
0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0227 V4.0
0BA1
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6HB00- V2.0.0 HSP0161 HSP0227 V6.0
0CA1 V13 SP1 or as of V5.5 SP4
higher HF7
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS 6ES7134-6HB00- V2.0.0 HSP0128 HSP0227 V5.0
0DA1
AI Energy Meter 6ES7134-6PA01- V3.0.0 V13 SP1 Up- HSP0227 V6.0
400VAC ST 0BD0 date 4
HSP0159
AI Energy Meter 6ES7134-6PA20- V4.0.0 V13 SP1 Up- HSP0227 V6.0
480VAC ST 0BD0 date 4 as of V5.5 SP4
HSP0159 HF7
Analog output mod- AQ 2xU ST 6ES7135-6FB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0228 V6.0
ules 0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AQ 2xI ST 6ES7135-6GB00- V1.0.0 HSP0160 HSP0228 V6.0
0BA1 V13 SP1 or
higher
AQ 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00- V1.1.0 V13 Update 3 HSP0228 V4.0
0BA1
AQ 2xU/I HS 6ES7135-6HB00- V2.0.0 HSP0128 HSP0228 V5.0
0DA1

2.5.1 Digital module device manuals
Manuals for I/O modules ST, BA

When you have deactivated all channels of the I/O module, a diagnostics alarm is still
generated in the case of a fault if the "Missing supply voltage L+" diagnostics is enabled. For
the following I/O modules, this behavior is corrected as of firmware version > V1.1.0:
● DI 16x24VDC ST
● DI 8x24VDC ST
● DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST
● DQ 8x24VDC/0.5 A ST
● DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A ST
Manuals DI 4x120...230VAC ST, Edition 02/2014; DQ 4x24...230VAC/2A ST, Edition 02/2014

Section 4.3 Address space
If you have enabled value status, the module returns value status 1, regardless of the state
of the connected supply voltage.
Manual DI 8x24VDC HF, Edition 02/2014

Section 6.1 Technical specifications
● 24 V encoder supply
– Output current, max.: 700 mA, total current
Manual DI 8xNAMUR HF, Edition 02/2014

Section A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
With data records 0 to 7, you can configure individual channels.
When the interface module IM 155-6 DP HF (PROFIBUS DP) is used and data records 0
and 1 are read, the module returns the diagnostics data records and not the parameter data
records of the DI 8xNAMUR HF.

Digital output manual DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST manual, Edition 07/2014

Section 4.2 Explanation of the parameters (as of functional version FS-05 of DQ
8x24VDC/0.5A ST)
Diagnostics: Wire break:
The module responds to a wire break as follows:
● Disabled:
– Channel status LED lit green
– Output voltage present at channel
● Enabled:
– Channel status LED is off
– Output is switched off
– In addition, the wire break diagnostics is signaled and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes red
Note
If one of the two parameters "Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+" or "Diagnostics: Wire break" is
enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off. This
prevents undefined load switching and supports detection of a faulty channel for module
diagnostics.

Manual RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module, Edition 02/2014

Section 4.3 Address space
Configuration options for the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module:
The following configurations are possible:
● Configuration 1: without value status
● Configuration 2: with value status
Evaluating the value status:
An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the digital module. Each bit in this byte is assigned to a channel and returns information on
the validity of the digital value (0 = incorrect value).
Address space for the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module:
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the RQ 4x24VUC/2A
CO ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are
only available if the value status is enabled.
Image 2-1 Address space for the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module
Section 6.1 Technical specifications

Correction / additions to the technical specifications:
● Switching capacity of the contacts (DC)
– Rated switching voltage (DC): 24 V
– With resistive load, max.: 2 A
– Thermal continuous current, max.: 2 A
● Switching capacity of the contacts (AC)
– Rated switching voltage (AC): 24 V
– With resistive load, max.: 0.5 A
– Thermal continuous current, max.: 0.5 A

Manual DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS digital output module, Edition 03/2015

Section 5.3 Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit diagnostics alarm:
If there is a short-circuit diagnostics on the module and the supply voltage L+ is then
switched off and on again, an existing short-circuit may no longer be signaled as diagnostics
after the module has been restarted.
To determine whether the short-circuit still exists, you can measure the terminal voltage at
the channels. If there is still terminal voltage at a deactivated channel (process value 0), the
short-circuit still exists. In this case, check the process wiring to a short-circuit after L+.
2.5.2 Analog module device manuals
Manuals AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF, Edition 02/2014; AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF, Edition 02/2014
Section 3 Wiring
Note
When potential-free sensors are used, the M- inputs may be bridged and connected to
ground/FE. This is not necessary for disabled inputs.
Section 4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges, figure 4-1, Assignment in the
process image input (PII)
Assignment in the process image input (PII) with SIMATIC S7
Image 2-2 Assignment in the process image input (PII)

Manuals AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF, Edition 02/2014; AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF, Edition 02/2014;
AQ 2xU/I HF, Edition 02/2014
Note
The "Channel temporarily not available" diagnostics is reported on a change to user
calibration.
Other diagnostics alarms cannot be used to detect a change to user calibration.
Manuals AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, Edition 12/2015; AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015
For configuration with STEP 7 V13 or higher (TIA Portal), real values between -7x1028 and
+7x1028 can be input. This is true for configuration via HSP and via GSD file (PROFINET).
For configuration with STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 as of HF7, configuration by means of GSD file
(PROFINET) with REAL values of -1.175x1038 to +3.402x1038 is possible.
With STEP 7 SP4 to HF6, parameter assignment of REAL values is not possible. Functions
that require REAL values are not available in this case.
Manuals AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, Edition 12/2015; AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST,
Edition 12/2015
Requirements for the operation of the AI Energy Meter on slot 1 of the ET 200SP:
Interface module / CPU AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST

(6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0) (6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0)
IM 155-6 PN BA (6ES7155-6AR00- Can be operated on slot 1 for all IM 155-6 PN BA
0AN0)
IM 155-6 PN ST (6ES7155-6AU00- Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 PN ST from firmware version V3.1 and
0BN0) higher and functional status FS 07
IM 155-6 PN HF (6ES7155-6AU00- Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 PN HF from firmware version V3.0 and
0CN0) higher and functional status FS 05
IM 155-6 DP HF (6ES7 155-6BU00- Can be operated on slot 1 for IM 155-6 DP HF from firmware version V3.0 and
0CN0) higher
CPU 1510SP-1 PN, CPU 1512SP-1 Can be operated on slot 1 for all CPUs
PN, CPU 1515SP PC

Manual AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015

Section 9 Limit monitoring
You cannot use the following measured variables for limit monitoring:
Measured value Measured variables

ID
61180 Active energy inflow L1
61181 Active energy outflow L1
61182 Reactive energy inflow L1
61183 Reactive energy outflow L1
61184 Apparent energy L1
61185 Active energy L1
61186 Reactive energy L1
If you set these IDs in the configuration of the limit monitoring (TIA Portal, STEP 7, GSD),
the module reports a parameter assignment error.
Section B Measured variables
The following tables show which measured variables are available for limit monitoring or user
data mapping:
Measured value ID Measured variables Use for

Limit monitoring User data mapping
1 Voltage UL1-N Yes Yes
4 Voltage UL1- L2 Yes Yes
7 Current L1 Yes Yes


10 Apparent power L1 Yes Yes
13 Active power L1 Yes Yes
16 Reactive power L1 Yes Yes
19 Power factor L1 Yes Yes
30 Frequency Yes Yes
34 Total active power L1L2L3 Yes Yes
35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 Yes Yes
36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 Yes Yes
37 Total power factor L1L2L3 Yes Yes
38 Amplitude unbalance for voltage Yes Yes
39 Amplitude unbalance for current Yes Yes
40 Max. voltage UL1-N Yes Yes
43 Max. voltage UL1- L2 Yes Yes
46 Max. current L1 Yes Yes
49 Max. apparent power L1 Yes Yes
52 Max. active power L1 Yes Yes
55 Max. reactive power L1 Yes Yes
58 Max. power factor L1 Yes Yes
61 Max. frequency Yes Yes
65 Max. total active power Yes Yes
66 Max. total reactive power Yes Yes
67 Max. total apparent power Yes Yes
68 Max. total power factor Yes Yes


70 Min. voltage UL1-N Yes Yes
73 Min. voltage UL1- L2 Yes Yes
76 Min. current L1 Yes Yes
79 Min. apparent power L1 Yes Yes
82 Min. active power L1 Yes Yes
85 Min. reactive power L1 Yes Yes
88 Min. power factor L1 Yes Yes
91 Min. frequency Yes Yes
95 Min. total active power Yes Yes
96 Min. total reactive power Yes Yes
97 Min. total apparent power Yes Yes
98 Min. total power factor Yes Yes
200 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 Yes Yes
201 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 Yes Yes
202 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 Yes Yes
203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 Yes Yes
204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 Yes Yes
205 Total active energy L1L2L3 Yes Yes
206 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 Yes Yes
210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 - Yes
211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 - Yes
212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 - Yes
213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 - Yes
214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 - Yes
215 Total active energy L1L2L3 - Yes
216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 - Yes
61149 Neutral conductor current Yes Yes
61178 Phase angle L1 Yes Yes
61180 Active energy inflow L1 - Yes
61181 Active energy outflow L1 - Yes
61182 Reactive energy inflow L1 - Yes


61183 Reactive energy outflow L1 - Yes
61184 Apparent energy L1 - Yes
61185 Active energy L1 - Yes
61186 Reactive energy L1 - Yes
61190 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 - Yes
61191 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 - Yes
61192 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 - Yes
61193 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 - Yes
61194 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 - Yes
65500 Qualifier L1 - Yes
65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 - Yes
65504 Cumulative operating hours counters L1L2L3 Yes Yes
65505 Operating hours counter L1 Yes Yes
65510 Counter limit violation GW1 Yes Yes



In the manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015

In the device manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, the measured value ID and the
associated measured variables for the complete performance are reversed. The correct
association is shown in the table below:
Measured value Measured variables Unit

ID
34 Total active power L1L2L3 W
35 Total reactive power L1L2L3 var
36 Total apparent power L1L2L3 VA
65 Max. total active power W
66 Max. total reactive power var
67 Max. total apparent power VA
95 Min. total active power W
96 Min. total reactive power var
97 Min. total apparent power VA
If you use the user-data mapping via data record DS 130, please note that the texts for the
measured variables are also displayed incorrectly during configuration.
During configuration of the measured variables for the total active, reactive, and apparent
power, select the following texts:
Desired measured variable for the user-data Text to select during configuration
mapping
Total active power L1L2L3 Total apparent power L1L2L3 (ID00034)
Total reactive power L1L2L3 Total active power L1L2L3 (ID00035)
Total apparent power L1L2L3 Total reactive power L1L2L3 (ID00036)
Max. total active power Max. total apparent power (ID00065)
Max. total reactive power Max. total active power (ID00066)
Max. total apparent power Max. total reactive power (ID00067)
Min. total active power Min. total apparent power (ID00095)
Min. total reactive power Min. total active power (ID00096)
Min. total apparent power Min. total reactive power (ID00097)
The incorrect texts appear during use of the following tools and GSD files:
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V5.5 SP4
● GSD file GSDML-V2.31-ET200SP-20151126
This error will be corrected in the next versions of the tools and GSD files.

In the manual for Energy Meter 480VAC ST, Edition 12/2015
Section 6.2 Quality information

With phase-specific measurement with user data variants 154 to 159, the allocation of the
quality information in byte 1 of the user data for current and voltage measurement and
operating quadrant is identical for all three phases; see following figure.
If you switch between the user data variants for phase-specific measurements, you can
therefore keep the evaluation of the quality information unchanged in your user program.
Image 2-3 Allocation of the quality information for user data variants 154 to 159
Manuals AQ 2xU/I HS, Edition 03/2015; AQ 2xU/I HF, Edition 02/2014

Section 3.1 Wiring and block diagram, terminal assignment
You can now also use the 3-wire connection in addition to the 2-wire and 4-wire connection
for the analog modules AQ 2xU/I HS and AQ 2xU/I HF.
Pin assignment for AQ 4xU/I ST, AQ 2xU/I HS, AQ 2xU/I HF Explanation

Voltage 2-wire connec- Voltage 3-wire connec- Voltage 4-wire connec- • Qn+: Analog output voltage/current
tion tion tion (positive), channel n
• Qn-: Analog output voltage/current
(negative), channel n
• Sn+: Sensor line positive, channel n
• Sn-: Sensor line negative, channel n
The 3-wire connection and 4-wire connection make compensation for line impedance
possible. The compensation is not possible for 2-wire connections due to the missing sensor
cable.

2.5.3 Communications module manuals
Communication module CM DP, Edition 12/2014

The communication module CM DP supports the PROFIsafe protocol V2.
Exception: Fail-safe modules that only support PROFIsafe V1 mode.

PROFIenergy product information PROFIenergy 1
___________________
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
PROFIenergy product information
Product Information
12/2015
A5E03871936-AH
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03871936-AH Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2015.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 PROFIenergy .......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Principle of operation ................................................................................................................ 6
1.3 Parameter assignment .............................................................................................................. 9
1.4 PROFIenergy control data records .........................................................................................11
1.5 I/O modules .............................................................................................................................12
1.5.1 Digital input module ................................................................................................................12
1.5.2 Digital output modules ............................................................................................................14
1.5.3 Analog input modules .............................................................................................................15
1.5.4 Analog output module .............................................................................................................17
1.5.5 IO-Link Master ........................................................................................................................19
1.5.5.1 DI operating mode ..................................................................................................................19
1.5.5.2 DQ operating mode.................................................................................................................21
1.5.5.3 IO-Link operating mode ..........................................................................................................22

Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH 3
PROFIenergy 1
1.1 Introduction
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a data interface based on PROFINET for switching off consumers centrally
and in a coordinated manner during idle times, regardless of the manufacturer or device
type. The goal is that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
The majority of the energy is saved by the process itself; the PROFINET device itself only
contributes a few watts of saving potential. This operating mode is termed "pause" in
PROFIenergy.
The PROFINET devices are turned off by special commands in the user program of the
PROFINET IO controller. No additional hardware is required; the PROFIenergy commands
are directly interpreted by the PROFINET devices.
The device which provides the PROFIenergy interface and supports the required control
data record has the so-called PE-Entity, the access point for these control data records. This
PE-Entity is located on the interface module as a substitute for I/O modules that do not have
their own PE-Entity. I/O modules that have their own PE-Entity are always addressed
directly.

4 Product Information, 12/2015, A5E03871936-AH
PROFIenergy
1.1 Introduction
Requirements
● Interface module IM 155-6 PN ST
● Interface module IM 155-6 PN HF
● ET 200SP I/O modules which support PROFIenergy
– Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)
– Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
– Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)
– Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
– Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)
– Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
– Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)
– Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
– Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)
– Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
– Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-
0BB1)
– Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
– Analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
– Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA0)
– Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)
– Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)
– Analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)
– Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1)
– Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)
– Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0)
● User program for sending the parameter data record, index 3
● User program with the function blocks for controlling the PROFIenergy commands
("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816).

PROFIenergy
1.2 Principle of operation
Procedure
1. Create the parameter data record, Index 3 in STEP 7
2. Transfer the parameter data record to the interface module with the instruction "WRREC"
- SFB 53.
3. Create the user program with the FBs for controlling the PROFIenergy commands
("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816 ).
4. Transfer the user program to the CPU.
● System manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
● Device manual Interface Module
● Device manuals Digital and Analog I/O Modules
● System manual PROFINET System Description
● You will find additional information on PROFIenergy services, parameters of the service
IDs on the Internet under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical
Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802.
● Additional information on PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" - FB 815,
"PE_CMD" - FB 816 ) is available in the online help for STEP 7 V5.5 as of SP2 "Help on
System Functions/System Function Blocks".
"Pause" control and "Pause" behavior

At the beginning and end of pauses, you enable or disable the pause function of the system;
the IO controller then sends the PROFIenergy command "Start_Pause" or "End_Pause" to
the PROFINET devices. The device then interprets the contents of the PROFIenergy
command and switches on or off. The interface module is the PE-Entity for I/O modules with
PROFIenergy capability of the ET 200SP.
Other PROFIenergy commands allow device information to be accessed during the pauses.
You can use these commands to transfer the "Start_Pause" / "End_Pause" command in
good time.
Note
A complete PROFIenergy sequence consists of the commands "Start_Pause" and
"End_Pause". Always observe this sequence during programming.

PROFIenergy
LED displays
In general, PROFIenergy does not have an effect on the LED display. Please see the device
manuals of the relevant I/O modules for exceptions.
Response to error detection

All channels whose pause mode is set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" report errors as in
productive operation.
The following rules apply to channels which switch to a pause mode other than
"PE_MODE_PROCEED":
● All errors that are unrelated to the switch to "Pause" are reported.
● If error recognition is possible during "Pause", these errors continue to be reported.
● All error messages which are caused by the switch to "Pause" are suppressed.
● The following applies if error recognition is not possible during the "Pause":
– The status of errors already pending before the "Pause" is retained.
– Incoming and outgoing errors are reported once the "pause" has ended.
Note
Switching to "Pause" and out of "Pause" may cause an error to be reported.
Additional information on diagnostics can be found in the I/O module device manuals.
Hardware interrupt
No hardware interrupts are triggered within the "pause". The hardware interrupts are re-
evaluated when the "pause" ends.

PROFIenergy
"Pause" behavior under certain operating conditions

A "Pause" is ended in the following cases:
Table 1- 1 Ending a "pause"
Ending a "pause" Explanation

The supply voltage 1L+ of the interface The "pause" is exited and can be re-activated by re-
module has failed sending the PROFIenergy parameter assignment fol-
lowed by the "Start_Pause" command.
• Controller stop1
• Controller failure (connection interrupt-
ed)1
• Firmware update
• Reset to factory settings
• Deactivation of the IO device1
The I/O module is pulled and plugged
Station stop1 The "pause" is exited , the PROFIenergy parameter
assignment is still on the I/O module and the "pause"
• Removal of more than one I/O module
can be re-activated by the "Start_Pause" command.
(depending on the interface module
used)
• Dismounting of the server module
Failure of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O
module.
Modification of the parameter settings of the
I/O module during operation using data
record 128
1 The substitute value behavior is activated.

PROFIenergy
1.3 Parameter assignment
● Parameter assignment of PROFIenergy takes place by means of the user program and
parameter data record (version2), index 3. The interface module distributes the
PROFIenergy parameters to the I/O modules.
● The parameter assignment of an additional pause behavior is possible immediately after
the start of the previous "Pause". The required state for the following pause is activated
with a new "Start_Pause" command.
● The parameter assignment can be written as often as necessary.
● The interface module checks the distribution of the parameters to the I/O modules and
returns the result of the write job by means of return value. In the case of a negative
return value, there are one or more I/O modules that have not accepted the parameter
data record. In this case, the I/O modules respond according to their last valid
PROFIenergy parameter assignment with an incoming "Start_Pause" command.
● Parameter assignment by means of the parameter data record has to be repeated in case
of an I/O module failure or station failure.
● ET 200SP supports the setting for the behavior of one "Pause". If a different response is
required for an additional "Pause", you will have to assign parameters again.
Note
Effect: The response (shutdown) of the I/O modules to PROFIenergy is related to the slot,
which means that all channels of the slot show the same behavior.

PROFIenergy
Parameter data record

You specify which I/O modules (slots) are controlled with PROFIenergy commands in the
parameter data record for PROFIenergy.
The content of the parameter data record for PROFIenergy, index 3 is described below; you
can create it yourself and transmit it to the interface module.
Table 1- 2 Parameter data record for PROFIenergy (version 2), index 3
Byte Element Coding Explanation

0 Version 02D Cannot be modified
1 Number of blocks 01D to n Slots 1 to n depending
• on the number of slots supported by the interface module and
• the current configuration of the ET 200SP.
2 Block 1 Slot number 00D Unassigned
01D to n I/O module slot with PROFIenergy
3 Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED, proceed at "Pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN, shut down at "Pause" 1
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE, last output or measured value is retained
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE, substitute value "0" 2
: : : :
128 Block 64 Slot number See Block 1
129 Mode
1 The specific behavior depends on the used I/O module (with a digital input module, for example, the sensor supply is
turned off or the outputs of an analog output module are de-energized)
2 An analog output module (e. g. with the output range 0 mA to 20 mA, ± 20 mA) or a digital output module issues the
value "0".
Error messages
The feedback data record returns the following error messages, if needed:
Error code Meaning

80B1H Impermissible length Check the length of the data record
80E0H Error in header information Check the data record header information
80E1H Parameter error Check the content of the data record and correct
the parameter assignment error before starting the
• At least one I/O module does
"Pause". Parameter assignment errors which are
not support PROFIenergy
not corrected can result in incorrect I/O module
• A parameter value has been shutdown behavior.
incorrectly encoded

PROFIenergy
1.4 PROFIenergy control data records
1.4 PROFIenergy control data records
PROFIenergy control data records

The control data record for PROFIenergy, Index 80A0H, supports the following services of
the Common Application Profile PROFIenergy V1.0 for the IM 155-6 PN ST,
IM 155-6 PN HF:
Table 1- 4 Control data records for PROFIenergy
Service Service ID Meaning

Start pause 1 01H Assuming the configured Pause behavior, suppressing all associated diagnostics data
End Pause 02H Leaving the pause
Query Modes 03H Reads the supported modes
• Request List Energy Saving Modes
• Request Get Mode (Energy Saving Mode Data)
PEM status 04H Reads the PROFIenergy status
Status messages:
• 00H: PROFIenergy is ready for operation
• 01H: "Pause" is active
• FFH: "Pause" is not active
PE_Identify 05H Reads the supported PROFIenergy services
1 The minimum (configurable) pause time for the ET 200SP is 10 s.

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
1.5 I/O modules
1.5.1 Digital input module
Requirements
● Digital input module DI 8x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)
● Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
● Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)
● Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0)
Display
DI 8x24VDC ST/ DI 8x24VDC HF/ DI 8x24VDC HS
● The channel LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the terminal.
● Switching off the sensor supply also switches off the channel LED if an external sensor
supply is connected.
DI 8xNAMUR
● The channel LEDs correspond to the signal state supplied by the I/O module.

The error "Missing supply voltage L+" is detected, reported and ends the "pause" regardless
of whether the pause status is applied.
All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" in pause mode report errors as in
The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode:
● Sensor supply switch-off upon the start of "pause" does not result in the messages "Line
break" or "Short circuit".
● "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition is not possible during the "pause":
– Messages for errors already pending before the "pause" are retained.
– After the "pause" is over, the error status is updated and incoming/outgoing errors are
reported correspondingly.

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
Ending a "pause"
The pause is ended in the following cases:
● Failure of the supply voltage L+
● Change in parameter assignment of I/O module with DS128
● "End_Pause" command
● Controller failure
● Firmware update
● Station stop
● Restart of the interface module
Mode parameter
Only the "Mode" parameter is shown below. The complete configuration can be found in the
"Parameter assignment" chapter.
Table 1- 5 Mode parameter
Element Coding Explanation

Mode 0D: PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at "pause"
1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Shut down at "Pause" 1
• Sensor supply switched off 2
• Pause substitute value: 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Last input value
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause substi-
tute value
1 DI 8xNAMUR HF: A channel is set to "inverted". During the "pause", the PE substitute value is
read in 1:1 (as in the parameter settings and not inverted again).
2 DI 8x24VDC ST: As there is only one sensor supply for all channels, the supply can only be
switched off at a "pause" if all channel parameters have been set to switch off.

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
1.5.2 Digital output modules
Requirements
● Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
● Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0)
● Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
● Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)
● Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
● Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)
● Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
● Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)
● Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0)
● Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)
Display
The channel LEDs are directly affected by the output value at the terminal.

Line break and short circuit error recognition continues to be possible during the "pause". All
channels therefore report errors as in productive operation, regardless of their pause mode.
Ending a "pause"
● Failure of the supply voltage L+ (exception: The DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST remains in
"Pause")
● Firmware update
● Station stop

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
Mode parameter

1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at "pause"
• Pause substitute value: Last output value is
maintained1
tute value is output
1 DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS: In the "Pulse width modulation" mode, the last value is output as frequency.
1.5.3 Analog input modules
Requirements
● Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
● Analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
● Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA0)
Display
The channel LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy.

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

● Sensor supply switch-off upon the start of "pause" does not result in the message "Line
break".
● "Line break", "Short circuit", "High limit exceeded" and "Low limit exceeded" error
recognition is not possible during the "pause":
Ending a "pause"
● Firmware update
● Station stop

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
Mode parameter

• Pause substitute value: 7FFFH
• Pause substitute value: Configured pause
substitute value
1 AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST, AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST, AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST, AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS: As there is only
one sensor supply for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at a "pause" if all channels
have been configured to switch off.
1.5.4 Analog output module
Requirements
● Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)
● Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)
● Analog output module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)
● Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HF (6ES7135-6HB00-0CA1)
● Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)
Display
The channel LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy.

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules

The following applies to all channels which switch to the pause mode
"PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN":
● "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition is not possible during the pause.
– Incoming and outgoing errors are reported once the "pause" has ended.
● "Line break" and "Short circuit" error recognition continues to be possible during the
pause. These errors are reported.
● The selection of an incorrect pause substitute value which does not correspond to the
output range may result in the message "High limit exceeded" or "Low limit exceeded".
The pause substitute output value effective at the terminal is limited to the high or low
control limit for the output range.
Ending a "pause"
● Firmware update
● Station stop

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
Mode parameter

• Outputs free from current and voltage
maintained
1.5.5 IO-Link Master
Requirements
Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link (6ES7137-6BD00-0BA0)
Note
The minimum pause time (10 s) must be observed. If it is undershot, problems may occur
with the restart of IO-Link communication.
1.5.5.1 DI operating mode
Display
Switching off the supply voltage USn (port) also switches off the associated channel status
LED Qn if an external supply voltage is connected.

of whether the pause status is adopted.

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
Ending a "pause"
● Re-assignment of the I/O module parameters
● Firmware update
● Station stop
Mode parameter

• Supply voltage USn (port) switched off
tute value

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
1.5.5.2 DQ operating mode
Display
The channel status LEDs Qn show the output value.

Ending a "pause"
● Firmware update
● Station stop
Mode parameter

maintained

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
1.5.5.3 IO-Link operating mode
Display
When supply voltage USn (port) is switched off, the associated port status LED Cn and port
error LED Fn are also switched off.

All channels which are set to "PE_MODE_PROCEED" and "PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE" in
pause mode report errors as in productive operation.
The following conditions apply to all channels (ports) which switch to a different pause mode
("PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN" and "PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE"):
● Switching off the supply voltage USn (port) at the start of "pause" does not result in the
messages "Line break" or "Short circuit".
● Error detection is not possible during the "pause" (no IO-Link device communication):
Ending a "pause"
● Firmware update
● Station stop

PROFIenergy
1.5 I/O modules
Mode parameter

• Supply voltage USn (port) switched off1
• Pause substitute value (input): 0B
3D: PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE2 • Supply voltage USn (port) switched off
• Last input and output value is maintained
4D: PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE see: 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN
1 Supply voltage USn of the assigned port is switched off. Result: The IO-Link device fails.
2 With time-based IO, the IO-Link master behaves according to 1D: PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN

Product Information Mixed ___________________
Preface
Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL ___________________

2
___________________
Mounting
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Connection
ET 200SP
Product Information Mixed 4
___________________
Configuring
Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL
5
___________________
BaseUnit BU-Send
Product Information
___________________
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6
02/2016
A5E33344611-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E33344611-AC Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2016.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Scope
This product information supplements the ET 200SP system manual documentation.
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security in the Internet
Product Information Mixed Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL

Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Application planning ................................................................................................................................ 5
2 Mounting ................................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Connection ............................................................................................................................................. 9
4 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 13
5 BaseUnit BU-Send ................................................................................................................................ 17
5.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 17
5.2 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 18
5.3 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 19
6 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC................................................................................................................... 20
6.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 20
6.2 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 22
6.3 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 22
6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display.................................................................................... 23

4 Product Information, 02/2016, A5E33344611-AC
Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection
You have the option of integrating the I/O modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(IP65/IP67) in a configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system (IP20).
The figure below shows a combination of the modules of the ET 200AL and ET 200SP
Image 1-1 Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET-Connection

Requirement
The following components support mixed configuration:
● Interface module
– IM 155-6 PN HF (V3.0 or higher)
– IM 155-6 PN ST (V3.1 or higher)
– IM 155-6 DP HF (V3.0 or higher)
● CPU
– CPU 1510SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1512SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
● BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
● ET-Connection cable
● Power cable
Rules
You must observe the following rules when assembling a mixed configuration:
● The bus length of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system must not exceed 1 m
(without interface module, including BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module)
● A maximum of 16 ET 200AL I/O modules can be connected to ET-Connection.
● The maximum length of the bus cable for ET-Connection between BA-Send and the first
module or between two modules is 15 m.
The following table shows which firmware versions of your IM or CPU support which
maximum bus cable length.
IM/CPU 2m 5m 10 m 15 m
IM 155-6 PN HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.3 or higher
IM 155-6 PN ST V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.3 or higher
IM 155-6 DP HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher --
CPU 1510SP-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1510SP F-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1512SP-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN

Procedure
To assemble a multi-tier configuration, follow these steps:
1. Install the BaseUnit BU-Send to the immediate right of the ET 200SP CPU/interface
module.
When the BaseUnit BU-Send is used next to the ET 200SP CPU, a CM DP and an
Ethernet CP or a maximum of 2 Ethernet CPs can be inserted between the CPU and BU-
Send.
2. Then mount the additional BaseUnits / I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system and the server module.
3. Connect the bus cable for ET-Connection to the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and mount
this on the BaseUnit BU-Send.
4. Screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with 0.2 Nm
5. Connect the other end of the bus cable for ET-Connection (with M8 connector) to the first
ET 200AL I/O module (X30 socket ET-Connection IN).
6. Connect the supply voltage (24 V DC) to the ET 200AL I/O modules (X80 connector).
Note
Firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module
When you run a firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module, ET-Connection is briefly
interrupted by the restart of the module. All downstream ET 200AL I/O modules report a
pull/plug interrupt.

Mounting 2
Introduction
For the connection of the ET 200AL I/O module via ET-Connection to the ET 200SP, you
require the BaseUnit BU-Send with the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.
Requirement
● The mounting rail is mounted.
● The interface module is mounted.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the BusAdapter)
Mounting BaseUnit BU-Send

To mount the BaseUnit BU-Send, follow these steps:
1. Mount the BU-Send to the right of the CPU/interface module.
2. Swivel the BU-Send back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place.
3. Move the BU-Send to the left until you hear it click into place on the CPU/interface
module.
Image 2-1 Mounting BU-Send
4. Mount the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC only after you have connected the bus cable for
ET-Connection (see section Connecting (Page 9)).

Connection 3
Introduction
You connect the ET 200AL I/O modules via the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC using ET-
Connection.
① BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC

② Connection element for ET-Connection bus cable
Image 3-1 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
Required tools
Screwdriver with 3 to 3.5 mm blade
Use the bus cable for ET-Connection as connecting cable between the BusAdapter BA-Send
1xFC and the ET 200AL I/O modules.
We recommend using the stripping tool for ET-Connection (6ES7194-2KA00-0AA0) with
blade cassette green (6GK1901-1B...). This guarantees fast and safe stripping.
The bus cable for ET-Connection M8, prefabricated on one side with 1 x M8 connector, 4-
pole, shielded, is available in the following lengths:
● Length 2 m: 6ES7194-2LH20-0AC0
● Length 5 m: 6ES7194-2LH50-0AC0
● Length 10 m: 6ES7194-2LN10-0AC0
● Length 15 m: 6ES7194-2LN15-0AB0

Connection
Procedure
To connect the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC, follow these steps:
1. Strip the sheath of the bus cable at the open end as follows:
Image 3-2 Connecting cable
Use the stripping tool for ET-Connection to do this. The relevant settings are shown on
the tool.
2. Pull back the locking slide of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC and open the cover of the
connection element.
3. Lift the cable routing up as far as it will go.
4. Insert the unstripped single cores of the bus cable (according to the imprinted color
coding) into the cable routing as far as they will go and press the cable routing down as
far as it will go.
5. Close the cover of the connection element and push the locking slide forward.

Connection
6. Connect and screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw
with 0.2 Nm tightening torque.) To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
7. Connect the M8 connector of the bus cable to the first ET 200AL I/O module (socket X30
ET-Connection IN). For more information about wiring the ET 200AL I/O module refer to
the system manual of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
① Locking slide ③ Shield contact

② Cable routing ④ Bus cable for ET-Connection
Image 3-3 Connection of the BusAdapeter BA-Send 1xFC

Connection
BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC mounted
① BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC

② Bus cable for ET-Connection
Image 3-4 BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC mounted

Configuring 4
Introduction
The mixed configuration allows the connection of up to 16 ET 200AL I/O modules to the ET
200SP via ET-Connection. The figure below shows the configuration of the ET-Connection
and the assignment of the slots.
① ET 200SP I/O modules ⑤ 1st ET 200AL I/O module

② ET 200SP server module ⑥ 16th ET 200AL I/O module
③ Slots ⑦ ET-Connection
④ PROFINET IO
Image 4-1 Mixed configuration
For more information about connecting the ET-Connection, supply voltages, actuators and
sensors, refer to the ET 200AL system manual.
Configuration with a CPU

In a configuration with a CPU, a maximum of 2 slots can be used immediately to the right of
the CPU with CM DP module or Ethernet CP. Combinations are also possible, i.e. CM DP
module and one Ethernet CP or two Ethernet CPs.
BU-Send and BA-Send should always be inserted to the immediate right of the CM/CP.

Configuring
Rules
Observe the following rules when configuring:
● With mixed configurations, the following maximum configuration is possible:
– 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6 PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF and CPUs) slots for
ET 200SP modules
– 16 slots for ET 200AL I/O modules
– 1 slot for BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC
– 1 slot for server module.
● The mixed configuration may contain a maximum of 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6
PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF) ET 200SP I/O modules.
● The server module can also be mounted right next to the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC.
● Supported functions:
Function Mixed configuration

ET 200SP ET 200AL I/O modules on
IM CPU ET-Connection
Isochronous mode ⑥ -- --
Configuration control ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
Shared device ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
PROFIenergy ⑥ -- ⑥
System redundancy S2 -- -- --
Configuring
Observe the following points when configuring:
● BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module must be configured. With BU-Send/BA-Send
1xFC, no parameters are available.
● Arrangement of the modules in the configuration:
– Configure the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC downstream from the interface module in slot
1. Position the ET 200SP modules behind it.
– Configure the ET 200AL I/O modules from slot 66 (PROFINET)/67 (CPU)/34
(PROFIBUS).
● The layout of the modules represents a preset configuration and is independent of the
configuration control.
● The system redundancy S2 function is not available in a mixed configuration.

Configuring
An example of a mixed configuration is shown below:
Hardware configuration
① ET 200SP I/O modules ⑥ 2nd ET 200AL I/O module

② ET 200SP server module ⑦ 3rd ET 200AL I/O module
③ Slots ⑧ 4th ET 200AL I/O module
④ PROFINET IO ⑨ ET-Connection
⑤ 1st ET 200AL I/O module
Image 4-2 Mixed configuration

Configuring
Configuring configuration example
Table 4- 1 Overview
Mixed configura- Module Slot

tion
ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN HF 0
BA-Send 1xFC 1
DI 16×24VDC ST 2
DI 16×24VDC ST 3
DI 16×24VDC ST 4
Server module 5
ET 200AL DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 66
DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8 67
AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 68
CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 69
Note
Configuration using PROFIBUS GSD file
When you use the PROFIBUS GSD file for the configuration, you must configure the gaps
between the server module and the first ET 200AL I/O module with BU-Cover.

BaseUnit BU-Send 5
5.1 Product overview
Article number
6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
View
Image 5-1 BaseUnit BU-Send
Properties
BaseUnit suitable for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

BaseUnit BU-Send
5.2 Connection
5.2 Connection
Pin assignment
The BaseUnit BU-Send has only one slot for an expansion module. No other connections
are available.
Schematic circuit diagram
① Backplane bus
② BA-Send 1xFC expansion module
Image 5-2 Schematic circuit diagram BU-Send

BaseUnit BU-Send
5.3 Technical specifications
Technical specifications of the BaseUnit BU-Send
6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
Product type designation BaseUnit BU-Send
Installation type/mounting
Rack mounting possible Yes
Front installation possible Yes
Rail mounting possible Yes
Wall/direct mounting possible No
Slots
Number of slots 1
Plug-in modules, other Yes; BusAdapter BA-Send
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 32 mm
Weights

BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6
6.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0
View of the module
① Module type and name

② LED for diagnostics
③ ((Connection for ET-CONNECTION))
④ Article number
⑤ Functional version
Image 6-1 View of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
6.1 Properties
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● BusAdapter for the direct connection of ET-Connection
● Connects the interface module via ET-Connection with the ET 200AL I/O modules
● Supports all ET 200AL I/O modules
The module supports the following functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3. See system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
Maximum configuration
● 16 ET 200AL I/O modules
● 15 m bus cable between BusAdapter BA Send and the first ET 200AL I/O module and
between two ET 200AL I/O modules.
● Supported functions:
Function Mixed configuration

ET 200SP ET 200AL I/O modules on
IM CPU ET-Connection
Isochronous mode ⑥ -- --
Configuration control ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
Shared device ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
PROFIenergy ⑥ -- ⑥
System redundancy S2 -- -- --
Accessories
The following components must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
● Stripping tool for ET-Connection
● Bus cables for ET-Connection
See also
You can find more information on accessories and additional components in the
Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.

6.2 Pin assignment
6.2 Pin assignment
ET-Connection with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

The following table shows the signal names and the designations for the pin assignment of
the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.
Table 6- 1 ET-Connection pin assignment with BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC

1 TD Transmit data +
2 RD Receive data +
3 TD_N Transmit data –
4 RD_N Receive data -
6.3 Schematic circuit diagram
Image 6-2 Schematic circuit diagram for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC

6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display
6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display
LED display
The figure below shows the LED display (status and fault display) of the BusAdapter BA-
Send 1xFC.
① DIAG (green/red)
Image 6-3 LED display
Meaning of the LED display

The table below explains the meaning of the status and fault display.

DIAG LED
Table 6- 2 Status and fault display DIAG
DIAG LED Meaning Remedy

There is no connection between the Check whether the bus cable is interrupted.
Off ET-Connection interface of the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET
200AL.
The interface module does not sup- Run a firmware update.
port the BA-Send 1xFC.
There is a connection between the ---
On ET-Connection interface of the
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and ET
200AL.
There is (at least) one diagnostics Check the ET-Connection device.
alarm of an ET-Connection device.
Flashes
Group error for all ET-Connection
bus nodes.
Set configuration does not match the Check the configuration of the ET-Connection to see
actual configuration on the ET- whether a module is missing or defective, or whether a
Connection. non-configured module is wired.
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Cable length
• Copper cables 15 m; as of IM firmware V3.3: Bus nodes be-
tween BA-Send and the first ET-Connection as
well as between all other bus nodes.
ET-Connection
Number of interfaces ET-Connection 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 °C
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights

User calibration of analog modules ___________________
Security information 1
2
___________________
Introduction
SIMATIC
___________________
Requirement 3
___________________
Mode of operation 4
ET 200SP
User calibration of analog modules
___________________
Performing user calibration 5
___________________
Example 6
Product Information
___________________
Appendix A A
09/2014
A5E34352075-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E34352075-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 10/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Security information ................................................................................................................................ 5

2 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 6
3 Requirement ........................................................................................................................................... 8
4 Mode of operation ................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2 Data set structure....................................................................................................................10
4.2.1 Job data set ............................................................................................................................11
4.2.2 Acknowledgment data set .......................................................................................................15
5 Performing user calibration ................................................................................................................... 21
5.1 Calibration start .......................................................................................................................21
5.2 Calibration sequence ..............................................................................................................22
5.3 Calibration exit ........................................................................................................................22
5.4 Calibration completion ............................................................................................................23
5.5 Status and error codes............................................................................................................24
5.6 Time stamp, Date/time ............................................................................................................26
5.7 Re-parameterization of the input/output range .......................................................................26
5.8 Calibration counter ..................................................................................................................27
5.9 Behavior at CPU-STOP ..........................................................................................................27
5.10 Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during calibration ..........................27
6 Example ............................................................................................................................................... 28
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2) ....................................................................................................28
6.1.1 Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer) .............................................29
6.1.1.1 Step A: Start ............................................................................................................................29
6.1.1.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration ................................................................................................31
6.1.1.3 Step C: Intermediate step .......................................................................................................33
6.1.1.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive ....................................................................................35
6.1.1.5 Step E: Closure .......................................................................................................................37
6.1.2 Example: Analog output module +/-10 V ................................................................................38
6.1.2.1 Step A: Start ............................................................................................................................38
6.1.2.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration ................................................................................................40
6.1.2.3 Step C: Intermediate step .......................................................................................................42
6.1.2.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive ....................................................................................44
6.2 Abort (mode = 3) .....................................................................................................................46
6.2.1 User abort ...............................................................................................................................46
6.2.2 Module abort ...........................................................................................................................47

Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA 3
Table of contents
6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4) ....................................................................................... 48

6.3.1 Step A: Start ........................................................................................................................... 48
6.3.2 Step B: Closure ...................................................................................................................... 50
6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5) ................................................................................... 51
6.5 Reset (mode = 6) ................................................................................................................... 53
A Appendix A ........................................................................................................................................... 55
A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels ................................................................................ 55
A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels ........................................................................... 58

4 Product Information, 09/2014, A5E34352075-AA
Security information 1
To ensure the secure operation of products and solutions from Siemens, it is necessary to
take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component
into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in
use should also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on
the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

Introduction 2
The characteristics of analog-digital/digital-analog converters in analog modules are usually
offset and not uniform in their slope. This means you must calibrate the characteristics to the
conditions of the analog module. A general distinction is made between factory calibration
and user calibration.
Factory calibration
To ensure the accuracy of an analog module, it is calibrated during production in the factory.
You cannot delete or change the factory calibration. You can only read the factory calibration
values.
User calibration
You can start, delete and read back a user calibration for an analog module with error-free
parameter assignment at any time. User calibration is used to increase the accuracy for
specific use cases with deviations that can be compensated, for example, by sensors or
wiring.
Zero-Scale/Offset calibration
Zero-Scale or Offset calibration is the calibration of the zero point. Usually "0" for bipolar
ranges and the low limit of the nominal range for unipolar ranges. The characteristic of the
converter is offset corrected and thus shifted into the zero point.
Full-Scale/Gain/Gain calibration
Full-Scale or Gain calibration is the calibration of the end point. It is usually the high limit of
the nominal range. The slope of the converter characteristic is adjusted so that it also
intersects the end point.

Introduction
Converter characteristic
The figure below shows the shift of the converter characteristic into the zero point on the left.
The right part of the figure shows the change in the converter characteristic slope so that the
converter characteristic intersects the end point.
Figure 2-1 Correction of the converter characteristic

Requirement 3
The accuracy/quality of a user calibration depends on the following points:
● Stable temperature condition (e.g., 25 °C)
● The settling time of the used calibrator/measuring instrument and the analog module
(e.g., for input or output modules with integrated measuring process → sigma-delta
converter)
● Cables (if possible, short, shielded and grounded at one side)
● Accuracy of the used calibrator and/or measuring instrument
Note
Measuring accuracy
The measuring accuracy may deteriorate if the user calibration is not performed properly.
It is not immediately clear if a channel works with factory calibration values or user
calibration values.

Mode of operation 4
You must perform the user calibration for each channel. To do so, always calibrate the
selected channel in the set input/output range. You can start the user calibration at any time
for a channel with error-free parameter assignment. After successful user calibration the
newly calibrated channel works in the current input/output range with the newly determined
calibration values.
4.1 Procedure
The user calibration is controlled by the data sets (DS). You must write a job data set for the
analog module and receive instructions for further actions in the acknowledgment data set.
This procedure is described in more detail in the section Performing user calibration
(Page 21).
The figure below shows the steps required for the user calibration of an instruction to the
analog module.
Figure 4-1 Steps in the user calibration for an instruction
The analog module saves the user calibration values. The values always apply only to the
input/output range for which they were created. If the input/output range is re-parameterized,
the factory calibration values are used once again. But the user calibration values still exist
(see section Re-parameterization of the input/output range (Page 26)).

Mode of operation
4.2 Data set structure
Each user calibration receives a time stamp (for each channel) which includes the date and
time of the last user calibration of the channel. You must transfer the date and time to the
analog module during calibration, because these values are not generated by the analog
module.
The analog module controls the number of required calibration steps for a user calibration.
The actions which you must start or confirm during user calibration are also initiated by the
analog module.
The set input/output range of a channel can only be calibrated completely during a user
calibration (zero-scale and full-scale). Partial calibration is not possible (e.g., zero-scale
only).

You can start a calibration process with the Write data set (job data set) and Read data set
(acknowledgment data set) mechanisms, DS 237 for each.
The structure of the job data set and the acknowledgment data set is identical. This means
the acknowledgment data set read last serves as the template for the next job data set.
Job data set and acknowledgment data set also apply to mixed modules with input and
output channels. Mixed modules have an input channel and an output channel with channel
number 0. To determine if you are calibrating an output channel or an input channel, the
channel number for output channels generally has the offset value 40H added to it.

Mode of operation
4.2.1 Job data set

The following table shows the structure of the job data set.
Table 4- 1 Structure of the job data set (18 bytes long)
Byte address Element Value range Format

0 Command/job ID 1: Factory calibration Byte
2: User calibration
3: Abort, normal channel pro-
cessing
4: Read calibration values
5: Restore factory calibration
6: Reset
1 Identifier 0 Byte
1
2 Channel number 00H … 3FH Byte
40H … 7FH
FFH
3 Calibration step FFH Byte
FEH … 00H
4 Not relevant - Byte
7 Input/output size 0: Not relevant Byte
1: mV
2: μA
3: -
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
9: U~ (0.01 V) effective value AC
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value
AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase
angle)
8 Substitute value behavior of inputs 0: retain last value Byte
1: Overflow (7FFFH)
2: Substitute value
3: continue to supply values*
9 Reserved - Byte
10 … 17 Extended Record See section below Extended Record
* Only for analog modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF and AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF

Mode of operation
The tables below show the value ranges of the elements and description of the job data set.
Command/job ID
Table 4- 2 Command/job ID
Value range Description

1: Factory calibration Not relevant
2: User calibration See section User calibration (mode = 2) (Page 28)
3: Abort, normal channel processing See section Abort (mode = 3) (Page 46)
4: Read calibration values See section Read calibration values (mode = 4)
(Page 48)
5: Restore factory calibration See section Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)
(Page 51)
6: Reset See section Reset (mode = 6) (Page 53)
Identifier
Table 4- 3 Identifier

0 Not relevant
1 Execute
Channel number
Table 4- 4 Channel number

00H … 3FH Input channels
40H … 7FH Output channels
FFH All channels, only permitted for command = 6 (Re-
set)
Calibration step
Table 4- 5 Calibration step

FFH Start
FEH … 00H Apply from last acknowledgment data set

Mode of operation
Input/output size
Table 4- 6 Input/output size

0: Not relevant Specifies how to interpret the values as of byte 10.
1: mV
2: μA
3: -
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle)
Substitute value behavior of inputs
Table 4- 7 Substitute value behavior of inputs

0: retain last value Only relevant for analog input modules.
1: Overflow (7FFFH) Evaluated at start only.
2: Substitute value
3: continue to supply values*
* Only for analog modules AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF and AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF

Mode of operation
Extended Record
Table 4- 8 Extended Record for input/output size = 1 (mV), 2 (μA), 5 (Ohm), 6 (Degrees)
Byte address Element Format Value range Description

10 Date1 Word - Place before the decimal point
32768 … 3276
7
12 Date2 Word -999 … 999 Places after decimal point * 1000
14 Date3 Word Not used
16 Substitute Word Not used
value
Extended Record for input/output size = 4 (Date/Time), BCD coded: See section Time
stamp, date/time (Page 26)
Table 4- 9 Extended Record for input/output size = 9 (U~), 10 (I~), 11 (Phi)

14 Date3 Word 0 … 65535 Setpoint for calibration operating
point
16 Substitute Word Not used
value
Table 4- 10 Extended Record for substitute value behavior of inputs = 2 (substitute value)

10 Date1 Word 0 Not relevant
16 Substitute Word 8000H … 7FFF Must be within parameterized
value H measuring range

Mode of operation
4.2.2 Acknowledgment data set

The following table shows the structure of the acknowledgment data set.
Table 4- 11 Structure of the job or acknowledgment data set (18 bytes long)
Byte address Element Value range Format

0 Command/mode 1: Factory calibration Byte
2: User calibration
3: Abort, normal channel pro-
cessing
4: Read calibration values
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working Byte
01H: OK, Ready
≥ 10H: Error
2 Channel number 00H … 3FH Byte
40H … 7FH
FFH
3 Calibration step FFH … 00H Byte
4 Input/output type 00H … F9H Byte
5 Input/output range 00H … F9H Byte
6 User action 0: None Byte
1: Short-circuit
2: Feed, connection
3: Measurement
4: Remove connections
7 Input/output size 0: Not relevant Byte
1: mV
2: μA
3: Calibration values
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value
AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase
angle)
8 Calibration counter 00H … FFH Byte
9 Reserved - Byte
10 … 17 Extended Record See section below Extended Record

Mode of operation
The tables below show the value ranges of the elements and description of the
acknowledgment data set.
Command/mode
Is mirrored from the command with error-free processing of the job data set.
Table 4- 12 Command/mode

1: Factory calibration Not relevant
2: User calibration See section User calibration (mode = 2)
(Page 28)
3: Abort, normal channel processing See section Abort (mode = 3) (Page 46)
4: Read calibration values See section Read calibration values (mode = 4)
(Page 48)
Status/error code
Table 4- 13 Status/error code

00H: OK, Working Job processing still ongoing
01H: OK, Ready Job processing successfully completed
≥ 10H: Error See section Status and error codes (Page 24)
Channel number
Table 4- 14 Channel number

00H … 3FH Input channels
40H … 7FH Output channels
FFH All channels
Calibration step
Table 4- 15 Calibration step

FFH … 00H Number of calibration steps still required

Mode of operation
Input/output type
Table 4- 16 Input/output type

00H … F9H Currently parameterized input/output type of the
channel, see Parameter tables in the sections
Format input type/range: Input channels
(Page 55) and Format output type/range: Output
channels (Page 58)
Input/output range
Table 4- 17 Input/output range

00H … F9H Currently parameterized input/output range of the
channel, see Parameter tables in the sections
Format input type/range: Input channels
(Page 55) and Format output type/range: Output
channels (Page 58)
User action
Table 4- 18 User action

0: None Indicates how to wire the terminals specified
1: Short-circuit under Terminal1/Terminal2.
2: Feed, connection
3: Measurement
4: Remove connections

Mode of operation
Input/output size
Table 4- 19 Input/output size

0: Not relevant Specifies how to interpret the values as of byte
1: mV 10.
2: μA For user actions = 2 and 3 the corresponding unit
3: Calibration values is specified here.
4: Time/date
5: Ohm
6: Degrees
7: -
8: -
10: I~ (0.0001 A) effective value AC
11: Phi (0.01 degrees) (phase angle)
Calibration counter
Table 4- 20 Calibration counter

00H … FFH Number of successful user calibrations
00H = Factory calibration values

Mode of operation
Extended Record
Table 4- 21 Extended Record for input/output size = 1 (mV), 2 (μA), 5 (Ω), 6 (Degrees)

10 Date1 Word -32768 … 32767 Place before the decimal point
12 Date2 Word -999 … 999 Place after decimal point * 1000
16 Terminal1 Byte 0…x Terminal at BaseUnit
(0 = invalid)
(0 = invalid)
Table 4- 22 Extended Record for input/output size = 9 (U~), 10 (I~), 11 (Phi)

10 Date1 Double word 00H … FFFFFFFFH Calibration register content
(last calibration step executed)
14 Date2 Word 0 … 65535 Setpoint for next step
(0 = invalid)
(0 = invalid)
Extended Record for input/output size = 4 (Date/Time): See section Time stamp, date/time
(Page 26)
Table 4- 23 Extended Record for input/output size = 3 (calibration values)

10 Date1 Word Format 1 Offset (converter units)
12 Date2 Word Format 2 Gain
14 Date3 Word Module-specific Add1
16 Date4 Word Format 1 or For- Add2
mat 2
The values can be output in two formats:

Format 1 (identifier = 0):
WORD, value range -32767 ... +32768
Format 2 (identifier = 1):
Value range -31.999 to +31.999

Mode of operation
Table 4- 24 Extended Record: Places before and after the decimal point
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20

VZ Places before the decimal Places after decimal point * 1000 (0 … 999)
point (0 … 31)
Format Terminal1/Terminal2:
For user actions = 1, 2, 3, 4 the terminal number of the terminal at BaseUnit are displayed
here (1 … x).

Performing user calibration 5
5.1 Calibration start
You must start the user calibration using the job data set with command = 2 (user calibration)
and calibration step = FFH (Start).
An active/running calibration is displayed with Mode = 2 (user calibration) in the
A diagnostic is also reported for analog modules with diagnostic capability:
● Analog modules with channel diagnostics signal error 31 (Channel temporarily
unavailable) for the affected channel, channel fault LED lights up red, the module fault
LED flashes.
● Analog modules which support the value status (QI) set QI to "BAD".
The user calibration can be started at any time. The start requires that the channel was
parameterized without errors and that it is not already in another calibration mode which can
be recognized by command 3 and status > 00H in the acknowledgment data set:
● After starting the user calibration and until it is completed, only command = 2 is accepted
and processed for this channel.
All other commands result in the user calibration being aborted.
● The acknowledgment data set is generated immediately by mirroring it from the job data
set and entering it in the status = 00H (OK, Working).
● After completing the calibration step, the acknowledgment data set is updated and the
status > 00H is set:
– The command was accepted with status = 01H (OK, Ready). The number of steps that
still have to executed is specified in the calibration step. The action that you need to
execute next is specified in the user action.
– For user action = 1 (Short-circuit), 2 (Infeed), 3 (Measuring) and 4 (Remove
connections), the relevant terminals are specified in the Extended Record under
Terminal1 and Terminal2 whereby Terminal1 is always the positive terminal.
– For user action = 2 (Infeed) or 3 (Measuring) the unit is specified for measured
variable (e.g., μA or mV).
– For status > 10H, an error was detected and calibration was aborted. In
Command/Mode, "Abort, normal channel processing" is signaled. The analog module
resumes the same status as before calibration was started.

Performing user calibration
5.2 Calibration sequence
5.2 Calibration sequence

Each calibration step is triggered by writing the job data set with calibration step = FFH (for
start) or FEH … 00H, applied from the previously signaled acknowledgment data set and
identifier = 01H.
Next the analog module has to read and evaluate the acknowledgment data set.
● For status = 00H (OK, Working), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job
data set is still in progress.
● For status = 01H (OK, Ready), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job
data set is complete and was processed without errors.
● For status ≥ 10H (Error), the calibration of the analog module initiated with the job data set
was not processed successfully and was acknowledged with an error. The ongoing
calibration is aborted and any determined calibration values are discarded.
Note
Non-relevant elements
Elements that are not relevant for a calibration step are not taken into consideration by the
module. The user calibration is not aborted by these elements.
5.3 Calibration exit

You can exit the calibration in any calibration step by means of a job data set with command
= 3 (Abort, normal channel processing). Any calibration values determined until then are lost.
The analog module resumes the same status as before calibration was started. If user
calibration values existed before the calibration, these will become effective again after the
abort. If no user calibration values existed, the factory calibration values are still in effect.
Any calibration initiated previously can also be aborted with the following actions:
● POWER OFF/POWER ON of the supply voltage
● Pulling & plugging of the analog module
● Re-parameterization of the analog module
● Re-parameterization of the analog module
● Firmware update of the analog module

5.4 Calibration completion
5.4 Calibration completion

The last calibration step is the confirmation of the calibration or of the determined calibration
values. This calibration step is initialized by the analog module for a user calibration with
calibration step = 1 in the acknowledgment data set. All calibration values of the current
calibration process are determined and signaled back.
Confirm the calibration values with the job data set and calibration step = 1. With input/output
size = 4 (Date/Time) a time stamp in S7 BCD format is entered starting with byte 10 (see
section Time stamp, Date/Time (Page 26)).
As soon as the calibration values and the time stamp of the analog module have been
checked and applied, mode = 3 (normal channel processing) and status = 01H (OK, Ready)
are signaled in the acknowledgment data set. The channel number, the input/output type and
the input/
output range remain the same; the remaining data equals zero.
The newly determined calibration values are now valid and in effect.
The previous user calibration values are overwritten and cannot be restored.
In case of an error in the last calibration step (e.g., error in time stamp), the corresponding
error code is signaled in the status. The new calibration values are discarded.

5.5 Status and error codes
Table 5- 1 Status codes
Status code Description

00H OK, Working; job in progress
01H OK, Ready; job executed without error
02H … 0FH Reserved
Calibration is aborted with an error if an error occurs during calibration.
Table 5- 2 Error codes
Error codes Description Remedy/Cause

General errors of the calibration process
10H Invalid command Correct job data set; table Com-
mand/job ID (Page 12)
11H Invalid channel number Correct job data set; table Identification
(Page 12)
12H Invalid identification Correct job data set; table Channel
number (Page 12)
13H Invalid calibration step Correct job data set; table Calibration
step (Page 12)
14H Error in input/output type or input/ Input/output type or input/output range
output range cannot be scaled; see Analog Module
Manual
15H Invalid module action Irrelevant for user calibration
16H Invalid input/output size information Extended Record, invalid content; Cor-
rect job data set (Page 11)
17H Reserved –
18H Time stamp error (year) Invalid time stamp; correct job data set;
19H Time stamp error (month) section Time stamp, Date/Time
(Page 26)
1AH Time stamp error (day)
1BH Time stamp error (hour)
1CH Time stamp error (minute)
1DH Time stamp error (day of the week)
1EH Invalid substitute value behavior of Correct job data set; table Substitute
inputs value behavior of inputs (Page 13)
1F H Substitute value out of the measuring
range

Error codes Description Remedy/Cause

Technology errors
20H Value measured by user deviates too Circuit, check measuring technique;
much from setpoint correct job data set
21H Value supplied by user deviates too Circuit, check infeed technique
much from setpoint
22H … 23H Reserved –
24H User calibration not supported See Analog Module Manual
25H … 2FH Reserved –
System errors/general module errors
30H Error writing to EEPROM/Flash Replace analog module
31H Error in procedure A job data set with a command other
than the one active came in during the
calibration process.
Follow procedure; see section Example
(Page 28)
32H Channel not parameterized Correct configuration/parameter as-
signment
33H Reserved –
34H Abort due to parameter assignment See section Behavior with parameter
during ongoing calibration assignment of analog modules during
calibration (Page 27)
35H … 3FH Reserved –
Other faults/errors
40H Reserved –
41H No calibration values available No calibration values available to delete;
See section Prepare factory calibration
(mode = 5) (Page 51) and Reset (mode
= 6) (Page 53)
42H … FFH Reserved –

5.6 Time stamp, Date/time
5.6 Time stamp, Date/time

During user calibration, you transfer the date and time of the synchronization to the analog
module in calibration step = 1 Date and time.
When reading the calibration values (command = 4), the date and time of the read
calibration values are output in calibration step = 1.
Both take place with measured variable = 4 as time stamp in the acknowledgment data set
as well as in the job data set as of byte 10 in S7 BCD format.
Byte address Value Format Value range

10 Year Byte 00H = 2000, 99H = 2099
11 Month Byte 01H … 12H
12 Tag Byte 01H … 31H
13 Hour Byte 00H … 23H
14 Minute Byte 00H … 59H
15 Second Byte 00H … 59H
16 ms Byte 00H … 99H
17.4 … 17.7 ms High nibble 0H … 9H
17.0 … 17.3 Day of the week Low nibble 0 = undefined
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
5.7 Re-parameterization of the input/output range

If you have conducted a user calibration on a channel, the user calibration values are in
effect for this channel. The user calibration values always apply only to the input/output
range for which they were created. If the input/output range is re-parameterized to another
input/output range, the factory calibration values are used once again for this range. The
user calibration values still exist.
When you start a user calibration in the new input/output range, the new calibration values
are saved for this new input/output range. The user calibration values of the previous
input/output range are overwritten because only one user calibration can be saved per
channel.
If you do not start user calibration and switch back to the previous input/output range, the
previous user calibration values will be in effect once again.
Other channel parameters (e.g., interference frequency suppression) have no effect on the
validity of the calibration values.

5.8 Calibration counter
5.8 Calibration counter

Each error-free and complete user calibration of a channel is counted. More than 255
calibration processes do not increase the calibration counter.
The current counter status (including ongoing calibration) is displayed in calibration step = 1
together with the currently determined calibration values. When you acknowledge this
calibration step with the job data set, the calibration counter is saved retentively with the
determined user calibration values and will be in effect.
Each command = 5 (Restore factory calibration) or 6 (Reset) deletes the calibration counter.
A re-parameterization of the input/output ranges does not delete the calibration counter.
When you start a user calibration in the new input/output range, the calibration counter is
reset and starts counting from 1 again.
If you do not start user calibration and switch back to the previous input/output range, the
previous user calibration values will be in effect once again.
5.9 Behavior at CPU-STOP

Reading and writing of data sets is not possible in CPU STOP.
5.10 Behavior with parameter assignment of analog modules during

calibration
Each parameter data set that comes in during an ongoing user calibration results in the
calibration being aborted.
The acknowledgment data set is updated with a corresponding error message.

Example 6
6.1 User calibration (mode = 2)
All processes described below are based on the initial state of the acknowledgment data set.
Byte Element Value

0 Mode 3: normal channel processing
1 Status/error code >0
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH*
4 Input/output type 0
5 Input/output range 0
6 User action 0: None
7 Input/output size 0
8 Calibration counter 0
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 0
12 Date2 0
14 Date3 0
16 Terminal1 0
17 Terminal2 0
* The calibration step can only take place immediately after run-up FFH. After completion/abort of a
calibration step, "0 = no more steps" is signaled.
Only the data necessary for the current calibration step are entered in the job/
● The command and the channel number must remain the same for each job data set of a
calibration sequence; otherwise, the calibration is aborted.
● The calibration step must be transferred to the analog module again in each job data set
according to the last acknowledgment data set. The start is an exception.
● The channel must be parameterized.
● A job data set may only be transferred to the analog module with status > 00H.
● The current calibration step is to be executed with identifier = 1 in the job data set.

Example
6.1.1 Example: Analog input module RTD (resistance thermometer)
6.1.1.1 Step A: Start

Job data set:
Start the user calibration with channel X. The specified substitute value behavior of the
inputs and the substitute value apply to the triggered calibration and are evaluated and
applied by the analog module during the initial call only.
Byte Element Value

0 Command 2: User calibration
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH: Start
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior 0: retain last value
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Datem3
16 Substitute value

Example
Acknowledgment data set:

The analog module acknowledges the change to user calibration (mode = 2) with channel =
X and status = 00H (OK, Working). As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H
(OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can
evaluate the data. The input/output range currently set on this channel as well as the number
of required calibration steps is signaled. The analog module requests channel X in the next
calibration step; short-circuit at terminals Y and Z.
Byte Element Value Value

0 Mode 2: User calibration 2: User calibration
1 Status/error code 00H: OK, Working 01H: OK, Ready
2 Channel number X X
3 Calibration step FFH 4 more steps
4 Input/output type 09H: RTD, 2-wire
5 Input/output range 02H: PT100, Std.
6 User action 1: Short-circuit
7 Input/output size
8 Calibration counter
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

Example
6.1.1.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 4. The requested action (short-circuit terminals Y, Z) is
finished.
Byte Element Value

1 Identifier 1: Execute
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step 4
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
8 Substitute value behavior
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready), the remaining data of the
acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data.
The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests
channel X in the next calibration step; infeed; remove connections.

3 Calibration step 4 3 more steps
6 User action 4: Remove connec-
tions
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

Example
6.1.1.3 Step C: Intermediate step

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 3. The requested action (remove connections at terminals Y,
Z) is finished.
Byte Element Value

2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The analog module requests
channel X in the next calibration step; infeed 390.5 Ω at terminals Y and Z.

6 User action 2: Infeed
7 Input/output size 5: Ohm
9 Reserved
10 Date1 390
12 Date2 500
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

Example
6.1.1.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 2. The requested action (infeed 390.5 Ω at terminals Y, Z) is
finished.
Byte Element Value

2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The calibration values
determined by the analog module are signaled (identified by measured variable = 3). The
offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if
present).
The number of successful calibration processes is signaled for this input/output range in the
calibration counter.
1 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means the last calibration step.

3 Calibration step 2 1 more step
7 Input/output size 3: Calibration values
8 Calibration counter X: 1 … 255
9 Reserved
10 Date1 Offset
12 Date2 Gain
14 Date3 Add1
16 Date4 Add2

Example
6.1.1.5 Step E: Closure

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 1. The synchronization values signaled by the analog module
are accepted. You must enter the date and the time with measured variable = 4 in S7 BCD
format as of byte 10.
Byte Element Value

2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size 4: Date/time
9 Reserved
10 Date/time Date and time in S7 BCD format

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (normal
channel processing), the determined calibration values and date/time are applied and saved.
0 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means no more calibration steps. Calibration
complete.

0 Mode 2: User calibration 3: normal channel
processing
3 Calibration step 1 0 (ready now)
6 User action 0
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 0
12 Date2 0
14 Date3 0
16 Terminal1 0
17 Terminal2 0

Example
6.1.2 Example: Analog output module +/-10 V
6.1.2.1 Step A: Start

Job data set:
Start the user calibration with channel X.
Byte Element Value

1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

The analog module acknowledges the change to user calibration (mode = 2) with channel =
X and status = 00H (OK, Working). As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H
(OK, Ready), the remaining data of the acknowledgment data set are valid and you can
evaluate the data.
The input/output range currently set on this channel as well as the number of required
calibration steps is signaled.
The analog module requests channel X in the first calibration step; measuring at terminals Y
and Z.

3 Calibration step FFH 3 more steps
4 Input/output type 01H: Voltage
5 Input/output range 02H: 0 … 10 V
6 User action 3: Measurement
7 Input/output size 1: mV
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

Example
6.1.2.2 Step B: Zero-Scale calibration

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 3. The requested action (voltage measuring at terminals Y, Z)
is finished. The measured voltage is transferred to the analog module in Date1 in the unit
specified under measured variable. The place in front of the decimal point of the voltage in
mV is entered in Date1, and the value after the decimal point of the voltage in mV multiplied
by 1000 is entered in Date2. Example: 15.6 mV.
Byte Element Value

2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
9 Reserved
10 Date1 15
12 Date2 600
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented.
The analog module requests channel X in the next calibration step; measuring at terminals Y
and Z.

6 User action 3: Measurement
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1 Y
17 Terminal2 Z

Example
6.1.2.3 Step C: Intermediate step

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 2. The requested action (voltage measuring at terminals Y, Z)
is finished. The measured voltage is transferred to the analog module in Date1 in the unit
specified under measured variable. The place in front of the decimal point of the voltage in
mV is entered in Date1, and the value after the decimal point of the voltage in mV multiplied
by 1000 is entered in Date2. Example: 9986.3 mV.
Byte Element Value

2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
9 Reserved
10 Date1 9986
12 Date2 300
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

The number of necessary calibration steps is decremented. The calibration values
determined by the analog module are signaled (identified by measured variable = 3). The
offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if
present). The number of successful calibration processes is signaled for this input/output
range in the calibration counter.
1 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means the last calibration step.

3 Calibration step 2 1 more step
9 Reserved
10 Date1 Offset
12 Date2 Gain
14 Date3 Add1
16 Date4 Add2

Example
6.1.2.4 Step D: Full-Scale calibration positive

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 1. The synchronization values signaled by the analog module
are accepted.
You must enter the date and the time with measured variable = 4 in S7 BCD format as of
Date1.
Byte Element Value

2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
9 Reserved
10 Date1 Date and time in S7 BCD format

Example

channel processing), the determined calibration values and date/time are applied and saved.
0 is not signaled back in calibration step, which means no more calibration steps. Calibration
complete.

0 Mode 2: User calibration 3: normal channel
processing
3 Calibration step 1 0 (ready now)
6 User action 0
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 0
12 Date2 0
14 Date3 0
16 Terminal1 0
17 Terminal2 0

Example
6.2 Abort (mode = 3)
6.2.1 User abort

Job data set:
An ongoing calibration can be aborted in any calibration step and in any state, even with
status = 00H (OK, Working), with the command = 3 (Abort, channel processing).
Byte Element Value

0 Command 3: Abort, channel processing
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

As soon as the analog module signals in status = 01H (OK, Ready) and mode = 3 (abort,
normal channel processing), the calibration of channel X is aborted. The channel has the
same state as before the calibration. The input/output range currently set on the channel is
signaled.

0 Mode 3: Abort, channel 3: Abort, channel
processing processing
6 User action 0
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1
17 Terminal2
6.2.2 Module abort

If the analog module detects an error during a calibration process, this error aborts the
calibration. The error code is signaled in the status.
See also
Calibration exit (Page 22)

Example
6.3 Read calibration values (mode = 4)

All current calibration values of an analog module channel are read with command = 4 (Read
calibration values); these are either the values from the factory calibration or the user
calibration.
The command is only permitted in status > 00H. The channel number must be specified and
the calibration step must be set to FFH (Start).
6.3.1 Step A: Start

Job data set:
Byte Element Value

0 Command 4: Read calibration values
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. Measured variable = 3
identifies the data as of Date1 as calibration values. Only the current calibration values of the
specified channel are read with command = 4; these are the calibration values associated
with the parameterized input/output range.

0 Mode 4: Read calibration 4: Read calibration
values values
3 Calibration step FFH 1 more step
9 Reserved 0
10 Date1 Offset
12 Date2 Gain
14 Date3 Add1
16 Date4 Add2
The input/output range currently set on the channel is signaled.

The offset is in Date1, the gain in Date2, Add1 in Date3 (if present) and Add2 in Date4 (if
present).
The calibration counter specifies if the values are factory calibration values (calibration
counter = 0) or user calibration values (calibration counter > 0). For user calibration values,
the value of the calibration counter is equal to the number of successful calibration
processes for this input/output range (since the last user calibration of a different input/output
range).
Calibration step = 1 indicates that one more step is necessary.

Example
6.3.2 Step B: Closure

Job data set:
Acknowledge calibration step 1.
Byte Element Value

0 Command 4: Read calibration values
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

acknowledgment data set are valid and you can evaluate the data. Measured variable = 4
identifies the data as of Date1 Time stamp. A time stamp that matches the previously read
calibration values is signaled.

0 Mode 4: Read calibration 3: normal channel
values processing
3 Calibration step 1 0
9 Reserved
10 Date/time Date and time in S7
BCD format

Example
6.4 Restore factory calibration (mode = 5)

Use command = 5 (Restore factory calibration) to undo the executed user calibration of the
specified channel for the set input/output range. The analog module applies the calibration
values determined at the factory which will be in effect again. Delete saved user calibration
values.
If user calibration values of the channel exist which do not belong to the set input/output
range, these are not deleted.
The command is only permitted in status > 00H.
Specify the channel number and set the calibration step to FFH (Start).
The calibration counter is set to 0 again with this command.
Job data set:
Byte Element Value

0 Command 5: Restore factory calibration
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

channel processing), restoration is complete. The user calibration was deleted and the
channel continues operating in the previous state with factory calibration values.

0 Mode 5: Restore factory 3: normal channel
calibration processing
1 Status/error code 00: OK, Working 01: OK, Ready
3 Calibration step FFH 0 (ready now)
6 User action
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1
17 Terminal2

Example
6.5 Reset (mode = 6)

Use the command = 6 (Reset) to restore the factory calibration for a channel or the entire
analog module regardless of the parameter assignment of the channels.
The factory calibration of a channel is restored according to the channel number, and any
saved user calibration values are deleted (even if the saved user calibration values do not
belong to the currently set input/output range). With channel number FFH, restoration takes
place for all channels of the analog module.
The command is only permitted in status > 00H. Set the calibration step to FFH (Start). The
channel or the analog module must not be parameterized.
The involved calibration counters are set to 0 again with this command.
Job data set:
Byte Element Value

0 Command 6: Reset
1 Identifier
2 Channel number X
3 Calibration step FFH
4 Not relevant
5 Not relevant
6 Not relevant
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Substitute value

Example

channel processing), reset is complete. The user calibration values were deleted. All
channels involved continue operating in their previous state with factory calibration values.

0 Mode 6: Reset 3: normal channel
processing
3 Calibration step FFH 0 (ready now)
4 Input/output type
5 Input/output range
6 User action
7 Input/output size
9 Reserved
10 Date1
12 Date2
14 Date3
16 Terminal1
17 Terminal2

Appendix A A
A.1 Input type/range format: Input channels
Input type format: Input channels
ValueD Input type

00 Deactivated
01 Voltage
02 Current (4-wire transducer)
04 resistance (4-wire connection)
07 Thermal resistance (linear, 4-conductor connection)
10 Thermocouple
Input range format: Input channels

An input type that is not as listed in this table can also be used for specific modules. You
must note, however, that the input type in the acknowledgment data set no longer matches
the general definition.
ValueD Input type

For input type = 01 (voltage)
00 ± 25 mV
01 ± 50 mV
02 ± 80 mV
03 ± 250 mV
04 ± 500 mV
05 ±1V
06 ± 1.25 V
07 ± 2.5 V
08 ±5V
09 ± 10 V
10 1…5V
11 0 … 10 V

Appendix A
ValueD Input type

For input type = 02, 03 (current)
00 ± 3.2 mA
01 ± 10 mA
02 0 … 20 mA
03 4 … 20 mA
04 ± 20 mA
05 ± 5 mA
For input type = 04, 05, 06 (resistor: 4-wire, 3-wire , 2-wire connection)
00 48 Ω
01 150 Ω
02 300 Ω
03 600 Ω
04 3000 Ω
05 6000 Ω
06 10000 Ω
15 PTC (DIN VDE 0660 Part 303 Type A)
For input type = 07, 08, 09 (thermistor: 4-wire, 3-wire , 2-wire connection)
00 Pt100 climatic range
01 Ni100 climatic range
02 Pt100 Standard range
03 Ni100 standard range
04 Pt500 standard range
14 Cu10 climatic range
15 Cu10 standard range

Appendix A
ValueD Input type

28 LG Ni1000 standard range
29 LG Ni1000 climatic range
For input type = 10 (thermocouple)
00 Type B [PtRh-PtRh]
01 Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi]
02 Type E [NiCr-CuNi]
03 Type R [PtRh-Pt]
04 Type S [PtRh-Pt]
05 Type J [Fe-CuNi]
06 Type L [Fe-CuNi] recalled since 1994 standard (DIN 43710)
07 Type T [Cu-CuNi]
08 Type K [NiCr-Ni]
09 Type U [Cu-CuNi] recalled since 1994 standard (DIN 43710)
10 Type C [W5Re-W26Re]
11 TXK/XK(L) [TXK/XK(L)]

Appendix A
A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels
A.2 Output type/range format: Output channels
Output type format: Output channels

An output type that is not as listed in this table can also be used for specific modules. You
must note, however, that the output type in the acknowledgment data set no longer matches
the general definition.
ValueD Output type

00 Deactivated
01 Voltage
Output range format: Output channels
ValueD Output range

For output type = 01 (voltage)
00 ± 10 V
01 ±5V
02 0 … 10 V
03 1…5V
04 ± 2.5 V
05 ±1V
For output type = 02, 03 (current)
00 ± 20 mA
01 0 … 20 mA
02 4 … 20 mA

CPU 1510SP-1 PN ___________________
Preface
(6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0) ___________________
Documentation guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
CPU 1510SP-1 PN Interrupts, error messages,
(6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0) ___________
4
diagnostics and system
alarms
Manual ___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
12/2014
A5E33589074-AB
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E33589074-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

This manual supplements the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual as well as
the function manuals. All cross-system functions are described in the system manual and in
the function manuals.
The information provided in this manual and the system manual allows you to commission
the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
Conventions
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the
configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe the notes marked as follows:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

4 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Operating principle .................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.3 Operating and display elements .............................................................................................12
2.3.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter .............................................................................12
2.4 Mode switch ............................................................................................................................13
2.5 Functions ................................................................................................................................13
2.5.1 PROFINET IO .........................................................................................................................13
2.5.2 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................14
2.5.3 PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................................................15
2.5.4 Memory reset ..........................................................................................................................16
2.5.5 Restoring the factory settings of the CPU...............................................................................17
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 20
4 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 25
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU .......................................................................................25
5 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 28
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 38
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

6 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Documentation guide

your own manual.
Applications & Tools

Applications & Tools supports you with various tools and examples for solving your
You can find Applications & Tools on the Internet

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool

CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Operating principle
The CPU includes the operating system and executes the user program. The user program
is located on the SIMATIC memory card and is processed in the CPU work memory.
The PROFINET interfaces available on the CPU enable simultaneous communication with
PROFINET devices, PROFINET controllers, HMI devices, programming devices, other
controllers and additional systems. The CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports operation as an IO
controller, I-device or standalone CPU.
With its optional PROFIBUS interface, CM DP, CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports the
configuration of PROFIBUS networks in addition to PROFINET IO. When you use the
interface as a PROFIBUS DP interface, you can configure the CPU 1510SP-1 PN as a DP
master or as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave).
IO controller
CPU 1510SP-1 PN sends and receives data from the connected IO devices within a
PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with up to 64 connected IO devices.
I-device
The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality allows you to exchange data with an IO
controller. CPU 1510SP-1 PN thus fulfills the role of an intelligent distributed pre-processing
unit for sub-processes. The I-device is connected as an IO device to a higher-level IO
controller for this purpose.
Advantages:
● Interference-resistant configuration due to short signal and encoder wiring
● Reduced wiring requirements for transmission of the data via PROFINET
Standalone CPU
You can also use the CPU 1510SP-1 PN in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system as a
"central system" without a higher-level controller.
DP master
To use the ET 200SP as a DP master, you need the CPU and the optional communication
module, CM DP. When used as a DP master, ET 200SP exchanges data with the connected
DP slaves via PROFIBUS DP.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

8 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Product overview
2.2 Properties
Intelligent DP slave (I-slave)

To use the ET 200SP as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave), you need the CPU and the optional
communication module, CM DP. As an I-slave, ET 200SP is connected via PROFIBUS DP
to the higher-level DP master and exchanges data with it.
2.2 Properties
Article number
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
View of the module

The figure below shows the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
Figure 2-1 CPU 1510SP-1 PN
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 9
Product overview
2.2 Properties
Properties
The CPU 1510SP-1 PN has the following technical properties:
● Communication:
– Interfaces
The CPU 1510SP-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1) with an integrated 3-port
switch. Port 1 and port 2 are located on the pluggable BusAdapter. Port 3 is integrated
in the housing of the CPU. The CPU supports the BusAdapters BA 2xRJ45 and
BA 2xFC. You connect the PROFINET IO to the CPU via the BusAdapter. Port 1 and
port 2 can also be used as ring ports for the configuration of redundant ring structures
in Ethernet (media redundancy).
Note
The CPU is delivered without a BusAdapter. You can find the article numbers of the
supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the Distributed
automation system ET 200SP
The PROFINET interface supports PROFINET IO RT (Realtime) and IRT

(Isochronous Realtime) in addition to PROFINET basic functionality. PROFINET IO
communication or real-time settings can be configured on the interface.
The CM DP is optionally available with a PROFIBUS interface (X2). You can find more
information about this expansion module in the manual CM DP communication
module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/90156526).
You can find information about connecting the PROFINET IO BusAdapter to the CPU
as well as connecting the optional PROFIBUS interface to the interface module in the
system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Integrated Web server:
The CPU is accessible via an integrated Web server for diagnostic purposes. You can
read the following information with the Web server:
– Start page with general CPU information
– Identification information
– Contents of the diagnostics buffer
– Query of module states
– Alarms (without acknowledgment option)
– Information about communication
– PROFINET topology
– Tag status
– Watch tables
– Memory usage
– Data logs (if used)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

10 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Product overview
2.2 Properties
● Integrated technology:
– Motion Control
PLC-Open blocks for programming motion functionality via PROFINET IO IRT with
PROFIdrive interface.
The functionality supports speed-controlled axes, positioning axes, synchronous axes
and external encoders.
– Integrated closed-loop control functionality
- Universal PID controller and 3-point controller with integrated tuning
- Integrated temperature controller
● Trace functionality:
– Trace functionality supports you in troubleshooting and optimizing the user program,
especially for motion control or closed-loop control applications.
● Integrated system diagnostics:
– The alarms for the system diagnostics are automatically created by the system and
displayed on a PG/PC, HMI device or the Web server. System diagnostics information
is also available when the CPU is in STOP mode.
● Integrated security:
– Know-how protection
The assignment of passwords protects user blocks against unauthorized access and
modifications.
– Copy protection
Copy protection links user blocks to the serial number of the SIMATIC memory card or
to the serial number of the CPU. User programs cannot run without the corresponding
SIMATIC memory card or CPU.
– Access protection
Extended access protection provides high-quality protection against unauthorized
configuration changes. You can use authorization levels to assign separate rights to
different user groups.
– Integrity protection
The system protects the data transferred to the CPU against manipulation. The CPU
detects erroneous or manipulated engineering data.
You can find additional information on the topic of "Protection" in the system manual
● The CPU 1510SP-1 PN supports the following additional functions:
– Firmware update
– PROFIenergy
– Shared device
– Configuration control
– Isochronous mode
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 11
Product overview
2.3 Operating and display elements
2.3.1 Front view of the module with BusAdapter

The figure on the left shows the CPU 1510SP-1 PN including a plugged BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter. The figure on the right shows a separate view of the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter.
① Mounting rail release

② Labeling strips
③ LEDs for status and error displays
④ LED for display of the supply voltage
⑤ Mode switch
⑥ Slot for the SIMATIC memory card
⑦ Connection for supply voltage (included in product package)
⑧ Cable support and attachment for port P3 of the PROFINET interface
⑨ LEDs for status displays of the PROFINET interface: LK1 and LK2 on BusAdapter, LK3 on
CPU
⑩ Port P3 of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket
⑪ Separate view of the BusAdapter
⑫ Port P1 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
R: Ring port for configuring a ring topology with media redundancy
⑬ Port P2 R of the PROFINET interface: RJ45 socket on BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
Figure 2-2 Front view of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN with BusAdapter
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

12 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Product overview
2.4 Mode switch
2.4 Mode switch

Use the mode switch to set the CPU operating mode.
The following table shows the position of the switch and the corresponding meaning.
Table 2- 1 Mode switch settings
Position Meaning Explanation

RUN RUN mode The CPU is executing the user program.
STOP STOP mode The user program is not being executed.
MRES Memory reset Position for CPU memory reset.
2.5 Functions
2.5.1 PROFINET IO
PROFINET is a fieldbus standard of the PROFIBUS user organization that defines a cross-
vendor communications and engineering model.
As part of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept that is used to implement
modular, distributed applications. PROFINET IO IRT allows defined response times and
highly precise plant behavior.
A PROFINET IO system consists of the following PROFINET devices:
● IO controller
Device used to address the connected IO devices.
● IO device
A distributed field device that is assigned to an IO controller.
The PROFINET IO controller operating mode allows direct access to IO devices via
Industrial Ethernet (for example from an S7-1500 CPU as IO controller to a
CPU 1510SP-1 PN as IO device).
With the PROFINET IO device operating mode, you can operate the CPU 1510SP-1 PN as
an "intelligent" PROFINET IO device on Industrial Ethernet.
Note
The BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (6ES7193-6AR00-0AA) or BusAdapter BA 2xFC
(6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0) is required for standard-compliant operation of the
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0) as PROFINET IO controller and PROFINET IO
device.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 13
Product overview
2.5 Functions
General properties of PROFINET IO

PROFINET IO provides the following properties and functions:
● Real-time communication (RT)
● Isochronous real-time communication (IRT)
● Media redundancy
● Prioritized startup
● Device replacement without exchangeable medium
● I-device
● IO controller
● Shared device
● Isochronous mode
Reference
You can find additional information on the "PROFINET IO" topic in the STEP 7 online help
and in the PROFINET System Description
2.5.2 PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
with full coordination during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
Through this, the process should only be provided with the energy that is absolutely
required. The majority of the energy is saved by the process; the PROFINET device itself
only contributes a few watts of savings potential.
● See the PROFINET (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/68039307)
function manual
● You will find more information on PROFIenergy in the PROFINET specification on the
Internet (http://www.profibus.com).
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

14 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Product overview
2.5 Functions
2.5.3 PROFIBUS DP
configuration of PROFIBUS networks in addition to PROFINET IO.
PROFIBUS is the fieldbus network for the cell and field level. Physically, PROFIBUS is an
electrical network based on a shielded two-wire cable or an optical network based on a fiber
optic cable.
Data transfer via PROFIBUS DP provides a standardized interface (EN 50170 Vol. 2) for the
transfer of process input and process output data between a DP master and field devices
(DP slaves).
The transmission behavior via PROFIBUS DP is characterized by cyclical data exchange
between the DP master and the DP slaves.
A DP system based on the PROFIBUS DP standard (IEC 61158 Type 3) consists of the
following devices:
● DP master
A device of this function class handles the actual control task.
The device sends and receives process input and process output signals.
● DP slave
This is a device in the field area which reads or outputs the process signals. The devices
can be modular or compact.
Using the optional CM DP module, the CPU 1510SP-1 PN can be configured as a DP
master or as an intelligent DP slave (I-slave). The DP interface enables a transmission rate
of up to 12 Mbps.
When in master mode, the CPU sends its configured bus parameters on the PROFIBUS DP
interface. This means, for example, that a programming device can obtain the correct
parameters so that you can go online with the PG without any further settings. Transmission
of the bus parameters can be activated/deactivated in the configuration. As default, the CPU
sends the bus parameters.
Properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface of the CM DP module

The PROFIBUS DP interface of the optional CM DP module has the following properties and
functions:
● PROFIBUS DP master
● I-slave
● Time-of-day synchronization
● Line diagnostics
● S7 services
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 15
Product overview
2.5 Functions
Reference
You will find additional information on "PROFIBUS DP" in the STEP 7 online help and in the
PROFIBUS with STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193579)
function manual.
2.5.4 Memory reset

Apart from a few exceptions, a "memory reset" involves clearing all internal memories and
then reading in the data on the SIMATIC memory card.
Options
You have the following options for resetting the memory of the CPU:
● Using STEP 7

To perform a memory reset of the CPU using the mode selector, follow these steps:
1. Set the mode selector to STOP.
2. Set the mode selector to the MRES position. Hold the switch in this position until the
RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow for the 2nd time and remains lit (this takes three
3. Within the next three seconds, return the mode selector to the MRES position, and then
back to STOP.
Result: The CPU performs a memory reset. During the memory reset, the RUN/STOP LED
flashes yellow. The RUN/STOP LED lights yellow when the CPU has completed the memory
reset.

To perform a memory reset of the CPU via STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Open the "Online tools" task card of the CPU.
2. Click the "MRES" button in the "CPU operator panel" pane.
3. Click "OK" to confirm the security prompt.
Result: The CPU is in STOP mode and performs a memory reset.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

16 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Product overview
2.5 Functions
Response of the memory objects to the memory reset

The following table provides an overview of which memory objects are retained and which
are initialized in the case of a memory reset.
Table 2- 2 Retentive characteristics of the memory objects
Memory object Contents

Bit memories, timers and counters Initialized
Retentive tags of technology objects (for example, calibration values of abso- Retained
lute encoders)*
IP address Retained
Counter readings of the operating hours counters Retained
Time Retained
* The retentive tags of technology objects are retained, but the contents of certain tags are partially re-initialized.
Reference
You can find additional information on the topic of "Memory reset" in the system manual ET
200SP distributed I/O system
2.5.5 Restoring the factory settings of the CPU

The CPU can be reset to its factory state using "Reset to factory settings". The function
deletes all information that was stored internally on the CPU.
Note
If you want to remove a PROFINET CPU and use it elsewhere with a different program or
put it into storage, we recommend that you reset the CPU to its factory settings. Remember
that the Reset to factory settings function also deletes the IP address parameters.
Options
You have the following options for returning the CPU to the factory settings:
● Using STEP 7
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 17
Product overview
2.5 Functions

mode (RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow).
Reset to the factory settings as follows:
Intermediate result: The RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow.
the RUN/STOP LED lights up yellow for the 2nd time and remains lit (this takes three
back to STOP.
Result: The CPU executes a reset to factory settings, during which time the RUN/STOP LED
flashes yellow. The RUN/STOP LED lit yellow indicates that the CPU has been reset to the
factory settings and is in STOP mode. The "Reset to factory settings" event is entered in the
diagnostics buffer.

Make sure that there is an online connection to the CPU.
1. Open the online and diagnostics view of the CPU.
3. Select the option button "Retain IP address" if you want to keep the IP address. Select
the option button "Delete IP address" if you want to delete the IP address.
4. Click "Reset".
Result: The CPU goes into STOP mode and is reset to factory settings.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

18 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Product overview
2.5 Functions
Behavior of the memory objects with a reset to factory settings

The properties of the CPU are set to the following values:
Table 2- 3 Properties of CPU objects in the factory settings

Certain retentive tags of technology objects Initialized
(for example, calibration values of absolute encoders)
IP address Depending on the procedure:
• Using the mode selector: it is deleted
• Using STEP 7: depends on the setting for the
option boxes "Retain IP address"/"Delete IP ad-
dress"
Counter readings of the operating hours counters Initialized
Time Initialized
Reference
You can find additional information on the topic of "Reset to factory settings" in the system
manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and in the online help for
STEP 7.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 19
Wiring 3
This section provides information on the pin assignment of the individual interfaces and the
block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
24 V DC supply voltage (X80)

The connector for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU ships from the factory.
The following figure shows the pin assignment for a 24 V DC supply voltage.

② Ground of the supply voltage for loop-through (permitted value 10 A)
③ + 24 V DC of the supply voltage for loop-through (permitted value 10 A)
Internally jumpered:
① and ②
③ and ⑤
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

20 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Wiring
PROFINET IO interface on the CPU (X1 P3)

The table below shows the pin assignment of the PROFINET IO interface integrated in the
CPU. The assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 plug.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the CPU
View Signal name Designation

2 TD_N Transmit data -
3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
PROFINET IO interface on the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The table below shows the pin assignment of the PROFINET IO interface on the BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter. The assignment corresponds to the Ethernet standard for an RJ45 plug.
Table 3- 2 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter

3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 21
Wiring
PROFINET IO interface on the BA 2xFC BusAdapter (X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R)

The table below shows the pin assignment of the PROFINET IO interface on the BA 2xFC
BusAdapter.
Table 3- 3 Pin assignment PROFINET IO interface on the BA 2xFC BusAdapter

3 RD Receive data +
Reference
You can find additional information on the topics of "Connecting the CPU" and
"Accessories/spare parts" in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

22 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Wiring
Assignment of the MAC addresses

The MAC address is a globally unique device identifier that is assigned to each PROFINET
device in the factory. Its 6 bytes are divided into 3 bytes for the manufacturer ID and 3 bytes
for the device ID (serial number). The front of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN is lasered with the
MAC address of the PROFINET interface.
The PROFINET interface (X1) of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN has three ports. Port 3 is located on
the CPU. Ports 1 and 2 are located on the optional BusAdapter. In addition to the
PROFINET interface, each PROFINET port also has a separate MAC address. There is
therefore a total of four MAC addresses for the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
The MAC addresses of the PROFINET ports are needed for the LLDP protocol, for example
for the neighborhood discovery function.
The table below shows how the MAC addresses are assigned.
Table 3- 4 Assignment of the MAC addresses
Assignment
MAC address 1 PROFINET interface X1
• Visible in STEP 7 for accessible devices
• Lasered on the front of the CPU
(start of the number range)
MAC address 2 Port X1 P1 R (required for LLDP, for example)
MAC address 4 Port X1 P3 (required for LLDP, for example)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 23
Wiring
Block diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
① Switch P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1

② Electronics P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
③ Backplane bus interface P3 PROFINET interface X1 Port 3
④ Internal supply voltage L+ 24 V DC supply voltage
⑤ RUN/STOP/MRES mode selector M Ground
X5 BusAdapter LK1, 2, 3 LED Link TX/RX
X50 SIMATIC memory card R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green)
X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
MT MAINT LED (yellow)
PWR POWER LED (green)
Figure 3-2 CPU_1510SP-1_PN circuit diagram
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

24 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system
alarms 4
The status and error displays of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN are described below.
You will find additional information on "Interrupts" in the STEP 7 online help.
You can find additional information on the topics of "Diagnostics" and "System alarms" in the
Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function
manual.
4.1 Status and error display of the CPU
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN and the BA 2xRJ45
BusAdapter.
① RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green LED)

② ERROR LED (red LED)
③ MAINT LED (yellow LED)
④ LINK RX/TX LED for ports X1 P1 and X1 P2 (green LEDs on BusAdapter)
⑤ POWER LED (green LED)
⑥ LINK RX/TX LED for port X1 P3 (green LED on CPU)
Figure 4-1 LED displays on the CPU and BusAdapter
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 25
Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms
Meaning of the LED displays

CPU 1510SP-1 PN features an LED for monitoring the supply voltage of the electronics
(PWR) and three LEDs for displaying the current operating and diagnostics status. The
following table shows the meaning of the various combinations of colors for the POWER,
RUN/STOP, ERROR and MAINT LEDs.
Table 4- 1 Meaning of the LEDs
POWER RUN/STOP LED ERROR MAINT Meaning

LED LED LED
Missing or insufficient supply voltage on
LED off LED off LED off LED off the CPU.
An error has occurred.
LED lit green LED off LED flashes red LED off
CPU is in RUN mode.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED off
A diagnostics event is pending.
LED lit green LED lit green LED flashes red LED off
Maintenance demanded for the plant.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off LED lit yellow The affected hardware must be
checked/replaced within a short period of
time.
Active Force job
PROFIenergy pause
Maintenance required for the plant.
LED lit green LED lit green LED off The affected hardware must be
LED flashes yel-
low checked/replaced within a foreseeable
period of time.
Bad configuration
Firmware update successfully completed.
LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED flashes yel-
low
CPU is in STOP mode.
LED lit green LED lit yellow LED off LED off
The program on the SIMATIC memory
LED lit green LED lit yellow card is causing an error.
LED flashes red LED flashes yel-
low CPU defective
CPU is performing internal activities
LED lit green LED off LED off during STOP, e.g. startup after STOP.
LED flashes yel-
low Download of the user program from the
SIMATIC memory card
Startup (transition from RUN → STOP)
LED lit green LED flashes LED off LED off
yellow/green
Startup (CPU booting)
LED lit green LED flashes red LED flashes yel- Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a
LED flashes
low module.
yellow/green
LED flashing test
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

26 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
Meaning of the LEDs of the interfaces: X1 P1 R, X1 P2 R and X1 P3

Each port has a LINK LED (LK1, LK2, LK3). The table below shows the various "LED
scenarios" of the ports of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN.
Table 4- 2 Meaning of the LED
LINK LED Meaning

There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the
LED off PROFINET device and the communication partner.
No data is currently being sent/received via the PROFINET interface.
There is no LINK connection.
The "LED flashing test" is being performed.
LED flashes green
There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your
LED lit green PROFINET device and a communication partner.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 27
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
Product type designation CPU 1510SP-1 PN
General information
Hardware version FS02
Firmware version V1.7
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1
as of version
via data record Yes
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage 24 V DC
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power and voltage failure backup
Power/voltage failure backup time 5 ms
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 0.6 A
Inrush current, max. 4.7 A; rated value
I²t 0.14 A²s
Power
Incoming power to the backplane bus 8.75 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 5.6 W
Memory
Number of slots for SIMATIC memory card 1
SIMATIC memory card required Yes
Work memory
Integrated (for program) 100 KB
Integrated (for data) 750 KB
Load memory
Plug-in (SIMATIC memory card), max. 32 GB
Buffering
Maintenance-free Yes
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

28 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
CPU processing time
For bit operations, typ. 72 ns
For word operations, typ. 86 ns
For fixed-point arithmetic, typ. 115 ns
For floating-point arithmetic, typ. 461 ns
CPU blocks
Number of elements (total) 2000; an element can be taken to mean blocks
such as DBs, FBs and FCs, as well as UDTs,
global constants, etc.
DB
Number range 1 to 65535
Size, max. 750 KB; for absolutely addressed DBs, the max.
size is 64 KB
FB
Size, max. 100 KB
FC
Size, max. 100 KB
OB
Size, max. 100 KB
Number of free-cycle OBs 100
Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 20
Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 20
Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20
Number of hardware interrupt OBs 50
Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3
Number of isochronous mode OBs 1
Number of technology synchronous interrupt OBs 2
Number of restart OBs 100
Number of asynchronous error OBs 4
Number of synchronous error OBs 2
Number of diagnostic interrupt OBs 1
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24
Timers/counters and their retentivity
S7 counters
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes
IEC counters
Quantity Unlimited (limited only by work memory)
Retentivity
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 29
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
• Adjustable Yes
S7 timers
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes
IEC timers
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes
Data areas and their retentivity

Total retentive data area (including timers, coun- 128 KB; for bit memories, timers, counters, DBs
ters, bit memories), max. and technological data (axes), usable retentive
memory: 88 KB
Bit memory
Number, max. 16 KB
Number of clock memory bits 8; 8 clock memory bits, grouped in one clock
memory byte
Data blocks
Retentivity adjustable Yes
Retentivity preset No
Local data
Per priority class, max. 64 KB max. 16 KB per block
Address area
Number of I/O modules 1024; max. number of modules/submodules
I/O address area
Inputs 32 KB; all inputs are in the process image
Outputs 32 KB; all outputs are in the process image
Of which per integrated IO subsystem
• Inputs (volume) 8 KB
• Outputs (volume) 8 KB
Of which per CM/CP

Process image partitions

Number of process image partitions, max. 32
Number of hierarchical IO systems 20
Number of DP masters
Via CM 1
Number of IO controllers
Integrated 1
Via CM 0
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

30 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 64; CPU + 64 modules + server module (configu-
ration width max. 1 m)
Rack, number of rows, max. 1
PtP CM
Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs you can connect is only
limited by the available slots
Time
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Deviation per day, max. 10 s; typ.: 2 s
Buffered period 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Operating hours counter
Quantity 16
Time-of-day synchronization
Supported Yes
On DP, master Yes; via CM DP module
On DP, slave Yes; via CM DP module
In AS, master Yes
In AS, slave Yes
On Ethernet via NTP Yes
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1; via CM DP module
1. interface
Interface hardware
• Number of ports 3; 1. Integr. + 2. via BusAdapter
• Integrated switch Yes
• RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; X1
Protocols
• PROFINET IO controller Yes
• PROFINET IO device Yes
• SIMATIC communication Yes
• Open IE communication Yes
• Web server Yes
• Media redundancy Yes
2. interface
Interface hardware
• Number of ports 1
• RS 485 Yes; via CM DP module
Protocols
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 31
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
• PROFIBUS DP master Yes
• PROFIBUS DP slave Yes
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Protocols
Number of connections
Number of connections, max. 64
Number of connections reserved for ES/HMI/Web 10
Number of connections via integrated interfaces 64
Number of S7 routing connections 16
Services
• PG/OP communication Yes
• S7 routing Yes
• Isochronous mode Yes
• IRT Yes
• MRP Yes; as MRP redundancy manager and/or MRP

client; max. number of devices in the ring: 50
• PROFIenergy Yes
• Prioritized startup Yes; max. 32 PROFINET devices
• Number of connectable IO devices, max. 64; a maximum of 189 distributed I/O devices in
total can be connected by means of PROFIBUS
or PROFINET
• Number of IO devices with IRT and the "high 64
performance" option, max.
• Number of IO devices that you can connect for 64

RT, max.
• Of which are in line, max. 64
• Number of IO devices that can be activat- 8

ed/deactivated simultaneously, max.
• Number of IO devices per tool changeover, 8

max.
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

32 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
• Update times The minimum value of the update time also de-
pends on the communication portion set for
PROFINET IO, on the number of IO devices, and
on the quantity of configured user data
With RT
• With send clock of 250 µs 250 μs to 128 ms
• With send clock of 1 ms 1 ms to 512 ms
With IRT and the "high performance" option

• With IRT with the "high performance" option Update time = set "uneven" send clock (any mul-
and parameter assignment for so-called "une- tiple of 125 µs: 375 μs, 625 μs to 3.875 µs)
ven" send clocks
PROFINET IO device
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• Isochronous mode No
• IRT, supported Yes
• MRP, supported Yes
• PROFIenergy Yes
• Shared device Yes
• Number of IO controllers with shared device, 4

max.
SIMATIC communication
S7 communication, as server Yes
S7 communication, as client Yes
User data per job, max. See online help (S7 communication, user data
size)
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 33
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
Open IE communication
TCP/IP Yes
• Data length, max. 64 KB
• Several passive connections per port, support- Yes

ed
ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) Yes
UDP Yes
• Data length, max. 1472 bytes
DHCP No
SNMP Yes
DCP Yes
LLDP Yes
Web server
HTTP Yes; standard and user-defined pages
HTTPS Yes; standard and user-defined pages
PROFIBUS DP master
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• Data record routing Yes
• Constant bus cycle time No
• Number of DP slaves 125
• Activation/deactivation of DP slaves Yes
Further protocols
MODBUS Yes; MODBUS TCP
Media redundancy
Switchover time on line interruption, typ. 200 ms
Number of devices in the ring, max. 50
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes; only with PROFINET; with a minimum OB
terminal) 6x cycle of 625 µs
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

34 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
S7 signaling functions
Number of stations that can be logged in for sig- 32
naling functions, max.
Block-related alarms Yes
Number of configurable interrupts, max. 5000
Number of simultaneously active interrupts in
interrupt pool
• Number of reserved user interrupts 300
• Number of reserved interrupts for system di- 100

agnostics
• Number of reserved interrupts for motion tech- 80

nology objects
Test/commissioning functions
Joint commissioning (Team Engineering) Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3
engineering systems
Status block Yes; up to 8 simultaneously (in total from all ES
clients)
Single-step No
Status/modify
Status/modify tag Yes
Tags Inputs, outputs, bit memories, DBs, timers, coun-
ters
Of which are status tags, max. 200; per job
Of which are modify tags, max. 200; per job
Force
Force Yes
Forcing, tags Inputs, outputs
Number of tags, max. 200
Diagnostics buffer
Available Yes
No. of entries, max. 1000
• Of which are power failure-proof 500
Traces
Number of configurable traces 4; up to 512 KB data possible per trace
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostic indicator LED
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 35
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
Supported technology objects
Motion Yes
• Speed-controlled axis
– Number of speed-controlled axes, max. 6; max. number of speed-controlled axes (re-
quirement: no other motion technology objects
have been created)
• Positioning axis
– Number of positioning axes, max. 6; max. number of positioning axes (requirement:
no other motion technology objects have been
created)
• Synchronous axes (relative gearing)
– Number of axes, max. 3; max. number of synchronous axes (require-
ment: no other motion technology objects have
been created)
• External encoders
– Number of external encoders, max. 6; max. number of external encoders (require-
been created)
Controller
• PID_Compact Yes; universal PID controller with integrated op-
timization
• PID_3Step Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization
for valves
• PID temp Yes; PID controller with integrated optimization
for temperature
Counting and measuring
• High-speed counter Yes
Standards, approvals, certificates

Suitable for safety functions No
Highest safety class achievable in safety mode
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849- None
1:2008
SIL according to IEC 61508:2010 No
Ambient conditions
Horizontal installation, min. 0 °C
Horizontal installation, max. 60 °C
Vertical installation, min. 0 °C
Vertical installation, max. 50 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

36 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0
Configuring
Programming
Programming language
• LAD Yes
• FBD Yes
• STL Yes
• SCL Yes
• GRAPH Yes
Know-how protection
User program protection Yes
Copy protection Yes
Block protection Yes
Access protection
Protection level: Write protection Yes
Protection level: Read/write protection Yes
Protection level: Complete protection Yes
Cycle time monitoring
Low limit Adjustable minimum cycle time
High limit Adjustable maximum cycle time
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
General technical specifications

You can find information on the general technical specifications, such as standards and
approvals, electromagnetic compatibility, protection class, etc., in the system manual ET
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB 37
Dimension drawing A
This section contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets, control rooms, etc.
Dimension drawing of the CPU 1510SP-1 PN
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing 1510SP-1 PN
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0)

38 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33589074-AB
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN ___________________
Preface
(6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN Interrupts, error messages,
(6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0) ___________
4
alarms
Manual ___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
12/2014
A5E35264953-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

the function manuals. All system-wide functions are described in the system manual and in
the CPU 1510SP F-1 PN.
The creation of the safety program and activation of safety operation are described in the
configuration and programming manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
Conventions
When this device manual refers to the CPU 1510SP-1 PN, we are actually referring to the
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN.
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on
handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which particular attention should
be paid.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

4 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1510SP F-1 PN and standard CPU 1510SP-1 PN ...................12
2.5 Mode switch ............................................................................................................................15
2.6 Functions ................................................................................................................................15
2.6.1 PROFINET IO .........................................................................................................................15
2.6.2 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................16
2.6.3 PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................................................17
2.6.4 Memory reset ..........................................................................................................................18
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 22
5.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................30
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

6 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.


systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 7
Product overview 2
IO controller
PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with up to 64 connected IO devices.
I-device
Advantages:
Standalone CPU
DP master
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

8 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.2 Properties

2.2 Properties
Article number
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
View of the module

The following figure shows the CPU 1510SP F-1 PN.
Figure 2-1 CPU 1510SP F-1 PN
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 9
Product overview
2.2 Properties
Properties
The CPU 1510SP F-1 PN has the following technical properties:
● Communication:
– Interfaces
The CPU 1510SP F-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1) with an integrated 3-port
Note
supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the ET 200SP

– Querying module information
– Tag status
– Watch tables
– Memory usage
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

10 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.2 Properties
– Motion Control
modifications.
– Copy protection
● The CPU 1510SP F-1 PN supports the following functions:
– Safety mode
– Firmware update
– PROFIenergy
– Shared device
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 11
Product overview
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1510SP F-1 PN and standard CPU 1510SP-1 PN
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1510SP F-1 PN and standard

CPU 1510SP-1 PN
Areas of application
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN is mainly used for the protection of personnel and machinery and
burner controls. In addition to the safety program, you can also program standard
applications.
Table 2- 1 Areas of application
You intend to use CPU 1510SP F-1 PN for then you require
Safety-related applications STEP 7 Professional V13 SP1 or higher
Optional package STEP 7 Safety Advanced V13 SP1 or
higher
Standard applications STEP 7 Professional V13 SP1 or higher
PFD, PFH values for S7-1500 F-CPUs

Below you will find the probability of failure values (PFDavg, PFH values) for S7-1500 F-CPUs
with a service life of 20 years and with a repair time of 100 hours:
Operation in low demand mode Operation in high demand or continuous mode

low demand mode high demand/continuous mode
According to IEC 61508:2010: According to IEC 61508:2010:
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09
Restriction with "CREAT_DB" and "DELETE_DB"

F-DBs can neither be created nor deleted.
Restriction with "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL"

The destination address must not point to an F-DB.
Restrictions when configuring the retentive behavior of data blocks

The configuration of the retentive behavior of data blocks is not supported for F-DBs.
This means that the actual values of the F-DBs will not be retentive in the event of Power
OFF/ON and Restart (STOP-RUN) of the F-CPU. The F-DBs retain the initial values from the
load memory.
The "Retain" check box is grayed-out for all tags in F-DBs.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

12 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1510SP F-1 PN and standard CPU 1510SP-1 PN
Web server
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN shows you the following on the start page of the web server:
● Safety mode activated/deactivated
● Collective signature
● Last fail-safe change
● Version of STEP 7 Safety with which the safety program was compiled.
The following is displayed for each F-I/O on the "Module information" web page in the "Fail-
safe" tab:
● F-parameter signature (with address)
● Safety mode
● F-monitoring time
● F-source address
● F-destination address
Write access to F-blocks is not permitted.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 13
Product overview


② Labeling strips
⑤ Mode switch
CPU
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

14 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.5 Mode switch
2.5 Mode switch


2.6 Functions
2.6.1 PROFINET IO
● IO controller
● IO device
Note
(6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0) is required for standard-compliant operation of the
CPU 1510SP-1 PN (6ES7510-1DJ00-0AB0) as PROFINET IO controller and PROFINET IO
device.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 15
Product overview
2.6 Functions

● I-device
● IO controller
● Shared device
Reference
2.6.2 PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy
function manual
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

16 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.6 Functions
2.6.3 PROFIBUS DP
optic cable.
(DP slaves).
following devices:
● DP master
● DP slave
of up to 12 Mbps.

functions:
● I-slave
● S7 services
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 17
Product overview
2.6 Functions
Reference
function manual.
2.6.4 Memory reset

Options
● Using STEP 7

back to STOP.
reset.

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

18 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.6 Functions


lute encoders)*
IP address Retained
Time Retained
Reference

Note
Options
● Using STEP 7
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 19
Product overview
2.6 Functions

back to STOP.
diagnostics buffer.

4. Click "Reset".
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

20 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Product overview
2.6 Functions


dress"
Time Initialized
Reference
STEP 7.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 21
Wiring 3


① and ②
③ and ⑤
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

22 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Wiring


3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground


3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 23
Wiring

BusAdapter.

3 RD Receive data +
Reference
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

24 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
Wiring

Assignment
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 25
Wiring
Block diagram

Figure 3-2 CPU_1510SP-1_PN circuit diagram
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

26 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
alarms 4
manual.
LED displays
BusAdapter.

CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 27


LED LED LED
CPU is in RUN mode.
time.
Active Force job
PROFIenergy pause
LED flashes yel-
period of time.
Bad configuration
low
low CPU defective
LED flashes yel-
SIMATIC memory card
yellow/green
LED flashes
low module.
yellow/green
LED flashing test
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

28 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA

LINK LED Meaning

LED flashes green
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 29
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
Product type designation CPU 1510SP F-1 PN
General information
Engineering with
as of version
Via data record Yes
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Low limit of permissible range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permissible range (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Power consumption (rated value) 0.6 A
I²t 0.14 A²s
Power
Power loss
Memory
Work memory
Integrated (for data) 750 KB
Load memory
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

30 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
Buffering
CPU processing time
CPU blocks
Number of elements (total) 2000; elements can be taken to mean blocks
DB
Size, max. 750 KB; the maximum size of the DB is 64 KB
with non-optimized block access
FB
Size, max. 150 KB
FC
Size, max. 150 KB
OB
Size, max. 150 KB
Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20; two RTG each with a "cyclic interrupt OB" or a
"free-cycle OB" (F-OB) are additionally possible
for fail-safe
Number of startup OBs 100
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24; up to 8 possible with F-blocks
Counters, timers and their retentivity
S7 counters
Number 2048
Retentivity
• Configurable Yes
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 31
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
IEC counters
Number Unlimited (only limited by work memory)
Retentivity
S7 timers
Number 2048
Retentivity
IEC timers
Retentivity

memory: 88 KB
Bit memory
Number, max. 16 KB
memory byte
Data blocks
Retentivity configurable Yes
Local data
Per priority class 64 KB; max. 16 KB per block
Address area
Number of IO modules 1024; max. number of modules/submodules
I/O address area
Inputs 32 KB; all inputs located in the process image
Outputs 32 KB; all outputs located in the process image
Of which per CM/CP


Via CM 1
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

32 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
Integrated 1
Via CM 0
Rack
PtP CM
Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs that can be connected is
only limited by number of the available slots.
Time
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Number 16
Time synchronization
Supported Yes
In AS, master Yes
In AS, slave Yes
Interfaces
1. interface
Interface hardware
• RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; 1st integr. + 2. via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
Protocols
• Web server Yes
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 33
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
2. interface
Interface hardware
Protocols
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Protocols
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• IRT Yes

• PROFIenergy Yes
• Number of connectable IO devices, max. 64; a total of up to 189 distributed I/O devices can
be connected via PROFIBUS or PROFINET
• Of which IO devices with IRT and the "high 64
• Number of IO devices for RT that can be con- 64

nected, max.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

34 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
• Number of IO devices per tool changer, max. 8
• Update times Minimum value of update time also depends on

the configured communication share for
PROFINET IO, on the number of IO devices and
the amount of configured user data.
With RT
• With send clock of 250 µs 250 µs to 128 ms

• With IRT with the "high performance" option Update time = set "odd" send clock (any multiple
and parameter assignment for so-called "une- of 125 µs: 375 µs, 625 µs to 3.875 µs)
ven" send clocks
PROFINET IO device
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• IRT Yes
• MRP Yes
• PROFIenergy Yes

max.
size)
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 35
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
TCP/IP Yes

ed
UDP Yes
DHCP No
SNMP Yes
DCP Yes
LLDP Yes
Web server
PROFIBUS DP master
Services
• S7 routing Yes
Additional protocols
Media redundancy
Isochronous mode
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

36 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
Number of stations that can be registered for sig- 32
interrupt pool

agnostics

nology objects
Shared commissioning (Team Engineering) Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3
engineering systems
clients)
Single step No
Status/force
Status/force tag Yes
ters
Of which are force tags, max. 200; per job
Force
Force Yes
Force, tags Inputs, outputs
Diagnostics buffer
Available Yes
Number of entries, max. 1000
• Of which are protected against power failure 500
Traces
Number of configurable traces 4; up to 512 KB data per trace possible
Diagnostic display LED
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 37
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
Motion Yes
have been created)
created)
been created)
been created)
Controller
timization
for valves
for temperature

Suitable for safety functions Yes; e.g., emergency stop, acknowledgment
button
Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849- PLe
1:2008
SIL according to IEC 61508:2010 SIL 3
Low demand mode: PFDavg < 2.00E-05
High demand/continuous mode: PFH < 1.00E-09
Ambient conditions
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

38 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0
Configuration
Programming
• LAD Yes; with fail-safe
• FBD Yes; with fail-safe
• STL Yes
• SCL Yes
• GRAPH Yes
Know-how protection
Copy protection Yes
Access protection
Protection level: Write protection Yes; a specific write protection in each case for
both standard and fail-safe
Low limit Configurable minimum cycle time
High limit Configurable maximum cycle time
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights

approvals, electromagnetic compatibility, protection class, etc., in the system manual
ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA 39
Dimension drawing A
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing 1510SP-1 PN
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (6ES7510-1SJ00-0AB0)

40 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35264953-AA
CPU 1512SP-1 PN ___________________
Preface
(6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
CPU 1512SP-1 PN Interrupts, error messages,
(6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0) ___________
4
alarms
Manual ___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
12/2014
A5E33591411-AB
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E33591411-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

the function manuals. All cross-system functions are described in the system manual and in
the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.
Conventions
Note
should be paid.
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

4 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Mode switch ............................................................................................................................13
2.5 Functions ................................................................................................................................13
2.5.1 PROFINET IO .........................................................................................................................13
2.5.2 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................14
2.5.3 PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................................................15
2.5.4 Memory reset ..........................................................................................................................16
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 20
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

6 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Documentation guide

your own manual.


systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 7
Product overview 2
IO controller
PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with a maximum of 128 connected IO
devices, a maximum of 64 of which use IRT (Isochronous Realtime).
I-device
Advantages:
Standalone CPU
DP master
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

8 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Product overview
2.2 Properties

2.2 Properties
Article number
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
View of the module

The figure below shows the CPU 1512SP-1 PN.
Figure 2-1 CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 9
Product overview
2.2 Properties
Properties
The CPU 1512SP-1 PN has the following technical properties:
● Communication:
– Interfaces
The CPU 1512SP-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1) with an integrated 3-port
Note
supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the Distributed
automation system ET 200SP

– Query of module states
– Tag status
– Watch tables
– Memory usage
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

10 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Product overview
2.2 Properties
– Motion Control
modifications.
– Copy protection
● The CPU 1512SP-1 PN supports the following additional functions:
– Firmware update
– PROFIenergy
– Shared device
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 11
Product overview


② Labeling strips
⑤ Mode switch
CPU
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

12 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Product overview
2.4 Mode switch
2.4 Mode switch


2.5 Functions
2.5.1 PROFINET IO
● IO controller
● IO device
Note
(6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0) is required for standard-compliant operation of the CPU
1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0) as PROFINET IO controller and PROFINET IO
device.
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 13
Product overview
2.5 Functions

● I-device
● IO controller
● Shared device
Reference
2.5.2 PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy
function manual
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

14 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Product overview
2.5 Functions
2.5.3 PROFIBUS DP
optic cable.
(DP slaves).
following devices:
● DP master
● DP slave
of up to 12 Mbps.

functions:
● I-slave
● S7 services
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 15
Product overview
2.5 Functions
Reference
function manual.
2.5.4 Memory reset

Options
● Using STEP 7

back to STOP.
reset.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

16 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Product overview
2.5 Functions


lute encoders)*
IP address Retained
Time Retained
Reference
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 17
Product overview
2.5 Functions

Note
Options
● Using STEP 7

back to STOP.
diagnostics buffer.

4. Click "Reset".
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

18 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Product overview
2.5 Functions


dress"
Time Initialized
Reference
STEP 7.
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 19
Wiring 3


① and ②
③ and ⑤
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

20 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Wiring


3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground


3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 21
Wiring

BusAdapter.

3 RD Receive data +
Reference
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

22 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
Wiring

Assignment
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 23
Wiring
Block diagram

Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

24 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
alarms 4
manual.
LED displays
BusAdapter.

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 25


LED LED LED
CPU is in RUN mode.
time.
Active Force job
PROFIenergy pause
LED flashes yel-
period of time.
Bad configuration
low
low CPU defective
LED flashes yel-
SIMATIC memory card
yellow/green
LED flashes
low module.
yellow/green
LED flashing test
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

26 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB

LINK LED Meaning

LED flashes green
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 27
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
Product type designation CPU 1512SP-1 PN
General information
Engineering with
as of version
via data record Yes
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Input current
I²t 0.14 A²s
Power
Power loss
Memory
Work memory
Integrated (for data) 1 MB
Load memory
Buffering
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

28 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
CPU processing time
CPU blocks
Number of elements (total) 2000; an element can be taken to mean blocks
DB
Size, max. 1 MB; for absolutely addressed DBs, the max.
size is 64 KB
FB
Size, max. 200 KB
FC
Size, max. 200 KB
OB
Size, max. 200 KB
Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20
Number of restart OBs 100
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24
Timers/counters and their retentivity
S7 counters
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 29
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
IEC counters
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes
S7 timers
Quantity 2048
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes
IEC timers
Retentivity
• Adjustable Yes

memory: 88 KB
Bit memory
Number, max. 16 KB
memory byte
Data blocks
Retentivity adjustable Yes
Local data
Per priority class, max. 64 KB max. 16 KB per block
Address area
Number of I/O modules 2048; max. number of modules/submodules
I/O address area
Inputs 32 KB; all inputs are in the process image
Outputs 32 KB; all outputs are in the process image
Of which per CM/CP


Via CM 1
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

30 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
Integrated 1
Via CM 0
Rack
PtP CM
Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs you can connect is only
limited by the available slots
Time
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Quantity 16
Time-of-day synchronization
Supported Yes
In AS, master Yes
In AS, slave Yes
Interfaces
1. interface
Interface hardware
• Number of ports 3; 1. Integr. + 2. via BusAdapter
• RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; X1
Protocols
• Web server Yes
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 31
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
2. interface
Interface hardware
Protocols
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Protocols
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• IRT Yes

• PROFIenergy Yes
• Number of connectable IO devices, max. 128; a maximum of 253 distributed I/O devices in
total can be connected by means of PROFIBUS
or PROFINET
• Number of IO devices with IRT and the "high 64
• Number of IO devices that you can connect for 128

RT, max.
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

32 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0

• Number of IO devices per tool changeover, 8

max.
• Update times The minimum value of the update time also de-
pends on the communication portion set for
PROFINET IO, on the number of IO devices, and
on the quantity of configured user data
With RT

• With IRT with the "high performance" option Update time = set "uneven" send clock (any mul-
and parameter assignment for so-called "une- tiple of 125 µs: 375 μs, 625 μs to 3.875 µs)
ven" send clocks
PROFINET IO device
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• IRT, supported Yes
• MRP, supported Yes
• PROFIenergy Yes

max.
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 33
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
size)
TCP/IP Yes

ed
UDP Yes
DHCP No
SNMP Yes
DCP Yes
LLDP Yes
Web server
PROFIBUS DP master
Services
• S7 routing Yes
Further protocols
Media redundancy
Isochronous mode
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

34 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
Number of stations that can be logged in for sig- 32
interrupt pool

agnostics

nology objects
Joint commissioning (Team Engineering) Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3
engineering systems
Status block Yes; up to 8 at the same time
Single-step No
Status/modify
Status/modify tag Yes
ters
Of which are modify tags, max. 200; per job
Force
Force Yes
Forcing, tags Inputs, outputs
Diagnostics buffer
Available Yes
No. of entries, max. 1000
• Of which are power failure-proof 500
Traces
Number of configurable traces 4; up to 512 KB data possible per trace
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 35
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
Motion Yes
have been created)
created)
been created)
been created)
Controller
timization
for valves
for temperature

Suitable for safety functions No
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849- None
1:2008
SIL according to IEC 61508:2010 No
Ambient conditions
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

36 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0
Configuring
Programming
• LAD Yes
• FBD Yes
• STL Yes
• SCL Yes
• GRAPH Yes
Know-how protection
Copy protection Yes
Access protection
Protection level: Write protection Yes
Low limit Adjustable minimum cycle time
High limit Adjustable maximum cycle time
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights

CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB 37
Dimension drawing A
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0)

38 Manual, 12/2014, A5E33591411-AB
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN ___________________
Preface
(6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN Interrupts, error messages,
(6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0) ___________
4
alarms
Manual ___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
12/2014
A5E35265193-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

the function manuals. All system-wide functions are described in the system manual and in
the CPU 1512SP F-1 PN.
The creation of the safety program and activation of safety operation are described in the
configuration and programming manual SIMATIC Safety - Configuring and Programming
Conventions
When this device manual refers to the CPU 1512SP-1 PN, we are actually referring to the
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN.
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on
handling the product or on the part of the documentation to which particular attention should
be paid.
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

4 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1512SP F-1 PN and standard CPU 1512SP F-1 PN ...............12
2.5 Mode switch ............................................................................................................................15
2.6 Functions ................................................................................................................................15
2.6.1 PROFINET IO .........................................................................................................................15
2.6.2 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................16
2.6.3 PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................................................17
2.6.4 Memory reset ..........................................................................................................................18
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 22
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

6 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.


systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool

CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 7
Product overview 2
IO controller
PROFINET IO system. You can operate the CPU with a maximum of 128 connected IO
devices, a maximum of 64 of which use IRT (Isochronous Realtime).
I-device
Advantages:
Standalone CPU
DP master
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

8 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.2 Properties

2.2 Properties
Article number
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
View of the module

The following figure shows the CPU 1512SP F-1 PN.
Figure 2-1 CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 9
Product overview
2.2 Properties
Properties
The CPU 1512SP F-1 PN has the following technical properties:
● Communication:
– Interfaces
The CPU 1512SP F-1 PN has a PROFINET interface (X1) with an integrated 3-port
Note
supported BusAdapters in the "Accessories/spare parts" section of the ET 200SP

– Querying module information
– Tag status
– Watch tables
– Memory usage
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

10 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.2 Properties
– Motion Control
modifications.
– Copy protection
● The CPU 1512SP F-1 PN supports the following functions:
– Safety mode
– Firmware update
– PROFIenergy
– Shared device
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 11
Product overview
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1512SP F-1 PN and standard CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1512SP F-1 PN and standard

CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Areas of application
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN is mainly used for the protection of personnel and machinery and
burner controls. In addition to the safety program, you can also program standard
applications.
Table 2- 1 Areas of application
You intend to use CPU 1512SP F-1 PN for then you require
Safety-related applications STEP 7 Professional V13 SP1 or higher
Optional package STEP 7 Safety Advanced V13 SP1 or
higher
Standard applications STEP 7 Professional V13 SP1 or higher
PFD, PFH values for S7-1500 F-CPUs

Below you will find the probability of failure values (PFDavg, PFH values) for S7-1500 F-CPUs
with a service life of 20 years and with a repair time of 100 hours:
Operation in low demand mode Operation in high demand or continuous mode

low demand mode high demand/continuous mode
According to IEC 61508:2010: According to IEC 61508:2010:
PFDavg = Average probability of a dangerous failure on PFH = Average frequency of a dangerous failure [h-1]
demand
< 2E-05 < 1E-09
Restriction with "CREAT_DB" and "DELETE_DB"

F-DBs can neither be created nor deleted.
Restriction with "READ_DBL" and "WRIT_DBL"

The destination address must not point to an F-DB.
Restrictions when configuring the retentive behavior of data blocks

The configuration of the retentive behavior of data blocks is not supported for F-DBs.
This means that the actual values of the F-DBs will not be retentive in the event of Power
OFF/ON and Restart (STOP-RUN) of the F-CPU. The F-DBs retain the initial values from the
load memory.
The "Retain" check box is grayed-out for all tags in F-DBs.
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

12 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.3 Differences between F-CPU 1512SP F-1 PN and standard CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
Web server
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN shows you the following on the start page of the web server:
● Safety mode activated/deactivated
● Collective signature
● Last fail-safe change
● Version of STEP 7 Safety with which the safety program was compiled.
The following is displayed for each F-I/O on the "Module information" web page in the "Fail-
safe" tab:
● F-parameter signature (with address)
● Safety mode
● F-monitoring time
● F-source address
● F-destination address
Write access to F-blocks is not permitted.
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 13
Product overview


② Labeling strips
⑤ Mode switch
CPU
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

14 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.5 Mode switch
2.5 Mode switch


2.6 Functions
2.6.1 PROFINET IO
● IO controller
● IO device
Note
(6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0) is required for standard-compliant operation of the CPU
1512SP-1 PN (6ES7512-1DK00-0AB0) as PROFINET IO controller and PROFINET IO
device.
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 15
Product overview
2.6 Functions

● I-device
● IO controller
● Shared device
Reference
2.6.2 PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy
function manual
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

16 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.6 Functions
2.6.3 PROFIBUS DP
optic cable.
(DP slaves).
following devices:
● DP master
● DP slave
of up to 12 Mbps.

functions:
● I-slave
● S7 services
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 17
Product overview
2.6 Functions
Reference
function manual.
2.6.4 Memory reset

Options
● Using STEP 7

back to STOP.
reset.

CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

18 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.6 Functions


lute encoders)*
IP address Retained
Time Retained
Reference

Note
Options
● Using STEP 7
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 19
Product overview
2.6 Functions

back to STOP.
diagnostics buffer.

4. Click "Reset".
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

20 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Product overview
2.6 Functions


dress"
Time Initialized
Reference
STEP 7.
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 21
Wiring 3


① and ②
③ and ⑤
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

22 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Wiring


3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground


3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 23
Wiring

BusAdapter.

3 RD Receive data +
Reference
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

24 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
Wiring

Assignment
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 25
Wiring
Block diagram

Figure 3-2 Block diagram of the CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

26 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
alarms 4
manual.
LED displays
BusAdapter.

CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 27


LED LED LED
CPU is in RUN mode.
time.
Active Force job
PROFIenergy pause
LED flashes yel-
period of time.
Bad configuration
low
low CPU defective
LED flashes yel-
SIMATIC memory card
yellow/green
LED flashes
low module.
yellow/green
LED flashing test
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

28 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA

LINK LED Meaning

LED flashes green
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 29
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
Product type designation CPU 1512SP F-1 PN
General information
Engineering with
as of version
Via data record Yes
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Supply voltage
Low limit of permissible range (DC) 19.2 V
High limit of permissible range (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Power consumption (rated value) 0.6 A
I²t 0.14 A²s
Power
Power loss
Memory
Work memory
Integrated (for data) 1 MB
Load memory
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

30 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
Buffering
CPU processing time
CPU blocks
Number of elements (total) 2000; elements can be taken to mean blocks
DB
Size, max. 1 MB; the maximum size of the DB is 64 KB with
non-tuned block access
FB
Size, max. 300 KB
FC
Size, max. 300 KB
OB
Size, max. 300 KB
Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 20; two RTG each with a "cyclic interrupt OB" or a
"free-cycle OB" (F-OB) are additionally possible
for fail-safe
Number of startup OBs 100
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24; up to 8 possible with F-blocks
Counters, timers and their retentivity
S7 counters
Number 2048
Retentivity
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 31
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
IEC counters
Retentivity
S7 timers
Number 2048
Retentivity
IEC timers
Retentivity

memory: 88 KB
Bit memory
Number, max. 16 KB
memory byte
Data blocks
Retentivity configurable Yes
Local data
Per priority class, max. 64 KB; max. 16 KB per block
Address area
Number of IO modules 2048; max. number of modules/submodules
I/O address area
Inputs 32 KB; all inputs located in the process image
Outputs 32 KB; all outputs located in the process image
Of which per CM/CP


Via CM 1
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

32 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
Integrated 1
Via CM 0
Rack
PtP CM
Number of PtP CMs The number of PtP CMs that can be connected is
only limited by number of the available slots.
Time
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Buffering time 6 wk; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typ.
Number 16
Time synchronization
Supported Yes
In AS, master Yes
In AS, slave Yes
Interfaces
1. interface
Interface hardware
• RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; 1st integr. + 2. via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
Protocols
• Web server Yes
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 33
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
2. interface
Interface hardware
Protocols
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Protocols
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• IRT Yes

• PROFIenergy Yes
• Number of connectable IO devices, max. 128; a total of up to 253 distributed I/O devices
can be connected via PROFIBUS or PROFINET
• Of which IO devices with IRT and the "high 64
• Number of IO devices for RT that can be con- 128

nected, max.
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

34 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
• Number of IO devices per tool changer, max. 8
• Update times Minimum value of update time also depends on

the configured communication share for
PROFINET IO, on the number of IO devices and
the amount of configured user data.
With RT

• With IRT with the "high performance" option Update time = set "odd" send clock (any multiple
and parameter assignment for so-called "une- of 125 µs: 375 µs, 625 µs to 3.875 µs)
ven" send clocks
PROFINET IO device
Services
• S7 routing Yes
• IRT Yes
• MRP Yes
• PROFIenergy Yes

max.
size)
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 35
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
TCP/IP Yes

ed
UDP Yes
DHCP No
SNMP Yes
DCP Yes
LLDP Yes
Web server
PROFIBUS DP master
Services
• S7 routing Yes
Additional protocols
Media redundancy
Isochronous mode
Number of stations that can be registered for sig- 32
interrupt pool
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

36 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0

agnostics

nology objects
Shared commissioning (Team Engineering) Yes; parallel online access possible for up to 3
engineering systems
clients)
Single step No
Status/force
Status/force tag Yes
ters
Of which are force tags, max. 200; per job
Force
Force Yes
Force, tags Inputs, outputs
Diagnostics buffer
Available Yes
Number of entries, max. 1000
• Of which are protected against power failure 500
Traces
Number of configurable traces 4; up to 512 KB data per trace possible
RUN/STOP LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Motion Yes
have been created)
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 37
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
created)
been created)
been created)
Controller
timization
for valves
for temperature

Suitable for safety functions Yes; e.g., emergency stop, acknowledgment
button
Maximum achievable safety class in safety mode
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849- PLe
1:2008
SIL according to IEC 61508:2010 SIL 3
Low demand mode: PFDavg < 2.00E-05
High demand/continuous mode: PFH < 1.00E-09
Ambient conditions
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

38 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0
Configuration
Programming
• LAD Yes; with fail-safe
• FBD Yes; with fail-safe
• STL Yes
• SCL Yes
• GRAPH Yes
Know-how protection
Copy protection Yes
Access protection
Protection level: Write protection Yes; a specific write protection in each case for
both standard and fail-safe
Low limit Configurable minimum cycle time
High limit Configurable maximum cycle time
Dimensions
Width 100 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights

CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA 39
Dimension drawing A
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing CPU 1512SP-1 PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (6ES7512-1SK00-0AB0)

40 Manual, 12/2014, A5E35265193-AA
CPU 1515SP PC ___________________
Preface
___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Safety notes 2
___________________
Product overview 3
ET 200SP Open Controller
CPU 1515SP PC
___________________
Installing 4
___________________
Connection 5
Manual
___________________
Diagnostics, error and
system alarm 6
___________________
Commissioning 7
___________________
Functions 8
___________________
Maintenance 9
___________________
Technical data 10
___________________
Accessories/spare parts A
___________________
Abbreviations B
___________________
Troubleshooting C
12/2014
A5E32701806-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

This manual supplements the system manual for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you in
commissioning the CPU 1515SP PC.
Basic knowledge required

The system must be operated and used by qualified staff only.
The following knowledge is required:
● Installation guidelines for SIMATIC ET 200SP
● Programming with STEP 7
● PC-based automation using an S7-1500 software controller and WinCC Runtime
Advanced
● Basic knowledge of PC technology
● Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system
Scope of validity of the documentation

This documentation is valid for the following devices:
ET 200SP Open Controller Article number

Hardware variant Hardware variant
WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EK0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EL0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EM0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0
CPU 1515SP PC, 6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
spare part, without CFast card
CPU 1515SP PC
4 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Preface
Conventions
Conventions STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions
of the configuration and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
should be paid.
also be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit
newsletter. For more information, visit (http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Information about third-party software updates

This product contains third-party software. Siemens accepts liability with respect to
updates/patches for the third-party software only when these are distributed by Siemens in
the context of a Software Update Service contract or officially approved by Siemens.
Otherwise, updates/patches are installed at the user's own risk. You can find more
information about our software update service offer under
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/automation-software/en/software-update-
service/Pages/Default.aspx).
Notes on protecting administrator accounts

A user with administrator rights has extensive access and manipulation possibilities.
Therefore, make sure that the administrator account is adequately protected to prevent
unauthorized changes. To do this, set secure passwords and use a standard user account
for regular operation. Other measures, such as the use of security policies, should be
applied as required.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 5
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC ..................................................................................... 11
2 Safety notes .......................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1 Notes on use .......................................................................................................................... 14
3 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 15
3.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 Sample configuration ............................................................................................................. 17
3.3 Components ........................................................................................................................... 19
3.4 Configuration of the devices .................................................................................................. 20
3.5 Operator controls and display elements ................................................................................ 21
3.6 Scope of delivery.................................................................................................................... 24
3.6.1 Unpacking the device ............................................................................................................. 24
3.6.2 Scope of delivery - Hardware variant WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM ........................................... 26
3.6.3 Scope of delivery - Hardware variant WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM ........................................... 27
4 Installing ............................................................................................................................................... 28
4.1 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 28
4.2 Hardware configuration .......................................................................................................... 31
4.3 Installing the CPU 1515SP PC .............................................................................................. 32
5 Connection ........................................................................................................................................... 34
5.1 Notes on connection .............................................................................................................. 34
5.2 Terminal and block diagram................................................................................................... 35
5.3 Electrical configuration ........................................................................................................... 36
5.4 Connecting devices to networks ............................................................................................ 37
5.5 Securing cables...................................................................................................................... 37
6 Diagnostics, error and system alarm ..................................................................................................... 39
6.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 39
7 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 42
7.1 Notes on commissioning ........................................................................................................ 42
7.2 Initial commissioning .............................................................................................................. 43
7.3 Installing license keys ............................................................................................................ 44
7.4 Windows Security Center ....................................................................................................... 46
7.5 Switching on/off the CPU 1515SP PC ................................................................................... 47
CPU 1515SP PC
6 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Table of contents
8 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 48
8.1 Monitoring functions ................................................................................................................48
8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM .....................................................................................................49
8.3 BIOS description .....................................................................................................................50
8.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................50
8.3.2 Starting BIOS setup ................................................................................................................51
8.3.3 BIOS setup menus ..................................................................................................................52
8.3.3.1 Information menu ....................................................................................................................54
8.3.3.2 Main menu ..............................................................................................................................55
8.3.3.3 Advanced menu ......................................................................................................................56
8.3.3.4 Security menu .........................................................................................................................58
8.3.3.5 Power menu ............................................................................................................................59
8.3.3.6 Boot menu ...............................................................................................................................60
8.3.3.7 Exit menu ................................................................................................................................62
8.3.4 BIOS setup default settings ....................................................................................................63
8.3.5 BIOS update ...........................................................................................................................64
8.4 Power options .........................................................................................................................65
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers ......................................................................................66
8.5.1 Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) ..................................................................................................67
8.5.2 File-Based Write Filter (FBWF) ...............................................................................................71
9 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 73
9.1 Backing up and restoring data ................................................................................................73
9.2 Partitioning data carriers .........................................................................................................74
9.3 Restoring the delivery state ....................................................................................................75
9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick ................................................................................78
9.5 Updating software ...................................................................................................................80
9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7 ............................................................................................80
9.7 Sending the device to customer service .................................................................................80
9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card .................................................................................81
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 7
Table of contents
10 Technical data ...................................................................................................................................... 82

10.1 Standards and approvals ....................................................................................................... 82
10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ................................................................................................ 87
10.3 Shipping and storage conditions ............................................................................................ 89
10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions .......................................................................... 89
10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage ............. 92
10.6 Use of the ET 200SP in zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres ...................................... 93
10.7.1 CPU 1515SP PC (6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0) ........................................................................... 94
10.7.2 CPU 1515SP PC (6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0) ........................................................................... 97
10.7.3 CPU 1515SP PC, CPU 1515SP PC + HMI ......................................................................... 100
10.7.4 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505S ........................................................................... 100
10.8 Dimension drawings ............................................................................................................. 101
10.8.1 CPU 1515SP PC .................................................................................................................. 101
A Accessories/spare parts .......................................................................................................................103
B Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................................105
C Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................107
Glossary ..............................................................................................................................................108
CPU 1515SP PC
8 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 9
Documentation guide
1.1 Documentation on CPU 1515SP PC

your own manual.


systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool

CPU 1515SP PC
10 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Documentation guide

The following additional documentation is required to use the CPU 1515SP PC:
● Operating manual S7-1500 software controller
● System manual WinCC Advanced V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/68075405)
● System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Manual Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531)
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 11
Safety notes 2
WARNING
Life-endangering voltage when control cabinet is open
If the device is installed in a control cabinet, areas or components can be under life-
endangering voltage when the control cabinet is open.
Contact with these areas or components may lead to death through electric shock.
Switch off the power before opening the control cabinet.
If the device is operated in a machine in accordance with the machinery directive, the
provisions of the guideline 2006/42/EC apply.
Safe operation of a plant
WARNING
Risk of fire
The device is classified for use in the area of Industrial Control Equipment as "Open Type"
according to UL508. If overheating occurs, burning material may leak and cause a fire.
For this reason, observe the following information:
• For approval and operation in accordance with UL508, the device must be installed in a
housing complying with UL508.
• Install the device in a housing complying with the requirements of Sections 4.6 and 4.7.3
of the standards EN 60950-1:2006 and IEC/UL/EN/DIN-EN 60950-1.
If you have questions about the validity of installation in the planned environment, please
contact our service representatives.
NOTICE
Protective measures
To ensure safe operation of a plant, you have to take suitable IT security measures, for
example, network segmentation.
Seal the cover to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the CPU 1515SP PC
from unauthorized access.
For more information on Industrial Security, refer to the Internet
CPU 1515SP PC
12 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Safety notes
Repairs
WARNING
Damage caused by opening the device
Unauthorized opening of and improper repairs to the device may result in substantial
damage to equipment or endanger the user.
Only authorized personnel are permitted to repair the device.
For additional information on repairs, see section Sending the device to customer service
(Page 80).
ESD guidelines
Modules containing electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) can be identified by the following
label:
Strictly follow the guidelines mentioned below when handling modules which are sensitive to
ESD:
● Always discharge yourself of static electricity before handling modules which are sensitive
to ESD (for example, by touching a grounded object).
● All devices and tools must be free of static charge.
● Always pull the mains connector and disconnect the battery before installing or removing
modules which are sensitive to ESD.
● Handle modules fitted with ESDs only by their edges.
● Do not touch any connector pins or conductors on modules containing ESDs.
See also
Electromagnetic compatibility (Page 87)
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 13
Safety notes
2.1 Notes on use
2.1 Notes on use
WARNING
Hazards at an unprotected machine or plant
According to the results of a risk analysis, hazards can occur at an unprotected machine.
The hazards may lead to personal injury.
According to the risk analysis, the risk of injury to persons can be countered with the
following measures:
• Additional protective equipment at the machine or plant. In this case, the programming,
parameter assignment and wiring of the I/O used, in particular, must be performed in
accordance with the safety criteria (SIL, PL or Cat.) ascertained by means of an
appropriate risk analysis.
• Use of the device for its intended purpose, which can be established by performing a
functional test on the plant. This allows errors in programming, parameter assignment
and wiring to be detected.
• Documentation of the test results which can be entered, if required, into the relevant
safety certificates.
NOTICE
Ambient conditions
Ambient conditions for which the device is not suitable can lead to faults or damage the
device.
Note the following:
• Only operate the device in enclosed areas. If you do not comply with this instruction, the
warranty becomes void.
• Only operate the device in accordance with the ambient conditions given in the technical
specifications.
• Protect the device from dust, moisture and heat.
• Do not expose the device to direct sunlight or other strong sources of light.
• The device must not be used in places with more difficult operating conditions through
corrosive vapors or gases without taking additional protective measures, for example,
supply of clean air.
CPU 1515SP PC
14 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview 3
3.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7677-2AAxx-0xx0
The complete article number depends on the hardware version and the order option.
View of the module

The figure below shows the CPU 1515SP PC.
Figure 3-1 CPU 1515SP PC with supplied accessories
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 15
Product overview
3.1 Properties
Properties
The CPU 1515SP PC is a PC-based automation device in the design of the ET 200SP. It is
used for control and visualization purposes. The supplied IPC DiagBase software provides
basic diagnostics functions and supports you in handling the BIOS.
The CPU 1515SP PC has the following technical properties:

● A removable CFast card with the following pre-installations is used as storage medium:
– Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system
– S7 1500 software controller: CPU 1505S
– Optionally with HMI: WinCC Runtime Advanced V13 SP1
● Interfaces
– An interface for the exchangeable ET 200SP BusAdapters for connection of
PROFINET IO (2 ports)
– An interface for connecting devices using Industrial Ethernet (Gigabit Ethernet)
– 3 interfaces for USB devices
– A DVI-I interface for a monitor
– A sealable slot for the CFast card
– A slot for an SD/MMC card as additional optional drive
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the scope
of delivery.
● The CPU 1515SP PC is suitable for use in industrial environments:
– Compact design
– Fan-less operation
– High robustness
● The CPU 1515SP PC complies with IP 20 degree of protection and is intended for
installation in a control cabinet.
Hardware variants and ordering options

The following hardware variants are available for the CPU 1515SP PC:
● WES7 E 32-bit 2GB RAM, 8 GB CFast card
● WES7 P 64-bit 4GB RAM, 16 GB CFast card, suitable for Multitouch panels
The following order options are available:
● CPU 1515SP PC with preinstalled software controller
● CPU 1515SP PC + HMI (128PT, 512PT, 2040PT) with preinstalled software controller
and WinCC Runtime Advanced V13 SP1
CPU 1515SP PC
16 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview
3.2 Sample configuration
Configuration
The CPU 1515SP PC is mounted on a mounting rail according to EN 60715. A modular
system is formed with ET 200SP modules in the central rack.
The CPU 1515SP PC can be used as PROFINET IO controller. The PROFINET IO devices
are connected via the ports of the X1 PN (LAN) interface using the SIMATIC BusAdapter
BA 2xRJ45.
Devices can be connected via Industrial Ethernet using the integrated interface
X2 PN/IE (LAN).
The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 17
Product overview
Sample configuration
The figure below shows a sample configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC.
Figure 3-2 Sample configuration with the CPU 1515SP PC
① CPU 1515SP PC, I/O modules, server module

② Mounting rail
③ Flat Panel - Wide Screen Display
④ USB devices: Keyboard, mouse, printer ...
⑤ PROFINET IO device
⑥ Camera
⑦ Industrial Thin Client ITC
⑧ SCALANCE W786
⑨ Field programming device
⑩ PC/Programming device
CPU 1515SP PC
18 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview
3.3 Components
3.3 Components
Components of the CPU 1515SP PC

The following table provides an overview of the components of the CPU 1515SP PC:
Table 3- 1 Components of the CPU 1515SP PC
Component Function Figure

Mounting rail in accordance The mounting rail is the rack for the
with EN 60715 CPU 1515SP PC.
CPU 1515SP PC CPU with strain relief and white refer-

ence labels
BusAdapter The BusAdapter allows free selection

of the connection technology for
PROFINET IO. The following variants
are available for the CPU 1515SP
PC:
• For standard RJ45 plug
(BA 2×RJ45) ①
• For direct connection of the bus
cable (BA 2×FC) ②
Server module The server module completes the

configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC
with I/O modules.
The server module is included in the
CPU's scope of delivery.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 19
Product overview
3.4 Configuration of the devices
3.4 Configuration of the devices
Front view
Figure 3-3 Front view of CPU 1515SP PC
① Mounting rail release mechanism

② Labeling strips
③ Server module
④ Cooling fins
⑤ Strain relief
⑥ Reference labels
CPU 1515SP PC
20 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview
3.5 Operator controls and display elements
Front view of the module

The following figure shows the operator controls and connection elements of the
CPU 1515SP PC.
Figure 3-4 View of the CPU 1515SP PC
① LED displays for the current operating mode and diagnostic status of the CPU
② Power LED
③ X50: Slot for the CFast card (flash memory), sealable
④ Mode selector
⑤ X51: Slot for an optional SD/MMC card
⑥ X80: Connector for 24 V DC supply voltage
⑦ X1 PROFINET Slot for BusAdapter for connection of PROFINET IO;
(LAN): status display for PROFINET
⑧ X2 PN/IE (LAN): GbE Ethernet connection with integrated display
⑨ X60, X61, X62: 3 USB connections
⑩ X70 DVI-I: Connection for monitor
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 21
Product overview
Slot for CFast card

The operating system, Runtime software and project are installed on the supplied SIMATIC
CFast card. The CFast card is the only mass storage device of the CPU 1515SP PC.
Note
Unauthorized access
Seal the cover of the slot to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the
CPU 1515SP PC from unauthorized access and manipulation.
Slot for SD/MMC card

A SIMATIC SD or MMC card can be used as additional storage drive. This drive can be used
to store data via Windows, for example a backup, but not the operating system, the Runtime
software or the project.
Permitted SD cards: SDHC up to 32 GB, SDXC up to 2 TB.
USB connections
Two USB high-current (500 mA) interfaces and one low-current (100 mA) interface can be
used at the same time.
MAC addresses
The MAC address consists of a 3-byte manufacturer ID and a 3-byte device ID (consecutive
number).
Each device is already assigned four MAC addresses in the factory. The front of the CPU
1515SP PC is lasered with the MAC address 1 and 4. With the MAC addresses 2 and 3, the
consecutive numbers are incremented. If, for example, the first MAC address is
08-00-06-6B-80-C0, the second MAC address is 08-00-06-6B-80-C1.
Assignment
MAC address 1 X2 PN/IE (LAN)
• Lasered on the front of the CPU (start of the number range)
MAC address 2 X1 PROFINET (LAN)
• Lasered on the front of the CPU (end of the number range)
CPU 1515SP PC
22 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview
Connector for supply voltage

The CPU 1515SP PC is equipped with a 2-pin connection terminal for the power supply.
The connection plug for the supply voltage is plugged in when the CPU is shipped from the
factory.
Mode selector
Use the mode selector to set the CPU operating mode.
Table 3- 3 Mode selector positions
Position Meaning Description

RUN Operating mode RUN1 The CPU is processing the user program.
STOP Operating mode STOP1 The CPU is not processing the user program.
The outputs are set to a "safe" state.
MRES Memory reset For active S7-1500 software controller2 only:
CPU memory reset
1 RUN and STOP indicate the selected operating state. The RUN and STOP LEDs indicate the
actual operating mode of the CPU 1515SP PC.
2 See the S7-1500 software controller manual
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 23
Product overview
3.6 Scope of delivery
3.6.1 Unpacking the device
When unpacking
When unpacking, make sure to check the following:
● Check packaging and contents for visible damage from transport.
● Check the delivery for completeness.
Please inform your Siemens contact partner should you determine damages from
transport or any irregularities.
● Keep the supplied documentation and licenses. They belong to the device and are the
proof that you have purchased the software preinstalled on the CFast card.
Documentation and licenses are required for initial commissioning and for any questions
that arise.
● Keep the original packaging in case the device needs to be transported again.
NOTICE
Damage to the device during transport and storage
If a device is transported or stored without packaging, it is unprotected from shocks,
vibrations, pressure and moisture. Damaged packaging indicates that environmental
conditions have already had a significant impact on the device.
The device might be damaged.
Do not dispose of the original packaging. Pack the device for transport and storage.
NOTICE
Damage to the device caused by condensation
If the device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme variations in temperature during
transport, this may cause moisture to build up on or in the device (condensation).
Moisture may cause a short-circuit and damage the device.
Proceed as follows to avoid damage:
• Store the device in dry conditions.
• Make sure it adapts to room temperature before commissioning.
• Do not expose the device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
• If condensation has developed, wait for approximately 12 hours or until the device is
completely dry before you switch it on.
CPU 1515SP PC
24 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview
WARNING
Electric shock and fire hazard from damaged device
A damaged device can carry dangerous voltage and trigger a fire in the machine or plant. A
damaged device has unpredictable properties and states.
Death or severe injury could occur.
Make sure that the damaged device is not installed and commissioned accidentally. Label
the damaged device correspondingly and keep it locked up. Have the device repaired
without delay.
Identification data
The identification data can be used to clearly identify the device when a repair is necessary.
Make a note of the following data for your devices:
● The article number of the CPU 1515SP PC can be found on the order slip.
● Depending on the scope of delivery, the "Certificate of License" is provided as proof of
license for the S7-1500 software controller and for WinCC Runtime Advanced V13 SP1.
● The "Microsoft Windows Product Key" can be found on the "Certificate of Authenticity"
label.
● The first and the last MAC address are provided on the device.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 25
Product overview
3.6.2 Scope of delivery - Hardware variant WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM
Note
The device always comes with the CPU 1515SP PC label with article number
6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0, regardless of the order options.
The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC:
Table 3- 4 Scope of delivery - Hardware variant WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM
Order option CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC + HMI CPU 1515SP PC

(spare part)
Article number 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2AA31- 6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0
• 0EK0 HMI 128PT
• 0EL0 HMI 512PT
• 0EM0 HMI 2048PT
CPU X X X
Strain relief with fixing X X X
screws
Server module X X X
8 GB CFast card with the
following pre-installations:
• Windows Embedded X X –
Standard 7 E operating
system
• S7-1500 software con- X X –

troller CPU 1505S
• WinCC RT Advanced – X –
V13 SP1
Restore DVD for image re- X X –
store
"Documentation and Drivers" X X –
DVD
Windows Certificate of Au- X X –
thenticity (CoA)
Certificate of License (CoL) X X –
USB stick with SIMATIC X X –
license keys
Product information X X –
CPU 1515SP PC
26 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Product overview
3.6.3 Scope of delivery - Hardware variant WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
Note
The device always comes with the CPU 1515SP PC label with article number 6ES7677-
2AA40-0AA0, regardless of the order options.
The following components are included in the scope of delivery of the CPU 1515SP PC:
Table 3- 5 Scope of delivery - Hardware variant WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
Order option CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC + HMI CPU 1515SP PC

(spare part)
Article number 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0 6ES7677-2AA41- 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
• 0FK0 HMI 128PT
• 0FL0 HMI 512PT
• 0FM0 HMI 2048PT
CPU X X X
Strain relief with fixing X X X
screws
Server module X X X
16 GB CFast card with the
following pre-installations:
• Windows Embedded X X –
Standard 7 P operating
system
• S7-1500 software con- X X –

troller CPU 1505S
• WinCC RT Advanced – X –
V13 SP1
Restore DVD for image re- X X –
store
"Documentation and Drivers" X X –
DVD
Windows Certificate of Au- X X –
thenticity (CoA)
Certificate of License (CoL) X X –
USB stick with SIMATIC X X –
license keys
Product Information X X –
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 27
Installing 4
4.1 Basics
Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC is an open resource. This means that you may only install it in
enclosures, cabinets or electrical operating areas. These housings, cabinets or electrical
operating areas must only be accessible with a key or tool. Access may only be possible for
instructed or authorized personnel.
Installation location
Install the CPU 1515SP PC in a suitable enclosure/control cabinet with at least IP54 degree
of protection according to EN 60529 and take into consideration the ambient conditions for
operating the devices.
Installation position
You can install the ET 200SP distributed I/O system in any position. The preferred mounting
position is horizontal mounting on a vertical wall.
Depending on the mounting position, restrictions on ambient temperature and maximum
configuration apply to the CPU 1515SP PC.
NOTICE
Damage to the modules
Modules can be damaged if exposed to ambient temperatures higher than permitted.
The following ambient temperatures must not be exceeded during operation:
• Horizontal mounting
– 60 °C for an installation with up to 32 I/O modules.
• Vertical mounting
For more detailed information, refer to section Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
(Page 89)
CPU 1515SP PC
28 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Installing
4.1 Basics
Mounting rail
The CPU 1515SP PC is mounted on a mounting rail according to EN 60715 (35 × 7.5 mm or
35 × 15 mm).
The mounting rail must be grounded separately in the control cabinet. Exception: If you
install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground the rail
separately.
Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to vibration and shock loads, both ends of
the ET 200SP system assembly must be mechanically fixed to the mounting rail (e.g using
8WA1010-1PH01 ground terminals). This measure prevents the ET 200SP from shifting to
the side.
Note
If the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is exposed to high vibration and shock load, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approx.
200 mm.
Suitable surface finishes are:

● Steel strip in accordance with Appendix A of EN 60715 or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend the use of the mounting rails in section
Accessories/spare parts (Page 103).
Note
Mounting rails of other manufacturers
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, ensure that they have the properties
required for your climatic and mechanical ambient conditions.
Check whether the mounting rails meet the requirements for a protective conductor.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 29
Installing
4.1 Basics
Minimum clearances
Make sure to maintain the following minimum clearances when installing or dismantling the
CPU 1515SP PC.
Figure 4-1 Minimum clearances
Installation rules
● After the CPU 1515SP PC, there is a BaseUnit BU..D with incoming supply voltage L+
(light-colored terminal box).
● This is followed by BaseUnits BU..B (with dark-colored terminal box).
● The respective corresponding I/O modules can be connected to the BaseUnits.
Refer to the "Selection of a suitable BaseUnit" section in the ET 200SP manual for
appropriate combinations of BaseUnits and I/O modules.
● The server module completes the installation.
Note
Install the CPU 1515SP PC only with disconnected supply voltage.
CPU 1515SP PC
30 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Installing
Maximum mechanical configuration

As soon as one of the following rules applies, the maximum configuration has been reached:
Table 4- 1 Maximum mechanical configuration
Properties Rule
Number of modules • Horizontal mounting
– 0 to 60 °C ambient temperature:
a maximum of 32 I/O modules and USB load
• Vertical mounting
Backplane bus length A maximum mounting width of 1 m (without CPU 1515SP PC, including
server module)
Electrical maximum configuration

The number of operable I/O modules of a potential group is limited by the
● Power consumption of the I/O modules
● Power consumption of the components supplied via these I/O modules
The maximum current-carrying capability of the terminals on the BaseUnit L+/ground is 10 A.
USB load
When using the CPU 1515SP PC with the maximum configuration, the USB load must also
be considered:
● Horizontal mounting
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 60 °C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA
USB load
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 55 °C with maximum 64 I/O modules and 2 x 500 mA +
1 x 100 mA USB load
● Vertical mounting
– Ambient temperature of 0 to 50 °C with maximum 32 I/O modules and 3 x 100 mA
USB load
Address space
The address space is preset and can be adjusted in the user program.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 31
Installing
4.3 Installing the CPU 1515SP PC
Requirements
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only to fix the strain relief and dismantle the BusAdapter)
Fixing strain relief

Fix the strain relief on the top and the bottom of the left-hand side of the CPU 1515SP PC
with the supplied screws.
Installing the CPU 1515SP PC

1. Install the CPU on the mounting rail.
2. Swivel the CPU back until you hear the mounting rail release click into place
3. To check that the CPU has correctly clicked into place, pull on the underside of the
enclosure.
Figure 4-2 Installing the CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1515SP PC
32 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Installing
Dismantling the CPU 1515SP PC

The BaseUnits with the I/O modules are located to the right of the CPU 1515SP PC:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU.
2. Press the mounting rail release button on the first BaseUnit and, at the same time, move
the CPU parallel to the left until it comes off the rest of the module group.
Note: The mounting rail release button is located above the CPU.
3. While pressing the mounting rail release button on the CPU, swivel the CPU out of the
mounting rail.
Note
It is not necessary to remove the BusAdapter from the CPU 1515SP PC.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 33
Connection 5
5.1 Notes on connection
Note
Rules and regulations for operation
Observe the information contained in the Wiring section in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and
in the function manual Designing interference-free controllers
NOTICE
Fault caused by I/O devices
The connection of I/O devices can lead to faults on the device.
Injury to persons and damage to the machine or plant could result.
Note the following when connecting I/O devices:
• Read the documentation related to the I/O devices. Follow all instructions given in the
documentation.
• Only connect I/O devices which are suitable for use in industrial environments according
to EN 61000-6-2/EC 61000-6-2.
• I/O devices which are not hot-plug capable may only be connected when the power
supply of the device is switched off.
Note
Feedback through USB devices
The startup of the CPU 1515SP PC at power on is not guaranteed for USB devices which -
contrary to the USB 2.0 specification - feed back voltage to the host interface.
Regenerative feedback is generally not permitted.
CPU 1515SP PC
34 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Connection
5.2 Terminal and block diagram
Block diagram
The figure below shows the block diagram for the CPU 1515SP PC.
① Switch X1 PN (LAN) PROFINET interface X1

② Electronics P1 PROFINET interface X1 Port 1
⑤ Mode selector M Ground
X50 CFast card LK1, LK2 LED Link TX/RX
X51 SD/MMC card LK3 LED Link
X60 USB interface 2.0, 0.5 A R/S RUN/STOP LED (yellow/green)
X61, X62 USB interface 2.0, 0.5 A ER ERROR LED (red)
X70 DVI-I interface MT MAINT LED (yellow)
X80 24 V DC Infeed of supply voltage PWR POWER LED (yellow/green)
X2 PN/IE (LAN) Ethernet interface X2
Figure 5-1 Block diagram for the CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 35
Connection
5.3 Electrical configuration
5.3 Electrical configuration
Non-isolated configuration
Note
Unlike the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the CPU 1515SP PC can only be operated with
a non-isolated configuration.
The following figure shows the overall configuration of a CPU 1515SP PC when supplied
from a TN-S system. The power supply supplies the CPU 1515SP PC and the load circuit for
the 24 V DC modules.
For the CPU 1515SP PC, there is a fixed connection between the ground infeed terminal
and the contact springs to the mounting rail. The mounting rail must be grounded separately
in the control cabinet.
① Master switch
② Short-circuit and overload protection
③ Load current supply (galvanic isolation)
④ This connection is established automatically with the CPU 1515SP PC.
The represented layout of the power connections does not correspond to the actual layout; it
was chosen for demonstration purposes only.
Figure 5-2 Connecting the load voltage reference potential
CPU 1515SP PC
36 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Connection
5.4 Connecting devices to networks
5.4 Connecting devices to networks

The following options are available for integrating devices into existing or planned system
environments and networks.
Ethernet
You can use the integrated Ethernet interface X2 PN/IE (LAN) (10/100/1000 Mbps) for
communication and data exchange with automation devices, for example, SIMATIC S7.
You need suitable software to do this: STEP 7, WinCC, SIMATIC NET.
Note
Use a Category 5e Ethernet cable (Cat-5e cable) for operation with 1000 Mbps.
PROFINET
PROFINET operation is possible via the X1 PN (LAN) interface and permitted BusAdapter.
PROFIBUS
The connection to PROFIBUS can be made using the DP master module.
5.5 Securing cables

The strain relief for connecting cables prevents the USB cables and PROFINET connectors
detaching from the CPU 1515SP PC. The strain relief is included in the scope of delivery.
WARNING
Flying sparks due to loose cables
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong
oscillation and high vibrating loads.
Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties.
Requirements
● The strain relief is fixed to the CPU.
● The CPU is installed.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 37
Connection
5.5 Securing cables
Procedure
Secure the USB and PROFINET cables to the strain relief using cable ties.
Figure 5-3 Secured cables
CPU 1515SP PC
38 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Diagnostics, error and system alarm 6
6.1 Status and error display
LED display
The following figure shows the LEDs of the CPU 1515SP PC.

④ POWER LED (yellow/green LED)
Figure 6-1 LEDs of the CPU 1515SP PC
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 39
Diagnostics, error and system alarm
Meaning of the LED displays with active software controller

The CPU 1515SP PC has three LED displays to indicate the current operating status and the
diagnostic status.
The following table shows the meaning of the color combinations of the LED displays in
connection with the software controller.
Table 6- 1 Meaning of the LED displays
RUN/STOP LED ERROR LED MAINT LED Meaning

POWER OFF
LED off LED off LED off Missing or insufficient supply voltage on
the CPU 1515SP PC.
LED off LED flashes red LED off
Software controller of the
LED green LED off LED off CPU 1515SP PC is in the operating state
RUN.
LED green LED flashes red LED off
LED green LED off LED lights up The affected hardware must be replaced
yellow within a short period of time.
LED green LED off LED flashes yel- The affected hardware must be replaced
low within a reasonable time period.
Firmware update successfully completed
Software controller of the CPU is in the
LED lights up LED off LED off operating state STOP.
yellow
The user program is causing an error.
LED lights up LED flashes red LED flashes yel- CPU defective
yellow low
LED off LED off during STOP, e.g. ramp-up after STOP.
LED flashes yel-
low Loading the user program
LED flashes LED off LED off
yellow/green
LED flashes LED flashes red LED flashes yel- Test of LEDs during startup, inserting a
yellow/green low module.
LED flashing test
CPU 1515SP PC
40 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Diagnostics, error and system alarm
POWER LED
Table 6- 2 POWER LED
POWER LED Meaning

No supply voltage or supply voltage too low
LED off
Supply voltage present;
LED lights up yellow running through BIOS phase;
operating system is shut down
Supply voltage present;
LED green Booting or operation of the operating system
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 41
Commissioning 7
7.1 Notes on commissioning
WARNING
Improper commissioning in hazardous areas
Device failure or risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
• Do not commission the device unless it is fully mounted and connected according to the
specifications in the section Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) (Page 67).
• Before commissioning, please consider the effects on other devices in the plant.
CAUTION
Hot surfaces
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces.
During operation, only touch the device with appropriate protective gloves.
NOTICE
Condensation in the device
Damage to the device due to condensation if the temperature between transport or storage
and the installation site differs by more than 20 °C (36 °F).
Before commissioning the device, leave it to stand for several hours in the new
environment.
NOTICE
Data loss
Data loss may occur if write filters are used incorrectly.
Therefore, note the information on write filters.
Two write filters are available for configuration under Windows Embedded:
• Enhanced Write Filter (Page 67)
• File Based Write Filter (Page 71)
CPU 1515SP PC
42 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Commissioning
7.2 Initial commissioning
7.2 Initial commissioning

When first starting up your CPU 1515SP PC, passwords, IP addresses and some basic
settings are queried.
Then, the operating system which is pre-installed on the CFast card is set up automatically
on the device.
Note
Initial commissioning is not possible with a Multitouch panel, because the Multitouch drivers
are not available until after the installation of the operating system.
Requirements
● The CPU 1515SP PC is installed.
● The CFast card is inserted.
● No data carriers are connected via USB.
● The following hardware is available: A monitor, a USB keyboard, a USB mouse
Procedure
NOTICE
Faulty installation
If you change the default values in the BIOS setup or switch off the device during the
installation process, the installation is faulty and the operating system is not installed
properly. The operational reliability of the device and the plant is compromised.
Do not switch off the device at any time during the installation process. Do not change the
default values in the BIOS setup.
1. Connect a monitor using a DVI-I cable.

2. Connect a keyboard and a mouse to the CPU via USB.
3. Connect the power supply.
→ The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green.
→ The device carries out the hardware initialization.
4. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears from the screen.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the device
Note
Restart the device after the operating system has been set up.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 43
Commissioning
7.3 Installing license keys
Result
● The WES7 operating system is installed.
● WES7 P: The Multitouch functions are available.
● The operating system's start screen is displayed after each startup.
● A login window appears if a password was entered during the initial commissioning.
Screen resolution
Under Windows Embedded Standard 7, the values transmitted from the monitor are set for
the screen resolution.
Licensing the software

The S7-1500 software controller and WinCC RT Advanced require product-specific license
keys. These can be found on the supplied USB stick.
Before commissioning, the license keys must be installed using the Automation License
Manager (ALM).
Perform the licensing directly via the CPU 1515SP PC.
Requirements
● Initial commissioning was successfully completed.
● Windows Embedded Standard 7 has started.
● The extended write filter EWF must be deactivated on the CPU 1515SP PC.
Installing License keys with local configuration

The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on the CPU 1515SP PC.
The software can be opened using the desktop icon or a menu command.
1. In the Windows Start bar, select Start > Programs > Siemens Automation > Automation
License Manager.
2. Follow the instructions of the Automation License Manager.
CPU 1515SP PC
44 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Commissioning
Using a programming device/PC to install the license keys

The Automation License Manager is pre-installed on a programming device/PC with STEP 7
and the CPU 1515SP PC.
1. Connect the CPU 1515SP PC to a programming device/PC.
2. Connect the supplied USB stick to the programming device/PC.
3. Select the menu command Start > SIMATIC > License Management > Automation
License Manager.
4. Select the Edit > Connect Computer menu command and type in the IP address of the
CPU 1515SP PC (default 192.168.1.1).
5. Drag the license keys from the USB stick to the system partition C: of the CPU 1515SP
PC.
Saving and securing license keys in the case of restore and repair
Note
Loss of license keys
A SIMATIC license key cannot be copied or duplicated. No more license key copies exist on
the USB stick once you have dragged the license keys from the USB stick to the
CPU 1515SP PC.
Secure your purchased license keys before restoring the delivery state (Restore) or in the
case of repair. To do this, move the license keys to a USB stick and keep this stick in a safe
place.
If an error occurs on your license keys on the CPU 1515SP PC, contact your Siemens
representative. Make sure to have the "Certificate of License" (CoL) to hand.
Note
The EWF (Page 67) write filter serves to protect your license keys and your configuration.
Reference
For additional information on licenses, refer to the Automation License Manager manual.
This can be found on the CPU 1515SP PC under Start > All Programs > Siemens
Automation > Documentation and on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/fr/56956174).
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 45
Commissioning
7.4 Windows Security Center
7.4 Windows Security Center
Warning from the Windows Security Center

A warning from the Windows Security Center appears when you first switch on your device.
The Security Center checks the status of the device regarding the three important security
aspects listed below. If a problem is detected, the Security Center provides
recommendations on how you can better protect the device.
● Firewall: The Windows firewall contributes to protecting the device by preventing non-
authorized users from accessing the device via a network or the Internet. Windows
checks whether the device is protected by a software firewall.
In the delivery state, the firewall is enabled.
● Antivirus software: Antivirus programs contribute to protecting the device against viruses
and other security threats. Windows checks whether a comprehensive, up-to-date
antivirus program is used on the device.
In the delivery state, no antivirus software is installed.
● Automatic updates: With the help of automatic updates, Windows can routinely check for
the latest major updates for the device and install these automatically. In the delivery
state, this option is disabled.
Configure the Security Center to suit your requirements.
CPU 1515SP PC
46 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Commissioning
7.5 Switching on/off the CPU 1515SP PC
7.5 Switching on/off the CPU 1515SP PC
Requirements
Initial commissioning was successfully completed.
Switching on the CPU 1515SP PC

1. Switch on the power supply of the CPU.
→ The Boot Manager GRUB4DOS opens.
2. Select the mode in which the CPU 1515SP PC is to start:
– Only with the Windows operating system.
– With the Windows operating system and the S7-1500 software controller (default).
Figure 7-1 Boot Manager GRUB4DOS
Switching off the CPU 1515SP PC

Use the Start > Shut down Windows function to switch off.
→ The PWR LED changes from green to yellow.
→ The Windows function shuts down the Windows operating system and the S7-1500
software controller.
If you do not intend to use the device for a long period after the shutdown, disconnect it from
the power supply.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 47
Functions 8
8.1 Monitoring functions
Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC features monitoring functions that can be used with the corresponding
software. The following display, monitoring and control functions are available.
● Temperature monitoring
● Monitoring of drives with SMART functionality
● Operating hours counter (information on the total runtime)
SIMATIC IPC DiagBase

The SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software is included in the scope of delivery of the CPU
1515SP PC.
With the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software, you use the functions for local monitoring. Use
the DiagBase Management Explorer application to obtain a clearer overview for monitoring.
The DiagBase Alarm Manager notifies you of individual alarms.
Note
For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software.
SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor

The SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor software is provided on a CD.
The diagnostics and alarm software is used for early detection and reporting of potential
system failures. The software is also used for remote diagnostics.
The software contains:
● The software for the stations to be monitored
● A library for creating your own applications
CPU 1515SP PC
48 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM
Temperature monitoring
Three temperature sensors monitor the temperature at different locations of the
CPU 1515SP PC:
● Processor temperature
● Temperature in the vicinity of the RAM ICs/blocks
● Temperature of the basic module
If one of the temperature values exceeds the set temperature threshold, a temperature error
is triggered which activates the IPC DiagBase or IPC DiagMonitor software.
The temperature error remains stored until the temperatures fall below the temperature
threshold again and it is reset using one of the following measures:
● Acknowledgment of the error message by the monitoring software
● Restart of the device
8.2 Retentive memory NVRAM

Retentive memory is non-volatile memory for saving a limited quantity of data in the event of
power failure.
The data defined as retentive is stored in retentive memory. This data is retained beyond a
power-off or power failure.
A corresponding function is implemented in the S7-1500 software controller to allow NVRAM
to be used there. This saves up to 183.5 KB of data in non-volatile data memory in the case
of power failure. This function can be set on the engineering station in the TIA Portal.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 49
Functions
8.3 BIOS description
8.3.1 Introduction
BIOS setup
The BIOS setup is located in the BIOS ROM. The information on the system configuration is
stored in the memory of the CPU 1515SP PC.
Using the Setup, you can set the following:
● The hardware configuration, for example, drive type
● The system properties
● time and date
Note
The American keyboard layout applies in the BIOS.
Changing the device configuration

The device configuration is preset for working with the supplied software.
Only change the set values if you have made technical changes to your device.
CPU 1515SP PC
50 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.3.2 Starting BIOS setup

Start the setup program as follows:
1. Disconnect the device from the power supply and switch it on again (cold restart).
With the CPU 1515SP PC default settings, the following screen appears after the device
has been switched on:
Figure 8-1 BIOS setup
After completion of the startup test, you have the option of starting the SETUP program.
The following BIOS message appears:
Press F2 go to Setup Utility
Press F12 go to Boot Manager
2. Press the <F2> button while the message is on the screen.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 51
Functions
8.3.3 BIOS setup menus
Overview of BIOS setup

The menus and submenus are shown on the following pages.
① Menu bar
② Selectable submenu
③ Help window
④ Operating line
Figure 8-2 Structure of the BIOS setup menus
CPU 1515SP PC
52 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
Menu structure
In the menu bar ①, you can select between the following menu forms:
[Information] [Main] [Advanced] [Security] [Power] [Boot] [Exit].
In the main window ②, various settings are displayed or submenus selected.
In the Help window ③ of the respective menu, you can find information on the selected
setup entry.
The operating line ④ contains notes on operation.
You can use the cursor keys [←] left and [→] right to switch between the menu forms.
Menu Meaning
Information Device-specific information, for example, product version
Main Setting system functions
Advanced Advanced system configuration
Security Safety functions, for example, setting a password
Power Determining the switch-on behavior of the device
Boot Determining boot options, such as boot priority
Exit Exiting and saving
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 53
Functions
8.3.3.1 Information menu

This menu shows the versions of the device-specific functions.
Keep this information at hand for Customer Support when you have technical questions
regarding your system.
Example
Figure 8-3 Information menu
CPU 1515SP PC
54 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.3.3.2 Main menu
Settings in the Main menu
Figure 8-4 Main menu
In the Main menu, you can use the [↑] up and [↓] down arrow keys to select between the
following system setting fields:
Array Meaning
System Time Displaying and setting the current time
System Date Displaying and setting the current calendar date
System Time and System Date

System Time and System Date show the current values. After you have selected the
corresponding field, you can change the following settings, one after the other, using the [+]
and [–] keys:
● For the time of day: Hour: Minute: Second
● For the date: Month/day/year.
You can use the <ENTER> key to switch between the entries within the Date and Time fields
(e.g., from hour to minute).
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 55
Functions
8.3.3.3 Advanced menu
Settings in the Advanced menu
Figure 8-5 Advanced menu
Entry Meaning
Boot Configuration Configuring the boot settings
IDE Configuration Configuring the devices
Video Configuration Configuring the graphics parameters
CPU Related setting Configuring CPU parameters
AMD PBS Option Configuring interfaces
"IDE Configuration" submenu
Entry Meaning
SATA configure as Setting the SATA configuration type:
IDE, LEGACY IDE, AHCI
Serial ATA Port 0 Serial ATA Port 0 device configuration
CPU 1515SP PC
56 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
"Video Configuration" submenu
Entry Meaning
UMA Sharing Memory Size Setting the size of the work memory for the graphics processor.
(256 MB) (Unified Memory Architecture; also Shared Memory)
"CPU Related setting" submenu
Entry Meaning
SVM support Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled) Secure Virtual Machine
functionality .
"AMD PBS Option" submenu
Entry Meaning
Internal LAN Controller Integrated Ethernet interface (10/100/1000 Mbps)
X2 PN/IE (LAN)
PXE Boot to INT_LAN Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled) internal Southbridge
Network Controller.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 57
Functions
8.3.3.4 Security menu
Settings in the Security menu
Figure 8-6 Security menu
You can assign a password to protect the CPU 1515SP PC against unauthorized access.
Supervisor Pass- Installed Specific setup fields, including the Supervisor password,
word can be modified by the user.
Not installed Password is disabled.
Set Supervisor This field opens the password entry dialog box. Once a password has been
Password entered, it can be changed by entering a new password or deleted and thereby
disabled using the <Return> key.
Note
Overwriting of the Supervisor password during a BIOS update
A BIOS update overwrites the password.
After a BIOS update, set up the password again.
CPU 1515SP PC
58 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.3.3.5 Power menu
Settings in the Power menu
Figure 8-7 Power menu
The device response after a power failure and after a Wake Event is determined in the
Power menu.
Entry Meaning
Wake on PME When activated (Enabled), the device switches itself on when a
Power Management Event occurs. Otherwise, the device remains
switched off.
Auto Wake on S5 When activated (Enabled), the device switches itself on when a
Wake Event occurs. Otherwise, the device remains switched off.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 59
Functions
8.3.3.6 Boot menu
Entries in the Boot menu
Figure 8-8 Boot menu
In this menu, you define the boot behavior of the device.
Entry Meaning
Quick Boot Enabling (Enabled) or disabling (Disabled).
The device starts up faster when this option is enabled, because vari-
ous hardware function tests are skipped.
Quiet Boot When this option is disabled, the device boots in text mode.
When it is enabled, a start screen with logo appears.
USB Boot Booting from connected USB devices permitted/not permitted.
Boot menu > submenu "Boot Device Priority"

In this menu, you define the sequence of the boot media.
Entry Meaning
Normal Boot Menu Normal = boot sequence by component type
Advance = individual boot sequence of all components
CPU 1515SP PC
60 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
Boot Device Priority > submenu "Boot Type Order"
Entry Meaning
Hard Disk Drive Setting the boot sequence of the group of drives
USB Setting the boot sequence of the group of USB drives
Others Setting the boot sequence of the group Others,, e.g. Remote Boot
Device
All connected boot-capable components and their boot position are displayed in this menu.
The boot position of the components can be moved freely.
The component at the top (highest boot priority) is used for booting. If the component is not
available, the system boots from the next component in the list.
You change the boot sequence as follows:
● Select the boot components using the keys <↑>, <↓>
● Move to the required position using the keys <+>, <–>
Note
During the boot operation, you can start the Boot Manager with the <F12> key.
The Boot Manager displays all available boot components and boots from the device
selected by the user.
"Normal Boot Menu > Advance" setting

In the "Advance" setting, boot-capable components that are disconnected and reconnected
by the CPU 1515SP PC between the boot processes are set to the top position by the BIOS.
Boot Device Priority > submenu "Hard Disk Drive"

The size of the CFast card is displayed in this menu.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 61
Functions
8.3.3.7 Exit menu
Settings in the Exit menu
Figure 8-9 Exit menu
The setup program is always terminated via the Exit menu.

The menu is used to save or discard the changes made.
Entry Meaning
Exit Saving Changes All changes are saved; then, the system is restarted with the new
parameters.
Save Change Without Exit All changes are saved.
Exit Discarding Changes All changes are discarded and then executed with the old parame-
ters when the system is restarted.
Load Optimal Defaults Loading optimum default values
Load Custom Defaults Loading default values
Safe Custom Defaults Saving default values
Discard Changes All changes are discarded.
CPU 1515SP PC
62 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.3.4 BIOS setup default settings
Documenting the device configuration

If you make changes to the default setting of the BIOS setup, enter these in the table below.
This will ensure that values you set will be readily available if hardware changes are made
later.
We recommend that you print out the table below and keep it in a safe place after you have
made your entries.
Note
The default settings in the BIOS setup depend on the ordered device configuration.
BIOS setup default settings
Menu System parameters Default settings User settings

Main System Time hh:mm:ss
System Date MM/TT/JJJJ
Advanced > IDE Configura- SATA configure as LEGACY IDE
tion Serial ATA Port 0 SIMATIC IPC CFast 8/16
Advanced > Video Configu- UMA Sharing Memory Size 256 MB
ration
Advanced > CPU Related SVM Support Enabled
setting
Advanced > AMD PBS Op- Internal LAN Controller Auto
tion PXE Boot to INT_LAN Disabled
Security Supervisor Password Not installed
Set Supervisor Password Inactive (no password as-
signed)
Power Wake on PME Enabled
Auto Wake on S5 Disabled
Boot Quick Boot Enabled
Quiet Boot Disabled
USB Boot Disabled
Boot > Boot Device Priority > Normal Normal
Normal Boot Menu Advance
Boot > Boot Device Priority Boot Type Order Hard Disk Drive
USB
Others
Hard Disk Drive SIMATIC IPC CFast 8/16
GByte
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 63
Functions
Menu System parameters Default settings User settings

Exit Exit Saving Change Standard
Save Change Without Exit
Exit Discarding Changes
Load Optimal Defaults
Load Custom Defaults
Safe Custom Defaults
Discard Changes
8.3.5 BIOS update

With the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software (included in scope of delivery), you can perform
the following actions:
● Perform a BIOS update.
● Saving and updating the current BIOS version.
● Saving the BIOS settings or loading them from another backup.
For additional information, refer to the online help for the SIMATIC IPC DiagBase software.
Requirements
● The S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505S must be in STOP mode.
● The CPU 1515SP PC must be started in Windows mode.
NOTICE
Malfunctions in the software controllers due to critical actions
If a BIOS update is performed during CPU 1505S operation, malfunctions may occur in the
software controller, such as communication breakdowns and failures.
During operation of the CPU 1505S, do not perform a BIOS update or other actions that
place an extremely high demand on the hardware.
Before a BIOS update, switch the CPU 1505S to STOP.
CPU 1515SP PC
64 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.4 Power options
Performing a BIOS update

1. Start the CPU 1515SP PC in the GRUB menu in Windows mode (see figure (Page 47)).
→ The PWR LED lights up yellow first, then green.
→ The device carries out the hardware initialization.
2. Follow the BIOS update steps described in the help for SIMATIC IPC DiagBase.
→ The update is performed.
→ You are prompted to restart the device.
3. Use the Start > Shut down Windows function to switch off the CPU 1515SP PC.
→ The PWR LED lights up green first, then yellow.
→ The Windows function closes the Windows operating system and the software
controller.
4. Switch off the supply voltage on the CPU 1515SP PC.
5. Connect the power supply.
6. Wait until the Siemens logo disappears.
→ The CPU 1515SP PC restarts.
NOTICE
Overwriting of the Supervisor password during a BIOS update
A BIOS update overwrites the password.
After a BIOS update, set up the password again in the Security menu under "Set
Supervisor Password".
8.4 Power options

A power plan with the name SIMATIC is set as default on the CPU 1515SP PC. This
ensures that the CPU does not deviate from its maximum clock rate in order not to endanger
the real-time capability of the software controller.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 65
Functions
8.5 Protective functions for data carriers
NOTICE
Data loss
The number of write cycles on CFast cards is limited due to technical reasons.
To prevent data loss, the CFast card must therefore be provided with special protection.
Use a write filter to extend the life of the CFast card and to avoid a possible failure of the
CPU 1515SP PC.
Write filters
Two write filters are available for Windows Embedded:
● To protect an entire partition of the CFast card, use the Enhanced Write Filter EWF
(Page 67).
Unlike the FBWF, the EWF can also be used for compressed NTFS file system.
● Use the File-Based Write Filter FBWF (Page 71) to update specific files dynamically.
The FBWF can be configured more flexibly and allows direct write access without restart.
NOTICE
Data loss
If both write filters are activated, the EWF blocks direct write access of the FBWF.
Data is lost after a restart of the CPU 1515SP PC.
Activate only one of the two write filters per partition.
CPU 1515SP PC
66 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.5.1 Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)
Purpose and function

The Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) allows you to write-protect individual partitions.
EWF is activated by default on the CPU 1515SP PC.
The EWF is activated by means of the pre-installed SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager or the
Windows console application ewfmgr.exe.
SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager

Start the software via Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > SIMATIC >
EWF Manager.
In the status bar, you can use the SIMATIC IPC EWF Manager icon to check whether the
EWF is active.
Table 8- 1 Meaning of the icons
Icons Meaning
The partition is protected by the EWF.
The EWF is deactivated for this partition.
The EWF is currently switched off, but will be activated after the restart.
The EWF is currently active, but will be deactivated after the restart.
The filter is active. A Commit command is executed before the next reboot.
The filter is currently active, but will be deactivated after the restart.
A Commit command will also be executed before the next reboot.
The operating instructions for the SIMATIC Industrial PC: IPC EWF Manager
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50867677) is located on the
CPU 1515SP PC in Start > All Programs > Siemens Automation > Documents > Manuals.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 67
Functions
Console application ewfmgr.exe

The application is called via the Windows command line (Command Prompt).
The following functions are available, among others, for setting, switching on and switching
off the EWF:
Table 8- 2 Enhanced Write Filter functions
Function Command
Write-protect drive C: Switching on ewfmgr c: -enable
Write-protect drive C: disable ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable

(modified data is accepted)
Modified files on drive C: Accept ewfmgr c: -commit
Display information about the EWF drive ewfmgr c:
Display help ewfmgr /h
Note
The EWF commands for write protection become effective only after a restart.
Note
The EWF command ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable must not be used with the option -Live.
CPU 1515SP PC
68 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
Special features when using the EWF
NOTICE
Data loss upon power failure and upon shutdown/restart
If the EWF is active, all changes made on the C drive are lost after power failure and on
shutdown/restart.
Use an UPS to prevent data losses after power failure.
Back up the data in the EWF RAM Overlay to the CFast card before shutting down the CPU
1515SP PC. In the command line, enter the following commands:
ewfmgr c: -commit
Restart the device

Or
ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable
Restart the device

ewfmgr c: -enable
Restart the device
Note
Data loss
If EWF is active and you decline a restart after having set the -commitanddisable or -commit
option, your data is lost after a power failure!
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 69
Functions
Note
Disabling automatic daylight saving changes
In systems without central time management and with activated EWF, the time is advanced
or set back by one hour in the daylight saving time or standard time period each time the
system performs a cold or warm restart, due to the system-specific function for automatic
daylight saving changes.
Reason for this behavior: Windows Embedded Standard 7 sets a flag in a registry entry that
indicates completion of the conversion to daylight saving time. Since this file is also
protected against modification by the EWF, the marker is lost during the boot sequence and
the adjustment is made again.
We therefore recommend that you deactivate the automatic adjustment and change the
clock manually.
Proceed as follows:
1. Disable the EWF filter (ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable) and reboot the system.
2. Deactivate automatic adjustment in the Control Panel:
Remove the check mark under Start > Control Panel > Date and Time > "Time Zone" tab
at "Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes".
3. Save the change (ewfmgr c: -commit).
4. Switch on the EWF again (ewfmgr c: -commitanddisable) and reboot the system.
CPU 1515SP PC
70 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Functions
8.5.2 File-Based Write Filter (FBWF)
Purpose and function

The FBWF allows you to write-protect specific files and folders of a partition.
FBWF is deactivated by default on the CPU 1515SP PC.
The FBWF is activated by means of the Windows console application fbwfmgr.exe.
NOTICE
Data loss
If both write filters are activated, the EWF blocks direct write access of the FBWF.
Data is lost after a restart of the CPU 1515SP PC.
Activate only one of the two write filters.
Console application fbwfmgr.exe

The application is called via the Windows command line (Command Prompt).
The following functions, among others, are available for setting, switching on and switching
off the FBWF:
Table 8- 3 File-Based Write Filter
Function Command
Show FBWF status fbwfmgr /displayconfig
Activate FBWF after the next restart fbwfmgr /enable
Write to protected files fbwfmgr /commit c: \<path>\<file name>
Display help fbwfmgr /?

Defining exclusions:
fbwfmgr /addexclusion c:
• Add file \<path>\<filename.ext>
fbwfmgr /addexclusion c: \<path>
• Add folder
fbwfmgr /removeexclusion c:
• Remove file \<path>\<filename.ext>
fbwfmgr /removeexclusion c: \<path>
• Remove folder
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 71
Functions
Note
Note:
• The correct notation is as follows:
Drive letter: space character "\" relative file path
• The write protection commands become effective only after a restart.
Rule for exclusion list

The following sequence applies if you define exclusions for files and folders that do not yet
exist:
● Defining exclusions
● Restart CPU 1515SP PC
● Create file/folder
Display of the partition size with activated FBWF

The partition size displayed in the Explorer does not correspond with the actual size when
the FBWF is active. The size displayed is derived from the amount of memory occupied on
the partition and from memory released by the FBWF. After the maximum size of the overlay
was reached, a message is output warning of insufficient space on the partition.
Reference
Additional information on the FBWF can be found on the Internet
(http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff794219(v=winembedded.60).aspx).
CPU 1515SP PC
72 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Maintenance 9
9.1 Backing up and restoring data
Introduction
The operating system and the Runtime software are located on the supplied Restore DVD.
You can use this to restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC.
You can also create your own image of your CFast card. This includes the operating system,
the Runtime software, and the complete project loaded from the TIA Portal.
Save your project to partition D: of the CFast card.
SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator

To back up data in Windows Embedded Standard 7, we recommend the software tool
SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator (V3.3 or later). It provides for easy backup and fast
restore of the contents of the CFAST card and of individual partitions (images).
Note
The SIMATIC Image & Partition Creator supports the X2 PN/IE (LAN) interface.
You can procure the SIMATIC IPC Image & Partition Creator:
● via the Siemens online ordering system (http://www.siemens.de/automation/mall).
● Pre-installed on the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives.
For additional information, please refer to the corresponding product documentation.
SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive

You can use the SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drives for data backup and restore.
You obtain these through the Siemens online ordering system
(http://www.siemens.de/automation/mall).
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 73
Maintenance
9.2 Partitioning data carriers
9.2 Partitioning data carriers
Partitioning the CFast card

The following partitions are set up on the CFast card by default:
Partition Name 8 GB CFast card 16 GB CFast card File system

(WES7 E 32Bit) (WES7 P 64Bit)
C: SYSTEM 6150 MB 10240 MB NTFS
D: DATA Rest Rest NTFS
- - 400 MB 400 MB RAW
Note
Partitions in Windows Embedded Standard 7
The partitions need to be set again if they are faulty or if the partitioning is to be changed.
NOTICE
CPU volume for software controller (400 MB RAW)
Do not change the CPU volume for software controllers.
This is the only way to ensure that the software controller continues to operate without
error.
CPU 1515SP PC
74 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Maintenance
9.3 Restoring the delivery state
Introduction
The entire image of your operating system and your Runtime software are located on the
supplied Restore DVD. You can use the SIMATIC restore menu to restore the original
software of the CPU 1515SP PC.
Alternatively, you can use the Restore menu to create a bootable USB stick in order to
restore the original software without a DVD-ROM drive. Refer to the section Restoring
delivery state using USB stick (Page 78).
Note
Restoring existing system partition
If your projects are stored on partition D: you can use the option "Restore existing system
partition" to restore partition C: with the operating system and the Runtime software, without
your project data being affected.
Note
Using Multitouch panels
The restoration of the original software is not possible with a Multitouch panel, because the
Multitouch driver is not available until after the installation of the operating system.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 75
Maintenance
Requirements
To restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC, the following is required:
● A CFast card. Minimum size of the CFast card for the CPU 1515SP PC:
– WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM: 8 GB
– WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM: 16 GB
● A DVD drive with external power supply
● The supplied Restore DVD. Alternatively, a bootable USB stick
● A data backup
NOTICE
Data loss
During restoration of the system to delivery state, the CFast card is completely erased and
re-formatted, and is then loaded with the original software. All subsequently modified or
added data, programs, license keys and partitions on the CFast card will be lost.
Back up the data of the CPU 1515SP PC after you have assigned the parameters for the
modules and if you are making changes to the configuration.
NOTICE
Loss of license keys
Back up the license keys before the restore by dragging these to your USB stick via
Automation License Manager.
After the restart of the CPU 1515SP PC, re-install the license keys on the device via
Automation License Manager.
CPU 1515SP PC
76 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Maintenance
Restoring the delivery state of the CPU 1515SP PC using the Restore DVD
Before the restore

1. Switch off the power supply of the CPU.
2. Remove all USB devices from the CPU.
3. Connect a DVD drive with restore DVD to a USB interface of the CPU.
→ The CPU is started.
5. Press <F12> to start the Boot Manager.
6. Select the list entry for the DVD drive in the Boot Manager.
7. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key.
→ The loading process is displayed (Windows logo).
→ The SIMATIC Restore menu opens.
– Select a language.
– Select "CPU1515SP PC" or "CPU1515SP PC + HMI".
– Select the option "Completely restore system drive".
→ The original software is restored on Partition C:, Partition D: is deleted.
After the restore

1. Exit the Restore menu.
2. Remove all USB devices.
3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning (Page 43).
Further procedure
● Reconnect the USB devices.
● Install the license keys.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 77
Maintenance
9.4 Restoring delivery state using USB stick
Introduction
Alternatively, you can use the Restore menu to create a bootable USB stick in order to
restore the original software of the CPU 1515SP PC without a DVD-ROM drive.
Minimum size of the USB sticks for the CPU 1515SP PC:
● WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM: 8 GB
● WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM: 16 GB
Preparing bootable USB stick using PC
NOTICE
Data loss
If you transfer the data from the Restore-DVD to the USB stick, all existing data on the USB
stick is deleted.
You should back up the data on the USB stick before you create the Restore USB stick.
Transferring Restore DVD data to the USB stick

1. Place the Restore DVD into the DVD drive of a PC.
2. Double-click the file CD_Menu.exe in the root directory of the DVD.
– Select the option " Create USB flash drive".
3. When all the data has been transferred, remove the Restore USB stick safely from the
PC.
CPU 1515SP PC
78 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Maintenance
Restoring delivery state using USB stick
Before the restore

1. Switch off the power supply of the CPU.
2. Remove all USB devices from the CPU.
3. Connect the Restore USB stick directly to the CPU.
→ The CPU is started.
→ The restore process starts.
5. Press <F12> to start the Boot Manager.
6. Select the list entry for the USB stick as boot medium in the Boot Manager.
7. After the prompt, confirm the start by pressing any key.
→ The loading process is displayed (Windows logo).
→ The SIMATIC Restore menu opens.
– Select the option "Restore delivery state".
→ The original software is restored.
After the restore

1. Exit the Restore menu.
2. Remove all USB devices.
3. Proceed as described in Initial commissioning.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 79
Maintenance
9.5 Updating software
9.5 Updating software
Note
When you update software, start the CPU 1515SP PC in the GRUB menu in Windows mode
(see figure (Page 47)).
Information on updating software can be found on the Internet

(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
HMI devices
During the installation, make sure that you always use the latest drivers for the HMI devices
used (SIMATIC Flat Panels).
Before you install a new driver version, you must uninstall the old driver version in order to
ensure proper operation.
You can download the current driver software from SIMATIC Product Support.
9.6 Windows Embedded Standard 7

The Windows Embedded Standard 7 operating system is pre-installed on the
CPU 1515SP PC. WES7 E 32 Bit and WES7 P 64 Bit are offered, depending on the order
option.
The WES7 P version supports multi-touch functionality (gesture control).
You can install additional updates at a later time. Current information on the operating
system is available at www.windows.com.
9.7 Sending the device to customer service
Before sending
Note
Back up data and remove memory cards
Before you send in the CPU 1515SP PC for repair:
• Create a backup of your data.
• Back up your SIMATIC license keys on a USB stick.
• Remove your SD/MMC cards.
• Remove your CFast card.
CPU 1515SP PC
80 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Maintenance
9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card
9.8 Removing and inserting the CFast card
Introduction
The CPU 1515SP PC has a slot for a CFast card. On this card, you will find the operating
system, your Runtime software and, after configuration, the project.
Seal the cover for the CFast card to protect the system against unauthorized access.
You must remove the CFast card before you send in the CPU, for example, for repair.
Requirements
● The CPU 1515SP PC is disconnected from the power supply.
Procedure – Removing the CFast card

1. Remove the seal.
2. Open the cover, using a screwdriver if necessary.
3. Press onto the CFast card.
The card is pressed out of the slot.
4. Pull the card out of the slot.
To do this, grip the rib on the underside of the memory card.
Procedure – Inserting the CFast card

1. Open the cover of the slot, using a screwdriver if necessary.
2. Insert the CFast card into the slot.
3. Press the CFast card into the slot.
The CFast card is properly inserted if the cover can be closed without any resistance.
4. Close the cover.
NOTICE
Unauthorized access
Seal the cover to protect the CFast card with the operating system of the
CPU 1515SP PC from unauthorized access.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 81
Technical data 10
Introduction
The general technical specifications cover the following:
● The standards and test values that the CPU 1515SP PC complies with and fulfills.
● The test criteria according to which the CPU 1515SP PC was tested.
Currently valid markings and approvals
Note
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the CPU 1515SP PC.
Safety information
WARNING
Risk of personal injury and damage to property.
In hazardous atmospheres, injury to persons and material damage may occur if you
disconnect plug-in connections during operation of an ET 200SP.
Always switch off the power to the ET 200SP when disconnecting plug-in connections in
hazardous atmospheres.
WARNING
Flying sparks due to loose cables
Risk of explosion in hazardous areas.
USB cables and PROFINET connectors may detach from the device in the case of strong
oscillation and high vibrating loads.
Attach these cables to the strain relief of the device using cable ties.
CPU 1515SP PC
82 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
WARNING
Explosion hazard
If you replace components, compliance with Class I, DIV. 2 could be compromised.
WARNING
Area of application
This device is only suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-hazardous
areas.
CE marking
The CPU 1515SP PC meets the requirements and safety objectives of the following EC
guidelines and complies with the harmonized European standards (EN) for programmable
logic controllers published in the official journals of the European Community:
● 2006/95/EC "Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits" (Low-
Voltage Directive)
● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)
● 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are available for the responsible authorities at:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Sektor Industry
I IA AS FA DH AMB
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg, Germany
These are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, keyword
"Declaration of Conformity".
cULus approval
OR
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 83
Technical data
cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01
● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Installation Instructions for cULus haz.loc.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is
known to be non-hazardous.
● WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for
Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2.
● This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I,
Zone 2, Group IIC; or non-hazardous locations.
WARNING: EXPOSURE TO SOME CHEMICALS MAY DEGRADE THE SEALING
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS USED IN THE RELAYS.
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 (ANSI/ISA 82.02.01)
CSA C22.2 No. 213
CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
ATEX approval
in accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;
Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive gas
CPU 1515SP PC
84 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
IECEx approval
According to IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type
of protection "n") and IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General
requirements)
Marking for Australia and New Zealand
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the standard
AS/NZS CISPR 16.
Korea Certificate KCC-REM-S49-ET200SP
Note that this device corresponds to limit class A in terms of the emission of radio frequency
interference. This device can be used in all areas, except residential areas.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기
바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
IEC 61131
The CPU 1515SP PC with the S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505S fulfills the
requirements and criteria of the IEC 61131-2 standard (programmable logic controllers, Part
2: Equipment requirements and tests).
PROFINET standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61158 Type 10..
PROFIBUS standard
IO-Link standard
The ET 200SP distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61131-9.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 85
Technical data
Marine approval (available soon)

Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Use in industrial environments

SIMATIC products are designed for use in industry.
Table 10- 1 Use in industrial environments
Area of applica- Interference emission requirements Interference immunity requirements

tion
Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2011 EN 61000-6-2: 2005
Use in residential areas
Note
The ET 200SP is intended for use in industrial areas; use in residential areas may have an
impact on radio/TV reception.
If you want to use the ET 200SP in residential areas, you must ensure that its radio
frequency interference emission complies with limit class B in accordance with EN 55011.
Suitable measures for achieving RF interference level Class B include, for example:
● Installation of the CPU 1515SP PC in grounded control cabinets/control boxes
● Use of filters in the supply lines
Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
CPU 1515SP PC
86 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment.
Among other things, the CPU 1515SP PC also meets the requirements of the EMC
legislation for the European single market. The prerequisite for this is that the
CPU 1515SP PC complies with the requirements and guidelines relating to electrical
configuration.
EMC according to NE 21
The CPU 1515SP PC meets the EMC specifications of the NAMUR guideline NE 21.
Pulse-shaped disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC with
regard to pulse-shaped disturbances.
Table 10- 2 Pulse-shaped disturbance
Pulse-shaped disturbance Test voltage corresponds to

degree of se-
verity
Electrostatic discharge according Air discharge: ± 8 kV 3
to IEC 61000-4-2. Contact discharge: ± 6 kV 3
Burst pulses (high-speed transient 2 kV (power supply cable) 3
disturbance) according to 2 kV (signal cable > 30 m) 3
IEC 61000-4-4. 1 kV (signal cable < 30 m)
High-energy single pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
External protective circuit required (see function manual
Designing interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566))
• asymmetric coupling 2 kV (power supply cable) 3
DC with protective elements
2 kV (signal cable/data cable only > 30 m),
possibly with protective elements
• symmetric coupling 1 kV (power supply cables) DC with protective
elements
1 kV (signal cable/data cable only > 30 m),
possibly with protective elements
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 87
Technical data
Sinusoidal disturbance
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the CPU 1515SP PC with
regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables.
● RF radiation
Table 10- 3 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF radiation
RF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3/NAMUR 21 corresponds to degree of

Electromagnetic RF field, amplitude-modulated severity
80 to 1000 MHz; 1.0 to 2.0 GHz 2.0 GHz to 2.7 GHz 3
10 V/m 3 V/m
80% AM (1 kHz)
● RF coupling
Table 10- 4 Sinusoidal disturbance variables with RF coupling
RF coupling according to IEC 61000-4-6 corresponds to degree of

severity
(10 kHz) 150 kHz to 80 MHz 3
10 Vrms unmodulated
80% AM (1 kHz)
150 Ω source impedance
Emission of radio interference

Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016: Limit class A, group
1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).
Table 10- 5 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to EN 55016
Frequency Emitted interference

30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m)Q
230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m)Q
Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016: Limit value class A,
Group 1.
Table 10- 6 Interference emission via the AC power supply according to EN 55016
Frequency Emitted interference

0.15 to 0.5 MHz <79 dB (µV) Q
<66 dB (µV) M
0.5 to 30 MHz <73 dB (µV) Q
<60 dB (µV) M
CPU 1515SP PC
88 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
Introduction
With respect to shipping and storage conditions, the CPU 1515SP PC exceeds the
requirements according to IEC 61131-2. The following statements apply to modules that are
transported and/or stored in the original packaging.
Table 10- 7 Shipping and storage conditions for modules
Type of condition Permissible range

Free fall (in shipping package) ≤1 m
Temperature From -40 °C to +70 °C
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 660 hPa (corresponds to an altitude of
-1000 m to 3500 m)
Relative humidity 5% to 95%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibrations according to 5 - 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm
IEC 60068-2-6 8.4 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-27 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions
Note
Restrictions
In contrast to the ambient conditions for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the following
restrictions apply to the CPU 1515SP PC:
• Mechanical ambient conditions:
– 2 g constant acceleration when BusAdapter BA 2×FC is used
• Ambient temperature:
– 0 to 60 °C for horizontal installation with maximum 32 I/O modules
– 0 to 55 °C for horizontal installation with maximum 64 I/O modules
– 0 to 50 °C for vertical installation with maximum 32 I/O modules
Operating conditions
The CPU 1515SP PC is suitable for use in weather-proof, fixed locations. The operating
conditions exceed the requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
● Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
● Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 89
Technical data
Mechanical ambient conditions

The table below shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal
oscillations.
Table 10- 8 Mechanical ambient conditions
Frequency band CPU 1515SP PC

5 ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 3.5 mm amplitude
8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 1 g constant acceleration
10 ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz 0.35 mm amplitude
60 ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz • 1 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45)
• 2 g constant acceleration (with BusAdapter BA 2×FC)
Test of mechanical ambient conditions

The table below provides important information with respect to the type and scope of the test
of ambient mechanical conditions.
Table 10- 9 Test of mechanical ambient conditions
Condition tested Test Standard Comment

Vibration Vibration test accord- Type of oscillation: Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 oc-
ing to IEC 60068-2-6 tave/minute.
(sine) BA 2×RJ45
• 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm constant amplitude
• 8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, 1 g constant acceleration
BA 2×FC
• 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 60 Hz, 0.35 mm constant amplitude
• 60 Hz ≤ f ≤ 1000 Hz, 2 g constant acceleration
Duration of vibration: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of 3 vertically
aligned axes
Shock Shock, tested accord- Type of shock: Half-sine
ing to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock intensity: 150 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks in each direction (+/-) at each of 3 vertically
aligned axes
CPU 1515SP PC
90 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
Climatic ambient conditions

You may use the CPU 1515SP PC under the following climatic ambient conditions:
Table 10- 10 Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Comments

Temperature: • from 0 to 60 °C For configuration with 32 I/O modules and 3 x
Horizontal mounting position: 100 mA USB load
• from 0 to 55 °C For configuration with 64 I/O modules and 2 x
500 mA + 1 x 100 mA USB load
Vertical installation: • 0 to 50 °C For configuration with 32 I/O modules and 3 x
100 mA USB load
Permitted temperature change 10 K/h -
Relative humidity from 10 to 95% Without condensation, corresponds to rela-
tive humidity (RH) class 2 according to IEC
61131 part 2
Barometric pressure 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 2000 m
Concentration of pollutants SO2: < 0.5 ppm; -
RH < 60%, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
RH < 60 %, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 91
Technical data
10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage
10.5 Information on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and

rated voltage
Insulation
The insulation is designed according to the requirements of EN 61131-2: 2007.
Note
For modules with 24 V DC supply voltage, the electrical isolation is designed for max. 60 V
AC/75 V DC and basic insulation is designed according to EN 61131-2: 2007.
Pollution degree/overvoltage category according to IEC 61131

● Pollution degree 2
● Overvoltage category: II
Protection class according to IEC 61131-2:2007

The CPU 1515SP PC meets protection class I and includes parts of protection classes II and
III.
The grounding of the mounting rail must meet the requirements for functional earth FE.
The installation location (e.g. enclosure, control cabinet) must have a protective conductor
connection that meets the standard to maintain protection class I.
Degree of protection IP20

Degree of protection IP20 according to IEC 60529, i.e.:
● Protection against contact with standard probe
● Protection against foreign objects with diameters in excess of 12.5 mm
● No protection against water
CPU 1515SP PC
92 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
Rated voltage for operation

The CPU 1515SP PC works with the rated voltage and corresponding tolerances listed in the
following table.
Table 10- 11 Rated voltage for operation
Rated voltage Tolerance range

24 V 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 1
18.5 to 30.2 V DC 2
1 Static value: Creation as functional extra-low voltage with safe electrical isolation in accordance
with IEC 60364-4-41
2 Dynamic value: including ripple, e.g. with three-phase bridge rectification

See product information Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 93
Technical data
10.7.1 CPU 1515SP PC (6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0)
CPU 1515SP PC (spare part)
6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
General information
Engineering with
as of version
PC configuration
Computer platform ET 200SP Open Controller
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 2 GB RAM
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller No
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Rack mounting possible No
Front installation possible No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and USB use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
CPU 1515SP PC
94 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without
USB use
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM work memory
CFast card No
Work memory
Integrated 2 GB
Integrated power supply Yes
Via CM 1
Racks
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; X1 via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x
500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; via CM DP module
Graphic interface 1 X DVI-I
1st interface
Interface hardware
• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Transmission rate, max. 100 Mbps
• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 95
Technical data
6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0
2nd interface
Interface hardware
• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Industrial Ethernet status LED No
3rd interface
Interface hardware
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Ambient conditions
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60 °C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55 °C with max. 64
ET 200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card Optional for additional mass storage
Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg
CPU 1515SP PC
96 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
10.7.2 CPU 1515SP PC (6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0)
CPU 1515SP PC (spare part)
6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
Product type designation CPU 1515SP PC
General information
Engineering with
as of version
PC configuration
Computer platform ET 200SP Open Controller
Processor Dual-Core 1 GHz, AMD G Series APU T40E
Main memory 4 GB RAM
Installed SW
Visualization No
Controller No
Operator controls
Mode selector 1
Rack mounting possible No
Front installation possible No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 1.5 A; full processor load, incl. ET 200SP mod-
ules and USB use
Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ. 0.6 A
Power
Power consumption, max. 36 W; incl. ET 200SP modules and USB use
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 15 W; without ET 200SP modules and without
USB use
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 97
Technical data
6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
Memory
Type of memory DDR3-SDRAM work memory
CFast card No
Work memory
Integrated 4 GB
Integrated power supply Yes
Via CM 1
Racks
Time-of-day
Clock
Type Hardware clock
Interfaces
Number of Industrial Ethernet interfaces 2
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; X1 via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
Number of USB interfaces 3; 3x USB 2.0 front, 500 mA each – of which 2 x
500 mA and 1 x 100 mA simultaneously
Number of RS 485 interfaces 1; via CM DP module
Graphic interface 1 X DVI-I
1st interface
Interface hardware
• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; via BusAdapter BA 2x RJ45
• Industrial Ethernet status LED Yes
2nd interface
Interface hardware
• RJ 45 (Ethernet) Yes; integrated
• Industrial Ethernet status LED No
CPU 1515SP PC
98 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
3rd interface
Interface hardware
Interface hardware
RJ 45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; for 1st interface X1
1000 Mbps Yes; for 2nd interface X2
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
RS 485
Ambient conditions
Min. 0 °C
Max. Up to 60°C with max. 32 ET 200SP modules and
3x 100 mA USB load; up to 55°C with max. 64 ET
200SP modules and 2x max. 500 mA and 1x
max. 100 mA USB load
Min. -40 °C
Max. 70 °C
I/O / Options
I/O
• SD card Optional for additional mass storage
Dimensions
Width 160 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 75 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 0.83 kg
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 99
Technical data
10.7.3 CPU 1515SP PC, CPU 1515SP PC + HMI

The technical specifications of the following devices modules can be found in the product
information under (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/104117388).
ET 200SP Open Controller Article number

Hardware variant Hardware variant
WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM
CPU 1515SP PC 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EK0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EL0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0
CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EM0 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0
10.7.4 S7-1500 Software Controller CPU 1505S

The CPU 1505S is a PC-based controller from the range of SIMATIC S7-1500 software
controllers.
All technical specifications for CPU 1505S with the article number 6ES7672-5AC00-0YA0
can be found under (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/6ES7672-5AC00-
0YA0).
CPU 1515SP PC
100 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Technical data
10.8 Dimension drawings
10.8.1 CPU 1515SP PC

Always observe the specified dimensions for installation in cabinets.
Dimension drawings of the CPU 1515SP PC
Figure 10-1 Dimension drawing of CPU 1515SP PC, front view
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 101
Technical data
Figure 10-2 Dimension drawing of CPU 1515SP PC, side view
CPU 1515SP PC
102 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Accessories/spare parts A
Order options and accessories for CPU 1515SP PC
Table A- 1 Order options for CPU 1515SP PC
Description Article number

Hardware variant
WES7 E 32Bit 2GB RAM 1
CPU 1515SP PC, spare part (without CFast card) 6ES7677-2AA30-0AA0
CPU 1515SP PC, 8 GB CFast card, with pre-installed S7-1500 6ES7677-2AA31-0EB0
software controller CPU 1505S
CPU 1515SP PC, 8 GB CFast card, with pre-installed S7-1500
software controller CPU 1505S and WinCC Runtime Advanced
V13 SP1
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EK0
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EL0
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA31-0EM0
Hardware variant
WES7 P 64Bit 4GB RAM 1
CPU 1515SP PC, spare part (without CFast card) 6ES7677-2AA40-0AA0
CPU 1515SP PC, 16 GB CFast card, with pre-installed 6ES7677-2AA41-0FB0
S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505S
CPU 1515SP PC, 16 GB CFast card, with pre-installed
S7-1500 software controller CPU 1505S and WinCC Runtime
Advanced V13 SP1
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 128PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FK0
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 512PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FL0
• CPU 1515SP PC + HMI 2048PT 6ES7677-2AA41-0FM0
1 Windows Embedded Standard 7
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 103
Table A- 2 Accessories for CPU 1515SP PC
Description Article number

BusAdapter, 1 unit
• BA 2×RJ45 (PROFINET BusAdapter with standard Ethernet 6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
socket)
• BA 2×FC (PROFINET BusAdapter with Fast Connect 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

Server module; 1 unit 6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
Strain relief for CPU 1515SP PC A5E32291462
SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 8 GB (SLC), pre- 6AV7672-8JD01-0AA0
installed BIOS-MANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.3
and installation CD
SIMATIC IPC Service USB flash drive 16 GB, USB3.0, pre- 6AV7672-8JD02-0AA0
installed BIOS-MANAGER V3.3, Image/Partition Creator V3.3
and installation CD
SIMATIC IPC DiagMonitor Software V4.4.1 6ES7648-6CA04-4YX0
SIMATIC PC, adapter cable, DVI-I compliant with VGA, 6ES7648-3AB00-0XA0
250 mm long
Reference identification label, sheet with 16 labels, 10 units 6ES7193-6LF30-0AW0
Mounting rails, tin-plated steel strip
• Length: 483 mm 6ES5710-8MA11
• Length: 2000 mm 6ES5710-8MA41
SIMATIC IPC CFast cards

• CFast 2 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XF10
• CFast 4 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XG10
• CFast 8 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XH10
• CFast 16 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XJ10
• CFast 32 GB Industrial Grade 6ES7648-2BF10-0XK10
Online catalog
Additional article numbers can be found on the Internet in the online catalog and online
ordering system (http://www.siemens.de/automation/mall).
CPU 1515SP PC
104 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Abbreviations B
Abbreviation Term Meaning
AC Alternating current Alternating current
ALM Automation License Manager Tool for managing license keys in STEP 7
BIOS Basic Input Output System Basic Input Output System. A set of important software rou-
tines used after the startup of the CPU to load the operating
system and to provide the routines for data exchange between
hardware components.
CE Communauté Européenne CE label
CFast CompactFlash ATA Serial Transfer Memory card
CoA Certificate of Authenticity Certificate of Authenticity, label with Microsoft Windows
"Product Key"
CoL Certificate of License Certificate of License for the SIMATIC software loaded
DC Direct Current DC current
DVD Digital Versatile Disc Digital storage medium with high memory capacity.
DVI-I Digital Visual Interface Interface for transfer of image and video data for DVI-I moni-
tors.
ESD Components sensitive to electro-
static charge
EN European standard
EWF Enhanced Write Filter Enhanced write filter
FBWF File Based Write Filter File based write filter
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
GRUB / GRUB4DOS GRand Unified Bootloader Boot Manager
HMI Human Machine Interface User interface
IEC International Electronical Commis-
sion
IM Interface module The interface module connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system with the IO controller and exchanges data with the I/O
modules via the backplane bus.
LAN Local Area Network Computer network that is limited to a local area.
LED Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Protocol that enables the exchange of information between
adjacent devices.
MMC Multi Media Card Memory card
NTFS New Technology File System File system that offers targeted access protection at the file
level.
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random-Access Non-volatile data memory that is RAM-based, the data content
Memory of which is retained without external power supply.
PC Personal Computer
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 105
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Term Meaning

PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV, previously called "extra low voltage with safe isolation",
is a protective measure against electrical shock. See EN
50178.
PN PROFINET
PG Programming device Compact programming device which meets the special re-
quirements of industry. The PG is fully equipped for program-
ming SIMATIC PLCs.
PS Power supply Power supply
PT Power Tags Process tags; tags enable data exchange between the com-
ponents of an automation process, for example, between the
HMI device and the controller.
RAM Random Access Memory Main or work memory of a computer with direct access, allow-
ing read access to data and editing.
RT Runtime
SD Secure Digital card Memory card
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage Safety extra-low voltage; protective measure in which circuits
with a rated voltage of up to 50 V AC or 120 V DC are operat-
ed ungrounded and feeds from circuits with a higher voltage
are separated from these by, for example, a safety transform-
er.
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
USB Universal Serial Bus Serial bus system for connecting a computer to external de-
vices.
CPU 1515SP PC
106 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Troubleshooting C
Problem Possible cause Remedy
CPU 1515SP PC is not working. CPU 1515SP PC is not supplied Check the power supply.
with current.
CPU 1515SP PC does not start. Feedback through USB devices. Use USB devices that comply with the
USB 2.0 specification.
Windows no longer boots. Settings in the BIOS setup are not Check the settings in the BIOS setup
correct. menu Boot.
Time and/or date of the CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC was not connect- Correct the settings in the BIOS setup
not correct. ed for more than 6 weeks. menu Main or in Windows.
USB device is not working. USB power supply is overloaded. Use an external power supply for the
USB device (see section Application
planning (Page 31).
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 107
Glossary
Cold restart
A startup procedure commencing when the CPU is switched on. Upon a cold restart, the
system typically performs some basic hardware checks and then loads the operating system
from the hard disk into the work memory.
Controller
Integrated hardware and software controlling the operation of a specific internal or I/O device
(e.g. keyboard controller).
Device configuration
The device configuration of a PC/programming device includes information on the features
and options of the PC/programming device such as memory configuration, drive types,
monitor, network address etc. The data is stored in a configuration file and is used by the
operating system to load the corresponding device drivers or assign device parameters.
Drivers
Program sections of the operating system. They convert data from the user programs to the
specific formats required by the I/O devices (e.g. hard disks, monitors, printers).
Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)

Configurable write filter making it possible to boot Windows Embedded Standard from write-
protected media (e.g. from CD-ROM), to write-protect individual partitions and to adapt file
system performance to the user's requirements (e.g. when using CFast cards).
Ethernet
Local network (bus structure) for text and data communication with a data transmission rate
of 10/100/1000 Mbps.
File-Based Write Filter (FBWF)

Configurable write filter making it possible to write-protect individual files.
Image
An image is a copy of hard-disk partitions, for example, which is stored as backup in a file so
that it can be restored if necessary.
CPU 1515SP PC
108 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
Glossary
Interface
● Connection between individual hardware elements such as PCs, programming device,
printer or screen by means of physical plug-in connections (cables).
● Connection between different programs to allow them to be used together.
LAN
Local Area Network: LAN refers to a local network consisting of a group of computers and
other devices which are distributed over a relatively restricted area and connected through
communication lines. The devices connected to a LAN are referred to as nodes. The
purpose of networks is the shared use of files, printers or other resources.
License key
The license key is the electronic license stamp of a license. Siemens AG provides a license
key for software that is protected by licensing laws.
Operating system
Generic term which describes all functions for controlling and monitoring user program
execution and distribution of system resources to the user programs as well as maintenance
of the operating mode in cooperation with the hardware.
Power options
The power options can be used to reduce the power consumption of the computer while still
keeping it ready for immediate use. Can be configured in Windows via Settings > Control
Panel > Power Options.
Restart
Restart of an already running computer which is performed without switching off the power
supply, for example using the key combination <Ctrl + Alt + Del>.
Restore DVD
You use the Restore DVD to reset your system partition or the entire hard disk to the delivery
state in the event of an error. The DVD contains all the image files required and is bootable.
ROM
Read Only Memory. ROM refers to a read-only memory where each memory location can be
addressed individually. The stored programs or data are hard-coded and are preserved even
in the event of a power failure.
CPU 1515SP PC
Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA 109
Glossary
S.M.A.R.T
Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology (SMART or S.M.A.R.T.) is an industry
standard for storage media. It provides for permanent monitoring of relevant parameters and
thus early recognition of pending defects.
SATA
Serial ATA. An interface for hard disk drives and optical drives with serial data transmission
up to 300 Mbps.
SETUP (BIOS setup)

A program used to determine information on the device configuration. The device
configuration of the CPU 1515SP PC is preset. Changes must be made whenever a memory
expansion, new modules or drives are to be activated.
CPU 1515SP PC
110 Manual, 12/2014, A5E32701806-AA
IM 155-6 PN BA interface module ___________________
Preface
(6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN BA interface module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
(6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual ___________
5
alarms
___________________
Compatibility 6
___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
03/2015
A5E34934425-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Terminal assignment...............................................................................................................13
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................15
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.2.1 Enabling configuration control ................................................................................................16
4.3 Substitute value behavior .......................................................................................................17
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules ................................................................17
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................23
5.2.1 Triggering a diagnostics interrupt ...........................................................................................23
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................24
5.2.3 Triggering a pull/plug interrupt ................................................................................................24
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................25
5.3.1 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................26
5.3.2 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO ............................................27
5.3.3 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D ....................................................................27
5.3.4 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device .......................................................28
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 29

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-
simatic/en/manual-overview/tech-doc-controllers/Pages/Default.aspx).

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0 (IM 155-6 PN BA interface module and server module)
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN BA interface module and the server module
Properties
The module has the following properties:
● Technical properties
– Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO
– Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV). The connection plug is included in the
scope of delivery of the interface module.
● Supported functions (Page 10)
● 12 I/O modules

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Maximum amount of I/O data

The maximum amount of I/O data is 32 bytes input/output data.
Accessories
The following accessories must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Server module
The server module (V1.1.1 and higher) is included in the scope of delivery of the interface
module and also available separately as an accessory. The server module has the following
properties:
● Terminates the backplane bus of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
● Features a support for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3
● Retentive storage of the device name for device replacement without topological
configuration
Note
You need to configure and assign parameters to the server module in the configuration
software.
To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter
Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+. If there are 12 I/O modules, the server module is
plugged in slot 13.
You can find more information in the Server module


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 9
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2 Functions
Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP: MIB2, LLDP-MIP
and MRP-MIB)
● Port diagnostics
● Deactivating of ports
● Minimum update time 1 ms
● Media redundancy MRP
● Device replacement without programming device
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
The interface module supports additional functions:
● Device replacement with and without topological configuration
● Configuration control (option handling)
Requirements
Configuration takes place with GSDML or STEP 7 V13/HSPxyz.
Cabling with fixed connection setting

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable
"Autonegotiation/Autocrossover".
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en)
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the system manual PROFINET System Description

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Device replacement without topological configuration

In addition to the interface module, the device name is also saved on the server module
(V1.1.1 and higher). A device name saved on the server module is the requirement for
device replacement without topological configuration.
Storing the name on the server module and the interface module produces a range of
scenarios for using the device name when the interface module is replaced.
Table 2- 1 Scenarios for using the device name
Interface module empty Interface module with device name

Server module empty No device name available. The device name from the interface
module is used and copied to the serv-
er module.
Server module with device name The device name from the server mod- The device name from the server mod-
ule is used and copied to the interface ule is used and copied to the interface
module. module if this has a different device
name.
Be aware of the following constraints:

● Resetting to factory settings deletes the device name in both the interface module and the
server module. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the server module, you
can remove the server module from the interface module before resetting to factory
settings.
● When a server module is replaced, a device name stored in the server module is applied
to the interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the server module while under voltage. If you pull/plug the server module
while under voltage, the interface module restarts.
● If you use a server module with an invalid firmware version (< V1.1.1), channel-specific
diagnostics is generated with the error number 27 (general error). To correct this error,
you need to replace the server module or update the server module firmware.
IO devices that have already been used in another configuration should be reset to their
factory settings before reuse (see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).
Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN BA
If a spare part is required, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their delivery state
via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 11
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Media redundancy (MRP)

Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. A ring topology ensures that
an alternative communication path is made available if a transmission route fails.
2.2.1 Configuration control (option handling)
Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.
Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual
● on the Internet under the following link Application collection
● in the STEP 7 online help.

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Wiring 3
3.1 Terminal assignment
24 V DC supply voltage
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the terminal assignment
for a 24 V DC supply voltage.
Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment 24 V DC supply voltage
View Signal name1 Description

Connector IM connection
1L+ 24 V DC
2L+ 24 V DC (for looping through)2
1M Ground
2M Ground (for looping through)2
1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are bridged internally.

2 Maximum 10 A permitted.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 13
Wiring
PROFINET IO
The following table shows the signal name and description of the terminal assignment.
Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO terminal assignment

3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
Reference
You can find more information on accessories and how to connect the interface module in
the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram

The following figure shows the block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN BA.
① Switch L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics M Ground
③ Backplane bus LK 1,2 LED Link TX/RX
④ Internal power supply RN LED RUN/STOP (green/yellow)
X80 24 V Infeed of supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
DC
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINT LED (yellow)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2 PWR POWER LED (red)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of IM 155-6 PN BA interface module

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 15
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for IM 155-6 PN BA interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 BA interface module.
Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN BA (GSD file)
Parameters Range of values Default Efficiency range

Configuration control Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP
4.2 Explanation of the parameters
4.2.1 Enabling configuration control

You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200SP
Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.
Reference
You can find more information on the control data record in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and
in the STEP 7 online help.

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Parameters/address space
4.3 Substitute value behavior

The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is executed by the IO
controller for each slot.
The respective output behaves according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Current-free/voltage-free
● Output substitute value
● Keep last value
The substitute value behavior is triggered in the following cases:
● STOP controller
● Controller failure (connection interrupted)
● Station stop, for example, due to:
– Missing server module
– Removing more than one I/O module at a time
– At least one I/O module installed on an incorrect BaseUnit
● Deactivating the IO device
Note
Reducing a configuration
If you reduce the configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and download the
configuration to the CPU, the modules which are no longer configured but still present
retain their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage is
switched off at the interface module.
The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior takes effect in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Configuration control: receipt of a new control data record
● Incorrectly configured module
● Module with incorrect parameter assignment
4.4 Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules
Configurations
The "Status of supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" is configured in the IM 155-6 PN BA on
the server module. The input data can then be read out on the server module. You will find
the relevant description in the Server module

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 17
alarms 5
5.1 Status and error displays
Introduction
Diagnostics by means of LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. In order to localize
errors still further, you usually evaluate the display of the module status in STEP 7 or the
diagnostics buffer of the CPU. The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has
occurred. For example, you will find the number of the relevant error OB in the plain text
information.
LED display
The following diagram shows the LED display on the interface module and the BusAdapter.
① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ LK1 (green)
⑥ LK2 (green)
Figure 5-1 LED display on the interface module

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables describe the meanings of the status and error displays.
RN/ER/MT LED on the interface module
Table 5- 1 RN/ER/MT status and error displays
LEDs Meaning Solution

RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
No or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on
Off Off Off interface module. at the interface module. *
Test of LEDs during startup: The three -
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for ap-
proximately 0.25 s.
Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the
Off Off configuration software or the user pro-
Flashes
gram.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with the
configuration software.
ET 200SP starts up. -
ET 200SP is being assigned parame-
ters.
ET 200SP is being reset to factory
settings.
Not rele- Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data
On vant vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate
vant vant the error.
Flashes
The preset configuration does not cor- Check the structure of the ET 200SP to
respond to the actual configuration of see whether a module is missing or
the ET 200SP . defective, or whether a non-configured
module is plugged.
Invalid configuration states. Refer to section Invalid configuration
states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET
IO (Page 27)
Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module
status in STEP 7 and eliminate the
error in the respective I/O module.
The "Node flash test" is running (the -
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET
Flashes Flashes Flashes
interface also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (the Run a firmware update. If the error
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET persists, contact Siemens Industry
interface do not flash). Online Support.
Replace the interface module.
* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 19
PWR LED on the interface module
Table 5- 2 PWR status display on the interface module
PWR LED Meaning Solution

No or insufficient supply voltage Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present -
On
LK1/LK2 LED on the interface module
Table 5- 3 LK1/LK2 status display on the interface module
LEDs LK1/LK2 Meaning Solution

There is no Ethernet connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO con-
Off PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device troller is interrupted.
and a communication partner (e.g. IO controller).
There is an Ethernet connection between the -
On PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device
The "Node flash test" is running (the RN/ER/MT -
LEDs also flash).
Flashes
LED display of configuration errors

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the
interfacemodule by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs:
● More than one I/O module pulled
● Missing server module
● Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Operating principle
You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After
notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error
code.
The LED error display
● is active during POWER ON as well as during operation.
● has priority before all other states displayed by the ERROR and MAINT LED.
● remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected.
Table 5- 4 Display of error type and error location
Sequence Description
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at Signaling of error type
0.5 Hz
2 MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code
4 The ERROR LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of tens digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
5 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of ones digit (decimal) of the error loca-
tion/error code
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 21
Error display
The following table shows the possible causes of error that can occur.
Table 5- 5 Error display
Error type Error location Cause of error Remedy

(MAINT) (ERROR/MAINT)
1 02 to 12* The number of pulled I/O modules is Check the configuration
displayed. The diagnostics data is gen- of the ET 200SP.
erated starting with two pulled I/O mod-
ules.
65* • Missing server module
• Interruptions at the backplane bus
• Short circuit of communication on
the backplane bus
* Slot
Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN, ER and MT LED: Off

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
Introduction
The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are
evaluated based on the I/O controller used.
Evaluating interrupts with I/O controllers

The ET 200SP distributed I/O system supports the following interrupts:
● Diagnostics interrupts
● Hardware interrupts
● Pull/plug module interrupts
● Maintenance events
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
Detailed information on the error event can be obtained in the error OB using the instruction
"RALRM" (read additional interrupt information).
System diagnostics
STEP 7 (TIA portal) offers innovative system diagnostics for the devices of the S7-1500 (IO
controller CPU S7-1500) and the ET 200SP (IO device) automation system. Independent of
the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the CPU S7-1500, the
CPU web server and the HMI device.
For more information on system diagnostics, refer to the System Diagnostics function
manual. (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926).
5.2.1 Triggering a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering a diagnostics interrupt

For an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the
module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts the user program and processes the diagnostics block OB 82. The
interrupt triggering event is logged in the start information of OB 82.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 23
5.2 Interrupts
5.2.2 Triggering a hardware interrupt
Triggering a hardware interrupt

If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the hardware interrupt block OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the
start information of the hardware interrupt block.
Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically.
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.
5.2.3 Triggering a pull/plug interrupt
Triggering a pull/plug interrupt

If there is a pull/plug interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the
hardware interrupt block OB 83. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start
information of OB 83.

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
5.3 Alarms
5.3 Alarms
Actions after a diagnostics alarm

There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Actions initiated by
diagnostics alarms:
● The ERROR LED of the interface module flashes.
● Diagnostic data is reported as diagnostic interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
can be read via data records.
● Incoming diagnostics alarms are saved to the diagnostics buffer of the I/O controller.
● OB 82 is called.
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help.
Reading out the diagnostics data
Table 5- 6 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7
Automation system with Application See...

IO controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 in online and diagnos-
• As of STEP 7 V13, function manual
tics view
PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) (http://support.automation.siemens.
Read data records from the IO com/WW/view/de/49948856/0/en)
device
• As of STEP 7 V5.5 system manual
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54)
PROFINET System Description
Receive interrupts from the IO
device (http://support.automation.siemens.
Additional information on the data records for PROFINET IO

The structure of the diagnostic data records and programming examples are available in the
programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Application example
Causes of error and corrective measures

The causes of error and corrective measures for the diagnostics alarms are described in the
manuals for I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the chapter,
"Interrupts/diagnostics alarms".

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 25
5.3 Alarms
See also
Channel diagnostics (Page 26)
5.3.1 Channel diagnostics
Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read using the instruction "RDREC".
Structure of the diagnostics data records

The data records supported by the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are based on the
PROFINET IO standard - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2 or higher.
You can download the standard PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com)
from the homepage of the PROFIBUS User Organization free of charge.

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
5.3 Alarms
5.3.2 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
Invalid configuration states

The following invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to the
failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules.
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective BaseUnit). ET 200SP backplane bus interruptions do
not trigger an interrupt.
● At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the
parameters.
Note
If you remove more than one I/O module or the server module, this results in a station stop.
All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but
the interface module is still exchanging data.
Revoking the station stop (by correcting the invalid configuration state) leads to a brief failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and automatic restart.
See also
Status and error displays (Page 18)
5.3.3 Failure of supply voltage L+ at BaseUnit BU...D
Failure of the supply voltage L+

The I/O modules react as follows to failure of the supply voltage L+ on the BaseUnit BU...D:
● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is
generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is
generated.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 27
5.3 Alarms
5.3.4 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device
STOP of the SIMATIC IO controller

Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not
initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must
read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all
diagnostics for the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.
Recovery of the SIMATIC IO device

If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH
data record with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 86. This record contains all diagnostics for
the slots assigned to an IO controller in an IO device.

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Compatibility 6
Status of the supply voltage
Load voltage diagnostics are only valid if the station started up with a valid and complete
configuration.
● For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the
supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply
voltage.
● If a potential group is exclusively made up of modules without parameter assignment from
the table below, no group diagnostics "No supply voltage L+" is signaled for this potential
group.
Module Order number

DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
DI 8x24VDC HF 6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
DQ 4x24VC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 29
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN BA
Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN BA
6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN BA with 2xRJ45 ports and server
module
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 or higher
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3 / -
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Valid range, low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range, high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Polarity reversal protection Yes
Input current
Current consumption, max. 300 mA
I²t 0.09 A²s
Power
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module
Address space per module, max. 32 byte; per input/output
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 32 byte; per input/output

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 12
Interfaces
1st interface
Interface hardware
• RJ45 (Ethernet) Yes; 2 integrated RJ45 ports
• BusAdapter (PROFINET) No
Protocols
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
Transmission method PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASE-
TX)
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO Yes
PROFINET IO device
Services
• IRT No
• PROFIenergy No
• Prioritized startup No
• Shared Device No

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 31
6ES7155-6AR00-0AN0
Status display Yes
Interrupts
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
RUN LED Yes; green LED
ERROR LED Yes; red LED
MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green LED
Between backplane bus and electronics No
Between PROFINET and all other circuits Yes
Between supply and all other circuits No
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Connection technology
ET-Connection
Via BU/BA-Send No
Dimensions
Width 35 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 125 g; IM 155-6 PN BA with 2xRJ45 ports and
server module

32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN BA interface module (front and side view)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34934425-AA 33
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module ___________________
Preface
ET 200SP Documentation
(6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0) ___________________
Guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module
___________________
(6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0)
___________________
Interrupts, diagnostics, error,
and system messages 5
Manual
___________________
Compatibility 6
___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
12/2015
A5E03576904-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03576904-AD Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2015.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide............................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................11
2.2.1 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................18
2.2.2 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................18
2.2.3 Use of technology modules ....................................................................................................18
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................20
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram .......................................................................................................22
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................23
4.2 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................23
4.2.1 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................23
5 Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages ............................................................................. 26
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................31
5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt .......................................................................................31
5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt ..............................................................................................32
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................33
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................33
5.3.2 Maintenance events ................................................................................................................34
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 41

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 5
ET 200SP Documentation Guide 1
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
ET 200SP Documentation Guide

your own manual.


systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 (IM 155-6 PN ST interface module and server module)
6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0 (IM 155-6 PN ST interface module with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45 and
server module)
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module and the server module
Properties
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO
of delivery of the interface module.
● PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapter for RJ45 bus connector
(BA 2×RJ45) or for direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2×FC)
● Use of fail-safe modules
● As of firmware version V 3.0, you can plug a light-colored or a dark-colored BaseUnit into
slot 1.
The module supports the following functions (Page 11)

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Product overview
2.1 Properties
● 32 I/O modules
● 512 bytes I/O data
● 1 m backplane bus (without interface module)
Accessories
The following accessories can be ordered separately:
● BA 2xRJ45 BusAdapter
● BA 2xFC BusAdapter
● 24 V DC connector
● Labeling strips
Note
The interface module is also available as a bundle with the BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 (and the
server module). The article number is 6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0.
A detailed list of the available accessories can be found in the system manual ET 200SP
Server module
The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available
separately as an accessory.
The server module has the following properties:
● Features a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
Note
software.
To do this, place the server module in the last configuration slot and enable the parameter
Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server
module is inserted in slot 33.


Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration (as of V3.0)
Note
First BaseUnit of an ET 200SP in the configuration
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark-colored one if an AC I/O module or
AI Energy Meter ST is plugged. Please note the information on limiting the overvoltage and
power rating in the AC I/O module manuals.
A light-colored BaseUnit must be plugged into the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module in
order to route the 24 V DC supply voltage via a fuse.
Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration.
As of firmware V3.x, the interface modules support plugging dark-colored BaseUnits in slot
1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2
can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following
modules:
● AI EnergyMeter
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
Requirement for configuration of these modules in slot 1:
● Configuration via GSD or GSDML
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 with
– HSP0241 V2.0 for IM155-6 PN ST
– HSP0242 V2.0 for IM155-6 DP HF
– HSP0255 V3.0 for IM155-6 PN HF
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V13 SP1

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2 Functions
Introduction
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP-MIB
and MRP-MIB
● Disabling ports
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Minimum update time 1 ms
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Shared device
● Support of submodules on suitable I/O modules
● Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
● Device replacement without PG and without topological configuration
● Station extension via ET-Connection
● The BusAdapter provides the connection system for PROFINET IO. The following
versions are available for the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module:
– For standard RJ45 connector: BA 2×RJ45
– For direct connection of the bus cable: BA 2×FC
● PROFIenergy
● Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 11
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Requirements
The table below shows the software requirements for a configuration with the
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module:
Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of other module functions
Function Product version Firmware version Configuration software

of the module of the module as Configuration STEP 7 as of STEP 7
as of of with GSD file V5.5 SP3 with (TIA Portal), as
(http://support.a HSP241 of V11 SP2
utoma-
tion.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/
19698639/1300
00)/software
from a third-
party manufac-
turer 1
Real-time communication 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Isochronous real-time com- 1 V1.0.0 X X X
munication
Prioritized startup 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Device replacement without 1 V1.0.0 X X X
programming device
Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Shared device 1 V1.0.0 X X X (as of V13
SP1)
PROFIenergy 1 V1.0.0 --- X X
Use of fail-safe modules 1 V1.0.1 X X X (as of V13
SP1)
Module-internal Shared In- 1 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13
put/Shared Output (MSI/MSO) SP1)
Station extension via ET- 5 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13
Connection SP1)
User data 512 bytes 1 V3.1.0 X X X (as of V13
SP1)
Distribution of module chan- 5 V3.3.0 X X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
nels to multiple submodules SP4, HSP0241 SP1, Update 6)
V3)
1 Systems of third-party manufacturers: Depending on the range of functions of the third-party system

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Product overview
2.2 Functions

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you should also disable
You can find more information on this topic in the STEP 7 online help and:
● As of STEP 7 V12, in the PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
Isochronous real-time communication

Synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET
devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for IRT data. The reserved
bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can also be transferred without being affected by
another high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time
communication) at reserved, chronologically synchronized intervals.
A topological configuration is required for IRT.
Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend also operating the IO controller as a sync master when configuring the IRT
communication.
Otherwise, IO devices with IRT and RT configuration could fail as a result of sync master
failure.
You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in
sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and:

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 13
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup describes the PROFINET IO functionality for accelerating the startup of IO
devices in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication.
The function reduces the time that the appropriately configured IO devices require in order to
return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases:
● After the supply voltage has returned
● After a station has returned
● After IO devices have been activated
Note
Dependency of the startup time
The interface module permits startup times from 0.9 s.
The startup time depends on the number and type of modules.

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Device replacement

The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A
device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without
topological configuration.
Storing the name on the BusAdapter and the interface module produces a range of
Interface module empty Interface module with device

name
BusAdapter empty No device name available The device name from the inter-
face module is used and copied
to the BusAdapter.
BusAdapter with device name The device name from the The device name from the
BusAdapter is used and copied BusAdapter is used and copied
to the interface module. to the interface module if this
has a different device name.

BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can
remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings.
● When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the
interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. If you pull/plug the BusAdapter
Device replacement with topological configuration

IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner:
● The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device.
The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the
programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring
relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must
support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology
must match the actual topology.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN ST
In a replacement scenario, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their as-delivered
state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293)).

Shared device
IO device which makes its data available to multiple IO controllers.
The interface module supports shared device at submodule level.
If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note
the following:
● Make sure the configurations are consistent. In particular, modules or submodules may
only be assigned to one controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error; the module
or submodule will only be available in the first controller.
● If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned
above, you must commission the ET 200SP once again. This means that you have to
reload the projects of all involved IO controllers to the specific CPU after reconfiguration
and, if necessary, switch the interface module POWER OFF/POWER ON.
● As of STEP 7 V5.5, in the PROFINET System Description
Note
In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same
send clock. If controllers do not have the same send clock, the differing send clock can result
in communication relationships that are not set up.
If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same
send clock for engineering in separate projects.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Submodules
The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4
submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and
parameterized.
It is possible to assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers.
The functions:
● Firmware update
● Write I&M data
● Calibration
● PROFIenergy
can only be executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration.
Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data
available to up to two IO controllers (for ET 200SP PN ST). Each controller has read access
to the same channels.
The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to make its output data
available to up to two IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. A second IO
controller can have read access to the same channels.
Value status
The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module supports I/O modules with value status.
Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 17
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2.1 PROFIenergy
Properties
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy
commands during production-free periods.
Reference
You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the:
● Product manual I/O modules
● PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
● System manual PROFINET system description
● PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product
information.
● Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy;
Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802.
2.2.2 Use of fail-safe modules
Properties
The IM 155-6 PN ST interface module as of firmware V1.0.1 supports the use of fail-safe
modules.
Reference
You can find more information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
2.2.3 Use of technology modules
Technology modules
As of firmware version V3.1, the interface module IM 155-6 PN ST supports the "Position
input for Motion Control" mode of the technology modules TM Count 1x24V (6ES7138-
6AA00-0BA0) and TM PosInput 1 (6ES7138-6BA00-0BA0).

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Properties
or changes. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
Reference
● on the Internet under the following link: Application collection

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 19
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a
24 V DC supply voltage.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment 24 V DC supply voltage

1L+ 24 V DC
1M Ground

PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the
BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45.
Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

The following table shows the signal name and description of the pin assignment of the
BusAdapter BA 2×FC.
Table 3- 3 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

3 RD Receive data +
Reference
the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 21
Wiring

The following figure shows a block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN ST.

④ Internal power supply RN LED RUN/STOP (green/yellow)
X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
X5 BusAdapter MT MAINT LED (yellow)
P2 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 2
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of IM 155-6 PN ST interface module

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for IM 155-6 PN ST interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module.
Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN ST (GSD file)
Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range

Configuration control Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP
4.2 Explanation of parameters
4.2.1 Configuration control

Note
Reference
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual and in the
STEP 7 online help.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 23

The substitute value behavior in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is executed by the IO
controller for each slot.
● Keep last value
● STOP controller
● Firmware update
– Removing more than one I/O module at a time.
Note

● Firmware update
● Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet.

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Introduction
The "Status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" is configured on the server module
as of IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1.x and GSD file 04/2013. The input data can then be read out on
the server module. You will find the relevant description in the Server module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) device manual.
Configurations
You can select two configurations for the IM 155-6 PN ST in the configuration software:
● Configuration without input data
● Configuration with input data
Input data
You can read out the status of the supply voltage L+ for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in
the input data (byte 0 to 3).
Figure 4-1 Status of the supply voltage L+
Note
An inserted or missing server module always signals bit = 0 for the slot.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 25
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages 5
LED display
The following diagram shows the LED display on the interface module and the BusAdapter.
① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ LK1 (green)
⑥ LK2 (green)
Figure 5-1 LED display on the interface module and BusAdapter

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Interrupts, diagnostics, error, and system messages
Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the status and error messages is described in the following tables.
RN/ER/MT LED on the interface module
Table 5- 1 RN/ER/MT status and error displays
LEDs Meaning Remedy

RN ER MT
Missing or insufficient supply voltage Check the supply voltage or turn in on
Off Off Off on interface module. at the interface module. *
proximately 0.25 s.
Flashes Off Off configuration software or the user pro-
gram.
ET 200SP is configured.
ET 200SP is reset to factory settings.
Not rele- Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data
On vant vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics data and
vant Flashes vant remedy the error.
The configured structure does not cor- Check the structure of the ET 200SP to
respond to the actual structure of the see whether a module is missing or
ET 200SP . defective, or whether a non-configured
module is plugged.
Invalid configuration states. See section Invalid configuration states
of the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO
(Page 39)
Parameter error in the I/O module. Evaluate the display of the module
status in STEP 7 and eliminate the
error in the respective I/O module.
Not rele- Not rele- Maintenance See section Maintenance events
vant vant On (Page 34)
The "Node flash test" is run (the LEDs -
Flashes Flashes Flashes LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET inter-
face also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (the Run a firmware update. If the error
LEDs LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET persists, contact Siemens Industry
interface do not flash). Online Support.
* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short circuit.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 27
Table 5- 2 PWR status display on the interface module
PWR LED Meaning Remedy

Supply voltage not present or too small Check the supply voltage.
Off
On
LK1/LK2 LED on the BusAdapter
Table 5- 3 LK1/LK2status display on the BusAdapter
LEDs LK1/LK2 Meaning Remedy

There is no Ethernet connection between the Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO con-
Off PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device troller is interrupted.
There is an Ethernet connection between the -
On PROFINET IO interface of your PROFINET device
The "Node flash test" is run (the RN/ER/MT LEDs -
also flash).
Flashes

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the
interfacemodule by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are indicated by the LEDs:
● More than one I/O module pulled
● Interruptions or short circuit on the backplane bus

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Principle of operation
You determine the information for cause of the error with the LED error display. After
notification by the flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error
code.
● is active during POWER ON as well as during operation.
● has priority before all other states displayed by the ERROR and MAINT LED.
● remains turned on until the cause of the error has been corrected.
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at Signaling of error type
0.5 Hz
2 MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of the error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Signaling of error location/error code
tion/error code
tion/error code
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been corrected.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 29
Error display
Error type Error location Cause of error Remedy

1 02 to 32* The number of pulled I/O modules is Check the configuration
displayed. The diagnostics data is gen- of the ET 200SP.
erated starting with two pulled I/O mod-
ules.
65* • Missing server module
• Interruptions at the backplane bus
the backplane bus
* Slot
Note
A short circuit in the backplane bus supply or the bus connection supply is indicated by the
following LEDs:
• PWR LED: On
• RN-, ER and MT LED: Off

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
Introduction
The I/O device generates interrupts as a reaction to specific error events. Interrupts are
evaluated based on the I/O controller used.

● Diagnostics interrupts
● Swapping interrupts
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the IO
controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information.
System diagnostics
In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the updated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the
S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device).
Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the
CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device.
You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics
5.2.1 Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts the user program and processes the diagnostics block OB 82. The
interrupt triggering event is logged in the start information of OB 82.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 31
5.2 Interrupts

If there is a process interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the
process interrupt block OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start
information of the hardware interrupt block.
Note
Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically.
5.2.3 Triggering a swapping interrupt
Triggering a swapping interrupt

If there is a swapping interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the process interrupt block OB 83. The result that triggered the interrupt is added to the start
information of OB 83.

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
5.3 Alarms
5.3 Alarms
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms

There can be more than one diagnostic alarm at a given time. Each diagnostics alarm
initiates the following actions:
● Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
● OB 82 is called. If OB 82 is not available, the I/O controller goes into STOP mode.
You can find more information in the STEP 7 online help.
Reading the diagnostics
Automation system with IO Application See...

controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 STEP 7 online help
using Online and Diagnostics view
• as of STEP 7 V12 function
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) manual PROFINET with
Read data records from the IO STEP 7 V13
device (http://support.automation.siem
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) ens.com/WW/view/en/4994885
Receive interrupts from the IO 6)
device
• as of STEP 7 V5.5 system
manual PROFINET System
Description
(http://support.automation.siem
ens.com/WW/view/en/1929212
7)

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 33
5.3 Alarms
Causes of error and troubleshooting

The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostics alarms are described in the Product
Manuals for I/O modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the section,
"Interrupts/diagnostics alarms".
See also
5.3.2 Maintenance events
Triggering of a maintenance event

The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and
maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158-6-10 standard. The goal
is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible.
For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a network component
must be checked or replaced.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic block OB 82. The
event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the OB 82.
The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in
the case of the following events:
Table 5- 7 Triggering of a maintenance event
Maintenance alarm Event Meaning

Maintenance demand- Synchronization • No synchronization frame received
ed (maintenance de- loss
manded) No synchronization frame was received by the sync
LED MAINT is lit. master within the timeout period after parameter as-
signment or during operation.
• Successive synchronization frames are located out-
side permitted limits (jitter)
System events in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 with the following system events:
● Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon in the
device view or in the hardware configuration.

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
5.3 Alarms
Function

standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2.
You can download the standard for free atPROFIBUS user organization
(http://www.profibus.com) from the PROFIBUS user organization home page.
Coding of the extended channel diagnostics (as of V3.3.0)

With the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are
reported:
ChannelErrorType ExtendedChannelError- Associated value Diagnostics

(CET) Type (ECET) AddValue
0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group"
faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot
(AddValue)
0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module
0x0602 0x0694 Number of pulled Diagnostics when more than one I/O module has
modules been pulled
0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too large
0x0602 0x0699 slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration
0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged BusAdapter
0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for
the potential groups
Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit
of the respective load module is located is coded
in the "ChannelNumber" element.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 35
5.3 Alarms
Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records

The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The
following BlockVersion applies to the IM 155-6 PN ST interface modules:
Table 5- 8 Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module BlockVersion

6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0 W#16#0101
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the User Structure Identifier (USI)

The following manufacturer-specific diagnostics are signaled in the USI with the
IM 155-6 PN ST interface module:
Table 5- 9 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the USI
USI no. W#16#... Diagnostics

0003 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups *
0004 Diagnostics with missing server module
0005 Diagnostics when more than one I/O module has been pulled
0006 Diagnostics with incorrect BaseUnit
0007 Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration
* As of IM 155-6 PN ST V1.1.x and GSD file 04/2013, this diagnostics is only signaled if the "Group
diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+" parameter has been activated.
USI structure = W#16#0003
Table 5- 10 USI structure = W#16#0003
Data block name Content Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0003 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with failure of supply 2
voltage L+ as of slot x
Followed by the slot as of which the supply voltage L+ has failed.
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0020 Bit 0 to 7 1
Followed by 2 reserved bytes:
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

36 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
5.3 Alarms

USI W#16#0004 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with missing server 2
module
Result: Station stop
• The I/O modules fail → substitute value behavior
• The interface module continues to exchange data with
the IO controller.
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI W#16#0005 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if more than one I/O 2
module has been pulled. The number of pulled I/O mod-
ules is displayed.
the IO controller.
The number of pulled I/O modules follows
Quantity W#16#0002 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0020 Bit 0 to 7 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 37
5.3 Alarms

USI W#16#0006 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if an I/O module is in- 2
stalled on an incorrect BaseUnit.
the IO controller.
Followed by the slot for the I/O module:
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0020 Bit 0 to 7 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI W#16#0007 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if operation is not possi- 2
ble with existing bus configuration
the IO controller
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
If slot 0 is specified, check the width of the station configuration (maximum 1 m).
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
5.3 Alarms

failure of the IO device or prevent the exchange of user data with the I/O modules.
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration
● At least one I/O module is installed in a different BaseUnit than the one configured in the
parameters.
● Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter
Note
If you drag more than one I/O module or the server module the node will stop. All I/O
modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the
interface module is still exchanging data.
See also

● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull alarm is generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, an insert alarm is
generated.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 39
5.3 Alarms

Diagnostics frames received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not
initiate a call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. You must
read the data record E00CH with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 100. This record contains all
Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices

If you want to read the diagnostics of a station after its return, you have to read the E00CH
data record with the "RDREC" instruction in OB 86. This record contains all diagnostics for

40 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Compatibility 6
GSD file
The following table describes the use of the different GSD files with the interface modules
and the changes.
Config- IM 155-6 ST Changes compared to the previous configuration

ured/plugged IM V1.0.x V1.1.x V3.1.x V3.3.x
V1.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes
V1.1 --- Yes Yes Yes • The "Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+"
parameter can be set on the server module
• "Status of supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules" can
be configured on the server module
V3.1 --- --- Yes Yes • User data 512 bytes
• Station extension via ET-Connection
V3.3 --- --- --- Yes • Support of submodules

configuration.
● For modules in the following table without a parameter assignment, the status of the
supply voltage is always signaled as "1" regardless of the actual status of the supply
voltage.
the table below, no group diagnostics "Missing supply voltage L+" is signaled for this
potential group.
Modules Article number

DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0,5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 41
Compatibility
Reaction times for fail-safe modules

The following maximum reaction time of the interface module must be taken into account
when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules:
maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 μs (but at least 1.4 ms)

42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN ST
6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0
General information
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN ST with server module
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
as of version
Via data record Yes
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 256 bytes; per input/output
Address space per station, max. 512 bytes; depending on configuration
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 43
6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
1st interface
Interface hardware
• BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x FC
Protocols
• Media redundancy Yes; PROFINET MRP
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services
(100BASE-TX)
TX)
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO device
Services
• IRT Yes; with send cycles between 250 µs and 4 ms

in increments of 125 µs
• MRP Yes
• MRPD No
• PROFINET system redundancy No
• PROFIenergy Yes
• Prioritized startup Yes

max.
TCP/IP Yes
SNMP Yes
LLDP Yes

44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
6ES7155-6AU00-0BN0
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to No
terminal)
Status display Yes
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics functions Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green LED
Connection display LINK TX/RX Yes; 2x green LED
Between supply and all other circuits Yes
Permissible potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC/60 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC between supply voltage and electron-
ics; 1500 V AC between Ethernet and electronics
Network loading class 3
Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Horizontal mounting position, min. 0 °C
Horizontal mounting position, max. 60 °C
Vertical mounting position, min. 0 °C
Vertical mounting position, max. 50 °C
ET-Connection
Via BU/BA-Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 147 g; without BusAdapter

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 45
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
RJ45 Yes; 2 x
Cable length
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC
Table 7- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC
6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Cable length
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module installed on a mounting rail.
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN ST interface module (front and side view)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576904-AD 47
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module ___________________
Preface
ET 200SP Documentation
(6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0) ___________________
Guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module
___________________
(6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0)
Manual ___________
5
alarms
___________________
Compatibility 6
___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
12/2015
A5E03915895-AG
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03915895-AG Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2015.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Please also observe notes labeled as follows:
Note
handling of the product, or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module (6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide............................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................13
2.2.1 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................24
2.2.3 Use of fail-safe modules .........................................................................................................25
2.2.4 Multi Hot Swap ........................................................................................................................25
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 26
3.1 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................26
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................31
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................32
4.2.1 Enable configuration control ...................................................................................................32
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................39
5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt .......................................................................40
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................41
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms..................................................................................................................41
5.3.2 Maintenance events ................................................................................................................42
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 48
6.1 Compatibility of modules .........................................................................................................48

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 5
ET 200SP Documentation Guide 1
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the
SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Web server,
designing interference-free controllers.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 6
ET 200SP Documentation Guide

The Manual Collection contains the complete documentation on the SIMATIC
ET 200SP distributed I/O system gathered together in one file.
your own manual.
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the
system - separated from the focus in individual products.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the 155-6 PN HF interface module with accessories included in delivery

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 8
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO.
of delivery of the interface module.
● PROFINET IO connection via selectable BusAdapters
– For RJ45 bus connection plug (BA 2×RJ45)
– For direct connection of the bus cable (BA 2×FC)
– For fiber-optic cables POF/PCF (BA 2xSCRJ)
– For glass fiber-optic cable (BA 2xLC)
– As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug
(BA SCRJ/RJ45)
– As media converter for POF/PCF fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus
cable (BA SCRJ/FC)
– As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ standard RJ45 plug (BA LC/RJ45)
– As media converter for glass fiber-optic cable ⇔ direct connection of the bus cable
(BA LC/FC)
● As of firmware version V 3.0, you can plug a light-colored or a dark-colored BaseUnit into
slot 1.
The module supports the following functions (see (Page 13))
● 64 ET 200SP I/O modules
● 1 m backplane bus (without interface module)
Note
Incompatible I/O modules
A list of I/O modules that do not allow a configuration with more than 32 I/O modules is
available in section Compatibility of modules (Page 48).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Maximum amount of I/O data

The maximum amount of I/O data without user data qualifier (net data) depends on the
number and type of I/O modules used. From the maximum I/O data
● 1440 bytes or
● 1000 bytes with system redundancy S2
the bytes for the user data qualifier are deducted to determine the net data length. Note that
modules/submodules that have no user data also have user data qualifiers.
The net data length is made up of:
● Maximum amount of I/O data including user data qualifiers (1440 byte/1000 bytes)
minus
● Number of I/O submodules with input or output data (in bytes)
minus
● 2 x number of I/O submodules with input and output data (in bytes)
minus
● 5 bytes without ET-Connection or 6 bytes with ET-Connection
Regardless of the type and number of I/O modules or module distribution to submodules, a
minimum of the following I/O lengths can be used in total:
● 933 bytes (without system redundancy)
● 493 bytes (with system redundancy)
Note
• The ET-Connection components must also be included for the I/O modules.
• The result of the calculation of the maximum net data length applies equally to input and
output data.
• In the case of a shared device configuration, the described calculations for the total I/O
data apply to all controllers that share the device.
• If more than two (max. four) controllers share the device, the maximum amount of I/O
data including user data qualifier is limited to 360 bytes per controller.

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Accessories
● BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA 2×FC BusAdapter
● BA 2×LC BusAdapter
● BA 2xSCRJ BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter
● BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter
● BA LC/FC BusAdapter
● 24 V DC connector
● Labeling strips
You can find more information on accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Server module
The server module is included in the scope of delivery of the interface module and available
● Includes a holder for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Provides station functions, for example, group load diagnostics, status bytes
Note
software.
Place the server module in the last slot of the configuration. If there are 64 I/O modules, the
server module is plugged in slot 65.


Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark-colored one if an AC I/O module or
A light-colored BaseUnit must be plugged into the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module in
order to route the 24 V DC supply voltage via a fuse.
Pay attention to the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration.
1. This means that modules without a connection to the integrated voltage buses P1 and P2
can now also be configured starting with slot 1. Currently, this applies to the following
modules:
● AI EnergyMeter
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 with
● Configuration as of STEP 7 V13 SP1

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2 Functions
Introduction
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP-MIB
and MRP-MIB
● Disabling ports
● Minimum update time 250 µs
● Device replacement without programming device
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Shared device
● Distribution of module channels to multiple submodules
● Module-internal or submodule-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)
● Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)
● System redundancy S2
● The BusAdapter provides the connection system for PROFINET IO. The following
versions are available for the IM 155-6 PN HF interface module:
BusAdapter Up to firmware As of firmware As of firmware Firmware 3.3

2.1 2.2 3.1 or higher
For standard RJ45 connector: X X X X
BA 2×RJ45
For direct connection of the X X X X
bus cable: BA 2×FC
For fiber-optic cable (FOC): -- X* X* X*
BA 2xSCRJ

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 13
Product overview
2.2 Functions
BusAdapter Up to firmware As of firmware As of firmware Firmware 3.3

2.1 2.2 3.1 or higher
For the transition from -- -- X* X*
POF/PCF fiber-optic cable to
RJ45 bus connection: BA
SCRJ/RJ45
For the transition from -- -- X* X*
POF/PCF fiber-optic cable to
the direct connection to the
bus cable: BA SCRJ/FC
For glass fiber-optic cable: BA - - - X*
2xLC
For the transition from glass - - - X*
fiber-optic cable to RJ45 bus
connection: BA LC/RJ45
For the transition from glass - - - X*
fiber-optic cable to the direct
connection to the bus cable:
BA LC/FC
* As of product version 3 of the interface module

● Identification data I&M 0 to I&M 4
● Device replacement without topological configuration
● Oversampling
● PROFIenergy
● Value status (quality information, QI) of I/O modules
● Multi Hot Swap (removal/insertion of multiple I/O modules during operation)
● Reset to factory settings via RESET button
Note
The use of the IM155-6 PN HF interface module as a docking unit (function: IO device
changing in operation) in a docking system is not supported.

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Requirements
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module:
Table 2- 1 Version dependencies of the module functions
Function Product Firmware Configuration software

version of version of Configuration with STEP 7 as of STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
the module the module GSD file V5.5 SP3 V5.5 SP4 with Portal) as of
as of as of (http://support.auto with HSP 233 HSP 250/255 V12.0.1 with
mation.siemens.co HSP 0058
m/WW/view/en/19
698639/130000)/
software from a
third-party manu-
facturer 1
Real-time communication 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Isochronous real-time 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
communication
Prioritized startup 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Device replacement with- 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
out programming device
Media redundancy (MRP) 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Shared device 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Value status 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
PROFIenergy 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Multi Hot Swap 1 V2.0.0 X X X X
Use of fail-safe modules 1 V2.0.0 - X X X
Oversampling 1 V2.1.0 X X X X
Media redundancy with 1 V2.1.0 X --- --- ---
planned duplication
(MRPD)
Isochronous mode 1 V2.1.0 --- X X X
Module-internal Shared 1 V2.2.0 X --- X X
Input/Shared Output
(MSI/MSO)
BusAdapter for fiber-optic 3 V2.2.0 X --- X X (as of V13
cable FOC: BA 2xSCRJ SP1)
System redundancy S2 1 V3.0.0 X --- X ---
Station extension via ET- 1 V3.0.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
Connection SP4) SP1)
Maximum user data length 1 V3.1.0 X X (as of V5.5 X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
per module: 288 bytes SP4) SP4) SP1)
BA SCRJ/RJ45 3 V3.1.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
BusAdapter SP4, SP1,
HSP0250 V3) HSP0129
V1.0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 15
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Function Product Firmware Configuration software

version of version of Configuration with STEP 7 as of STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
the module the module GSD file V5.5 SP3 V5.5 SP4 with Portal) as of
as of as of (http://support.auto with HSP 233 HSP 250/255 V12.0.1 with
mation.siemens.co HSP 0058
m/WW/view/en/19
698639/130000)/
software from a
third-party manu-
facturer 1
BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter 3 V3.1.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1,
HSP0250 V3) HSP0129
V1.0)
BA 2xLC BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0250/255 6)
V4)
LC/RJ45 BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0250/255 6)
V4)
BA LC/FC BusAdapter 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0250/255 6)
V4)
Distribution of module 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
channels to multiple sub- SP4, SP1, Update
modules HSP0255 V4) 6)
Maintenance interrupts of 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
I/O modules SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0255 V4) 6)
Extended Channel Diag- 3 V3.3.0 X --- X (as of V5.5 X (as of V13
nostics SP4, SP1, Update
HSP0255 V4) 6)

If you set a fixed connection setting of the port in STEP 7, you must also disable

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Real-time communication
A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on cyclic data exchange with a provider-
consumer model.
Isochronous real-time communication

Synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET
devices. A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is available for IRT data. The reserved
bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can also be transferred without being affected by
another high network load (e.g. TCP/IP communication or additional real time
communication) at reserved, chronologically synchronized intervals.
A topological configuration is required for IRT.
Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend also operating the IO controller as a sync master when configuring the
IRT communication.
Otherwise, IO devices with IRT and RT configuration could fail as a result of sync master
failure.
You can find more information on the configuration of synchronized PROFINET devices in
sync domains in the STEP 7 online help and:

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 17
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Isochronous mode of I/O data

I/O data, transmission cycle via PROFINET IO, and the user program are synchronized to
achieve maximum deterministics. The input and output data of distributed I/O modules in the
system is simultaneously collected and simultaneously output. The constant PROFINET IO
cycle forms the corresponding clock generator. The interface module supports isochronous
mode of I/O data for the modules starting at 250 µs. The IO device can exchange
isochronous process data with a maximum of one IO controller.
Note
If the IO controller cannot access a module (for example, module pulled, activated
configuration control without written control data record), cycle time violations may occur with
activated isochronous mode in the synchronous cycle interrupt OB (OB61). The time error
OB (OB80) is called in the event of a cycle time violation.
This behavior is associated with updating the process image by means of the "SYNC_PI"
(SFC126) and "SYNC_PO" (SFC127) instructions and depends, among other things, on the
set cycle time and the configuration limits.
Note
Isochronous mode restrictions with IM 155-6 PN HF
Isochronous mode of I/O data in combination with the following functions is not possible with
the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF:
• Shared device
• PROFIenergy

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup describes the PROFINET IO functionality for accelerating the startup of
IO devices in a PROFINET IO system with IRT and RT communication.
The function reduces the time that the appropriately configured IO devices require in order to
return to cyclic user data exchange in the following cases:
● After the supply voltage has returned
● After a station has returned
● After IO devices have been activated
Note
Dependency of the startup time
The interface module permits startup times from 0.5 s.
The startup time depends on the number and type of modules.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 19
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Device replacement

The device name is also stored on the BusAdapter in addition to the interface module. A
device name saved on the BusAdapter is the requirement for device replacement without
topological configuration.
Storing the name on the BusAdapter and the interface module produces a range of
Interface module empty Interface module with device name

BusAdapter empty No device name available The device name from the interface module is used
and copied to the BusAdapter.
BusAdapter with device The device name from the BusAdapter is The device name from the BusAdapter is used and
name used and copied to the interface module. copied to the interface module if this has a different
device name.

BusAdapter. To prevent the device name from being deleted in the BusAdapter, you can
remove the BusAdapter from the interface module before resetting to factory settings.
● When a BusAdapter is replaced, a device name stored in the BusAdapter is applied to the
interface module after a POWER ON.
● Do not pull/plug the BusAdapter while under voltage. If you pull/plug the BusAdapter
Device replacement with topological configuration

IO devices with this function can be replaced in a simple manner:
● The device name does not have to be assigned with the programming device.
The replacement IO device is assigned the device name by the IO controller and not by the
programming device. The IO controller uses the configured topology and the neighboring
relationships determined by the IO devices for this purpose. All involved devices must
support the LLDP protocol (Link Layer Discovery Protocol). The configured target topology
must match the actual topology.

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Replacement of an IM 155-6 PN HF
In a replacement scenario, any IO devices in operation must be reset to their as-delivered
state via "Reset to factory settings" (see the system manual

Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)

If media redundancy is to be reached with short update times (together with IRT), you must
use the MRP extension "Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)".
The MRPD media redundancy function is enabled for the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF
(V2.1):
● With the GSD file as of V5.5 SP3

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 21
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Shared device
IO device that makes its data available to up to four IO controllers.
The interface module supports shared device at submodule level.
If there is no validity check of the shared device projects by the Engineering System, note
the following:
● Make sure the configurations are consistent. In particular, modules or submodules may
only be assigned to one controller. Multiple assignment will result in an error; the module
or submodule will only be available in the first controller.
● If you reconfigure the shared device configurations without the validity check mentioned
above, you must commission the ET 200SP once again. This means that you have to
reload the projects of all involved IO controllers to the specific CPU after reconfiguration
and, if necessary, switch the interface module POWER OFF/POWER ON.
Note
In the case of a shared device application, make sure that all controllers work with the same
send clock. If controllers do not have the same send clock, the differing send clock can result
in communication relationships that are not set up.
If you set up all controllers in one project, the same send clock is ensured. Set the same
send clock for engineering in separate projects.
Submodules
The IM 155-6 PN HF interface module supports the division of I/O modules into up to 4
submodules. This allows parts of an I/O module to be separately configured and
parameterized.
A maximum of 256 submodules is supported, whereby 4 submodules are used for the
interface module and one submodule for the server module.
It is possible to assign each of these submodules to different IO controllers.
The functions:
● Firmware update
● Write I&M data
● Calibration
● PROFIenergy
can only be executed if you have configured submodule 1 during configuration.

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Module-internal Shared Input/Shared Output (MSI/MSO)

The Module-internal Shared Input function allows an input module to make its input data
available to up to four IO controllers. Each controller has read access to the same channels.
The Module-internal Shared Output function allows an output module to be operated by up to
four IO controllers. One IO controller has write access. Up to three additional IO controllers
can have read access to the same channels.
Value status
The IM 155-6 PN HF interface module supports I/O modules with value status.
Additional information on the value status can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.
Oversampling
The IM 155-6 PN HF interface module supports the Oversampling mode of HS modules.
With oversampling, the modules reduce the respective PROFINET send clocks in
isochronous mode.
Additional information on oversampling can be found in the manuals for the I/O modules.
Compatibility with IM 155-6 PN interface module

In an existing plant, the IM 155-6 PN HF replaces the IM 155-6 PN ST without
reconfiguration. When the IM 155-6 PN HF replaces the IM 155-6 PN ST, it is possible to
insert and remove several I/O modules during operation.
For more information on compatibility, refer to section: Compatibility (Page 48)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 23
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2.1 PROFIenergy
Properties
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) reduces the energy consumption by using PROFIenergy
commands during production-free periods.
Reference
You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the:
● I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300)
manual.
● Function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
● PROFINET System Description
● PROFIenergy (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/66928686) product
information.
● Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common Application Profile PROFIenergy;
Technical Specification for PROFINET; Version 1.0; January 2010; Order No: 3.802.
Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your automation system for future expansions or
changes. Configuration control means you can configure the planned maximum expansion of
your automation system in advance and flexibly vary it later by means of the user program.
Reference
● System manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2.3 Use of fail-safe modules
Properties
The IM 155-6 PN HF interface module as of V2.0 firmware supports the use of fail-safe
modules.
Reference
2.2.4 Multi Hot Swap
Properties
You can remove and insert any number of I/O modules during operation. The interface
module and the inserted I/O modules remain in operation.
Note
The IM 155-6 PN HF interface module does not support the removal and insertion of the
server module, the interface module and BusAdapter during operation.
Reference
You can find more information on the removal/insertion of modules in the system manual ET

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 25
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
The following table shows the signal names and the descriptions of the pin assignment for a

1L+ 24 V DC
1M Ground


26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

The following table shows the signal names and description of the pin assignment for the
BA 2×RJ45 BusAdapter.
Table 3- 2 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45

3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
6 RD_N Receive data –
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

BA 2×FC BusAdapter.
Table 3- 3 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×FC

3 RD Receive data +

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 27
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

BA 2×SCRJ BusAdapter.
Table 3- 4 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ

name
① Receiver / Receive data
② Sender / Transmit data
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

BA SCRJ/RJ45 BusAdapter.
Table 3- 5 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45

3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter.
The pin assignment for the BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer
overview.
Table 3- 6 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC

3 RD Receive data +
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA 2×LC

BA 2×LC BusAdapter.
Table 3- 7 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA 2×LC

name

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 29
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

BA LC/RJ45 BusAdapter.
Table 3- 8 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45

3 RD Receive data +
4 GND Ground
5 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 GND Ground
PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA LC/FC

BA LC/FC BusAdapter.
The pin assignment for the BA LC/FC BusAdapter is shown individually for a clearer
overview.
Table 3- 9 PROFINET IO pin assignment with BusAdapter BA LC/FC

3 RD Receive data +
Reference
the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
The following figure shows a block diagram of the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF.

④ Internal power supply MT 1,2 LED FiberOptic (SCRJ port)
X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage RN LED RUN/STOP (green/yellow)
X5 BusAdapter ER ERROR LED (red)
P1 R PROFINET interface X1 Port 1 MT MAINT LED (yellow)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 PN HF interface module

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 31
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for IM 155-6 PN HF interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF.
Table 4- 1 Parameters for interface module IM 155-6 PN HF (GSD file)
Parameters Value range Default Efficiency range

Enable configuration control Yes/No No ET 200SP
4.2.1 Enable configuration control
Enable configuration control

You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the
Note
Reference
You can find more information on the control data record in the
STEP 7 online help.

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Substitute value behavior

● Keep last value
● STOP controller
● Parameter assignment phase during startup
● Station stop
– Insertion of invalid I/O modules
Note
The "current-free/voltage-free" behavior becomes effective in the following cases:

● Firmware update
● Configuration control: The IM has not received a valid control data record 196 yet.
Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal Shared Input
(MSI)
Substitute value behavior for module-internal Shared Output (MSO) and module-internal
Shared Input (MSI) corresponds to the behavior described above.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 33

The status of the supply voltage L+ of the ET 200SP I/O modules is mapped to the server
module with the interface module IM 155-6 PN HF.
You can find information on the status of the supply voltage L+ of the I/O modules in the
Server module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/63257531) manual.

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
alarms 5
LED displays
The following figure shows the LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter.
① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ MT2 (yellow) (SCRJ port)
⑥ LK2 (green)
⑦ MT1 (yellow) (SCRJ port)
⑧ LK1 (green)
Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module and BusAdapter

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 35

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays.
RN/ER/MT LEDs on the interface module
Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of RN/ER/MT LEDs
LEDs Meaning Solution

RN ER MT
Missing or insufficient supply voltage on Check the supply voltage or turn it on at the
Off Off Off interface module. interface module.*
Test of LEDs during startup: The three ---
proximately 0.25 s.
Not relevant Not rele- Interface module is deactivated. Activate the interface module with the con-
Flashes vant figuration software or the user program.
ET 200SP starts up. ---
ters.
ET 200SP is being reset to factory
settings.
Not relevant Not rele- ET 200SP is currently exchanging data ---
On vant with the IO controller.
Not rele- Not rele- Group errors and group error channels. Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the
vant Flashes vant error.
The configured structure does not cor- Check the structure of the ET 200SP to see
respond to the actual structure of the whether a module is missing or defective,
ET 200SP . or whether a non-configured module is
inserted.
Invalid configuration states. See section Invalid configuration states of
the ET 200SP on PROFINET IO (Page 46).
Parameter assignment error in the I/O Evaluate the display of the module status in
module. STEP 7 and eliminate the error in the re-
spective I/O module.
Not rele- Not relevant Maintenance See section Maintenance events
vant On (Page 42).
The "Node flash test" is run (LEDs LK1 ---
Flashes Flashes Flashes and LK2 of the PROFINET interface
also flash).
Hardware or firmware defective (LEDs Run a firmware update. If the error persists,
LK1 and LK2 of the PROFINET inter- contact Siemens Industry Online Support.
face do not flash). Replace the interface module.
* PWR LED on (on the interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit.

36 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Table 5- 2 Status display of the PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning Solution

Supply voltage not present or too small. Check the supply voltage.
Off
Supply voltage present. ---
On
LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs on the BusAdapter
Table 5- 3 Status and error displays of LK1/LK2 and MT1/MT2 LEDs
LED Meaning Solution

LK1/LK2 MT1/MT2*
Not relevant There is no Ethernet connection Check whether the bus cable to the switch/IO
Off between the PROFINET IO interface controller is interrupted.
of your PROFINET device and a
communication partner (e.g. IO con-
troller).
Not relevant There is an Ethernet connection ---
On between the PROFINET IO interface
of your PROFINET device and a
communication partner (e.g. IO con-
troller).
Not relevant The "Node flash test" is run (the ---
RN/ER/MTLEDs also flash).
Flashes
Not relevant No error ---
Off
Not relevant • Fiber-optic error Causes and measures for the transmission
On route:
• Maintenance demanded: Attenua-
tion through the fiber-optic cable • Replacement of fiber-optic cable if dam-
is so high that operation will soon aged or aged
no longer be possible. • Correct installation of the PROFINET
connector/PROFINET connections
• Adherence to maximum length of 50 m
for POF cable or 100 m for PCF cable
• Secure fit of the FOC connector
* Available only on BA 2×SCRJ, BA SCRJ/RJ45 and BA SCRJ/FC BusAdapters

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 37

Configuration errors of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system are output on the interface
module by the ERROR (red) and MAINT (yellow) LEDs.
The following configuration errors are signaled by the LEDs:
● No server module
● Interruptions or short-circuit on the backplane bus
Operating principle
The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After notification by the
flash signal, the error type is displayed followed by the error location/error code.
The LED error display:
● Is activated during POWER ON and during operation.
● Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR and
MAINT LED.
● Remains turned on until the cause of the error has been removed.
1 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at Indication of the error type
0.5 Hz
2 The MAINT LED flashes at 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal)
3 The ERROR and MAINT LEDs flash 3x at 2 Hz Indication of error location/error code
tion / error code
tion / error code
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been removed.
Error display
Error type Error location Cause of error Solution

(MAINT) (ERROR/ MAINT)
1 65 • No server module Check the configuration
of the ET 200SP.
• Interruptions on the backplane bus
the backplane bus
Note
The following LEDs indicate a short-circuit in the backplane bus supply or in the bus
connection supply:
• PWR LED: On
• RN, ER and MT LED: Off

38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
Introduction
The I/O device triggers interrupts as a reaction to specific errors. Interrupts are evaluated
based on the I/O controller used.

● Diagnostic error interrupts
● Pull/plug interrupts
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically called in the CPU of the
IO controller.
Information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the
OB number and start information.
System diagnostics
In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the innovated system diagnostics is available for the devices of the
S7-1500 automation system (IO controller S7-1500 CPU) and ET 200SP (IO device).
Independent of the cyclic user program, alarms are made available on the display of the
S7-1500 CPU, the CPU web server and the HMI device.
You will find more information on system diagnostics in the Diagnostics
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192926) function manual.
Triggering of a diagnostics interrupt

module triggers a diagnostic error interrupt if this is configured accordingly.
The CPU interrupts processing of the user program and processes the diagnostic error
interrupt OB (OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information
of the diagnostic error interrupt OB.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 39
5.2 Interrupts

If there is a hardware interrupt, the CPU interrupts user program execution and processes
the hardware interrupt block OB, e.g., OB 40. The result that triggered the interrupt is added
to the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.
Note
Do not use hardware interrupts for functional purposes (e.g. the cyclic generation of
hardware interrupts).
5.2.3 Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt
Triggering of a remove/insert module interrupt

In the event of a remove/insert module interrupt, the CPU interrupts processing of the user
program and processes the remove/insert module OB, e.g. OB 83. The event that triggered
the interrupt is entered in the start information of the remove/insert module OB.
Note
Parameter assignment error after removal/insertion
If you write data records from the user program to the modules of the distributed I/O, make
sure that these modules actually exist and are available. You can do this by evaluating
OB83. After inserting a module, OB83 is not called until the module has started up and its
parameters are assigned. This ensures that data record operations can be executed without
errors.

40 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
5.3 Alarms
5.3 Alarms

There can be more than one diagnostics alarm at the same time. Each diagnostics alarm
initiates the following actions:
● Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic error interrupts to the CPU of the IO controller and
● The diagnostic error interrupt OB is called. If the diagnostic error interrupt OB is not
available, the IO controller switches to STOP mode.
Reading the diagnostics
Automation system Application See...

with IO controller
SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 online help
STEP 7 using Online and Diag-
• as of STEP 7 V12, function manual
nostics view
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
Read data records from the W/view/en/49948856)
IO device
• as of STEP 7 V5.5, system manual
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54)
PROFINET System Description
Receive interrupts from the
IO device (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
W/view/en/19292127)

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930) and in Example application
Causes of error and troubleshooting

The causes of error and remedies for the diagnostic alarms are described in the manuals for
I/O modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55679691/133300) in the
section, "Interrupts, error messages, and system events".
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 41
5.3 Alarms
5.3.2 Maintenance events
Triggering of a maintenance event

The PROFINET IO interfaces of the interface module support the diagnostic concept and
maintenance concept in PROFINET IO according to the IEC 61158 Type 10 standard. The
goal is to detect and remove potential problems as soon as possible.
For the interface module, maintenance events signal to the user when a network component
must be checked or replaced.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and executes the diagnostic error interrupt OB.
The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the
diagnostic error interrupt OB.
The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher-level diagnostic system in
the case of the following event:
Table 5- 7 Triggering of a maintenance event
Maintenance alarm Event Alarm/Meaning

Maintenance demanded Synchronization • No synchronization frame received.
LED MAINT is lit. loss
No synchronization frame was received by the sync master within the
timeout period after parameter assignment or during operation.
• Successive synchronization frames are located outside permitted
limits (jitter).
System alarms in STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

The maintenance information is generated in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) with the following system
alarms:
● Maintenance demanded - indicated for each port by a yellow wrench icon in the
device view or in the hardware configuration.
Function

42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
5.3 Alarms

standard PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.2.
If required, the standard is available for download on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com)
from the PROFIBUS user organization home page.
Coding of the extended channel diagnostics (as of V3.3.0)

With the IM 155-6 PN HF interface module, the following extended channel diagnostics are
reported:
ChannelErrorType ExtendedChannelError- Associated value Diagnostics

(CET) Type (ECET) AddValue
0x0602 0x0691 Slot Station stop - module parameter "Potential group"
faulty or incorrect BaseUnit in actual slot
(AddValue)
0x0602 0x0693 0x00 Diagnostics with missing server module
0x0602 0x0698 0x00 Diagnostics backplane bus too large
0x0602 0x0699 slot Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration
0x0602 0x069C 0x00 Diagnostics with incorrectly plugged BusAdapter
0x0610 0x06B0 0x00 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for
the potential groups
Note: The slot in which the light-colored BaseUnit
of the respective load module is located is coded
in the "ChannelNumber" element.
Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records

The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion. The
following BlockVersion applies to the IM 155-6 PN HF interface modules:
Table 5- 8 Structure of the manufacturer-specific diagnostics data records
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module BlockVersion

6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0 W#16#0101

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 43
5.3 Alarms
Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the User Structure Identifier (USI)

The following manufacturer-specific diagnostics are signaled in the USI with the
IM 155-6 PN HF interface module:
Table 5- 9 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics in the USI
USI no. W#16#... Diagnostics

0003 Group diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+ for the potential groups
0004 Diagnostics with missing server module
0006 Diagnostics with incorrect BaseUnit
0007 Diagnostics with incorrect bus configuration

USI W#16#0003 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with failure of supply 2
voltage L+ as of slot x of the ET 200SP module
Followed by the slot as of which the supply voltage L+ has failed.
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI W#16#0004 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics with missing server 2
module
the IO controller
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
5.3 Alarms

USI W#16#0006 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if an ET 200SP I/O mod- 2
ule is installed on an incorrect BaseUnit.
the IO controller
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

USI W#16#0007 Manufacturer-specific diagnostics if operation is not possi- 2
ble with existing bus configuration
the IO controller
Slot W#16#0001 to Bit 8 to 15 1
W#16#0040 Bit 0 to 7 1
If slot 0 is specified, check the width of the station configuration (maximum 1 m).
Reserved 1
Reserved 1

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 45
5.3 Alarms

failure of the IO device or prevent data exchange:
● Number of modules exceeds maximum configuration.
● At least one I/O module is plugged into a different BaseUnit as the one configured in the
parameters.
● No server module.
● Invalid or incorrectly configured BusAdapter.
Note
Removal of the server module will trigger a station stop. All I/O modules of the
ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) but the interface module
continues to exchange data.
See also

● If an I/O module is removed during failure of the supply voltage, a pull interrupt is
generated.
● If an I/O module is installed during failure of the supply voltage, a plug interrupt is
generated.

46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
5.3 Alarms

Diagnostics received from the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP do not initiate a
call of any corresponding OBs when the IO controller goes into RUN. Read the E00CH data
record in startup OB using the instruction "RDREC". This record contains all diagnostics for
Recovery of the SIMATIC IO devices

If you want to read the occurring diagnostics in the STOP state of the IO controller, you have
to read the E00CH data record with the "RDREC" instruction. This record contains all

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 47
Compatibility 6
6.1 Compatibility of modules
Compatibility with IM 155-6 PN HF interface module

If you exchange or replace an interface module, the following table shows the compatibilities:
● Between the interface modules IM 155-6 PN HF and IM 155-6 PN ST
● Between the various firmware versions
Interface IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6 IM 155-6
modules PN ST PN ST PN ST PN ST PN HF PN HF PN HF PN HF PN HF
V1.0 V1.1 V3.1 V3.3 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V3.0 V3.1
IM 155-6 PN Yes --- --- --- Yes --- --- --- ---
HF V2.0
IM 155-6 PN Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes --- --- ---
HF V2.1
IM 155-6 PN Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes Yes --- ---
HF V2.2
IM 155-6 PN Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes Yes Yes ---
HF V3.0
IM 155-6 PN Yes Yes Yes --- Yes Yes Yes Yes ---
HF V3.1
IM 155-6 PN Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
HF V3.3

48 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Compatibility
Station configuration with more than 32 I/O modules

Certain modules with product versions 001 and 002 do not support a station configuration
with more than 32 I/O modules.
The table below shows all modules that do not support a station configuration with more than
32 I/O modules:
Table 6- 1 Incompatible modules with product versions
Modules Article number Up to product version

Analog modules
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST 6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1 002
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST 6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1 002
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF 6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1 002
AI 4xU/I ST 6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1 002
Digital modules
DI 16x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 002
DI 8x24VDC ST 6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0 002
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 002
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 002
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0 002

configuration.
● For modules without parameter assignment in the following table, the status of the supply
voltage (status byte of the server module) is always signaled as "1" regardless of the
actual status of the supply voltage.
potential group.

DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST 6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST 6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF 6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 49
Compatibility
Resetting an interface module to factory settings via the RESET button

There is a special operation for interface module IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 to reset it to the
factory settings using the Reset button.
Requirements
The supply voltage to the interface module must be switched on.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (for resetting via the RESET button)
Procedure
1. Remove the interface module from the mounting rail and swivel it downwards.
2. The RESET button is located on the back of the interface module behind a small opening:
Push a screwdriver into the small opening, thus pressing the RESET button.
3. Release the RESET button.
4. Press the RESET button for another 3 seconds.
5. Look at the LED display of the interface module to see whether the reset was successful:
RUN LED flashes for 3 seconds, ERROR and MAINT LED are off.
6. Install the interface module back on the mounting rail.
7. Assign parameters to the interface module again.
AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module
Note
For operation of the AQ 4xU/I ST analog output module, firmware version V1.0
(6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) with the IM 155-6 PN HF interface module
(6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0), you need to set the "Reaction to CPU STOP" parameter to "Turn
off" with a PROFINET send clock < 1 ms.

when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules:
Maximum reaction time = configured update time + 400 μs (but at least 1.4 ms)

50 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Compatibility
Operation with activated system redundancy S2
Note
Restrictions in operation with activated system redundancy S2
You cannot use the following functions during operation of the IM155-6 PN HF, firmware
version as of V3.0.0 with activated system redundancy S2:
• Station extension with ET 200AL via ET-Connection
• Configuration control (option handling)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 51
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 PN HF
6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0
General information
Product type designation IM 155-6 PN HF with server module
Product function
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1 Update 6
as of version
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision - / V2.3
Via data record Yes
Supply voltage
Type of supply voltage DC
Input current
Inrush current, max. 4.5 A
I²t 0.09 A²s
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 288 bytes; for both input and output data
Address space per station, max. 1440 bytes; depending on configuration
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 64

52 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch)
1st interface
Interface hardware
• BusAdapter (PROFINET) Yes; usable BusAdapters: BA 2x RJ45, BA 2x

FC, BA 2x SCRJ (as of FS03, V2.2), BA SCRJ /
RJ45 (as of FS03, V3.1), BA SCRJ / FC (as of
FS03, V3,1), BA 2x LC (as of FS03, V3.3), BA LC
/ RJ45 (as of FS03, V3.3), BA LC / FC (as of
FS03, V3.3)
Protocols
• Media redundancy Yes; as MRP or MRPD client, max. 50 or 30

devices in the ring
Interface hardware
RJ45 (Ethernet)
(100BASE-TX)
TX)
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO device
Services
• Isochronous mode Yes; bus cycle time min. 250 µs
• IRT Yes; 250 μs, 500 μs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms additional-

ly with IRT with high performance: 250 µs to 4 ms
in 125 µs intervals
• MRP Yes
• MRPD Yes
• PROFINET system redundancy Yes; NAP S2
• PROFIenergy Yes
• Prioritized startup Yes

max.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 53
6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0
TCP/IP Yes
SNMP Yes
LLDP Yes
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes
terminal)
Constant bus cycle time Yes
Shortest clock pulse 250 µs
Longest clock pulse 4 ms
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 250 µs
Jitter, max. 1 µs
Status display Yes
Interrupts Yes
RUN LED Yes
ERROR LED Yes
MAINT LED Yes
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC between supply voltage and electron-
ics (type test); 1500 V AC between Ethernet and
electronics (type test)
Network loading class 3
Security level According to Security Level 1 Test Cases V1.1.1
ET-Connection
Via BU/BA-Send Yes
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 147 g; without BusAdapter

54 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×RJ45
6ES7193-6AR00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
RJ45 Yes; 2 x
Cable length
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC
Table 7- 2 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×FC
6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Cable length
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 55
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ
Table 7- 3 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×SCRJ
6ES7193-6AP00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) SCRJ FO
SCRJ 2
Cable length
• PCF 100 m
• PCF-GI 300 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45
Table 7- 4 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/RJ45
6ES7193-6AP20-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + RJ45)
RJ45 Yes; 1 x
SCRJ 1
Cable length
• PCF 100 m
• PCF-GI 300 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

56 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC
Table 7- 5 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA SCRJ/FC
6ES7193-6AP40-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (SCRJ + FC)
SCRJ 1
Cable length
• PCF 100 m
• PCF-GI 300 m
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×LC
Table 7- 6 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA 2×LC
6ES7193-6AG00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC multimode glassfiber
LC 2
Cable length
• Multimode gradient-index fiber 50/125 µm 2 km
• Multimode gradient-index fiber 62.5/125 μm 2 km
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 57
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45
Table 7- 7 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/RJ45
6ES7193-6AG20-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1; 2 ports (switch) LC / RJ45
RJ45 Yes; 1x
LC 1
Cable length
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights
Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC
Table 7- 8 Technical specifications of the BusAdapter BA LC/FC
6ES7193-6AG40-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
FC (FastConnect) Yes; 1x
LC 1
Cable length
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 69.5 mm
Depth 59 mm
Weights

58 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG
Dimension drawing A
This appendix contains a dimension drawing of the module mounted on a mounting rail.
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 PN HF interface module, front and side views

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03915895-AG 59
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module ___________________
Preface
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module
___________________
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0)
Manual ___________
5
alarms
___________________
Compatibility 6
___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
05/2015
A5E03916550-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0)

4 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide to documentation .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................12
2.2.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................12
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................16
3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................17
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................18
4.2 Description of parameters .......................................................................................................19
4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ .............................................................................19
4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................20
4.2.4 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................20
4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt ...............................................................................................20
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................26
5.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................26
5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP ..........................................................................................35
5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt .........................................................................36
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................37
5.3.1 Slave diagnostics ....................................................................................................................38
5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................39
5.3.3 Master PROFIBUS address ....................................................................................................40
5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics ...................................................................................................41
5.3.5 Module status ..........................................................................................................................42
5.3.7 H status ...................................................................................................................................44
5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP ...........................................45
5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D ..........................................................................46

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 5
Table of contents
6 Compatibility ......................................................................................................................................... 47
6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 47
Index ...................................................................................................... Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

6 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 7

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Article number 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 contains the following components:
● IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (6ES7155-6BU00-0CN0)
● Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)
● PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0)
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the 155-6 DP HF interface module with supplied accessories
Properties
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV)
● Bus connection via RS485 interface

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
● 32 I/O modules
Accessories
● Labeling strips
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.
Server module
The server module is included in the product package of the interface module and available
● Provides station functions, e.g., status bytes
Note
You need to configure the server module in the configuration software.
To do so, place the server module with the required length of status bytes at the last slot of
the configuration. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server module is inserted at slot 33.
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector

The PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector is included in the product package of the
interface module and also available separately as an accessory.

10 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Configuration with more than 244 bytes of parameter data

With a configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP 3 with HSP 242, you have the option of operating
the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module as of 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 in DPV1 mode with more
than 244 bytes of parameter data. Configuration with the GSD file does not offer this option.
Note
With a configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP 3 with HSP 242 without GSD files, a longer
startup time of the station is to be expected.
Reference
You can find additional information on identification data in the ET 200SP distributed I/O

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 11
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2 Functions
2.2.1 Functions
Introduction
The interface module supports the following functions:
● PROFIBUS DP
● Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
● Configuration control by means of the user program
● Operation as DPV1 slave
● Operation after Y-link (not with F-modules)
● F-direct data exchange
Requirements
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:

of the module of the module as Configuration STEP 7 as of STEP 7 (TIA
as of of with GSD file V5.5 SP3 with Portal) as of
(http://support.a HSP 242 V13
utoma-
tion.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/
19698639/1300
00) / software
from a third-
party manufac-
turer1
Operation after Y-link (not with 1 V1.1.0 X --- ---
F-modules)
Hot-swapping 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Station extension via ET- 1 V3.0.0 X X (as of HSP ---
Connection 0242 V2)
F-direct data exchange 1 V3.1.0 --- X (as of ---
HSP0242 V3)

12 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Properties
or options. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
Reference

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 13
Connecting 3
The table below shows the signal names and descriptions of the pin assignment of the
View Signal name1) Description

1L+ 24 V DC
1M Ground
1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are internally bridged.


14 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Connecting
PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface

The following table shows the signal names and descriptions of the terminal assignment of
the PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 3- 2 Terminal assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface

1 - -
2 - -
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
4 RTS Request To Send
5 M5V2 DP data reference potential (from sta-
tion)
6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
7 - -
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 - -
Reference
You can find additional information on connecting the interface module and on the
accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 15
Connecting
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram

The following figure show the block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.
① ET 200SP backplane bus interface and electronics L+ 24 V DC supply voltage

② Backplane bus M Ground
③ Internal power supply RN RUN/STOP LED (green)
X80 24 V DC Feed supply voltage ER ERROR LED (red)
PB PROFIBUS interface MT MAINT LED (yellow)
DP PROFIBUS DP LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module

16 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Connecting
3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Introduction
On the interface module (PROFIBUS), set the PROFIBUS DP address for PROFIBUS DP
using the DIP switch. By setting the PROFIBUS DP address, you specify where the
ET 200SP is to be addressed on the PROFIBUS DP.
Requirements
● Each PROFIBUS DP address may be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.
● Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
● The set PROFIBUS DP address must match the PROFIBUS DP address specified for the
ET 200SP in the configuration software.
Required tools
Screwdriver 3 - 3.5 mm
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

1. Slide the window of the interface module upwards.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the required PROFIBUS address via the DIP switch.
3. Close the window.
Figure 3-2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Changing the PROFIBUS DP address

You can change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change
in the PROFIBUS DP address only becomes valid for the ET 200SP after a POWER ON of
the interface module.

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 17
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.
Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (GSD file)
Parameters Value range Default3 Effective range

Configuration control 1 Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP
Startup when preset/actual configura- Yes/No No ET 200SP
tion differ
Diagnostics interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP
Hardware interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP
Pull/plug module interrupt2 Yes/No No ET 200SP
1 Note that the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter is
always activated when you use configuration control.
2 The “Pull/plug” parameter is always activated in the GSD file.
3 The defaults apply to the default startup. If no other parameters are specified by the DP master,
the IM 155-6 DP HF starts up with these parameters.
Note
Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file, does not affect configuration with
STEP 7 via HSP:
Not all parameters of an I/O module are provided by the GSD file with GSD configuration,
because the PROFIBUS standard limits the number of parameters to 244 bytes per
ET 200SP. These parameters can be configured later using data record 128, if necessary.
The description is available in the respective manual of the employed I/O module.
Note
PROFIBUS GSD configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP3
The universal module must not be configured.

18 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
4.2 Description of parameters

Note
The "Configuration control" function can only be used if you set the parameter "Startup if
preset configuration does not match actual configuration" to yes at the same time.
Note
Configuring the enable
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires control data record
196 from the user program so that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system can operate the I/O
modules.
Reference
You can find additional information in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
STEP 7 online help.
4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ

If the parameter is enabled and
● modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system continues to exchange data with the DP master.
If the parameter is disabled and
● modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the
● If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, data exchange does
not take place between the DP master and the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 19
4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts.
4.2.4 Hardware interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable hardware interrupts.
4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable insert/remove module interrupts.

20 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC

The substitute value behavior is implemented by the DP master per slot in the ET 200SP
The respective output reacts according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Keep last value
● STOP DP master
● DP master failure (connection interruption)
● Firmware update
– No server module
● Deactivate DP slave
Note
new configuration to the CPU, the modules no longer configured but still present retain
their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage on the
BaseUnit BU...D or on the interface module is switched off.

● Firmware update

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 21
alarms 5
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED display on the interface module:
① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ DP (green)
⑤ PWR (green)
Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module


22 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
LEDs Meaning Remedy

RN ER MT
No or too little supply voltage at inter- Check the supply voltage or switch it
Off Off Off face module on at the interface module.1
proximately 0.25 s.
Off Off configuration software or the user
Flashes
program.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with
the configuration software.
ters.
Not relevant Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging -
On data with the DP master.
Not relevant Not relevant Group error and group error channels Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate
the error.
Flashes
The preset configuration does not Check the configuration of the
match the actual configuration of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is
ET 200SP. missing or faulty, or whether a non-
configured module is inserted.
Invalid configuration states See the Invalid configuration states of
the ET 200SP on PROFINET DP
(Page 45) section.
Parameter assignment error in the I/O Evaluate the display of the module
module status in STEP 7 and correct the error
in the corresponding I/O module.
Not relevant Not relevant Maintenance is demanded. Perform maintenance
On
Hardware or firmware faulty.2 Run a firmware update. If the error
persists, contact Siemens Industry
Flashes Flashes Flashes
Online Support.
1 PWR LED On (on interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit.
2 DP LED Off

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 23

No or too little supply voltage Check the supply voltage.
Off
On
LED DP on the RS485 interface
Table 5- 3 Status display of the DP LED
LED DP Meaning Remedy

There is no connection between the PROFIBUS Check whether the bus cable to the DP master is
Off interface of your PROFIBUS device and a commu- broken.
nication partner (for example, DP master).
There is a connection between the PROFIBUS -
On interface of your PROFIBUS device and a commu-
nication partner (for example, DP master).


24 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Operating principle
The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After a notification by
means of a flashing signal, the error type and then the error location/error code are displayed
in each case.
The LED error display:
● Is activated during POWER ON and during operation
● Has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR- and MAINT-
LED
● Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated
1 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 0.5 Hz Indication of the error type
2 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal)
3 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 2 Hz Indication of error location/error code
4 ERROR-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the tens position (decimal) of the
error location/error code
5 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the units position (decimal) of the
6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated.
Error display

1 33* • No server module Check the con-
figuration of the
ET 200SP.
• Short-circuit on the backplane bus
* Slot
Note
connection supply:
• PWR-LED: On
• RN-, ER- and MT-LED: Off

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 25
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
5.2.1 Introduction
Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics indicates the interrupt type and the event that
led to an interrupt being triggered. The interrupt section comprises 62 bytes including an
interrupt header.
Position in the diagnostics frame

The interrupt section is located after the channel diagnostics.

26 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.2 Interrupts
Data record
The diagnostic data of a module are located in the data records 0 and 1:
● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that describe the current status of the
distributed I/O system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB 82 (local data bytes 8
to 11).
● Data record 1 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that are also available in data record 0.
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1:
Figure 5-2 Structure of data record 1

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 27
5.2 Interrupts
Reading data records

DS0 and DS1 can be read with SFC 59 (RD_REC) or SFB 52 (RDREC). The data length of
DS 1 can be up to 240 bytes. In this case, DS1 includes up to 38 channel error entries.
Note the figures below in this section.
Content
The contents of the interrupt information depend on the interrupt type:
● In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 58 bytes) is sent as
interrupt status information (starting from byte x+4).
● The length of the interrupt status information for hardware interrupts is 4 bytes.

28 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.2 Interrupts
Structure of interrupts
The figure below shows the structure of the interrupt section for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system:
Figure 5-3 Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 29
5.2 Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt:
Figure 5-4 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt

30 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.2 Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt from the modules, starting at byte x+8

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+8:
Figure 5-5 Structure starting at byte x+8

The channel error entries start from byte x+14. A channel error entry is 6 bytes long and can
follow 8 times starting from byte x+14.
If you read the channel error entries using an SFB or SFC, 38 channel diagnostics are
possible.
Figure 5-6 Structure starting from byte x+14

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 31
5.2 Interrupts
The following table is used to explain the channel error entries:
Description
Channel number 0 to 63: Channel number for channel error
0x8000: Entire submodule
Channel properties Bit 0 to 7 00H: Free data type
01H: bit
02H: 2 bit
03H: 4 bit
04H: byte
05H: word
06H: Double word
07H bis FFH: Reserve
Bit 8 0: Channel
1: Channel group
Bit 9, 10 00H: Diagnostics
01H: Maintenance demanded
02H: Maintenance required
03H: Reserve
Bit 11, 12 00H: Channel error-free
01H: Incoming diagnostics
02H: Outgoing diagnostics
03H: Outgoing diagnostics, but other diagnostics are also
pending on this channel
Bit 13 to 15 00H: Reserve
01H: Input channel
02H: Output channel
03H: Input/output channel
Channel error type Refer to respective manual for explanation.

32 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.2 Interrupts
Example of a diagnostic interrupt

The figure below shows an example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 1):
Figure 5-7 Example of a diagnostic interrupt (part 1)

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 33
5.2 Interrupts
Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 for the hardware interrupt:
Figure 5-9 Structure starting at byte x+4 for hardware interrupt

34 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.2 Interrupts
5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP
Introduction
With certain process statuses/errors, the DP slave in each case creates an interrupt block
with the corresponding information in the diagnostics frame (DPV1 interrupt mechanism).
Regardless of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is displayed in the identifier-related
diagnostics, in the module status, and in the channel diagnostics.
Interrupts in DPV1 mode

● Diagnostic interrupts
● Insert/remove module interrupts

When an event comes or goes (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module
triggers a diagnostics interrupt if "Enable: diagnostic interrupt" is set.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic interrupt OB
(OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the
diagnostic interrupt OB.

When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and
processes the hardware interrupt OB, for example OB 40. The event that triggered the
interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.
Note
Do not use hardware interrupts for technological purposes (e.g., cyclical generation of

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 35
5.2 Interrupts
5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt

When an insert/remove module interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user
program and processes the insert/remove module interrupt OB (OB 83). The event that
triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the insert/remove module
interrupt OB.

36 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.3 Alarms
5.3 Alarms
Actions after a diagnostics alarm in DPV1 mode

The error is entered in the channel diagnostics in the diagnostics frame:
● In DPV1 mode, diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts.
● After a diagnostics alarm, this is
– entered in the diagnostics frame as diagnostic interrupt block (always for one interrupt
only).
– Stored in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU.
● OB 82 is called. If OB 82 does not exist, the CPU changes to STOP mode.
● Acknowledgment of diagnostic interrupt (a new interrupt is then possible)
Length of the diagnostics frame

● The maximum frame length for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with IM155-6 DP HF
interface module (DPV1 mode) is 244 bytes.
● The minimum frame length is 6 bytes.
Table 5- 6 Reading out the diagnostics data with STEP 7

with DP master
SIMATIC S7/M7 Slave diagnostics data as plain text in "Diagnosing hardware" in the STEP 7
the "DP slave diagnostics" tab in the online help
STEP 7 user interface
Instruction "DP NRM_DG" (SFC 13) SFC, see STEP 7 online help
Reading out slave diagnostics (store
in the data area of the user program)
Instruction "RD_REC" (SFC 59) See System and Standard Functions
Reading out data records of the S7 reference manual
diagnostics data (store in the data
area of the user program)
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system
Reading data records from the DP functions/function blocks)
slave
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system
Receiving interrupts from the interrupt functions/function blocks)
OBs

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 37
5.3 Alarms
5.3.1 Slave diagnostics

The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics.
Figure 5-10 Structure of the slave diagnostics
Note
The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 155-6 DP HF (depending on
parameter assignment) between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode.
You can identify the length of the last received diagnostics frame in STEP 7 from the
RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13.

38 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.3 Alarms
5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3

Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.
Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)
Table 5- 7 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)
Bit Meaning Cause/Remedy

0 1: The DP slave is not responding to the DP • Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
master. the DP slave?
• Is the bus connector plugged in?
• Is the DP slave connected to the voltage
supply?
• Is the RS485 repeater properly config-
ured?
1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to ex- • Wait; the DP slave is currently starting
change data. up.
2 1: The configuration data transferred from • Has the correct station type or the cor-
the DP master to the DP slave does not rect DP slave configuration been en-
match the DP slave configuration. tered in the configuration software?
3 1: External diagnostics is available. (Group • Evaluate the ID-specific diagnostics, the
diagnostics display) module status, and/or the channel diag-
nostics. As soon as all errors have been
eliminated, bit 3 is reset. The bit is set
again when there is a new diagnostics
alarm in the bytes of the aforementioned
diagnostics.
4 1: The required function is not supported by • Check the configuration.
the DP slave (for example, changing the
PROFIBUS address by means of software).
5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the re- • Check the bus configuration.
sponse of the DP slave.
6 1: The DP slave type does not match the • Has the correct station type been en-
software configuration. tered in the configuration software?
7 1: Parameters have been assigned to the • The bit is always 1, for example, if you
DP slave by a different DP master (not the access the DP slave with the program-
one that currently has access to the DP ming device or another DP master.
slave).
• The PROFIBUS address of the DP mas-
ter that assigned parameters to the DP
slave is located in the "Master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostics byte.

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 39
5.3 Alarms
Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave parameters need to be reassigned.
1 1: A diagnostics alarm is present. The DP slave will not operate until the problem is
eliminated (static diagnostics alarm).
2 1: The bit on the DP slave is always "1".
3 1: The watchdog is activated for this DP slave.
4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command.1
5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command.1
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in pro-
gress.
1 The bit is updated only if another diagnostics alarm also changes.
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always set to "0".
7 1: • There are more diagnostic alarms pending than the DP slave is able to store.
• The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostics alarms sent by the DP slave in its
(channel) diagnostics buffer.
5.3.3 Master PROFIBUS address

The master PROFIBUS address diagnostics byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the DP
master:
● That assigned parameters to the DP slave
● That has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is located in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

40 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.3 Alarms
5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics

The identifier-related diagnostics indicates whether modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system have errors or not. Identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise 8 bytes.
The figure below shows how the identifier-related diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:
Figure 5-11 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 41
5.3 Alarms
5.3.5 Module status

The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides more
information on the identifier-related diagnostics with respect to the configuration. The module
status begins after the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises 17 bytes.
The following figure shows how the module status for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is
structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:
Figure 5-12 Module status structure

42 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.3 Alarms

Channel diagnostics provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the
identifier-related diagnostics. Channel diagnostics begins after the module status. Channel
diagnostics does not affect the module status.
The following figure shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:
Figure 5-13 Structure of channel diagnostics
When a BaseUnit is incorrectly configured, mapping is made to channel diagnostics. The slot
is then apparent from the first byte. In this case, the error type is coded with 0x10 -
parameter error. All other fields are set to "0".

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 43
5.3 Alarms
5.3.7 H status
Requirements
The H status in the diagnostics frame supplies the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module only
when operated behind a Y link (e.g. IM 157) in DPV1 mode. This block can be passed over
during the evaluation of the diagnostics frame. The configuration is described in the following
section.
Structure of the H status

The following figure shows the structure of the H status of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface
module.
Figure 5-14 Structure of the H status

44 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
5.3 Alarms
5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP
Incorrect configuration states

The following incorrect configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to a
failure of the DP slave or prevent the start of data exchange.
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g., defective BaseUnit). No interrupt is generated when the
ET 200SP backplane bus is interrupted
● Configuration exceeds maximum length of 1 m
● Configuration of an incorrect BaseUnit
Note
All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior) at a
station stop. However, the interface module will continue to exchange data.
Diagnostics
The table below shows the incorrect configurations and their diagnostics:
Table 5- 10 Diagnostics
Identifier-related diag- Module status Cause Response

nostics
Slot 33 set, remaining Slot 33 with 11B: “"No • No server module All I/O modules and
slots not relevant module; invalid user interface modules fail
• More than 32 I/O
data" set
modules
• Defective backplane
bus
All 33 bits set 01B: "Module error; • Configuration > 1 m All I/O modules and
invalid user data" for all interface modules fail
modules
If the BaseUnit is configured incorrectly, the channel diagnostics "Parameter assignment

error" is signaled for the respective slot. Check the parameter "Potential group“ in the
parameters of the I/O module.

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 45
5.3 Alarms
5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D
Load voltage failure

If supply voltage fails on the BaseUnit BU...D, the I/O modules react as follows:
● A remove module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is removed during the failure of
the supply voltage.
● An insert module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is inserted during the failure of
the supply voltage.

46 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Compatibility 6
Valid firmware versions

The table below lists the valid firmware versions and their field of application for the I/O
modules.
I/O modules Firmware version Comment

DI 8x24VDC ST V1.0.1 As of this version, you have the option to oper-
DI 16x24VDC ST ate I/O modules after an IM 155-6 DP HF
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0) interface module.
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST
AI 4xI 2-,4-wire ST
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-,3-,4-wire HF
AQ 4xU/I ST

configuration.
potential group.


Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 47
Compatibility
Firmware update
A firmware update from V01.00.00 to V01.01.00 requires a preceding update of the IM 155-
6 DP HF boot code via the interim version S01.00.01. The firmware V01.01.00 is not
accepted by the IM 155-6 DP HF without an update of the boot code.
Procedure for a firmware update:
IM 155-6 DP HF with FW V01.00.00 is present
1. Update of boot code to S01.00.01 according to the description below
2. Update of the firmware to V01.01.00
Procedure for updating the boot code:
S01.00.01 is only intended for updating the boot code. It cannot be used to exchange data
with the interface module.
1. An update to S01.00.01 is made based on V01.00.00. Do not select "Activate firmware
after download"!
2. Switch the IM 155-6 DP HF off and on again.
Run, Error and Maintenance LEDs light up briefly twice.
The boot code update is complete when the Run LED flashes quickly (2 Hz) and the
Maintenance LED flashes slowly (0.5 Hz). If this LED pattern is present immediately after
switching on the device, the boot code is already up-to-date.
NOTICE:Do not disconnect the IM 155-6 DP HF from the power supply until the Run and
Maintenance LEDs flash as described.
3. Firmware update to V01.01.00.
Plugging and pulling (hot-swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules
NOTICE
Pulling and plugging (hot swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules during operation on S7-300
via PROFIBUS DP
Pulling and plugging of ET 200SP I/O modules is possible:
• as of STEP7 V5.5 SP3 HSP 242 and
• if “Operation at Preset <> Actual” parameter is enabled.
Note the following when operating the ET 200SP with S7-300 via PROFIBUS DP: Plugging
of ET 200SP I/O modules results in a brief station failure of the ET 200SP.
Note
ET 200SP I/O modules can be pulled and plugged without restrictions for all other DP master
systems if you enable the “Pull/plug module (OB83)" parameter.

48 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Compatibility
Communication module IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link
Note
Operation of the CM 4xIO-Link IO-Link Master communication module with the IM 155-
6 DP HF interface module is supported as of S7-PCT V3.1 and an updated module firmware
version/GSD file.

when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time = 2.3 ms
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark one, if an AC I/O module or
A light-colored BaseUnit must be inserted on the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module in order
to route the 24 V DC supply voltage via a fuse.
Note the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration.
1. This means that modules which do not have a connection to the integrated voltage buses
P1 and P2 can now also be configured starting with slot 1. This currently includes the
following modules:
● AI EnergyMeter ST (6ES7134-6PA00-0BD0)
● DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
● RQ 4x120..230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1), FW 1.1.0
● Configuration as of STEP7 V5.5 SP4 with
● Configuration as of STEP7 V13 SP1

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 49
Compatibility
Station extension via ET-Connection
Note
If a module on which the configuration control was activated with a valid control data record
is upgraded to FW version V3.0.0, the retentivity of the control data record is lost when the
firmware is updated. The control data record must be written again to the module in this
case.

50 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 DP HF
Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 DP HF
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Product type designation IM155-6DP HF with PROFIBUS connector and
server module
General information
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
Via data record Yes
Supply voltage
Voltage type of the supply voltage DC
Valid range low limit (DC) 19.2 V
Valid range high limit (DC) 28.8 V
Input current
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 244 bytes; per input/output
Address space per station, max. 244 bytes; per input/output

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 51
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Rack
Modules per rack, max. 32; + 16 ET 200AL modules
Interfaces
Number of interfaces PROFIBUS 1
1st Interface
Interface hardware
• RS-485 Yes
• Output current of interface, max. 90 mA
Protocols
Interface hardware
RS-485
Protocols
PROFIBUS
Services
• SYNC capability Yes
• FREEZE capability Yes
• DPV0 Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Status display Yes
Interrupts
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Monitoring of supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes; green PWR LED
Connection display DP Yes; green DP LED
between PROFIBUS DP and all other circuit com- Yes
ponents

52 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Permitted potential difference
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Ambient conditions
Connection system
ET connection
via BU/BA Send Yes; + 16 ET 200AL modules
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights

Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC 53
Dimension drawing A
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (front and side view)

54 Manual, 05/2015, A5E03916550-AC
0
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module Preface
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0) ___________________
___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module ___________________
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0)
___________
5
alarms
Manual
___________________
Compatibility 6
___________________
___________________
Dimension drawing A
07/2014
A5E03916550-AB
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03916550-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2014.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.

4 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Guide to documentation ............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview ....................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties..................................................................................................................................9
2.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................12
2.2.1 Functions ................................................................................................................................12
3 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.2 Block diagram .........................................................................................................................15
3.3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................16
4 Parameters/address space ...................................................................................................................... 17
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17
4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ .............................................................................18
4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................19
4.2.4 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................19
4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt ...............................................................................................19
4.3 Configuration control ...............................................................................................................19
4.3.1 Configuration control and control data record ........................................................................19
4.3.2 Feedback data record .............................................................................................................22
4.3.3 Configuring configuration control with empty slots .................................................................23
4.3.4 Configure configuration control without empty slots ...............................................................25
4.3.5 Expanding the configuration ...................................................................................................27
4.3.6 Combining configurations .......................................................................................................29
5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms .................................................................... 32
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................36
5.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................36
5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP..........................................................................................44
5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt .........................................................................45
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................45
5.3.1 Slave diagnostics ....................................................................................................................47
5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................48

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 5
Table of contents
5.3.3 Master PROFIBUS address ................................................................................................... 49

5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics .................................................................................................. 50
5.3.5 Module status ......................................................................................................................... 51
5.3.6 Channel diagnostics ............................................................................................................... 52
5.3.7 H status .................................................................................................................................. 53
5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP .......................................... 54
5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D ......................................................................... 54
6 Compatibility ............................................................................................................................................ 55
6.1 Compatibility of modules ........................................................................................................ 55
7 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................... 58
A Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................................. 61

6 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
areas.
Basic information
Device information
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics, technical specifications.
General information

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 7

your own manual.


systems.
macro files

8 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Article number 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 contains the following components:
● IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (6ES7155-6BU00-0CN0)
● Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)
● PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector (6ES7972-0BB70-0XA0)
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the 155-6 DP HF interface module with supplied accessories
Properties
● Connects the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP
● Supply voltage 1L+ 24 V DC (SELV/PELV)
● Bus connection via RS485 interface

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
● 32 I/O modules
Accessories
● Labeling strips
Server module
The server module is included in the product package of the interface module and available
● Provides station functions, e.g., status bytes
Note
You need to configure the server module in the configuration software.
To do so, place the server module with the required length of status bytes at the last slot of
the configuration. When there are 32 I/O modules, the server module is inserted at slot 33.
PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector

The PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector is included in the product package of the
interface module and also available separately as an accessory.

10 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Configuration with more than 244 bytes of parameter data

With a configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP 3 with HSP 242, you have the option of operating
the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module as of 6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0 in DPV1 mode with more
than 244 bytes of parameter data. Configuration with the GSD file does not offer this option.
Note
With a configuration as of STEP 7 V5.5 SP 3 with HSP 242 without GSD files, a longer
startup time of the station is to be expected.
Reference
You can find additional information on identification data in the ET 200SP distributed I/O

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 11
Product overview
2.2 Functions
2.2 Functions
2.2.1 Functions
Introduction
The interface module supports the following functions:
● PROFIBUS DP
● Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP
● Configuration control by means of the user program
● Operation as DPV1 slave
● Operation after Y-link
Requirements
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:

of the module of the module Configuration with GSD STEP 7 as of STEP 7
as of as of file V5.5 SP3 with (TIA Portal) as
(http://support.automation HSP 242 of V13
.siemens.com/WW/view/e
n/19698639/130000) /
software from a third-
party manufacturer1
Operation after Y-link 1 V1.1.0 X --- ---
Hot-swapping 1 V1.0.0 X X X
Station extension via 1 V3.0.0 X --- ---
ET-Connection

12 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Product overview
2.2 Functions
Properties
or options. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
Reference
● in the Configuration control (Page 19) section

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 13
Connecting 3
The table below shows the signal names and descriptions of the pin assignment of the
View Signal name1) Description

1L+ 24 V DC
1M Ground
1 1L+ and 2L+ as well as 1M and 2M are internally bridged.
PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface

The following table shows the signal names and descriptions of the terminal assignment of
the PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 3- 2 Terminal assignment PROFIBUS DP with RS485 interface

1 - -
2 - -
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B
4 RTS Request To Send
5 M5V2 DP data reference potential (from sta-
tion)
6 P5V2 Supply plus (from station)
7 - -
8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A
9 - -

14 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Connecting
3.2 Block diagram
Reference
You can find additional information on connecting the interface module and on the
accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
3.2 Block diagram

The following figure show the block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.
Figure 3-1 Block diagram of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 15
Connecting
Introduction
On the interface module (PROFIBUS), set the PROFIBUS DP address for PROFIBUS DP
using the DIP switch. By setting the PROFIBUS DP address, you specify where the
ET 200SP is to be addressed on the PROFIBUS DP.
Requirements
● Each PROFIBUS DP address may be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.
● Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
● The set PROFIBUS DP address must match the PROFIBUS DP address specified for the
ET 200SP in the configuration software.
Required tools
Screwdriver 3 - 3.5 mm
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

1. Slide the window of the interface module upwards.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the required PROFIBUS address via the DIP switch.
3. Close the window.
Figure 3-2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Changing the PROFIBUS DP address

You can change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change
in the PROFIBUS DP address only becomes valid for the ET 200SP after a POWER ON of
the interface module.

16 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module

The following table shows the parameters for the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.
Table 4- 1 Parameters for IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (GSD file)
Parameters Value range Default3 Effective range

Configuration control 1 Disable/enable Disable ET 200SP
Startup when preset/actual configuration Yes/No No ET 200SP
differ
Diagnostic interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP
Hardware interrupt Yes/No Yes ET 200SP
Insert/remove module interrupt2 Yes/No No ET 200SP
1 Note that the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter is
always activated when you use configuration control.
2 The remove/insert parameter is always activated in the GSD file.
3 The defaults apply to the default startup. If no other parameters are specified by the DP master,
the IM 155-6 DP HF starts up with these parameters.
Note
Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file, does not affect configuration with
STEP 7 via HSP:
Not all parameters of an I/O module are provided by the GSD file with GSD configuration,
because the PROFIBUS standard limits the number of parameters to 244 bytes per
ET 200SP. These parameters can be configured later using data record 128, if necessary.
The description is available in the respective manual of the employed I/O module.
Note
PROFIBUS GSD configuration with STEP 7 V5.5 SP3
• The universal module must not be configured.
• The DP-Alarm-Mode parameter must not be set to the value DPV0.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 17

Note
The "Configuration control" function can only be used if you set the parameter "Startup if
preset configuration does not match actual configuration" to yes at the same time.
Note
Configuring the enable
If you configure the enable, the ET 200SP distributed I/O system requires control data record
196 from the user program so that the ET 200SP distributed I/O system can operate the I/O
modules.
Reference
You can find additional information in the chapter Configuration control (Page 19) and in the
STEP 7 online help.
4.2.2 Startup when expected/actual config differ

If the parameter is enabled and
● modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure
of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
● If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, the ET 200SP
distributed I/O system continues to exchange data with the DP master.
If the parameter is disabled and
● modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the
● If the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, data exchange does
not take place between the DP master and the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.

18 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
4.3 Configuration control
4.2.3 Diagnostic interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts.
4.2.4 Hardware interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable hardware interrupts.
4.2.5 Insert/remove module interrupt

You can use this parameter to enable or disable insert/remove module interrupts.
4.3.1 Configuration control and control data record
Operating principle
Configuration control allows you to operate various real configurations (options) with a single
configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
The following versions are available:
● Configuration control with empty slots
● Configuration control without empty slots
● Expanding the configuration
Requirements
The "Configuration control" parameter must be selected during configuration for this function.
Control takes place using a control data record for specification of the required configuration.
Configuration control is not ready for operation without a control data record:
● All I/O modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system fail (substitute value behavior)
● The interface module continues to exchange data
● An error message is not triggered

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 19
Control data record

A control data record 196 that contains a slot assignment is defined for the configuration
control. The maximum slot of the configuration corresponds to the slot of the server module.
Table 4- 2 Control data record

0 Block length 4 + (number of slots × 2) Header
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Assignment of Real slot 1 Control element
configured slot 1 Describes in each
5 Additional function for slot 1 element which real
6 Assignment of Real slot 2 slot in the DP
configured slot 2 slave is assigned
to the configured
7 Additional function for slot 2 slot.
: : :
4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) Assignment of server Real server module slot
module slot
4 + ((max. slot - 1) × 2) + 1 Additional function for server module slot
Control element
Each element must include the following information about the slot:
● Assignment of configured slot ⇔ real slot
● Identification of an empty slot (BaseUnit with BU cover)
● Opening a new potential group (replacement of a BaseUnit BU...B to BU...D)
Table 4- 3 Code of control element
Byte Bit Meaning

Assignment of configured slot 0 to 6 0000000: Module not available
(e.g. 4, on even byte offset) 0000001 up to maximum slot: Real slot
7 1: An empty slot is possible (with BU cover)
Additional function for slot 0 1: Opening a new potential group. Replacing a BU...B
(e.g. 5, on uneven byte offset) with a BU...D.
If you set the bit, BU...D is configured. If you do not set a
bit for the slot, the previously assigned parameter is
taken from the configuration software for this.
1 to 7 Reserved

20 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Special features
There are some special features you have to observe:
● The control data record is retentively stored in the interface module.
● Slot entries outside the preset configuration are ignored.
● Configuration control is controlled by the interface module (slot 0).
● The control data record can be shortened. It must contain the entries up to the last slot of
the current preset configuration.
● Each real slot may only exist once in the data record.
Note
Modified configuration
The writing of a control data record with modified configuration triggers a station failure
followed by a restart of the station with the modified configuration.
● If you receive the error code 80B2H when you write the control data record 196, check
whether the desired configuration was adopted despite the error code.
● If control data record 196 was not yet written, a 1-to-1 mapping (configured slot → real
slot) is adopted internally. This mapping is used to generate the feedback data record.
Error messages
The control data record returns the following error messages, if needed:
Error code Meaning

80B1H Impermissible length

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 21
4.3.2 Feedback data record
Feedback data record

The feedback data record is mapped by means of a separate data record 197.
The feedback data record exists only when configuration control is configured and always
refers to the maximum quantity framework, i.e., 33 slots (32 I/O modules and the server
module). Partial reading is supported.
Table 4- 5 Feedback data record
Byte Element Code Meaning

0 Block length 70 Header
1 Block ID 197
2 Version 2
3 0
4 Status slot 1 1 Bit 0 = 0: Module removed or invalid
5 Reserved 0 Bit 0 = 1: Slot with correct module
6 Status slot 2 1 Bit 1 to 15: Reserved
7 Reserved 0
: : :
68 Status slot 33 Maximum slot (server module)
69 Reserved 0
Error messages
The feedback data record returns the following error messages, if needed:
Error code Meaning

80B1H Impermissible length

22 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
4.3.3 Configuring configuration control with empty slots
In configuration control with empty slots, BaseUnits are mounted for the non-required slots.
You must insert BU covers on the empty slots. These are not configured.
Figure 4-1 Configuring configuration control with empty slots
Note
In the configuration software, you must set for the BU covers whether these are on a light or
dark BaseUnit.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 23
Data record of the example

The following table shows the structure of the control data record for the above example.
Table 4- 7 Data record for the example "Configuring configuration control with empty slots"

1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 0000001B The configured slot 1 is real slot 1.
5 Additional function 1 0000000B ---
12 Slot 5 1000101B The configured slot 5 is real slot 5 (and an empty slot).

24 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
4.3.4 Configure configuration control without empty slots
The modules actually not required do not exist. The configuration is pushed together to the
left in the direction of interface module IM 155-6 DP HF.
Figure 4-2 Configure configuration control without empty slots

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 25

The following table shows the structure of the control data record for the above example.
Table 4- 8 Data record for example "Configure configuration control without empty slots"

1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
12 Slot 5 0000000B The configured slot 5 does not exist.

26 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
4.3.5 Expanding the configuration
Operating principle
You can add modules at the end of the configuration in this version. The configured
configuration can also be extended from the center based on freely selectable slot
assignment. A new potential group is also opened in this example.
Note
If you open a new potential group or replace a BaseUnit BU...B with a BU...D using
configuration control, you must adhere to the maximum electrical configuration (see the
Block diagram section).
Figure 4-3 Expanding the configuration

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 27

The following table shows the structure of the control data record for the example given
above.
Table 4- 9 Data record for "Expanding the configuration" example

1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
19 Additional function 8 0000001B A new potential group opens.
23 Additional function 10 0000101B A new potential group opens. This potential group
already exists as this light BU has already been
configured.
See also
Block diagram (Page 15)

28 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
4.3.6 Combining configurations
You can combine the different versions with configuration control.
Figure 4-4 Combining configurations

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 29

The following table shows the structure of the control data record for the example listed
above.
Table 4- 10 Data record for example "Combining configurations"
Byte Element Code for Code for Explanation

configuration 1 configuration 2
1 Block ID 196
2 Version 2
3 Version 0
4 Slot 1 0000001B 0000001B The configured slot 1 is real slot 1.
5 Additional function 1 0000000B 0000000B ---
12 Slot 5 0000000B 1000101B The configured slot 5 does not exist (configuration 1).
The configured slot 5 is real slot 5 and an empty slot
(configuration 2).
The configured slot 6 is real slot 6 and an empty slot
(configuration 2).
16 Slot 7 0000101B 0000111B The configured slot is real slot 5 (configuration 1).
The configured slot 7 is real slot 7 (configuration 2).
18 Slot 8 0000110B 0001000B The configured slot is real slot 6 (configuration 1).
20 Slot 9 0000111B 0001001B The configured slot 9 is real slot 7 (configuration 1).

30 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Byte Element Code for Code for Explanation

configuration 1 configuration 2

The substitute value behavior is implemented by the DP master per slot in the ET 200SP
The respective output reacts according to its configured substitute value behavior:
● Keep last value
● STOP DP master
● DP master failure (connection interruption)
● Firmware update
– No server module
● Deactivate DP slave
Note
new configuration to the CPU, the modules no longer configured but still present retain
their original substitute value behavior. This applies until the supply voltage on the
BaseUnit BU...D or on the interface module is switched off.

● Firmware update

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 31
alarms 5
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED display on the interface module:
① RN (green)
② ER (red)
③ MT (yellow)
④ DP (green)
⑤ PWR (green)
Figure 5-1 LED displays on the interface module


32 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
LEDs Meaning Remedy

RN ER MT
No or too little supply voltage at Check the supply voltage or switch it
Off Off Off interface module on at the interface module.1
On On On LEDs light up simultaneously for
approximately 0.25 s.
Flashes Off Off configuration software or the user
program.
Interface module is not configured. Configure the interface module with
the configuration software.
ters.
Not relevant Not relevant ET 200SP is currently exchanging -
On data with the DP master.
Not relevant Not relevant Group error and group error channels Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate
Flashes the error.
The preset configuration does not Check the configuration of the
match the actual configuration of the ET 200SP to see whether a module is
ET 200SP. missing or faulty, or whether a non-
configured module is inserted.
Invalid configuration states See the Invalid configuration states of
the ET 200SP on PROFINET DP
(Page 54) section.
Parameter assignment error in the Evaluate the display of the module
I/O module status in STEP 7 and correct the error
in the corresponding I/O module.
Not relevant Not relevant Maintenance is demanded. Perform maintenance
On
Hardware or firmware faulty.2 Run a firmware update. If the error
Flashes Flashes Flashes persists, contact Siemens Industry
Online Support.
1 PWR LED On (on interface module): Check the backplane bus for a short-circuit.
2 DP LED Off

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 33

No or too little supply voltage Check the supply voltage.
Off
On
LED DP on the RS485 interface
Table 5- 3 Status display of the DP LED
LED DP Meaning Remedy

There is no connection between the PROFIBUS Check whether the bus cable to the DP master is
Off interface of your PROFIBUS device and a broken.
communication partner (for example, DP master).
There is a connection between the PROFIBUS -
On interface of your PROFIBUS device and a
communication partner (for example, DP master).


34 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Operating principle
The LED error display provides information on the cause of the error. After a notification by
means of a flashing signal, the error type and then the error location/error code are displayed
in each case.
● is activated during POWER ON and during operation.
● has priority over all other states that are displayed by means of the ERROR- and
MAINT-LED.
● Remains on until the cause of the error has been eliminated.
1 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 0.5 Hz Indication of the error type
2 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of error type (decimal)
3 ERROR- and MAINT-LED flash 3x with 2 Hz Indication of error location/error code
4 ERROR-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the tens position (decimal) of the
5 MAINT-LED flashes with 1 Hz Display of the units position (decimal) of the
6 Repetition of 1 to 5 until the cause of the error has been eliminated.
Error display

1 65* • No server module Check the configuration
1 33* of the ET 200SP.
• Short-circuit on the backplane bus
* Slot
Note
connection supply:
• PWR-LED: On
• RN-, ER- and MT-LED: Off

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 35
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
5.2.1 Introduction
Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics indicates the interrupt type and the event that
led to an interrupt being triggered. The interrupt section comprises 62 bytes including an
interrupt header.
Position in the diagnostics frame

The interrupt section is located after the channel diagnostics.
Data record
The diagnostic data of a module are located in the data records 0 and 1:
● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that describe the current status of the
distributed I/O system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB 82 (local data bytes 8
to 11).
● Data record 1 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that are also available in data record 0.

36 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.2 Interrupts
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1:
Reading data records

DS0 and DS1 can be read with SFC 59 (RD_REC) or SFB 52 (RDREC). The data length of
DS 1 can be up to 240 bytes. In this case, DS1 includes up to 38 channel error entries.
Note the figures below in this section.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 37
5.2 Interrupts
Content
The contents of the interrupt information depend on the interrupt type:
● In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 58 bytes) is sent as
interrupt status information (starting from byte x+4).
● The length of the interrupt status information for hardware interrupts is 4 bytes.
Structure of interrupts
The figure below shows the structure of the interrupt section for the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system:
Figure 5-3 Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section

38 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.2 Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt:
Figure 5-4 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 39
5.2 Interrupts

Figure 5-5 Structure starting at byte x+8

The channel error entries start from byte x+14. A channel error entry is 6 bytes long and can
follow 8 times starting from byte x+14.
If you read the channel error entries using an SFB or SFC, 38 channel diagnostics are
possible.
Figure 5-6 Structure starting from byte x+14

40 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.2 Interrupts
The following table is used to explain the channel error entries:
Description
Channel number 0 … 63: Channel number for channel error
0x8000: Entire submodule
Channel properties Bit 0 to 7 00H: Free data type
01H: bit
02H: 2 bit
03H: 4 bit
04H: byte
05H: word
06H: Double word
07H to FFH: Reserve
Bit 8 0: Channel
1: Channel group
Bit 9, 10 00H: Diagnostics
01H: Maintenance demanded
02H: Maintenance required
03H: Reserve
Bit 11, 12 00H: Channel error-free
01H: Incoming diagnostics
02H: Outgoing diagnostics
03H: Outgoing diagnostics, but other diagnostics are also
pending on this channel
Bit 13 to 15 00H: Reserve
01H: Input channel
02H: Output channel
03H: Input/output channel
Channel error type Refer to respective manual for explanation.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 41
5.2 Interrupts
Example of a diagnostic interrupt


42 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.2 Interrupts
Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules

The figure below shows the structure starting at byte x+4 for the hardware interrupt:
Figure 5-9 Structure starting at byte x+4 for hardware interrupt

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 43
5.2 Interrupts
5.2.2 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200SP
Introduction
With certain process statuses/errors, the DP slave in each case creates an interrupt block
with the corresponding information in the diagnostics frame (DPV1 interrupt mechanism).
Regardless of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is displayed in the identifier-related
diagnostics, in the module status, and in the channel diagnostics.
Interrupts in DPV1 mode

● Diagnostic interrupts
● Insert/remove module interrupts

When an event comes or goes (e.g. wire break on a channel of an I/O module), the module
triggers a diagnostics interrupt if "Enable: diagnostic interrupt" is set.
The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic interrupt OB
(OB 82). The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the
diagnostic interrupt OB.

When a hardware interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and
processes the hardware interrupt OB, for example OB 40. The event that triggered the
interrupt is entered in the start information of the hardware interrupt OB.
Note
Do not use hardware interrupts for technological purposes (e.g., cyclical generation of

44 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.3 Alarms
5.2.5 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt

When an insert/remove module interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts execution of the user
program and processes the insert/remove module interrupt OB (OB 83). The event that
triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the insert/remove module interrupt
OB.
5.3 Alarms
Actions after a diagnostics alarm in DPV1 mode

The error is entered in the channel diagnostics in the diagnostics frame:
● In DPV1 mode, diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts.
● After a diagnostics alarm, this is
– entered in the diagnostics frame as diagnostic interrupt block (always for one interrupt
only).
– Stored in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU.
● OB 82 is called. If OB 82 does not exist, the CPU changes to STOP mode.
● Acknowledgment of diagnostic interrupt (a new interrupt is then possible)
Length of the diagnostics frame

● The maximum frame length for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system with IM155-6 DP HF
interface module (DPV1 mode) is 244 bytes.
● The minimum frame length is 6 bytes.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 45
5.3 Alarms
Table 5- 6 Reading out the diagnostics data with STEP 7

with DP master
SIMATIC S7/M7 Slave diagnostics data as plain text in "Diagnosing hardware" in the STEP 7
the "DP slave diagnostics" tab in the online help
STEP 7 user interface
Instruction "DP NRM_DG" (SFC 13) SFC, see STEP 7 online help
Reading out slave diagnostics (store
in the data area of the user program)
Instruction "RD_REC" (SFC 59) See System and Standard Functions
Reading out data records of the S7 reference manual
diagnostics data (store in the data
area of the user program)
Instruction "RDREC" (SFB 52) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system
Reading data records from the DP functions/function blocks)
slave
Instruction "RALRM" (SFB 54) SFB, see STEP 7 online help (system
Receiving interrupts from the interrupt functions/function blocks)
OBs

46 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.3 Alarms
5.3.1 Slave diagnostics

The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics.
Figure 5-10 Structure of the slave diagnostics
Note
The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 155-6 DP HF (depending on
parameter assignment) between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode.
You can identify the length of the last received diagnostics frame in STEP 7 from the
RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 47
5.3 Alarms
5.3.2 Station statuses 1 to 3

Station statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.
Bit Meaning Cause/Remedy

0 1: The DP slave is not responding to the • Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on the
DP master. DP slave?
• Is the bus connector plugged in?
• Is the DP slave connected to the voltage
supply?
• Is the RS485 repeater properly configured?
1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to • Wait; the DP slave is currently starting up.
exchange data.
2 1: The configuration data transferred from • Has the correct station type or the correct DP
the DP master to the DP slave does not slave configuration been entered in the
match the DP slave configuration. configuration software?
3 1: External diagnostics is available. (Group • Evaluate the ID-specific diagnostics, the
diagnostics display) module status, and/or the channel
diagnostics. As soon as all errors have been
eliminated, bit 3 is reset. The bit is set again
when there is a new diagnostics alarm in the
bytes of the aforementioned diagnostics.
4 1: The required function is not supported by • Check the configuration.
the DP slave (for example, changing the
PROFIBUS address by means of software).
5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the • Check the bus configuration.
response of the DP slave.
6 1: The DP slave type does not match the • Has the correct station type been entered in
software configuration. the configuration software?
7 1: Parameters have been assigned to the • The bit is always 1, for example, if you access
DP slave by a different DP master (not the the DP slave with the programming device or
one that currently has access to the DP another DP master.
slave).
• The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
that assigned parameters to the DP slave is
located in the "Master PROFIBUS address"
diagnostics byte.

48 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.3 Alarms
Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave parameters need to be reassigned.
1 1: A diagnostics alarm is present. The DP slave will not operate until the problem is
eliminated (static diagnostics alarm).
2 1: The bit on the DP slave is always "1".
3 1: The watchdog is activated for this DP slave.
4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command.1
5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command.1
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in
progress.
1 The bit is updated only if another diagnostics alarm also changes.
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always set to "0".
7 1: • There are more diagnostic alarms pending than the DP slave is able to store.
• The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostics alarms sent by the DP slave in its
(channel) diagnostics buffer.
5.3.3 Master PROFIBUS address

The master PROFIBUS address diagnostics byte contains the PROFIBUS address of the DP
master:
● That assigned parameters to the DP slave
● That has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is located in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 49
5.3 Alarms
5.3.4 Identifier-related diagnostics

The identifier-related diagnostics indicates whether modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system have errors or not. Identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise 8 bytes.
The figure below shows how the identifier-related diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:
Figure 5-11 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics

50 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.3 Alarms
5.3.5 Module status

The module status indicates the status of the configured modules and provides more
information on the identifier-related diagnostics with respect to the configuration. The module
status begins after the identifier-related diagnostics and comprises 17 bytes.
The following figure shows how the module status for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is
structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:
Figure 5-12 Module status structure

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 51
5.3 Alarms

Channel diagnostics provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the
identifier-related diagnostics. Channel diagnostics begins after the module status. Channel
diagnostics does not affect the module status.
The following figure shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system is structured with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module:
Figure 5-13 Structure of channel diagnostics
When a BaseUnit is incorrectly configured, mapping is made to channel diagnostics. The slot
is then apparent from the first byte. In this case, the error type is coded with 0x10 -
parameter error. All other fields are set to "0".

52 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
5.3 Alarms
5.3.7 H status
Requirements
The H status in the diagnostics frame supplies the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module only
when operated behind a Y link (e.g. IM 157) in DPV1 mode. This block can be passed over
during the evaluation of the diagnostics frame. The configuration is described in the following
section.
Structure of the H status

The following figure shows the structure of the H status of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface
module.
Figure 5-14 Structure of the H status

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 53
5.3 Alarms
5.3.8 Invalid configuration states of the ET 200SP on PROFIBUS DP
Incorrect configuration states

The following incorrect configuration states of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system lead to a
failure of the DP slave or prevent the start of data exchange.
● Faulty backplane bus (e.g., defective BaseUnit). No interrupt is generated when the
ET 200SP backplane bus is interrupted
● Configuration exceeds maximum length of 1 m
If a BaseUnit is configured incorrectly, all I/O modules fail and the interface module
continues to exchange data.
Diagnostics
The table below shows the incorrect configurations and their diagnostics:
Table 5- 10 Diagnostics
Identifier-related Module status Cause Response

diagnostics
Slot 33 set, remaining Slot 33 with 11B: "No • No server module All I/O modules and
slots not relevant module; invalid user interface modules fail
• More than 32 I/O
data" set
modules
• Defective backplane
bus
All 33 bits set 01B: "Module error; • Configuration > 1 m All I/O modules and
invalid user data" for all interface modules fail
modules
If the BaseUnit is configured incorrectly, the channel diagnostics "Parameter assignment

error" is signaled for the respective slot. Check the parameter "Potential group“ in the
parameters of the I/O module.
5.3.9 Load voltage failure on the BaseUnit BU...D
Load voltage failure

If supply voltage fails on the BaseUnit BU...D, the I/O modules react as follows:
● A remove module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is removed during the failure of
the supply voltage.
● An insert module interrupt is generated if an I/O module is inserted during the failure of
the supply voltage.

54 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Compatibility 6
Valid firmware versions

The table below lists the valid firmware versions and their field of application for the I/O
modules.
I/O modules Firmware version Comment

DI8 x DC24V ST V1.0.1 As of this version, you have the option to
DI16 x DC24V ST operate I/O modules after an IM 155-6 DP HF
(6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0) interface module.
DQ4 x DC24V / 2A ST
DQ8 x DC24V / 0.5A ST
DQ16 x DC24V / 0.5A ST
AI4 x I 2-,4-Draht ST
AI4 x U/I 2-Draht ST
AI4 x RTD/TC 2-,3-,4-Draht HF
AQ4 x U/I ST

configuration.
potential group.


Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 55
Compatibility
Firmware update
A firmware update from V01.00.00 to V01.01.00 requires a preceding update of the
IM 155-6 DP HF boot code via the interim version S01.00.01. The firmware V01.01.00 is not
accepted by the IM 155-6 DP HF without an update of the boot code.
Procedure for a firmware update:
IM 155-6 DP HF with FW V01.00.00 is present
1. Update of boot code to S01.00.01 according to the description below
2. Update of the firmware to V01.01.00
Procedure for updating the boot code:
S01.00.01 is only intended for updating the boot code. It cannot be used to exchange data
with the interface module.
1. An update to S01.00.01 is made based on V01.00.00. Do not select "Activate firmware
after download"!
2. Switch the IM 155-6 DP HF off and on again.
Run, Error and Maintenance LEDs light up briefly twice.
The boot code update is complete when the Run LED flashes quickly (2 Hz) and the
Maintenance LED flashes slowly (0.5 Hz). If this LED pattern is present immediately after
switching on the device, the boot code is already up-to-date.
NOTICE: Do not disconnect the IM 155-6 DP HF from the power supply until the Run and
Maintenance LEDs flash as described.
3. Firmware update to V01.01.00.
Removing and inserting (hot-swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules
NOTICE
Removing and inserting (hot swapping) of ET 200SP I/O modules during operation on
S7-300 via PROFIBUS DP
The removing and inserting of ET 200SP I/O modules is possible
• as of STEP7 V5.5 SP3 HSP 242 and
• enabled “Operation at Preset <> Actual” parameter.
Note the following when operating the ET 200SP with S7-300 via PROFIBUS DP: Inserting
of ET 200SP I/O modules results in a brief station failure of the ET 200SP.
Note
ET 200SP I/O modules can be removed and inserted without restrictions for all other DP
master systems if you enable the "Remove/insert module (OB83)" parameter.

56 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Compatibility
Note
Operation of the CM 4xIO-Link IO-Link Master communication module with the
IM 155-6 DP HF interface module is supported as of S7-PCT V3.1 and an updated module
firmware version/GSD file.
Value status (Quality Information QI)
Note
Value status (Quality Information QI)
The DI 8x24VDC HF (V1.1), DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (V1.1), AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS,
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (V1.1) and AQ 2xU/I HS I/O modules can evaluate the value
status (Quality Information QI). This function is in preparation for the use of these
I/O modules with the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module.

when calculating the reaction times of fail-safe modules: Maximum reaction time = 2.3 ms
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station may be a dark one, if an AC I/O module or
A light BaseUnit must be inserted on the slot of the first 24 V DC I/O module in order to route
the 24 V DC supply voltage via a fuse.
Note the type of the BaseUnits during the configuration.
Station extension via ET-Connection
Note
If a module on which the configuration control was activated with a valid control data record
is upgraded to FW version V3.0.0, the retentivity of the control data record is lost when the
firmware is updated. The control data record must be written again to the module in this
case.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 57
Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 DP HF
Table 7- 1 Technical specifications of the IM 155-6 DP HF
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Product type designation IM155-6DP HF with PROFIBUS connector and
server module
General information
Product function
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 / V13
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / -
Supply voltage
Voltage type of the supply voltage DC
Input current
Power loss
Address area
Address space per station, max. 244 bytes

58 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Interfaces
Number of interfaces PROFIBUS 1
1. Interface
Interface hardware
• RS-485 Yes
• Output current of interface, max. 90 mA
Protocols
Interface hardware
RS-485
Protocols
PROFIBUS
Services
• SYNC capability Yes
• FREEZE capability Yes
• DPV0 No
• DPV1 Yes
Status display Yes
Interrupts
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Connection display DP Yes; green DP LED
between PROFIBUS DP and all other circuit Yes
components
Insulation
Connection system
ET connection
via BU/BA Send Yes

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 59
6ES7155-6BA00-0CN0
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 74 mm
Weights

60 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB
Dimension drawing A
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing of the IM 155-6 DP HF interface module (front and side view)

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03916550-AB 61
Server module ___________________
Preface
(6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0) ___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
ET 200SP
Server module 4
___________________
Diagnostics alarms
(6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
Parameter data record 6
___________________
Dimensional drawing A
03/2015
A5E03575337-AB
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Server module (6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Parameters/address space ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................10
3.3.1 Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules ...........................................12
3.3.2 Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules ...........................................13
3.3.3 Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules ...................................14
3.3.4 Evaluating feedback voltage ...................................................................................................15
4 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................................ 17
6 Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 19
6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................19
A Dimensional drawing ............................................................................................................................. 21
A.1 Server module .........................................................................................................................21

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Documentation guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the server module
Properties
● Closes off the backplane bus of the ET 200SP
● Contains a support for 3 spare fuses (5 × 20 mm)
● Firmware update
● I&M identification data
● Reconfiguration in RUN
● Representation of the statuses of supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage (Page 15)
per slot.
● Retentive storage of device name for device replacement without topological
configuration of the IM 155-6 PN BA.
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file.
Function and properties Product version of the module Firmware version of the module
as of as of
Support of the IM 155-6 PN BA 1 V1.1.1

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
3.1 Parameters
Parameters for the server module

The effective range of the configurable parameter depends on the type of configuration.
Possible configuration: Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system.
When assigning parameters in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer
the parameter to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 19).
The following parameter settings are possible:
Table 3- 1 Configurable parameter and its default (GSD file)
Parameters Range of values Default Reconfiguration in Effective range with configuration

RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Group diagnostics: No • Disable No Yes ET 200SP ---
supply voltage L+
• Enable

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 9
Group diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

When you enable this parameter, the ET 200SP generates one diagnostic per potential
group (as group information) when the supply voltage L+ fails.
This function does not depend on enabling the parameter "Diagnostics: No supply voltage
L+" of the I/O modules.
The diagnostics is formed from the states of the supply voltage of the installed I/O modules
within the potential group.
Requirements
● All I/O modules must be inserted, i.e. the current configuration must not have any empty
slots.
● If no I/O modules are inserted on light-colored BaseUnits BU..D, the beginning of this
potential group is not recognized. The I/O modules of this potential group are therefore
part of the previous potential group.
If the I/O module is installed on the light-colored BaseUnit, the potential group is
detected, the diagnostics is reevaluated according to the potential group arrangement
and new diagnostics may be reported. The position of the light-colored BaseUnit remains
stored in the structure until the supply voltage 1L+ of the CPU/interface module is turned
off.
3.3 Address space
Introduction
You can read out the status of the supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage of I/O
modules via the address space of the server module:
● All I/O modules:
No supply voltage L+ or no I/O module available
● Additional digital output module HF:
feedback voltage present
Requirements
● The I/O module used must support monitoring of the supply voltage.
● The I/O module used must support monitoring of a feedback voltage.

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
3.3 Address space
Length of input data

The length of the input data depends on the CPU/interface module:
● Interface module with 12 I/O modules maximum configuration: 2/4 bytes
● Interface module with 32 I/O modules maximum configuration: 4/8 bytes
● CPU/interface module with 64 I/O modules maximum configuration: 8/16 bytes
Configurations
In the configuration software, you can select 3 configurations for the server module for
operation on the CPU/interface module:
● Configuration with disabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and disabled "Status of the
feedback voltage":
– The server module only has one diagnostics address.
● Configuration with enabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and disabled "Status of the
feedback voltage":
– The server module has 2/4/8 bytes of input data for the display of the status of the
supply voltage L+ of the inserted I/O modules.
– Display in the input data of the server module:
Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available
● Configuration with enabled "Status of the supply voltage L+" and enabled "Status of the
feedback voltage":
– The server module has 4/8/16 bytes of input data for the display of the status of the
supply voltage L+ and the status of the feedback voltage of the inserted I/O modules.
– Display in the input data of the server module:
Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available
Feedback voltage present/missing
Table 3- 2 Data length depending on configuration and maximum configuration
Maximum configuration "Status supply voltage" deactivated Activated Activated

"Status feedback voltage" deactivated Deactivated Activated
12 slots 0 2 4
32 slots 0 4 8
64 slots 0 8 16

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 11
3.3 Address space
3.3.1 Input data for interface modules with maximum 12 I/O modules
Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (2 bytes of input data)
You can read out the following status for each I/O module of the ET 200SP in the input data
(byte 0 to 1):
● Supply voltage L+ present/missing or I/O module available/not available (2 bytes)
Figure 3-1 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (2 bytes)
Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status detection of
the feedback voltage (4 bytes of input data)
(byte 0 to 3).
● Feedback voltage present/missing (2 bytes)
Figure 3-2 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status
detection of the feedback voltage (4 bytes of input data)
Note
• An inserted or missing server module always signals bit=0 for the slot.
• If the server module is missing, the input data is invalid.
• For I/O modules without feedback voltage monitoring, the bit for the feedback voltage is
the same as the bit for the missing supply voltage L+.

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
3.3 Address space
3.3.2 Input data for interface modules with maximum 32 I/O modules
(byte 0 to 3):
Figure 3-3 Supply voltage L+ missing or I/O module not available (4 bytes); feedback voltage not
available
(byte 0 to 7).
Figure 3-4 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled
status detection of the feedback voltage (8 bytes of input data)
Note

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 13
3.3 Address space
3.3.3 Input data for CPU/interface modules with maximum 64 I/O modules
(byte 0 to 7):
Figure 3-5 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ (8 bytes)
(byte 0 to 15):
Figure 3-6 Configuration with enabled status detection of the supply voltage L+ and enabled status
detection of the feedback voltage (16 bytes of input data)

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
3.3 Address space
Note
3.3.4 Evaluating feedback voltage
Ranges of error
Figure 3-7 Ranges of error of the supply voltage L+ and the feedback voltage

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 15
3.3 Address space
Feedback voltage
A feedback may occur, for example, due to a crossover in a cable of a digital output module
and depends on the target status of the supply voltage L+:
If the supply voltage L+ of the I/O module is greater than 6 V, this is entered in the input data
in the respective bit.
● Byte 2 and 3 (for 12 I/O modules and 4 bytes of input data)
● Byte 4 to 7 (for 32 I/O modules and 8 bytes of input data)
● Byte 8 to 15 (for 64 I/O modules and 16 bytes of input data)
The feedback voltage can be evaluated via the user program in the following cases:
Table 3- 3 Under what circumstances can the feedback voltage be evaluated via the user program?
Supply voltage L+ Status detection of supply Status detection of feed- Explanation

safely disconnected1 voltage L+ (input data) back voltage (input data)
Yes Not available: Bit = 0 Available: Bit = 1 The feedback voltage detected is in the
range 6 to 12 V (e.g. in the event of a
fault in the system)
Yes Available: Bit = 1 Available: Bit = 1 The feedback voltage detected is > 12 V
(e.g. in the event of a fault in the system)
1 This does not refer to the supply voltage applied to the BaseUnit, but, for example, to the status information of a safety
relay.

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Diagnostics alarms 4
A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event. The diagnostics alarms can, for
example, be read out in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes
with the user program.
Table 4- 1 Diagnostics alarms, their meanings and corrective measures
Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution

Server module with invalid 1BH General error • Replace the server module.
firmware version (< V1.1.1)
• Firmware update of the server module.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 17
Technical specifications of the server module
6ES7193-6PA00-0AA0
Dimensions
Width 7 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 36 mm
Weights

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Parameter data record 6
6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Parameter assignment in the user program

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN.
Changing parameters in RUN

The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.
STATUS output parameter

The module ignores errors that occurred during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a
corresponding error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
The description of the WRREC instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.
Structure of data record 128

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 19
6.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record
Header information
The following diagram shows the structure of the header information.
Figure 6-2 Header information
Parameters
The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter in byte 2.
Enable the parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
Figure 6-3 Structure of byte 2

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB
Dimensional drawing A
A.1 Server module
Dimensional drawing of the server module
① Contact plating of mounting rail
Figure A-1 Dimensional drawing of the server module

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03575337-AB 21
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA ___________________
Preface
(6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA
___________________
(6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
___________________
Parameter data record A
03/2015
A5E34941724-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

This manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
commissioning the system.
Conventions
CPU: The term "CPU" is used in this manual both for the central processing units of the S7-
1500 automation system and for interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA (6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Wiring and block diagram .......................................................................................................10
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................15
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 16
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................18
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................18
A Parameter data record .......................................................................................................................... 22
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record .............................................22

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0
View of the module
① Module type and name ⑦ Function class

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Color coding module type
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Function and firmware version
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Article number
⑥ LED for supply voltage
Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×24VDC BA module

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Digital input module with 8 inputs
● Supply voltage L+
● Sink input (PNP, sinking input)
● Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms (per channel)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1, 2
and 3
● Firmware update
Accessories
● Labeling strips
● Color identification labels
● Reference identification labels
● Shield connector
See also

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 9
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagram
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC BA module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
Information about wiring of the BaseUnit is available in the system manual ET 200SP
Note
You may use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
Note
The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
also during the configuration.
Note
The input channels provide values even without connected supply voltage L+. The
characteristic type 2 is only maintained with connected supply voltage L+.

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Wiring
Connection: 1-wire and 2-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the
digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1-
wire and 2-wire connection).
① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit
only)
④ Input electronics M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
colored BaseUnit is present)
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses PWR Power LED (green)
Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire and 2-wire connection of encoders

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 11
Wiring
Connection: 3-wire connection

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of the
digital input module DI 8x24VDC BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).
① 3-wire connection
② Color identification labels CCxx (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
DIn Input signal, channel n
24 V DC Encoder supply, channel n
L+ 24 V DC (feed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
M Ground
1 A to 10 A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
4.1 Parameters
DI 8x24VDC BA parameters
The effective range of the parameters that can be set depends on the type of configuration.
● Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU
● Distributed operation on PROFINET IO in an ET 200SP system
● Distributed operation on PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 22).
Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)
Parameter Value range Default Reconfigura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
No supply voltage L+
• Enable
Operating mode • Channel deactivated Channel Yes Channel Channel
activated
• Channel activated
Input delay • None 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module 1
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 13
Parameter Value range Default Reconfigura- Scope with configuration soft-

GSD file GSD file
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential No Module Module
the left module (dark- group of the left
colored BaseUnit) module
• Enable new potential

group (light-colored
BaseUnit)
1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP: The parame-
ter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maxi-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data record
128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 3
bytes.
Diagnostics: No supply voltage L+

Enabling of the diagnostics for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.
Operating mode
Determines whether a channel is activated or deactivated.
Input delay
This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are only
detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.
Potential group
You can use the "Potential group" parameter to specify whether the module is inserted in a
light-colored or dark-colored BaseUnit.
A potential group always starts with an I/O module that is inserted on a light-colored
BaseUnit. All modules inserted to the right of this on dark-colored BaseUnits belong to the
same potential group, because the dark-colored BaseUnits are supplied via the light-colored
BaseUnits.
The potential group ends before a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station.
See also

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space
Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8x24VDC BA.
Figure 4-1 Address space of DI 8x24VDC BA

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 15
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DI 8x24VDC BA.
② Channel status (green)
③ PWR (green)
Figure 5-1 LED displays

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 18).
DIAG LED
Table 5- 1 Error display of the DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module parameters not assigned
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics
Flashes
Channel status LED
Table 5- 2 Status display of the channel status LED
Channel status LED Meaning

Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Supply voltage L+ missing
Off
Supply voltage L+ present
On

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 17
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC BA digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupts
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Channel temporarily unavailable
● Parameter assignment error
● Load voltage missing
5.3 Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED flashes on the
module. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.

Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel.
• Incorrect parameter assignment.
Load voltage missing 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+. • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
• Check BaseUnit type
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or • Wait for firmware update
temporarily unavailable has been canceled. The module does not
• Restart the firmware update
read in process values in this state.

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC BA
6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0
Product type designation DI 8x24VDC BA
General information
• FW update possible Yes
Usable BaseUnits BU type A0

Color code for module-specific color identification CC01
label
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
as of version
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3
Operating mode
DI Yes
Counter No
Oversampling No
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 8 mA; without encoder supply
Current consumption, max. 70 mA; all channels supplied from encoder sup-
ply

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 19
6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V
Short-circuit protection Yes
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 700 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.6 W; 24 V, 8 inputs supplied via encoder supply
Address area
Address space per module, max. 1 byte
Input 1 byte
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Sinking/sourcing input Sinking input
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, type Yes
2
Pulse stretching No
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
For signal "0" -30 V to +5 V
For signal "1" +11 V to +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 6.8 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
For standard inputs
• Configurable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 /
20 ms (in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs,
depending on cable length)
For interrupt inputs
• Configurable No
For counter/technological functions

• Configurable No
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m
Unshielded, max. 600 m

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
6ES7131-6BF00-0AA0
Encoders
Connectable encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 2 mA
max.
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostic information can be read Yes
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit No
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For channel diagnostics No
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red DIAG LED
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels No
Between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing
See the manual ET 200SP BaseUnits

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 21
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record


The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data record
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

The module ignores errors that occur during the transfer of parameters with the "WRREC"
instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS
output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
The description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes is available in the STEP 7
online help.

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128
Header information
The figure below shows the structure of the header information.
Figure A-2 Header information

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA 23
Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 to 7.
Enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
Figure A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 7

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941724-AA
___________________
Preface
-6BF00-0BA0) ___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module ___________________
(6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
07/2014
A5E03574157-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

This device manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Functions that relate generally to the system are described in this manual.
The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports
you when commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Conventions
Note
handling of the product and on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support
the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks.
They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind,
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends
strongly that you regularly check for product updates.
DI 8x24VDC ST digital input module (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)

4 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties ....................................................................................................................................... 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.1 Terminal assignment ....................................................................................................................10
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram ............................................................................................................11
4.1 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................12
4.2 Explanation of the parameters .....................................................................................................14
4.3 Address space .............................................................................................................................15
5.1 Status and error display ...............................................................................................................16
5.2 Interrupts ......................................................................................................................................18
5.3 Diagnostics alarms .......................................................................................................................19
6.1 Technical specifications ...............................................................................................................20
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ............................................23

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 5
The documentation for the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system is arranged into
three areas.
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC distributed I/O system. ET 200SP. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
General information
SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control,
Web server.

6 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
Documentation guide

The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these
to your own manual.


The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for your
CAx or CAe systems.
● Product images, 2D dimension drawings, 3D models, internal circuit diagrams,
EPLAN macro files

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the module DI 8×24VDC ST
Properties
● Sink input (PNP)
● Configurable input delay 0.05 ms to 20 ms

8 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties
● Module-oriented selectable diagnostics

● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with IEC 61131,
type 1 and 3
● Firmware update
● Configuration in RUN
● PROFIenergy
Function Product version Firmware version

of the module as of of the module as of
Value status 1 V1.1.0
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 9
Wiring up 3
General terminal assignment
Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment
Terminal assignment for DI 8×24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0)

Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Explanation BaseUnit1 Color identification label
(terminals 1 to 16)
1 DI0 2 DI1 • DIn: Input signal, channel n A0
3 DI2 4 DI3 • L+: Encoder supply
5 DI4 6 DI5
7 DI6 8 DI7
9 L+ 10 L+
11 L+ 12 L+
CC01
13 L+ 14 L+
6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0
15 L+ 16 L+
L+ 24 VDC M M
2-wire 3-wire
Only with BaseUnits with AUX connections

(6ES7193-BU15-P16-A10-2D)
1 Usable BaseUnit types, can be identified by the last two digits of the article number.
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Also keep this in
mind during the configuration.
See also
You will find additional information on the BaseUnit types in the ET 200SP distributed

10 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
Wiring up
Figure 3-1 Schematic circuit diagram DI 8×24VDC ST

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 11
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for DI 8x24VDC ST

The effective range of the parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
configurations are possible:
● Central operation with an S7-1500 CPU
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of the parameter data record (Page 23).

12 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
4.1 Parameters
Table 4- 1 Settable parameters and their defaults (GSD file)
Parameters Value range Default Configuration Effective range

in RUN with configuration software,
e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 2
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module Module
• Enable
Short-circuit to ground
• Enable
wire break1
• Enable
Operating mode • Channel disabled Channel yes Channel Channel
enabled
• Channel enabled
Input delay • none 3.2 ms yes Channel Module
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential no Module Module
left module group of the
left module
• Allow new potential group
1 If you use a simple switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is
enabled in the open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ).
2 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a
PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these
parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above).
The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 13
Diagnostics no supply voltage L+

Diagnostics short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.
Diagnostics wire break

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to
be measured at the relevant input.
Operating mode
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled.
Input delay
This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected
if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.
Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with voltage supply feed-in is located in this slot (see system

14 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space
Configuration options
● Configuration 1: Without value status
● Configuration 2: With value status
Evaluating the value status

the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 1: No fault is present on the channel.
Bit = 0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If a fault/error occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 8×24VDC ST with
value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available
if the value status is enabled.
Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 8×24VDC ST with value status

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 15
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DI 8x24VDC ST.
③ PWR (green)
Figure 5-1 LED display

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for
dealing with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 19).

16 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
DIAG LED
Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault/error display
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED
Channel status Meaning

LED
Process signal = 0
off
Process signal = 1
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 17
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC ST digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
Diagnostics interrupt
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt for the following events:
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● No load voltage

18 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC

A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the
module flashes. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics
buffer of the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.
Table 5- 4 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them
Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy

Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update • Wait for firmware update
unavailable has been cancelled.
The module reads no process values in
this state.
Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct the process wiring
Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables with
larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and Connect the cable
sensor
Channel not connected (open) • Disable diagnostics
• Connect a resistor of 25 kilohms to
45 kilohms to the encoder contacts
Parameter 10H • The module cannot evaluate Correct the parameter assignment
assignment error parameters for the channel.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+
on the BaseUnit

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 19
Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC ST
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
Product type designation DI 8x24VDC ST
General information
Color code for module-specific color identification label CC01
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V11 SP2 / V13
Supply voltage
Input current
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes

20 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Address space per module, max. 1 byte; + 1 byte for QI information
Fieldbus connection via separate transceiver Yes
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, type 1 Yes
Input voltage
Rated value, DC 24 V
For signal "0" -30 to 5 V
For signal "1" 11 to 30 V
Permitted voltage at input, min. -30 V
Permitted voltage at input, max. 30 V
Input current
For standard inputs
• Configurable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms (in each
case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending on cable length)
Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 1000 m
Cable length unshielded, max. 600 m
Encoders
Supported encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), max. 1.5 mA
Interfaces
Number of RS 485 interfaces 0
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break Yes
Short-circuit Yes

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 21
6ES7131-6BF00-0BA0
Diagnostics display LED
Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC (basic isolation)
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 VDC (type test)
Degree of protection and protection class
IP (rear) IP20
Use in hazardous areas
Explosion protection category for gas ATEX II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
Associated equipment (Ex ia) No
Associated equipment (Ex ib) No
Environmental conditions
Operating temperature
Horizontal installation, min. 0℃
Horizontal installation, max. 60 ℃
Vertical installation, min. 0℃
Vertical installation, max. 50 ℃
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Information for market places
Digital inputs/outputs, configurable Yes
Dimension drawing
See manual ET 200SP BaseUnits

22 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record


The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using
data record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which
means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.
Output parameter STATUS

If errors occur when transferring parameters with the "WRREC" instruction, the module
continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. The STATUS output
parameter contains a corresponding error code.
You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 23
Note
Channel 0 contains the diagnostics for the entire module.
Header information

24 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC
Parameters
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574157-AC 25
Digital input module ___________________
Preface
DI 8x24VDC HF ___________________
(6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC
___________________
HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E03576305-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622) system manual.
Functions that generally relate to the system are described in this system manual.
Conventions
CPU: When the term "CPU" is used in this manual, it applies to the CPUs of the S7-1500
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP
Note
should be paid.
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HF (6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................27

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
You can download the product information free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864).

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport" you can store filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and put together
your personal library in the Documentation area. Furthermore, your data is automatically
filled into support requests and you always have an overview of your current requests.
You need to register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" in the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area of "mySupport", you have the possibility to combine complete
manuals or parts of them to make your own manual.
You can export the manual in PDF format or in an editable format.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation in the Internet
"mySupport" - CAx Data

In the CAx Data area of "mySupport", you can have access the latest product data for your
CAx or CAe system.
macro files
You can find "mySupport" - CAx Data in the Internet
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
You can find the application examples on the Internet

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module DI 8×24VDC HF

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Sink input (PNP, active high)
● Configurable diagnostics (per channel)
● Configurable hardware interrupts (per channel)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1
and 3
● Pulse stretching
● Firmware update
Product version of the module Firmware version of the

Function as of module as of
Isochronous mode 1 V1.1.0
Module-internal Shared Input (MSI) 1 V1.2.0
Configurable submodules/ 1 V2.0.0
submodules for shared device
Accessories
The following accessories are supplied with the module and can also be ordered separately
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification labels
See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual Distributed I/O
System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Wiring 3
3.1 Wiring and block diagrams
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC HF module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection in the DI operating mode. You can
use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 11
Wiring
Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example of the terminal assignment of
the digital input module DI 8×24VDC HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1- and 2-wire connection).
① 1-wire connection L+n Encoder supply, channel n

② 2-wire connection L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
③ Backplane bus interface DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
④ Input electronics .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
⑤ Color-coded label with color code CC01 (optional) PWR Power LED (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light F0 to F7 Channel fault LED (red)
BaseUnit)
M Ground P1, P2, Internal self-configuring voltage buses
AUX Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)
Image 3-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Wiring
Wiring: 3-wire connection

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital input module
DI 8×24VDC HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).
② Color-coded labels with color code CC01 and CC73 (optional)
③ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light BaseUnit)
L+n Encoder supply, channel n
DC 24 V Supply voltage L+ (infeed only with light BaseUnit)
M Ground
1A ... 10A AUX terminals
P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
Image 3-2 Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 13
4.1 Parameters
GSD file parameters

Specify the module properties with the various parameters in the course of your STEP 7
configuration. The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of
the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following
● Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP in an ET 200SP system
the parameters to the module by means of data records (see chapter Parameter assignment
and structure of the parameter data record (Page 33)).
Table 4- 1 Parameters for DI 8x24VDC HF (GSD file)
Parameter Range of values Default Configuration Scope with configuration software,

in RUN e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
wire break1
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
4.1 Parameters
Parameter Range of values Default Configuration Scope with configuration software,

in RUN e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Input delay • None 3.2 ms Yes Channel Module
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Pulse stretching • None None Yes Channel -
• 0.05 s
• 0.1 s
• 0.2 s
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s
Hardware interrupt • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
rising edge
• Enable
falling edge
• Enable
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential No Module Module
left module (module group of the
plugged into a dark- left module
colored BaseUnit)
group (module plugged in-
to light-colored BaseUnit)
1 If you use a floating switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the
open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ).
2 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The parame-
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using data records 0 to
7 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is
6 bytes.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 15

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to ground

Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs.
Diagnostics: Wire break

Enabling diagnostics if the line to the encoder is interrupted.
Channel activated
Input delay
In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input
data). The read-in time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time was configured.
For input channels with longer input delays, the read-in time is moved accordingly. This
means individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a
negative impact on the possible cycle time.
Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is no input delay configured for at least
one channel.
Pulse stretching
Pulse stretching is a function used to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input
is stretched to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, the pulse is not changed.
In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at time Ti (time for reading in the input
data), i.e. smaller pulses than T_DC (data cycle) are not recognized in certain cases.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Principle of pulse stretching

The figure below uses examples to show whether and how input pulses are changed.
T1 Pulse stretching parameter
Image 4-1 Principle of pulse stretching
Hardware interrupt, rising edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated by a rising edge.
Hardware interrupt, falling edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated by a falling edge.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 17
Potential group
A potential group consists of a group of directly adjacent I/O modules within an ET 200SP
station, which are supplied via a common supply voltage.
A potential group begins with a light-colored BaseUnit through which the required voltage is
supplied for all modules of the potential group. The light-colored BaseUnit interrupts the
three self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX to the left neighbor.
All additional I/O modules of this potential group are plugged into dark-colored BaseUnits.
You take the potential of the self-assembling voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX from the left
neighbor.
A potential group ends with the dark-colored BaseUnit, which follows a light-colored
BaseUnit or server module in the station configuration.
See also
You can find additional information in the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see following table. Depending on the
configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input.
Configuration options of DI 8x24VDC HF

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. If you configure
the module by means of a GSD file, the configurations are available under various short
designations/module names; see the table below. The following configurations are possible:
Table 4- 2 Configuration options with GSD file
Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
name in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.0 X X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.1, QI X X ---
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2, MSI X X ---
for module-internal Shared Input
with up to 4 submodules
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V1.2, QI X X ---
1 x 8-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0 --- X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, MSI --- X ---
for module-internal Shared Input
1 x 8-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, QI --- X ---
2 x 4-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 --- X ---
2 x 4-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 --- X ---
QI
4 x 2-channel without value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 --- X ---
4 x 2-channel with value status DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 --- X ---
QI

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 19
4.3 Address space
Note
The following functions are only fully available when the submodule X.1 is configured and
the IO controller to which submodule X.1 is assigned has established a connection to the
IO device.
• Firmware update
• I&M identification data
• PROFIenergy
2 x 4- / 4 x 2-channel configuration
For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into submodules. The
submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a shared
device.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Read the
information in the manual for the particular interface module.
Value status (Quality Information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names:
● DI 8x24VDC HF QI,
● DI 8x24VDC HF MSI
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The value status bit
indicates if the read in digital value is valid. (0 = value is incorrect).
Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 8-channel
module without value status.
Image 4-2 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF without value status

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a 8-
channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module.
The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address.
Image 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF QI with value status
Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF MSI

The channels 0 to 7 of the module are copied in up to four submodules with configuration
1 x 8-channel module (Module-internal shared input, MSI). Channels 0 to 7 are then
available with identical input values in various submodules. These submodules can be
assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each
IO controller has read access to the same channels.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Please
observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module.
Value status (Quality Information,QI)

The meaning of the value status depends on the submodule on which it occurs.
For the 1st submodule (=basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is
incorrect.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value
is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 21
4.3 Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with submodule 1, 2, 3 and
4 and the value status.
Image 4-4 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DI 8x24VDC HF MSI with value status

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 2 x 4-channel
Image 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 without
value status
Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI

Each of the two submodules has a freely assignable start address.
Image 4-6 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.2 QI with
value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 23
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4

Image 4-7 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 without
value status
Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI

Each of the four submodules has a freely assignable start address.
Image 4-8 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DI 8x24VDC HF V2.0, S.4 QI with value status

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the DI 8x24VDC HF.
③ Channel error (red)
④ PWR (green)

25 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 29).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Module not ready for operation (no parameters assigned)
Flashes
Module parameters assigned and no module/channel diagnostics
On
Module parameters assigned and module/channel diagnostics
Flashes
LED channel status/channel error
Table 5- 2 Status / error display of the LED channel status / channel error
LED channel LED channel Meaning

status error
Channel deactivated or process signal = 0
Off Off
• No supply voltage present or
On Off • Process voltage > 11 V is present regardless of whether or
not the channel is activated and regardless of whether diag-
nostics was detected
Supply voltage is available and process voltage < 11V is pre-
Off On sent regardless of whether or not the channel is activated and
regardless of whether diagnostics was detected
Channel activated and diagnostics enable was recognized
On On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Missing supply voltage L+
Off
On

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The digital input module DI 8×24VDC HF supports hardware and diagnostics alarms.
Diagnostics interrupts
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● Supply voltage missing
● Hardware interrupt lost
Evaluating hardware interrupts with IO controller

The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following events:
● At positive edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● At negative edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the
IO controller.
You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7
online help.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of double
word 8 in local data.
Image 5-2 Start information of the organization block

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 27
5.2 Interrupts
Structure of the additional interrupt information
Table 5- 4 Structure of USI = W#16#0001

USI W#16#0001 User Structure Identifier: Additional interrupt 2
information for hardware interrupts of the I/O
module
The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#07 Channel 0 to 7 of the I/O module 1
It follows the error event that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Error event B#16#01 Positive edge 1
B#16#02 Negative edge

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is generated and the DIAG-LED flashes on the module for each
diagnostics event. You can read out the diagnostics alarms, for example, in the diagnostics
Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and corrective measures

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at sensor supply Correct the process wiring
Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables with
sensor
• Connect a resistor of 25 kohms to
45 kohms to the encoder contacts
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
error ters for the channel.
Supply voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
Hardware interrupt lost 16H The module cannot trigger an interrupt • Change interrupt processing in the
because the previous interrupt was not CPU and, if necessary, edit the mod-
acknowledged; possible configuration ule parameters.
error
• The error persists until the module is
assigned new parameters
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
temporarily unavaila- or has been canceled. The module does
• Restart the firmware update.
ble not read in process values in this state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 29
Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC HF
6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DI 8x24VDC HF, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13 SP1 / -
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 / -
PCS 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V8.1 SP1
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD revision 5
Operating mode
DI Yes
Counter No
Oversampling No
MSI Yes
Supply voltage
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Output voltage encoder supply, min. 19.2 V
Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 30
6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 8 bytes; 2 channels per submodule + QI infor-
mation
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Sinking/sourcing input Yes; reading p
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, Yes
type 1
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, No
type 2
type 3
Pulse stretching Yes; as of 4 µs pulse duration
• Length 2 s; 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s
Edge evaluation Yes, rising edge, falling edge, edge change
Input voltage
For signal "0" -30 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For standard inputs
• Configurable Yes; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 / 20 ms
(in each case + delay of 30 to 500 µs, depending
on cable length)
for counters/technological functions
• Configurable No
Cable length
Encoders
Supported encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 1.5 mA
max.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 31
6ES7131-6BF00-0CA0
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Filtering and processing time (TCI), min. 420 µs
Jitter, max. 8 µs
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes; channel-based
Hardware interrupt Yes, configurable, channels 0 to 7
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage Yes
Monitoring of the encoder supply Yes; channel-based

Wire break Yes; channel-based
Short-circuit Yes; channel-based
For channel diagnostics Yes; red LED
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and voltage supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
The data record of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. With data record 128, you can
reconfigure the module in your user program regardless of your programming. This means
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via PROFIBUS-
GSD.
With data records 0 to 7, you can reconfigure individual channels.
Operation of the module behind a PROFIBUS DP interface module

If the module is operated behind a PROFIBUS DP interface module, the parameter data
records 0 and 1 cannot be read back. You obtain the diagnostics data records 0 and 1 with
the read back parameter data records 0 and 1. You can find additional information in the
Interrupts section of the PROFIBUS DP interface module manual on the Internet

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN (e.g. "Switch on diagnostics" can be
changed in RUN).

128 or data records 0 to 7. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU,
which means that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module and diagnostics are pending prior to the reconfiguration, these
diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

online help.

33 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Data record structure
Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7
Header information
Image A-2 Header information

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Parameters
Image A-3 Structure of byte x to x+2 for channels 0 to 7

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD 35
Error transmitting the data record

The module always checks all values of the data record to be sent. The module applies the
values from the data record only when all values have been transmitted without errors.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error code if there
are errors in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for parameter
data record 128.
Error code in the STATUS pa- Meaning Solution

rameter
(hexadecimal)
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3
DF 80 B0 xx Number of the data record unknown Enter valid number for data record.
DF 80 B1 xx Length of the data record incorrect Enter valid value for data record length.
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether the
module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parameters
of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header Correct the version, length and number of pa-
information rameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module

36 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576305-AD
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS ___________________
Preface
(6ES7131‑6BF00‑0DA0) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Operating mode DI 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS
___________________
Counting operating mode
4
(6ES7131‑6BF00‑0DA0) (CNT)
___________________
Oversampling (OVS)
operating mode 5
Manual
___________________
___________________
Parameter data records A
03/2015
A5E35243810-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you
when commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC HS (6ES7131‑6BF00‑0DA0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide ................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide..............................................................................................7
2 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 Properties................................................................................................................................10
3 Operating mode DI .................................................................................................................................. 13
3.1 Wiring up .................................................................................................................................13
3.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................13
3.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................16
3.2.1 High-speed inputs ...................................................................................................................16
3.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
3.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................19
3.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................22
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................23
3.3.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................23
3.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................26
4 Counting operating mode (CNT) .............................................................................................................. 28
4.1 Connecting ..............................................................................................................................28
4.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams .....................................................................................................28
4.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................31
4.2.1 Counting ..................................................................................................................................31
4.2.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................33
4.2.3 Explanation of parameters ......................................................................................................35
4.2.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................39
4.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface ........................................................................................39
4.2.4.2 Assignment of the feedback interface.....................................................................................41
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................44
4.3.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................44
4.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................47

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 5
Table of contents
5 Oversampling (OVS) operating mode ...................................................................................................... 48

5.1 Connecting ............................................................................................................................. 48
5.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams..................................................................................................... 48
5.2 Parameters/address space .................................................................................................... 51
5.2.1 Oversampling ......................................................................................................................... 51
5.2.2 Parameters............................................................................................................................. 53
5.2.3 Explanation of parameters ..................................................................................................... 55
5.2.4 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 57
5.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages ............................................................................................. 58
5.3.1 Status and error display ......................................................................................................... 58
5.3.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 61
5.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 61
A Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................... 66
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode ........ 66
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating
mode ...................................................................................................................................... 70
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling
operating mode ...................................................................................................................... 75

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
1.1 ET 200SP Documentation Guide
areas.
Basic information
Device information

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 7
Documentation guide
General information

your own manual.

systems.
macro files

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 9
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
View of the module
① Module type and name ⑦ LED for supply voltage

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Function class
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Color coding module type
④ I/O chart ⑩ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Color code to select the color identification labels
⑥ LEDs for operating mode ⑫ Article number
Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×24VDC HS module

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Digital input module with 8 high-speed inputs
● Sink input (PNP)
● Module-specific configurable diagnostics for supply voltage and short-circuit to M
type 1 and 3
● Three operating modes:
Table 2- 1 Operating modes of the DI 8×24VDC HS
Property Operating mode

DI (Page 13) Counting (CNT) Oversampling (OVS)
Without value status With value status (Page 28) (Page 48)
(QI) (QI)
Number of channels 8 8 4 8
Isochronous mode Optional, starting Optional, starting Optional, starting Required, starting
from 250 μs) from 250 μs) from 250 μs) from 250 μs)
Values per cycle 1 1 1 Configurable,
2-32
Min. resolution 250 μs 250 μs 250 μs 7.8125 μs
Counter length, max. counting — — 32-bit, 10 kHz * —
frequency
Configurable input delay 0 ms ... 20 ms 0 ms ... 20 ms 0.05 ms - 20 ms 0 ms ... 20 ms
Configurable hardware inter- × × — —
rupts; rising edge and/or falling
edge (per channel)
Data length Inputs 1 byte 2 bytes 25 bytes 32 bytes
Outputs 0 bytes 0 bytes 20 bytes 0 bytes
* If a diagnostic event occurs, the maximum counting frequency is reduced to 9 kHz.

● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties
The module can be configured with HSP or a GSD file. The configurations for the operating
modes can be found under various codes / module names:
Table 2- 2 Codes / module names for the configuration options
Operating mode Configuration software

HSP0127 for STEP 7 HSP0229 for STEP 7 GSD file GSD file
(TIA Portal) PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
DI Without DI 8×24VDC HS DI 8×24VDC HS DI 8×24VDC HS DI 8×24VDC HS
QI DI/OVS
With QI DI 8×24VDC HS QI —
Counting (CNT) DI 8×24VDC HS CNT DI 8×24VDC HS CNT DI 8×24VDC HS CNT
Oversampling DI 8×24VDC HS — —
(OVS) * DI/OVS
* The interface module or CPU with which the module is used must support isochronous mode.
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI 3
3.1 Wiring up
3.1.1 Wiring and block diagrams

This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8x24VDC HS with the pin assignments for
1, 2 and 3-wire connection in DI operating mode. You may use and combine the different
wiring options for all channels.
Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Note
The module's load group must start with a light BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also during the
configuration.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 13
Operating mode DI
3.1 Wiring up

The figure below shows the block diagram and an example of pin assignment for the
DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1 and 2-wire connection).

③ Backplane bus interface DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red)
④ Input electronics .0 to .7 LED channel status (green)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) PWR LED power (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with CNT LED operating mode Count (green)
light BaseUnit)
M Ground OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green)
DIn Input signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-configuring voltage buses
Figure 3-1 Pinout and block diagram for 1 and 2-wire connection of encoders

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI
3.1 Wiring up

The figure below shows an example of pin assignment for the DI 8×24VDC HS digital input
module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).
② Color-coded labels CCxx (optional)
M Ground
Figure 3-2 Pinout and block diagram for 3-wire connection of encoders

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 15
Operating mode DI
3.2 Parameters/address space
3.2.1 High-speed inputs
Function
In operating mode DI, use all eight channels as digital high-speed inputs. High-speed inputs
make sense when rapid reactions to input signals are needed (reaction time < 2 ms).
Requirement
Low reaction times require a cycle time of less than 750 µs.
3.2.2 Parameters
In addition to configuration via the configuration software, you can also configure parameters
in RUN mode (dynamic) via the user program. When assigning parameters in the user
program, use the "WRREC" instruction to transfer the parameters to the module using the
data records; refer to the section Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data
record for DI operating mode (Page 66).

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI
The following parameter settings are possible for each operating mode:
Table 3- 1 Configurable parameters in DI operating mode
Parameters Value range Default Configu- Effective range with configuration

ration in software
RUN HSP0127 for PROFIBUS
STEP 7 (TIA Portal); DP GSD file
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET IO GSD
file
left module group of the left
module
Operating mode1 • DI / Oversampling — no Module Module
• Counting
• Enable
• Enable
Channel enabled • Disable Enable yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Input delay • None 3.2 ms yes Channel Module 2
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
Pulse stretching • None None yes Channel —3
• 0.05 s
• 0.1 s
• 0.2 s
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 17
Operating mode DI

ration in software
RUN HSP0127 for PROFIBUS
STEP 7 (TIA Portal); DP GSD file
HSP0229 for
STEP 7;
PROFINET IO GSD
file
Hardware interrupt: • Disable Disable yes Channel —3
rising edge
• Enable
Hardware interrupt: • Disable Disable yes Channel —3
falling edge
• Enable
1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module
name.
2 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record"
function, you can set this parameter via data record 128.
3 If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter for each channel
via data record 128.

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI
3.2.3 Explanation of parameters
Potential group
Specifies whether the a light BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located in this slot
(see system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated:
● DI / Oversampling (Page 48)
● Counting (Page 28)
When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is
specified by selecting the module name.


Channel enabled
Determines whether a channel is enabled or disabled. If a digital input is disabled, the
module ignores its signals.
Pulse stretching
Pulse stretching is a function used to change a digital input signal. A pulse on a digital input
is stretched to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, the pulse is not changed. With Pulse stretching, you can reliably detect
very short input signals without having to use a correspondingly short cycle time.
In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for reading the input
data). In some cases, pulses that are shorter than the cycle time (send clock) are not
detected.
If you want to detect short signals isochronously, the Oversampling operating mode is
recommended. Oversampling also provides more precise information about the time at
which a signal occurs.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 19
Operating mode DI

The figure below uses examples to show whether and how input pulses are changed.
Figure 3-3 Principle of pulse stretching

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI
Input delay
This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if
they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time.
one channel. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for
reading the input data). The read time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time
was configured.
For input channels with longer input delays, the read time is moved accordingly. This means
individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative
impact on the possible cycle time.
Note
If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded
cables for connection of the digital inputs.
Hardware interrupt: rising edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated for a rising edge.
Hardware interrupt: falling edge

Specifies whether a hardware interrupt is generated for a falling edge.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 21
Operating mode DI
3.2.4 Address space
Address space with value status (Quality Information, QI)

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality
Information (QI)). "IB x" represents the start address of input byte x.
The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled.
Figure 3-4 Address space with value status

the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are each assigned to a channel. They provide

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI
3.3 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms
3.3.1 Status and error display
LED display
The figure below shows the LED display of the DI 8×24VDC HS.
③ CNT (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ OVS (green)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 23
Operating mode DI

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures
for dealing with diagnostic interrupts can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms
(Page 27).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
CNT LED
Table 3- 4 Status display of the CNT LED
CNT LED Meaning

Counting operating mode disabled
Off
Counting operating mode enabled
On

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI
OVS LED
Table 3- 5 Status display of the OVS LED
OVS LED Meaning

Oversampling operating mode disabled
Off
Oversampling operating mode enabled
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 25
Operating mode DI
3.3.2 Interrupts
The digital input module DI 8×24VDC HS supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● No load voltage

● At rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● At falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the
IO controller.
with the instruction "RALARM" (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help.
The channel of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start
information of OB40 in the OB40_POINT_ADDR tag. The following figure shows the
assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data.
Figure 3-6 OB40_POINT_ADDR tag

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Operating mode DI

info for hardware interrupts of the I/O module
It follows the error event that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Error event B#16#01 Positive edge 1
B#16#02 Negative edge

A diagnostic interrupt is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes. The diagnostic interrupts can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of
the CPU. You can evaluate the error codes with the user program.
Table 3- 8 Diagnostic interrupts, their meaning and how to deal with them
Diagnostic interrupt Error code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit to ground at encoder supply Correct process wiring
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct parameter assignment
ment error ters for the channel/module.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
Hardware interrupt 16H • Module cannot send an interrupt be- Change interrupt processing in the CPU
lost cause a previous interrupt has not and re-assign module parameters corre-
been processed spondingly
• Possible cause: Too many hardware

interrupts in too short a time
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable has been canceled.
this state.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 27
Counting operating mode (CNT) 4
4.1 Connecting

This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8×24VDC HS module with the pin
assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in counting operating mode. You may use and
combine the different wiring options for all channels.
Note
configuration.

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Counting operating mode (CNT)
4.1 Connecting

DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1 and 2-wire connection).
① 1-wire connection DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red)

② 2-wire connection .0 to .7 LED channel status (green)
③ Backplane bus interface PWR LED power (green)
④ Input electronics CNT LED operating mode Count (green)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with light DI0 - DI3 Counter input, channels 0-3
BaseUnit)
M Ground DI4 Direction input or gate input for DI0, channel 4
L+n Encoder supply, channel n DI5 Direction input or gate input for DI1, channel 5
L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light BaseUnit) DI6 Direction input or gate input for DI2, channel 6
P1, Internal self-configuring voltage buses DI7 Direction input or gate input for DI3, channel 7
P2, Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)
AUX Connection to the left interrupted (light BaseUnit)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 29
4.1 Connecting

M Ground

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
4.2.1 Counting
Function
Counting refers to the detection and summation of events. The respective counters of the
module detect encoder signals and pulses and evaluate them accordingly, for example:
● For counting general piece goods up to a maximum limit
● For applications with recurring counting processes
You can count with DI0 through DI3. You can specify each counter's characteristics using the
functions described below.
Counter limits
The counting limits define the counter value range used. The counter limits are configurable
and can be modified during runtime using the user program.
The maximum possible counting limit is 2147483647 (231–1). The minimum possible
counting limit is –2147483648 (–231).
You can continue or stop counting upon violation of a counting limit (automatic gate stop)
Upon high and low limit violations of the counter value, an event bit is set in the feedback
interface (Page 41) in each case.
Start value
You can configure a start value within the counter limits. The start value can be modified
during runtime with the user program.
Gate control
Opening and closing the hardware gate and software gate defines the period of time during
which the counting signals are recordd.
The control of the hardware gate takes place externally via the digital inputs DI4 through DI7.
The software gate is controlled via the user program. Use of the hardware gate can be
enabled through parameter assignment.
Count direction
The counting direction is specified either via suitable external pulse signals at the each
counter's control input or via the configuration.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 31
Comparison values
You define two comparison values that can control the STS_DQ feedback bit, independent of
the user program. If the current counter value meets the configured comparison condition,
the STS_DQ reset bit is set. You can use the STS_DQ reset bit in order to control a digital
output module's digital output.
The comparison values are configurable and can be modified during runtime with the user
program. When a comparison event occurs, in each case an event bit is set in the feedback
interface (Page 41).

32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
4.2.2 Parameters
record for Counting operating mode (Page 70).
The following parameter settings are possible for each operating mode:
Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters in Counting operating mode

ration in software
RUN HSP0127 for STEP 7 PROFIBUS
(TIA Portal); DP GSD file
HSP0229 for STEP 7;
PROFINET IO GSD
file
left module
Operating mode1 • DI / Oversampling — no Module Module
• Counting
• Enable
• Enable
Channel enabled • Disable Enable yes Channel Channel
• Enable
Input delay • 0.05 ms 3.2 ms yes Channel Module 2
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 33

ration in software
RUN HSP0127 for STEP 7 PROFIBUS
(TIA Portal); DP GSD file
HSP0229 for STEP 7;
PROFINET IO GSD
file
Reaction to violation of • Stop counting Stop counting yes Channel Channel
a counting limit
• Continue counting
Edge selection • At rising edge At rising edge yes Channel Channel
• At falling edge
Count direction • Up Up yes Channel Channel
• Down
Set output • Off (DQ = 0) Off (DQ = 0) yes Channel Channel
• Off (DQ = 1)
• Counter value between
comparison value 0 and 1
• Counter value not be-
tween comparison value
0 and 1
Setting function of the • Digital input without func- Digital input yes Channel Channel
DI tion without func-
tion
• Gate start/stop
• Reverse direction
Counter high limit -2147483648...2147483647 2147483647 yes Channel Channel
Counter low limit -2147483648...2147483647 0 yes Channel —3
Start value -2147483648...2147483647 0 yes Channel —3
Comparison value 1 -2147483648...2147483647 10 yes Channel Channel
Comparison value 0 -2147483648...2147483647 0 yes Channel —3
1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module
name.
2 If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record" function, you can set this parameter for each channel
via data record 128.
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If your PROFIBUS Master supports the "Read / write data record"
function, you can set this parameter via data record 128.

34 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Potential group
Operating mode
Selection of the operating mode in which all of the module's channels are operated.
● DI (Page 13) / Oversampling (Page 48)
● Counting
When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7 or with a GSD file, the operating mode is
specified by selecting the module name.


Channel enabled
Input delay
Isochronous configuration is only possible if there is an input delay of 0.05 ms configured for
at least one channel. In isochronous mode, the feedback interface is updated at the time Ti
(time for reading the input data).
Note
If you select the "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded cables for
connection of the digital inputs.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 35
Reaction to violation of a counting limit

Selection of the reaction to violation of the counter high limit in the upward direction or the
counter low limit in the downward direction:
● Stop counting:
After a counting limit is violated, the internal gate is closed. This stops the counting
process. The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. To restart counting, you
must close and reopen the software/hardware gate.
● Continue counting:
After a counting limit is violated, the counter value is set to the opposite counting limit and
counting continues.
Edge selection
Selects the edge that is counted:
● At rising edge:
The respective counter counts all rising edges at the digital input.
● At falling edge:
The respective counter counts all falling edges at the digital input.
Note
If the "Reverse direction" option is selected in "Set function of DI" and the counting direction
in the process changes, the counting edge is automatically adjusted (opposite edges).
Count direction
Count direction selection:
● Up:
The respective counter counts up.
● Down:
The respective counter counts down.
Note
This parameter has no effect if the "Reverse direction" option is selected in "Set function of
DI".

36 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Set output
Selects the function that controls the response of the STS_DQ feedback bit (Page 41): You
can use the STS_DQ reset bit in order to control a digital output module's digital output.
● Off (DQ = 0):
Regardless of the counter value, STS_DQ is permanently not set.
● Off (DQ = 1):
Regardless of the counter value, STS_DQ is permanently set.
● Counter value between comparison value 0 and 1:
STS_DQ is set if counter value ≥ comparison value 0 and counter value ≤ comparison
value 1.
● Counter value not between comparison value 0 and 1:
STS_DQ is set if counter value < comparison value 0 or counter value > comparison
value 1.
Setting function of the DI

Selects the function of DIn+4, which controls the assigned counter input DIn:
● Digital input without function:
No function is assigned to DIn+4. The signal status of DIn+4 can be read by the CPU using
the feedback interface (Page 41).
● Gate start/stop:
Setting DIn+4 opens the hardware gate for DIn. Resetting DIn+4 closes the hardware gate
for DIn.
● Reverse direction:
DIn+4 reverses the counting direction at DIn, in order to adjust it to the process. If DIn+4 is
not set, DIn counts up. If DIn+4 is set, DIn counts down.
Counter high limit

Sets counter high limit.
The following applies:
● Counter high limit > counter low limit
● Counter high limit ≤ 2147483647 (231 - 1)
Counter low limit

Sets the counter low limit.
● Counter low limit < counter high limit
● Counter low limit ≥ -2147483648 (-231)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 37
Start value
Sets the start value.
● Start value ≥ counter low limit
● Start value ≤ counter high limit
Comparison value 1
Sets the second comparison value.
● Comparison value 1 > comparison value 0
● Comparison value 1 ≤ counter high limit
Comparison value 0
Sets the first comparison value.
● Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1
● Comparison value 0 ≥ counter low limit

38 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
4.2.4 Address space
4.2.4.1 Assignment of the control interface
Control interface
The user program uses the control interface to influence the behavior of the module's
counter. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the control interface in the
process image of the outputs.
"QB x" represents the start address of output byte x.
Figure 4-3 Assignment of the control interface

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 39
Notes on the control bits
Control bit Notes

SLOT This value is used to specify the loaded value for each channel. Use the LD_SLOT load re-
quest to evaluate the loaded value.
LD_SLOT This load request is used to specify the meaning of the SLOT (loaded value) value for each
channel. The user program performs the respective action, as soon as LD_SLOT changes.
When the loading request LD_SLOT = 011B is entered and the software gate is opened, each
counting operation begins with the start value. If another load request is entered and the soft-
ware gate is opened, counting continues with the current count at each start of the counting
operation. These two situations are also in effect when the hardware gate is configured and
the software gate is closed.
SW_GATE With this bit, you open and close the software gate of the respective channel. Together, the
software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. The module only counts if the
internal gate is open.
0 means: Software gate closed
1 means: Software gate open
RES_EVENT_UFLW Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_UFLW feedback bit for
the respective channel.
RES_EVENT_OFLW Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_OFLW feedback bit for
RES_EVENT_CMP0 Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_CMP0 feedback bit for
RES_EVENT_CMP1 Use this bit to initiate the resetting of the saved event in the EVENT_CMP1 feedback bit for

40 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
4.2.4.2 Assignment of the feedback interface
Feedback interface
The user program receives current values and status information from the module via the
feedback interface. The figure below shows the address space allocation for the feedback
interface in the process image of the inputs.
"IB x" represents the start address of input byte x.
Figure 4-4 Assignment of the feedback interface

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 41
Notes on the feedback bits
Feedback bit Notes

STS_DIn This bit indicates the status of the respective digital input DIn.
COUNT_VALUE This value returns the current counter value for the respective channel.
STS_DQ This bit depends on the "Set output" parameter of the respective channel. You can use
STS_DQ in each case, in order to control a digital output module's digital output.
STS_GATE Together, the software gate and the hardware gate form the internal gate. This bit indicates
the status of the internal gate for the respective channel. The module only counts if the in-
ternal gate is open.
0 means: Gate closed
1 means: Gate open
Note:
If you change a channel parameter in RUN mode via data record 128, all of the changed
channel's values are retransferred to the module. In doing so, the internal gate of the re-
spective channel is closed and the counter value is set to the start value. To restart count-
ing, you need to close and reopen the software gate in each case.
LD_STS_SLOT This bit indicates for the respective channel, by mean of a status change (toggling), that the
load request for SLOT (LD_SLOT) has been detected and executed.
LD_ERROR This bit indicates for the respective channel that an error occurred (latching) during loading
via the control interface. The loaded value was not applied. One of the following conditions
has not been met:
• Counter low limit ≤ counter value
(If this condition is not met, the start value is loaded as the current counter value.)
• Counter low limit ≤ start value
• Counter low limit ≤ comparison value 0/1
• Counter high limit ≥ counter value
(If this condition is not met, the start value is loaded as the current counter value.)
• Counter high limit ≥ start value
• Counter high limit ≥ comparison value 0/1
• Counter low limit < counter high limit
• Comparison value 0 < comparison value 1
• Do not write a reserved load request in LD_SLOT
EVENT_UFLW For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a
counter value underflow (a violation of the counter low limit). You reset the status by ac-
knowledgment with RES_EVENT_UFLW.
EVENT_OFLW For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved state which shows that there was a
counter value overflow (a violation of the counter high limit). You reset the status by ac-
knowledgment with RES_EVENT_OFLW.
EVENT_CMP0 For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved status which shows that a compari-
son event with comparison value 0 has occurred. You reset the status by acknowledgment
with RES_EVENT_CMP0.
The EVENT_CMP0 bit is not set when you set the counter value to the start value.
EVENT_CMP1 For the respective channel, this bit indicates the saved status which shows that a compari-
son event with comparison value 1 has occurred. You reset the status by acknowledgment
with RES_EVENT_CMP1.
The EVENT_CMP1 bit is not set when you set the counter value to the start value.

42 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Feedback bit Notes

RES_EVENT_UFLW_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_UFLW is
active.
RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_OFLW is
active.
RES_EVENT_CMP0_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_CMP0 is
active.
RES_EVENT_CMP1_ACK This bit indicates for the respective channel that the reset of event bit EVENT_CMP1 is
active.
Complete acknowledgment principle

Saving bits are acknowledged according to the complete acknowledgment principle.
The figure below shows an example of the sequence of the complete acknowledgment
principle in the event of an overflow:
① The EVENT_OFLW feedback bit is set as a saving event upon overflow.

② You set the RES_EVENT_OFLW control bit to trigger EVENT_OFLW reset.
③ The RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK feedback bit is set when reset of EVENT_OFLW is detected.
④ You then rest the control bit RES_EVENT_OFLW .
⑤ The RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK feedback bit is reset.
Figure 4-5 Acknowledgment principle
Note
If you have initiated the reset of an event bit, you must wait for the respective feedback bit.
Then you can initiate another reset.
Note
Opening the software gate or hardware gate (0-1 transition) resets all event bits.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 43
4.3 Interrupts/diagnostic messages
LED display
③ CNT (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ OVS (green)

44 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA

(Page 47).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
CNT LED
CNT LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 45
OVS LED
OVS LED Meaning

Off
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

46 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
4.3.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● No load voltage


ment error ters for the channel.
No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
this state.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 47
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode 5
5.1 Connecting

This section contains the block diagram for the DI 8×24VDC HS module with the pin
assignments for 1, 2 and 3-wire connection in Oversampling operating mode. You may use
and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
Note
configuration.

48 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Oversampling (OVS) operating mode
5.1 Connecting

DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1
and 2-wire connection).

③ Backplane bus interface DIAG LED error or diagnostics (green, red)
④ Input electronics .0 to .7 LED channel status (green)
⑤ Color-coded label CCxx (optional) PWR LED power (green)
⑥ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available with CNT LED operating mode Count (green)
light BaseUnit)
M Ground OVS LED operating mode Oversampling (green)
DIn Input signal, channel n P1, P2, Internal self-configuring voltage buses
AUX Connection to the left (dark BaseUnit)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 49
5.1 Connecting

M Ground

50 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
5.2.1 Oversampling
Function
Oversampling means detecting data in equidistant time subcycles. In doing so, the
configured number of subcycles corresponds to one data cycle (send clock).
Oversampling always makes sense when you need to detect data with a high time resolution
but without wanting to use a very short data cycle.
With the oversampling function, a send clock is divided into equidistant subcycles:
● Each subcycle detects an 8-bit value.
● A subcycle is at least 7.8125 μs in length.
● Subcycles are possible in steps from 2 to 32 (sampling rate).
Requirement
The interface module or CPU, with which the module is used, must support isochronous
mode.
Sampling interval
The duration of a subcycle is the sampling interval. The cycle time T (send clock) for
isochronous mode is specified in the configuration software. This time, divided by the
configured sampling rate nSample, yields the sampling interval tSample of the module.
Example calculation:
Figure 5-3 Example of calculating the sampling interval

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 51
Chronological sequence
The figure below shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The detected input
data of a data cycle (send clock) is copied to the interface module in the next cycle data and
are available to the CPU in the data cycle after the next one.
n Detected value from cycle n

Sub- 8 bits apiece x 32 (max.) = max. 32 bytes of input data per data cycle
cycle
Figure 5-4 Oversampling
Note
Do not use a reduction ratio for the send clock in this operating mode for blocks in your user
program (for example, OB61). This will ensure that the processing of the data in the CPU's
user program occurs in chronological coordination with the detection on the module.

52 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
5.2.2 Parameters
In distributed mode, you can use the Oversampling operating mode on the PROFINET IO in
an ET 200SP system.
record for Oversampling operating mode (Page 75).
Table 5- 1 Configurable parameters in the Oversampling operating mode
Parameters Value range Default Configura- Effective range with con-

tion in RUN figuration software
HSP0127 for STEP 7
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for STEP 7
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential no Module
module
Operating mode1 • DI / Oversampling — no Module
• Counting
Sampling rate • 2 Values per cycle — yes Module
• 3 Values per cycle
• ...
• 32 Values per cycle
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable yes Module
• Enable

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 53
Parameters Value range Default Configura- Effective range with con-

tion in RUN figuration software
HSP0127 for STEP 7
(TIA Portal);
HSP0229 for STEP 7
Channel enabled • Disable Enable yes Channel
• Enable
Input delay • None None yes Channel
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
1 When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7, the operating mode is specified by selecting the module name.

54 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Potential group
Operating mode
At the module level, specifies the operating mode in which the module's channels are
operated.
● DI (Page 13) / Oversampling
● Counting (Page 28)
When configuring with HSP0229 for STEP 7, the operating mode is specified by selecting
the module name.
Sampling rate
Specifies the number of subcycles per isochronous data cycle.


Channel enabled

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 55
Input delay
one channel. In isochronous mode, the terminal signal is read in at the time Ti (time for
reading the input data). The read time Ti refers to the channel for which no input delay time
was configured.
For input channels with longer input delays, the read time is moved accordingly. This means
individual channels can be assigned input delays, if necessary, without having a negative
impact on the possible cycle time.
Note
If you select the "None" or "0.05 ms" option for the input delay, you have to use shielded
cables for connection of the digital inputs.

56 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
5.2.4 Address space
Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space. "IB x" represents the start
address of input byte x.
In the respective bit, the subcycles are counted from left to right. Up to 32 subcycles are
possible. If fewer than 32 subcycles are configured, the bits that are consequently unused
are set to 0.
Figure 5-5 Address space for oversampling
Note
While you are changing parameters in RUN mode, corruption of input data can occur.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 57
LED display
③ CNT (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ OVS (green)

58 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA

(Page 61).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
CNT LED
CNT LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 59
OVS LED
OVS LED Meaning

Off
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

60 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
5.3.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC HS digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● No load voltage


No load voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
seUnit
this state.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 61
Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC HS
6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
Product type designation DI 8x24VDC HS
General information

label
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DI Yes
Counters Yes
Oversampling Yes
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption, max. 70 mA; without encoder supply
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes

62 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 45 bytes
Input 32 bytes; 1 byte + 1 byte for QI information in DI
operating mode; 32 bytes in oversampling operat-
ing mode (OVS); 25 bytes in counting operating
mode (CNT)
Output 20 bytes; in counting operating mode (CNT)
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
type 1
type 2
type 3
Pulse stretching Yes
• Length 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s
Digital input functions, configurable

Gate start/stop Yes
Freely assignable digital input Yes
Counters Yes
• Number, max. 4
• Counting frequency, max. 10 kHz
• Counter length 32 bit
• Counting direction up/down Yes
Digital input with oversampling Yes

• Number, max. 8
• Values per cycle, max. 32
• Resolution, min. 7.8125 µs
Input voltage
For signal "0" -30 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 6 mA

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 63
6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
For standard inputs
• Configurable Yes; none / 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 1.6 / 3.2 / 12.8 /
20 ms
For counters/technological functions

Cable length
shielded, max. 50 m
unshielded, max. 50 m
Encoders
Supported encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
max.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized until Yes
terminal)
Jitter, max. 5 µs
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes
Hardware interrupt Yes
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Parameters

64 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
6ES7131-6BF00-0DA0
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 65
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI
operating mode


The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module using data
record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that
the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

You can find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the STEP 7
online help.

66 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Parameter data records
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for DI operating mode
Structure of data record 128 for the complete module
Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for the complete module

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 67
Header information
Figure A-2 Structure of the header information
Module header information

The figure below shows the structure of the module header information.
Figure A-3 Module header information
Module parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 through
7. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
Figure A-4 Module parameter block

68 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Channel header information

The figure below shows the structure of the channel header information.
Figure A-5 Channel header information
Channel parameter block

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block. You enable a
parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 69
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Counting operating mode
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for

Counting operating mode



online help.

70 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Header information

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 71




72 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA

The figure below shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 through 3. You
activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 73

74 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for Oversampling operating mode
A.3 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record for

Oversampling operating mode


Note
While you are changing parameters in RUN mode, corruption of input data can occur.

online help.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 75

76 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
Header information



Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA 77


The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 through 7. Activate
a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".

78 Manual, 03/2015, A5E35243810-AA
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0)
Manual
Edition 02/2014
Answers for industry.

DI 8x24VDC SRC BA Digital Input Module ___________________
Preface
(6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0) ___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA ___________________
digital input module
(6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0) ___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
02/2014
A5E32855511-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 02/2014 Technical data subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

This device manual complements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293). Functions that generally
relate to the system are described in this manual.
Conventions
Note
should be paid.
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA digital input module (6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2 Explanation of parameters .......................................................................................................... 12
4.3 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 12
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms................................................................................................................. 13
5.1 Status and error displays ............................................................................................................ 13
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 15
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ...................................................................................................................... 15
6.1 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................. 16
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of parameter data record ................................................. 19

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 4
Introduction
The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers topics
relating to your automation system.
The complete documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system consists of the system
manual, function manuals and device manuals.
The STEP 7 information system (online help) also helps you to configure and program your
automation system.
Overview of the documentation for digital input module DI 8×24VDC SRC BA

The following table lists additional documentation that you will need when using the
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA digital input module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for digital input module DI 8x24VDC SRC BA

System description System manual ET 200SP distributed • Application planning
I/O system
• Installation
(http://support.automation.siemens.co
m/WW/view/en/58649293) • Wiring
• Commissioning
BaseUnits Manual ET 200SP BaseUnits Technical specifications
m/WW/view/en/59753521)
Enhancements and Product information Current information not yet
special features of the Amendments to ET 200SP documented in the system
ET 200SP Distributed documentation manuals, function manuals, or
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.co other manuals.
SIMATIC manuals
All of the current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge
from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 5
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Part number
6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×24VDC SRC BA module

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 6
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● 8 digital inputs
● Source input (NPN, M reading)
● Configurable diagnostics (per module)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors according to IEC 61131, type 1
and 3
● Firmware update
● Identification data I&M0 to I&M3
● Parameter assignment in RUN
Accessories
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 7
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
General pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment for DI 8×24VDC SRC BA.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DI 8×24VDC SRC BA
Pin assignment for DI 8×24VDC SRC BA (6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0)

Terminal Assign- Terminal Assign- Description BaseUnit1 Color identification label
ment ment (terminals 1 to 16)
3 DI2 4 DI3 • M: Ground for sensor supply
5 DI4 6 DI5
7 DI6 8 DI7
9 M 10 M
11 M 12 M
CC02
13 M 14 M
6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0
15 M 16 M
L+ 24 V DC M M
2-wire 3-wire
Only with BaseUnits with AUX connections

(6ES7193-BU15-P16-A10-2D)
1 BaseUnit types that can be used are identified by the last two digits of the part number. See also "ET 200SP distributed
I/O system" system manual.
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in
mind also during the configuration.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 8
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
See also
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
The figure below shows the block diagram of the DI 8x24VDC SRC BA.
Figure 3-1 Block diagram DI 8×24VDC SRC BA

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 9
4.1 Parameters
DI 8×24VDC SRC BA parameters

Parameter Value range Default Reconfiguration Scope with configuration

in RUN software, e.g.,
STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
• Enable
• Enable

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 10
4.1 Parameters

STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
the left module group of the
left module
group
1 Only when configuring using a PROFIBUS GSD file; does not apply to configuration with STEP 7 via HSP. The
parameter assignment options are limited because PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a
maximum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using the data
record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the
I/O module is 3 bytes.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 11

Operating mode
Input delay
Determines how high the input delay is for a channel.
Potential group
Specifies whether a BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located on this slot.
See also
4.3 Address space
Address space of the digital input module DI 8×24VDC SRC BA

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for DI 8×24VDC SRC BA.
Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital input module DI 8×24VDC SRC BA

12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 8x24VDC SRC BA.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 13

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Remedial measures
LED DIAG
Table 5- 1 Error display of the LED DIAG
LED DIAG Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
LED channel status
Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED channel status
LED channel Meaning

status
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
LED PWR
Table 5- 3 Status display of the LED PWR
LED PWR Meaning

Off
On

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8×24VDC SRC BA digital input module supports diagnostics interrupts.
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following event:
● No supply voltage
Detailed information on the event is available in the STEP 7 online help.
Diagnostics alarms
A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the LED DIAG flashes on the

No supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 15
Technical specifications of the DI 8×24VDC SRC BA
6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0
Product type designation DI 8x24VDC SRC BA
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3 / V5.5 SP4
Supply voltage
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
Power loss
Address area
Input 1 bytes
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Active low/Active high Yes; reading m
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, type 2 No
Pulse stretching No

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 16
6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0
Input voltage
Rated value, DC 24 V
for signal "0" 30 to -5V (reference potential is L+)
for signal "1" -11 to -30V (reference potential is L+)
Input current
for signal "1", typ. 6 mA
For standard inputs
on cable length)
• Configurable No
for counter/technological functions

• Configurable No
Cable length
Encoders
Supported encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
max.
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Hardware interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green LED PWR
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED DIAG
Electrical isolation channels

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 17
6ES7131-6BF60-0AA0
Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC (basic isolation)
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimensional drawing

18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA
The data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether you
configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.

The module parameters can be re-assigned in RUN (for example, the input delay of selected
channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

record 128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the

online help.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 19
Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics for the entire module.
Header information

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA
Parameters

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855511-AA 21
Digital input module ___________________
Preface
DI 16x24VDC ST ___________________
(6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
Digital input module
___________________
DI 16x24VDC ST
(6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E03573442-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed
I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST (6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.2 Declaration of parameters ......................................................................................................15
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................16
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Status and error display ..........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
5.3 Diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................................20

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the most of your Industry
Online Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0 (packaging unit: 1 unit)
6ES7131-6BH00-2BA0 (packaging unit: 10 units)
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module DI 16×24VDC ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Sink input, (PNP, P-reading)
● Configurable input delay 0.05 to 20 ms (per channel)
type 3
● Firmware update
Function Product version of the module Firmware version of the

as of module as of
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manual ET 200SP
distributed I/O system (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Connecting 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DI 16x24VDC ST module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire connection.
Information on wiring the BaseUnit can be found in the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Note
Note
Make sure that you only use digital modules with BaseUnit type A0 during commissioning.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 11
Connecting

the digital input module DI 16x24VDC ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
(1-wire connection).
① 1-wire connection DIn Input signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
③ Input electronics M Ground
④ Color-coded label with color code CC00 DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
(optional)
⑤ Filter connection supply voltage (only when .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green)
light-colored BaseUnit is present)
Connection to left interrupted (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of encoders

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for DI 16x24VDC ST

The effective range of the configurable parameters depends on the type of configuration.
the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to section Parameter assignment
Parameters Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassignment software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in RUN GSD file GSD file
• Enable
wire break1
• Enable
• Enable

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 13
4.1 Parameters

• 0.05 ms
• 0.1 ms
• 0.4 ms
• 0.8 ms
• 1.6 ms
• 3.2 ms
• 12.8 ms
• 20 ms
the left module (module group of the left
plugged into a dark- module
colored BaseUnit)
group (module plugged
into light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
1 If you use a floating switch, you need to connect a resistor in parallel so that the wire break diagnostics is enabled in the
open state (sensor resistance for the wire break diagnostics: 25 kΩ to 45 kΩ).
2 Due to the limited number of parameters with a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station for a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data rec-
ord 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module
is 4 bytes.

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
4.2 Declaration of parameters


Enabling diagnostics if the line to the encoder is interrupted.
Channel activated
Input delay
Potential group
neighbor.
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 15
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image input.
Configuration options of DI 16x24VDC ST

STEP 7, as of V13,
SP1
1 x 16-channel without value DI 16x24VDC ST V1.0 X X X
status
1 x 16-channel without value DI 16x24VDC ST V1.1 --- X X
status
1 x 16-channel with value status DI 16x24VDC ST V1.1, QI --- X ---

An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value
status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 15 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They
provide information about the validity of the digital value.
Bit = 0: Channel is deactivated or there is a fault on the module.
If a fault occurs on a channel with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
4.3 Address space
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 16×24VDC ST
with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only
available if the value status is enabled.
Image 4-1 Address space of the DI 16×24VDC ST with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 17
LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the DI 16x24VDC ST.
③ PWR (green)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms
Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostic messages (Page 20).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 19
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 16×24VDC ST digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
● Wire break
5.3 Diagnostic messages


Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify the
wiring, for example, use cables with larger
cross-section
sensor
• Connect a resistor of between 25 and
45 kOhms to the encoder contacts
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parame- Correct the parameter assignment
Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
ing BaseUnit
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable or has been canceled. The module does
not read in process values in this state.

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Technical specifications of the DI 16×24VDC ST
6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DI 16x24VDC ST, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DI Yes
Counter No
Oversampling No
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 21
6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
Encoder supply
Short-circuit protection No
24 V encoder supply
24 V No
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 2 bytes; + 2 bytes for QI information
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 16
Sinking/sourcing input Yes; reading p
type 1
type 2
type 3
Pulse stretching No
Input voltage
For signal "0" -30 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For standard inputs
on cable length)
• With "0" to "1", min. 0.05 ms
• With "0" to "1", max. 20 ms
• With "1" to "0", min. 0.05 ms
• With "1" to "0", max. 20 ms

• Configurable No
for counters/technological functions

• Configurable No
Cable length

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
6ES7131-6BH00-0BA0
Encoders
Supported encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
max.
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Monitoring of the encoder supply No
Wire break Yes; module by module
Short-circuit No
Group error Yes
Between the channels and voltage supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 23
GSD.



online help.

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD
Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics enable for the entire module.
Image A-1 Structure of data record 128
Header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 25
Parameters
Image A-3 Structure byte x to x+1 for the channels 0 to 15

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)
• Check assigned values for the parameters of
the WREC instruction.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03573442-AD 27
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 8xNAMUR (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module ___________________
Preface
(6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) ___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
DI 8xNAMUR HF ___________________
(6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0) ___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
02/2014
A5E03894478-01
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03894478-01 Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
DI 8xNAMUR HF digital input module (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 11
4.3 Pulse stretching ........................................................................................................................... 16
4.4 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 18
5.1 Status and fault displays ............................................................................................................. 19
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 22
5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type ........................................................................ 25
5.5 Chatter monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 26
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD files ......................................................................... 32

4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Introduction
This modular documentation of the SIMATIC products covers diverse topics concerning your
automation system.
The complete documentation for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system consists of a system
manual, function manuals and product manuals.
The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you during the configuration and
programming of your automation system.
Overview of documentation for digital input module DI 8×NAMUR HF

The following table shows additional documentation that you need for using the
DI 8×NAMUR HF digital input module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for the DI 8×NAMUR HF digital input module
Topic Documentation Key contents

I/O system
• Installation
• Commissioning
Designing interference- Function manual Designing • Basics
free controllers interference-free controllers
• Electromagnetic compatibility
m/WW/view/en/59193566) • Lightning protection
System diagnostics Function manual • Overview
Diagnostics
• Diagnostics evaluation of
m/WW/view/en/59192926) hardware/software

m/WW/view/en/58532597/133300)
Amendments and special ET 200SP Product information Current information not yet
features of the (http://support.automation.siemens.co documented in the system
ET 200SP I/O system m/WW/view/en/73021864) manuals, function manuals, or
product manuals.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 5
SIMATIC manuals
All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available to download free of charge on the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Order number
6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the DI 8×NAMUR HF module

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 7
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● 8 digital inputs each with a value status (quality information)
● 8.2 VDC sensor supply for individual connection and disconnection (PROFIenergy)
● Selectable diagnostics (per channel)
● Suitable for connecting NAMUR sensors and connected and unconnected mechanical
contacts
The module supports the following technology functions:
● Chatter monitoring
● Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type
● Firmware update
Accessories
The following accessories can be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Shield connection
See also
ET 200SP Product information

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DI 8×NAMUR HF
Pin assignment for DI 8×NAMUR HF (6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0)

3 DI2 4 DI3 • USn: Sensor supply, channel n
5 DI4 6 DI5
7 DI6 8 DI7
9 US0 10 US1
11 US2 12 US3
CC01
13 US4 14 US5
6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0
15 US6 16 US7
L+ 24 VDC M M
The figures below show the connections for input signal DI0 for all sensor types.
NAMUR sensors / IEC 60947-5-6 NAMUR changeover contacts / Single contact connected with 10 kΩ
sensors IEC 60947-5-6 changeover contacts (mechanical normally open contact)
Changeover contact connected with Single contact, unconnected Changeover contact, unconnected
10 kΩ (mechanical changeover (mechanical normally open contact with (mechanical changeover contact)
contact) single contact)
1 BaseUnit types that can be used are identified by the last two digits of the order number. See also "ET 200SP
distributed I/O system" system manual.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 9
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
Note
The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind also
during the configuration.
Firmware update
When updating the firmware, the L+ supply voltage must be applied to the module at the
start and during the firmware update.
See also
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
Figure 3-1 Block diagram DI 8×NAMUR HF

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
4.1 Parameters
DI 8xNAMUR HF parameters
The following table lists the configurable parameters. The effective range of the configurable
parameters depends on the type of configuration. The following configurations are possible:
the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter assignment
and structure of parameter data record (Page 33)).
Parameters Value range Default Changing Effective range with configuration

parameter software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA-Portal)
settings in RUN GSD file GSD file
Missing supply
• Enable
voltage L+
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Wire break
• Enable
Changeover error
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
Chatter error
• Enable
Chatter monitoring: • 0.5 s 0.5 s Yes Channel -
Monitoring window
• 1 s to 100 s (can be
set in 1 s-increments)
Chatter monitoring: • Deactivated Deactivated Yes Channel -
Number of signal
• 2 to 32
changes

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 11
4.1 Parameters
Parameters Value range Default Changing Effective range with configuration

parameter software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA-Portal)
settings in RUN
GSD file GSD file
Hardware interrupts • Deactivated Deactivated Yes Channel -
• Rising edge
• Falling edge
• Falling and rising
edge
Sensor type • Channel deactivated NAMUR Yes Channel Channel
sensor
• NAMUR sensor
• Single contact,
unconnected
• Single contact,
connected with 10 kΩ
• NAMUR changeover
contact
• Changeover contact,
unconnected
• Changeover contact,
connected with 10 kΩ
Pulse stretching • None None Yes Channel -
• 0.5 s
• 1s
• 2s
Inverted • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel
• Enable
left module
group
Changing parameter settings and effects on the technology functions

Reconfiguring a technology function resets its responses. Reconfiguring one technology
function has no effect on other technology functions. Exception: Signal inversion and chatter
monitoring, because an additional edge change is generated when signal inversion is
disabled/enabled.

12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Technology functions
All technology functions, such as
● Changeover errors
are executed only when there is an error-free signal (QI = 1). In other words, there is no
diagnostics information on the channel (see also section Address space (Page 18)).
Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+

The diagnostics alarm is enabled for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+.
Tip: To avoid a diagnostics overload, you should only enable "Diagnostics: Missing supply
voltage" for an active channel.

The diagnostics alarm is enabled if there is a short-circuit of the sensor supply to ground.
"Short-circuit to ground" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting:
● NAMUR sensor
● NAMUR changeover contact

The diagnostics alarm is enabled if the line to the sensor is interrupted.
"Wire break" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting:
● NAMUR sensor
● Single contact with 10 kΩ
● Changeover contact with 10 kΩ

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 13
Diagnostics: Changeover error

The diagnostics alarm is enabled when a changeover error occurs.
"Changeover error" diagnostics is available with the following sensor setting:
● Changeover contact, unconnected
Diagnostics: Chatter error

The diagnostics alarm is enabled when a chatter error occurs.
Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports
signal changes that are unexpected in process engineering, for example when an input
signal fluctuates too often between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is
a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process engineering
viewpoint.
Chatter monitoring: Monitoring window

Chatter monitoring: Setting of the monitoring window
Each input channel has a configurable monitoring window. The monitoring window is started
the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal changes within the monitoring
window more often than the configured number of signal changes, this is recognized as a
chatter error. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the window is
restarted at the next signal change.
Chatter monitoring: Number of signal changes

Chatter monitoring: Setting of the signal change
Settings for the tolerated number of signal changes during chatter monitoring within the
monitoring window.
Number of signal changes = 0 deactivates the chatter monitoring function.
Hardware interrupts
Specifies whether the rising or falling edge or both edges trigger a hardware interrupt.

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Sensor type
Specifies which sensor type is connected (see Table 3-1 Pin assignment for
DI 8×NAMUR HF (Page 9)).
For the following sensor types
● Changeover contact, unconnected
the following applies: The normally open contact channel must be set according to the
sensor type. The normally closed contact channel must be deactivated.
If "Channel deactivated" is shown, this means that the channel is not activated.
Pulse stretching
Sets whether and for how long pulse stretching is to take place.
Pulse stretching is a function for changing a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is
extended to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, then the pulse will not be changed.
Inverted
Specifies whether or not the input signal is to be inverted.
Inversion is only possible with the following sensor types:
● NAMUR sensor
● Single contact, unconnected
● Single contact with 10 kΩ
Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with an incoming supply voltage is located in this slot (see
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).
See also
Pin assignment (Page 9)
Pulse stretching (Page 16)
Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type (Page 25)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 15
4.3 Pulse stretching
Description
Pulse stretching is a function for changing a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is
extended to at least the configured length. If the input pulse is already longer than the
configured length, then the pulse will not be changed.
The pulse-stretched signal is the input signal for the hardware interrupt.

The following figure uses examples to show if and how input pulses are changed.
Figure 4-1 Principle of pulse stretching

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Note
If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this will also affect the chatter monitoring that
is enabled for this channel. The "pulse-stretched" signal is the input signal for the chatter
monitoring. You should therefore match the parameter settings for pulse stretching and
chatter monitoring to one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the parameters
you can adjust the functions optimally to your process.
Note
Pulse stretching in progress is reset in the event of an error in the value status (QI = 0, e.g.
wire break).

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 17
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space
Configuration options of the DI 8×NAMUR HF

Configuration with value status:
● DI 8×NAMUR HF QI

As a result of configuration with value status (QI), an additional byte is allocated in the input
address space. Each bit in this byte is assigned to a channel and returns information about
the validity of the digital value.
Deactivated channels or channels that are not operating correctly return a value status
of QI = 0.
With changeover contacts, the value status of a normally closed contact channel is always
QI = 0. The validity of the signal must be checked on the normally open contact channel.
Address space of the digital input module DI 8×NAMUR HF

The following figure shows the assignment of address space for the DI 8×NAMUR HF with
value status (Quality Information (QI)).
Figure 4-2 Address space of the DI 8×NAMUR HF digital input module with value status
Technology functions
All technology functions, such as
● Changeover error
● Hardware interrupt
require a valid input signal that returns QI = 1 (no diagnostics detected). Otherwise, they will
not run.

18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
5.1 Status and fault displays
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the DI 8×NAMUR HF.
③ Channel fault (red)
④ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 19
Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and fault displays. Corrective measures
for diagnostics alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostics alarms (Page 24).
LED DIAG
Table 5- 1 LED DIAG fault display
LED DIAG Meaning

Supply voltage of the ET 200SP not OK
Off
Module not ready for operation (no parameters or invalid parameters assigned)
Flashing
Module configured and no module diagnostics
On
Module configured and module diagnostics
Flashing
LED channel status/channel fault

The channel status LED shows the signal state of the user data of an input. If inversion is
enabled, the channel status LED shows the inverted status of the signal applied to the
terminal.
If there is a diagnostics event on the channel, the channel status LED is always off if
diagnostics is enabled and therefore does not indicate the signal state of the user data of the
input.
Table 5- 2 Channel status/channel fault LED status and fault display
LED Meaning
Channel status Channel fault
Input returns "0" signal and no channel diagnostics or channel
Off Off deactivated
Input returns "1" signal and no channel diagnostics

On Off
Channel activated and channel diagnostics
Off On
Not permitted (fault)
On On

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
LED PWR
Table 5- 3 LED PWR status display
LED PWR Meaning

Supply voltage L+ is missing, is too low or polarity reversed
Off
On

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 21
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
Digital input module DI 8×NAMUR HF supports the following diagnostics and hardware
interrupts.
The module generates a diagnostics interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit to ground
● Wire break
● Changeover error
● Chatter error

● Upon a rising edge (signal change from 0 to 1)
● Upon a falling edge (signal change from 1 to 0)
In the event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU of the IO controller.
You will find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALRM" instruction (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help.
Figure 5-2 Organization block start information

22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
5.2 Interrupts
Data block name Contents Comment Bytes

USI W#16#0001 Additional interrupt information for hardware 2
(User Structure Identifier) interrupts of the I/O module
The event that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Event B#16#01 Rising edge 1
B#16#02 Falling edge

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 23
Diagnostics alarms
module. Diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the
CPU. You can evaluate the fault codes with the user program.
Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, meaning and corrective measures
Diagnostics alarm Fault code Meaning Remedy

Short-circuit (NAMUR 1H Short-circuit in the signal line to the sensor Correct the process wiring
changeover contact and Sensor defective Replace the sensor
NAMUR sensor only)
Wrong sensor type configured Correct the parameter assignment
Tip: Check the normally
open and normally Load impedance too low Use a sensor with a higher
closed contact channels impedance
of the NAMUR
changeover contact.
Wire break (only NAMUR 6H Signal line to a sensor interrupted Correct the process wiring
changeover contact, Sensor defective Replace the sensor
NAMUR sensor, sensor
connected with 10 kΩ Wrong sensor type configured Correct the parameter assignment
and single contact Load impedance too high Use a different sensor type or
connected with 10 kΩ) modify the wiring, for example, using
Tip: Check the normally cables with a larger cross-section
open and normally Channel not connected (open) Disable diagnostics, connect sensor
closed contact channels contacts
of the NAMUR
changeover contact
Fault 9H Sensor supply defective Replace the module
Hardware failure
No load voltage 11H Supply voltage L+ missing or too low Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
Check BaseUnit type
External fault 1AH Changeover error: Check process wiring, change
(changeover sensors Validity check between normally closed and sensor
only) normally open contact channel negative
Fault 1 in 1DH Chatter error: Verify the chatter monitoring
actuator/sensor = signal Signal chatters: too many signal changes parameters
chatters within the monitoring window Check process wiring, if necessary
If no further chattering of the input signal is change sensor
detected within three monitoring windows,
an outgoing diagnostics alarm is triggered.
The status of the value of the current signal
in the process image is set to "valid".
Channel/component 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or Connect the supply voltage
temporarily unavailable was canceled while running Restart the firmware update

24 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type
5.4 Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type
Diagnostics for changeover contact sensor type

With the changeover error diagnostics, the switchover between two input channels is
checked. If there is a signal change in a changeover contact channel and there is no signal
change at the other contact changeover channel after the tolerated switchover time, the
diagnostics module returns a changeover error.
The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is set to the fixed value of 300 ms.
Changeover sensors are always assigned to two adjacent channels: The normally open
contact channel should be set in accordance with the sensor type to channel 0, 2, 4, 6, and
the respective corresponding normally closed contact channel 1, 3, 5, 7 deactivated.
Principle of changeover contact diagnostics

If the digital inputs of a channel group are configured as "changeover contacts", the module
for this channel group carries out diagnostics for the changeover contact sensor type.
If the validity check is negative, the following applies:
● The module identifies the value status of the normally open contact channel as "invalid"
(QI = "0"),
● The module creates a diagnostics entry for the normally open contact channel and
● A diagnostics interrupt is triggered if changeover error diagnostics is enabled.
The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the normally open contact
channel (channels 0, 2, 4, 6). The digital input signal is 0 and the value status is "invalid
(QI = "0") for the normally closed contact channel (channels 1, 3, 5, 7). This channel is only
used for a validity check of the sensor.
Please note the following special features for changeover contact diagnostics:
● If the normally open and normally closed contact signals are not plausible after 300 ms, a
changeover error is output as diagnostics information.
● If there is already a fault (QI = 0, e.g. a wire break), the module will no longer perform
diagnostics for changeover errors.
● There are different diagnostics options depending on the type of changeover contact
(Dependencies when configuring with GSD files (Page 32)). Depending on the sensor
type, a changeover error can have different causes.
– In the case of connected changeover contacts, a changeover error may also be the
result of a short-circuit (sensor is not defective; there is a short-circuit).
– In the case of unconnected changeover contacts, a changeover error may also be the
result of a wire break.
– If a wire break or short-circuit can be detected with the particular sensor type but its
diagnostics is not enabled, instead of the wire break or short-circuit diagnostics
information, the changeover error diagnostics information is displayed if this is
enabled.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 25
5.5 Chatter monitoring
Tip: Data records 0 to 7 and changeover sensor

Using the data records 1, 3, 5 and 7, you can configure a changeover sensor on an even
channel (normally closed contact channel).
The corresponding normally open contact channel can be configured with the data records 0,
2, 4 and 6.
An even changeover contact channel must be followed by an odd, deactivated channel.
Otherwise:
● you receive a parameter assignment error or
● the parameter assignment is rejected and the current parameter assignment retained.
Remedy: First, send data records 1, 3, 5 and 7 with deactivated, and then send data records
0, 2, 4 and 6 with changeover contact.
Description
Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports
signal changes that are unexpected in process engineering, for example when an input
signal fluctuates too often between "0" and "1". This period is known as the "monitoring
window". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or
that there are instabilities from a process engineering viewpoint.
Activating chatter monitoring

You activate chatter monitoring by specifying a permitted number of input signal changes
between "0" and "1" within the monitoring window. The number 0 deactivates the chatter
monitoring function.
A chatter error detected by the chatter monitoring has a direct effect on the value status (QI).
Detecting a chatter error

Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The
monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal
changes within the monitoring window more often than the configured number of signal
changes, this is recognized as a chatter error. If no chatter error is detected within the
monitoring window, the window is restarted at the next signal change.

26 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Reporting a chatter error

If a chatter error occurs, the current signal status is entered in the process image and the
value status of the signal is set to "invalid" (QI = 0). If "Chatter error" diagnostics is enabled,
"Chatter error" is also entered as diagnostic information, triggering an incoming diagnostics
interrupt.
You can evaluate and process the value status (QI) and the diagnostics information in the
user program.
Resetting a chatter error

If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, an
outgoing diagnostics interrupt is triggered. The status of the value of the current signal in the
process image is set to "valid".
Note
Active chatter monitoring is reset if there is an error in the input signal (value status QI =0 ).
Principle
The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter
monitoring.
Figure 5-3 The principle of chatter monitoring

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 27
Chatter monitoring and "settling time" if a chatter error occurs

Does the monitoring time in the event of a fault restart as three monitoring windows if the
signal continues to change?
The signal changes... Result

once more often than set in the "Number of signal changes". Monitoring time is restarted.
less often than set in the "Number of signal changes". The monitoring time is not started again, in other words, the
monitoring time runs once after a chatter error is detected.
Even a change just before the time is up is tolerated.

28 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
DI 8×NAMUR HF technical specifications
6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
Product type designation DI 8xNAMUR HF
General information
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3
Supply voltage
Sensor supply
Number of outputs 8
Output current
Power loss
Address area
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Digital inputs, configurable Yes
Type NAMUR
Pulse stretching Yes; 0.5 s, 1 s, 2 s
Edge evaluation Yes, rising edge, falling edge, edge change
Signal change chatter Yes, 2 to 32 signal changes
Chatter monitoring window Yes, 0.5 s, 1 s to 100 s in 1 s increments

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 29
6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
Input voltage
Rated value, DC 8.2 V
Input current
For 10 k connected contact
• For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA
• For signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA
For unconnected contact

• For signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent 0.5 mA
current)
• For signal "1" typ. 8 mA
For NAMUR sensors

• For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA
• For signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA

Tolerated switchover time for changeover contacts 300 ms
For NAMUR inputs
• with "0" to "1", max. 12 ms
• with "1" to "0", max. 12 ms
Cable length
Sensors
Connectable sensors
NAMUR sensor / changeover contact according to Yes
EN 60947
Single contact / changeover contact unconnected Yes
Single contact / changeover contact connected Yes
with 10 kΩ
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt Yes; channel-based
Hardware interrupt Yes, selectable, channels 0 to 7
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics information can be read Yes
Wire break Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Group error Yes

30 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
6ES7131-6TF00-0CA0
Monitoring of supply voltage Yes; green PWR LED
Between channels No
Between the channels and the supply voltage of Yes
the electronics
Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
NAMUR sensors and connected contacts

Monitoring for short-circuit and wire break only for NAMUR sensors and connected contacts.
The response ranges of the diagnostics correspond to IEC 60947-5-6.
Dimension drawing
See manual BaseUnits

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 31
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD files
When configuring the module with a GSD file, remember that the settings of some
parameters are dependent on each other, see the tables below.
Configuring with a PROFINET GSD file

The table lists the diagnostics information and its dependencies on the sensor types for
PROFINET.
Sensor type Diagnostics information

Missing Short-circuit Wire break Chatter Changeover Inversion
supply to ground error error
voltage L+
NAMUR sensor × × × × - ×
Single contact, unconnected × - - × - ×
Single contact, connected with 10 kΩ × - × × - ×
NAMUR changeover contact × × × × × -
Changeover contact, unconnected × - - × × -
Changeover contact, connected with × - × × × -
10 kΩ
Configuring with a PROFIBUS GSD file

The table lists the diagnostics information and its dependencies on the sensor types for
PROFIBUS.
Sensor type Diagnostics information

Missing Short-circuit Wire break Changeover Inversion
supply to ground error
voltage L+
NAMUR sensor × × × - ×
Single contact, unconnected × - - - ×
Single contact, connected with 10 kΩ × - × - ×
NAMUR changeover contact × × × × -
Changeover contact, unconnected × - - × -
Changeover contact, connected with 10 kΩ × - × × -

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 32

The data record 128 of the module has an identical structure, regardless of whether you
change the parameter assignment of the module in your user program regardless of its
configuration. This means that you can use all the functions of the module even if you
configured it using PROFIBUS GSD.
With data records 0 to 7, you can configure the individual channels.

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN (e.g. switch diagnostics on can be
changed in RUN).

128 or data records 0 to 7. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU,

continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, a corresponding
error code is written to the STATUS output parameter.
online help.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 33
Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7
Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 and data records 0 to 7
Header information
Figure A-2 DR 128 or DR 0 to 7: Bytes 0 and 1; header information

34 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
Parameters
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for a channel. This structure also
applies to channels 0 to 7.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01 35
Figure A-3 DR 128 or DR 0 to 7: Byte x to x+5: Structure for channels 0 to 7
See also
Parameters (Page 11)

36 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03894478-01
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital input module DI 4x120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

DI 4x120..230VAC ST ___________________
Preface
___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring
ET 200SP Parameter
DI 4x120..230VAC ST ___________________
assignment/addressing 4
(6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1) ___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
02/2014
A5E32043398-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
DI 4x120..230VAC ST digital input module (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Terminal assignment ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 11
4 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 12
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 12
4.3 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 13
5.2 Load voltage status ..................................................................................................................... 16

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 4
Introduction
The documentation for the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers topics
automation system.
Overview of documentation for digital input module DI 4×120..230VAC ST

The following table lists additional documentation that you will need when using the
DI 4×120..230VAC ST digital input module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for the DI 4×120..230VAC ST digital input module
Topic Documentation Key content

I/O system
• Installation
• Commissioning
Diagnostics
m/WW/view/en/59192926) hardware/software

features of the (http://support.automation.siemens.co documented in the system
ET 200SP I/O system m/WW/view/en/73021864) manuals, function manuals, or
other manuals.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 5
SIMATIC manuals

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Order number
6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the DI 4×120..230VAC ST module
Properties
● 4 digital inputs each with a value status (quality information)
● Suitable for connection of switches and 2-wire sensors in accordance with
IEC 61131, type 3
● Firmware update

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 7
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Accessories
● Labeling strips
You can find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP Distributed I/O
System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual.

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA
Wiring 3
NOTICE
Dangerous voltage: risk of death or serious injury
Prior to working on the system and module, always disconnect them from the power supply.
Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply.
Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 9
Wiring
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DI 4×120..230VAC ST
Pin assignment for DI 4×120..230VAC ST (6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1)

1 DI0 2 DI1 • DIn: Input signal, channel n B1
3 DI2 4 DI3 • L1: Sensor supply 120 to 230
5 L1 6 L1 V AC
7 L1 8 L1 • N: Neutral
9 N 10 N
11 N 12 N CC41
1L 120...230 1N N 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
V AC
2L 120...230 2N N
V AC
2-conductor 3-wire 4-wire
1 BaseUnit types that can be used are identified by the last two digits of the order number. See also
"ET 200SP distributed I/O system" system manual.

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
Figure 3-1 Block diagram DI 4x120...230VAC ST

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 11
Parameter assignment/addressing 4
4.1 Parameters
Parameters of the DI 4x120..230VAC ST

When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 20)).
Parameters Value range Default Configuration in Effective range with configuration

RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Operating mode • Channel activated Channel Yes Channel Channel
activated
• Channel deactivated
Operating mode
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 12
Parameter assignment/addressing
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space
Configuration options with the DI 4×120..230VAC ST


Address space of the digital input module DI 4×120..230VAC ST

The following figure shows the assignment of address space for the DI 4×120..230VAC ST
Figure 4-1 Address space of the DI 4×120..230VAC ST digital input module with value status

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 13
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the
DI 4x120..230VAC ST.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 14
Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the Status and fault displays.
LED DIAG
LED DIAG Meaning

Off
Flashing
On
Flashing
LED channel status
Table 5- 2 Channel status LED status and fault display
LED channel Meaning

status
Process signal = 0
Off
Process signal = 1
On
LED PWR
LED PWR Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 15
5.2 Load voltage status
Load voltage status

The firmware of the module cannot detect the status of the load voltage.
If the "Load voltage status" function tied to the server module is used, a "1" is always
displayed in the status bit for a slot with the DI 4×120..230VAC ST. Even when the load
voltage is not applied.

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA
DI 4×120..230VAC ST technical specifications
6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1
General information
Usable BaseUnits BU type B1
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Supply voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 10 mA
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 4
Output current
up to 60 °C, max. 10 A
Short-circuit protection No; install a fuse with 10A trigger current when
using a type B1 BU
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1 W; active power, load voltage 230 V, all inputs
wired with 230 V, 50 Hz
Address area
Input 1 bytes

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 17
6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 4
Active low/Active high No
type 3
Pulse stretching No
Input voltage
Type of input voltage 120/230 V AC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)
Rated value, AC 230 V
for signal "0" 0 to 40 V AC
for signal "1" 74 to 264 V AC
Input current
for signal "1", typ. 10.8 mA
For standard inputs
• Configurable No
• with "0" to "1", min. 1.5 ms
• with "0" to "1", max. 4 ms
• with "1" to "0", min. 10 ms
• with "1" to "0", max. 10 ms
Cable length
Encoders
Supported encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt No

18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA
6ES7131-6FD00-0BB1
Between the channels and the supply voltage of No
the electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2545 V DC 2 s (routine test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Dimensional drawing

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 19


128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart.

online help.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 20
Index
Header information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA 21
Index
Parameters

22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043398-AA
Digital output module ___________________
Preface
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA ___________________
(6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Digital output module
___________________
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA
(6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E36107249-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA (6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................15
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................18
A.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record .......................................23

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0 (packaging unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BF00-2AA0 (packaging unit: 10 units)
View of the module
① Module type and ⑦ Function class

name
⑤ LEDs for channel ⑪ Article number
status
⑥ LED for supply volt-
age
Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Digital output module with 8 outputs
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel)
● Source output (PNP, P-switching)
● Configurable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Safety-related shutdown
● Firmware update
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can use and combine the different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual Distributed I/O System
ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Note
• The load group of the module must begin with a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in mind
Note
Cross circuit at output
Be aware that voltage from a cross-circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 11
Wiring
Wiring: 1 and 2-wire connection of actuators

The following figure shows an example of the terminal assignment of the digital output
module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and
2-wire connection).
① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored

BaseUnit only)
② 2-wire connection M Ground
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
BaseUnit)
④ Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n
⑤ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (option- .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
al)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- PWR Power LED (green)
Image 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 1- and 2-wire connection of actuators

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Wiring
Wiring: 3-wire connection of actuators

module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).
① 3-wire connection 1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 and PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored Ba-
light-colored BaseUnit is present) seUnit only)
DQn Output signal, channel n M Ground
BaseUnit)
Image 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 13
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA

the parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment

reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
Diagnostics: • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
• Disable
Channel activated • Enable Enable Yes Channel Channel
• Disable
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value 1
colored BaseUnit)
is 4 bytes.

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA

Channel activated
Reaction to CPU STOP

Determines the behavior of the module in the event of a CPU STOP.
Potential group
neighbor.
See also
4.3 Address space
Address space of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 0.5A BA

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the
DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA.
Image 4-1 Address space of the DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 15
LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA.
③ PWR (green)

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel deactivated or activated and process signal = 0
Off
Channel activated and process signal = 1
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 17
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.


Supply voltage miss- 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
ing seUnit
temporarily unavail- or has been canceled.
able The module does not output any process
or substitute values in this state.

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Technical specifications of the DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A BA
6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A BA, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
DQ with energy-saving function No
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption, max. 45 mA; without load
Output voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 19
6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0
Address area
Address space per module, max. 1 byte
Automatic coding
• Mechanical coding element: Yes
Selection of BaseUnit for connection versions

1-wire connection BU type A0
2-wire connection BU type A0
3-wire connection BU type A0 with AUX terminals
4-wire connection No
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 0.7 to 1.7 A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. L+ (-53 V)

Control of a digital input Yes
Switching capacity of outputs
With resistive load, max. 0.5 A
With lamp load, max. 5W
Load resistance range
Low limit 48 Ω
High limit 12 kΩ
Output current
For signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
For signal "0" residual current, max. 1 mA
Output delay with resistive load
"0" to "1", max. 100 µs; with rated load
Parallel connection of two outputs
For increased performance No
For redundant control of a load Yes; for each module
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 100 Hz
With inductive load, max. 2 Hz
With lamp load, max. 10 Hz
Total current of the outputs
Current per channel, max. 0.5 A
Current per module, max. 4A

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
6ES7132-6BF00-0AA0
Total current of the outputs (per module)
Horizontal installation
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
Vertical installation
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A
Cable length
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Substitute values can be applied Yes
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit No
Group error Yes
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 21

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
GSD.



online help.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 23
Note
Header information

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA
Parameters

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine whether
the module is plugged in or pulled.
• Check assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WREC instruction.
DF 80 E0 xx Wrong version or error in the header in- Correct the version, length and number of
formation parameter blocks.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107249-AA 25
Preface
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST ___________________
(6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
___________________
DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST
(6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E03574516-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST (6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0 (packaging unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BD20-2BA0 (packaging unit: 10 units)
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Output current 2 A (per channel)
● Total current 8 A (per module) (see derating: Technical specifications (Page 22))
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

as of module as of
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Wiring up 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the
different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnits in the system manual Distributed
I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Note
Note
The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module,
rendering the terminals unusable.
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 11
Wiring up

module DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
① 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n

② 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored
BaseUnit only)
③ Backplane bus interface M Ground
④ Output electronics P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
BaseUnit)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- PWR Power LED (green)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Wiring up

module DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals

② Color-coded labels with color codes CC02 PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
and CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored
light-colored BaseUnit is present) BaseUnit only)
BaseUnit)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 13
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST


• Disable
Short-circuit to
• Disable
ground
Short-circuit to L+
• Disable
Wire break
• Disable
• Disable

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
4.1 Parameters

STOP
• Keep last value
plugged into a dark-colored left module
BaseUnit)
• Enable new potential group
(module plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)
is 4 bytes.
Note
enabled and one of these diagnostics occurs, the affected channel is switched off to avoid
triggering an undefined load. Note that a diagnostic interrupt can only be generated when
diagnostics are enabled. 1
1 as of module revision 06

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 15


Diagnostics: Short-circuit to L+
Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ occurs.

Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken.
Channel activated
Reaction to CPU STOP / substitute value

Potential group
neighbor.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image output/input.
Configuration options of DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST

STEP 7, as of V13,
SP1
1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.0 X X X
1 x 4-channel without value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.1 X X X
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST V1.1, QI X X ---

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST
Image 4-1 Address space of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 17
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST.
③ PWR (green)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD

The following tables show the meaning of the status and error displays. Measures for dealing
with diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 20).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
off
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 19
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● Wire break

Note
You can connect 2 actuators per output.
The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means:
• a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected
• a single short-circuit affects both actuators
Note
For parallel connection of two outputs for redundant control of a load, the channel
diagnostics "Short-circuit to L+" and "Wire break" must be deactivated.

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to Correct the process wiring
ground
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the
wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-
section
actuator
• Connect a resistor to the actuator con-
tacts in the load resistance range
Supply voltage 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
missing BaseUnit
not output any process or substitute
values in this state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 21
Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A ST
6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V11 SP2 / V13
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption, max. 60 mA; no load
Output voltage

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 2.8 ... 5.2 A

With resistive load, max. 2A
With lamp load, max. 10 W
Low limit 12 Ω
High limit 3400 Ω
Output current
For signal "1" rated value 2A
For signal "0" residual current, max. 0.1 mA
"0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
"0" to "1", max. 50 µs
"1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
"1" to "0", max. 100 µs
For redundant control of a load Yes
Switching frequency
Current per channel, max. 2A

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 23
6ES7132-6BD20-0BA0
• Up to 30 °C, max. 8A
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 8A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 6A
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 6A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
Cable length
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes; module by module
Group error Yes
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Safety-related shutdown
Note
The digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A ST supports safety-related shutdown in
connection with a fail-safe power module F-PM-E 24VDC/8A PPM ST:
• SIL according to IEC 61508: 2
• Highest attainable safety class in safety mode, performance level according to
EN ISO 13849-1: d
Residual current for signal state "0"
Note
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the "0"
signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current does not depend on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break
parameter.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 25
Derating trend
The following figure show the load current derating with horizontal and vertical mounting
positions.
Image 6-1 Load current for mounting position
Dimension drawing

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
GSD.



online help.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 27
Note
Header information

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Parameters

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD 29

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574516-AD
Preface
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST ___________________
(6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST
(6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0) ___________________
___________________
Manual
___________________
07/2014
A5E03574575-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

The information provided in this manual and in the system/function manuals supports you
when commissioning the ET 200SP distributed I/O system.
Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)

4 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties ....................................................................................................................................... 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................12
4.3 Address space .............................................................................................................................15
5.2 Interrupts ......................................................................................................................................18

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 5
three areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
Web server.

6 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Documentation guide

to your own manual.


CAx or CAe systems.
EPLAN macro files

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST
Properties
● Output current 0.5 A per channel
● Source output (PNP)
● Module-oriented selectable diagnostics
● Substitute value output

8 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties

● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 9
Wiring up 3
Terminal assignment for DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)

(terminals 1 to 16)
1 DQ0 2 DQ1 • DQn: Output signal, channel n A0
3 DQ2 4 DQ3 • M: Ground
5 DQ4 6 DQ5
7 DQ6 8 DQ7
9 M 10 M
11 M 12 M
CC02
13 M 14 M
6ES7193-6CP02-2MA0
15 M 16 M
L+ 24 VDC M M
2-wire
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Also keep this in
mind during the configuration.

10 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Wiring up
Figure 3-1 Block diagram DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 11
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST

the parameters to the module using the data records; refer to the section Auto-Hotspot.

GSD file GSD file
Diagnostics • Enable Disable yes Module Module
• Disable
• Disable
Short-circuit to L+
• Disable
Wire break
• Disable
enabled
• Channel enabled
Reaction to • Turn off Turn off yes Channel Module
CPU STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute value

12 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
4.1 Parameters

GSD file GSD file
Substitute value • 0 0 yes Channel Channel
• 1
Potential group • Use potential group Use potential no Module Module
of the left module group of the
left module
• Allow new potential
group
1 Due to the limited number of parameters at a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a
PROFIBUS GSD configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can assign these
parameters using data record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above).
The parameter length of the I/O module is 16 bytes.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 13


Diagnostics short-circuit to L+

Operating mode

Specifies the behavior of the module if the CPU changes to STOP.
Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with voltage supply feed-in is located in this slot
(see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system

14 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

An additional byte is allocated in the input address space if you enable the value status
for the digital module. Bits 0 to 7 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
Address space
DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)).
The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled.
Figure 4-1 Address space of the DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 15
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST.
③ PWR (green)


16 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
off
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 17
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
● No load voltage

18 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC


Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update
unavailable or has been canceled.
The module does not output any process
or substitute values in this state.
ground
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high. Use a different actuator type or wire
differently, e.g. use cables with a larger
cross-section
actuator
• Connect a resistor to the actuator
contacts in the load resistance range
Parameter assignment 10H • The module cannot evaluate Correct the parameter assignment
error parameters for the channel.
on the BaseUnit

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 19
Technical specifications of DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A ST
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
Product type designation DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A ST
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area

20 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
Fieldbus connection via separate transceiver Yes
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8
Sourcing output Yes
Short-circuit protection

Low limit 48 Ω
High limit 12 kΩ
Output current
Parallel switching of 2 outputs
Switching frequency
Max. current per module 4A
• up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
• up to 50 ℃, max. 4A
Cable length
Interrupts

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 21
6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0
Diagnostics alarms
Wire break Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Group error Yes
Insulation
Degree of protection and protection class
IP (rear) IP20
Performance level according to EN ISO 13849-1:2008 d (conditional use of an F-PM-E)
SIL according to IEC 61508:2010 2 (conditional use of an F-PM-E)
Use in hazardous areas
Explosion protection category for gas ATEX II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
Associated equipment (Ex ia) No
Associated equipment (Ex ib) No
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

22 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Note
Due to the Diagnostics: Wire break function, there is a low level of residual current in the
"0" signal state at the output, which may cause the display diodes to flicker.
This residual current depends on the setting for the Diagnostics: Wire break parameter.
Dimension drawing

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 23



online help.

24 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Note
Header information

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC 25
Parameters

26 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03574575-AC
Preface
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF ___________________
(6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
___________________
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF
(6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E03576680-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................26

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A HF

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
Product version of the Firmware version of the

Function module as of module as of
Module-internal Shared Output (MSO) 1 V1.2.0
submodules for Shared Device
Accessories
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
See also
System ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622).

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
Note
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 11
Wiring

module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals
① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored

BaseUnit only)
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
BaseUnit)
④ Output electronics DQn Output signal, channel n
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 (optional) .0 to .7 Channel status LED (green)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- F0 to F7 Channel fault LED (red)
PWR Power LED (green)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Wiring

module DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals

CC71 (optional)
③ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored
colored BaseUnit is present) BaseUnit only)
BaseUnit)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 13
4.1 Parameters
GSD file parameters

● Distributed operation with an ET 200SP CPU
Table 4- 1 Parameters for DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF (GSD file)
Parameter Range of values Default Configura- Scope with configuration soft-

tion in RUN ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Enable
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel
Short-circuit to L
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
• Enable

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
4.1 Parameters

tion in RUN ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
STOP 1
• Keep last value
left module (module group of the left
plugged into a dark- module
colored BaseUnit)
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign these parameters using data records 64 to
71 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 7
bytes.
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 15



Channel activated

Potential group
neighbor.
See also
See system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

Configuration options of DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF

STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1.0 X X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V1.1, X X ---
QI
QI
for module-internal Shared Out- MSO
put with up to 4 submodules
1 x 8-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0 --- X X
1 x 8-channel with value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, --- X ---
QI
for module-internal Shared Out- MSO
put with up to 4 submodules
2 x 4-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, --- X ---
S.2
S.2 QI
4 x 2-channel without value status DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, --- X ---
S.4
S.4 QI

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 17
4.3 Address space
Note
IO device.
• Firmware update
• PROFIenergy
2 x 4- / 4 x 2-channel configuration
For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into multiple submodules. The
submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a Shared
Device.

● DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF QI
● DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF MSO
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status
indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module
terminal (0 = value is incorrect).
Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF

module without value status
Image 4-1 Address space for configuration as 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI without value
status

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as
1 x 8-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the
module. The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address.
Image 4-2 Address space for configuration as 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, QI with value
status
Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF, MSO

For the configuration as a 1 x 8-channel module (module-internal Shared Output, MSO),
channels 0 to 7 of the module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 to 7 are then
available with identical values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to
up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device:
● The IO controller to which submodule 1 is assigned has write access to outputs 0 to 7.
● The IO controllers to which submodule 2, 3, or 4 is assigned have read access to outputs
0 to 7.

incorrect or that the IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP state.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSO submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value
is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred:
● The basic submodule is not yet configured (not ready).
● The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted.
● The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 19
4.3 Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for submodules 1, 2, 3, and
Image 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 8-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF MSO with value
status

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2

Image 4-4 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2
without value status
Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI

module with value status.
Image 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 4-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.2 QI
with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 21
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4

Image 4-6 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI

Image 4-7 Address space for configuration as 4 x 2-channel DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF V2.0, S.4 QI
with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 23
LED displays
DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF:
④ PWR (green)
Image 5-1 LED displays

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Corrective measures
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
LED channel LED channel Meaning

status error
Off Off and no channel diagnostics
On Off and no channel diagnostics
Off On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 25
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
Diagnostics alarms
Note

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD

Short-circuit 1H • Short-circuit of actuator supply to ground 1 Correct the process wiring
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ 2
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables
with larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and actuator Connect the cable
contacts in the load resistance
range
Parameter as- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters for Correct the parameter assignment
signment error the channel.
Supply voltage 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
missing BaseUnit
Chan- 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or has • Wait for firmware update.
nel/component been canceled. The module does not output
temporarily una- any process or substitute values in this state.
vailable
1 only in switched state (output value 1)
2 only in non-switched state (output value 0)
Note
In case of a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ at the activated channel, load
distributions can occur which result in wire break diagnostics.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 27
Technical specifications of the DQ 8×24VDC/0.5A HF
6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A HF, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO Yes
Supply voltage
Output voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
Address area
mation
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
Short-circuit protection

Low limit 48 Ω
High limit 12 kΩ
Output current
"0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
"1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
Switching frequency
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A
Cable length

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 29
6ES7132-6BF00-0CA0
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Execution and activation time (TCO), min. 48 µs
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Group error Yes
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Note
The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0.5A HF supports safety-related shutdown in
EN ISO 13849-1: d

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Note
parameter.
Dimension drawing

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 31
GSD.
With data records 64 to 71, you can configure individual channels.

changed in RUN).


instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the
STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
online help.

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD
Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 or data records 64 to 71
Header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 33
Parameters

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03576680-AD 35
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA ___________________
Preface
Digital Output Module ___________________

(6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0)
___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA ___________________
digital output module
(6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0) ___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
02/2014
A5E32855878-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA digital output module (6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 10
4.3 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 11
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 14

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 4
Introduction
automation system.
Overview of the documentation for digital output module DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

The table below lists additional documentation that you will need when using the
DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA digital output module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for digital output module DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

I/O system
• Installation
• Commissioning
ET 200SP Distributed documentation manuals, function manuals, or
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.co other manuals.
SIMATIC manuals

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 5
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Part number
6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA module

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 6
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● 8 digital outputs
● Sink output (NPN, M switching)
● Firmware update
Accessories
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 7
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment for DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA
Pin assignment for DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA (6ES7132-6BF00-0BA0)

1 DQ0 2 DQ1 • DQn: Output signal, channel n A0
3 DQ2 4 DQ3 • L+: Actuator supply
5 DQ4 6 DQ5
7 DQ6 8 DQ7
9 L+ 10 L+
11 L+ 12 L+
CC01
13 L+ 14 L+
6ES7193-6CP01-2MA0
15 L+ 16 L+
L+ 24 V DC M M
2-wire
Note
The first BaseUnit of an ET 200SP station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Keep this in
mind also during the configuration.
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 8
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
The figure below shows the block diagram of the DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA.
Figure 3-1 Block diagram DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 9
4.1 Parameters
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA parameters


STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS
DP 1
• Enable
• Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module
(reaction)
• Keep last value
Channel
• Output substitute value 1 (substitute
value)
left module
group
record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 10

Operating mode

Potential group
Specifies whether a BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located on this slot.
Principle
4.3 Address space
Address space of the digital output module DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for
DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA.
Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital output module DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 11
LED displays
DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 12

LED DIAG
LED DIAG Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
LED channel status
LED channel Meaning

status
Off
On
LED PWR
LED PWR Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 13
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA digital output module supports diagnostics alarms.
Diagnostics alarms

BaseUnit

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA
Technical specifications of the DQ 8×24VDC/0,5A SNK BA
6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0
Product type designation DQ 8x24VDC/0,5A SNK BA
General information
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Multi-output No
Oversampling No
MSI No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Output voltage
Power loss
Address area
Output 1 bytes

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 15
6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8
Switching to M potential Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 1.5 A
Wire-break detection No
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Typ. 47V
Controlling a digital input Yes
Low limit 48 Ω
High limit 3400 Ω
Output current
for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
for signal "0" residual current, max. 5 µA
"0" to "1", max. 300 µs
"1" to "0", max. 600 µs
Switching frequency
With inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz
Max. current per channel 0.5 A
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA
6ES7132-6BF60-0AA0
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimensional drawing

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 17

You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).


online help.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 18
Note
Channel 0 includes the diagnostics for the entire module.
Header information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA 19
Parameters

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855878-AA
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital output module DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST ___________________
Preface
___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP Parameter
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST ___________________
assignment/addressing 4
digital output module
(6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1) ___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
02/2014
A5E32043575-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
DQ 4x24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Terminal assignment ..................................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 11
4 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 12
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 12
4.3 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 14
5.2 Load voltage status ..................................................................................................................... 17

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 4
Introduction
The documentation for the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers topics
automation system.
Overview of the documentation for digital output module DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST

DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for digital output module DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST
Topic Documentation Key content

I/O system
• Installation
• Commissioning
System diagnostics Function manual Diagnostics • Overview
hardware/software
features of the ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.co documented in the system
I/O system m/WW/view/en/73021864) manuals, function manuals, or
other manuals.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 5
SIMATIC manuals

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Order number
6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST module

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 7
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● 4 digital outputs each with a value status (quality information)
● Switches in zero point
● Output current 2 A per channel
● Total current 8 A (per module)
● Assignable substitute values (per channel)
● Substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
● Labeling strips

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA
Wiring 3
NOTICE
Dangerous voltage. Risk of death or serious injury.
Prior to working on the system and module, always disconnect them from the power supply.
Note
Limiting overvoltage
You must ensure overvoltage is limited to 1 kV for the encoder supply.
Note
Power limitation
To limit power, each input voltage must have a fuse with a maximum rating of 10 A tripping
current. The fuse must be a quick-acting microfuse.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 9
Wiring
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST
Pin assignment for DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST (6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1)

1 DQ0 2 DQ1 • DQn: Output signal, B1
3 DQ2 4 DQ3 channel n
5 L1 6 L1 • L1: Encoder supply 24 to 230
7 L1 8 L1 V AC2, 3
9 N 10 N • N: Neutral 2
11 N 12 N CC41
1L 24...230 V 1N N 6ES7193-6CP41-2MB0
AC
2L 24...230 V 2N N
AC
Connection examples
1 BaseUnit types that can be used are identified by the last two digits of the order number. See also
2 L1, N: Supply terminals for the I/O module on this BU only
3 max. load current: max. permitted module current, depending on temperature derating, minus the total output current in
the application
No pin for
The digital output is not suitable for alternating current loads.

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
Figure 3-1 Block diagram DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 11
Parameter assignment/addressing 4
4.1 Parameters
DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST parameters
When performing the configuration in the user program, use the "WRREC" instruction to
transfer the parameters to the module using data records (refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 21)).
Parameters Value range Default Reconfiguration Effective range with configuration

in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP1
Operating mode • Channel activated Channel Yes Channel Channel
activated
• Channel deactivated
STOP
• Keep last value
• Output substitute
value 1
1 Only for configuration using the PROFIBUS GSD file; does not affect configuration with STEP 7 using HSP: As the
number of parameters with PROFIBUS GSD configuration is limited to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station,
the configuration options are limited. If required, however, you can still set this parameter using data record 128 as
described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see the table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 3
bytes.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 12
Operating mode

See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 13
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space
Configuration options with the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST


Address space of the digital output module DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST

The following figure shows the assignment of address space for the
DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
value status are only available if the value status is enabled.
Figure 4-1 Address space of the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST digital output module with value status

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and fault displays) of the
DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 15
Meaning of the LEDs

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and fault displays.
LED DIAG
LED DIAG Meaning

Off
Flashing
On
Flashing
LED channel status
Table 5- 2 LED channel status display
LED channel Meaning

status
Off
On
LED PWR
LED PWR Meaning

Off
On

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA
Load voltage status

The firmware of the module cannot detect the status of the load voltage.
If the "Load voltage status" function tied to the server module is used, a "1" is always
displayed in the status bit for a slot with the DQ 4×24..230VAC/2A ST. Even when the load
voltage is not applied.
The state of the load voltage at the terminal does not impact the PROFIenegy behavior.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 17
DQ 4×24...230VAC/2A ST technical specifications
6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
General information
Usable BaseUnits BU type B1
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Supply voltage
Rated value (AC) 230 V
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 11.5 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 9 W; active power, load voltage 230 V, all outputs
loaded with 2 A, 50 Hz
Address area
Output 1 bytes
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Switching to M potential No
Switching to P potential Yes
Short-circuit protection No; install a fuse with 10A trigger current when
using a type B1 BU
Wire-break detection No
Overload protection No; install a fuse with 10A trigger current when
using a type B1 BU
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to Install overvoltage protection when using a type
B1 BU
Controlling a digital input Yes

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 18
6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Output voltage
for signal "1", min. 20.4 V
Output current
for signal "1" rated value 2A
for signal "1" permissible range, min. 10 mA
For signal "1" permitted range, max. 2A
for signal "0" residual current, max. 460 µA
"0" to "1", max. 10 ms
"1" to "0", max. 10 ms
For logical operations No
Switching frequency
Max. current per channel 2A
• up to 40 °C, max. 8A
Output current per channel

Triac outputs
Size of motor starter according to NEMA, max. 5

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 19
6ES7132-6FD00-0BB1
Cable length
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics interrupt No
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2545 V DC 2 s (routine test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Dimensional drawing

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA


128. The parameters set with STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid after a restart.

online help.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 21
Index
Header information

22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA
Index
Parameters

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32043575-AA 23
Preface
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF ___________________
(6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
___________________
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF
(6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E32855695-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/91696622) system manual.
Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF (6ES7132-6BF20-0CA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................24

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
View of the module

⑤ LEDs for channel status/channel fault ⑪ Article number
Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
● Module-internal Shared Output (MSO)
Product version of the module Firmware version of the module

Function as of as of
submodules for shared device
Accessories
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF module with the terminal
assignments for a 1-wire, 2-wire and 3-wire connection. You can use and combine the
different wiring options for all channels.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnits in the system manual Distributed
I/O System ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Note
Note

11 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Wiring

module DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (1- and
2-wire connection).
① 1-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit

only)
③ Backplane bus interface P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
seUnit)
④ Output electronics DIAG Error or diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Polarity reversal protection .0 to .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC02 F0 to F3 Channel fault LED (red)
(optional)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when PWR Power LED (green)
DQn Output signal, channel n

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Wiring

module DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire
connection).

CC71 (optional)
BaseUnit)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 13
4.1 Parameters
Parameters of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration soft-

reassignment ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
• Enable
• Enable
Short-circuit to L+
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
• Enable

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 14
4.1 Parameters
Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Scope with configuration soft-

reassignment ware, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
STOP
• Keep last value
the left module (module group of the left
plugged into a dark Ba- module
seUnit)
seUnit)
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign the parameters using data records 64 to
67 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is
7 bytes.
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 15



Channel activated

Potential group
neighbor.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

Configuration options of DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF

You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or with a GSD file. When you
configure the module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different
abbreviations/module names. The following configurations are possible:
Configuration Abbreviation/module Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)

STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 4-channel without value DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF X X X
status V1.0
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF X X ---
V1.0, QI
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF X X ---
for module-internal Shared V1.0, MSO
Output with up to 4 submodules
1 x 4-channel without value DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X ---
status V2.0
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X X
V2.0, QI
1 x 4-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V2. --- X ---
for module-internal Shared 0, MSO
Output with up to 4 submodules
2 x 2-channel without value DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X ---
status V2.0, S.2
2 x 2-channel with value status DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF --- X ---
V2.0, S.2 QI
Note
IO device.
• Firmware update
• PROFIenergy

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 17
4.3 Address space
2 x 2-channel configuration
For the configuration, the channels of the module are divided into multiple submodules. The
submodules can be assigned to different IO controllers when the module is used in a Shared
Device.
Value status (quality information, QI)

● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF QI
● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF MSO
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The bit for the value status
indicates if the output value specified by the user program is actually pending at the module
terminal (0 = value is incorrect).
Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V1.0

The figure below shows the address space assignment for configuration as a 4-channel
Image 4-1 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, QI without value
status

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V1.0, QI

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a
4-channel module with value status. You can freely assign the start address for the module.
The addresses of the channels are derived from the start address.
Image 4-2 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, QI with value
status
Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V1.0, MSO

For the configuration as a 1 x 4-channel module (module-internal shared output, MSO),
channels 0 to 3 of the module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 to 3 are then
available with identical values in various submodules. These submodules can be assigned to
up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device:
● The IO controller to which submodule 1 is assigned has write access to outputs 0 to 3.
● The IO controller to which submodule 2, 3, or 4 is assigned has read access to outputs 0
to 3.

For the 1st submodule (= basic submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value is
incorrect or that the IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP state.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (= MSO submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the
value is incorrect or one of the following errors has occurred:
● The basic submodule is not yet configured (not ready).
● The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted.
● The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 19
4.3 Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for submodules 1, 2, 3, and
Image 4-3 Address space for configuration as 1 x 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, MSO with value
status

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
4.3 Address space
Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, S.2

Image 4-4 Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, S.2 without
value status
Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF, S.2 QI

Image 4-5 Address space for configuration as 2 x 2-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF V2.0, S.2 QI with
value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 21
LED displays
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF.
④ PWR (green)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 22
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED channel Meaning

LED error
Off Off
Channel activated and no channel diagnostics
On Off
Off On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 23
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● Wire break
Diagnostics alarms
Note
The diagnostics of the two actuators influenced each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means:
• a wire break is only signaled if both actuators are affected
• a single short-circuit affects both actuators
Note

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

ground 1
• Short-circuit of actuator supply to L+ 2
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify
the wiring, for example, use cables with
Wire break between the module and actu- Connect the cable
ator
contacts in the load resistance range
Supply voltage miss- 11H No or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the Ba-
ing seUnit
temporarily unavail- or has been canceled. The module does
able not output any process or substitute val-
ues in this state.
1 only in switched state (output value 1)
2 only in non-switched state (output value 0)
Note
In case of a short-circuit of the actuator supply to L+ at the activated channel, load
distributions can occur which result in wire break diagnostics.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 25
Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HF
6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO Yes
Supply voltage
Output voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 26
6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
Address area
mation
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
• Response threshold, typ. 2.8 ... 5.2 A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ -(37 to 41V)

Control of a digital input Yes; minimum current consumption 7 mA
Low limit 12 Ω
High limit 3400 Ω
Output current
"0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
"1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
Switching frequency
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 8A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 6A
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 6A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 27
6ES7132-6BD20-0CA0
Cable length
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Jitter, max. 8 µs
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Group error Yes
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Note
The digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HF supports safety-related shutdown in
EN ISO 13849-1: d
Note
parameter.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 29
Derating trend
positions.
Dimension drawing

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via
PROFIBUS-GSD.
You can configure the individual channels with data records 64 to 67.

changed in RUN).


instruction and continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the
STATUS output parameter contains a corresponding error code.
online help.

31 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 or data records 64 to 67
Header information

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Parameters

Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC 33

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E32855695-AC
Preface
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS ___________________
(6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring
ET 200SP
Digital output module 4
___________________
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS
(6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
03/2015
A5E34944434-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.3 Normal operation/Valve control ..............................................................................................18
4.4 Pulse width modulation ...........................................................................................................19
4.5 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................23
4.6 Address space ........................................................................................................................25
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................31
6.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS ......................................................................................36

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
View of the module
① Module type and name ⑦ LED for supply voltage

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Function class
③ 2D matrix code ⑨ Color coding module type
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑪ Color code for selecting the color identification labels
⑥ LEDs for operating mode ⑫ Article number
Figure 2-1 View of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS module

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Digital output module with 4 outputs (push-pull)
● Source output (PNP, sourcing output)
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
● Oversampling
● Valve control
● Pulse width modulation
You can configure the module with STEP 7 and with a GSD file.
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 9
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS module with the terminal
assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection in the three operating modes DQ, pulse
width modulation and oversampling.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Note
Note
Be aware that voltage from a cross circuit at the output can feed L+ to modules.
Note
• The connection of actuators with 1-wire connection is not permitted.
Note
Note
Outputs DQn- must not be connected with ground.

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Wiring
Connection: 2-wire connection of actuators

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 without AUX terminals (2-wire
connection).
① 2-wire connection 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit

only)
② Backplane bus interface M Ground
③ Control unit P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
④ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Error or Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only PWM Pulse width modulation LED (green)
when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
DQn+ Output signal, channel n OVS Oversampling LED (green)
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Block diagram and terminal assignment for 2-wire connection of actuators

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 11
Wiring

The figure below shows an example for the terminal assignment of the digital output module
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals (3-wire connection).

② Color identification labels CCxx (optional) PE (AUX) Protective conductor connection
DQn+ Output signal, channel n M Ground
DQn- Reference output signal, channel n P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
BaseUnit)
Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment for 3-wire connection of actuators

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
4.1 Parameters
DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS parameters
● Central operation with a CPU ET 200SP
When assigning the parameters in the user program, the "WRREC" instruction transfers the
parameters to the module using data records; see section Parameter assignment and
structure of the parameter data record (Page 39).
Table 4- 1 Configurable parameters and their defaults (GSD file) 3
Parameter Range of values Default Reconfigu- Effective range with configuration

ration in software, e.g. STEP 7
RUN GSD file GSD file
Operating mode • Normal operation DQ Normal operation No Module Module 1
(valve con- DQ (valve control)\
trol)/Oversampling 2 Oversampling
• Pulse width modulation

Output rate Normal operation and pulse 1 Sample/cycle No Module Module 1
width modulation:
• 1 Sample/cycle
Oversampling:
• 2 Sample/cycle
• 4 Sample/cycle
• ...
• 32 Sample/cycle
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module Module 1
• Enable
Short-circuit
• Enable

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 13
4.1 Parameters

Overflow
• Enable
Channel activated • Disable Enable Yes Channel Channel 1
• Enable
Reaction to CPU • Turn off Turn off Yes Channel Module 1
STOP
• Keep last value
Normal operation/
Oversampling
• Output substitute
value 1
Pulse width modulation
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential group No Module Module 1
the left module (dark- of the left module
colored BaseUnit)
group (light-colored
BaseUnit)
Holding time valve • Off 500 ms Yes Channel Channel 1
control
• 10 ms
• 20 ms
• ...
• 10 s
Pulse width modula- • Off 100% Yes Channel Channel 1
tion duty factor
• 0.1%
• 0.2%
• ...
• 100%

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
4.1 Parameters

Pulse width modula- • Off Off Yes Channel Channel 1
tion time period
• 0.20 ms
• 0.40 ms
• 0.93 ms
• 1.33 ms
• 4.27 ms
• 10.67 ms
• 21.33 ms
• 34.13 ms
• 59.73 ms
Substitute value duty • Off Off Yes Channel Channel 1
factor (for pulse
• 0.1%
width modulation)
• 0.2%
• ...
• 100%
1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using
the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the
2 Valve control is a special function of normal operation.
3 Oversampling is not supported with GSD files.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 15
Operating mode
Specifies for the entire module the operating mode in which the channels of the module are
operated. If you configure using a GSD file, you decide the module operating mode by
selecting the module name in the GSD file.
● Normal operation as digital output module
– Valve control is a special function of normal operation, see section Normal
operation/Valve control (Page 18).
● Pulse width modulation, see section Pulse width modulation (Page 19)
● Oversampling, see section Oversampling (Page 23)
See section Address space (Page 25).
Output rate
Specifies the number of sub-cycles per isochronous data cycle.
See section Oversampling (Page 23).

Diagnostics: Short-circuit
Enabling of the diagnostics when a short-circuit of the actuator supply occurs.
Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the permitted value range of the duty factor is exceeded
during pulse width modulation.
See section Pulse width modulation (Page 19).
Channel activated


16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Potential group
BaseUnits.
The potential group ends with a new light-colored BaseUnit or the end of the station.
Holding time valve control

Specifies the time which must expire before the pulse width modulated output signal is
output in the next possible data cycle.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 18).
Pulse width modulation duty factor

Specifies the pulse/pause duty factor for the activated pulse width modulation with valve
control.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 18).
Pulse width modulation time period

Specifies the frequency of the pulse width modulation.
See section Normal operation/Valve control (Page 18) and section Pulse width modulation
(Page 19).
Substitute value duty factor

Specifies the pulse/pause duty factor of the pulse width modulation if there is a CPU STOP.
See section Pulse width modulation (Page 19).
See also

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 17
4.3 Normal operation/Valve control
4.3 Normal operation/Valve control
Normal operation
"Normal operation" refers to the function of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS as digital output
module.
Valve control is a special function of normal operation.
Valve control function

You use valve control to switch to a smaller "holding current" after tightening the valve
(locked-rotor current). You do this by activating a pulse width modulation (see section Pulse
width modulation (Page 19)).
With a 0 → 1 transition of the digital channel, the configured holding time is started. After it
has expired, the pulse/pause duty factor is activated as pulse width modulation. The
actuating signal is output digitally as a pulse sequence of on and off pulses.
Configuration
You configure valve control with the following parameters:
● "Normal operation" operating mode
● Holding time valve control
● Pulse width modulation duty factor
● Pulse width modulation time period
The figure below shows the chronological sequence for valve control. The pulse width
modulation is activated in the next possible data cycle.
① Data cycle
② Holding time valve control
Figure 4-1 Valve control

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
4.4 Pulse width modulation
"Pulse width modulation time period" parameter

You use the "Pulse width modulation time period" parameter to specify the frequency of the
pulse width modulation activated for valve control (see section Pulse width modulation
(Page 19)).
Note: When this is parameter is set to "Off", the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS is in normal operation
without valve control.
"Pulse width modulation duty factor" parameter

You use the "Pulse width modulation duty factor" parameter (0 to 1000) to specify the
pulse/pause duty factor of the activated pulse width modulation within the configured time
period.
Note: Unlike in the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode, the duty factor cannot be
updated cyclically depending on the output value from the user program in normal operation
with valve control.
Derating
See the information on derating of the module in the section Derating of the
DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS (Page 36).
Function
You can operate the module in the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode. In this
operating mode, the four outputs only provide a pulse-width modulated output signal.
The digital channel is activated with a pulse/pause duty factor that is updated cyclically
depending on the output value from the user program. The actuating signal is output digitally
as a pulse sequence of on and off pulses.
① Time period T; frequency of the pulse width modulation: f = 1/T

② Pulse duration (duty factor)
Figure 4-2 Pulse width modulation

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 19
Configuration
You configure the pulse width modulation with the following parameters:
● "Pulse width modulation" operating mode
● Pulse width modulation time period
● Substitute value duty factor
● Diagnostics: Overflow
The output value (0 to 1000) is written from the user program to the output word of the
channel. The module maps this value by means of the output characteristic and the values
for minimum pulse duration and minimum pulse pause to the configured time period and thus
determines the pulse/pause duty factor (the pulse duration) of the pulse width modulation.
① Time period T
② Minimum pulse duration
③ Minimum pulse pause
Figure 4-3 Minimum pulse duration and minimum pulse pause

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
The minimum pulse duration and the minimum pulse pause are at least 2 μs each, which
means:
● Any pulse duration that is shorter than the minimum pulse duration will be suppressed
● Any pulse duration that is longer than the time period minus minimum pulse duration is
reduced to 100% (≙ output value 1000)
① Minimum pulse pause

② Output characteristic
③ Minimum pulse duration
Figure 4-4 Output characteristic of the pulse duration

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 21
The following values apply when determining the pulse/pause duty factor of the pulse width
modulation:
Table 4- 2 Determining the pulse/pause duty factor of the pulse width modulation
Time period parameter Frequency Output value in the user Pulse/pause duty factor at
program (‰) output terminal DQn (‰)
0.20 ms 5000 Hz 0...9 0
10...990 10...990
991...1000 1000
0.40 ms 2500 Hz 0...4 0
5...995 5...995
996...1000 1000
0.93 ms 1071 Hz 0...2 0
3...997 3...997
998...1000 1000
1.33 ms 750 Hz 0, 1 0
2...998 2...998
999, 1000 1000
4.27 ms 234 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
10.67 ms 94 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
21.33 ms 47 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
34.13 ms 29 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
59.73 ms 17 Hz 0...1000 0...1000
Example
When you configure a channel with 5000 Hz (≙ 200 μs) and the user program writes the
value 3 to the output word of the channel, this value is converted to 0 by the module: The
channel is permanently 0.
"Diagnostics: Overflow" parameter

You use the "Diagnostics: Overflow" parameter to enable the diagnostics if the permitted
value range of the duty factor is exceeded, which means an output value > 1000 from the
user program is written to the output word of the channel.
"Substitute value duty factor" parameter

You use the "Substitute value duty factor" parameter (0 to 1000) to specify the pulse/pause
duty factor of the pulse width modulation in the case of a CPU STOP.
Derating

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
4.5 Oversampling
4.5 Oversampling
Function
Oversampling is the output of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles), whereby n
sub-cycles correspond to one PROFINET bus cycle. A data packet is transmitted from the
controller to the module, which outputs the packet in n constant bus sub-cycles.
Oversampling is useful whenever you require output of data with high time resolution but
without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles.
With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles:
● Each sub-cycle returns a 4-bit output value.
● A sub-cycle is at least 100 μs long.
● Sub-cycles are possible in increments of 2 to 32 (only even numbers). The following
applies here: Isochronous data cycle / number of sub-cycles ≥ permitted sub-cycle
duration (100 μs).
Requirement
Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set.
Configuration
You configure oversampling with the following parameters:
● "Oversampling" operating mode
● Output rate
Note
Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the
runtime groups of your user program. Make sure that the output of data in the module is
synchronized with the user program of the CPU.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 23
4.5 Oversampling
The figure below shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The output data
present in the CPU is output in the data cycle after the next one, distributed across the
sub-cycles which are generated on the actual module.
n Output values from bus cycle n

Sub-cycle 4 bit x 32 (max) each = max. 16 bytes output data per data cycle
Derating

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
4.6 Address space
4.6 Address space

The module can be configured differently in STEP 7; see table below. Depending on the
Configuration options of DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

You can configure the module with STEP 7 or with a GSD file. When you configure the
module by means of the GSD file, the configuration is available under different short
designations/module names. The following configurations are possible:
Configuration Short designation/module Configuration software, e.g. STEP 7

name in the GSD file Can be integrated in GSD file GSD file
the hardware catalog PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
STEP 7, as of V13
SP1
1 x 4-channel normal operation DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS x x x
1 x 4-channel normal operation DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS QI x x -
with value status
1 x 4-channel with pulse width DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS PWM x x x
modulation
1 x 4-channel with oversampling - x - -

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 25
4.6 Address space
Overview of operating modes, functions and parameters

The table below provides an overview of:
● The dependencies between the operating modes of the module and associated technical
functions
● The required parameter assignment for the respective operating mode
Table 4- 4 Operating modes, functions and parameters of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS
Function/Parameter assignment Operating mode

Normal operation Valve control in Pulse width modulation Oversampling
normal operation
Function
Isochronous mode required - - - ×
Shortest sub-cycle (=sample 250 μs 250 μs 250 μs 100 μs
time)
Supported oversampling levels 1 1 1 2 to 32
(output rate)
Value status (QI) × × - -
Data length 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 16 bytes
Holding time valve control - × - -
Pulse width modulation duty - × - -
factor
Pulse width modulation time - × × -
period
Substitute value duty factor - - × -
Value status (quality information, QI)

The value status is always activated for the following module names in the GSD file:
● DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS (...) QI

the digital module. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are each assigned to one channel. They provide
● Bit =1: No fault is present on the channel.
● Bit =0: Channel is disabled or there is a fault/error on the module.
If an error on a channel occurs with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
4.6 Address space
Address space for configuration as 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the configuration as a
4-channel module with value status (normal operation without/with valve control). The
addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is enabled.
Figure 4-6 Address space for configuration as 4-channel DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS with value status
Address space for configuration with pulse width modulation

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with pulse width
modulation.
Figure 4-7 Address space of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS with pulse width modulation

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 27
4.6 Address space
Address space for configuration with oversampling

The figure below shows the address space allocation for the configuration with
oversampling.
Figure 4-8 Address space of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS with oversampling

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
LED displays
The figure below shows the location of the LED displays of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS.
③ Oversampling mode (green)
④ PWR (green)
⑤ Pulse width modulation operating mode (green)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 29
Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the Status and error displays. Corrective
measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 32).
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED
Channel status LED Meaning

Off
On
Oversampling LED
Table 5- 3 Status display of the oversampling LED
Oversampling LED Meaning

Off
On

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
5.2 Interrupts
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On
Pulse width modulation (PWM) LED
Table 5- 5 Status display of the pulse width modulation LED
PWM LED Meaning

Pulse width modulation operating mode disabled
Off
Pulse width modulation operating mode enabled
On
5.2 Interrupts
The DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS digital output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● Overtemperature
● High limit violated
● No load voltage
● Communications error

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 31
Diagnostics alarms
Note
The diagnostics of the two actuators influence each other in the case of duplicate wiring.
This means that a single short-circuit affects both actuators.
Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Solution

Short-circuit 1 2 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
Overtemperature 5H The module has detected that the maximum Correct the process wiring
permitted module temperature has been
exceeded. All channels of the module are
switched to high resistance. The module is
then restarted.
High limit violated 7H The permitted value range of the duty factor Correct the output value (0 to 1000)
has been exceeded.
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
ment error for the channel.
BaseUnit
Communications 13H Module is defective. Replace the module.
error
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update.
unavailable been canceled.
The module does not read out any process
values or substitute values in this state.
1 The channels 0 and 1 or 2 and 3 each form a load group. Within a load group, a short-circuit can have an effect on the
adjacent channel. The load groups do not have an effect on each other in the case of a short-circuit.
2 If the short-circuit persists, the module heats up. This may trigger temperature monitoring with overtemperature
diagnostic interrupt.

32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Technical specifications of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS
6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 4x24VDC/2A High Speed
General information

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
DQ with energy-saving function Yes; valve control
PWM Yes
Oversampling Yes
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Output voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.5 W; with 24 V, 25 °C, DQ mode, 2 A per
channel

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 33
6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
Address area
Input 1 byte; with QI
Output 16 bytes; max., in oversampling operating mode
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes; push-pull output
• Response threshold, typ. 6A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to M (-1 V)

Control of a digital input No
Digital output functions, configurable
PWM output Yes
• Number, max. 4
• Time period, configurable Yes; 0 ms; 0.2 ms; 0.4 ms; 0.93 ms; 1.33 ms;
4.27 ms; 10.67 ms; 21.33 ms; 34.13 ms;
59.73 ms
• Resolution of the on-load factor 0.1%
Digital output with oversampling Yes

• Number, max. 4
• Resolution, min. 100 µs

Low limit 12 Ω
High limit 3400 Ω
Output current
"0" to "1", max. 1 µs
"1" to "0", max. 1 µs
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 5 kHz
With inductive load, max. 5 kHz
With lamp load, max. 5 kHz

34 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
Total current of outputs
Total current of outputs (per module)
• up to 30 °C, max. 8 A; DQ mode
• up to 40 °C, max. 6.9 A; DQ mode
• up to 50 °C, max. 4 A; DQ mode
Cable length
Shielded, max. 50 m
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode (application synchronized up to Yes; DQ and OVS operating mode only
terminal)
Jitter, max. 1 µs
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Insulation

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 35
6.2 Derating of the DQ 4x24VDC/2A HS
6ES7132-6BD20-0DA0
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing
Maximum permitted output current depending on the frequency

The figure below shows the maximum permitted output current per channel depending on
the frequency.
You must take this characteristic into consideration for all operating modes of the module.
Figure 6-1 Derating of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS depending on the frequency

36 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Maximum permitted output current depending on the ambient temperature

In addition to the dependency of the maximum permitted output current on the frequency,
you also have to take into consideration the dependency on the ambient temperature.
Depending on the configured module operating mode, there is an additional "DQ" or "PWM"
derating. The table below shows the dependencies of derating version and module operating
mode:
Table 6- 1 Additional derating versions of the DQ 4×24VDC/2A HS
Derating version Operating mode

Normal operation Valve control in normal operation Pulse width modulation Oversampling
DQ derating × - - ×
PWM derating - × × -
DQ derating
The figure below shows the maximum permitted total current depending on the ambient
temperature for the DQ derating.
① Horizontal installation position

② Vertical installation position
Figure 6-2 Additional DQ derating depending on the ambient temperature

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 37
PWM derating
The figure below shows the maximum permitted total current depending on the ambient
temperature for the PWM derating.
① Horizontal installation position

② Vertical installation position
Figure 6-3 Additional PWM derating depending on the ambient temperature

38 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA

The module parameter settings can be changed in RUN. The time period of selected
channels can, for example, be changed in RUN in the "Pulse width modulation" operating
mode without having an effect on the other channels.

Note
A parameter data record that has content different from the startup parameter assignment
can result in a brief exit from clocked mode and renewed synchronization with the fieldbus
cycle.

online help.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 39
Structure of data record 128 for entire module
Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module
Header information

40 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA


The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block for channels 0 to 3.


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 41

The figure below shows the structure of the channel parameter block.
Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+7 for channels 0 to 3

42 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA
Codes for time period of the pulse width modulation

The table below contains the codes for the time period of the pulse width modulation of the
digital output module. You must enter these codes in bytes x+6 and x+7 of the channel
parameter block of data record 128 (see previous figure).
Table A- 1 Codes for output range
Value Time period Code

4 0.20 ms 0000 0100
7 0.40 ms 0000 0111
12 0.93 ms 0000 1100
14 1.33 ms 0000 1110
21 4.27 ms 0001 0101
26 10.67 ms 0001 1010
30 21.33 ms 0001 1110
33 34.13 ms 0010 0001
36 59.73 ms 0010 0100

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34944434-AA 43
Preface
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST ___________________
(6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
___________________
DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST
(6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E03574420-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST (6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.2 Declaration of parameters ......................................................................................................15
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................16
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
5.3 Diagnostic messages ..............................................................................................................21

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0 (packaging unit: 1 unit)
6ES7132-6BH00-2BA0 (packaging unit: 10 units)
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Output current 0.5 A (per channel), total current max. 8 A
(see derating: Technical specifications (Page 22))
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

as of module as of
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
You can find additional information on the accessories in the system manualET 200SP

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Connecting 3
This section includes the block diagram of the DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST module with the
terminal assignments for a 1-wire connection.
Note
Note
The fuse integrated in BaseUnit type A1 may be triggered in the digital output module,
rendering the terminals unusable.
Make sure that you only use digital output modules with BaseUnit type A0 during
commissioning.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 11
Connecting

The following figure shows the block diagram and an example for the terminal assignment of
the digital output module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0 (1-wire
connection).
① 1-wire connection DQn Output signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface 24 V DC Supply voltage L+ (infeed for light-colored BaseUnit only)
③ Output electronics M Ground
④ Polarity reversal protection P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
⑤ Supply voltage filter circuit (only available DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
with light BaseUnit )
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC00 .0 to .15 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 1-wire connection of actuators

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST


reassignment software, e.g. STEP 7
in RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Disable
• Disable
Short-circuit to L+
• Disable
Wire break
• Disable
• Disable

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 13
4.1 Parameters

in RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Keep last value
BaseUnit)
colored BaseUnit)
is 6 bytes.
Note

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC



Channel activated

Potential group
neighbor.
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 15
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

Configuration options of DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST

Configuration Short designation/module name Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
in the GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 16-channel without value DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V1.0 X X X
status
1 x 16-channel without value DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V1.1 --- X X
status
1 x 16-channel with value status DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST V1.1, QI --- X ---

An additional two bytes are allocated in the input address space if you enable the value
status for the digital module. Bits 0 to 15 in these bytes are assigned to a channel. They
provide information about the validity of the digital value.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
4.3 Address space
Address space
DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
Image 4-1 Address space of DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 17
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST.
③ PWR (green)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Meaning of the LEDs

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial
measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in chapter Diagnostic messages (Page 21).
DIAG LED
Table 5- 1 DIAG LED fault display
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Module not configured
Flashing
On
Flashing
LED channel status
Table 5- 2 LED channel status display
LED channel Meaning

status
Off
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 19
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST supports diagnostic interrupts.
● Short-circuit
● Wire break

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC

Note

ground
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the
wiring, e.g. use cables with larger cross-
section
actuator
• Connect a resistor to the actuator con-
tacts in the load resistance range
Parameter assign- 10H • The module cannot evaluate param- • Correct the parameter assignment
ment error eters for the channel.
Supply voltage 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
missing BaseUnit
not output any process or substitute

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 21
Technical specifications of the DQ 16×24VDC/0.5A ST
6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST, PU 1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Output voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
Address area
Address space per module, max. 2 bytes; + 2 bytes for QI information
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 16
Sinking output No
Sourcing output Yes
Low limit 48 Ω
High limit 12 kΩ
Output current
"0" to "1", typ. 50 µs
"1" to "0", typ. 100 µs
Switching frequency
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 8A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 6A
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 4A
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 6A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 4A

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 23
6ES7132-6BH00-0BA0
Cable length
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes; module by module
Group error Yes
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Note
The digital output module DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST supports safety-related shutdown in
EN ISO 13849-1: d
Note
parameter.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 25
Derating trend
positions.
Dimension drawing

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
that you can use all the functions of the module even if you configured it via
PROFIBUS-GSD.



online help.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 27
Note
Header information

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
Parameters

Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC 29

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E03574420-AC
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Digital output module RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST ___________________
Preface
Digital Output Module ___________________

(6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST ___________________
Digital Output Module
(6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0) ___________________
Manual ___________________
___________________
02/2014
A5E32855952-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST Digital Output Module (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 10
4.3 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 11
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 14

4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA
Introduction
automation system.
Overview of the documentation for digital output module RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST

RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for digital output module RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST

I/O system
• Installation
• Commissioning
ET 200SP Distributed I/O documentation manuals, function manuals, or
System (http://support.automation.siemens.co other manuals.
SIMATIC manuals

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 5
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Part number
6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST module

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● 4 digital outputs with floating relay changeover contacts
● Output current per output 2 A
● Normally open contact (NO: normally open) and normally closed contact (NC: normally
closed)
● Assignable substitute values (per channel)
● Suitable for resistive load
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
as spare parts:
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 7
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment for RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST
Pin assignment for RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST (6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0)

Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Description BaseUnit1 Color identification label
(terminals 1 to 16)
1 12.0 2 12.1 • 11.n: Common contact A0 ---
3 12.2 4 12.3 • 12.n: Normally closed
5 14.0 6 14.1 contact
7 14.2 8 14.3 • 14.n: Normally open
9 11.0 10 11.1 contact
11 11.2 12 11.3 • n: Channel
13 RES 14 RES
15 RES 16 RES
L+ 24 V DC M M
Changeover contact
Note
during the configuration
See also

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
The figure below shows the block diagram of the RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST.
Figure 3-1 Block diagram RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 9
4.1 Parameters
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST parameters
and structure of the parameter data record).
Parameter Value range Default Reconfigurati Scope with configuration

on in RUN software, e.g., STEP 7 (TIA
Portal)
GSD file GSD file
DP 1
Diagnostics • Enable Disable Yes Module Module
• Disable
• Enable
• Keep last value
record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O
module is 4 bytes.

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA

Operating mode

See also
4.3 Address space
Address space of the digital output module RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST

The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST.
Figure 4-1 Address space of the digital output module RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 11
LED displays
RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST.
③ PWR (green)

12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA

The tables below explain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial measures
LED DIAG
LED DIAG Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
LED channel status
LED channel Meaning

status
Off
Channel activated
On
LED PWR
LED PWR Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 13
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST digital output module supports diagnostics alarms.
Diagnostics alarms

potential group
• Check BaseUnit

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA
Technical specifications of the RQ 4×24VUC/2A CO ST
6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0
Product type designation RQ 4x24VUC/2A CO ST
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
as of version
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 50 mA
Power loss
Address area
Digital outputs
Switching frequency
Relay outputs
Number of relay outputs 4

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 15
6ES7132-6GD50-0BA0
Rated input voltage of relay coil L+ (DC) 24 V
Current consumption of relays (coil current of all 40 mA
relays), max.
Switching capacity of the contacts
• With resistive load, max. 2A
• Thermal continuous current, max. 2A
• Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V
• Rated switching voltage (AC) 24 V
Cable length
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Between the channels Yes
the electronics
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA
Derating trend
positions.
Figure 6-1 Load current for mounting position
Dimensional drawing

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 17

You have the option to re-configure the module in RUN (e.g. the response of selected
channels to the CPU-STOP state can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the
other channels).


online help.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 18
Header information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA 19
Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameters in data record 128.

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32855952-AA
Preface
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST ___________________
(6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
___________________
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST
(6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
Parameter assignment and
structure of the parameter A
data record
03/2015
A5E03576775-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

This manual supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................14
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................18
6.2 Switching cycles ......................................................................................................................23
A Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ........................................................ 24

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
Documentation guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1
View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST module

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Digital output module with 4 floating relay outputs
● Output current per output 5 A
● Normally open contact (NO: normally open)
● Substitute value output
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
Note
The I/O module RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST (6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1) replaces the
predecessor module with order number 6ES7132-6HD00-0BB0 and also supports the
BaseUnit BU type B1 (2-wire connection of actuators).
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 9
Wiring up 3
This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST module
with the terminal assignments for 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
Note
Note
The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX
terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE.

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
Wiring up

the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST on the BaseUnit BU type B0.
① 3-wire connection RES Reserve, must remain unused for future

function extensions
② Backplane bus interface 1A to 4A AUX terminals (freely usable up to
230 V AC)
③ Polarity reversal protection DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
④ Color identification label CCxx (optional) .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
RQn+, RQn- Channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for 3-wire connection of actuators

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 11
Wiring up

the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST on the BaseUnit BU type B1.
① 2-wire connection 1L, 2L Supply voltage 24 V DC

② Backplane bus interface 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage
RQn+, Channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
RQn-
RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function PWR Power LED (green)
extensions
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for 2-wire connection of actuators

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range with configuration

GSD file GSD file
• Disable
enabled
• Channel enabled
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off yes Channel Module
• Keep last value
Substitute value • 0 0 yes Channel Channel
• 1
is 8 bytes.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 13

Operating mode

Specifies the behavior of the module if the CPU changes to STOP.
See also
4.3 Address space


14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
4.3 Address space
Address space
RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The
Figure 4-1 Address space of RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST with value status

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 15
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST.
③ PWR (green)

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
off
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 17
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST digital output module supports diagnostic interrupts.
● No load voltage


Parameter 10H • The module cannot evaluate parameters Correct the parameter assignment
assignment error for the channel.
BaseUnit
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or • Wait for firmware update
unavailable has been canceled. The module does not
output any process or substitute values in
this state.

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
Technical specifications of the RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST
6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1
Product type designation RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO ST
General information
Usable BaseUnits BU type B0, B1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 19
6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1
Address area
Input 1 byte; with QI
Output 1 bytes
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Switching frequency
Total current of outputs
Current per module, max. 20 A
Relay outputs
relays), max.
External fuse for relay outputs Yes, with 6 A
• Thermal continuous current, max. 5 A; max. 1 385 VA, 150 W
• Switched current, min. 100 mA; 5 V DC
Cable length
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
6ES7132-6HD00-0BB1
the electronics
Between channels and backplane bus/supply 240 V AC
voltage
Between backplane bus and supply voltage 75 V DC/60 V AC
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2 500 V DC (type test)
Tested with
Between channels and backplane bus/supply 2500 V DC
voltage
Between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 21
Derating trend
positions.
Figure 6-1 Load current and mounting position
Dimension drawing

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
6.2 Switching cycles
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.
This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts:
Table 6- 1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts
Resistive load Voltage Current Switching cycles (typical)

For resistive load 24 VDC 5.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 1.6 million
0.5 A 4 million
0.1 A 7 million
60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million
48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
For inductive load in ac- 24 VDC 2.0 A 0.1 million
cordance with IEC 947-5-1 1.0 A 0.2 million
DC 13/ AC15
0.5 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 0.3 million
0.5 A 1 million
0.1 A 2 million
For inductive load in ac- 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million
cordance with IEC 947-5-1 1.0 A 0.3 million
DC 13/ AC15
0.5 A 1 million

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 23
Parameter assignment and structure of the
parameter data record A



online help.

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC
Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record
Header information
Parameters

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576775-AC 25
Preface
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST ___________________
(6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
___________________ 4
RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST Parameters/address space
(6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
12/2015
A5E36107692-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST (6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
6.2 Switching cycles ......................................................................................................................26

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
View of the module

② LED for diagnostics ⑧ Toggle/jog switch for manually controlling
the relay
③ JOG (switch position up: jog) ⑨ Color coding module type
AUT (switch position "middle": Automatic mode
ON (switch position down: Manual mode
(MANUAL ON))
④ Wiring diagram ⑩ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status and manual mode ⑪ Color code for selecting the color identifica-
tion labels
⑥ LED for supply voltage ⑫ Article number
Image 2-1 View of the module RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Digital output module with 4 floating relay outputs
● Output current 5 A (per output)
● Normally open contact (NO: normally open)
● 4 toggle/jog switches (jog, automatic or manual mode (MANUAL ON)) for controlling the
relay
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
Note
When load voltage is present, the relays of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST can
also be activated via a manual switch even when they are in a non-configured state.
When an output is set to manual control, the relay remains active during a firmware update.
Accessories
See also

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST
module with the terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 3-wire connection.
You can find information on wiring the BaseUnit in the system manual ET 200SP distributed
I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Note
Note
The relay contacts of the module can only switch identical voltage potential. The AUX
terminals can only be used with an associated identical voltage or PE.
Note
The switch position of the toggle/jog switch is stored in the process image input (PII) and can
be read there.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 11
Wiring

the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST on the BaseUnit BU type
B0.
① 3-wire connection RES Reserve, must remain unused for fu-

ture function extensions
② Backplane bus interface 1A to 4A AUX terminals (freely usable up to
230 V AC)
④ Color-coded label with color codes CC40 and MA .0 .. .3 LED MANUAL ON and automatic
CC83 (optional)
RQn+, RQn- Channel n .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Wiring

the digital output module RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST on the BaseUnit BU type
B1.
① 2-wire connection 1N, 2N Neutral conductor supply voltage

② Backplane bus interface DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
③ Polarity reversal protection MA .0 .. .3 LED MANUAL ON and automatic
④ Color-coded label with color code CC40 .0, .1, .2, .3 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
RQn+, RQn- Channel n PWR Power LED (green)
RES Reserve, must remain unused for future P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
function extensions Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
1L, 2L Supply voltage 24 V DC

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 13
Wiring
Toggle/jog switch for controlling the relay

You can switch the relay using the toggle/jog switch to jog, MANUAL ON (manual mode) or
automatic mode for each channel. In manual mode, the state set by the output data is
ignored.
The 4 toggle/jog switches are located on the front of the electronic module.
● JOG (switch position "up": job mode): Short-term manual operation (MANUAL ON), while
jogged.
● AUT (switch position "middle" or "not activated": Automatic mode): Each channel is
activated via the user program (normal operation).
● ON (switch position "down": Manual mode (MANUAL ON) permanently): Each channel is
switched on ("1" signal) independent of the activation of the user program (and substitute
values).

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
4.1 Parameters
Parameters for RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

Parameter Range of values Default Parameter Effective range with configuration

reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
ment in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP 1
No supply voltage
• Disable
L+
• Disable
STOP
• Keep last value
(module plugged into a left module
dark-colored BaseUnit)
is 4 bytes.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 15

Channel activated

Potential group
The load or supply voltage is fed module by module. The voltage buses P1, P2 and AUX are
looped through the module from the left to the right neighboring module without tap.
See also

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
4.3 Address space
4.3 Address space

Configuration options of RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST

Configuration Short designation/module name in the Configuration software, e.g. with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file Integrated in the GSD file GSD file
STEP 7, as of
V13, SP1
1 x 4-channel without RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST X X X
value status
1 x 4-channel with RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST, X X -
value status QI


Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 17
4.3 Address space
Address space
RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The
Image 4-1 Address space of RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST with value status

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA
ST.
② MA .0 .. .3 (yellow)
③ Channel status (green)
④ PWR (green)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 19
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
LED MA 1..4
Table 5- 2 Status display of the LED MA .0 .. .3 (manual mode)

LED
Automatic
Off
Manual ON (toggle/jog switch) = Manual mode
On Output enabled at specific channel
Channel status LED

LED
Off
On

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
5.2 Interrupts
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On
5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST supports diagnostics
interrupts.


ing BaseUnit
The module does not output any process or
substitute values in this state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 21
Technical specifications of the RQ 4×120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA ST
6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, RQ 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A NO MA
ST
Usable BaseUnits BU type B0, B1

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
DQ Yes
PWM No
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
Address area
Inputs 1 byte; with QI
Outputs 1 byte
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 4
Switching frequency
Current per module, max. 20 A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 20 A
• Up to 60 ℃, max. 16 A
• Up to 40 ℃, max. 20 A
• Up to 50 ℃, max. 16 A
Relay outputs
relays), max.
External fuse for relay outputs Yes, with 6 A
Number of switching cycles, max. 7000000; see additional description in the manual
• With inductive load, max. 2 A; see additional description in the manual
• With resistive load, max. 5 A; see additional description in the manual
• Thermal continuous current, max. 5A
• Switched current, min. 100 mA; 5 V DC
• Rated switching voltage (DC) 24 V DC to 120 V DC
• Rated switching voltage (AC) 24 V AC to 230 V AC
Cable length

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 23
6ES7132-6MD00-0BB1
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit No
Group error Yes
Between the channels and voltage supply of the Yes
electronics
Between channels and backplane bus/supply 240 V AC
voltage
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2 500 V DC (type test)
Tested with
Between channels and backplane bus/supply 2500 V DC
voltage
Between backplane bus and supply voltage 707 V DC (type test)
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Note
External fuse for relay outputs
The outputs have to be protected by an external fuse.
When installed in a danger area according to the National Electric Code (NEC), the fuse
must only be removed with the correct tool when the module is not in an explosion-proof
zone.
Derating trend
positions.
Dimension drawing

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 25
Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.
This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts:
Table 6- 1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts
Resistive load Voltage Current Switching cycles (typi-

cal)
For resistive load 24 V DC 5.0 A 0.1 million
4.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 1.6 million
0.5 A 4 million
0.1 A 7 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
3.0 A 0.2 million
2.0 A 0.4 million
1.0 A 0.8 million
0.5 A 1.5 million
For inductive load in 24 V DC 2.0 A 0.1 million
accordance with 1.0 A 0.2 million
IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/
AC15 0.5 A 0.5 million
1.0 A 0.3 million
0.5 A 1 million
0.1 A 2 million

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Resistive load Voltage Current Switching cycles (typi-

cal)
For inductive load in 230 VAC 2.0 A 0.1 million
accordance with 1.0 A 0.3 million
IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/
AC15 0.5 A 1 million
Note
Tests of mechanical environmental conditions
Shock tested according to IEC 60068-2-27. Shock intensity: 100 m/s2 peak value, 11 ms
duration

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 27
GSD.



online help.

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Note
Header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA 29
Parameters

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36107692-AA
Analog input module AI 8xU BA ___________________
Preface
(6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1) ___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 8xU BA 4
___________________
(6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
Representation of analog
___________________
values B
03/2015
A5E34941660-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI 8xU BA (6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Measuring types and ranges ..................................................................................................12
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file .......................................................................24
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 29
B.1 Representation of input ranges ...............................................................................................30
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................31

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the AI 8×U BA module

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Analog input module with 8 inputs (single-ended)
● Input ranges for voltage measurement:
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bits including sign
– 0 to 10 V, resolution 15 bits
● Cycle time of the module (all channels) 10 ms
● Firmware update
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 9
Wiring up 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xU BA module with the terminal
Note

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Wiring up
Connection: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection

the analog input module AI 8xU BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
② Backplane bus interface MANA Ground of the analog inputs
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
④ Current limitation M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, Internal self-assembling voltage buses
AUX Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
(function cannot be used for this module)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when AI0 to AI7 Channel status LED (green)
Figure 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 11
4.1 Measuring types and ranges
The analog input module AI 8xU BA has the following measuring ranges:
Table 4- 1 Measuring ranges
Measurement type Measuring range Resolution

Voltage 0 to 10 V 15 bits
±10 V 16 bits including sign
You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc., in the
section Representation of analog values (Page 29).

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
AI 8xU BA parameters
parameters to the module using data records, see section Parameter assignment and
structure of the parameter data record (Page 25)).
Parameter Range of values Default Reconfigura- Effective range with configura-

tion in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS DP
IO
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Module
Underflow
• Enable
Type/range of meas- • Deactivated Voltage (+/- 10 Yes Channel Channel
urement V)
• Voltage +/- 10 V
• Voltage 0 to 10 V
Smoothing • None None Yes Channel Channel
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 13
4.2 Parameters

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS DP
IO
Interference frequency • 60 Hz (50 ms) 50 Hz (60 ms) Yes Channel Module
suppression
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2
• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)
• 4800 Hz (0.625 ms)
• 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 3
• 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 2 3
• 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 3
left module (dark-colored group of the
BaseUnit) left module

group (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign this parameter using the data record 128
as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8
bytes.
2 Interference frequency suppression: Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
3 By selecting this interference frequency suppression with shorter integration time, the attenuation of the interference
frequency that can be achieved is reduced (see Technical specifications).
Note
Unused channels
Disable unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA

Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value exceeds the overrange.
Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured value falls below the underrange.
Type/range of measurement
See the section Measurement types and measuring ranges (Page 12).
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) × cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal
changes at the analog input.
① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 4-1 Smoothing for AI 8xU BA

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 15
Interference frequency suppression

Suppresses the interference affecting analog input modules that is caused by the frequency
of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value,
in particular when measuring in the low voltage range. With this parameter, the user
specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.
Potential group
BaseUnits.
See also
ET 200SP Distributed I/O System

16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space
Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for AI 8×U BA.
Figure 4-2 Address space of AI 8×U BA

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 17
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xU BA.
③ PWR (green)

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel deactivated
Off
Channel activated
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 19
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 8×U BA supports diagnostics interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
● Low limit violated
● Error
● No load voltage


High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error occurred. Replace module
BaseUnit
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update
The module does not read any process

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Technical specifications of the AI 8×U BA
6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
Product type designation ET 200SP, 8xU Basic
General information
Usable BaseUnits BU type A0, A1

label
Product function
Scalable measuring range No
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
CiR Configuration in RUN
Reconfiguration in RUN possible Yes
Calibration in RUN possible No
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 21
6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
Address area
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 8; single-ended
Maximum permitted input voltage for voltage input 30 V
(destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms; per channel
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 10 V) 100 kΩ
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits including sign
Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V) 100 kΩ
Cable length
Formation of analog values for the inputs
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bits
max.
Integration time configurable Yes
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.67 / 50 / 60 / 4 800 (16.67 / 50 / 60)
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) ms; 180 / 60 / 50 / 0.625 (67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75)
Measured value smoothing
Number of steps 4; none; 4/8/16 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders
Connection of the signal transmitters
For voltage measurement Yes
For current measurement as 4-wire transducer No
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.005%
Crosstalk between inputs, min. 50 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- ± 0.05%
tion to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-
1%), f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB; with conversion time 67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75
< rated value of the input range), min. ms: 40 dB

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
6ES7134-6FF00-0AA1
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit No
Group error Yes
Overflow/underflow Yes
Monitoring of the supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes, green PWR LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED
the electronics
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 23
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file
parameters are dependent on each other.

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type and
measuring range for PROFINET.
Measurement type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage L+ Overflow Underflow
Deactivated * * *
Voltage ±10 V x x x
0 to 10 V x x x
x = Property is allowed, - = Property is not allowed, * = Property is not relevant

measuring range for PROFIBUS.

No supply voltage L+ Overflow/underflow
Deactivated * *
Voltage ±10 V x x
0 to 10 V x x

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA

The module can be re-configured in RUN (for example, the voltage or current values of
selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).


online help.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 25
Note

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Header information
Parameters

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 27
Codes for measurement types

The following table contains the codes for the measurement types of the analog input
module. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).
Table A- 1 Codes for measurement types
Measurement type Code

Deactivated 0000 0000
Voltage 0000 0001
Codes for measuring ranges

The following table contains the codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).
Table A- 2 Codes for measuring ranges
Measuring range Code

±10 V 0000 1001
0 to 10 V 0000 1011

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
Representation of analog values B
Measured value resolution
The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its
parameter assignment.
Each analog value is written left aligned to the tags. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".
Table B- 1 Resolution of the analog values
Resolution in bits Values Analog value

including sign
Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 29
Representation of analog values
B.1 Representation of input ranges

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and unipolar
input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.
Table B- 2 Bipolar input ranges
Dec. Measured Data word Range

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow
Table B- 3 Unipolar input ranges
Dec. val- Measured Data word Range

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
measuring ranges.
Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V
Values Voltage measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V
1 1 361.7 µV
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V
-27648 9400 -10 V
-27649 93FF Underrange
-32512 8100 -11.759 V
-32768 8000 <-11.759 V Underflow
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 0 to 10 V

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V Overflow
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V
1 1 0 V + 361.7 µV
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -1.759 V
-32768 8000 < -1.759 V Underflow

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941660-AA 31
Analog input module ___________________
Preface
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA ___________________

(6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
Analog input module 4
___________________
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA
(6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
03/2015
A5E34941201-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA (6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ........................................34

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Documentation guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA module

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Analog input module with 8 inputs (single-ended)
● For 2-wire and 4-wire transducers
● Input ranges for current measurement:
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– ±20 mA, resolution 16 bits including sign
● Cycle time of the module (all channels) 10 ms
● Firmware update
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 9
Wiring up 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA module with the terminal
assignments for 2-wire and 4-wire connection.
Note
Note

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Wiring up
Connection: Current measurement 2-wire connection

the analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for current measurement In + Input signal, channel n

② Backplane bus interface UV Infeed voltage
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
④ Current limitation M Ground
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when AI0 to AI7 Channel status LED (green)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 11
Wiring up
Connection: Current measurement 4-wire connection

the analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA on the BaseUnit BU type A0 with AUX terminals.
① 4-wire connection for current measurement

② Connection AUX terminals to ground
③ Color identification labels CCxx (optional)
④ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light-colored BaseUnit is present)
In + Input signal, channel n
UV Infeed voltage
L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
M Ground
1 A to 10 A AUX terminals

12 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
The analog input module AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA has the following measuring ranges:

Current (2-wire or 4-wire con- 0 to 20 mA 15 bits
nection) 4 to 20 mA 15 bits
Current (4-wire connection) ± 20 mA 16 bits including sign
4.2 Parameters
AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA parameters


Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 13
4.2 Parameters

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
DP
• Enable
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
Type/range of meas- • Deactivated Current (4-wire Yes Channel Channel
urement connection)
• Current (4-wire connec-
4 to 20 mA
tion) 0 to 20 mA
tion) 4 to 20 mA
tion) +/-20 mA
tion) 0 to 20 mA
tion) 4 to 20 mA
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong

14 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
4.2 Parameters

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
DP
suppression
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2
• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)

• 4800 Hz (0.625 ms)
• 60 Hz (18.75 ms) 3
• 50 Hz (22.5 ms) 2 3
• 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 3

group (light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
mum of 244 bytes for each ET 200SP station. If required, you can still assign this parameter using the data record 128
as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O module is 8
bytes.
3 By selecting this interference frequency suppression with shorter integration time, the attenuation of the interference
frequency that can be achieved is reduced (see Technical specifications).
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 15


Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs.

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be
measured at the relevant input.
The wire break and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the Diagnostics: Wire break is output.
Measurement type/measuring ranges


16 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Smoothing
4 levels.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 8xI 2-/4-wire BA

The frequency of the alternating voltage network may negatively affect the measured value,
in particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.
Potential group
BaseUnits.

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 17
4.4 Address space
See also
4.4 Address space

Address space
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA.
Figure 4-2 Address space of AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA

18 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xU/I 2-/4-wire BA.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 19
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel deactivated
Off
Channel activated
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

20 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit (2-wire and 4-wire connection, current)
● Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA)
● Error
● No load voltage

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 21


Short-circuit * 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
the wiring, for example, using cables
with a larger cross-section
Wire break between the module and sen- Connect the cable
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Deactivate channel
• Connect the encoder contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
error ters for the channel. (diagnostics wire break set only with
the permitted measuring ranges).
BaseUnit
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground has an effect on all channels.

22 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Technical specifications of the AI 8×I 2-/4-wire BA
6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 8xI 2-/4-wire Basic
General information

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 23
6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders/channels
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.7 W; without encoder supply voltage
Address area
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 8; single-ended
Maximum permitted input current for current input 50 mA
(destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms; per channel
Input ranges (rated values), currents
0 to 20 mA Yes
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 Ω; 15 bits
-20 mA to +20 mA Yes
Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 100 Ω; 16 bits including sign
4 mA to 20 mA Yes
Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 100 Ω; 15 bits
Cable length
channel
max.
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.67 / 50 / 60 / 4 800 (16.67 / 50 / 60)
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) ms; 180 / 60 / 50 / 0.625 (67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75)
Number of steps 4; none; 4/8/16 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders
For voltage measurement No
For current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes
• Load of 2-wire transducer, max. 650 Ω

24 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.005%/K
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- ± 0.05%
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5%
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.3%
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB; with conversion time 67.5 / 22.5 / 18.75
< rated value of the input range), min. ms: 40 dB
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break Yes; for 4 to 20 mA
Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground; module-based
Group error Yes
For module diagnostics Yes; green / red DIAG LED
the electronics

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 25
6ES7134-6GF00-0AA1
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

26 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA

measuring range with PROFINET.
Measurement Measuring Diagnostics

type range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
age L+ ground
Deactivated * * * * *
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x x -
(4-wire connec- 4 to 20 mA x x x x x
tion)
±20 mA x x x x -
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x - -
(2-wire connec- 4 to 20 mA x x x x x
tion)

measuring range with PROFIBUS.

No supply voltage Short-circuit to Over- Wire break
L+ ground flow/underflow
Deactivated * * * *
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x -
(4-wire connection) 4 to 20 mA x x x x
±20 mA x x x -
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x -
(2-wire connection) 4 to 20 mA x x x x

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 27



online help.

28 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Note

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 29
Header information
Parameters

30 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA


Current, 4-wire connection 0000 0010
Current, 2-wire connection 0000 0011


0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 31

including sign
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

32 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA 33
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
measuring ranges.
Table B- 4 Current measuring range ±20 mA
Values Current measuring range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Underflow
Table B- 5 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA * 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF >23.52 mA >22.81 mA Overflow
32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow
* For measurement type "2-wire connection", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20
mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

34 Manual, 03/2015, A5E34941201-AA
Analog Input Module ___________________
Preface
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST ___________________

(6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring up
ET 200SP
AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
(6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1) ___________________
Manual ___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
07/2014
A5E03572832-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Analog Input Module AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties ....................................................................................................................................... 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 11
4.1 Measuring types and ranges........................................................................................................13
4.2 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................14
4.4 Address space .............................................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts ......................................................................................................................................21
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ............................................................................27
B.1 Representation of input ranges ....................................................................................................33
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ...................................................34
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges .............................................35

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
Web server.

6 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Documentation guide

your own manual.


The CAx Download Manager is used to access the current product data for
your CAx or CAe systems.
EPLAN macro files

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST

8 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Analog input module with 4 inputs
● Measuring type voltage and current for 2-wire transducer (can be set for each channel)
● Electrically isolated from the supply voltage L+ (only for voltage measuring type)
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vss
● Configurable diagnostics per module
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

as of module as of

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed I/O

10 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Wiring up 3
Terminal assignment for AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST (6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1)

Terminal Assign- Terminal Assign- Explanation BaseUnit1 Color identification label
1 U0+ 2 U1+ Voltage input (terminals 1 to 8) A0
3 U2+ 4 U3+ • Un+: Input signal "+", channel n A1
5 U0- 6 U1- • Un-: Input signal "-", channel n
7 U2- 8 U3-
9 UV0 10 UV1 Current input (terminals 9 to 16)
11 UV2 12 UV3 • UVn: Supply voltage channel n
CC03
13 I0+ 14 I1 + • In+: Current input "+", channel n
6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0
15 I2+ 16 I3 +
L+ 24 VDC M M
Voltage input Current input
Note
The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light-colored BaseUnit. Also keep this in mind
See also
You will find additional information on the BaseUnit types in the ET 200SP distributed I/O

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 11
Wiring up
Figure 3-1 Schematic circuit diagram for AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST

12 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
The analog input module AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST has the following measuring ranges:
Measuring type Measuring range Resolution

Voltage ±10 V 16 bits including sign
1 to 5 V 15 bits
0 to 10 V 15 bits
Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA 15 bits
0 to 20 mA 15 bits

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 13
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST

Parameter Value range Default Configur- Effective range with configuration

ation in software, e.g. STEP 7
RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Enable
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
Measuring type/range • deactivated Current (2-wire yes Channel Channel
transducer)
• Voltage +/- 5 V
4..20 mA
• Voltage 1..5 V
• Voltage 0..10 V
• Current (2-wire transducer)
0..20 mA
4..20 mA

14 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
4.2 Parameters
Parameter Value range Default Configur- Effective range with configuration

ation in software, e.g. STEP 7
RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Smoothing • none none yes Channel Channel
• weak
• medium
• strong
Interference frequency • 60 Hz 50 Hz yes Channel Module
suppression
• 50 Hz1
• 16.6 Hz
left module
Note
Unused channels
Disable unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 15


Enabling of the diagnostics in the event of a short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground or
of an input to the encoder supply. Short-circuit is also detected in the range 1 to 5 V, when
both input signals are short-circuited.
The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be activated simultaneously. If both
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, however, the short-circuit diagnostics suppresses
the underflow diagnostics. Short-circuit is output as the diagnostics event.
Diagnostics overflow
Diagnostics underflow

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak to be
measured at the relevant input.
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics info is output.
Refer to the section Measuring types and ranges (Page 13).

16 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Smoothing
4 levels.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) x cycle time of the module.
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This applies to every signal
change at the analog input.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST

The frequency of the AC voltage network can negatively affect the measured value, in
particular when measuring in the low voltage range and with thermocouples. With this
parameter, the user specifies the supply frequency that is predominant in the plant.
Potential group
manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 17
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space

If you enable the value status for the analog module, an additional byte is occupied in the
input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
information about the validity of the analog value.
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST
Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST with value status

18 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 19

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel disabled
off
Channel enabled
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

20 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit (current, voltage 1..5 V)
● Wire break (current 4..20 mA)
● Error
● No load voltage

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 21

A diagnostics alarm is output for each diagnostics event and the DIAG LED on the module
flashes. The diagnostics alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostics buffer of the

Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware being updated. The module does –
unavailable not perform any measurements during this
time.
Short-circuit (current)* 1H Sensor supply to ground Correct the module/encoder tuning
Input to sensor supply
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct the module/encoder tuning
Open input Connect input
Line break (current) 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
sensor
• Connect the sensor contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
BaseUnit
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a
temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostics can also be reported for
unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily.

22 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Technical specifications of the AI 4×U/I 2-wire ST
6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1
Product type designation AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
Configuration in RUN possible Yes
Supply voltage
Input current

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 23
6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 8 bytes; + 1 byte for QI information
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 4
(destruction limit)
(destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional
processing times (depending on the parameter assignment
of the enabled channels)
A/D resolution at analog input 16 bits
Analog inputs, configurable Yes
Configurable input variable Yes
Input ranges
Voltage Yes
Current Yes
Thermocouple No
Resistance thermometer No
Resistance No
1 to 5 V Yes; 15 bits
0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 100 Ω; + approx. 0.7 V diode forward voltage
Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement

24 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1
Analog value formation
Measuring principle Integrating (sigma-delta)
Integration and conversion time / resolution per channel
Resolution with overrange (bits including sign), max. 16 bits
Interference suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz
Conversion time (per channel) 180 / 60 / 50 ms
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes
Setting: Weak Yes
Setting: Medium Yes
Setting: Strong Yes
Encoders
for voltage measurement Yes
for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes
• Load of the 2-wire transducer, max. 650 Ω
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01 %
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.005 %
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in relation to input ± 0.05 %
range), (+/-)
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5 %
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.5 %
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.3 %
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %), f1 =
interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference < nominal 70 dB
value of the input range), min.
Common mode voltage, max. 10 V
Common mode interference, min. 90 dB

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 25
6ES7134-6HD00-0BA1
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; for 1 to 5 V or for 2-wire operation: Short-circuit of the
encoder supply to ground or short-circuit of an input to the
encoder supply
Group error Yes
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
Between the channels Yes, per channel group between the group of the 2-wire
current inputs and the group of the voltage inputs
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the Yes; only for voltage inputs
electronics
Between the inputs (UCM) 10 VDC
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

26 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring
range for PROFINET.
Measuring type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
voltage L+ M
deactivated * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x x -
±10 V x - x x -
1..5 V x x x x -
0..10 V x - x x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x x -
(2-wire 4..20 mA x x x x x
transducer)

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and measuring
range for PROFIBUS.
Measuring type Measuring range Diagnostics

No supply voltage Short-circuit to M Overflow/ Wire break
L+ Underflow
deactivated * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x -
±10 V x - x -
1..5 V x x x -
0..10 V x - x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x -
(2-wire transducer) 4..20 mA x x x x

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 27



online help.

28 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Note
Header information

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 29
Parameters

30 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC
Codes for the measuring type

The following table contains the codes for the measuring types of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).
Table A- 1 Codes for the measuring type
Measuring type Coding

Voltage 0000 0001
Current, 2-wire transducer 0000 0011
Codes for the measuring range

Table A- 2 Codes for the measuring range

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011
Current
0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 31
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with the
analog module.

The resolution of the analog values differs depending on the analog module and its assigned
parameters.
The table below shows the representation of binary analog values and of the associated
decimal and hexadecimal units of the analog values.
Note
The digitalized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module. The
following resolution therefore does not apply to temperature values.

including sign
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

32 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 33

measuring ranges.
Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V and ±5 V

Dec. Hex. ±10 V ±5 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V >5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 <-11.759 V <-5.879 V Underflow
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 5V 10 V Nominal range
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Negative values are not Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V possible
-32768 8000 <0.296 V Underflow

34 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC

measuring ranges.

27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow
* For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA".
Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03572832-AC 35
Analog input module AI 2xU ST ___________________
Preface
(6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 2xU ST
___________________
(6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
12/2015
A5E36104728-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI 2xU ST (6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................22
B.1 Representation of analog values ............................................................................................32

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2×U ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Voltage measurement type (can be set per channel)
● Electrically isolated from supply voltage L+
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vss
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xU ST module with the terminal
assignments.
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 11
Wiring
Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection

the analog input module AI 2xU ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
② Backplane bus interface Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function
extensions
④ Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑤ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (func- P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
tion cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
BaseUnit)
⑥ Filter connection supply voltage (only when DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire connection

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
The analog input module AI 2×U ST has the following measuring ranges:

Voltage ±5V 16 bits incl. sign
± 10 V 16 bits incl. sign
1 to 5 V 15 bits
0 to 10 V 15 bits

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 13
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 2xU ST


reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7
ment in (TIA Portal)
• Enable
• Enable
Overflow 1
• Enable
Underflow 1
• Enable
Measurement • Deactivated Voltage +/- 10 Yes Channel Channel
type/measuring range V
• Voltage +/- 5 V
• Voltage 0..10 V
• Voltage 1..5 V
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
4.2 Parameters

reassign- software, e.g. STEP 7
ment in (TIA Portal)
suppression
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2
• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)

• None
group of the
left module (module left module
plugged into a dark Ba-
seUnit)
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data
record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the
Note
Unused channels
Disable the unused channels in the parameter assignment.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 15


Diagnostics are enabled when both input signals are short-circuited in the range 1 to 5 V.
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, however, the short-circuit diagnostics suppresses
the underflow diagnostics. Short-circuit is output as the diagnostics event.
Measurement type/measuring range

Refer to the section Measuring types and ranges (Page 13).

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Smoothing
4 levels.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Image 4-1 Smoothing for AI 2xU ST


Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 17
Potential group
neighbor.
See also

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space

input address space. Bits 0 and 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2×U ST with
Image 4-2 Address space of the AI 2×U ST with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 19
LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xU ST.
③ PWR (green)

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel disabled
Off
Channel activated
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 21
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The AI 2×U ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit (voltage 1 V to 5 V)
● Error


Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and
encoder
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct interplay between module and
encoder
ing BaseUnit
not read process values in this state.

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Technical specifications of the AI 2×U ST
6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xU Standard

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V No
Additional 24 V encoder supply
24 V No

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 23
6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
Power loss
Address area
Analog inputs
Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage 30 V
input (destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. 500 µs
1 V to 5 V Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 180 kΩ
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Cable length
Measuring principle Sigma Delta
channel
max.
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) 50 ms @ 60 Hz, 60 ms @ 50 Hz, 180 ms @ 16.6
Hz, 250 µs without filter
Number of levels 4
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes; 1 x cycle time
Setting: Weak Yes; 4 x cycle time
Setting: Medium Yes; 8 x cycle time
Setting: Strong Yes; 16 x cycle time

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
Encoders
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01%
Crosstalk between inputs, min. -50 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in 0.05%
relation to input range), (+/-)
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5%
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x
(f1 +/-1%), f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB
< rated value of the input range), min.
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break No
Short-circuit Yes; with 1 to 5 V
Group error Yes

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 25
6ES7134-6FB00-0BA1
electronics
Between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vss
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA


No supply voltage Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow
L+ ground
Deactivated * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x x
±10 V x - x x
1 V to 5 V x x x x
0 V to 10 V x - x x


No supply voltage Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow
L+ ground
Deactivated * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x - x x
±10 V x - x x
1 V to 5 V x x x x
0 V to 10 V x - x x

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 27

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the voltage or current values
of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels.


online help.
Note

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Header information
Parameters
The following figure shows the structure of the parameters for channels 0 and 1.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 29
Image A-3 Structure of bytes x to x+17 for channels 0 and 1


Voltage 0000 0001


Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA

The module always checks all values of the transmitted data record. The module applies the
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns the appropriate error codes if there
data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine if the
DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the header Correct the version, length and number of
information parameter blocks.
DF 80 I1 xx Parameter error Check the parameters of the module.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 31
B.1 Representation of analog values
analog input module.

parameters.

including sign
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA 33
Voltage measuring range ±10 V to ±5 V
Table B- 4 Voltage measuring range ±10 V to ±5 V
System Voltage measuring range Range

dec hex ±10 V ±5 V
32767 7FFF >11.759 V >5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 <-11.759 V <-5.879 V Underflow
Voltage measuring ranges 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring ranges 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V
System Voltage measuring range Range

dec hex 1 V to 5 V 0 V to 10 V
32767 7FFF >5.704 V >11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V
-32768 8000 <0.296 V <-1.759 V Underflow

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104728-AA
Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST ___________________
Preface
(6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST
___________________
(6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
12/2015
A5E36104399-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................13
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................22
B.1 Representation of analog values for analog inputs ................................................................33

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Measuring type current for 2- and 4-wire transducers
– 0 mA to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
– ± 20 mA, resolution 16 bit incl. sign
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 Vpp/3.5 Vrms
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2- und 4-wire connection.
Note
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 11
Wiring
Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer)
the analog input module AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for current measurement (2- 1Un Supply voltage (2-wire transducer), channel n
wire transducer)
② 4-wire connection for current measurement (4- 2Un Supply voltage (4-wire transducer), channel n
wire transducer)
③ Backplane bus interface RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function
extensions
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 2Mn Reference potential (4-wire transducer)
⑤ Current limitation L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Switchover 2-wire / 4-wire P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
seUnit)
⑦ Color-coded label with color code CC05 (op-
tional)
⑧ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑨ Filter connection supply voltage (only when AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
In + Current input positive, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
In - Current input negative, channel n
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire
transducer)

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges
The analog input module AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST has the following measuring ranges:

4 mA to 20 mA 15 bits
Current (4-wire transducer) 0 mA to 20 mA 15 bit
± 20 mA 16 bits incl. sign
You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section
Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges (Page 35) and the
"Analog value processing" function manual.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 13
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST

Parameter Range of values Default Configura- Effective range with configura-

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Enable
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Channel 1
Overflow 1
• Enable
Underflow 1
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
Measurement • Deactivated Current (4- Yes Channel Channel
type/measuring range wire trans-
ducer) 4 to
0 to 20 mA 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
+/- 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
4.2 Parameters
Parameter Range of values Default Configura- Effective range with configura-

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong
Interference frequency • 60 Hz (50 ms) • 50 Hz (60 Yes Channel Module
suppression ms)
• 50 Hz (60 ms) 2
• 16.6 Hz (180 ms)

• None
BaseUnit)
colored BaseUnit)
record 128 as described in the "GSD file PROFINET IO" column (see table above). The parameter length of the I/O
module is 4 bytes.
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" the unused channels in the parameter assignment.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 15

Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for no or insufficient supply voltage L+.

of an input to the encoder supply.
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics is output.

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the
measurement in the range of 4 mA to 20 mA.
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics is output.


16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
Smoothing
4 levels.
① No smoothing
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Image 4-1 Smoothing for AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST


Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 17
4.4 Address space
Potential group
neighbor.
See also
4.4 Address space

Bit = 1: There are no errors on the module.

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
4.4 Address space
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST
Image 4-2 Address space of the AI 2xI 2-/4-wire ST with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 19
LED displays
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST.
③ PWR (green)
Image 5-1 LED displays

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG Meaning
Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

Channel disabled
Off
Channel activated
On
PWR LED
PWR Meaning
Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 21
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit (encoder supply)
● Wire break (current 4 to 20 mA)
● Error

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA


Short-circuit (encoder 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
supply) 1 Input after encoder supply encoder
Wire break (current 4 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
to 20 mA) the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger
cross-section
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Deactivate channel
encoder
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diag- Replace the module
nostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the
entire module).
error ters for the channel. (wire break diagnostics set only with
BaseUnit
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update in progress or update has • Wait for firmware update.
1Since the module has no encoder supply for separate channels, a short-circuit in a channel
has a permanent effect on the other channel.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 23
Technical specifications of the AI 2×I 2-/4-wire ST
6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xI 2/4-wire ST

label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP3
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 50 mA; total current for both channels

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 200 mA; total current for both channels
Power loss
Address area
Analog inputs
Permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA
struction limit), max.
0 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 Ω; 90 Ohm with 2 wires
-20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 Ω; 90 Ohm with 2 wires
Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 90 Ω; 130 Ohm for 4 wire
Cable length
channel
max.
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz / off
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) 50 ms @ 60 Hz, 60 ms @ 50 Hz, 180 ms @ 16.6
Hz, 250 µs without filter
Number of levels 4
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes; 1 x cycle time
Setting: Weak Yes; 4 x cycle time
Setting: Medium Yes; 8 x cycle time
Setting: Strong Yes; 16 x cycle time

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 25
6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
Encoders

Errors/accuracies
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- 0.05%
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.5%
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 70 dB
< rated value of the input range), min.
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Limit interrupt No
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes; short-circuit of the encoder supply
Group error Yes

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
6ES7134-6GB00-0BA1
electronics
Between the inputs (UCM) 10 Vss
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 27

Measurement type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Overflow Underflow Wire break
age L+ ground
Current 0 mA to x x x x -
(4-wire transducer) 20 mA
4 mA to x x x x x
20 mA
±20 mA x x x x -
Current 0 mA to x x x - -
(2-wire transducer) 20 mA
4 mA to x x x x x
20 mA

Measurement type Measuring Diagnostics

range No supply voltage Short-circuit to Overflow/underflow Wire break
L+ ground
Deactivated * * * *
Current 0 mA to 20 mA x x x -
(4-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x
+/- 20 mA x x x -
Current 0 mA to 20 mA x x x -
(2-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA


128. The parameters set in STEP 7 are not changed in the CPU, which means that the

online help.
Note
Image A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 29
Header information
Parameters

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA

You must enter these codes in byte x (see channel parameter block figure).


You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see channel parameter block figure).
Measuring range Coding

Current
0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 31

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA
B.1 Representation of analog values for analog inputs
analog module.


including sign
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 33


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA

measuring ranges.

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA Overflow
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underflow

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA* 4 to 20 mA
32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA > 22.81 mA Overflow
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underflow
* For measurement type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to
20 mA". Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104399-AA 35
Preface
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS ___________________

Documentation Guide 1
(6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)
___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Connecting 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module ___________________ 4
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS
(6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1) Interrupts/diagnostics
___________________
interrupts 5
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
06/2015
A5E03576060-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS (6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1)

4 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation Guide ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.4 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................21
4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................23
5 Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts............................................................................................................. 26
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................28

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Documentation Guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 7
Documentation Guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
View of the module
① Module type and ⑦ Function class

name
⑤ LEDs for channel ⑪ Article number
status
⑥ LED for supply
voltage
Figure 2-1 View of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS module

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Measurement types voltage and current for 2-/4-wire transducers
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bit incl. sign
– ±5 V, resolution 15 bit incl. sign
– 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bit
– ±20 mA, resolution 16 bit incl. sign
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 14 bit
● Electrically isolated between the channels
● Permitted common mode voltage: 100 Vpp/35 Vrms
● Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel (two high and two low limits
per channel)
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
Function Product version of Firmware version of

the module as of the module as of
Basic version 1 V1.0.0
Oversampling channel 0 2 V1.1.0
Oversampling channel 0 and 1 2 V2.0.0

10 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 11
Connecting 3
This section contains the block diagram of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2-wire and 4-wire connection.
Note
Note

12 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Connecting
Connection: Voltage measurement 2-wire connection

the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement UVn Supply voltage, channel n

② Backplane bus interface RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function
extensions
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
④ Current limitation L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
⑤ Color identification label CCxx (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
BaseUnit)
⑦ Filter connection supply voltage (only when AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
Un- Voltage input negative, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
In + Current input positive, channel n

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 13
Connecting
Connection: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for current measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
② 4-wire connection for current measurement Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
③ Backplane bus interface UVn Supply voltage, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future func-
tion extensions
⑤ Current limitation Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
⑥ Color identification label CCxx (optional) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
(function cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
BaseUnit)
⑧ Filter connection supply voltage (only when DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
In + Current input positive, channel n AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
In - Current input negative, channel n F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
Figure 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

14 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Connecting

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 15
The analog input module AI 2×U/I 2/4-wire HSF has the following measuring ranges:

Voltage ±10 V 16 bit incl. sign
±5 V 15 bit incl. sign
0 to 10 V 15 bit
1 to 5 V 13 bit
Current (2-/4-wire transducers) ±20 mA 1 16 bit incl. sign
0 to 20 mA 15 bit
4 to 20 mA 14 bit
You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the section
Representation of analog values (Page 43) and the "Analog Value Processing" function
manual.
1 Measuring range "+/-20 mA" is only possible with the measurement type "Current (4-wire
transducer)".
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire HS

the parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment

16 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
4.2 Parameters

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Sampling rate 1 value/cycle 1 value/cycle No Module Module
• Enable
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
Type/range of meas- • Deactivated Current (4- Yes Channel Channel
urement wire trans-
ducer) 4 to
• Voltage +/- 5 V 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
+/- 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
• 2 times
• 4 times
• 8 times
• 16 times
• 32 times
• 64 times

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 17
4.2 Parameters

(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Hardware interrupt high • Disable Disable Yes Channel -1
limit 1
• Enable
Hardware interrupt low • Disable Disable Yes Channel
limit 1
• Enable
Hardware interrupt high • Disable Disable Yes Channel
limit 2
• Enable
Hardware interrupt low • Disable Disable Yes Channel
limit 2
• Enable
High limit 1 • Value 27648 Yes Channel Channel 1
Low limit 1 • Value 0 Yes Channel
High limit 2 • Value 27648 Yes Channel
Low limit 2 • Value 0 Yes Channel

(light-colored BaseUnit)
configuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using
the data record 128 as described in the column "GSD file PROFINET IO" (see table above). The parameter length of the
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" the unused channels in the parameter assignment.

18 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD

Enabling of the diagnostics alarm for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+.

of an input to the encoder supply. A short-circuit is also detected in the range of 1 to 5 V if
the input signal is short-circuited or the input is not connected.

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the
measurement in the range of 4 mA to 20 mA.


Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 19
Smoothing
7 levels.
① No smoothing
② 2x smoothing
③ 4x smoothing
④ 8x smoothing
⑤ 16x smoothing
⑥ 32x smoothing
⑦ 64x smoothing
Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS
Potential group
BaseUnits.
See also

20 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
4.4 Oversampling
4.4 Oversampling
Function
Oversampling is the acquisition of data in constant bus cycle segments (sub-cycles). The
configured number n of sub-cycles corresponds to one PROFINET bus cycle.
Oversampling is useful whenever you require acquisition of data with high time resolution but
without using an extremely short PROFINET bus cycle and thus fast CPU cycles.
With oversampling, a PROFINET bus cycle is divided into constant bus sub-cycles:
● One measured value is acquired in each sub-cycle.
● The minimum PROFINET bus cycle is 250 µs. Only a subset of functions is available for
shorter sub-cycles.
● The shortest possible sub-cycle is 50 μs.
● You can configure oversampling:
– For channel 0 (1-channel operation)
– For channel 0/1 (2-channel operation)
● The number of sub-cycles can be set as follows:
– From 2 to 16 for one channel
– From 2 to 8 for two channels
Requirement
Oversampling is only possible when isochronous mode is set.
Configuration
You configure oversampling with the following parameter:
● Sampling rate
Note
Do not use a reduction ratio for blocks in the case of configuration with oversampling in the
runtime groups of your user program. This will ensure that the data processing in the user
program of the CPU is synchronized with the acquisition on the module.

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 21
4.4 Oversampling
Overview of the operating modes
Function Normal operation Oversampling in normal operation Oversampling in high-speed

1-channel op- 2-channel opera- 1-channel op- 2-channel op-
eration tion eration eration
Isochronous mode x x x
Shortest sub-cycle 250 μs 250 μs 50 μs
(=sample time)
Supported over- 1 2 to 16 2 to 8 2 to 16 2 to 8
sampling levels
Hardware interrupt x - -
Smoothing x x -
±10 V x x x
0 to 10 V x x -
±5 V x x -
1 to 5 V x x -
±20 mA x x x
0 to 20 mA x x -
4 to 20 mA x x -
Overflow/underflow x x x1)
Wire break 4 to 20 mA x x -
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) x x -
Short-circuit encoder x x x
supply with current
measuring ranges
Load voltage diagnos- x x x
tics
Value status (QI) x - -
Address space 4 bytes 32 bytes 32 bytes
1 For product version 1, the result must be present for at least one fieldbus cycle + 250 μs for a reliable detection of the
diagnostics (overflow/underflow) as of firmware version 1.x.
Example calculation
The cycle time TDP (send clock) for isochronous mode is specified in the configuration
software. The actual sampling time of the module is this time divided by the set oversampling
level.
Sample calculation:
Figure 4-2 Formula for calculating the sampling time during oversampling

22 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
4.5 Address space
The figure shows the chronological sequence for oversampling. The acquired measured
vales of a data cycle with oversampling are only copied to the interface module in the
subsequent bus cycle and are then available to the processing CPU one bus cycle later.
① n = measured values from bus cycle n
4.5 Address space

An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for
the analog module. Bits 0 to 1 in this byte are assigned to a channel. They provide
Bit =1: There are no errors on the module.
Bit =0: Channel is deactivated or there is an error on the module.
If an error on a channel occurs with this module, the value status for all channels is 0.

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 23
4.5 Address space
Address space
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
Figure 4-4 Address space of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS with value status
Address space of AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with one channel

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with one
channel. Writing always starts from IB x. If fewer than 16 sub-cycles are set, the addresses
that are then unused are filled with 7FFFH.
Figure 4-5 Address space of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with one channel

24 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
4.5 Address space
Address space of AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with two channels

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for oversampling with two
channels. Writing always starts from IB x. Only a maximum of 8 sub-cycles are possible. If
fewer than 8 sub-cycles are set, the addresses that are then unused are filled with 7FFFH.
Figure 4-6 Address space of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HS for oversampling with two channels

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 25
Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts 5
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS.
④ PWR (green)

26 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Interrupts/diagnostics interrupts
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG Meaning
Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status/channel fault LED
Table 5- 2 Status/error display of the channel status/channel fault LED
Channel status Channel fault Meaning

Channel deactivated or no load voltage L+
Off Off
On Off
Off On
Not permitted (error)
On On
PWR LED
PWR Meaning
Off
On

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 27
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts.

● Low limit 1 violated
● High limit 1 violated
● Low limit 2 violated
● High limit 2 violated
If an interrupt occurs, a corresponding interrupt OB is called in the CPU of the IO controller.
S7-1500
The block interface is shown here with optimized block access, which is set in the TIA Portal
by default.
Name Data type Comment

LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt
USI WORD USI (High/Low)
IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt
EventType Byte Error event

28 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
5.2 Interrupts
S7-300/400 or a different CPU

with the instruction "RALARM" (read additional interrupt info) and in the STEP 7 online help.
The channel of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start
information of OB4x in the OB4x_POINT_ADDR tag. The following figure shows the
assignment to the bits of double word 8 in local data.
Figure 5-2 OB4x_POINT_ADDR tag

info for hardware interrupts of the I/O module
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#01 Channel 0 and 1 of the I/O module 1
The error event that triggered the hardware interrupt follows.
Error event B#16#03 Low limit 1 violated 1
B#16#04 High limit 1 violated
B#16#05 Low limit 2 violated
B#16#06 High limit 2 violated

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 29
5.2 Interrupts
● Error
● Wire break (current)
● Short-circuit (current and voltage 1 to 5 V)
● No load voltage

30 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD


Short-circuit (current) 1H Encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
Input after encoder supply encoder
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Wire break (current) 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
sor
Channel not connected (open) • Deactivate diagnostics
High limit violated 7H Value is above overrange. Correct the output value
Low limit violated 8H Value is below underrange. Correct the output value
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (diag- Replace the module
nostics alarm on channel 0 applies for the
entire module).
error ters for the channel. (wire break diagnostics set only with
BaseUnit

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 31
Technical specifications of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HS
6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
General information
label
Product function
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling Yes; 2 channels per module
MSI No
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 39 mA; without encoder supply
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration <
10 s

32 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.95 W; without encoder supply
Address area
Address space per module, max. 4 byte; + 1 byte for QI information (32 bytes in
oversampling mode)
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2; Differential inputs
(destruction limit)
(destruction limit)
Analog input with oversampling Yes
• Resolution, min. 50 µs

0 to +10 V Yes; 15 bit
1 V to 5 V Yes; 13 bit
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign
-5 V to +5 V Yes; 15 bit incl. sign
0 to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 Ω
-20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign
Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 Ω
4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bit
Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Ω
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement
Measuring principle Instantaneous value encryption (successive ap-
proximation)
channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 16 bit
max.
Interference voltage suppression for interference No
frequency f1 in Hz
Conversion time (per channel) 10 µs

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 33
6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
Smoothing of the measured values
Number of levels 7; none; 2/4/8/16/32/64 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders

Errors/accuracies
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Interrupts
Limit interrupt Yes; two high limits and two low limits each
Diagnostics alarms
Wire break Yes; channel-based, only for 4 to 20 mA
Short-circuit Yes; channel-based, for 1 to 5 V, and for current
measuring ranges for short circuit in encoder
supply

34 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
6ES7134-6HB00-0DA1
the electronics
Between the inputs (UCM) 75 V DC / 60 V AC
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 35

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics Hardware

type range No supply Short-circuit Overflow Underflow Wire break interrupts
voltage L+ to ground
Deactivated * * * * * *
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x x - x
±5 V x - x x - x
±10 V x - x x - x
0 to 10 V x - x x - x
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x x - x
(4-wire trans- ±20 mA x x x x - x
ducer)
4 to 20 mA x x x x x x
Current 0 to 20 mA x x x - - x
(2-wire trans- 4 to 20 mA x x x x x x
ducer)

36 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics Hardware inter-

type range No supply volt- Short-circuit to Over- Wire break rupts
age L+ ground flow/underflow
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x - -
+/- 5 V x - x - -
+/- 10 V x - x - -
0 to 10 V x - x - -
(4-wire trans- +/- 20 mA x x x - -
ducer)
4 to 20 mA x x x x -
(2-wire trans- 4 to 20 mA x x x x -
ducer)

Note
Following a firmware update, you need to re-configure the I/O module before you can use
the new functions.

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 37

Note
results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the
fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle.

online help.
Figure A-1 Structure of data record 128 for entire module

38 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Header information


The figure below shows the structure of the module parameter block.

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 39



40 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Figure A-6 Structure of byte x to x+19 for channels 0 and 1

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 41

module. You must enter these codes in byte x (see channel parameter block figure).

Voltage 0000 0001

You must enter these codes in byte x+1 (see channel parameter block figure).

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011
Current
±20 mA 0000 0100
0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011

42 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
analog module.


including sign
13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 43


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

44 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD

measuring ranges.

32767 7FFF > 11.759 V > 5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 < -11.759 V < -5.879 V Underflow
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V

32767 7FFF > 5.704 V > 11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V
-32768 8000 < 0.296 V < -1.759 V Underflow

Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD 45

measuring ranges.

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underflow

32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA** > 22.81 mA** Overflow
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underflow
** For measurement type "2-wire transducer", the behavior described here is supported for overflow
up to max. 35 mA.

46 Manual, 06/2015, A5E03576060-AD
Preface
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF ___________________

(6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module
___________________
AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF
(6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
12/2015
A5E33062495-AB
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................15
4.4 Measuring range adjustment ..................................................................................................21
4.5 Scaling of measured values ....................................................................................................24
4.6 Address space ........................................................................................................................27
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................33

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 7
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Resolution: Up to 16 bits including sign
● Single channel electrical isolation
● Voltage measurement type can be set per channel
● Current measuring type can be set per channel (for 2-wire or 4-wire transducer)
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Calibration in runtime
● Isochronous mode (PROFINET IO only)
● Value status (PROFINET IO only)
Function Product version of the Firmware version of the module

module as of as of
Measuring range adjustment 1 V2.0.0
Scaling of measured values 1 V2.0.0
Module-internal shared input (MSI) 1 V2.0.0
You can configure the module with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) and with a GSD file 1.
1 Version required for STEP 7: V5.5 SP4 HF7
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
system system manual.

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF module with the various
terminal assignments for a 2- und 4-wire connection.
Note
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 11
Wiring
Wiring: Voltage measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for voltage measurement In + Current input positive, channel n

② 4-wire connection for voltage measurement In - Current input negative, channel n
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
⑤ Current limitation (4-wire) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored
BaseUnit)
⑥ Current limitation (2-wire) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
BaseUnit)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (func- DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
tion cannot be used for this module)
⑧ Color-coded label with color code CC05 (optional) AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
⑨ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Wiring
Wiring: Current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire transducer)
the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for current measurement Un+ Voltage input positive, channel n
(2-wire transducer)
② 4-wire connection for current measurement Un- Voltage input negative, channel n
(4-wire transducer)
④ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) Mn Reference ground to UVn, channel n
⑤ Current limitation (4-wire) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Current limitation (2-wire) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
⑧ Color-coded label with color code CC05 AI0, AI1 Channel status LED (green)
(optional)
⑨ Filter connection supply voltage (only when F0, F1 Channel fault LED (red)
In + Current input positive, channel n PWR Power LED (green)
Image 3-2 Wiring and block diagram for current measurement 2-wire and 4-wire connection (2-wire and 4-wire
transducer)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 13
The following table shows the measurement types and the respective measuring range.
Table 4- 1 Measurement types and measuring ranges
Measurement Measuring range Resolution

type
Voltage ±5V 16 bits incl. sign
± 10 V 16 bits incl. sign
1 to 5 V 15 bits
0 to 10 V 15 bits
Current 0 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 15 bits
4 to 20 mA (2-wire and 4-wire transducer) 15 bits
± 20 mA (only with 4-wire transducer) 16 bit including sign
You can find the tables of measuring ranges and overflow, overrange, etc. in the appendix
Representation of analog values (Page 52) and the "Analog value processing" function
manual.
Measuring range adjustment

See Measuring range adjustment (Page 21).
Scaling of measured values

See Scaling of measured values (Page 24).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 14
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF

When assigning parameters in the user program, use the WRREC instruction to transfer the
parameters to the module by means of data records; refer to the section Parameter
assignment and structure of parameter data record (Page 42).

GSD file GSD file
No supply voltage
• Enable
L+
Short-circuit to
• Enable
ground
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 15
4.2 Parameters

GSD file GSD file
Measurement • Deactivated Current (4-wire Yes Channel Channel
type/measuring transducer)
• Voltage
range 4..20 mA
– ±5 V
– ±10 V
– 1 V to 5 V
– 0 V to 10 V
– 0 to 20 mA
– 4 to 20 mA
– ±20 mA
– 0 to 20 mA
– 4 to 20 mA
• 2 times
• 4 times
• 8 times
• 16 times
• 32 times
Interference fre- • 16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 50 Hz (22.5 ms) Yes Channel Channel
quency suppres-
• 50 Hz (22.5 ms)
sion 2
• 60 Hz (18.75 ms)
• 300 Hz (10 ms)
• 600 Hz (5 ms)
• 1.2 kHz (2.5 ms)
• 2.4 kHz (1.25 ms)
• 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms)
Measuring range • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
adjustment 1
• Enable
Measuring range Value within the nominal range 0 Yes Channel -
adjustment high of the measuring range in mV
limit 1 or µA
Measuring range Value within the nominal range 0 Yes Channel -
adjustment low of the measuring range in mV
limit 1 or µA
Scaled high nomi- REAL 20.0 Yes Channel -
nal range limit 3
Scaled low nomi- REAL 4.0 Yes Channel -
nal range limit 3

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
4.2 Parameters

GSD file GSD file
Hardware inter- • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
rupt high limit 1 1
• Enable
rupt low limit 1 1
• Enable
rupt high limit 2 1
• Enable
rupt low limit 2 1
• Enable
Hardware inter- • Value (INT) • 27648 Yes Channel -
rupt high limit 1 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3
rupt low limit 1 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3

rupt high limit 2 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3
rupt low limit 2 1
• Value (REAL) 3 • 0.0 3
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential group No Module Module
left module (module of the left module
plugged into a dark-colored
BaseUnit)
colored BaseUnit)
is 7 bytes.
2 In normal operation, different interference frequency suppression settings can be configured for both channels. These
cause different integration times for the analog-to-digital conversion. The module-internal time for updating the user data
is now based on the longer integration time for both channels.
In isochronous mode, both channels must be configured with the same interference frequency suppression of 4.8 kHz.
3 Only for configuration SCALE.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 17
Note
Unused channels
Deactivate the unused inputs in the parameter assignment.
A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH or 7F800000H with measured value
scaling.
Property of the module in isochronous mode

The permitted interference frequency suppression of both channels for isochronous mode of
the modules is 4.8 kHz (0.625 ms).
Note that no instantaneous value for the time Ti is returned in isochronous mode. The analog
module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF returns a mean value for the range of 0.625 ms starting at Ti.


Enabling of the diagnostics if a short-circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs. A short-
circuit is also detected in the range of 1 to 5 V if the input signal is short-circuited or the input
is not connected.

Enable the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or has too little current for the
measurement in the range of 4 to 20 mA.

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. The smoothing can be set in 5
levels.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
⑤ Very strong (k = 32)
Image 4-1 Smoothing AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF

Measuring range adjustment

The measuring range adjustment is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the
analog input module. It is available for current and voltage measurements.
A limited measuring range in S7 format is shown, which is defined by the high and low limits
of the measuring range adjustment.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 19
Scaling of measured values

With measured value scaling, the user data of an analog input module is displayed as REAL
(32-bit floating point) instead of S7 format.
The representation of the measuring range is defined by the scaled high and low limits of
nominal range limit (as REAL).
The measured value scaling can be combined with the measuring range adjustment. In this
case, the measuring range is adjusted first and then the representation of the measuring
range is scaled.
BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage

Specifies that a light-colored BaseUnit with incoming supply voltage is located on this slot
(see ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) system manual).
Potential group
neighbor.
See also

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
4.4 Measuring range adjustment
Introduction
The measuring range adjustment is available for current and voltage measuring ranges.
The measuring range adjustment (base measuring range) is valid for the following ranges:
● Nominal range
● Underrange (of the measuring range adjustment)
● Overrange (of the measuring range adjustment)
Note
Live zero measuring ranges are not supported.
Function
The measuring range adjustment is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the
module.
It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable part of the measuring range in S7
format.
● The function is enabled with the "Measuring range adjustment" parameter
● The "Measuring range adjustment high limit" parameter sets the high limit of the
measuring range in mV or μA.
● The "Measuring range adjustment low limit" parameter sets the low limit of the measuring
range in mV or μA.
Note
The "Measuring range adjustment" function can be used in combination with the "Measured
value scaling" function. See also Scaling of measured values (Page 24).
Note
When the "Measuring range adjustment high limit" and "Measuring range adjustment low
limit" parameters are too close together, resolution may be lost, which means it may no
longer be possible to show every value.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 21
Rules
● The limits of the measuring range adjustment must be selected within the nominal range
of the base measuring range. They are specified in integers.
● The measuring range adjustment is resolved depending on the base measuring range
from 0H to 6C00H or 9400H to 6C00H.
● Underranges/overranges apply in accordance with the S7 format and the base measuring
range.
Special consideration: Negative values are not possible for "Current (2-wire transducer)
0..20 mA". With a measuring range adjustment, an underrange is offered when possible
and cut off at 0 mA. If the underrange limit (ED00H) is > 0 mA, QI = 0 and the analog
value 8000H are output when it is violated.
Example
The following values result, for example:
Table 4- 3 Example of measuring range adjustment
Measuring range adjustment Measuring range resolution

Bipolar Unipolar
Base measuring range ±10 V 0 V to 10 V
Adjusted measuring range +2 V to +5 V +2 V to +5 V
Measuring range adjustment high limit 5000 mV 5000 mV
(S7: +27648) (S7: +27648)
Measuring range adjustment low limit 2000 mV 2000 mV
(S7: -27648) (S7: 0)

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
The following example illustrates the effect of a measuring range adjustment:
Image 4-2 Example of a measuring range adjustment
Configuration
The following figure shows an example of a configuration:
Image 4-3 Example of a configuration

In the configuration example, a measuring range adjustment of 2000 mV to 5000 mV is
displayed.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 23
4.5 Scaling of measured values
Introduction
The measured value scaling can be combined with the measuring range adjustment. In this
case, the measuring range is adjusted first and then the representation of the measuring
range is scaled.
Function
With measured value scaling, the user data of an AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF module is displayed
as REAL (32-bit floating point) instead of S7 format.
The representation of the measuring range is defined by the following parameters:
● The "Scaled high nominal range limit" parameter sets the desired display value (in REAL)
for the high nominal range limit of the measuring range.
● The "Scaled low nominal range limit" parameter sets the desired display value (in REAL)
for the low nominal range limit of the measuring range.
Note
With measured value scaling, the substitute value is minus infinity for underflow
(FF800000H) and plus infinity for overflow (7F800000H).
Note
Effects of inversion
It is possible to set the "Scaled high nominal range limit" parameter lower than the "Scaled
low nominal range limit" parameter, whereby the representation of the measuring range will
be inverted compared to the terminal value (V, mA).
Overflow/underflow and hardware interrupts are always based on representation in REAL. A
terminal value of > 11.76 V triggered an underflow for an inverted measured value scaling.
Hardware interrupts react similarly.
Note
When the Parameter "Scaled high nominal range limit" and "Scaled low nominal range limit"
parameters are too close together, resolution may be lost, which means it may no longer be
possible to show every value.

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Example
The following values result, for example:
Table 4- 4 Example of measured value scaling
Low nominal range limit High nominal range limit

Base measuring range -10 V +10 V
S7 format -27648 +27648
Scaling of measured values 1.00 7.00
As shown in the table, -10 V corresponds to 1.00 and +10 V corresponds to 7.00.
Combination with measuring range adjustment

If the measuring range adjustment is enabled in addition to measured value scaling, first the
measuring range is scaled and then the representation of the measuring range. The table
below shows an example of the combination of measured value scaling and measuring
range adjustment.
Table 4- 5 Example for a combination of measured value scaling and measuring range adjustment
Low nominal range limit High nominal range limit

Measuring range adjustment -4000 mV 8000 mV
S7 format -27648 +27648
Scaling of measured values 1.00 7.00
As shown in the table, -4 V corresponds to 1.00 and +8 V corresponds to 7.00.
Configuration
The following figures show examples of a configuration in STEP 7:
Configuration of measured value scaling
Image 4-4 Configuration of measured value scaling

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 25
Configuration with measuring range adjustment and measured value scaling

In the configuration example, a measuring range adjustment of -4000 mV to 8000 mV is
displayed and additionally converted to a scaled high and low nominal range limit of 1.00 to
7.00.
Image 4-5 Configuration with measuring range adjustment and measured value scaling

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
4.6 Address space
4.6 Address space

configuration, additional/different addresses are assigned in the process image of the inputs.
Configuration options of AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF

STEP 7, as of V13,
SP1
1 x 2-channel without value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF X X X
V1.0
1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF X X ---
V1.0, QI
1 x 2-channel without value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF --- X X
V2.0
1 x 2-channel with value status AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF --- X ---
V2.0, QI
for module-internal Shared Input V2.0, MSI
and measured value scaling V2.0, SCALE

● AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, QI,
● AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, MSI
● AI 2xU/I 2-, 4-wire HF, SCALE
An additional bit is assigned to each channel for the value status. The value status bit
indicates whether the read in analog value is valid. (0 = value is incorrect).

Bit = 0: The wiring, the value created on the channel, etc. is incorrect.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 27
4.6 Address space
Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI

AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the
Image 4-6 Address space of the analog input module AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, QI with value status
Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI

For the configuration as a 1 x 2-channel module (module-internal shared input, MSI),
channels 0 and 1 of module are copied to up to four submodules. Channels 0 and 1 are then
available with identical input values in various submodules. These submodules can be
assigned to up to four IO controllers when the module is used in a shared device. Each
IO controller has read access to the same channels.
The number of usable submodules is dependent on the interface module used. Please
observe the information in the manual for the particular interface module.

incorrect.
For the 2nd to 4th submodule (=MSI submodule), the value status 0 indicates that the value
is incorrect or the basic submodule has not yet been configured (not ready).

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
4.6 Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 1 and 2.
Image 4-7 Address space for configuration as 1x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI with value
status
The figure below shows the assignment of the address space with submodules 3 and 4.
Image 4-8 Address space for configuration as 1x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF MSI with value
status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 29
4.6 Address space
Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF SCALE

AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF, SCALE with value status (Quality Information (QI)). The value status
cannot be deselected for this configuration.
Image 4-9 Address space for configuration as 1 x 2-channel AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF, SCALE with
value status

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
LED displays
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AI 2xU/I 2-/4-wire HF.
④ PWR (green)

31 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB

The following tables contain the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedies for
diagnostics alarms can be found in section Diagnostics alarms (Page 35).
Table 5- 1 Error display DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Table 5- 2 Status and error display LED channel status / channel error
LEDs Meaning
Channel status Channel error
Channel deactivated or load voltage missing
Off Off
On Off
Off On
On On
Table 5- 3 PWR LED status display
PWR LED Meaning

Load voltage missing
Off
Load voltage present
On

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts.
● Short-circuit (current: sensor supply; voltage: 1 to 5 V, encoder supply)
● Wire break (current: 4 to 20 mA)
● Error
Hardware interrupts
● Violation of low limit 1
● Violation of high limit 1
S7-1500
The block interface is represented here with optimized block access, which is set in the
TIA Portal by default.
Name Data type Comment

LADDR HW_IO Hardware identifier of the module triggering the interrupt
USI WORD USI (High/Low)
IChannel USInt Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt
EventType Byte Error event

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 33
5.2 Interrupts
S7-300/400 or a different CPU

online help.
Image 5-2 OB start information
Table 5- 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information

USI W#16#0001 Additional interrupt information for hardware 2
Channel that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#01 Channel 0 and 1 of the I/O module 1
Event that triggered the hardware interrupt.
Error event B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1
B#16#04 Violation of high limit 1
B#16#05 Violation of low limit 2

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB

Short-circuit (encoder 1H Short-circuit encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between module and
supply) encoder
Short-circuit (1 to 5 V) 1H Short-circuit of input signal Correct interplay between module and
encoder
Wire break (current 4 to 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify
20 mA) the wiring, e.g. use cables with larger
cross-section
sensor
encoder
encoder
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred (di- Replace module
agnostics alarm on channel 0 applies for
the entire module).
Parameter assignment 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters • Correct the parameter assignment
error for the channel: (wire break diagnostics set only with
Incorrect parameter assignment. the permitted measuring ranges).
BaseUnit
Hardware interrupt lost 16H Error is reported when a hardware inter- • Limits might be assigned twice.
rupt (high/low limit) could not be report-
• If necessary, reduce the bus cycle.
ed.
• If necessary, use higher SFU.
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress • Wait for firmware update
not read process values in this state.
Switch to user calibration

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 35
Technical specifications of the AI 2×U/I 2-/4-wire HF
6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AI 2xU/I 2/4-wire High Feature, PU 1
label
Product function
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated V13
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSI Yes
Calibration in RUN possible Yes
Supply voltage
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 39 mA; without sensor supply

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 36
6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration <
10 s (two-wire)
Short-circuit protection Yes; channel-based
Output current, max. 100 mA; max. 150 mA per channel for a duration
< 10 s (four-wire)
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.95 W; without sensor supply
Address area
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 2; Differential inputs
Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage 30 V
input (destruction limit)
Permissible input current for current input (de- 50 mA
struction limit), max.
Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 130 Ω
Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 130 Ω
Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 130 Ω
Cable length
Shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage measurement

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 37
6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
channel
max.
Interference voltage suppression for interference 16.6 / 50 / 60 / 300 / 600 / 1 200 / 2 400 / 4 800
frequency f1 in Hz
Basic execution time of the module (all channels 1 ms
enabled)
Number of levels 6; none; 2/4/8/16/32 times
Configurable Yes
Encoders

Errors/accuracies
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.05%; 0.1% with SFU 4.8 kHz
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.05%; 0.1% with SFU 4.8 kHz
Isochronous mode
terminal)
Bus cycle time (TDP), min. 1 ms
Jitter, max. 5 µs

38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
6ES7134-6HB00-0CA1
Interrupts
Limit interrupt Yes; two high limits and two low limits each
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break Yes, measuring range 4 to 20 mA only
Short-circuit Yes; for 1 to 5 V, and for current measuring rang-
es for short-circuit in sensor supply
Group error Yes
electronics
Between the inputs (UCM) 75 V DC/60 V AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 39

Measurement Measuring Diagnostics Hardware

type range Underflow Overflow Wire break Short-circuit Missing interrupts
to ground supply
voltage L+
Deactivated * * * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x x – x 1 x x
±10 V x x – x1 x x
1 V to 5 V x x – x x x
0 V to 10 V x x – x 1 x x
Current 0 mA to x x – x x x
(4-wire trans- 20 mA
ducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA
±20 mA x x - x x x
Current 0 mA to x 12 x – x x x
(2-wire trans- 20 mA
ducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA
x = property is allowed, – = property is not allowed, * = property is not relevant

1 only possible as of firmware V2.0
2 The diagnostics Underflow can always be enabled for "Current (2-wire transducer) 0..20 mA", but it is only reported
when a complete underflow range is created by the measuring range adjustment.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 40

Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type and measuring range PB
Measure- Measuring Diagnostics Hardware

ment type range Underflow Overflow Wire break Load Short-circuit Smoothing interrupts
voltage L+ to ground / interfer-
ence fre-
quency
suppres-
sion
Deactivated * * * * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x x – x x 1 x –
±10 V x x – x x 1 x –
1 V to 5 V x x – x x x –
0 V to 10 V x x – x x1 x –
Current 0 mA to x x – x x x –
(4-wire 20 mA
transducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x –
20 mA
±20 mA x x - x x x –
Current 0 mA to – x – x x x –
(2-wire 20 mA
transducer) 4 mA to x x x x x x –
20 mA

1 only possible as of firmware V2.0

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 41


You can reassign the module parameters in RUN. For example, the measuring range of
selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other channels.

Note
results in a brief exit from clocked measuring mode and renewed synchronization with the
fieldbus cycle. The slowest channel provides the "internal" measuring cycle.
Note
Changing parameter settings in runtime can cause the process values to freeze for the
duration of the parameter assignment for the module.

continues operation with the previous parameter assignment. However, the STATUS output
online help.

42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Header information (V1.0)

The figure below shows the structure of the header information (V1.0).
Image A-2 Header information (V1.0)
Header information (V2.0)

The figure below shows the structure of the header information (V2.0).
Image A-3 Header information (V2.0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 43
Header information (V2.0 SCALE)

Image A-4 Header information (V2.0 SCALE)
Parameter (V1.0)
* x = 2 + (channel number x 18); channel number is 0 or 1

44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Image A-5 Structure of byte x to x+17 for channel 0 and 1

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 45
Parameter (V2.0)

46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 47
Parameter (V2.0 SCALE)


48 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 49

The following table contains all the measurement types of the analog input module with its
codes. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).

Voltage 0000 0001

The following table contains all codes for the measuring ranges of the analog input module.
You must enter these codes at byte x+1 (see previous figure).

Voltage
±5 V 0000 1000
±10 V 0000 1001
1 to 5 V 0000 1010
0 to 10 V 0000 1011
Current
0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100
Codes for smoothing and interference frequency suppression

The following table contains all coding for smoothing and interference frequency
suppression. You must enter these codes at byte x (see previous figure).
Table A- 4 Codes for smoothing
Smoothing Code
None 0000
2 times 0100
4 times 0001
8 times 0101
16 times 0010
32 times 0011

50 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB
Table A- 5 Codes for interference frequency suppression
Interference frequency suppression Code

16.6 Hz (67.5 ms) 0100
50 Hz (22.5 ms) 0010
60 Hz (18.75 ms) 0001
300 Hz (10 ms) 0101
600 Hz (5 ms) 0110
1.2 kHz (2.5 ms) 0111
2.4 kHz (1.25 ms) 1000
4.8 kHz (0.625 ms) 1001

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine if the module
is plugged in or pulled.
DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of pa-
header information rameter blocks.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 51
This section shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog input
module AI 2xU/I 2-/4wire HF.

The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values at the same nominal
range. The analog values are represented as a fixed point number in the two's complement.
The resolutions 15 and 16 bits including sign are displayed. Each analog value is entered in
the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

The tables below set out the digitized representation of the input ranges by bipolar and
unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 > 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 < -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 52

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 > 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 < -17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

measuring ranges.

32767 7FFF > 11.759 V > 5.879 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V Overrange
27649 6C01
20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-32512 8100 -11.759 V -5.879 V
-32768 8000 < -11.759 V < -5.879 V Underflow

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 53
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V

32767 7FFF > 5.704 V > 11.759 V Overflow
32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange
27649 6C01
20736 5100 4V 7.5 V
1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 361.7 µV
0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 0.296 V -1.759 V
-32768 8000 < 0.296 V < -1.759 V Underflow

measuring ranges.

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 < -23.52 mA Underflow

54 Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB

32767 7FFF > 23.52 mA > 22.81 mA Overflow
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < -3.52 mA < 1.185 mA Underflow

Manual, 12/2015, A5E33062495-AB 55
Preface
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST ___________________

(6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)
___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST
(6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1) ___________________
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
Representation of
analog values B
07/2014
A5E03551866-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties ....................................................................................................................................... 8
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Measuring types and ranges........................................................................................................12
4.2 Parameters ...................................................................................................................................13
4.4 Address space .............................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts ......................................................................................................................................20
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ............................................................................26
B.1 Representation of input ranges ....................................................................................................32
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges .............................................33

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 5
three areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information
Web server.

6 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
Documentation guide

to your own manual.


CAx or CAe systems.
EPLAN macro files

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST
Properties
● Measuring type current for 2-/4-wire transducers
● Input ranges

8 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties
● Electrically isolated from the supply voltage L+ (only for input type 4-wire transducer)
● Permitted common mode voltage: 10 VSS
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also
You will find additional information on the accessories in the ET 200SP distributed

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 9
Wiring up 3
Terminal assignment for AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST (6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1)

(terminals 1 to 16)
1 1I0+ 2 1I1+ 4-wire connection (terminal 1 to 8): A0
3 1I2+ 4 1I3+ • 1In+: Input signal "+", channel n A1
5 1I0- 6 1I1- • 1In-: Input signal "-", channel n
7 1I2- 8 1I3-
9 UV0 10 UV1 2-wire connection (terminal 9 to 16):
11 UV2 12 UV3 • UVn: Supply voltage channel n
13 2I0+ 14 2I1+ • 2In+: Input signal "+", channel n CC03
15 2I2+ 16 2I3+ 6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0
L+ 24 VDC M M
2-wire connection 4-wire connection
Note
See also

10 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
Wiring up
Figure 3-1 Schematic circuit diagram for AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 11
The analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST has the following measuring ranges:

4 to 20 mA 15 bits
4 to 20 mA 15 bits
± 20 mA 16 bits including sign
You will find the tables of the measuring ranges as well as overflow, overrange, etc.,
in the section Representation of analog values (Page 31).

12 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST

Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range

GSD file GSD file

• Enable
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable
Measuring type/range • deactivated Current yes Channel Channel
(4-wire
• Current (4-wire
transducer)
transducer) 0..20 mA 4..20 mA
• Current (4-wire
transducer) 4..20 mA
• Current (4-wire
transducer) +/-20 mA
• Current (2-wire
• Current (2-wire

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 13
4.2 Parameters
Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range

GSD file GSD file

Smoothing • none none yes Channel Channel
• weak
• medium
• strong
Interference frequency • 60 Hz 50 Hz yes Channel Module
suppression
• 50 Hz1
• 16.6 Hz
left module
Note
Unused channels
"Disable" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time
of the module.
A disabled channel always returns the value 7FFFH.

14 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC



Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is too weak
to be measured at the relevant input.
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics info is output.
See the section Measuring types and measuring ranges (Page 12).

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 15
Smoothing
4 levels.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 4-1 Smoothing with AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST

parameter, the user specifies the supply frequency that is predominant in the plant.
Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with voltage supply feed-in is located in this slot

16 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space

Bit = 1: There are no faults/errors on the module.
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST
Figure 4-2 Address space of the AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST with value status

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 17
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST.
③ PWR (green)


18 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel disabled
off
Channel enabled
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 19
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog input module AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit (current, 2-wire transducer)
● Wire break (current 4..20 mA)
● Error
● No load voltage

20 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC


Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware being updated. The module does –
unavailable not perform any measurements during this
time.
Short-circuit 1H Sensor supply to ground Correct the module/encoder tuning
(2-wire transducer, Input to sensor supply
current)*
Line break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high. Use a different encoder type or modify
(current) the wiring, for example, using cables
Wire break between the module Connect the cable
and sensor
• Connect the sensor contacts
High limit violated 7H Value is above the overrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
Low limit violated 8H Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/encoder tuning
on the BaseUnit
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a channel can have a
temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-circuit diagnostics can also be reported for
unaffected channels and/or the measured value can be affected temporarily.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 21
Technical specifications of the AI 4×I 2-/4-wire ST
6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
Product type designation AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
Supply voltage
Input current
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply
24 V Yes
Output current, max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a duration < 10 s

22 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
Power loss
Address area
Analog inputs
(destruction limit)
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times and additional
processing times (depending on the parameter assignment
of the enabled channels)
A/D resolution at analog input 16 bits
Analog inputs, configurable Yes
Configurable input variable Yes
Input ranges
Voltage No
Current Yes
Thermocouple No
Resistance thermometer No
Resistance No
0 to 20 mA Yes
in 2-wire operation
-20 to +20 mA Yes
Input resistance (-20 to +20 mA) 100 Ω
4 to 20 mA Yes
in 2-wire operation
Cable length
Interference suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 23
6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes
Setting: Weak Yes
Setting: Medium Yes
Setting: Strong Yes
Encoders
• Load of the 2-wire transducer, max. 650 Ω

Errors/accuracies
Crosstalk between inputs, min. 50 dB; applies to up to +/-5 V overvoltage in other channels
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C ± 0.05 %
(in relation to input range), (+/-)
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %),
f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference < 70 dB
nominal value of the input range), min.
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes; 2-wire operation: Short-circuit of the encoder supply
to ground or short-circuit of an input to the encoder supply
Group error Yes

24 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
6ES7134-6GD00-0BA1
Between the channels Yes; per channel group between the group
of the 2-wire current inputs and the group
of the 4-wire current inputs
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the Yes; only for 4-wire transducer
electronics
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 25

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and

range No supply Short-circuit Overflow Underflow Wire break
voltage L+ to M
deactivated * * * * *
Current 0..20 mA x - x x -
(4-wire 4..20 mA x - x x x
connection)
±20 mA x - x x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x x -
(2-wire 4..20 mA x x x x x
connection)

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measuring type and

range No supply voltage Short-circuit to M Overflow/ Wire break
L+ Underflow
deactivated * * * *
Current 0..20 mA x - x -
(4-wire 4..20 mA x - x x
connection)
±20 mA x - x -
Current 0..20 mA x x x -
(2-wire 4..20 mA x x x x
connection)

26 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC



You will find a description of the "WRREC" instruction and the error codes in the
STEP 7 online help.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 27
Note
Header information

28 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
Parameters

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 29
Codes for the measuring type

Table A- 1 Codes for the measuring type

Codes for the measuring range

Table A- 2 Codes for the measuring range
Measuring range Coding

0 to 20 mA 0000 0010
4 to 20 mA 0000 0011
±20 mA 0000 0100

30 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges that you can use with
the analog module.

assigned parameters.
Note
The digitalized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module.
The following resolution therefore does not apply to temperature values.

including sign
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 31

In the following tables, you can find the digitized representation of the bipolar and
unipolar input ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

32 Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC

measuring ranges.

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Underflow

27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow
* For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to 20 mA".
Therefore, no underrange or underflow exists here.

Manual, 07/2014, A5E03551866-AC 33
Preface
AI 4xI 2‑wire 4…20mA HART ___________________

___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
4
HART function
AI 4xI 2‑wire 4…20mA HART
___________________
Parameters 5
Manual
___________________
Configuring/address space 6
___________________
___________________
___________________
Parameter data records 9
___________________
HART operating data
records 10
___________________
Analog value representation 11
11/2014
A5E35098013-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 11/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Validity of the documentation

This manual describes the analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART, article
number 6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1.
It supplements the system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system
Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Analog Input Module AI 4xI 2‑wire 4…20mA HART

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 5
Preface

6 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................... 11
2 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1 Properties................................................................................................................................13
3 Wiring up ................................................................................................................................................. 15
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram .......................................................................................................18
4 HART function ......................................................................................................................................... 19
4.1 How HART works....................................................................................................................20
4.2 Use of HART ...........................................................................................................................24
4.3 HART communication interface ..............................................................................................26
4.4 HART variables .......................................................................................................................28
5 Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 31
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART ...................................................................31
5.1.1 Channel/technology parameters .............................................................................................31
5.1.2 Explanation of the channel/technology parameters................................................................34
5.1.3 HART mapping parameters ....................................................................................................37
6 Configuring/address space ...................................................................................................................... 39
6.1 Configuring..............................................................................................................................39
6.2 Address space ........................................................................................................................40
7 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................... 43
7.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................45
7.3 Diagnostics alarms..................................................................................................................46
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART ................................................49
9 Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................... 53
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters ........................54
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters ..............................57

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 7
Table of contents
10 HART operating data records .................................................................................................................. 59

10.1 HART directory....................................................................................................................... 60
10.2 HART feature data ................................................................................................................. 60
10.3 HART variable data record .................................................................................................... 61
10.4 HART-specific settings ........................................................................................................... 62
10.5 HART request and response data records ............................................................................ 64
11 Analog value representation .................................................................................................................... 71
11.1 Representation of input ranges .............................................................................................. 72
11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ....................................... 73
Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 75

8 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Table of contents
Tables
Table 1- 1 Documentation ............................................................................................................................. 11

Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART (6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1) ................ 16
Table 4- 1 Examples of universal commands ............................................................................................... 21
Table 4- 2 Examples of common practice commands .................................................................................. 22
Table 4- 3 1st status byte .............................................................................................................................. 23
Table 4- 4 2nd status byte ............................................................................................................................. 23
Table 4- 5 Structure of the data records ....................................................................................................... 26
Table 5- 1 Configurable channel/technology parameters and their default settings ..................................... 31
Table 5- 2 Measuring ranges ........................................................................................................................ 35
Table 5- 3 Configurable HART mapping parameters .................................................................................... 37
Table 6- 1 Address space of analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART........................................ 40
Table 7- 1 Status display of the channel status/channel fault LEDs ............................................................. 44
Table 7- 2 DIAG LED error display ............................................................................................................... 44
Table 7- 3 Status display of the PWR LED ................................................................................................... 44
Table 7- 4 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them ..................................................... 46
Table 10- 1 DB80: Transparent message format ............................................................................................ 69
Table 10- 2 DB80: Compact message format ................................................................................................. 69
Table 10- 3 FC81: Reading of the response to DB81 with SFC 59 ................................................................ 70
Table 11- 1 Resolution of the analog values ................................................................................................... 71
Table 11- 2 Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA / 4…20 mA HART ........................................................... 71
Table 11- 3 Bipolar input ranges ..................................................................................................................... 72
Table 11- 4 Unipolar input ranges ................................................................................................................... 72
Table 11- 5 Current measuring range ±20 mA ............................................................................................... 73
Table 11- 6 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA ............................................................... 73

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 9
Table of contents
Figures
Figure 2-1 View of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART module ...................................................................... 13
Figure 3-1 Block diagram for AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART ......................................................................... 18
Figure 4-1 The HART signal .......................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 4-2 System environment for the use of HART ................................................................................... 24
Figure 5-1 Smoothing of the analog value .................................................................................................... 35
Figure 7-1 LED displays ................................................................................................................................ 43
Figure 9-1 Structure of data record 128 ........................................................................................................ 54
Figure 9-2 Header information....................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 9-3 Structure of bytes x to x+39 for channels 0 to 3 .......................................................................... 56
Figure 9-4 Header information....................................................................................................................... 57
Figure 9-5 Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 58
Figure 10-1 Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 63

10 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Introduction
The documentation of the SIMATIC products has a modular structure and covers diverse
topics relating to your automation system.
The complete documentation for the ET 200SP system consists of the system manual,
function manuals, and manuals for the individual devices.
The STEP 7 information system (online help) also supports you in configuring and
programming your automation system.
Overview of documentation for analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
The following table lists further documentation that you will need when using analog input
module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART.
Table 1- 1 Documentation

System description System Manual ET 200SP distrib- • Application planning
uted I/O system
• Installation
com/WW/view/en/58649293) • Connecting
• Commissioning
Analog value processing Function Manual Analog value • Basics of analog technology
processing (wiring, processing, assembly
(http://support.automation.siemens. system)
• Description/explanation of
meaning, e.g., conversion and
cycle times, basic error limits,
operational limits
System diagnostics Function manual Diagnostics • Overview
• Hardware/software diagnostic
evaluation
SIMATIC manuals
The latest manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 11
Documentation guide

12 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART module

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 13
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Measurement type current for 2-wire HART transducer
● Input range 4 mA to 20 mA
● Resolution 16 bits including sign
● Configurable diagnostics per channel
● HART communication (Rev. 5 to Rev. 7)
● Firmware update
● Up to four HART variables directly in the input address space
You can configure the module with STEP 7 in the TIA Portal as well as with HW Config and
with a GSD file.
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

14 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Wiring up 3
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module can be used with all A0 or A1-type
BaseUnits.
You connect the transducers to the BaseUnit of the analog module. The infeed of the supply
voltage at the light BaseUnit of the associated potential group supplies the module and the
transducers connected to the encoder supply voltages.
A new potential group always begins with a light BaseUnit.
BaseUnit
The BaseUnit is not included in the product package of the module and must be ordered
separately.
An overview of the BaseUnits that you can use with the analog module can be found in
Product information for documentation of the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
Information regarding selection of the suitable BaseUnit can be found in system manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and in the manual
ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521).
Information regarding wiring of the BaseUnit, creating the cable shield, etc., can be found in
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) in the section "Connecting".
Note
The first BaseUnit of a station must be a light BaseUnit. Also keep this in mind during the
configuration.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 15
Wiring up
Table 3- 1 Terminal assignment of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART (6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1)
Terminal assignment for AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART (6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1)

Terminal Assign- Terminal Assign- Explanation BaseUnit Color identification label
1 H0+ 2 H1+ HART test connections A0
3 H2+ 4 H3+ (terminals 1 to 8): A1
5 H0- 6 H1- • Hn+: HART signal "+", chan-
nel n
7 H2- 8 H3-
• Hn-: HART signal "-", channel n
9 UV0 10 UV1 2-wire connection
11 UV2 12 UV3 (terminals 9 to 16):
13 I0 + 14 I1 + • UVn: Supply voltage channel n
15 I2 + 16 I3 + • In+: Input signal "+", channel n
L+ 24 VDC M M
Recommended color
identification label: CC03
6ES7193-6CP03-2MA0
2-wire connection using the example of channel 0
The HART test terminals Hn+ / Hn- are used for optional measuring of the HART signal, e.g., with an external hand-held
device.

16 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Wiring up
Terminal assignment for AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART (6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1)

4-wire connection using the example of channel 0
A non-isolated 4-wire connection is possible by connecting the transducer to the HART test terminals Hn+ and Hn-.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 17
Wiring up
Block diagram
Figure 3-1 Block diagram for AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Supply voltage L+/M

You connect the supply voltage (24 V DC) to terminals L+ and M. An internal circuit-breaker
protects the analog module from reverse polarity. The analog module monitors whether the
supply voltage is connected.

18 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART function 4
Definition
"HART" stands for "Highway Addressable Remote Transducer".
The HART functionality also enables you to use the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog
module to exchange data with the connected field devices. The HART protocol is generally
accepted as a standard protocol for communication with intelligent field devices: HART is a
registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation (HCF), which owns all the
rights to the HART protocol. You can find detailed information about HART in the HART
specification.
Advantages of HART
Using the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module offers the following advantages:
● Connection compatibility with standard analog modules: Current loop 4 - 20 mA
● Additional digital communication using the HART protocol
● Numerous field devices with HART functions are in use
● The option to use HART is integrated in the S7 system by means of the AI 4xI 2-wire
4…20mA HART analog module.
Use in the system

The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module is used in the distributed I/O connected to
PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.
You can connect a field device to any channel: The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog
module operates as a HART master, monodrop; the field devices operate as HART devices.
Typical applications
The following applications are typical:
● Commissioning of field devices (centralized parameter assignment)
● Online modification of field device parameters
● Information, maintenance and diagnostic displays for the field devices
● Integration of configuration tools for field devices via the HART interface

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 19
HART function
4.1 How HART works
4.1 How HART works
Introduction
The HART protocol describes the physical form of the transfer: transfer procedures,
message structure, data formats and commands.
HART signal
The figure below shows the analog signal with the modulated HART signal (FSK method),
which consists of sine waves of 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz and has a mean value of 0. It can be
filtered out using an input filter so that the original analog signal is available again.
Figure 4-1 The HART signal
① Analog signal
② Time (seconds)
K Command
A Response

20 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART function
4.1 How HART works
HART communication
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module processes the HART communication in
multiplex mode, i.e., consecutively channel-by-channel. As a result, HART commands of the
individual channels influence the speed of the HART processing of the other channels.
When HART mode is enabled, the analog module autonomously sends HART commands to
the connected field devices. This takes place alternatingly on a channel-specific basis with
any pending external HART commands that arrive via the command interface of the module,
see section 4.3 "HART command interface".
HART commands
The assignable properties of the HART field devices (HART parameters) can be set with
HART commands and read by means of HART replies. The HART commands and their
parameters are divided into three groups with the following properties:
● Universal
● Common practice
● Device-specific
Universal commands must be supported by all manufacturers of HART field devices and
common practice commands should be supported. There are also device-specific
commands that apply only to the particular field device.
Examples of HART commands

The following two tables show examples of HART commands:
Table 4- 1 Examples of universal commands
Command Function
0 Read manufacturer and device type - only with this command 0 can field de-
vices be addressed by means of a short frame address
11 Read manufacturer and device type
1 Read primary variable and unit
2 Read current output and percent of range, digitally as floating-point number
(IEEE 754)
3 Read up to four pre-defined dynamic variables (primary variables, secondary
variables, etc.)
13, 18 Read or write tag, descriptor and date (data included in transmission)

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 21
HART function
4.1 How HART works
Table 4- 2 Examples of common practice commands
Command Function
36 Set upper range value
37 Set lower range value
41 Perform self-test
43 Set the primary variable to zero
109 Switch burst mode on or off
Structure of the HART protocol

Each HART frame sent from the analog module to the connected field device (request
frame) and each HART frame from the field device (response frame) has the following basic
structure.
PREAMBLE STRT ADDR COM BCNT STATUS DATA CHK
PREAMBLE: Bytes (0xFF) for synchronizing.

5 to 20 bytes depending on parameter assignment
STRT: Start character (start delimiter)
ADDR: Address of the field device (1 byte; short address or 5 bytes; long address)
COM: HART command number
BCNT: Byte count, number of bytes to follow without checksum
STATUS: HART device status (1st and 2nd status bytes). Only present for a response
frame. For structure of HART device status, see below.
DATA: Transferred user data / parameters, quantity depending on command
(0…230 bytes)
CHK: Checksum
With the exception of the preamble bytes, this structure is contained in the communication
data of the HART command interface. See section HART request and response data records
(Page 64).
HART replies always contain data. Status information (HART device status; 1st and 2nd
status bytes) is always sent together with a HART response. You should evaluate these to
make sure the response is correct.

22 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART function
4.1 How HART works
Structure of HART device status (1st and 2nd status bytes)
Table 4- 3 1st status byte
When Bit 7 = 1: "Communication error"

Bit 6 = 1 Parity error
Bit 5 = 1 Overflow
Bit 4 = 1 Framing error
Bit 3 = 1 Checksum error
Bit 2 = 0 Reserved
Bit 1 = 1 Overflow in the receive buffer
Bit 0 = 0 Reserved
When Bit 7 = 0: "Specific according to the response frame"
Table 4- 4 2nd status byte
Bit 7 = 1 Device fault

Bit 6 = 1 Configuration changed
Bit 5 = 1 Startup (cold start)
Bit 4 = 1 Additional status information available
Bit 3 = 1 Fixed analog output current setting
Bit 2 = 1 Analog output current saturated
Bit 1 = 1 Secondary variable outside the limits
Bit 0 = 1 Primary variable outside the range
HART-Fast-Mode
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module supports the processing of HART
commands as a SHC sequence ("Successive HART Command").
That is, if the analog module detects a HART command with SHC bit set for a channel, the
complete HART command processing on the HART analog module is reserved for this
channel for approximately 2 s. For all other channels of the analog module, no HART frame
processing occurs during this time, see section HART communication interface (Page 26)
Note
• During the time a HART channel of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module is
processing an SHC sequence, and thus the complete HART processing of the module is
reserved for this channel, the HART variables of all HART channels are no longer
updated. They remain unchanged in terms of value and quality code.
• HART commands for other channels are not processed and are acknowledged
correspondingly.
Burst mode
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module does not support burst mode. HART
commands with set burst bit are ignored and are not forwarded to the connected field device.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 23
HART function
4.2 Use of HART
4.2 Use of HART
System environment for the use of HART

To use an intelligent field device with HART functionality, you require the following system
environment:
● Current loop 4 - 20 mA
Connection of the transducers to the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module
● HART configuration tool "Client":
You can assign the HART parameters using an external hand-held operating device
(HART Handheld) or a HART configuration tool (PDM). Both assume the function of a
"client":
The configuration tool goes through the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module
whereas the HART Handheld is connected directly in parallel with the field device. See
terminal assignment "HART test connections (terminals 1 to 8)" in the section 3.1
"Terminal assignment".
PDM (Process Device Manager) is available as a stand-alone unit or integrated in
STEP 7 HW Config.
● HART system connection:
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module assumes the function of a "master" by
forwarding the commands received from the HART configuration tool or as programmed
commands from an S7 user program, for example, to the intelligent field device and
sending back the replies. Data records that are transferred via the ET 200SP I/O bus
serve as the interface of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module. The data
records must be created and interpreted by the client. .
Figure 4-2 System environment for the use of HART

24 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART function
4.2 Use of HART
Error management
The two HART status bytes (HART device status) that are transferred with each response of
the field device contain error information about the HART communication, HART command,
and device status.
This is evaluated by the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module and made available in
the system via S7 diagnostic messages.
Configuration/commissioning
You configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module in the SIMATIC system with
STEP 7 or the TIA Portal. You assign parameters for the individual channels with respect to
the actual analog value acquisition and the use of HART variables in the input address
space of the module.
You can configure one field device per channel. By means of this configured field device, the
configuration / parameter assignment of the connected field device is then carried out using
PDM or the EDD for the ET 200SP.
It is also possible to configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module using a
GSD file for PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. However, in this case, direct configuration /
parameter assignment of the connected field devices is not possible.
Parameter reassignment of the field devices

The HART analog module generally accepts parameter reassignments for field devices.
Access rights can only be allocated in the configuration tool.
For parameter reassignment of the field devices connected to the HART analog module,
proceed as follows:
1. You start the parameter reassignment of a field device using a HART command that you
enter using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool or as a programmed command in the
STEP 7 user program.
2. After you have reassigned the parameters of a HART field device, the corresponding bit
is set in the device status of the connected field device (in the 2nd status byte).
3. Because of the parameter reassignment of the field device, the HART analog module
triggers a diagnostic interrupt "Configuration changed", provided this diagnostic interrupts
is enabled. See section 7.3 "Diagnostic alarms". This diagnostic interrupt is to be
regarded as information and not as an error and is automatically deleted again by the
analog module after approximately 1 minute.
A diagnostic interrupt can also be triggered, if enabled, when parameter reassignment is
carried out with the hand-held device.
See also
Terminal assignment (Page 15)
Diagnostics alarms (Page 46)

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 25
HART function
4.3 HART communication interface
Data records
The HART commands are sent as so-called external HART requests from the client
(e.g., PDM or the STEP 7 user program) to the connected field device via data records. The
response of the field device is made available again in the system via data records.
HART communication may only be handled by one client (e.g., PDM) per channel. If a
channel is handled by several clients, the response made available by the module cannot be
allocated to one client with certainty. The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module does
not support client management.
Each client/channel is allocated fixed data records:
Table 4- 5 Structure of the data records
Channel Data record number

Request to the field device Response from the field device
0 80 81
1 82 83
2 84 85
3 86 87
The corresponding data records are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction
and read by the module with the "RDREC" instruction.
Errors during the transfer are indicated at output parameter STATUS.
Errors during interpretation of the request data record are signaled in the corresponding
response data record. The faulty request can be read back again using the request data
record.
Rules
● After having written a request data record, a client must read the response data record
before it may write another request data record.
● The client can evaluate the "processing status" in the response data record: If the
"processing status" indicates "successful" or "error," the response data record contains
current response data or error displays.
● The response data record must always be read completely because the analog module
may modify the data record after the initial reading with "successful" or "error" status.
If the processing status in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error", the
data record contains current response data or error displays.

26 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART function
● The client may only write a request data record to the module again when it has read the
response to the previously written request data record via the corresponding response
data record. Otherwise, the response from the module is overwritten.
● The STATUS component in the response frame (HART device status in the response
data) provides information on whether errors have occurred and, if so, which errors.
Each request is stored on a channel-specific basis, and the corresponding request data
record is disabled. Another writing of the same request data record is thus not possible and
is acknowledged with BUSY.
The disable of the request data record is reset after the termination or completion of the
requested HART command.
SHC sequence
If a HART command is sent to the module with a set SHC bit, then this channel is reserved
for HART commands for 2 seconds. This means that no more internal HART commands are
sent to the field device with this channel.
Each time a HART command with a set SHC bit is sent, the module reserves this channel
again for another 2 seconds for HART commands. If a HART command without a set
SHC bit is detected for this channel, or if no further command occurs for this channel within
2 seconds after the previous HART command, then command 3 or 9 for reading the HART
variables is cyclically sent to the field device for this channel.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 27
HART function
4.4 HART variables
4.4 HART variables
Introduction
Numerous HART field devices make available additional measured quantities (e.g. sensor
temperature).
A maximum of four HART variables supported by the connected field device can be cyclically
read per channel with activated HART functionality. The HART variables are read
automatically using HART command 3 (for field devices with HART Rev. 5) or command 9
(for field devices with HART Rev. 6 or higher).
These four HART variables per channel are always stored in HART variable data record 121
and can be read at any time. See section HART variable data record (Page 61).
In addition, a maximum of 4 HART variables can be configured directly in the input address
space of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module. You assign the respective HART
variables to a channel in the properties dialog for the module. The parameter assignment
uses parameter data record 140, see section Parameter assignment and structure of the
HART mapping parameters (Page 57). This makes it easy for you to process measured
values directly from the field device as input data in the automation device.
Address assignment
Provided you map HART variables in the input address space of the module by means of the
configuration tool or selection of the appropriate configuration, 20 bytes are always
additionally allocated for the HART variables.
Configuration of HART variables

You can configure up to 4 HART variables for each channel
● PV (Primary Variable)
● SV (Secondary Variable)
● TV (Tertiary Variable)
● QV (Quaternary)
When HART mode is enabled, the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module
autonomously and cyclically reads the variables supplied by the connected field devices and
makes them available in the input address space according to the configuration.
Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte value and a quality code byte.
Quality code
The quality code describes the process status of the corresponding HART variable.

28 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART function
4.4 HART variables
Basic structure of the quality code
Bit 7….6 5....2 1…0

Quality Sub-status Limits
0 0: Bad Coded according to "PROFIBUS PA 0 0: OK
0 1: Uncertain Profile for Process Control Devices" 0 1: Low limit
1 0: Good 1 0: High limit
1 1: Good 1 1: Constant
The quality codes generated by the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module are based
on the HART Revision of the utilized field device.
Field devices with HART Revision 5

A quality code is formed exclusively from the 1st and 2nd status bytes (HART device status)
of the response frames (HART command 3).
Quality code Meaning (process status)

80H Value is okay Applies even when the following bits
are set in the 2nd status byte of the
HART response frame:
• Configuration changed
• Startup (cold start)
• Fixed analog output current setting
78H Value is uncertain Applies even when the following bits
are set in the 2nd status byte of the
HART response frame:
• Additional status information
available
• Analog output current saturated
• Secondary variable outside the
limits
• Primary variable outside the range
84H Response code RC8: Update error
24H Response code RC16: Access restricted Request from field device refused
23H Communication error or HART variable not
present in the field device
37H Initialization value from analog module After module startup
00H Initialization value from S7 system

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 29
HART function
4.4 HART variables
Field devices with HART Revision 7 or higher

The quality code is formed from the 1st status byte (HART device status) and the "Device
variable status" (DVS) of the response frames (HART command 9).
Quality code Meaning (process status)

80H Value is okay
89H "Good" with "Low limit" Process status, formed from the "De-
8AH "Good" with "High limit" vice variable status" (DVS) of the
response frames with corresponding
28H…2BH "Bad" limits (see above).
68H…6BH
78H…7BH "Manual" or "Fixed"
(manually controlled or fixed value)
88H…8BH "More device variable state available"
(additional status information available)
84H Response code RC8: Update error
24H Response code RC16: Access restricted Request from field device refused
23H Communication error or HART variable not
present in the field device
37H Initialization value from analog module After module startup
00H Initialization value from S7 system

30 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Parameters 5
5.1 Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
You specify how the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module operates using
parameters.
The parameters are subdivided into:
● Channel or technology parameters (data record 128)
With PROFIBUS DP GSD configuration, there is a reduced configuration via the startup
configuration (Prm frame).
● Parameters that define the display of HART variables in the address space of the module;
HART mapping parameters (data record 140)
With configuration in the user program, the parameters are transferred to the modules via
data records with the "WRREC" instruction; see section Parameter assignment and structure
of the channel/technology parameters (Page 54).
5.1.1 Channel/technology parameters
Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-/4-wire ST

Table 5- 1 Configurable channel/technology parameters and their default settings
Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range with configura-

in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
DP
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
• Enable
encoder supply
• Enable
overflow
• Enable

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 31
Parameters
Parameter Value range Default Configuration Effective range with configura-

in RUN tion software, e.g. STEP 7
(TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
DP
underflow
• Enable
wire break
• Enable
Diagnostics HART • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module 2
• Enable
Measuring type/range • Disabled Current (2-wire Yes Channel Channel
transducer)
• Current (2-wire transduc-
4..20 mA
er) 4..20 mA HART
• Current (2-wire transduc-
er) 4..20 mA HART
Smoothing • none none Yes Channel Channel
• 4-fold (weak)
• 16-fold (medium)
• 32-fold (strong)
Interference frequency • 60 Hz (integration time 50 Hz Yes Channel Module 2
suppression 16.6 ms)
• 50 Hz 1 (integration time
20 ms)
• 10 Hz (integration time
100 ms)
Current limit for wire • 1.185 mA 1.185 mA Yes Channel Cannot be
break diagnostics changed2
• 3.6 mA
Number of HART 5…20 5 Yes Channel Cannot be
preamble bytes changed2
Number of HART repe- 0…255 5 Yes Channel Cannot be
titions changed2
left module
2 Because the PROFIBUS GSD configuration limits the number of parameters to a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP
station, the options for parameter assignment are limited. In this case, the parameter assignment uses data record 245.
If required, you can assign this parameter using data record 128 as described in the "GSD File PROFINET IO" column
(see table above).

32 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Parameters
Note
Unused channels
"Disable" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A disabled channel always supplies the analog value 7FFFH.
See also
Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters (Page 54)

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 33
Parameters
5.1.2 Explanation of the channel/technology parameters

Diagnostics encoder supply

The short-circuit and underflow diagnostics can be enabled simultaneously. If both
diagnostic events occur simultaneously, the short-circuit diagnostics information is output.

Enabling of the diagnostics when the module has no current flow at the input or the current
flow at the input is below the configured wire break limit.
diagnostics events occur simultaneously, the wire break diagnostics information is output.
Diagnostics HART
Enabling of the diagnostics of the HART frame-specific monitoring and the status information
supplied by the connected field device in the HART frame (HART device status).
Current limit for wire break diagnostics

You use this to specify the current limit for detecting wire breaks. If the current falls below the
configured wire break limit, the measured value is declared invalid and, if wire break
diagnostics is enabled, corresponding diagnostics information is generated. When value
status is configured, the analog value is marked as invalid.
With a wire break limit of 3.6 mA, the measured value becomes invalid when the current falls
below 3.6 mA and is marked as valid again when it rises above 3.8 mA.
There is no hysteresis for a wire break limit of 1.185 mA.

34 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Parameters
Measuring type/range
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog input module has the following measuring ranges:

Disabled - -
Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA 15 bits + sign
Current (2-wire transducer) 4 to 20 mA HART 15 bits + sign
An overview of the measuring range as well as overflow, overrange, etc., can be found in the
section Analog value representation (Page 71) and in Analog Value Processing function
manual.
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by filtering. Smoothing can be set in 4 levels.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 5-1 Smoothing of the analog value

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 35
Parameters

The frequency of the AC supply system may interfere with the measured value, in particular
in low voltage ranges. .
Number of HART preamble bytes

Specifies the number of preamble bytes that the module prefixes to each HART frame to be
sent (FFH). These bytes are used for synchronizing the frames.
Number of HART repetitions

Specifies the number of HART frame repetitions. If the analog module receives no response
or receives a response with error to a HART frame sent to the field device, the frame is
accordingly repeated, i.e., resent to the field device.
Because HART communication of the individual channels uses multiplex operation, faulty
HART frames affect the other channels when the number of HART repetitions is high. In
other words, the other channels are processed less frequently.
Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with supply voltage infeed is located in this slot (see system
See also
Parameters of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART (Page 31)

36 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Parameters
5.1.3 HART mapping parameters

The HART mapping parameters allow a maximum of 4 HART variables to be configured
(mapped) in the address space of the module.
Each HART variable occupies 5 bytes of input data. As soon as you configure (map) at least
one HART variable in the input address space, the addresses for all four variables are
occupied (20 bytes).
With PROFIBUS DP GSD configuration with HART variables, the HART variables cannot be
directly configured. The four secondary variables are supplied in ascending channel order in
the address space of the module.
When required, this can be changed using data record 140; see section Parameter
assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters (Page 57).
Parameters
Table 5- 3 Configurable HART mapping parameters
Parameter Value range Default Configuration in With GSD file

RUN PROFIBUS DP
Variable 0 Channel 0…3 0 Yes 0
Type • Non / Cir Non / Cir Yes Secondary
• Primary
• Secondary
• Tertiary
• Quartenary
• Primary
• Secondary
• Tertiary
• Quartenary
• Primary
• Secondary
• Tertiary
• Quartenary
• Primary
• Secondary
• Tertiary
• Quartenary

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 37
Parameters

38 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Configuring/address space 6
6.1 Configuring
You configure the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module
● In the TIA Portal V13.0.1 or higher
● With STEP 7 V5.5 + SP4 or higher (HSP0263)
● Using GSD/GSDML
The GSD files for the ET 200SP Distributed I/O System can be downloaded from the
Internet:
GSDML (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/57138621)
GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/ 73016883)
● Without value status and without HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART")
● Without value status, with HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART, 4 variables")
● With value status and without HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART, QI")
● With value status, with HART variables ("AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART, 4 variables, QI")
With GSD/GSDML configuration, you must select one of the possible configurations directly.
With STEP 7 configuration (TIA Portal or HW Config), the configuration occurs indirectly via
the parameters.
Restrictions
● The module can be operated only downstream of a Standard IM or High-Feature IM.
● Value status is not available for a PROFIBUS DP station.
● Downstream of a Standard IM (V1.1), the module can be operated only in the "Without
value status and without HART variables" configuration. The module downstream of a
Standard IM (V1.1) is not available in the TIA Portal.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 39
Configuring/address space
6.2 Address space
6.2 Address space

The following figure shows the allocation of the address space of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA
HART module for a configuration with value status (Quality Information, QI) and with HART
variables.
The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status has been enabled or
the corresponding configuration has been configured from the GSDML.
The addresses for the HART variables are only available if configuration/parameter
assignment of the HART variables has been carried out or the corresponding configuration
has been configured from the GSD/GSDML.
If the HART variables are configured and there is no value status configuration or parameter
assignment, the HART variables begin directly after the analog values, thus starting from IB
x + 8.
Table 6- 1 Address space of analog input module AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
IB x+9 Value Configured HART variable 0

….
IB x+12
IB x+13 Quality code
….
IB x+17
….
IB x+22
IB Quality code
x+23
….
IB x+27

40 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
6.2 Address space

input address space. Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to the corresponding channel. The
provide information about the validity of the analog value, namely irrespective of the
diagnostics enables.
Bit = 1: There is no error in the analog value or the analog value acquisition of the channel.
Bit = 0: The analog value of the channel cannot be correctly acquired.
The channel is disabled; there is a fault in the wiring or module.
Evaluating HART variables

If you have configured (mapped) HART variables for the analog module, four HART
variables with 5 bytes each are stored in the input address space.
Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte real value and a quality code byte. The quality code
describes the validity of the value; see section HART variables (Page 28) .

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 41
6.2 Address space

42 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
LED displays
The figure below shows the status and error displays of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
analog input module.
④ PWR (green)

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 43

with diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms (Page 46).
Table 7- 1 Status display of the channel status/channel fault LEDs
LEDs Meaning
Channel Channel
status fault
Channel disabled or module switched off
Off Off
Channel enabled and no channel diagnostics present
On Off
Channel enabled and channel diagnostics present
Off On
Channel enabled and only HART channel diagnostics present
On On
Table 7- 2 DIAG LED error display
DIAG LED Meaning

Backplane bus supply of the ET 200SP is not OK or switched off
Off
Flashes
On
Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics, at least one error is current-
ly present
Flashes
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

44 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
7.2 Interrupts
7.2 Interrupts
The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt for the following events:
● Channel/component temporarily unavailable
● Short-circuit / Overload of encoder voltage
● Wire break
● Error
● No supply voltage L+
● HART communication error or HART field device error

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 45

A diagnostic alarm is generated for each detected diagnostic event. The DIAG LED flashes
on the module.
There is additionally a channel-specific display of the diagnostics through the corresponding
channel fault/channel status LEDs.
The diagnostic alarms can, for example, be read from the diagnostic buffer of the CPU or be
displayed in STEP 7 using the Online and Diagnostics view. You can evaluate the error
codes with the user program.
Table 7- 4 Diagnostic alarms, their meaning and how to deal with them
Diagnostic alarm Error Meaning Remedy

code
Chan- 1FH • Update of the firmware is being
nel/component performed or has been can-
temporarily una- celed. The module does not
vailable
perform any measurements
during this time.
Short-circuit Over- 10EH • Short-circuit of the encoder • Correct the module/encoder
load of encoder supply to M tuning
voltage *
• Short-circuit of the input to the
encoder supply
• Overload of the encoder supply
Wire break 6H • Impedance of encoder circuit • Use a different encoder type
too high. or modify the wiring, for ex-
• Wire break between the mod- ample, using cables with a
ule and sensor larger cross-section
• Channel not connected (open) • Connect the cable

• Disable diagnostics
• Connect the sensor con-
tacts
High limit violated 7H • The analog value is above the • Correct the module/encoder
overrange. tuning
Low limit violated 8H • The analog value is below the • Correct the module/encoder
underrange. tuning
Error 9H • Internal module error occurred. • Replace module
No supply voltage 11H • No or insufficient supply volt- • Check wiring of the supply
age L+ voltage L+ on the BaseUnit

46 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA

code
HART communi- 141H • HART field device is not re- • Check the process wiring
cation error sponding • Correct the parameter as-
• Timing error signment
• HART field device has not • Set output current of ≥4 mA
understood the sent command • Increase the number of
(1st status byte) assigned repetitions
HART primary 142H • Incorrect parameters in the • Check the parameter as-
variable outside HART field device signment of the HART de-
the range vice
• HART field device is at "Prima-
ry variable outside the limits" in • Correct the simulation
simulation mode • Check whether the correct
• Incorrect measuring point transducer is connected
• Primary variable assigned
outside the limits
HART analog 143H The output current of the HART
output current field device is saturated:
saturated
• Incorrect parameters in the
HART field device
• HART field device is set to a
measured value that is too high
in simulation mode
• Incorrect measuring point
HART fixed ana- 144H The output current of the HART
log output current field device is set to a fixed value:
setting
• Incorrect parameters in the
HART field device
• HART field device is set to a
measured value that is too high
in simulation mode
HART secondary 149H • Incorrect parameters in the
variable outside HART field device
the limits
• HART field device is at "Non-
primary variable outside the
limits" in simulation mode
• Non-primary variable assigned
outside the limits
HART additional 145H • The identifier for "Additional • Read status using HART
status information status information available" of command 48 and eliminate
available the HART field device was set error/cause, if necessary
in the HART device status (in
the 2nd status byte).

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 47

code
HART configura- 146H • The identifier for "Parameter • If you do not want a diag-
tion changed reassignment" of the HART nostic interrupt to be trig-
(reset again auto- field device was set in the gered for parameter
matically by the HART device status (in the 2nd reassignment, the diagnos-
module after ap- status byte). tic interrupt must not be en-
proximately 1 abled.
minute)
Malfunction of the 147H • The field device signals a mal- • Read status using HART
HART field device function in the HART device command 48 and eliminate
status (in the 2nd status byte) error/cause, if necessary
• Replace the field device
* Short-circuit of the encoder supply to ground and/or of the input signal to the encoder supply of a
channel can have a temporary effect on other channels (duration < 0.5 s). This means the short-
circuit diagnostic information can also be signaled on unaffected channels and/or the measured
value can be affected temporarily.

48 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
8.1 Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Technical specifications of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
Product type designation AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
General information
HART support Rev. 5 to Rev. 7
Product functions
I&M data Yes, I&M0 to I&M3
Firmware update capability Yes
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of V13 + SP1
version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 + SP4 + HSP0263
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD V3.0
Supply voltage
Rated value (DC) 24 V / 110 mA
Input current
Encoder supply
24 V encoder supply Yes
Output current per channel (4 channels), max. 20 mA; max. 50 mA per channel for a dura-
tion < 10 s
Load resistance of the encoder > 750 Ω for L+ = 24 V

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 49
6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 0.65 W; without encoder
Without value status and without HART variables 8 bytes
With value status and without HART variables 9 bytes
Without value status, with HART variables 28 bytes
With value status, with HART variables 29 bytes
Analog inputs
(destruction limit)
Current 4 mA to 20 mA Yes, 15 bits + sign
Input resistance (4 to 20 mA) 280 Ω; + approx. 0.35 V diode forward volt-
age
Cable length
Yes, channel-by-channel
Interference suppression for interference frequency f1 10 / 50 / 60, channel-by-channel
in Hz
Configurable Yes (none, weak, medium, strong), channel-
by-channel
Errors/accuracies
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in relation ± 0.05 %
to input range), (+/-)
Influence of a HART signal modulated on the input signal in relation to input range
Error with integration time 16.6 ms ± 0.05%
Error with integration time 20 ms ± 0.04%
Error with integration time 100 ms ± 0.02%

50 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
6ES7134-6TD00-0CA1
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/- 1 %), f1 = interference frequency
nominal value of the input range), min.
Interrupts/diagnostic/status information
Diagnostic alarms
Wire break Yes; channel-by-channel
Short-circuit Yes; channel-by-channel, short-circuit of the
encoder supply to ground or short-circuit of
an input to the encoder supply
Underflow/overflow Yes; channel-by-channel
HART Yes; channel-by-channel
For channel diagnostics Yes, red LED
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the No
electronics
Isolation, designed for basic isolation between chan- 60 V AC / 75 V DC
nels and backplane bus
Isolation
Isolation tested with 500 V AC or 707 V DC (type test)
Horizontal mounting position, min. 0℃
Horizontal mounting position, max. 60℃
Vertical mounting position, min. 0℃
Vertical mounting position, max. 50℃
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 73 mm
Depth 58 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 51

52 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Parameter data records 9
You have the option of reassigning parameters for individual channels of the module and for
the mapping of HART variables in RUN without affecting the other channels.

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module.
● Channel/technology parameters using data record 128
● The HART mapping using data record 140.
The parameters assigned with STEP 7 are not changed permanently in the CPU, which
means the parameters assigned with STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.

online help.
Parameters
Only the values specified in each case in the following are permitted. Values that are not
listed are rejected by the analog module.
Each parameter data record is checked by the analog module. If an incorrect parameter is
detected, the complete data record is discarded and the parameters of the analog module
remain unchanged.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 53
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters
9.1 Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology

parameters

Data record 128 has a length of 42 bytes and contains the channel/technology parameters of
all four channels (10 bytes per channel).
The parameters are divided into parameters that influence the actual analog value
acquisition, diagnostic enables, and basic parameters of HART communication.
You can use data records 131 to 134 to assign and change additional parameters and
HART-specific settings. See section HART-specific settings (Page 62).
Header information

54 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Parameters
All unused bits and the bits or bytes marked with "reserved" must be set to zero.
You enable a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1" or the appropriate value.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 55
* x = 2 + (channel number * 10); with channel number 0 ….3
Figure 9-3 Structure of bytes x to x+39 for channels 0 to 3

56 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping

parameters

Data record 140 has a total length of 12 bytes.
You can use the parameters of data record 140 to configure/map up to four HART variables
of the individual channels in the input address space of the module, provided the
corresponding configuration is selected; see section 6.1 "Configuring".
Header information

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 57
9.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the HART mapping parameters
Parameters
The following figure shows the parameter assignment of the four HART variables 0...3.
* x = 4 + (HART variable * 2); with HART variable 0….3
Figure 9-5 Parameters
The variable identifiers 0 = non and 15 = CiR produce the same behavior for the
AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module. HART variables are not configured or mapped;
that is, the corresponding memory area in the input address area remains unallocated.

58 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART operating data records 10
Reading/writing data in RUN
HART operating data records are transferred to the module with the "WRREC" instruction
and read from the module with the "RDREC" instruction.
Errors during the transfer are indicated at output parameter STATUS of the "WRREC" or
"RDREC".
The following HART operating data records are available:
Data record Description Length Writable Readable

number (bytes)
80 HART request Channel 0 240 Yes Yes
81 HART response Channel 0 240 No Yes
121 HART variables 80 No Yes
131 HART parameters Channel 0 8 Yes Yes
148 HART directory 17 No Yes
149 HART feature data 3 No Yes

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 59
HART operating data records
10.1 HART directory
10.1 HART directory
Structure of the HART directory
Byte Meaning Comment

0 Profile Revision Number = 2, 0 (Revision 2.0)
1
2 Index of Client Management = 255 (not relevant)
3 Number of Clients =1
4 Number of Channels =4
5 Write Read Index Offset = 1 (The response to a request data record
is made with the data record number of the
request data record + 1)
6 Index of HMD Feature Parameter = 149
7 Index of HMD Module Parameter = 255 (not relevant)
8 Start Index of Burst Buffer Area = 255 (not relevant)
9+n Index of HMD Channel Parameter (Chan- = 131+n
nel n)
9+n+4 Index of HART Client Channel Message = 80+(2*n)
Data The HART request data records cannot be
configured. Data records starting from data
record number 80 (80, 82, 84, 86) are
used.
10.2 HART feature data
Structure of the HART feature data

0 Byte 0 = 0x62
Bit1 = 1: "Parameter check result is given with a read response"
Bit5 = 1: "Compact format is supported"
1 Byte 1 =0
2 Max Length = 240 (maximum length of the HART request data records)
Data Unit

60 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
10.3 HART variable data record
10.3 HART variable data record

The AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module supports a maximum of 4 HART variables
per channel that are read cyclically, provided this is supported by the connected field device.
These 16 HART variables are are made available in a readable manner in HART variable
data record 121.
Each HART variable consists of a 4-byte real value and a quality code byte. See section
4.4.1 "Quality code".
Structure of the HART variable data record
Byte Meaning
Channel 0
0…3 Value Primary Variable (PV)
4 Quality code
5…8 Value Secondary Variable (SV)
9 Quality code
10…13 Value Tertiary (TV)
14 Quality code
15…18 Value Quartenary (QV)
19 Quality code
Channel 1
20…39 HART variables same as for Channel 0
Channel 2
Channel 3
If HART is not enabled or the respective HART variable is not supplied from the connected
field device, the corresponding variable = 0 and the QC = 0x37 (initialization value from the
analog module).

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 61
10.4 HART-specific settings

The HART communication is available using standard parameter assignment (see section
9.1 "Parameter assignment and structure of the channel/technology parameters").
Additional HART-specific settings can be specified on a channel-specific basis using data
records 131 to 134.
The parameters assigned with STEP 7 are not changed permanently in the CPU, which
means the parameters assigned with STEP 7 are valid again after a restart.
Each parameter reassignment of the analog module resets the HART-specific settings back
to the initial values from parameter data record 128.
Where there is no supply voltage L+, the module does not assume the HART-specific
settings.

0 131
1 132
2 133
3 134

62 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Structure of the HART-specific settings
Figure 10-1 Settings

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 63
10.5 HART request and response data records

HART commands are processed on a channel-specific basis via a separate command
interface with one request data record and one response data record in each case.

Request to the field device Response from the field device
0 80 81
1 82 83
2 84 85
3 86 87
Structure of request data records 80, 82, 84, 86

0 Request control
1 Number of preamble bytes 5…20
2…239 Communication data according to HART specifi-
cation
Coding "Request control":
Bit 0…1: Reserved = 0
Bit 2: 0 = Parameters are not checked
Bit 3...4: Reserved = 0
Bit 5: 0 = Transparent format *

1 = Compact format
Bit 6: 1 = Enable SHC mode **
Bit 7: 0 = HART Request
* HART commands are processed by the analog module in transparent message format and
in compact message format. However, the response data from the module is always made
available in transparent message format.
** Processing of a sequence of HART commands as an SHC sequence affects all other
channels with HART enabled. See section 4.3 "HART command interface", SHC sequence.

64 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Structure of response data records 81, 83, 85, 87
In case of response error

0 Response control
1 HART group error display
2 Protocol error
3…239 Response data according to HART specifi- Only present when "Response result" = 6
cation = "Error, with data"
In case of response error

0 Response control
1 HART group error display
2…239 Response data according to HART specifi- Only present when "Response result" = 4
cation = "Successful, with data"
Coding "Response control":
Bits 0-2: Response result (processing status)

0 = Inactive
1 = Inactive (reserved)
2 = Waiting
3 = Waiting, executing
4 = Successful, with data
5 = Successful, without data
6 = Error, with data
7 = Error, without data
Bit 3: 0 = Burst mode not active;
Bit 4: 0 = Response data come directly from the
HART device
Bit 5: 0 = Response data in transparent message
format
Bit 6: 0 = SHC mode not active
1 = SHC mode active
Bit 7: 0 = HART response

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 65
Coding "HART group error display"
Bit number Meaning Explanation

0 Additional status information (2nd HART status byte) You obtain additional status
available information, if required, with HART command 48.
1 HART communication error The field device has detected a communication error
when receiving the command. The error information
can be found in the 1st HART status byte.
2 Parameter check 0: HMD parameters unchanged
1: Check HMD parameters
3 Reserved Always 0
4…7 HART protocol error during 0: Unspecified error
response 1: HMD error
2: Channel fault
3: Command error
4: Query error
5: Response error
6: Query rejected
7: Profile query rejected
8: Manufacturer-specific query rejected
9 - 15: Not used
Coding "HART protocol error during response"
HART proto- Meaning Explanation

col error
during re-
sponse
0 Unspecified error Always 0
1 HMD error 0: Not specified
1: Internal communication error
2: Parameter assignment error
3: HW fault
4: Wait time expired
5: HART timer expired
6…127: Reserved
128...255: Manufacturer-specific
2 Channel fault 0: Not specified
1: Line fault
2: Short-circuit
3: Open line
4: Low current output
5: Parameter assignment error
6…127: Reserved
128…255: Manufacturer-specific

66 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
HART proto- Meaning Explanation

col error
during re-
sponse
3 Command error 0-127: HART protocol,
Bit 7 = Always 0
4 Query error Bit 0 = 0: Reserved
Bit 1 = 1: Receive buffer overflow
Bit 2 = 0: Reserved
Bit 3 = 1: Checksum error
Bit 4 = 1: Framing error
Bit 5 = 1: Overflow error
Bit 6 = 1: Parity error
Bit 7 = 1: Reserved
5 Response error Bit 0 = 1: GAP timeout
Bit 1 = 1: Receive buffer overflow
Bit 2 = 1: Timeout
Bit 3 = 1: Checksum error
Bit 4 = 1: Framing error
Bit 5 = 1: Overflow error
Bit 6 = 1: Parity error
Bit 7 = 1: Reserved
6 Query rejected 0: Unspecified
1: Compact format not supported
2: SHC not supported
3: Impermissible command
4: No resources
5...127: Reserved
128...255: Manufacturer-specific
7 Profile query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported)
8 Manufacturer-specific query 0: Not specified (not supported)
rejected

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 67
Example of HART programming (HART command interface)

For HART channel 0, the command 01 is to be sent in transparent message format to the
HART field device with address "98 CF 38 84 F0".
A positive edge at input 4.0 of a digital input module leads to the writing of the HART
command.
The following assumptions are made:
● The module address of the AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART analog module is 512 (200H).
● The data record is stored in DB80: starting from address 0.0, length of 11 bytes.
● In this example, DB80 (request data record for channel 0) consists of 11 bytes.
STL Explanation
A I 4.0
FP M 101.0
= M 104.0
m2: CALL SFC 58
REQ :=M104.0 Write request
IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID
LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address
RECNUM :=B#16#50 Data record number 80
RECORD :=P#DB80.DBX0.0 BYTE 11 Data record with length of 11 bytes (must corre-
spond to the exact length that is to be trans-
ferred)
RET_VAL :=MW93 RET_VAL of SFC 58 (OK/error/...)
BUSY :=M51.0 Write operation not yet completed
A M 51.0
SPB m2
BE

68 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Table 10- 1 DB80: Transparent message format
Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex)

0 00 Req_Control
(00 = Transparent message format.
40 = Transparent message format with SHC sequence)
1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14)
2 82 Start character
(02 = Short Frame with command 0)
(82 = Long Frame with other commands)
3 98 Address
4 CF (with command 0, the address is exactly 1 byte long and
has the value 0.)
5 38
6 84
7 F0
8 01 Command (CMD)
9 00 Length in bytes
10 98 Checksum (CHK)
(calculated starting from byte 2 "Start character" up to the
next to last byte)
A HART command can also be sent in compact message format. In this case, the data that
is transferred via DB 80 is reduced to 4 bytes.
Table 10- 2 DB80: Compact message format
Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex)

0 20 Req_Control
(20 = Compact message format.
60 = Compact message format with SHC sequence)
1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14)
2 01 Command (CMD)
3 00 Length in bytes
You can learn when the response from the field device was received by cyclically reading
data record DS81 for HART channel 0. The response is always supplied in transparent
message format.

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 69
Table 10- 3 FC81: Reading of the response to DB81 with SFC 59
STL Explanation
m3: CALL SFC 59
REQ :=1 Read request
IOID :=B#16#54 Address range ID
LADDR :=W#16#200 Module address of the HART-AI
RECNUM :=B#16#51 Data record number 81
RECORD :=P#DB81.DBX0.0 BYTE 75 Data record
RET_VAL :=MW100 RET_VAL of SFC 59 (OK/error/...)
BUSY :=M49.1 Read operation not yet completed
A M 49.1
SPB m3
BE
The program part A M 49.1 to SPB m3 is only required if reading is to occur synchronously.
As long as "0x03" is in byte 0 of DB81, the response has not been received from the field
device. As soon as bit 2 = 1 is set in byte 0, there is positive response data available from
the field device that you can evaluate.
In case of a response data error, see the "HART group error display" table in byte 1 or the
"HART protocol errors during response" table in byte 2 of the response of the field device.

70 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Analog value representation 11
Table 11- 1 Resolution of the analog values
Resolution in bits including sign Values Analog value

16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001
Representation / Value range

The table below contains the decimal and hexadecimal values (codings) of the possible
current measuring ranges.
Table 11- 2 Current measuring range 4 to 20 mA / 4…20 mA HART

Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA
27649 6C01
20736 5100 16 mA
1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 < 1.185 mA Underflow

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 71
Analog value representation
11.1 Representation of input ranges
11.1 Representation of input ranges

Table 11- 3 Bipolar input ranges

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow
Table 11- 4 Unipolar input ranges

ue value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

72 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
11.2 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges

measuring ranges.
Table 11- 5 Current measuring range ±20 mA

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA
1 1 723.4 nA
0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -15 mA
-27648 9400 -20 mA
-32512 8100 -23.52 mA
-32768 8000 <-23.52 mA Underflow
Table 11- 6 Current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

27649 6C01
20736 5100 15 mA 16 mA
1 1 723.4 nA 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0 0 0 mA 4 mA
-1 FFFF Underrange
-4864 ED00 -3.52 mA 1.185 mA
-32768 8000 <-3.52 mA <1.185 mA Underflow
* For measuring type "2-wire transducer", negative values are not possible for the range "0 to

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 73

74 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
Index
2 C
2-wire connection, 16 Channel fault LED, 44
Channel parameters, 31, 54
Channel parameters, 31, 54
4 Channel status LED, 44
Command interface, 26, 64
4-wire connection, 17
Commissioning, 25
Communication, 62
Configuration, 25
A
HART variable, 28
Address assignment, 28 Conventions, 5
Address space, 40
AI 4xI 2-wire 4…20mA HART
Address space, 40 D
Measuring ranges, 35
Data record 128
Header information, 54
Parameters, 55
Data record 128, 54
Accessories, 14
Data record 140
Channel parameters, 31
Header information, 57
Commissioning, 25
Parameters, 58
Configuration, 25
Data record 140, 57
Functions, 14
Data records, 26
Parameters, 31, 31
Device status, 23
Properties, 14
DIAG LED, 44
Technology parameters, 31
Diagnostic alarm, 46
Terminal assignment, 15
Diagnostic interrupt, 45
Documentation
Diagnostic interrupt, 45
Validity, 5
Diagnostic alarm, 46
E
Technical specifications, 49
Error displays, 43
Error management, 25
B
BaseUnit, 15
F
Block diagram, 18
Burst mode, 23 Fast mode, 23, 23
Feature data, 60
Field devices
Parameter reassignment, 25

Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA 75
Index
H P
HART Parameter reassignment, 25
Applications, 19 Parameters, 31, 31
Command, 64 Polarity reversal, 18
Command interface, 26, 68 PWR LED, 44
Commands, 21
Communication, 21, 62
Definition, 19 Q
Device status, 23
Quality code, 28
Directory, 60
Quality code
Error management, 25
Revision 5, 29
Evaluating variables, 41
Quality code
Fast mode, 23
Revision 7, 30
Feature data, 60
Mapping parameters, 37
Operating data records, 59
R
Parameter assignment tool, 24
Principle of operation, 20 Request data record, 64
Programming, 68 Response data record, 65
Protocol, 19, 22
Settings, 63
Signal, 20 S
System environment, 24
SHC sequence, 27
Variable data record, 61
SIMATIC PDM configuration tool, 24
Variables, 28
Smoothing, 32, 35
HART variables
Status indications, 43
Configuring, 28
Supply voltage, 18
HCF, 19
System environment, 24
I T
Interference frequency suppression, 32, 36
Technology parameters, 31, 54
Terminal assignment, 15
L
LED displays, 43 V
Value status
Evaluating, 41
M
Variable data record, 61
Main entry
Block diagram, 18
Mapping parameters, 37, 57
Measuring range, 35
O
Operating data records, 59

76 Manual, 11/2014, A5E35098013-AA
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

Analog input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-___________________
Preface
wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) ___________________

2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF
(6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1) ___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
02/2014
A5E03573289-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E03573289-AD Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Pin assignment ............................................................................................................................ 10
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram ........................................................................................................... 12
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges................................................................................ 13
4.2 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 18
4.4 Scalable measuring range .......................................................................................................... 28
4.4.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 30
4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235 ......................................................................................................... 31
4.5 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 34
5.1 Status and error display .............................................................................................................. 35
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 37
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ........................................................................... 47
A.3 Switchable wire break check ....................................................................................................... 61
B.1 Representation of input ranges ................................................................................................... 63
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges .................................................. 64
B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors .................................................... 65
B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors ............................................................... 66
B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples .................................................................. 69

4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Introduction
automation system.
Overview of documentation for analog input module AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

The following table shows additional documentation that you need when using the
AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF analog input module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for analog input module AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

System description ET 200SP distributed I/O system • Application planning
• Installation
system manual • Wiring
• Commissioning
Designing interference- Designing interference-free • Basics
free controllers controllers
com/WW/view/en/59193566) • Lightning protection
function manual
Analog value processing Function manual • Basics of analog technology
Analog value processing (wiring, processing, installation
(http://support.automation.siemens. technology)
operational limits
System diagnostics
com/WW/view/en/59192926) hardware/software

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 5

Amendments and special Product information on Current information not yet
features of the ET 200SP documentation of the ET 200SP documented in the system manuals,
distributed I/O system distributed I/O system function manuals, or product
(http://support.automation.siemens. manuals.
SIMATIC manuals

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 7
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Resistor measurement type can be set per channel
● Thermal resistor (RTD) measurement type can be set per channel
● Thermocouple (TC) measurement type can be set per channel
● Configurable diagnostics for each channel
per channel)
● Automatic compensation of the line resistance with 3-wire connection
● Firmware update

Calibration in runtime 1 as of V2.00.00
Value status (PROFINET IO only) 1 as of V1.01.00
Scalable measuring range 1 as of V2.00.00
Selectable conductor resistance for 2-wire connection 1 as of V2.00.00
Switchable wire break check 1 as of V2.00.00
Accessories
● Labeling strips

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Product overview
2.1 Properties
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 9
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF
Pin assignment for AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF (6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1)

Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Notes BaseUnits1 Color
identification label
1 M0+ 2 M1+ • Mn+: Measuring A0 ---
3 M2+ 4 M3+ line positive, A1
5 M0- 6 M1- channel n
7 M2- 8 M3- • Mn-: Measuring line
negative, channel n
9 IC0+ 10 IC1+
• ICn+: Constant
11 IC2+ 12 IC3+
current line
13 IC0- 14 IC1-
positive, channel n
15 IC2- 16 IC3-
• ICn-: Constant
L+ 24 VDC M M current line
negative, channel n
RTD 2-wire connection RTD 3-wire connection RTD 4-wire connection TC
1 Usable BaseUnit types, can be identified by the last two digits of the article number. See also "ET 200SP distributed I/O
system" system manual.
Note

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Wiring
3.1 Pin assignment
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 11
Wiring
Figure 3-1 Schematic circuit diagram AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
The following table describes the measuring range and the temperature coefficients you can
configure for each measurement type:
Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient

Deactivated – –
Resistor (2-, 3-, 4-wire connection) 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / –
3 kΩ / 6 kΩ
Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC –
Thermal resistor RTD Climatic / Standard Cu 0.004271
(3-wire connection) Cu 10
Thermal resistor RTD Climatic / Standard Pt 0.00385 /
(2, 3, 4-wire connection) Pt 100 Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 200 Pt 0.003902 /
Pt 500 Pt 0.00392 /
Pt 1000 Pt 0.00385055
Climatic / Standard Ni 0.00618 /
Ni 100 Ni 0.00672
Ni 120
Ni 200
Ni 500
Ni 1000
Climatic2 / Standard2 Ni 0.005
Ni 1000
Thermocouple (TC) Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R,
B, T, C, U, TXK (acc. to GOST)
Voltage ±50 mV / ±80 mV /
±250 mV / ±1 V
1 The preset temperature coefficients are valid for Europe.
2 For sensors LG-Ni 1000 from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stäfa).

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 13
Special features when using Cu10 sensors

● Choose "Thermal resistor (3-wire connection)" and "Cu10" in the parameter assignment.
● Wire the Cu10 sensor into the 3-wire connection technology.
● During operation, automatic, internal compensation of the line resistance of the missing
measuring line takes place.
Note
To ensure optimum line compensation with Cu10, please observe the following:
• An accurate measured value is only attained if the cable resistance of the positive
constant current line to the Cu10 sensor and the cable resistance of the negative
measuring line are identical in value.
• Recommendation: Keep the measuring line as short as possible.
• Different resistance values may also occur due to the connection method used.

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Special features when using PTC resistors

PTCs are suitable for monitoring temperature and/or as thermal protection devices of
complex drives or transformer windings.
● Choose "Thermal resistor (2-wire)" and "PTC" in the parameter assignment.
● Connect the PTC to the 2-wire connection technology.
● Use the PTC resistors, type A (PTC thermistor) in accordance with DIN/VDE 0660,
part 302.
● If "Underflow" diagnostic is enabled, a "Low limit violated" diagnostic is generated for
resistance values < 18 Ω, indicating a short-circuit.
● Sensor data for the PTC resistor:
Table 4- 2 Using PTC resistors
Property Technical Comment

specifications
Switching points Behavior with rising temperature
< 550 Ω Normal range:
• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)
550 Ω to 1650 Ω Prewarning range:
> 1650 Ω Response range:
Behavior with falling temperature
Reaction to short-circuit
< 18 Ω • SIMATIC S7: Bit 7 (IB x+1) = "1", Bit 0 = "0" and
Bit 2 = "0"
(RRT-5) °C Max. 550 Ω TNF = Rated response temperature of the sensor
(RRT+5) °C min. 1330 Ω (according to DIN/VDE 0660)
(RRT+15) °C min. 4000 Ω
Measuring voltage/ Max. 7.5 V1
voltage at the PTC
1 Below 23 kΩ

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 15
Figure 4-1 Assignment in the process image input (PII)
Notes on programming
● Bits 0+2 are relevant for evaluation in the process image input. You can monitor, for
example, the temperature of a motor using bits 0+2.
● Bits 0+2 in the process image input cannot be saved. During parameter assignment, take
into consideration that a motor, for example, starts up in a controlled manner (via an
acknowledgment).
● Bits 0+2 can never be set at the same time; they are set one after the other.
NOTICE
No measurement is possible in the following cases:
• When I/O modules are pulled out
• When supply voltage to the I/O module fails
• When there is a wire break or short-circuit in the measuring lines
Therefore, always evaluate the diagnostics entries of the AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF for
safety reasons.

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Example
The diagram shows the temperature curve and the associated switching points.
Figure 4-2 Temperature curve with prewarning range
See also
Technical specifications (Page 40)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 17
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

parameters to the module by means of data records, see section Parameter assignment and
structure of parameter data record (Page 52). The following parameter settings are possible:

STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Missing supply
• Enable
voltage L+
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Yes Channel Module
Reference
• Enable
junction
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable

18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
4.2 Parameters

STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Type/range of • Deactivated Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
measurement (4-wire connection)
• Voltage ±50 mV Pt 100 standard
• Voltage ±80 mV range
• Voltage ±250 mV
• Voltage ±1 V
Resistor
(2-, 3-, 4-wire connection)
• 150 Ω
• 300 Ω
• 600 Ω
• 3 kΩ
• 6 kΩ
Type/range of Resistor (2-wire connection) Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
measurement PTC (4-wire connection)
Pt 100 standard
range
Type/range of Thermal resistor Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
measurement (2, 3, 4-wire connection) (4-wire connection)
Pt 100 standard
• Pt 100 climatic range
range
Thermal resistor
(2, 3, 4-wire connection)
• Pt 100 standard range

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 19
4.2 Parameters

STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Pt 100 standard
• Ni 100 climatic range
range
Thermal resistor
• Ni 100 standard range
Pt 100 standard
• LG Ni 1000 climatic range
range
Thermal resistor
• LG Ni 1000 standard
range
Thermal resistor (3-wire
connection)
• Cu 10 climatic range
• Cu 10 standard range
Type/range of Thermocouple Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
• Type B (PtRh-PtRh)
Pt 100 standard
• Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) range
• Type E (NiCr-CuNi)
• Type R (PtRh-Pt)
• Type S (PtRh-Pt)
• Type J (Fe-CuNi)
• Type L (Fe-CuNi)
• Type T (Cu-CuNi)
• Type K (NiCr-NiAl)
• Type U (Cu-CuNi)
• Type C (WRe-WRe)
• Type TXK

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
4.2 Parameters

STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Temperature • Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.00385055 Yes Channel Channel
coefficient
• Pt 0.003916
• Pt 0.003902
• Pt 0.00392
• Pt 0.00385
• Ni 0.00618
• Ni 0.00672
• LG-Ni 0.005
• Cu 0.00427
Temperature • Degrees Celsius Degrees Celsius Yes Channel Module
unit
• Degrees Fahrenheit
• Kelvin
Reference • No reference channel mode No reference Yes Channel Channel
junction 4 channel mode
• Reference channel of the
module
• Internal reference junction
• Reference channel of
group 0 to 3
• Fixed reference
temperature
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong
Interference • 60 Hz 50 Hz Yes Channel Channel
frequency
• 50 Hz2
suppression 3
• 16.6 Hz
Scalable • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
measuring
• Enable
range
Measuring • 2 decimal places 2 decimal places Yes Channel -
range
• 3 decimal places
resolution
Measuring • Value within the nominal 0 Yes Channel -
range center range of the measuring
range
Conductor 0 to 50000 mΩ 0 Yes Channel -
resistance 5

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 21
4.2 Parameters

STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Hardware • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
interrupt high
• Enable
limit 1 3
High limit 1 3 • Value 8500 Yes Channel -

interrupt low
• Enable
limit 1 3
Low limit 1 3 • Value -2000 Yes Channel -

interrupt high
• Enable
limit 2 3

interrupt low
• Enable
limit 2 3
module
group
1 Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+: Detection per module or alarm per channel
2 Interference frequency suppression: Interfering signals at 400 Hz are automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using data
4 Only for configuration with PROFIBUS GSD file: The set reference junction is used with the additional parameter "Kx
Reference junction activated" in the case of "Enable". In the case of "Disable", "No reference channel mode" is used for
RTD and "Fixed reference temperature" is used for TC.
5 For 2-wire connection only
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.

22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
4.3 Explanation of Parameters

Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+.
Diagnostics: Reference junction

Enabling of the reference junction diagnostics if the reference temperature of the reference
junction needs to be determined for the TC channel being operated.
Reference junction using the PROFINET GSD file

A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of
group 0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the
TC measurement, if this has the parameter setting "Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic range
Degrees Celsius".
A possible parameter assignment is represented below:
Table 4- 4 RTD channel
Setting Description
No reference channel mode The temperature value at channel 0 can be used as a reference
value for the entire module.
Reference channel of group 0, The channel acts as a transmitter for the reference junction
1, 2, 3 temperature of a group. The distribution is performed via the
interface module.
Table 4- 5 TC channel
Setting Description
Reference channel of the The corresponding TC channel uses channel 0 of the same module
module as the reference junction temperature. This must be configured as
"Thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic range Degrees Celsius" and
"No reference channel mode"; otherwise, Diagnostics: Reference
junction is triggered.
Internal reference junction The reference junction temperature is read by an internal
temperature sensor on the BaseUnit. Diagnostics: Reference
junction is triggered if there is an incorrect BaseUnit type.
Reference channel of group 0, The channel acts as a receiver for the reference junction
1, 2, 3 temperature of a group.
Fixed reference temperature The reference temperature of the thermocouple is set to 0 °C. As a
result, no temperature compensation is performed.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 23
Note
Shared Device and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3"
If the transmitter and receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned
to different IO controllers, then both IO controllers must be performing data exchange with
the IO device to ensure error-free operation of the temperature compensation.
Reference junction using the PROFIBUS GSD file

A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of
group 0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the
Degrees Celsius".
The set temperature unit (e.g. Degrees Celsius) is valid for the entire module with
temperature compensation "Reference channel of the module" and "Reference channel of
group 0, 1, 2, 3".
Setting Description
interface module.
Setting Description
Channel x Reference junction • Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting
activated "No reference channel mode".
• Enable: Channel x is configured with the setting selected above.
Setting Description

24 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Setting Description
Setting Description
activated "Fixed reference temperature".
Enabling of the diagnostics if the measured value falls below the underrange.

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is insufficient for
measurement at the correspondingly assigned input.
Temperature coefficient
The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. In Europe,
only one value is used per sensor type (default value).
The temperature coefficient (α value) indicates by how much the resistance of a specific
material changes relatively if the temperature increases by 1 °C.
The other values facilitate a sensor-specific setting of the temperature coefficient and
enhance accuracy.
Temperature unit
Selection between Degrees Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin as the temperature unit for the
selected measuring range.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 25
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed using filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This specification is valid for all
signal changes at the analog input.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 4-3 Smoothing for AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

Suppresses the interferences affecting analog input modules that are caused by the
frequency of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network is likely to have a negative effect on measured
values particularly with measurement in the low voltage range and on thermocouples. With
this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.
Measuring range resolution

Parameters for the measurement type thermal resistor standard and thermocouple.
Allows you to increase the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places for a configurable section of
the measuring range. See the Scalable measuring range (Page 28) section.

26 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Measuring range center

Determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically
spanned. The value must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range. It
is specified in integers.
Maximum / Minimum
Corresponds to overflow / underflow for the scalable measuring range.
Conductor resistance
Parameters for the measurement types resistor and thermal resistor (2-wire connection).
Used to compensate for the conductor resistance without having to interfere with the sensor
wiring.
If the "Conductor resistor" parameter is configured higher than a value 0 mΩ, the module
then automatically uses the factory calibration data.
Hardware interrupt enable

Enabling of a hardware interrupt if the high limit 1/2 or the low limit 1/2 is violated.
Low limit 1/2

Specify a threshold which triggers a hardware interrupt when violated.
High limit 1/2

Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located on this slot
(see system manual ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 27
4.4 Scalable measuring range
Introduction
The scalable measuring range is available for the temperature measuring ranges of thermal
resistors (RTD) standard and thermocouples. The measuring ranges for voltage, resistor and
thermal resistor climatic are not supported.
The scalable measuring range is valid for the following ranges:
● Nominal range
● Underrange
● Overrange
Function
The scalable measuring range is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the
module.
It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable section.
● The "Measuring range resolution" parameter determines the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal
places.
● The "Measuring range center" parameter determines the temperature over which the
scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned.
Value ranges
Table 4- 8 Value ranges
Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Values hex.

2 decimal places 3 decimal places
Overflow >325.11 >32.511 7FFFH
High limit 325.11 32.511 7EFFH
Measuring range center 0 0 0H
Low limit -325.12 -32.512 8100H
Underflow <-325.12 <-32.512 8000H
To obtain an absolute temperature, the measuring range center in the application program
(as offset) must be calculated with the value of the user data of the scalable measuring
range.
The measuring range center is always output in the user data as the value "0". The user data
are correspondingly mapped to the bipolar input ranges in S7 format. Underflow / overflow is
also formed in accordance with the limits of S7.

28 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Rules
● The measuring range center must be within the nominal range of the underlying
measuring range. It is specified in integers.
● The scalable measuring range is spanned symmetrically over the measuring range
center. Depending on the resolution, various value ranges result (①, ②).
● The scalable measuring range is limited by underflow and overflow of the underlying
measuring range:
– It is clipped at the underflow when it falls below the limit.
– It is clipped at the overflow when it exceeds the limit (③).
Example
The following example illustrates the effect of scalable measuring ranges:
① Scalable measuring range with 2 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format

② Scalable measuring range with 3 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format
③ Scalable measuring range which is cut off at the overflow of the underlying measuring range (clipping)
Figure 4-4 Examples of scalable measuring ranges

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 29
4.4.1 Configuration
Requirement
You must select a valid temperature measuring range for configuration.
Configuration
The function is activated using the "Scalable measuring range" parameter.
The following figure shows an example of a configuration in STEP 7:
Figure 4-5 Configuration for the scalable measuring range
Reference
You will find more information on the configuration in the STEP 7 online help.

30 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235
Evaluation in the user program

In the user program, you can evaluate the status and the limits of the scalable measuring
range with data record 235, which may result by reaching underflow/overflow.
Header information
Figure 4-7 Header information of data record 235

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 31
Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameter.
If the corresponding bit is set to "1", the parameter is activated.
* x = 2 + (channel number x 8)
Figure 4-8 Structure of data record 235 - channel parameter byte x to x+7
Description of the parameters
Table 4- 9 Description of the parameters from data record 235
Parameter Description
Scalable measuring range enabled 1 = Function is active for this channel.
Clipping 1 = Scalable measuring range cut off at the overflow /
underflow of the underlying measuring range (see Figure
(Page 29)).
Resolution 2 or 3 decimal places
Measuring range center Temperature in whole °C / °F / K ("working point" for the
scaling)
Overflow/underflow Limits of the scalable measuring range

32 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Example
The following example shows the values for a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard, °C:
Table 4- 10 Example of a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard
Hex. value Dec. value Evaluation of data record 235

00H 0 V0.0
08H 8 8 bytes
03H 3 Scalable measuring range active and clipped (clipping)
02H 2 Resolution: 2 decimal places
02EEH 750 Measuring range center: 750 °C
61A8H 25000 Overflow (Maximum):
250.00 + 750 = 1000.00 °C
Scalable measuring range is clipped at the overflow.
8100H -32512 Underflow (Minimum):
-325.12 + 750 = 424.88 °C

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 33
4.5 Address space
4.5 Address space
Address space of the analog input module AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with value status (Quality
Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value status is
enabled.
Figure 4-9 Address space AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF with value status
Configuration options of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF

Evaluating the value status (as of firmware version V1.01)

the analog module. Bit 0 to 3 in this byte is assigned to one channel and provides
information on the validity of the analog value (0 = value is incorrect).

34 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF:
④ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 35

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status/channel error LED
Table 5- 2 Status and error display of the LED channel status / channel error
LEDs Meaning
Channel deactivated
Off Off
On Off
Off On
On On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

36 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts

You can obtain detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block with
the "RALARM" (read additional interrupt information) instruction and in the STEP 7 online help.
Figure 5-2 OB start information

USI W#16#0001 additional interrupt information for hardware 2
Event B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 37
Diagnostic error interrupt

The module generates a diagnostic error interrupt at the following events:
● Reference channel error
● Error
● Violation of low limit
● Violation of high limit
● Wire break

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and remedies
Diagnostics alarms Error code Meaning Remedy

Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is being performed. –
unavailable Channel 0 applies to the entire module.
The module is currently not performing
any measurements.
The channel is currently being calibrated.
Wire break 6H Resistance of sensor circuit too high Use a different sensor type or modify
sensor
• Connect or deactivate the channel
Violation of high limit1 7H Value lies above the overrange. Correct module/sensor interplay
Wire break2 See Wire break
Violation of low limit1 8H Value lies below the underrange. Correct module/sensor interplay
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred Replace module
(diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies to
the entire module).

38 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD

Parameter assignment 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters • Correct the configuration
error for the channel: Module plugged in does (comparison of preset and actual
not match the configuration. setup).
Incorrect parameter assignment.
• Correct the parameter assignment
(diagnostics wire break set only
with the permitted measuring
ranges).
Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit
Reference channel 15H Reference temperature of the reference • Check BaseUnit type
error (reference junction for the TC channel being
• Select correct reference junction
junction) operated with compensation is invalid.
through parameter assignment3
• Check whether the reference
junction (reference channel of the
group 0, 1, 2, 3) is only assigned
once as the sender in the entire
setup.
Hardware interrupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not Correct the program or the process
be reported because there were too many
pending hardware interrupts.
1 The alarm refers to the diagnostics and depends on the configured measuring range.
2 For resistor and thermal resistor measuring ranges with deactivated diagnostics for "Wire break", this is reported by the
"Violation of high limit" diagnostic.
3 Shared Device and diagnostics "Reference temperature": If the sender and receiver of the reference junction
temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, you may need to download both configurations again in
the case of diagnostics. First download the configuration containing the receiver.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 39
Technical specifications of AI 4×RTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
Product type designation AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF
General information
Product function
Engineering with
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Address area

40 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
Analog inputs
Maximum permissible input voltage for voltage input 30 V
(destruction limit)
Constant measurement current for resistance-type sensor, typ. 2 mA
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times
and additional processing times
(depending on the parameter
assignment of the activated
channels); an additional cycle is
necessary for cable compensation
for a 3-wire connection
Technical unit for temperature measurement can be set Yes
Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 1 MΩ
-250 mV to +250 mV Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (-250 mV to +250 mV) 1 MΩ
Input ranges (rated values), thermocouples
Type B Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type B) 1 MΩ
Type C Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type C) 1 MΩ
Type E Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type E) 1 MΩ
Type J Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type J) 1 MΩ
Type K Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type K) 1 MΩ
Type L Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type L) 1 MΩ
Type N Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type N) 1 MΩ
Type R Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type R) 1 MΩ
Type S Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type S) 1 MΩ
Type T Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type T) 1 MΩ
Type U Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type U) 1 MΩ

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 41
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
Type TXK/TXK(L) according to GOST Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type TXK/TXK(L) according to GOST) 1 MΩ
Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometer
Cu 10 Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Cu 10) 1 MΩ
Ni 100 Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Ni 100) 1 MΩ
LG-Ni 1000 Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (LG-Ni 1000) 1 MΩ
Pt 100 Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Pt 100) 1 MΩ
Input ranges (rated values), resistors
0 to 150 ohms Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (0 to 150 ohms) 1 MΩ
PTC Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (PTC) 1 MΩ
Thermocouple (TC)
Technical unit for temperature measurement °C/°F/K
Temperature compensation
• Reference channel of the module Yes

42 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
• Internal reference junction Yes; with BaseUnit type A1
• Reference channel of the group Yes
• Number of reference channel groups 4; group 0 to 3
• Fixed reference temperature Yes
Resistance thermometer (RTD)

(destruction limit)
Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 200 m; 50 m for thermocouples
Analog value generation
Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit
Basic conversion time including integration time, ms
• Additional processing time for wire break check 2 ms; in the resistance thermometer,
resistor, and thermocouple areas
• Additional wire break check of the power line 2 ms; for 3-/4-wire transducer
(resistance thermometer and
resistor)
Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz
in Hz
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes
Setting: Weak Yes
Setting: Medium Yes
Setting: Strong Yes
Sensors
Wiring the signal transmitters
for resistance measurement with 2-wire connection Yes
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01%; +/- 0.1% for resistance
thermometer and resistor
Temperature error (in relation to input range) ± 0.0009%/K; +/- 0.005%/K for
thermocouple
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in relation to input ± 0.05%
range), (+/-)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 43
6ES7134-6JD00-0CA1
Operational limit in entire temperature range
Resistance in relation to input range, (+/-) ± 0.1%
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-1%),
f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference < rated 70 dB
value of the input range), min.
Interrupts
Diagnostic error interrupt Yes
Limit interrupt Yes; two high limits and two low
limits each
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Overflow/underflow Yes; channel-based
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics Yes
Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC (basic insulation)
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

44 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Operational and basic error limits for resistance thermometers
Error limits for resistance thermometers

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, in relation to input
range)
• Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard ±1.0 K
• Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 climatic ± 0.25 K
• Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000 standard and climatic ± 0.4 K
• Cu 10 ±1.5 K
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation to input range)

• Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard ± 0.6 K
• Cu 10 ±1.0 K

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 45
Operational and basic error limits for thermocouples
Error limits for thermocouples

Operational limit for thermocouples (in the entire temperature range, in ±1.5 K
relation to the input range)
Operational limit for type C thermocouples (in the entire temperature ±7K
range, in relation to the input range)1
Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation ±1 K
to the input range)
Basic error limit for type C thermocouples (operational limit at 25 °C, in ±5K
relation to the input range)
Overall error limits when using internal compensation
• Operational limit (in the entire temperature range at static thermal ± 2.5 K
state, ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min)2
• Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C at static thermal state, ±1.5 K

ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min)3
1 The indicated error limits apply as of the following temperatures:

Thermocouple type T: -200 °C
Thermocouple type K: -100 °C
Thermocouple type B: +700 °C
Thermocouple type N: -150 °C
Thermocouple type E: -150 °C
Thermocouple type R: +200 °C
Thermocouple type S: +100 °C
2 For thermocouple type C: ± 8 K
Dimension drawing

46 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD

Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type / measuring range
Measurement Measuring range Temperature Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor

type coefficient resistance
Voltage ±50 mV, ±80 mV, * * * *
±250 mV, ±1 V
Resistor 150 Ω, 300 Ω, * * * x (with 2-wire
(2, 3, 4-wire 600 Ω, 3 kΩ, 6 kΩ connection)
connection)
Resistor PTC * * * *
(2-wire
connection)
Thermal resistor Pt100 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Reference channel Degrees Celsius x (with 2-wire
(2, 3, 4-wire Pt 0.003916 of group 0, 1, 2, 3 connection)
connection) Pt 0.003902 No reference Degrees Celsius
Pt 0.00392 channel mode
Pt 0.00385 Degrees
Fahrenheit
Pt200 No reference Degrees Celsius
Pt500 channel mode Degrees
Pt1000 climatic Fahrenheit
Ni100 Ni 0.00618
Ni120 Ni 0.00672
Ni200
Ni500
Ni1000 climatic
LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005
climatic

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 47
Measurement Measuring range Temperature Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor

type coefficient resistance
(3-wire Cu 10 climatic Cu 0.00427 *
connection)
Thermal resistor Pt100 Pt 0.00385055 No reference Degrees Celsius x (with 2-wire
(2, 3, 4-wire Pt200 Pt 0.003916 channel mode Degrees connection)
connection) Pt500 Pt 0.003902 Fahrenheit
Pt1000 standard Pt 0.00392
Kelvin
Pt 0.00385
Ni100 Ni 0.00618
Ni120 Ni 0.00672
Ni200
Ni500
Ni1000 standard
LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005
standard
Thermal resistor Cu 10 standard Cu 0.00427 *
(3-wire
connection)
Thermocouple Type B, N, E, R, S, * Reference channel Degrees Celsius *
J, L, T, K, U, C, of the module1 Degrees
TXK Internal reference Fahrenheit
junction Kelvin
Reference channel
of group 0, 1, 2, 32
Fixed reference
temperature

1 Use of "Reference channel of the module":
- Channel 0 must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius".
-For each TC channel of this module that is intended to use channel 0 as reference, "Reference junction" must be set to
"Reference channel of the module".
2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3":
- An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius".
- "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" must be set as the "Reference junction" of this channel.
- There must only be one RTD channel with "Reference junction" = "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" per group 0,
1, 2, 3 and IO device!
- For each TC channel in the IO device that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction" must be set to
"Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3".
- If the reference channel is on channel 0, it can also be used as "Reference channel of the module" at the same time.

48 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type for
PROFINET.
Table A- 2 Dependencies on the measurement type
Measurement type Scalable Measuring range Diagnostics

measuring resolution
Underflow Overflow Wire break Missing Reference
range
supply junction
voltage L+
Voltage – * x x – x –
Resistor – * x x x x –
(2, 3, 4-wire
connection)
Resistor PTC – * x – – x –
(2-wire connection)
Thermal resistor x 2 and 3 decimal x x x x –
(2, 3, 4-wire places
connection)
Thermocouple x 2 and 3 decimal x x x x x1)
places

1 Property is not relevant if "Fixed reference temperature" is used

Measurement Measuring Temperature Slot Temperature Diagnostics

type range coefficient reference unit Underflow Wire Missing Reference
junction / overflow break supply junction
voltage
L+
Deactivated * * * * * * * *
Voltage ±50 mV, * * * x – x –
±80 mV,
±250 mV,
±1 V
Resistor 150 Ω, * * * x x x –
(2, 3, 4-wire 300 Ω,
connection) 600 Ω,
3 kΩ, 6 kΩ

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 49

type range coefficient reference unit
Underflow Wire Missing Reference
junction
/ overflow break supply junction
voltage
L+
Resistor PTC3 * * * x – x –
(2-wire
connection)
Thermal Pt100 Pt 0.00385055 Reference Degrees x x x –
resistor climatic Pt 0.003916 channel of Celsius
(2, 3, 4-wire Pt 0.003902 group 0, 1,
connection) Pt 0.00392 2, 3
Pt 0.00385 No Degrees x x x –
reference Celsius
channel Degrees
mode Fahrenheit
Pt200 Pt 0.00385055 No Degrees x x x –
Pt500 Pt 0.003916 reference Celsius
Pt1000 Pt 0.003902 channel Degrees
climatic Pt 0.00392 mode Fahrenheit
Pt 0.00385
Thermal Pt100 Pt 0.00385055 No Degrees x x x –
resistor Pt200 Pt 0.003916 reference Celsius
(2, 3, 4-wire Pt500 Pt 0.003902 channel Degrees
connection) Pt1000 Pt 0.00392 mode Fahrenheit
standard Pt 0.00385
Kelvin
Ni100 Ni 0.00618 No Degrees x x x –
Ni120 Ni 0.00672 reference Celsius
Ni200 channel Degrees
Ni500 mode Fahrenheit
Ni1000
climatic
Ni1000
Kelvin
standard
Thermal LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005 No Degrees x x x –
resistor climatic reference Celsius
(2, 3, 4-wire channel Degrees
connection) mode Fahrenheit
LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005 No Degrees x x x –
standard reference Celsius
channel Degrees
mode Fahrenheit
Kelvin

50 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD

type range coefficient reference unit
Underflow Wire Missing Reference
junction
/ overflow break supply junction
voltage
L+
Thermal Cu 10 Cu 0.00427 No Degrees x x x –
(3-wire channel Degrees
connection) mode Fahrenheit
Cu 10 Cu 0.00427 No Degrees x x x –
channel Degrees
mode Fahrenheit
Kelvin
Thermocoupl Type B, N, * Reference Degrees x x x x
e E, R, S, J, channel of Celsius
L, T, K, U, the module1 Degrees
C, TXK Internal Fahrenheit
reference Kelvin
junction
Reference
channel of
group 0, 1,
2, 32
Fixed Degrees x x x *
reference Celsius
temperature Degrees
Fahrenheit
Kelvin

1 Use of the "Reference channel of the module":
- Channel 0 must be set to "Pt100 climatic" with the temperature unit "Degrees Celsius".
- For each TC channel of this module that is intended to use channel 0 as reference, "Reference junction" must be set to
"Enable".
2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0":
- An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit "Degrees Celsius".
- There may be only one RTD channel with "Reference junction active" = "Enable" per group and row.
- For each TC channel of this row that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction active" must be set to
"Enable".
3 Underflow = 8000H; wire break and overflow lead to 01H (triggered) → (no diagnostics), wire break and overflow are
therefore not relevant.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 51


The module parameter settings can be changed in RUN (for example, the voltage or current
values of selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other
channels).

128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means that the

online help.

52 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Header information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 53
Parameters
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
* x = 2 + (channel number * 22); channel number = 0 to 3

54 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 55
Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 3
Codes for measurement type

Table A- 3 Codes for measurement type

Voltage 0000 0001
Resistor, 4-wire connection 0000 0100
Thermal resistor, 4-wire connection 0000 0111
Thermocouple 0000 1010

56 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Codes for measuring range

Table A- 4 Codes for measuring range

Voltage
50 mV 0000 0001
80 mV 0000 0010
250 mV 0000 0011
1V 0000 0101
Resistor
150 Ω 0000 0001
300 Ω 0000 0010
600 Ω 0000 0011
3 kΩ 0000 0100
6 kΩ 0000 0101
PTC 0000 1111
Thermal resistor climatic
Pt 100 0000 0000
Pt 200 0000 0111
Pt 500 0000 1000
Pt 1000 0000 1001
Thermal resistor standard
Pt 100 0000 0010
Pt 200 0000 1011
Pt 500 0000 0100
Pt 1000 0000 0101
Ni 100 0000 0001
Ni 120 0000 1101
Ni 200 0001 0001
Ni 500 0001 0011
Ni 1000 0000 1010
LG-Ni 1000 0001 1101
Ni 100 0000 0011
Ni 120 0000 1100
Ni 200 0001 0000
Ni 500 0001 0010
Ni 1000 0000 0110
LG-Ni 1000 0001 1100

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 57

Thermal resistor
Cu 10 climatic 0000 1110
Cu 10 standard 0000 1111
Thermocouple
Type B 0000 0000
Type N 0000 0001
Type E 0000 0010
Type R 0000 0011
Type S 0000 0100
Type J 0000 0101
Type L 0000 0110
Type T 0000 0111
Type K 0000 1000
Type U 0000 1001
Type C 0000 1010
Type TXK 0000 1011
Codes for temperature coefficient for temperature measurement

The following table contains the codes for the temperature coefficients of the analog input
module. You must enter these codes at byte x+2 (see previous figure).
Table A- 5 Codes for temperature coefficient for temperature measurement
Temperature coefficient Code

Pt 0.00385055 0000 0000
Pt 0.003916 0000 0001
Pt 0.003902 0000 0010
Pt 0.00392 0000 0011
Pt 0.00385 0000 0100
Ni 0.00618 0000 1000
Ni 0.00672 0000 1001
LG-Ni 0.005 0000 1010
Cu 0.00427 0000 1100

58 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Limits for hardware interrupts

The following tables contain the permitted limits for hardware interrupts (in each case, the
usable value is given). The limits depend on the selected measurement type and the
selected measuring range. The value for the overflow must be larger than the value for the
underflow.
Table A- 6 Limits for resistor and voltage
Resistor Voltage
(all possible measuring range settings)
32510 32510 Overflow
1 -32511 Underflow
Table A- 7 Limits for thermocouple types B, C, and E
Thermocouple
Type B Type C Type E
°C °F K °C °F K °C °F K
20699 32765 23431 24999 32765 27731 11999 21919 14731 Overflow
-1199 -1839 1533 -1199 -1839 1533 -2699 -4539 33 Underflow
Table A- 8 Limits for thermocouple types R, S, J, and L
Thermocouple
Types R, S Type J Type L
°C °F K °C °F K °C °F K
20189 32765 22921 14499 26419 17231 11499 21019 14231 Overflow
-1699 -2739 1033 -2099 -3459 633 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow
Table A- 9 Limits for thermocouple types T, K, and U
Thermocouple
Type T Type K Type U
°C °F K °C °F K °C °F K
5399 10039 8131 16219 29515 18951 8499 15619 11231 Overflow
-2699 -4539 33 -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 59
Table A- 10 Limits for thermocouple types N and TXK
Thermocouple
Type N Type TXK
°C °F K °C °F K
15499 28219 18231 10499 19219 13231 Overflow
-2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow
Table A- 11 Limits for thermal resistor
Thermal resistor
Standard Climatic
°C °F K °C °F
Cu 3119 5935 5851 17999 32765 Overflow
-2399 -3999 333 -5999 -7599 Underflow
Pt 9999 18319 12731 15499 31099 Overflow
-2429 -4053 303 -14499 -22899 Underflow
Ni, Ni-LG 2949 5629 5681 29499 32765 Overflow
-1049 -1569 1683 -10499 -15699 Underflow

60 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
A.3 Switchable wire break check
Function
The "Switchable wire break check" is available for thermocouples. It switches off the wire
break check for the module.
This is required, for example, to calibrate thermocouples, since the test current necessary for
a wire break check leads to measurement errors during calibration.
The function has no effect on channels that are not assigned in the thermocouple mode.
Note
Startup and parameter reassignment
The wire break check is switched on again at each startup and during any parameter
reassignment of the module.
Switch-off via the user program

You can deactivate the wire break check using data record 237.
Table A- 12 Structure of data record 237, switchable wire break check
Byte Function Format Value Description

0 Command UBYTE 80H Wire break check
1 Identifier UBYTE 00H Not relevant
2 Channel number UBYTE FFH All channels
3 Calibration step UBYTE FFH First triggering
4 Measurement type UBYTE 00H Not relevant
5 Measuring range UBYTE 00H Not relevant
6 Action UBYTE 01H Deactivate wire break check
02H Activate wire break check
7...17 Reserved UBYTE 00H Not relevant

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 61
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog
input module AI 4xRTD/TC 2-/3-/4-wire HF.

parameters.
Note
The digitized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module.

including sign
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

62 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 63

measuring ranges.

Dec. Hex. ±1 V
32767 7FFF > 1.176 V Overflow
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 1V Nominal range
20736 5100 0.75 V
1 1 36.17 µV
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -0.75 V
-27648 9400 -1 V
-32512 8100 -1.176 V
-32768 8000 <-1.176 V Underflow
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range ±500 mV to ±50 mV

Dec. Hex. ±250 mV ±80 mV ±50 mV
32767 7FFF > 294.0 mV > 94.1 mV > 58.8 mV Overflow
32511 7EFF 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV Nominal range
20736 5100 187.5 mV 60 mV 37.5 mA
1 1 9.04 µV 2.89 µV 1.81 µV
0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -187.5 mV -60 mV -37.5 mV
-27648 9400 -250 mV -80 mV -50 mV
-32512 8100 -294.0 mV -94.1 mV -58.8 mV
-32768 8000 <-294.0 mV <-94.1 mV <-58.8 mV Underflow

64 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible
resistance-type sensor ranges.
Table B- 6 Resistance-type sensors from 150 Ω to 6000 Ω
Values Resistance-type sensor range Range

Dec. Hex. 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3000 Ω 6000 Ω
32767 7FFF > 176.38 Ω > 352.77 Ω > 705.53 Ω > 3527.7 Ω > 7055.3 Ω Overflow
32511 7EFF 176.38 Ω 352.77 Ω 705.53 Ω 3527.7 Ω 7055.3 Ω Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3000 Ω 6000 Ω Nominal range
20736 5100 112.5 Ω 225 Ω 450 Ω 2250 Ω 4500 Ω
1 1 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 21.70 mΩ 108.5 mΩ 217 mΩ
0 0 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω
-32768 8000 (negative values are physically impossible) Underflow1
1 If the resistors are not connected correctly or the conductor resistance is too high

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 65
B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors
Note
A higher resolution can be configured for the measuring range for the standard resistance
thermometers, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 28).
The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermal resistors.
Table B- 7 Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 standard
Pt x00 Values Pt x00 Values Pt x00 Values Range

Standard Dec. Hex. Standard Dec. Hex. standard Dec. Hex.
in °C in °F in K
(1 digit = (1 digit = (1 digit =
0.1°C) 0.1 °F) 0.1 K)
> 1000.0 32767 7FFF > 1832.0 32767 7FFF > 1273.2 32767 7FFF Overflow
1000.0 10000 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
850.1 8501 2135 1562.1 15621 3D05 1123.3 11233 2BE1
850.0 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 3D04 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 2DC
-200.1 -2001 F82F -328.1 -3281 F32F 73.1 731 2DB Underrange
: : : : : : : : :
-243.0 -2430 F682 -405.4 -4054 F02A 30.2 302 12E
< -243.0 -32768 8000 < -405.4 -32768 8000 < 30.2 32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 8 Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 climatic
Pt x00 climatic in °C Values Pt x00 climatic in °F Values Range

(1 digit = 0.01 °C) (1 digit = 0.01 °F)
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
> 155.00 32767 7FFF > 311.00 32767 7FFF Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8C 311.00 31100 797C Overrange
: : : : : :
130.01 13001 32C9 266.01 26601 67E9
130.00 13000 32C8 266.00 26600 67E8 Nominal range
: : : : : :
-120.00 -12000 D120 -184.00 -18400 B820
-120.01 -12001 D11F -184.01 -18401 B81F Underrange
: : : : : :
-145.00 -14500 C75C -229.00 -22900 A68C
< -145.00 -32768 8000 < -229.00 -32768 8000 Underflow

66 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Table B- 9 Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 standard
Ni x00 Values Ni x00 Values Ni x00 Values Range

standard in standard in standard in
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
°C °F K
0.1 °C) 0.1 °F) 0.1 K)
295.0 2950 B86 563.0 5630 15FE 568.2 5682 1632 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
250.1 2501 9C5 482.1 4821 12D5 523.3 5233 1471
250.0 2500 9C4 482.0 4820 12D4 523.2 5232 1470 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-60.0 -600 FDA8 -76.0 -760 FD08 213.2 2132 854
-60.1 -601 FDA7 -76.1 -761 FD07 213.1 2131 853 Underrange
: : : : : : : : :
-105.0 -1050 FBE6 -157.0 -1570 F9DE 168.2 1682 692
< -105.0 -32768 8000 < -157.0 -32768 8000 < 168.2 32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 10 Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 climatic
Ni x00 climatic in °C Values Ni x00 climatic in °F Values Range

(1 digit = 0.01 °C) (1 digit = 0.01 °F)
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
> 295.00 32767 7FFF > 327.66 32767 7FFF Overflow
295.00 29500 733C 327.66 32766 7FFE Overrange
: : : : : :
250.01 25001 61A9 280.01 28001 6D61
250.00 25000 61A8 280.00 28000 6D60 Nominal range
: : : : : :
-60.00 -6000 E890 -76.00 -7600 E250
-60.01 -6001 E88F -76.01 -7601 E24F Underrange
: : : : : :
-105.00 -10500 D6FC -157.00 -15700 C2AC
< - 105.00 -32768 8000 < - 157.00 -32768 8000 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 67
Table B- 11 Thermal resistor Cu 10 standard
Cu 10 Values Cu 10 Values Cu 10 Values Range

standard standard standard
in °C in °F in K
0.01 °C) 0.01 °F) 0.01 K)
312.0 3120 C30 593.6 5936 1730 585.2 5852 16DC Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
260.1 2601 A29 500.1 5001 12D5 533.3 5333 14D5
260.0 2600 A28 500.0 5000 1389 533.2 5332 14D4 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 2DCH
: : : : : : : : :
-240.0 -2400 F6A0 -400.0 -4000 F060 33.2 332 14CH
< -240.0 -32768 8000 < -400.0 -32768 8000 < 33.2 32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 12 Thermal resistor Cu 10 climatic
Cu 10 climatic in Values Cu 10 climatic Values Range

°C in °F
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
(1 digit = (1 digit =
0.01 °C) 0.01 °F)
> 180.00 32767 7FFF > 325.11 32767 7FFF Overflow
180.00 18000 4650 327.66 32766 7FFE Overrange
: : : : : :
150.01 15001 3A99 280.01 28001 6D61A
150.00 15000 3A98 280.00 28000 6D60 Nominal range
: : : : : :
-50.00 -5000 EC78 - 58.00 -5800 E958H
-50.01 -5001 EC77 -58.01 -5801 E957 Underrange
: : : : : :
-60.00 -6000 E890 -76.00 -7600 E250
< - 60.00 -32768 8000 < - 76.00 -32768 8000 Underflow

68 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Note
A higher resolution can be configured for thermocouples, see section Scalable measuring
range (Page 28).
The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermocouples.
Table B- 13 Thermocouple type B
Type B Values Type B Values Type B Values Range

in °C Dec. Hex. in °F Dec. Hex. in K Dec. Hex.
2070.0 20700 50DC 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2343.2 23432 5B88 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1820.1 18201 4719 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2093.3 20933 51C5
1820.0 18200 4718 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2093.2 20932 51C4 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC
-0.1 -1 FFFF 31.9 319 013F 273.1 2731 0AAB Underrange
: : : : : : : : :
-120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC
< -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 14 Thermocouple type C
Type C Values Type C Values Type C Values Range

2500.0 25000 61A8 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2773.2 27732 6C54 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
2315.1 23151 5A6F 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2588.3 25883 651B
2315.0 23150 5A6E 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2588.2 25882 651A Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC
: : : : : : : : :
-120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC
< -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 69
Table B- 15 Thermocouple type E
Type E Values Type E Values Type E Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1000.1 10001 2711 1832.1 18321 4791 1273.3 12733 31BD
1000.0 10000 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 16 Thermocouple type J
Type J Values Type J Values Type J Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1450.0 14500 38A4 2642.0 26420 6734 1723.2 17232 4350 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1200.1 12001 2EE1 2192.1 21921 55A1 1473.3 14733 398D
1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-210.0 -2100 F7CC -346.0 -3460 F27C 63.2 632 0278
< -210.0 -32768 8000 < -346.0 -32768 8000 < 63.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 17 Thermocouple type K
Type K Values Type K Values Type K Values Range

1622.0 16220 3F5C 2951.6 29516 734C 1895.2 18952 4A08 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1372.1 13721 3599 2501.7 25017 61B9 1645.3 16453 4045
1372.0 13720 3598 2501.6 25016 61B8 1645.2 16452 4044 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow

70 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
Table B- 18 Thermocouple type L
Type L Values Type L Values Type L Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1150.0 11500 2CEC 2102.0 21020 521C 1423.2 14232 3798 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
900.1 9001 2329 1652.1 16521 4089 1173.3 11733 2DD5
900.0 9000 2328 1652.0 16520 4088 1173.2 11732 2DD4 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC
< -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 19 Thermocouple type N
Type N Values Type N Values Type N Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1550.0 15500 3C8C 2822.0 28220 6E3C 1823.2 18232 4738 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1300.1 13001 32C9 2372.1 23721 5CA9 1573.3 15733 3D75
1300.0 13000 32C8 2372.0 23720 5CA8 1573.2 15732 3D74 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 20 Thermocouples R and S
Types R, Values Types R, Values Types R, Values Range

S in °C Dec. Hex. S in °F Dec. Hex. S in K Dec. Hex.
2019.0 20190 4EDE 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2292.2 22922 598A Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1769.1 17691 451B 3216.3 32163 7DA3 2042.3 20423 4FC7
1769.0 17690 451A 3216.2 32162 7DA2 2042.2 20422 4FC6 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-50.0 -500 FE0C -58.0 -580 FDBC 223.2 2232 08B8
-50.1 -501 FE0B -58.1 -581 FDBB 223.1 2231 08B7 Underrange
: : : : : : : : :
-170.0 -1700 F95C -274.0 -2740 F54C 103.2 1032 0408
< -170.0 -32768 8000 < -274.0 -32768 8000 < 103.2 < 1032 8000 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD 71
Table B- 21 Thermocouple type T
Type T Values Type T Values Type T Values Range

in °C in °F in K
540.0 5400 1518 1004.0 10040 2738 813.2 8132 1FC4 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
400.1 4001 0FA1 752.1 7521 1D61 673.3 6733 1AAD
400.0 4000 0FA0 752.0 7520 1D60 673.2 6732 1AAC Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 22 Thermocouple type U
Type U Values Type U Values Type U Values Range

in °C in °F in K
850.0 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 2738.0 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
600.1 6001 1771 1112.1 11121 2B71 873.3 8733 221D
600.0 6000 1770 1112.0 11120 2B70 873.2 8732 221C Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC
< -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 23 Thermocouple type TXK (GOST)
Type Values Type Values Type Values Range

TXK Dec. Hex. TXK in °F Dec. Hex. TXK Dec. Hex.
in °C in K
> 1050.0 32767 7FFF > 1922.0 32767 7FFF >1323.2 32767 7FFF Overflow
1050.0 10500 2904 1922.0 19220 4B14 1323.2 13232 33B0 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
800.1 8001 1F41 1472.1 14721 3981 1073.3 10733 29ED
800.0 8000 1F40 1472.0 14720 3980 1073.2 10732 29EC Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273 2730 0AAA
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC
< -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 <73.2 -32768 8000 Underflow

72 Manual, 02/2014, A5E03573289-AD
SIMATIC
ET 200SP
Analog input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1)
Manual
Edition 02/2014

Preface
AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF ___________________

(6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1)
___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF
(6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1) ___________________
Manual ___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
02/2014
A5E32942580-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 3
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 7
3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Pin assignment .............................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Block diagram ............................................................................................................................. 10
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges................................................................................ 11
4.2 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 15
4.4 Scalable measuring range .......................................................................................................... 25
4.4.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 28
4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235 ......................................................................................................... 29
4.5 Address space ............................................................................................................................ 32
5.2 Interrupts ..................................................................................................................................... 35
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ........................................................................... 45
A.3 Switchable wire break check ....................................................................................................... 59
B.1 Representation of input ranges ................................................................................................... 61
B.2 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges .................................................. 62
B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors .................................................... 63
B.4 Representation of analog values for thermal resistors ............................................................... 64
B.5 Representation of analog values for thermocouples .................................................................. 66

4 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Introduction
automation system.
Overview of documentation for analog input module AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF

The following table shows additional documentation that you will need when using the
AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF analog input module.
Table 1- 1 Documentation for analog input module AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF

System description System manual ET 200SP • Application planning
distributed I/O system
• Installation
com/WW/view/en/58649293) • Wiring
• Commissioning
com/WW/view/en/59193566) • Lightning protection
Analog value processing Function manual Analog value • Basics of analog technology
processing (wiring, processing, installation
(http://support.automation.siemens. technology)
operational limits
System diagnostics Function manual System • Overview
diagnostics
com/WW/view/en/59192926) hardware/software

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 5

Amendments and special Product information on Current information not yet
features of the ET 200SP documentation of the ET 200SP documented in the system manuals,
distributed I/O system distributed I/O system function manuals, or product
(http://support.automation.siemens. manuals.
SIMATIC manuals

6 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
View of the module
Figure 2-1 View of the module AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 7
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Resistor measurement type can be set per channel
● Thermal resistor (RTD) measurement type can be set per channel
● Thermocouple (TC) measurement type can be set per channel
● Configurable diagnostics for each channel
per channel)
● Firmware update
● Selectable conductor resistance for 2-wire connection
● Switchable wire break check
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

8 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Wiring 3
3.1 Pin assignment
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment for AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF
Pin assignment for AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF (6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1)

Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Notes BaseUnits1 Color identification
label
1 M0+ 2 M1+ • Mn+: Measuring line A0 ---
3 M2+ 4 M3+ positive, channel n A1
5 M4+ 6 M5+ • Mn-: Measuring line
7 M6+ 8 M7+ negative, channel n
9 M0- 10 M1-
11 M2- 12 M3-
13 M4- 14 M5-
15 M6- 16 M7-
L+ 24 VDC M M
RTD 2-wire connection TC
1 Usable BaseUnit types, can be identified by the last two digits of the article number. See also
Note
See also

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 9
Wiring
3.2 Block diagram
3.2 Block diagram
Block diagram
Figure 3-1 Block diagram AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF

10 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
The following table describes the measuring range and the temperature coefficients you can
configure for each measurement type:
Measurement type Measuring range Temperature coefficient

Deactivated – –
Resistor (2-wire connection) 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / –
3 kΩ / 6 kΩ
Resistor (2-wire connection) PTC –
Thermal resistor RTD (2-wire connection) Climatic / Standard Pt 0.00385 /
Pt 100 Pt 0.003916 /
Pt 200 Pt 0.003902 /
Pt 500 Pt 0.00392 /
Pt 1000 Pt 0.00385055
Climatic / Standard Ni 0.00618 /
Ni 100 Ni 0.00672
Ni 120
Ni 200
Ni 500
Ni 1000
Climatic1 / Standard1 Ni 0.005
Ni 1000
Thermocouple (TC) Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R,
B, T, C, U, TXK (acc. to GOST)
Voltage ±50 mV / ±80 mV /
±250 mV / ±1 V
1 For sensors LG-Ni 1000 from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stäfa).

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 11
4.1 Address space
Special features when using PTC resistors

PTCs are suitable for monitoring temperature and as thermal protection devices for complex
drives or transformer windings.
● Choose "Resistor (2-wire)" and "PTC" in the parameter assignment.
● Connect the PTC to the 2-wire connection technology.
● Use the PTC resistors, type A (PTC thermistor) in accordance with DIN/VDE 0660,
part 302.
● If "Underflow" diagnostics is enabled, a "Violation of low limit" diagnostics is generated for
resistance values < 18 Ω, indicating a short-circuit.
● Sensor data for the PTC resistor:
Table 4- 2 Using PTC resistors
Property Technical Comment

specifications
Switching points Behavior with rising temperature
Behavior with falling temperature
Reaction to short-circuit
< 18 Ω • SIMATIC S7: Bit 7 (IB x+1) = "1", Bit 0 = "0" and
Bit 2 = "0"
(RRT-5) °C Max. 550 Ω TNF = Rated response temperature of the sensor
(RRT+5) °C min. 1330 Ω (according to DIN/VDE 0660)
(RRT+15) °C min. 4000 Ω
Measuring voltage/ Max. 7.5 V1
voltage at the PTC
1 Below 23 kΩ

12 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Figure 4-1 Assignment in the process image input (PII)
Notes on programming
● Bits 0+2 are relevant for evaluation in the process image input. You can monitor, for
example, the temperature of a motor using bits 0+2.
● Bits 0+2 in the process image input cannot be saved. During parameter assignment, take
into consideration that a motor, for example, starts up in a controlled manner (via an
acknowledgment).
● Bits 0+2 can never be set at the same time; they are set one after the other.
NOTICE
No measurement is possible in the following cases:
• When I/O modules are pulled out
• When supply voltage to the I/O module fails
• When there is a wire break or short-circuit in the measuring lines
You should therefore always evaluate the diagnostic entries of AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF for
safety reasons.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 13
4.1 Address space
Example
The diagram shows the temperature curve and the associated switching points.
Figure 4-2 Temperature curve with prewarning range
See also

14 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF

parameters to the module by means of data records; see section Parameter assignment and
structure of parameter data record (Page 50). The following parameter settings are possible:
Parameters Value range Default Reconfigu- Scope with configuration

RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP 3
Missing supply
• Enable
voltage L+
Reference junction
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
Wire break
• Enable

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 15
4.2 Address space

RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP 3
Type/range of • Deactivated Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
• Voltage ±50 mV Pt 100 standard
• Voltage ±80 mV range
• Voltage ±250 mV
• Voltage ±1 V
Resistor (2-wire connection)
• 150 Ω
• 300 Ω
• 600 Ω
• 3 kΩ
• 6 kΩ
Type/range of Resistor (2-wire connection) Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
measurement PTC (2-wire connection)
Pt 100 standard
range
measurement (2-wire connection) (2-wire connection)
Pt 100 standard
range
Thermal resistor
(2-wire connection)

16 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP 3
measurement (2-wire connection) (2-wire connection)
Pt 100 standard
range
Thermal resistor
(2-wire connection)
Type/range of Thermocouple Thermal resistor Yes Channel Channel
• Type B (PtRh-PtRh)
Pt 100 standard
• Type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) range
• Type E (NiCr-CuNi)
• Type R (PtRh-Pt)
• Type S (PtRh-Pt)
• Type J (Fe-CuNi)
• Type L (Fe-CuNi)
• Type T (Cu-CuNi)
• Type K (NiCr-NiAl)
• Type U (Cu-CuNi)
• Type C (WRe-WRe)
• Type TXK
Temperature • Pt 0.00385055 Pt 0.00385055 Yes Channel Channel
coefficient
• Pt 0.003916
• Pt 0.003902
• Pt 0.00392
• Pt 0.00385
• Ni 0.00618
• Ni 0.00672
• LG-Ni 0.005

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 17
4.2 Address space

RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP 3
Temperature unit • Degrees Celsius Degrees Celsius Yes Channel Module
• Degrees Fahrenheit
• Kelvin
Reference junction 4 • No reference channel mode No reference Yes Channel Channel
channel mode
• Reference channel of the
module
• Internal reference junction
• Reference channel of group
0 to 3
• Fixed reference temperature
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong
Interference • 60 Hz 50 Hz Yes Channel Module
frequency
• 50 Hz2
suppression
• 16.6 Hz
Scalable measuring • Disable Disable Yes Channel -
range
• Enable
Measuring range • 2 decimal places 2 decimal places Yes Channel -
resolution
• 3 decimal places
Measuring range • Value within the nominal 0 Yes Channel -
center range of the measuring
range
Conductor resistance 0 to 50000 mΩ 0 Yes Channel -
high limit 1 3
• Enable

low limit 1 3
• Enable

high limit 2 3
• Enable

18 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
PROFINET PROFIBUS
IO DP 3
low limit 2 3
• Enable
Low limit 2 3
• Value -2000 Yes Channel -
Potential group • Use potential group of the Use potential group No Module Module
left module of the left module
1 Diagnostics: Missing supply voltage L+: Detection per module or alarm per channel
2 Interference frequency suppression: Interfering signals at 400 Hz are automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz.
configuration, the configuration options are restricted. If required, you can still assign these parameters using data
4 Only for configuration with PROFIBUS GSD file: The set reference junction is used with the additional parameter
"Kx Reference junction activated" in the case of "Enable". In the case of "Disable", "No reference channel mode" is used
for RTD and "Fixed reference temperature" is used for TC.
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused inputs in the parameter assignment to shorten the cycle time of the
module.
A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 19
4.3 Address space

Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient supply voltage L+.
Diagnostics: Reference junction

Enabling of the reference junction diagnostics if the reference temperature of the reference
junction needs to be determined for the TC channel being operated.
Reference junction using the PROFINET GSD file

A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of group
0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the
Degrees Celsius".
A possible parameter assignment is represented below:
Setting Description
1, 2, 3 temperature of the group. The distribution is performed via the
interface module.
Setting Description
"Thermal resistor Pt 100 climatic range Degrees Celsius" and "No
reference channel mode"; otherwise, Diagnostics: Reference

20 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Note
Shared Device and "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3"
If the transmitter and receiver for the reference junction temperature of a group are assigned
to different IO controllers, then both IO controllers must be performing data exchange with
the IO device to ensure error-free operation of the temperature compensation.
Reference junction using the PROFIBUS GSD file

A BaseUnit with an internal temperature sensor (BU..T), the reference channel of group
0, 1, 2, 3, or channel 0 of the I/O module can be used as reference junction for the
Degrees Celsius".
The set temperature unit (e.g. Degrees Celsius) is valid for the entire module with
temperature compensation "Reference channel of the module" and "Reference channel of
group 0, 1, 2, 3".
Setting Description
interface module.
Setting Description
activated "No reference channel mode".

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 21
4.3 Address space
Setting Description
1, 2, 3 temperature of the group.
Setting Description
Channel x Reference junction • Disable: Channel x is configured with the setting "Fixed
activated reference temperature".
Enabling of the diagnostics if the measured value falls below the underrange.

Enabling of the diagnostics if the module has no current flow or the current is insufficient for
measurement at the correspondingly assigned input.

22 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Temperature coefficient
The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. In Europe,
only one value is used per sensor type (default value).
The temperature coefficient (α value) indicates by how much the resistance of a specific
material changes relatively if the temperature increases by 1 °C.
The other values facilitate a sensor-specific setting of the temperature coefficient and
enhance accuracy.
Temperature unit
Selection between Degrees Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin as the temperature unit for the
selected measuring range.
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed using filtering. The smoothing can be set in
4 levels.
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This specification is valid for all
signal changes at the analog input.
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 8)
④ Strong (k = 16)
Figure 4-3 Smoothing for AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 23
4.3 Address space

Suppresses the interferences affecting analog input modules that are caused by the
frequency of the AC voltage network used.
The frequency of the AC voltage network is likely to have a negative effect on measured
values particularly with measurement in the low voltage range and on thermocouples. With
this parameter, the user specifies the line frequency that is predominant in the plant.
Measuring range resolution

Parameters for the measurement type thermal resistor standard and thermocouple.
Allows you to increase the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal places for a configurable section of
the measuring range. See the Scalable measuring range (Page 25) section.
Measuring range center

Determines the temperature over which the scalable measuring range is symmetrically
spanned. The value must be within the nominal range of the underlying measuring range.
It is specified in integers.
Maximum / Minimum
Corresponds to overflow / underflow for the scalable measuring range.
Conductor resistance
Parameters for the measurement types resistor and thermal resistor.
Used to compensate for the conductor resistance without having to interfere with the sensor
wiring.
If the "Conductor resistor" parameter is configured higher than a value 0 mΩ, the module
then automatically uses the factory calibration data.
Hardware interrupt 1 or 2
Enabling of a hardware interrupt if the high limit 1/2 or the low limit 1/2 is violated.
Low limit 1/2

High limit 1/2


24 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Potential group
Specifies that a BaseUnit with incoming voltage supply is located on this slot (see system
Introduction
The scalable measuring range is available for the temperature measuring ranges of thermal
resistors (RTD) standard and thermocouples. The measuring ranges for voltage, resistor and
thermal resistor climatic are not supported.
The scalable measuring range is valid for the following ranges:
● Nominal range
● Underrange
● Overrange
Function
The scalable measuring range is a limited section of a measuring range supported by the
module.
It allows you to increase the resolution for a configurable section.
● The "Measuring range resolution" parameter determines the resolution to 2 or 3 decimal
places.
● The "Measuring range center" parameter determines the temperature over which the
scalable measuring range is symmetrically spanned.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 25
4.4 Address space
Value ranges
Table 4- 8 Value ranges
Scalable measuring range Measuring range resolution Values hex.

2 decimal places 3 decimal places
Overflow >325.11 >32.511 7FFFH
High limit 325.11 32.511 7EFFH
Measuring range center 0 0 0H
Low limit -325.12 -32.512 8100H
Underflow <-325.12 <-32.512 8000H
To obtain an absolute temperature, the measuring range center in the application program
(as offset) must be calculated with the value of the user data of the scalable measuring
range.
The measuring range center is always output in the user data as the value "0". The user data
are correspondingly mapped to the bipolar input ranges in S7 format. Underflow / overflow is
also formed in accordance with the limits of S7.
Rules
● The measuring range center must be within the nominal range of the underlying
measuring range. It is specified in integers.
● The scalable measuring range is spanned symmetrically over the measuring range
center. Depending on the resolution, various value ranges result (①, ②).
● The scalable measuring range is limited by underflow and overflow of the underlying
measuring range:
– It is clipped at the underflow when it falls below the limit.
– It is clipped at the overflow when it exceeds the limit (③).

26 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Example
The following example illustrates the effect of scalable measuring ranges:
① Scalable measuring range with 2 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format

② Scalable measuring range with 3 decimal places in hexadecimal S7 format
③ Scalable measuring range which is cut off at the overflow of the underlying measuring range (clipping)
Figure 4-4 Examples of scalable measuring ranges

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 27
4.4 Address space
4.4.1 Configuration
Requirement
You must select a valid temperature measuring range for configuration.
Configuration
The function is activated using the "Scalable measuring range" parameter.
The following figure shows an example of a configuration in STEP 7:
Figure 4-5 Configuration for the scalable measuring range
Reference
You will find more information on the configuration in the STEP 7 online help.

28 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
4.4.2 Evaluating data record 235
Evaluation in the user program

In the user program, you can evaluate the status and the limits of the scalable measuring
range with data record 235, which may result by reaching underflow/overflow.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 29
4.4 Address space
Header information
Figure 4-7 Header information of data record 235
Parameters
The figure below shows the structure of the parameter.
If the corresponding bit is set to "1", the parameter is activated.
* x = 2 + (channel number x 8)
Figure 4-8 Structure of data record 235 - channel parameter byte x to x+7

30 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Description of the parameters
Table 4- 9 Description of the parameters from data record 235
Parameter Description
Scalable measuring range enabled 1 = Function is active for this channel.
Clipping 1 = Scalable measuring range cut off at the overflow /
underflow of the underlying measuring range
(see Figure (Page 27)).
Resolution 2 or 3 decimal places
Measuring range center Temperature in whole °C / °F / K
("working point" for the scaling)
Overflow/underflow Limits of the scalable measuring range
Example
The following example shows the values for a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard, °C:
Table 4- 10 Example of a thermal resistor Pt 100 Standard
Hex. value Dec. value Evaluation of data record 235

00H 0 V0.0
08H 8 8 bytes
03H 3 Scalable measuring range active and clipped (clipping)
02H 2 Resolution: 2 decimal places
02EEH 750 Measuring range center: 750 °C
61A8H 25000 Overflow (Maximum):
250.00 + 750 = 1000.00 °C
Scalable measuring range is clipped at the overflow.
8100H -32512 Underflow (Minimum):
-325.12 + 750 = 424.88 °C
See also
Scalable measuring range (Page 25)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 31
4.5 Address space
4.5 Address space
Address space of the analog input module AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF

The following figure shows the assignment of the address space with value status
(Quality Information (QI)). The addresses for the value status are only available if the value
status is enabled.
Figure 4-9 Address space of the AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF with value status
Configuration options of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF


the analog module. Each bit 0 to 7 in this byte is assigned to one channel and provides
information on the validity of the analog value (0 = value is incorrect).

32 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF:
④ PWR (green)

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 33

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status/channel error LED
Table 5- 2 Status and error display of the LED channel status / channel error
LEDs Meaning
Channel deactivated
Off Off
On Off
Off On
On On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

34 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
5.2 Interrupts

online help.
Figure 5-2 OB start information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 35

USI W#16#0001 additional interrupt information for hardware 2
Event B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1 1
Diagnostic error interrupt

● Reference channel error
● Error
● Violation of low limit
● Violation of high limit
● Wire break

36 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

Table 5- 5 Diagnostics alarms, their meaning and remedies

Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is being performed. –
The module is currently not performing
any measurements.
Wire break 6H Resistance of sensor circuit too high Use a different sensor type or modify
sensor
• Connect or deactivate the channel
Violation of high limit1 7H Value lies above the overrange. Correct module/sensor interplay
Wire break2 See Wire break
Violation of low limit1 8H Value lies below the underrange. Correct module/sensor interplay
Error 9H Internal module error has occurred Replace module
(diagnostics alarm on channel 0 applies to
the entire module).
Parameter assignment 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters • Correct the configuration
error for the channel: Module plugged in does (comparison of preset and actual
not match the configuration. setup).
Incorrect parameter assignment.
• Correct the parameter assignment
(diagnostics wire break set only
with the permitted measuring
ranges).
Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient supply voltage L+ • Check supply voltage L+ on the
BaseUnit

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 37

Reference 15H Reference temperature of the reference • Check BaseUnit type
channel error junction for the TC channel being
• Select correct reference junction
(reference junction) operated with compensation is invalid.
through parameter assignment3
• Check whether the reference
junction (reference channel of the
group 0, 1, 2, 3) is only assigned
once as the sender in the entire
setup.
Hardware interrupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not Correct the program or the process
be reported because there were too many
pending hardware interrupts.
1 The alarm refers to the diagnostics and depends on the configured measuring range.
2 For resistor and thermal resistor measuring ranges with deactivated diagnostics for "Wire break", this is reported by the
"Violation of high limit" diagnostic.
3 Shared Device and diagnostics "Reference temperature": If the sender and receiver of the reference junction
temperature of a group are assigned to different IO controllers, you may need to download both configurations again in
the case of diagnostics. First download the configuration containing the receiver.

38 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Technical specifications of the AI 8×RTD/TC 2-wire HF
6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Product type designation AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of version V13
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision V2.3
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 16 bytes; + 1 byte for
QI information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 39
6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Analog inputs
(destruction limit)
Constant measurement current for resistance-type sensor, typ. 2 mA
Cycle time (all channels), min. Sum of the basic conversion times
and additional processing times
(depending on parameter
assignment of activated channels)
Technical unit for temperature measurement can be set Yes
Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 1 MΩ
Input ranges (rated values), thermocouples
Type B Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type B) 1 MΩ
Type C Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type C) 1 MΩ
Type E Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type E) 1 MΩ
Type J Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type J) 1 MΩ
Type K Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type K) 1 MΩ
Type L Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type L) 1 MΩ
Type N Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type N) 1 MΩ
Type R Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type R) 1 MΩ
Type S Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type S) 1 MΩ
Type T Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type T) 1 MΩ
Type U Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type U) 1 MΩ
Type TXK/TXK(L) according to GOST Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (Type TXK/TXK(L) according to GOST) 1 MΩ

40 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometer
LG-Ni 1000 Yes; 16 bits incl. sign
Input resistance (LG-Ni 1000) 1 MΩ
Input ranges (rated values), resistors
PTC Yes; 15 bits
Input resistance (PTC) 1 MΩ
Thermocouple (TC)
Temperature compensation
• Reference channel of the module Yes
• Internal reference junction Yes; with BaseUnit type A1
• Reference channel of the group Yes
• Fixed reference temperature Yes

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 41
6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Resistance thermometer (RTD)
(destruction limit)
Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 200 m; 50 m for thermocouples
Analog value generation
Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel
Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), max. 16 bit
Basic conversion time including integration time, ms
• Additional processing time for wire break check 2 ms; in the resistance
thermometer, resistor, and
thermocouple areas
Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 16.6 / 50 / 60 Hz
in Hz
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes
Setting: Weak Yes
Setting: Medium Yes
Setting: Strong Yes
Sensors
Wiring the signal transmitters
for resistance measurement with 3-wire connection No
for resistance measurement with 4-wire connection No
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) ± 0.01%; +/- 0.1% for resistance
thermometer and resistor
Temperature error (in relation to input range) ± 0.0009%/K; +/- 0.005%/K for
thermocouple
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C ± 0.05%
(in relation to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in entire temperature range

42 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
6ES7134-6JF00-0CA1
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-1%), f1 =
interference frequency
rated value of the input range), min.
Interrupts
Diagnostic error interrupt Yes
Limit interrupt Yes; two high limits and two low
limits each
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electronics Yes
Between different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
(basic insulation)
Insulation
Ambient conditions
Dimensions
Width 15 mm

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 43
Operational and basic error limits for thermal resistors
Error limits for thermal resistors

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, in relation to input range)
• Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard ±1.0 K
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation to input range)

• Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000 standard ± 0.6 K
• Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 1000 standard and climatic ± 0.2 K
Operational and basic error limits for thermocouples
Error limits for thermocouples

Operational limit for thermocouples (in the entire temperature range, in relation to ±1.5 K
the input range)
Operational limit for type C thermocouples (in the entire temperature range, in ±7K
relation to the input range)1
Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation to the ±1 K
input range)
Basic error limit for type C thermocouples (operational limit at 25 °C, in relation to ± 5 K
the input range)
Overall error limits when using internal compensation
• Operational limit (in the entire temperature range at static thermal state, ± 2.5 K
ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min)2
• Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C at static thermal state, ambient ±1.5 K
temperature change < 0.3 K/min)3
1 The indicated error limits apply as of the following temperatures:

Thermocouple type T: -200 °C
Thermocouple type K: -100 °C
Thermocouple type B: +700 °C
Thermocouple type N: -150 °C
Thermocouple type E: -150 °C
Thermocouple type R: +200 °C
Thermocouple type S: +100 °C
Dimension drawing

44 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

Table A- 1 Dependencies of the measurement type / measuring range
Measure- Measuring range Temperature Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor

ment type coefficient resistance
Voltage ±50 mV, ±80 mV, * * * *
±250 mV, ±1 V
Resistor 150 Ω, 300 Ω, * * * x
600 Ω, 3 kΩ, 6 kΩ
Resistor PTC * * * *
Thermal Pt100 climatic Pt 0.00385055 Reference channel Degrees Celsius x
resistor Pt 0.003916 of group 0, 1, 2, 3
Pt 0.003902 No reference Degrees Celsius
Pt 0.00392 channel mode
Pt 0.00385 Degrees Fahrenheit
Pt200 No reference Degrees Celsius
Pt500 channel mode Degrees Fahrenheit
Pt1000 climatic
Ni100 Ni 0.00618
Ni120 Ni 0.00672
Ni200
Ni500
Ni1000 climatic
LG-Ni 1000 climatic LG-Ni 0.005

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 45
Measure- Measuring range Temperature Reference junction Temperature unit Conductor

ment type coefficient resistance
Thermal Pt100 Pt 0.00385055 No reference Degrees Celsius x
resistor Pt200 Pt 0.003916 channel mode Degrees Fahrenheit
Pt500 Pt 0.003902
Kelvin
Pt1000 standard Pt 0.00392
Pt 0.00385
Ni100 Ni 0.00618
Ni120 Ni 0.00672
Ni200
Ni500
Ni1000 standard
LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005
standard
Thermo- Type B, N, E, R, S, * Reference channel Degrees Celsius *
couple J, L, T, K, U, C, TXK of the module1 Degrees Fahrenheit
Internal reference Kelvin
junction
Reference channel
of group 0, 1, 2, 32
Fixed reference
temperature

1 Use of "Reference channel of the module":
- Channel 0 must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius".
"Reference channel of the module".
2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3":
- An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit: "Degrees Celsius".
- There must only be one RTD channel with "Reference junction" = "Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3" per group
0, 1, 2, 3 and IO device!
- For each TC channel in the IO device that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction" must be set to
"Reference channel of group 0, 1, 2, 3".
- If the reference channel is on channel 0, it can also be used as "Reference channel of the module" at the same time.

46 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the measurement type for
PROFINET.
Table A- 2 Dependencies on the measurement type
Measurement Scalable Measuring Diagnostics

type measuring range
Underflow Overflow Wire break Missing supply Reference
range resolution
voltage L+ junction
Voltage – * x x – x –
Resistor – * x x x x –
Resistor – * x – – x –
Thermal x 2 and 3 x x x x –
resistor decimal
places
Thermocouple x 2 and 3 x x x x x1)
decimal
places

1 Property is not relevant if "Fixed reference temperature" is used

Measure Measuring Temperature Slot Temperature Diagnostics

ment type range coefficient reference unit Underflow / Wire break Missing Reference
junction overflow supply junction
voltage L+
Deactivat * * * * * * * *
ed
Voltage ±50 mV * * * x – x –
±80 mV
±250 mV
±1 V
Resistor 150 Ω * * * x x x –
300 Ω
600 Ω
3 kΩ
6 kΩ
Resistor PTC3 * * * x – x –

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 47

ment type range coefficient reference unit
Underflow / Wire break Missing Reference
junction
overflow supply junction
voltage L+
Thermal Pt100 Pt Reference Degrees x x x –
resistor climatic 0.00385055 channel of Celsius
Pt 0.003916 group
Pt 0.003902 0, 1, 2, 3
Pt 0.00392 No Degrees x x x –
Pt 0.00385 reference Celsius
channel Degrees
mode Fahrenheit
Pt200 Pt No Degrees x x x –
Pt500 0.00385055 reference Celsius
climatic Pt 0.003902 mode Fahrenheit
Pt 0.00392
Pt 0.00385
Thermal Pt100 Pt No Degrees x x x –
resistor Pt200 0.00385055 reference Celsius
Pt1000 Pt 0.003902 mode Fahrenheit
standard Pt 0.00392
Kelvin
Pt 0.00385
Ni1000
climatic
Ni1000
Kelvin
standard
Thermal LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005 No Degrees x x x –
channel Degrees
mode Fahrenheit
LG-Ni 1000 LG-Ni 0.005 No Degrees x x x –
channel Degrees
mode Fahrenheit
Kelvin

48 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

ment type range coefficient reference unit
Underflow / Wire break Missing Reference
junction
overflow supply junction
voltage L+
Thermo- Type B, N, * Reference Degrees x x x x
couple E, R, S, J, channel of Celsius
L, T, K, U, the Degrees
C, TXK module1 Fahrenheit
Internal Kelvin
reference
junction
Reference
channel of
group 0,
1, 2, 32
Fixed Degrees x x x *
reference Celsius
temperatu Degrees
re Fahrenheit
Kelvin

1 Use of the "Reference channel of the module":
- Channel 0 must be set to "Pt100 climatic" with the temperature unit "Degrees Celsius".
"Enable".
2 Use of "Reference channel of group 0":
- An RTD channel must be set as "Pt100 climatic" with temperature unit "Degrees Celsius".
- There may be only one RTD channel with "Reference junction active" = "Enable" per group and row.
- For each TC channel of this row that is intended to use this reference, "Reference junction active" must be set to
"Enable".
3 Underflow = 8000H; wire break and overflow lead to 01H (triggered) → (no diagnostics), wire break and overflow are
therefore not relevant.

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 49


The module parameters can be assigned in RUN (for example, measuring ranges of
selected channels can be edited in RUN without having an effect on the other channels).

record 128. The parameters set with STEP 7 will not be changed on the CPU, which means
that the parameters set in STEP 7 will be valid again after a restart.

online help.

50 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Header information

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 51
Parameters
You can activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1".
* x = 2 + (channel number x 22); channel number = 0 to 7

52 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 53
Figure A-3 Structure of byte x to x+21 for channel 0 to 7
Codes for measurement type

Table A- 3 Codes for measurement type

Voltage 0000 0001
Thermocouple 0000 1010

54 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Codes for measuring range

Table A- 4 Codes for measuring range

Voltage
50 mV 0000 0001
80 mV 0000 0010
250 mV 0000 0011
1V 0000 0101
Resistor
150 Ω 0000 0001
300 Ω 0000 0010
600 Ω 0000 0011
3 kΩ 0000 0100
6 kΩ 0000 0101
PTC 0000 1111
Pt 100 0000 0000
Pt 200 0000 0111
Pt 500 0000 1000
Pt 1000 0000 1001
Pt 100 0000 0010
Pt 200 0000 1011
Pt 500 0000 0100
Pt 1000 0000 0101
Ni 100 0000 0001
Ni 120 0000 1101
Ni 200 0001 0001
Ni 500 0001 0011
Ni 1000 0000 1010
Ni 100 0000 0011
Ni 120 0000 1100
Ni 200 0001 0000
Ni 500 0001 0010
Ni 1000 0000 0110

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 55

Thermal resistor
LG Ni 1000 climatic 0001 1101
LG Ni 1000 standard 0001 1100
Thermocouple
Type B 0000 0000
Type N 0000 0001
Type E 0000 0010
Type R 0000 0011
Type S 0000 0100
Type J 0000 0101
Type L 0000 0110
Type T 0000 0111
Type K 0000 1000
Type U 0000 1001
Type C 0000 1010
Type TXK 0000 1011
Codes for temperature coefficient

The following table contains the codes for the temperature coefficients of the analog input
module. You must enter these codes at byte x+2 (see previous figure).
Table A- 5 Codes for temperature coefficient for temperature measurement
Temperature coefficient Code

Pt 0.00385055 0000 0000
Pt 0.003916 0000 0001
Pt 0.003902 0000 0010
Pt 0.00392 0000 0011
Pt 0.00385 0000 0100
Ni 0.00618 0000 1000
Ni 0.00672 0000 1001
LG-Ni 0.005 0000 1010

56 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Limits for hardware interrupts

The following tables contain the permitted limits for hardware interrupts (in each case, the
usable value is given). The limits depend on the selected measurement type and the
selected measuring range. The value for the overflow must be larger than the value for the
underflow.
Table A- 6 Limits for resistor and voltage
Resistor Voltage
(all possible measuring range settings)
32510 32510 Overflow
1 -32511 Underflow
Table A- 7 Limits for thermocouple types B, C, and E
Thermocouple
Type B Type C Type E
°C °F K °C °F K °C °F K
20699 32765 23431 24999 32765 27731 11999 21919 14731 Overflow
-1199 -1839 1533 -1199 -1839 1533 -2699 -4539 33 Underflow
Table A- 8 Limits for thermocouple types R, S, J, and L
Thermocouple
Types R, S Type J Type L
°C °F K °C °F K °C °F K
20189 32765 22921 14499 26419 17231 11499 21019 14231 Overflow
-1699 -2739 1033 -2099 -3459 633 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow
Table A- 9 Limits for thermocouple types T, K, and U
Thermocouple
Type T Type K Type U
°C °F K °C °F K °C °F K
5399 10039 8131 16219 29515 18951 8499 15619 11231 Overflow
-2699 -4539 33 -2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 57
Table A- 10 Limits for thermocouple types N and TXK
Thermocouple
Type N Type TXK
°C °F K °C °F K
15499 28219 18231 10499 19219 13231 Overflow
-2699 -4539 33 -1999 -3279 733 Underflow
Table A- 11 Limits for thermal resistor
Thermal resistor
Standard Climatic
°C °F K °C °F
Pt 9999 18319 12731 15499 31099 Overflow
-2429 -4053 303 -14499 -22899 Underflow
Ni, Ni-LG 2949 5629 5681 29499 32765 Overflow
-1049 -1569 1683 -10499 -15699 Underflow

58 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Function
The "Switchable wire break check" is available for thermocouples. It switches off the wire
break check for the module.
This is required, for example, to calibrate thermocouples, since the test current necessary for
a wire break check leads to measurement errors during calibration.
The function has no effect on channels that are not assigned in the thermocouple mode.
Note
Startup and parameter reassignment
The wire break check is switched on again at each startup and during any parameter
reassignment of the module.
Switch-off via the user program

You can deactivate the wire break check using data record 237.
Table A- 12 Structure of data record 237, switchable wire break check
Byte Function Format Value Description

0 Command UBYTE 80H Wire break check
1 Identifier UBYTE 00H Not relevant
2 Channel number UBYTE FFH All channels
3 Calibration step UBYTE FFH First triggering
4 Measurement type UBYTE 00H Not relevant
5 Measuring range UBYTE 00H Not relevant
6 Action UBYTE 01H Deactivate wire break check
02H Activate wire break check
7...17 Reserved UBYTE 00H Not relevant

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 59
This appendix shows the analog values for all measuring ranges supported by the analog
input module AI 8xRTD/TC 2-wire HF.

Note
Temperature values
The digitized temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog module.

including sign
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

60 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA


value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 range
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 -100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

value value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-4864 -17.593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 <-17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 61

measuring ranges.

Dec. Hex. ±1 V
32767 7FFF > 1.176 V Overflow
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 1V Nominal range
20736 5100 0.75 V
1 1 36.17 µV
0 0 0V
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -0.75 V
-27648 9400 -1 V
-32512 8100 -1.176 V
-32768 8000 <-1.176 V Underflow
Table B- 5 Voltage measuring range ±500 mV to ±50 mV

Dec. Hex. ±250 mV ±80 mV ±50 mV
32767 7FFF > 294.0 mV > 94.1 mV > 58.8 mV Overflow
32511 7EFF 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV Nominal range
20736 5100 187.5 mV 60 mV 37.5 mA
1 1 9.04 µV 2.89 µV 1.81 µV
0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV
-1 FFFF
-20736 AF00 -187.5 mV -60 mV -37.5 mV
-27648 9400 -250 mV -80 mV -50 mV
-32512 8100 -294.0 mV -94.1 mV -58.8 mV
-32768 8000 <-294.0 mV <-94.1 mV <-58.8 mV Underflow

62 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA

The following tables list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible
resistance-type sensors.
Table B- 6 Resistance-type sensors from 150 Ω to 6000 Ω
Values Resistance-type sensor range Range

Dec. Hex. 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3000 Ω 6000 Ω
32767 7FFF > 176.38 Ω > 352.77 Ω > 705.53 Ω > 3527.7 Ω > 7055.3 Ω Overflow
32511 7EFF 176.38 Ω 352.77 Ω 705.53 Ω 3527.7 Ω 7055.3 Ω Overrange
27649 6C01
27648 6C00 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3000 Ω 6000 Ω Nominal range
20736 5100 112.5 Ω 225 Ω 450 Ω 2250 Ω 4500 Ω
1 1 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 21.70 mΩ 108.5 mΩ 217 mΩ
0 0 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω
-32768 8000 (negative values are physically impossible) Underflow1
1 If the resistors are not connected correctly or the conductor resistance is too high

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 63
Note
A higher resolution can be configured for the measuring range for the standard thermal
resistors, see section Scalable measuring range (Page 25).
The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermal resistors.
Table B- 7 Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 standard
Pt x00 Values Pt x00 Values Pt x00 Values Range

standard Dec. Hex. standard Dec. Hex. standard Dec. Hex.
in °C in °F in K
0.1 °C) 0.1 °F) 0.1 K)
1000.0 10000 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
850.1 8501 2135 1562.1 15621 3D05 1123.3 11233 2BE1
850.0 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 3D04 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 2DC
: : : : : : : : :
-243.0 -2430 F682 -405.4 -4054 F02A 30.2 302 12E
< -243.0 -32768 8000 < -405.4 -32768 8000 < 30.2 32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 8 Thermal resistor Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 climatic
Pt x00 climatic in °C Values Pt x00 climatic in °F Values Range

(1 digit = 0.01 °C) (1 digit = 0.01 °F)
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
> 155.00 32767 7FFF > 311.00 32767 7FFF Overflow
155.00 15500 3C8C 311.00 31100 797C Overrange
: : : : : :
130.01 13001 32C9 266.01 26601 67E9
130.00 13000 32C8 266.00 26600 67E8 Nominal range
: : : : : :
-120.00 -12000 D120 -184.00 -18400 B820
-120.01 -12001 D11F -184.01 -18401 B81F Underrange
: : : : : :
-145.00 -14500 C75C -229.00 -22900 A68C
< -145.00 -32768 8000 < -229.00 -32768 8000 Underflow

64 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Table B- 9 Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 standard
Ni x00 Values Ni x00 Values Ni x00 Values Range

standard standard standard
in °C in °F in K
0.1 °C) 0.1 °F) 0.1 K)
295.0 2950 B86 563.0 5630 15FE 568.2 5682 1632 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
250.1 2501 9C5 482.1 4821 12D5 523.3 5233 1471
250.0 2500 9C4 482.0 4820 12D4 523.2 5232 1470 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-60.0 -600 FDA8 -76.0 -760 FD08 213.2 2132 854
-60.1 -601 FDA7 -76.1 -761 FD07 213.1 2131 853 Underrange
: : : : : : : : :
-105.0 -1050 FBE6 -157.0 -1570 F9DE 168.2 1682 692
< -105.0 -32768 8000 < -157.0 -32768 8000 < 168.2 32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 10 Thermal resistor Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000, LG-Ni 1000 climatic
Ni x00 climatic in °C Values Ni x00 climatic in °F Values Range

(1 digit = 0.01 °C) (1 digit = 0.01 °F)
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
> 295.00 32767 7FFF > 327.66 32767 7FFF Overflow
295.00 29500 733C 327.66 32766 7FFE Overrange
: : : : : :
250.01 25001 61A9 280.01 28001 6D61
250.00 25000 61A8 280.00 28000 6D60 Nominal range
: : : : : :
-60.00 -6000 E890 -76.00 -7600 E250
-60.01 -6001 E88F -76.01 -7601 E24F Underrange
: : : : : :
-105.00 -10500 D6FC -157.00 -15700 C2AC
< - 105.00 -32768 8000 < - 157.00 -32768 8000 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 65
Note
A higher resolution can be configured for thermocouples, see section Scalable measuring
range (Page 25).
The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the thermocouples.
Table B- 11 Thermocouple type B
Type B Values Type B Values Type B Values Range

2070.0 20700 50DC 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2343.2 23432 5B88 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1820.1 18201 4719 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2093.3 20933 51C5
1820.0 18200 4718 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2093.2 20932 51C4 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC
: : : : : : : : :
-120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC
< -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 12 Thermocouple type C
Type C Values Type C Values Type C Values Range

2500.0 25000 61A8 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2773.2 27732 6C54 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
2315.1 23151 5A6F 2786.6 27866 6CDA 2588.3 25883 651B
2315.0 23150 5A6E 2786.5 27865 6CD9 2588.2 25882 651A Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273.2 2732 0AAC
: : : : : : : : :
-120.0 -1200 FB50 -184.0 -1840 F8D0 153.2 1532 05FC
< -120.0 -32768 8000 < -184.0 -32768 8000 < 153.2 -32768 8000 Underflow

66 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Table B- 13 Thermocouple type E
Type E Values Type E Values Type E Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1000.1 10001 2711 1832.1 18321 4791 1273.3 12733 31BD
1000.0 10000 2710 1832.0 18320 4790 1273.2 12732 31BC Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 14 Thermocouple type J
Type J Values Type J Values Type J Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1450.0 14500 38A4 2642.0 26420 6734 1723.2 17232 4350 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1200.1 12001 2EE1 2192.1 21921 55A1 1473.3 14733 398D
1200.0 12000 2EE0 2192.0 21920 55A0 1473.2 14732 398C Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-210.0 -2100 F7CC -346.0 -3460 F27C 63.2 632 0278
< -210.0 -32768 8000 < -346.0 -32768 8000 < 63.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 15 Thermocouple type K
Type K Values Type K Values Type K Values Range

1622.0 16220 3F5C 2951.6 29516 734C 1895.2 18952 4A08 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1372.1 13721 3599 2501.7 25017 61B9 1645.3 16453 4045
1372.0 13720 3598 2501.6 25016 61B8 1645.2 16452 4044 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 67
Table B- 16 Thermocouple type L
Type L Values Type L Values Type L Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1150.0 11500 2CEC 2102.0 21020 521C 1423.2 14232 3798 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
900.1 9001 2329 1652.1 16521 4089 1173.3 11733 2DD5
900.0 9000 2328 1652.0 16520 4088 1173.2 11732 2DD4 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC
< -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 17 Thermocouple type N
Type N Values Type N Values Type N Values Range

in °C in °F in K
1550.0 15500 3C8C 2822.0 28220 6E3C 1823.2 18232 4738 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1300.1 13001 32C9 2372.1 23721 5CA9 1573.3 15733 3D75
1300.0 13000 32C8 2372.0 23720 5CA8 1573.2 15732 3D74 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 18 Thermocouples R and S
Types R, Values Types R, Values Types R, Values Range

S in °C Dec. Hex. S in °F Dec. Hex. S in K Dec. Hex.
2019.0 20190 4EDE 3276.6 32766 7FFE 2292.2 22922 598A Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
1769.1 17691 451B 3216.3 32163 7DA3 2042.3 20423 4FC7
1769.0 17690 451A 3216.2 32162 7DA2 2042.2 20422 4FC6 Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-50.0 -500 FE0C -58.0 -580 FDBC 223.2 2232 08B8
-50.1 -501 FE0B -58.1 -581 FDBB 223.1 2231 08B7 Underrange
: : : : : : : : :
-170.0 -1700 F95C -274.0 -2740 F54C 103.2 1032 0408
< -170.0 -32768 8000 < -274.0 -32768 8000 < 103.2 < 1032 8000 Underflow

68 Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA
Table B- 19 Thermocouple type T
Type T Values Type T Values Type T Values Range

in °C in °F in K
540.0 5400 1518 1004.0 10040 2738 813.2 8132 1FC4 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
400.1 4001 0FA1 752.1 7521 1D61 673.3 6733 1AAD
400.0 4000 0FA0 752.0 7520 1D60 673.2 6732 1AAC Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270.0 -2700 F574 -454.0 -4540 EE44 3.2 32 0020
< -270.0 -32768 8000 < -454.0 -32768 8000 < 3.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 20 Thermocouple type U
Type U Values Type U Values Type U Values Range

in °C in °F in K
850.0 8500 2134 1562.0 15620 2738.0 1123.2 11232 2BE0 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
600.1 6001 1771 1112.1 11121 2B71 873.3 8733 221D
600.0 6000 1770 1112.0 11120 2B70 873.2 8732 221C Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC
< -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 < 73.2 -32768 8000 Underflow
Table B- 21 Thermocouple type TXK (GOST)
Type Values Type Values Type Values Range

TXK in Dec. Hex. TXK in °F Dec. Hex. TXK in K Dec. Hex.
°C
> 1050.0 32767 7FFF > 1922.0 32767 7FFF >1323.2 32767 7FFF Overflow
1050.0 10500 2904 1922.0 19220 4B14 1323.2 13232 33B0 Overrange
: : : : : : : : :
800.1 8001 1F41 1472.1 14721 3981 1073.3 10733 29ED
800.0 8000 1F40 1472.0 14720 3980 1073.2 10732 29EC Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0.0 0 0000 32.0 320 0140 273 2730 0AAA
: : : : : : : : :
-200.0 -2000 F830 -328.0 -3280 F330 73.2 732 02DC
< -200.0 -32768 8000 < -328.0 -32768 8000 <73.2 -32768 8000 Underflow

Manual, 02/2014, A5E32942580-AA 69
Preface
AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST ___________________

(6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0)
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog input module Configuration / address
___________________
space 4
AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST
(6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0)
___________________
Quick start 5
Manual
___________________
Reading and processing
measured values 6
___________________
Energy counters 7
___________________
Parameters 8
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
Measured variables B
___________________
Module versions C
___________________
User data variants D
___________________
Measured value data records E
12/2015 ___________________
Tips and tricks F
A5E36063427-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.
Analog input module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Area of application ..................................................................................................................10
2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST ......................................................................12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................14
3.2 Connection examples .............................................................................................................17
3.3 Current transformer selection data .........................................................................................17
4 Configuration / address space ............................................................................................................... 21
4.1 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................21
4.2 Selecting the module versions ................................................................................................22
4.2.1 Changing over the user data variant during operation ...........................................................23
4.2.2 Recommendations for selecting the module version ..............................................................24
4.3 Applicable modules .................................................................................................................24
5 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 25
6 Reading and processing measured values ............................................................................................ 27
6.1 Basics for reading measured values .......................................................................................27
6.2 Quality information ..................................................................................................................29
6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically ..............................................................31
6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record ...................................................33
7 Energy counters .................................................................................................................................... 34
7.1 How the energy meter works ..................................................................................................34
7.2 Configuring counters ...............................................................................................................36
7.3 Evaluating energy counters ....................................................................................................38
7.4 Reset energy counter..............................................................................................................38
7.4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................38
7.4.2 Reset energy counters via user data ......................................................................................39
7.4.3 Resetting energy counters via data record DS 143 ................................................................41
7.4.4 Example for resetting energy counters via data record DS 143 .............................................42
7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) ...............................................................................45
7.5.1 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ..................................................................................45
7.5.2 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143....................................................47

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 5
Table of contents
8 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 49
8.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 49
8.2 Description of parameters ...................................................................................................... 51
9.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 57
9.2.1 Diagnostics interrupt .............................................................................................................. 57
9.3 Diagnostic alarms................................................................................................................... 58
9.4 Diagnostics response ............................................................................................................. 59
A Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................ 65
A.1 Configuration via parameter data records ............................................................................. 65
A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module ........................................ 66
B Measured variables ............................................................................................................................... 73
C Module versions .................................................................................................................................... 77
C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" ...................................................................................................... 77
C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" .................................................................................................. 79
D User data variants ................................................................................................................................. 83
D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data ....................................... 83
E Measured value data records ................................................................................................................ 92
E.1 Overview of all measured value data records ........................................................................ 92
E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) ............................................ 92
E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ................................................................................. 95
F Tips and tricks....................................................................................................................................... 97
F.1 Tips and tricks ........................................................................................................................ 97

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 7
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 9
Product overview 2
2.1 Area of application
Introduction
Energy efficiency is playing an increasingly important role in industry. Rising energy prices,
increasing pressure to improve profitability and the growing awareness of climate protection
are important factors for reducing energy costs and for introducing an energy data
management system.
Where can you use the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST?

AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is designed for machine-level deployment in an ET 200SP
distributed I/O system. AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST records over 200 different electrical
measurement and energy values. It lets you create transparency about the energy
requirements of individual components of a production plant even down to the machine level.
Using the measured values provided by the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, you can determine
energy consumption and power consumption. You can determine consumption forecasts and
efficiency from the measured values. Power consumption measurements are relevant for
load management and maintenance. In addition, you can use the measurements for energy
reporting and for determining the CO2 footprint.
Note
Measuring dangerous electrical quantities
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is not tested according to DIN EN 61010-2-030 and may
therefore not be used to verify, measure or monitor protective measures according to DIN
EN 61557.
Qualified personnel must ensure through additional measures that no danger ensues for
humans and the environment in case of an incorrect display.
TN and TT system
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST can be used in TN and TT systems.

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Product overview
Measuring with AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST

A typical supply network of a production plant is usually divided into three voltage ranges:
● The infeed of the entire plant
● The subdistribution, for example, to individual lines within the plant
● The end consumers such as the machines in the lines.
The following figure shows the measurement in an electricity supply network:
Image 2-1 Use of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST
Advantages of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST

The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST has the following advantages:
● Space-saving especially for use in control cabinet
● PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP (depending on the interface module in use)
● Multiple modules can be used with one interface module
● Extension of existing stations by components for energy recording

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 11
Product overview
2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST
Article number
6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
View of the module
① Module type and name ⑥ LED for supply voltage

② LED for diagnostics ⑦ Function class
③ 2D matrix code ⑧ Color identification label module type
④ Wiring diagram ⑨ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑩ Article number
Image 2-2 View of the module AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Product overview
Properties
● Measurement of electrical variables from single-phase and three-phase supply networks
● Max. nominal voltage between two outer conductors 400 VAC
● Recording of:
– Voltages
– Currents
– Phase angles
– Power
– Energy / electrical work
– Frequencies
– Power factors
● Firmware update
● Diagnostic error interrupts
Accessories
● BaseUnit Type D0
● Labeling strips
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/58649293) system manual.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 13
Wiring 3
In an ET 200SP station, the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST forms its own potential group
together with its dark BaseUnit.
General safety instructions
WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock
Touching live parts can lead to death or severe injuries.
Before beginning any work deenergize the system and the Energy Meter and short-circuit
installed transformers.
WARNING
Danger to life, dangerous system conditions and material damage possible
Removing and inserting the Energy Meter under live voltage is prohibited! For this reason
the symbol "Do not Hot Swap" is located on the Energy Meter.
If you remove and insert the Energy Meter under live voltage during operation, the
transformers used can produce dangerous induction voltages and electric arcs and
dangerous system conditions can arise.
The Energy Meter may only be removed and inserted during operation if the measuring
voltages applied to the BaseUnit are disconnected at all phases at the terminals UL1 , UL3,
UL3 and special current transformer terminals are used that short-circuit the transformer at
the secondary side when removed.
CAUTION
Use only in three-phase and AC networks
The Energy Meter is destroyed if used with direct voltage / direct current.
Use the Energy Meter solely to measure electrical variables in three-phase and AC
networks.
Supplying the module

The Energy Meter is supplied through the terminals UL1 and N. The required minimum
voltage amounts to 85 VAC.

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Wiring
Protecting the connection cables

To protect the connection cables at UL1, UL2 and UL3, make sure there is adequate cable
protection, especially after cross-section transitions.
If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is
no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST.
Terminal and block diagram
① Microcontroller ULn Voltage connection

② Backplane bus interface ILn Current connection
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) N Neutral conductor
④ Power measurement
Image 3-1 Block diagram of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 15
Wiring
Usable BaseUnit
The ET 200SP Distributed I/O System manual explains that a potential group always starts
with a light BaseUnit. The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST makes an exception in this case and
only uses the dark BaseUnits type D0, 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0.
The BaseUnit is not in contact with the power bus and passes the potential through from the
left to the right slot.
When using some older CPUs / interface modules, note that the first permissible place for AI
Energy Meter 400VAC ST is slot 2.
Connection types
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST supports the following connection types:
● 3P4W, 3 phases, 4 conductors
● 1P2W, 1 phase, 2 conductors
The input circuit of the module must correspond to one of the listed connection types. Select
the appropriate connection type for the intended use.
You will find examples of connections in the section Connection examples (Page 17).
Information on the selection of a current transformer is available in the section Current
transformer selection data (Page 17).

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Wiring
3.2 Connection examples

The following figures show the connection of the Energy Meter for three-phase, two-phase
and single-phase measurements. Note that the Energy Meter must always be connected via
a current transformer.
Connection type Wiring diagram Comment

3P4W Any load
Three-phase measurement, Connection with three current transformers
4 wires
1P2W Measurement in an AC network with a cur-

Single-phase measurement, rent transformer
2 conductors Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all
measured values of Phases 2 and 3 as well
as for some cross-phase measured values.
If short-circuit resistance is ensured by conformity to IEC 61439-1:2009, there is no need for separate line protection for the
AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST.
3.3 Current transformer selection data
Introduction
Connection via a current transformer is always required for the current measurement. Use
toroids with an accuracy class of 0.5, 1 or 3.
Dimensioning of the current transformer

The correct dimensioning of the current transformer is important for the following reasons:
● You achieve correct results from the measurements and
● You do not overload or damage the current transformers.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 17
Wiring
Selecting a current transformer

Use current transformers with a burden capacity 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power
dissipation in the terminal circuit (consisting of resistance of the connection cables and
burden of the Energy Meter). 1.5 times the power loss is required in order to prevent the
transformer from overloading. 2 times the power dissipation is important to ensure the
current limiting in case of a short-circuit.
Maximum length of the connection cable

To avoid overloading or damaging the current transformer, the burden Zn specified on the
data sheet of the current transformer (in VA) must not be exceeded. To prevent this being
exceeded, the entire burden resistance (consisting of the resistance of the connection cable
and the internal resistance of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (see figure below) must be
below a certain resistance value (depending on Zn and Imax).
Image 3-2 Maximum length of the connection cable
The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable is obtained with the following
formula:
RL Cable resistance in ohms Imax Secondary current of the current trans-

former
Zn Rated burden current transformer in VA Rburden Resistance of the Energy Meter (25 mΩ)
Image 3-3 Maximum value for the resistance of the connection cable
Based on the maximum cable resistance in ohms, you then calculate the maximum length of
the connection cable. To do this, check the data sheet of the connection cable you are using.
Note
The length of the connection cable (outwards and return) must not exceed the value of
200 meters.

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Wiring
Example
Current transformer 500/5 A

You use a current transformer with a transmission ration of 500/5 A that has a rated burden
Zn of 5 VA according to the data sheet.
The maximum primary current in the application amounts to 400 A. This means that the
maximum secondary current Imax. amounts to 4 A. The burden of the AI Energy Meter
including connection resistance amounts to RBurden = 25 mΩ.
The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) is
obtained using the following formula:
The maximum cable resistance between the transformer and the terminals of the Energy
Meter may not exceed 287.5 mΩ in this case. The corresponding cable length (outgoing and
incoming line) depends on the cross-section used of the copper line and can be determined
by using the following table.
The following table shows the resistance values of copper cables for typical cross-sections
with ρ = 0.017857 Ω x mm2/m
Estimating the length for a connection cable

The value in the table must be less than the calculated terminal resistance RL max of the
cable. For the resistance RLmax of 287.5 mΩ used in the above example it is possible to use a
connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m from a cross-section of
0.75 mm2 upward.
Cross- AWG Cable overview for copper

section 0.5 m 1m 5m 10 m 50 m
0.25 mm2 24 35.7 mΩ 71.4 mΩ 357.1 mΩ 714.3 mΩ 3571.4 mΩ
0.34 mm2 22 26.3 mΩ 52.5 mΩ 262.6 mΩ 525.2 mΩ 2626.0 mΩ
0.5 mm2 21 17.9 mΩ 35.7 mΩ 178.6 mΩ 357.1 mΩ 1785.7 mΩ
0.75 mm2 19/20 11.9 mΩ 23.8 mΩ 119.0 mΩ 238.1 mΩ 1190.5 mΩ
1.0 mm2 18 8.9 mΩ 17.9 mΩ 89.3 mΩ 178.6 mΩ 892.9 mΩ
1.5 mm2 16 6.0 mΩ 11.9 mΩ 59.5 mΩ 119.0 mΩ 595.2 mΩ
2.5 mm2 14 3.6 mΩ 7.1 mΩ 35.7 mΩ 71.4 mΩ 357.1 mΩ

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 19
Wiring
Checking the ratio of burden load and power loss

The rated burden of the transformer must be 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power loss in the
connection circuit to ensure that the transformer is not overloaded and that the current
limitation is ensured during a short-circuit.
At a maximum secondary current of 4 A the power loss in the connection circuit is calculated
in accordance with the following formula for a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line)
with a length of 10 m and a cross-section of 1.0 mm2 and a burden resistance of the Energy
Meter of 25 mΩ:
The ratio of the rated burden and the power loss in the connection circuit thus amounts to:
The required ratio of rated burden and power loss in the connection circuit lies within the
required range. The transformer is dimensioned sufficiently large.
See also

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Configuration / address space 4
4.1 Configuring
Introduction
To configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST after connecting it, use configuration software
such as STEP 7. In addition, you can also change numerous parameters of the AI Energy
Meter 400VAC ST in RUN via the user program.
Configuring
You configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST with:
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP
● STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 or higher and Hotfix 7
● GSD file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET
Note
Consistency check of the parameter assignment only with STEP 7
If you configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST using STEP 7, STEP 7 already checks the
various parameters for consistency while they are being entered.
If you configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST using a GSD file, a consistency check is
not carried out. The module does not recognize incorrect entries until after the parameter
data record has been transferred. If the module recognizes an invalid parameter, the module
rejects the complete data record.
Preferably use STEP 7 to configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST.
The following instructions show the theoretical procedure for configuring the AI Energy Meter
400VAC ST with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP.
1. Select the ET 200SP distributed I/O system you are using in the hardware catalog.
2. Insert the module into your station.
3. Open the device view of the ET 200SP and insert the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST.
4. Configure the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST to suit your requirements.
Once the configuration has been compiled without errors, you can download the
configuration to the CPU and commission the ET 200SP station while the
AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is running.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 21
Configuration / address space
4.2 Selecting the module versions
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST has different module versions.
During the configuration you use the selection of the module version to specify which
measured values can be read.
Each module version supplies quality information via the input user data.
At the module version "32 I / 12 Q" you can read the measured values as user data cyclically
from the process image. At each module version you have the option to read measured
value records from the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST by using the RDREC instruction
asynchronously.
Influence of the module version on the address space
Note
Influence of the AI Energy Meter 400 VAC ST on the maximum configuration of the
ET 200SP
The available address space of the ET 200SP is influenced by the following factors:
• CPU or interface module
• Plugged I/O modules
The address space made additionally available by the AI Energy Meter 400 VAC ST is
essentially influenced by the length of the user data supplied. The module version
determines the length of the user data, which can be supplied by the AI Energy Meter
400VAC ST at maximum.
Module versions of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC configuration with STEP 7
Module ver- User data Address space Comment

sion
2I/2Q No cyclic user data. 2-byte inputs Information about the structure of the 2 I / 2 Q
Access to measured 2-byte outputs module version is available in the appendix Mod-
values through "Read ule version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 77).
data record".
32 I / 12 Q User data selectable 32 byte inputs / You can change over the user data variant during
through defined user data 12 byte outputs operation.
variants Information about the structure of the 32 I / 12 Q
module version is available in the appendix Mod-
ule version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 79).
Information about the user data variants at 32 I /
12 Q is available in the appendix User data vari-
ants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output
data (Page 83).

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
4.2.1 Changing over the user data variant during operation
Introduction
At the module version 32 I / 12 Q you switch over the user data variant in the output data in
Byte 0.
Requirement
● User program has been created.
● AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is configured as the module version 32 I / 12 Q.
● The start address of the module is known in the process image output.
Procedure
1. Create one constant with the data type BYTE per user data variant.
2. Enter the user data ID as a value in each case.
3. Write the constant to the start address of the module in the process image output.
Result
The user data variant is switched with the next cycle.
Note
Information about user data changeover
The parameterized user data variant is set in the following cases:
• A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant.
• Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value:
– Coding of the user data variant not available

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 23
4.3 Applicable modules
4.2.2 Recommendations for selecting the module version

The following table shows which module version is suitable for a given purpose.
Module version Remarks on the field of application

2I/2Q • Solely acyclic reading of the measured values via the RDREC
instruction from a measured value data record.
• Use of many modules possible because little address space is
used.
32 I / 12 Q • Cyclic reading of the measured values from the user data.
– Various measured variables can be read by switching over
the user data variant.
– One cycle elapses for each user data changeover. Meas-
ured values from the next user data variant are supplied
with a slight time offset.
– Depending on the user data variant, you must convert the
measured values in the CPU to physical values using the
supplied scaling factor.
• Acyclic reading of the measured values via the RDREC instruc-
tion from a measured value data record.
• Use of less modules possible because each module uses 32
bytes input and 12 bytes output.

The following table shows with which controllers the different module versions can be
configured.
Module version
Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 12 Q
IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher
IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher
IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher
IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0 or higher
IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher
CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher
CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher
CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Quick start 5
Introduction
This section shows you how to read and view your first measured values on the Energy
Meter 400 VAC ST in a particularly quick and easy way.
Requirement
You have already connected the Energy Meter to your network with one of the connection
types shown in the section Wiring (Page 14). The Energy Meter 400 VAC ST has already
been integrated in your configuration tool (such as STEP 7), or the Energy Meter 400 VAC
ST has been integrated in your hardware catalog with the GSD/GSDML file.
Procedure
1. Configure an ET 200SP station
Configure an ET 200SP station with a CPU 151xSP or an IM 155-6.
2. Plug module in ET 200S station
Plug the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST into the ET 200SP station and use the module
version with 32 bytes inputs and 12 bytes outputs.
3. Set the module parameters
Set the following parameters for the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST:
– Connection type that you have used for the Energy Meter 400 VAC ST (e.g. 3P4W)
– Measuring range, i.e. the phase voltage (UL1-N) of your electrical network (e.g.
230 V AC)
– Frequency of your network (e.g. 50 Hz)
– Primary and secondary current of the used current transformer (e.g. 100 A and 1 A)
Leave all other parameters at their default settings and do not change them.
4. Load configuration
Switch on the ET 200SP station and download the configuration to the CPU.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 25
Quick start
Result
Once the Energy Meter has been switch on, it provides the measured values for the user
data variant "Basic measurements" with the ID 254 or FEH.
Read and check the measured values provided by the Energy Meter in the output data.
The table below shows the structure of the user data variant, the measured variables and the
data type of the measured values in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) that are stored in the 32 bytes of
output data of the module. Each measured variable is referenced via the measured value ID.
An overview of all the measured variables with their measured value IDs is provided in the
section Measured variables (Page 73).
Table 5- 1 Total power L1L2L3
Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Measured

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 254 (FEH) -
1 Quality information = QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1 BYTE Bit string qq xx xx xx -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 9 Total active power L1L2L3 INT 1W -27648 … 27648 66035
10 ... 11 Total reactive power L1L2L3 INT 1 var -27648 … 27648 66036
12 ... 13 Total apparent power L1L2L3 INT 1 VA -27648 … 27648 66034
14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 200
18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 202
22 Reserved BYTE - 0 -
23 Total power factor L1L2L3 USINT 0.01 0 … 100 66037
24 Scaling current L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
27 Scaling total active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
28 Scaling total reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
29 Scaling total apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
30 Scaling total active energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
31 Scaling total reactive energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
If you require further information about the evaluation and interpretation of the measured
values, please refer to the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 27).

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Reading and processing measured values 6
6.1 Basics for reading measured values
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST provides the measured values and variables through the
following methods:
● Cyclic: User data
● Acyclic: Measured value data records
User data
User data provide pre-defined measured values depending on the configured user data
variant. The supplied measured values are cyclically written to the process image of the
CPU. With some user data variants, the measured values are supplied as raw data, which
you have to convert to the corresponding physical values using a supplied scaling factor.
Measured value data records

Each measured value data record supplies physical values that you can further process
immediately. You read the values of a measured value data record acyclically with the
RDREC instruction in a PLC tag of the STRUCT data type. You need a corresponding PLC
tag for each measured value data record to be read.
You can display the read measured values in a watch table in STEP 7. Address the tag with
the STRUCT data type directly.
Note
If you are using CPUs other than S7-1200 or S7-1500, convert 64-bit measured values to
32-bit measured values. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy.
For more information, read FAQ: Processing 64-bit-floating-point numbers in S7-300/400
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/56600676)
Validity of the measured values

After turning on the supply voltage UL1, the first measured values are available after
approximately 2 seconds. In the input user data, the content of byte 0 is set to the selected
user data variant. You can use this change in byte 0 as a trigger event.
As soon as the module has valid measured values, the value of this byte changes to a value
within the value range.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 27
Reading and processing measured values
Initial startup of the module

After the first startup or restart of the module, the parameters are transferred to the module.
You can preset a user data variant in the parameters of the hardware configuration. This
remains in effect until a different user data variant is selected in the output data (byte 0). This
allows input user data to be modified dynamically according to the requirements of the
process.
The user data variant defined in parameter data record 128 is used under the following
conditions:
● A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant.
● Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value: Coding of the
user data variant not available
Current measured values become "0"

The current and all other measured values based on it are suppressed (or set "0") in the data
records and in the user data in the following cases:
● The incoming current of the current transformer is less than the configured "Low limit for
measuring current" parameter
● Incoming secondary current at the channel is higher than 12 A
The following measured values and derived measured variables of the phase involved
become "0":
● Effective current value
● Active power
● Reactive power
● Apparent power
● Phase angle
● Power factor
A floating mean value is formed from the power values. These only become "0" after a
corresponding time. The energy meter for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset
phase does not count any longer.

The substitute values for input values of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST amount to "0".
See also
Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 31)
Read measured value from a measured value data record (Page 33)
Selecting the module versions (Page 22)

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
6.2 Quality information
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST supplies quality information about the measurement in a
status word. This information can be used to evaluate the status:
● Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) and voltages (U1, U2, U3) lie within the valid measuring range
● Operating quadrants for Phase 1.
You can evaluate the quality information at every module version in Byte 1 of the output user
data.
Structure of the quality information
Image 6-1 Quality information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 29
Operating quadrant
Image 6-2 Quadrant in the quality bits
See also
Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 79)

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically
Requirement
● STEP 7 is open.
● AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is configured.
Scaling of measured values in the user data

Since the value range of 16-bit values is often smaller than the value range of the physical
value, a scaling factor is supplied together with the basic value in the user data for the
respective measured or calculated values. You determine the actual value of the measured
variable with the following formula:
Actual value of measured quantity = measured value in the user data x 10scaling factor
Procedure
To read measured values from the user data cyclically, proceed as follows:
1. Read the relevant measured value from the input data.
2. Observe the scaling factor at scaled measured values and convert the read measured
value using the scaling factor.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 31
Example
The user data variant 254 (FEH) "Total power L1L2L3" is configured on the AI Energy Meter
400VAC ST. The measured value for "Current L1" should be read.

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
In the user data variant FEH (254) the measured value for the current L1 is stored in Byte 2 +
3. The current is supplied by the module as a 16-bit-fixed-point number in the value range
from 0 to 65535 in the unit 1 mA. In addition the scaling factor for the current L1 has to be
considered additionally. The module supplies the related scaling factor in Byte 24.
The actual value for current L1 is calculated as follows:
Actual value for current L1 = Current L1 x 10Scaling current L1
See also
Basics for reading measured values (Page 27)

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record
Introduction
To read measured values of a measured value data record, use the RDREC instruction. The
read values are stored in a PLC variable with user-defined data type (UDT).
You can find more information on this in the STEP 7 documentation, under the keyword
"RDREC".
Requirement
● STEP 7 is open.
Procedure
1. Create a PLC tag of the STRUCT data type in STEP 7.
2. Insert the number of structural elements, which corresponds to the number of entries
contained in the measured value data record.
3. Insert the RDREC instruction in the user program.
4. Configure the RDREC instruction as follows:
– ID: Hardware identifier or start address of the Energy Meter (depending on the CPU
used).
– INDEX: Number of measured value data record whose entries are read.
– MLEN: Length of the measured value data record in bytes. "0" if all the entries are to
be read.
– RECORD: Target range for the read data record Length depends on MLEN.
5. Call the RDREC instruction with REQ = 1.
Result
The values from the measured value data record were transferred into the target data area.
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 33
Energy counters 7
7.1 How the energy meter works
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST provides 42 energy counters that detect both line-based
and phase-based energy values.
● Active energy (total, outflow, inflow)
● Reactive energy (total, outflow, inflow)
● Apparent energy (total)
How energy recording works

Based on the measured currents and voltages and the calculation cycle the Energy Meter
calculates the active, reactive and apparent energy. The active, reactive and apparent
energies are updated in each calculation cycle.
Configuring
You configure the following settings for the energy counters:
● Activation of the gate for the energy counter
The gate allows you to start and stop the counters via output data (DQ bit). If you
deactivate the gate, the count starts immediately when the Energy Meter is switched on.
● Modes of the energy counters
The energy counter count endlessly.
The settings apply to the energy counter of all phases.
Changing properties in RUN

You can change the following properties of energy counters in runtime:
● Enable / disable energy counter
● Reset energy counter
● Set initial values for the energy counter
Automatic reset of the energy counter

The energy counters are automatically reset to "0" when parameter settings relevant to the
energy counter are changed. In the case of phase-specific changing of parameter settings
relevant to the energy counter only the energy counters of the respective phases are reset.
Changing of the following parameters results in resetting of the energy counters:
● Measurement type or range
● Current transformer (primary current/secondary current)
● Direction of current

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
Example
The following figure shows the effect of initial value, reset and start/stop parameters with
activated gating using the energy counter as an example:
① The counter is reset to the value specified in the configuration. The gate is closed. The counter does not count.
② The gate is opened via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts.
③ The configured current low limit has been violated. The counter does not count.
④ The gate is closed. The counter does not count. A new start value is written to the measured value data record 143
with the WRREC instruction.
⑤ The gate is opened again via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts with
the new start value.
⑥ The counter is reset via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts from the
new start value that was transferred via the measured value data record 143.
See also
Evaluating energy counters (Page 38)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 35
Energy counters
7.2 Configuring counters
Overview
You can configure the energy counters of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST as follows:
● Activate / Deactivate
● Start / stop counters using gate
● Set and reset start value
Energy counter gate

You have the option of starting and stopping the energy counter using the gate. To this
purpose you have to:
● Select the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the configuration of
the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST.
● Set the DQ bit for the "counter gate" in the user data in Control byte 1 of the output data
(Bit 6 in Control byte 1).
The "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter
date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts.
Image 7-1 Gate enabled

36 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
If you deselect the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the
configuration of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST, the energy counters operate
independently of the DQ bit as long as the current value lies above the configured "Low limit
for measuring current".
Image 7-2 Gate disabled
Set and reset start value

The counters can be set to their start value via the output data of each user data variant.
With energy counters, you have to reset the bit of the energy counter in control byte 2 of the
data record 143.
You can reset each energy counter to the start value or also specify a new start value via the
data record 143. You define the moment for updating of the start values in the data record
143 and in Control byte 1 in the user data. Start values are either applied immediately or
after a reset bit has been set from 0 to 1.
You can find a detailed description for this in section Data record for energy counter (DS
143) (Page 45).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 37
Energy counters
7.3 Evaluating energy counters
7.3 Evaluating energy counters
Evaluating energy counters

The energy counters are evaluated by
● Using the input data of the user data variants for energy
– User data variant "Total energy L1 L2 L3" (ID 249 or F9H)
– User data variant "Energy L1" (ID 248 or F8H)
● By reading data records
– "Data record for basic measured values (DS 142)" for evaluation of the total energies
L1 L2 L3
– "Data record for energy counter (DS 143)" for evaluation of the phase-specific
energies
– "Data record for phase-specific measured values L1 - L3 (DS 147 - 149) for evaluation
of the phase-specific energies.
Evaluate measured values

The evaluation of measured values via the input data of user data variants and reading of
data records with the RDREC instruction is described in the section Reading and processing
measured values (Page 27).
7.4 Reset energy counter
7.4.1 Introduction
Introduction
At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the energy counter of the
Energy Meter Reset here means that the energy counters are reset to their start value.
The following section describes how you
● Reset energy counters via the outputs of the user data.
● Reset energy counters via data record 143.

38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
7.4.2 Reset energy counters via user data
Introduction
Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the energy counters depends on
the configured module version.
If you use module versions with 12 bytes output data, you can reset the energy counters for
all the phases separately by active, reactive and apparent energy.
If you use the module version with 2 bytes output data, you always reset all the energy
counters simultaneously. Differentiated resetting of the counters by active, reactive and
apparent energy is only possible via data set DS 143 for this module version, see section
Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 45).
Procedure at module version with 12 bytes of output data

1. Set the category of the energy counters (active, reactive, apparent energy) to 1 in Control
byte 2 via Bit 0 to 2.
2. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change.
Image 7-3 Resetting the energy counters at module version with 12 bytes of output data

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 39
Energy counters

Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change.
Start values
After the reset the energy counters count with the specified start values (default = 0). You
can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143, see section
Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 45).

40 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
7.4.3 Resetting energy counters via data record DS 143
Introduction
At all the module versions you can reset the energy counters via the data record DS 143.
Resetting is possible for:
● Energy counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and apparent
energy.
Procedure at all module versions via data record DS 143

1. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set the reset bit (Bit 2) to 1 and Bit 0 to 1 for the overflow
counter.
2. In Control byte 2 of the DS 143 set the category of the energy counters (active, reactive,
apparent energy) to 1 via Bits 5 to 7.
3. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set Bit 7 for the moment of application of the start values:
– Bit 7 to 0, if the start value are to be applied immediately after the transfer of the data
record
– Bit 7 to 1, if the start value are only to be applied after the reset bit has been set in the
output data of the user data.
4. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction.
Image 7-5 Energy counter control information DS 143
Start values
You specify the moment for the application of the start values in Control byte 1 via Bit 7.
can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 41
Energy counters
7.4.4 Example for resetting energy counters via data record DS 143
Introduction
Before you can transfer the data record DS 143 to the CPU you have to create a PLC data
type in your user program that has an identical structure to data record DS 143.
Procedure
1. Create a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143.
Detailed information on the structure of data record 143 is available in section Structure
for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 45).
Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Measured

value ID
0 Version BYTE - 1 -
2 Control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - -
3 Control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string
8...15 Active energy inflow LREAL Wh 61180
(initial value) L1 See Section Struc-
16...23 Active energy outflow LREAL Wh ture for energy 61181
(initial value) L1 counters (DS 143)
(Page 45)
: : : : : :

42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
2. Create a DB or instance DB and allocate the values of the data record

Byte 0 and byte 1:
Enter the value 01H in Byte 0 and the value 00H to Byte 1.
Byte 2 ... byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter
In the control byte for the respective phases, specify which energy and overflow counters
you want to reset.
The control bytes specify for each phase (L1, L2, L3) separately if and which energy
meter values are to be reset.
Image 7-6 Control information DS 143 for energy and overflow counter
Byte 8 ... byte 127: Start values for the individual energy meters
The start values for energy counters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers.
This corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 43
Energy counters
3. Write the data record to the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST module using the "WRREC"
instruction.
The input parameters must be allocated as follows:
– REQ: A new write job is triggered if REQ = TRUE.
used).
– INDEX: The data record number: 143
– LEN: The maximum length of the data record: 128
– RECORD: A pointer to the data area in the CPU which includes data record 143.
Note
If you want to write or read several AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST at the same time, keep
in mind the maximum number of active jobs in communication with SFB52/SFB53.

44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143)
7.5.1 Structure for energy counters (DS 143)
Energy meter data record 143 for different actions

The energy meter data record 143 includes all energy meters available on the module
phase-by-phase. The data record can be used for different actions:
● Reset the energy counter to user-specific value (e.g. "0")
● Reading the current values of the energy counters
Energy meter data record 143
Table 7- 1 Energy meter data record 143
Byte Measured variable Data type Unit Value range Meas-

ured
value ID
8...15 Active energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61180
16...23 Active energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL Wh 61181
24...31 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61182
32...39 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L1 LREAL varh 61183
40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh 61184
72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh During reading: 61203
0.0...1.8 x 10308
During writing:
0.0...3.4 x 1012

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 45
Energy counters
Error while transferring the data record

The module always checks all the values of the transferred data record. Only if all the values
were transferred without errors does the module apply the values from the data record.
The WRREC instruction for writing data records returns corresponding error codes when
errors occur in the STATUS parameter.
The following table shows the module-specific error codes and their meaning for the
measured value data record 143:
Error code in STATUS parameter Meaning Solution

(hexadecimal)
DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data
record.
DF 80 B1 00 Length of the data record incorrect Enter a valid value for the data record
length.
DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the mod-
ule is plugged or drawn.
Check the assigned values for the
parameters of the WRREC instruction
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 2...7 and set the reserved
bits back to 0.
DF 80 E1 39 Incorrect version entered. Check Byte 0. Enter a valid version.
DF 80 E1 3A Incorrect data record length entered. Check the parameters of the WRREC
instruction. Enter a valid length.
DF 80 E1 3C At least one start value is invalid. Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes
158...169. The start values may not
be negative.
DF 80 E1 3D At least one start value is too large Check Bytes 8...103 and Bytes
158...169. Observe the ranges of
values for start values.

46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Energy counters
7.5.2 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143
Introduction
Bytes 2 to 7 of data record 143 form the phase-based control and feedback interface for the
measured value data record of the energy counter.
● Bytes 2 and 3: Control and feedback interface for phase 1
Status information
When data record 143 is read with the RDREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 supply phase-
specific status information for energy counters.
The status information enables you can see which counters are returning their values in the
data record 143. If energy counters return their values in the status byte 1, you can
determine the type of energy counter with status byte 2.
Image 7-7 Status information DS 143 (read access)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 47
Energy counters
Control information
When data record 143 is written with the WRREC instruction, Bytes 2 to 7 are used as
phase-specific control information for energy counters. The length of the control information
amounts to 2 bytes for each phase:
● In Control byte 1 you determine how you reset the counter and the time at which the
counter is reset.
● In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counter you want to reset.
Image 7-8 Control information DS 143 (write access)

48 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Parameters 8
8.1 Parameters
Parameters of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST (DS 128)

As a rule the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is already integrated in the hardware catalog of
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7 V5.5 or higher. In this case STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7
V5.5 or higher checks the parameterized properties for plausibility during designing.
However, you can also assign parameters to the module by means of the GSD file and the
configuration software of any provider. The module does not check the validity of the
parameterized properties until after the configuration has been loaded. Note that some
parameters depend on the selected connection type of the Energy Meter. For example in the
connection type 1P2W for measurements in single-phase AC network it does not make
sense to enter parameters for Phases 2 and 3 and they are also not checked by the system
in this case.
The effective range of the parameters that can be set using a GSD file depends on the type
of bus system used:
In addition you can change the parameterized properties via the user program in RUN mode.
parameters to the module using data records (refer to the appendix Configuration via
parameter data records (Page 65)). The following table summarizes all the configurable
parameters.
Table 8- 1 AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST parameters
Parameters Value range Default setting Recon- Effective range with configuration
figura- software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
tion in GSD file GSD file
RUN PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP
Diagnostics line • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
voltage
• Enable
Connection type • Disabled 3P4W - 3 phases, Yes Module Module
4 conductors (only 1P2W,
• 1P2W - 1-phase alternating
current 3P4W
and deactivat-
• 3P4W - 3 phases,
ed)
4 conductors

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 49
Parameters
8.1 Parameters
Voltage measuring • 100 V 230 V Yes Module Module
range
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 127 V
• 190 V
• 200 V
• 208 V
• 220 V
• 230 V
Line voltage toler- • 1 ... 50 % 10 % Yes Module Module
ance [%]
Line frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz Yes Module Module
• 60 Hz
Enable gate ener- • No No Yes Module -
gy counter
• Yes
User data variant See the table Overview of the user Total energy L1 Yes Module Module
data variants (Page 83) L2 L3 (ID 254 or (only user data
FEH) variant
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase Module

overflow current
• Enable
overflow voltage
• Enable
underflow voltage
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase -
low limit voltage (blocking is
• Enable
preset)
overflow cumula-
• Enable
tive values
Overcurrent toler- • 10 ... 100 [0.1 A] 100 [0.1 A] Yes Channel/phase Module
ance factor [0.1 A]
Overcurrent toler- • 1 ... 60000 ms 40000 ms Yes Channel/phase Module
ance time [ms]
Low limit for cur- • 20 ... 250 mA 50 mA Yes Module -
rent measurement (Default set-
[mA] ting: 20 mA)

50 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Parameters
Current transform- • 1 ... 10000 A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module
er primary (Value range:
current [A] 1...65535)
Current transform- • 1A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module
er secondary cur-
• 5A
rent
Reverse current • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase Module
direction
• Enable
Diagnostics line voltage

Activate the diagnostics line voltage here. If there is no voltage or too little voltage at L1, the
message "No supply voltage at L1" is output and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered.
Connection type
Specify the connection type you used for the Energy Meter here.
For more detailed information, refer to "Connection examples (Page 17)".
Voltage measuring range

Here you can set the voltage measuring range of the power supply system.
Line voltage tolerance

Monitoring the supply voltage based on this tolerance band is a positive or negative value.
Line frequency
Here you can set the line frequency of the power supply system.
Enable gate energy counter

Enable the gate for the energy counter here. When the gate is enabled, the energy counter
only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1".

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 51
Parameters
Diagnostics overflow current

The measured current is monitored after expiration of the "Tolerance time" for "Measured
current x 0.1 x Tolerance factor". A violation results in a current overflow.
① The tolerance time starts as soon as the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is exceeded.
② DIAG_UEBERLAST diagnoses the affected phase if the tolerance value of the secondary cur-
rent has been exceeded within the assigned tolerance time (or the maximum value of the sec-
ondary current (10 A) is exceeded).
③ After the set tolerance time has elapsed, the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is monitored. A
violation of the secondary current value also returns DIAG_UEBERLAST.
Image 8-1 Diagnostics response in the event of a current overload
Diagnostics overflow voltage

Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the overflow triggers
a diagnostic interrupt.
Diagnostics underflow voltage

Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the underflow
triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
Diagnostics low limit voltage

Low limit for voltage is monitored. A violation of the low limit triggers a diagnostic interrupt.

52 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Parameters
Diagnostics overflow cumulative values

A cumulative overflow in the calculated variables is displayed. The values stop at the high or
low limit. A violation triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
Overcurrent tolerance factor

The tolerance factor secondary overcurrent parameter (10 to 100) indicates the tolerable
value of the secondary current in 0.1 A increments (10 = 1 A to 100 = 10 A). Always take
note of the current class of the current transformer being used (1 A, 5 A).
Overcurrent tolerance time

Monitoring time in which the overcurrent is tolerated. 0 means that the monitoring time has
been disabled.
Low limit for measuring current

The configurable low limit for measuring current refers to the secondary currents and is used
to avoid incorrect calculations in the case of very low currents. Incorrect measurements of
very low currents in particular are a cause of inaccuracies in the current transformer used.
Set the low limit for the current measurement to the required value depending on your
process.
Tip: If you want to find the low limit for the current measurement experimentally, set it to a
lower value. Then, feed in a very precise low current and determine the measurement error
that can no longer be tolerated. Afterwards, set the low limit for the current measurement to
the limit value you have determined.
If current falls below the low limit for the current measurement, the following measured
values and derived variables of the affected phase are reset.
● Active power
● Reactive power
● Apparent power
● Phase angle
● Power factor
A moving mean value is formed from the power values and they only become "0" after a
corresponding time. The energy meters for active, reactive and apparent energy of the reset
phase do not measure any longer.
Current transformer primary current

Enter here the nominal value for the primary current of the current transformer used. The
transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 53
Parameters
Current transformer secondary current

Enter here the nominal value for the secondary current (1 A or 5 A) of the current
transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary
current.
Reverse current direction

Setting to determine whether or not to reverse the direction of current.
In the event of inadvertent incorrect connection, this parameter can be used to correct the
measured values, thus saving the hassle of rewiring. The direction of the current is only
evident from the power measurement values. The current measurement value is an rms
value.

54 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
LED display
② Error (red)
③ PWR (green)
④ Status (green)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 55

The following table explains the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial
measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 58).
DIAG LED
Table 9- 1 Meaning of the DIAG LED
DIAG Meaning
Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Status LED
Table 9- 2 Meaning of the Status LED
Status Meaning
Channel deactivated or error
Off
Channel activated and no error
On
Error LED
Table 9- 3 Meaning of the Error LED
Status Meaning
Channel is OK
Off
Channel is faulty
On
PWR LED
Table 9- 4 Meaning of the PWR LED
PWR Meaning
Line voltage missing
Off
Line voltage available
On

56 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
9.2 Interrupts
9.2 Interrupts
The AI Energy Meter ST analog input module supports diagnostics interrupts.
9.2.1 Diagnostics interrupt
● Channel is temporarily unavailable
● Error
● Low limit voltage violated (measuring voltage < 80 V)
● High limit value voltage exceeded
● Underflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) violated
● Overflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) exceeded
● Overload (current measurement > 12 A or tolerance overcurrent exceeded after expiry of
the tolerance time)
● Overflow of the calculated values (measured or calculated values screen exceed the
representable range of values)
See also
Diagnostic alarms (Page 58)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 57
9.3 Diagnostic alarms
Diagnostic alarms
Note
Assignment channel in diagnostics alarm ⇔ Phase
In the diagnostic messages the channels are counted from "Channel "0" on, in the AI Energy
Meter 400VAC ST from Phase "1" on.
Note the following assignment:
• Channel "0" ⇔ Phase "1"
Table 9- 5 Error types
Diagnostic message Error code Meaning Solution

Undervoltage1 2H Line voltage (measuring range) is moni- Observe the line voltage range
Overvoltage 3H tored for tolerance. Violation leads to volt-
age overflow/underflow
Overload 4H The measured current is monitored after Observe the current range
expiration of the "Tolerance time" for "Tol-
erance factor × Measured current". Ex-
ceeding this results in overflow current.
The maximum value of the secondary
current (12 A) has been exceeded.
High limit 7H Cumulative overflow in the calculated val- -
ues
Low limit1 8H Violation of the low limit for voltage meas- Observe the voltage range
urement. The message occurs when the
configured minimum current or voltage is
below 80 V.
Error 9H Internal module error (diagnostic alarm on Replace the module
channel 0 applies to the entire module).
Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient line voltage on Check supply
phase L1
Channel is temporarily 1FH Firmware upgrade is being performed. --
The module is currently not performing any
measurements.
A user calibration is being executed at the Complete the user calibration
channel.
1 If the "Undervoltage" and "Low limit" diagnostics are active at the same time, the "Low limit" diagnostics has higher
priority and deletes the "Undervoltage" diagnostics.

58 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
9.4 Diagnostics response
Diagnostics response
This section describes the response of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST when diagnostics
information is reported.
Measured values in the case of diagnostics

Even in the case of diagnostics, measured values continue to be displayed as long as they
can still be acquired. If measured values cannot be measured or calculated, "0" is displayed.
Zero suppression
If the supplied current is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current"
parameter, the current measurement and all dependent variables are suppressed or set to
"0".
Overload limitation
If the secondary current fed in at the channel is higher than 12 A, the module changes to
limitation and the measured value of the current and all dependent variables are set to "0".
Value falls below "Low limit current measurement"

● Active power
● Reactive power
● Apparent power
● Phase angle
● Power factor
Loss of the supply voltage

At a loss of supply voltage at UL1 (phase 1), all measurements are interrupted.
After the supply voltage is restored, the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST operates again with the
configuration / parameter assignment stored in the CPU. The energy counter is used for
retentively stored values.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 59
Input data to "0"
Note
If the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST is no longer recognized by the interface module (for
example, because it is defective or not plugged in), all input data are set to "0".

60 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Technical specifications of the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST 6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
General information
Product type designation AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST
Usable BaseUnits BU type D0, BU20-P12+A0+0B
label
Product function
Voltage measurement Yes
Voltage measurement with voltage transformer No
Current measurement Yes
Phase current measurement without current trans- No
former
Phase current measurement with current trans- Yes
former
Energy measurement Yes
Frequency measurement Yes
Power measurement Yes
Active power measurement Yes
Reactive power measurement Yes
I&M data Yes
Isochronous mode No
Operating mode
Cyclic measurement Yes
Acyclic measurement Yes
Via user data Yes
Via data record Yes
Installation type / mounting
Installation position Any
Supply voltage
Description Supply via voltage measurement channel L1
Type of supply voltage 100 - 240 VAC
Permissible range, low limit (AC) 90 V
Permissible range, high limit (AC) 264 V

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 61
6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
Line frequency
Valid range, low limit 47 Hz
Valid range, high limit 63 Hz
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 44 bytes; 32 bytes input / 12 bytes output
Automatic code
• Mechanical coding element Yes
Time
Available No
Analog inputs
Cycle time (all channels), typ. 50 ms. Time for the consistent updating of all
measured and calculated values (cyclic and acy-
clic data)
Interrupts
Limit interrupt No
Monitoring of supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes
Channel status display Yes
For channel diagnostics Yes
For module diagnostics Yes
Integrated functions
Measuring functions
Buffering of measured variables No
Parameter length 38 bytes
Measuring method for voltage measurement TRMS
Measuring method for current measurement TRMS
Type of measured data acquisition Complete
Voltage wave form Sinusoidal or distorted
Band width of the measured value detection 2 kHz. Harmonic: 39 / 50 Hz, 32 / 60 Hz
Operating mode for measured value acquisition
• Automatic line frequency acquisition No; can be assigned
• Fixing at 50 Hz No; default setting
• Fixing at 60 Hz No

62 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
Measuring range
• Frequency measurement, min. 45 Hz
• Frequency measurement, max. 65 Hz
Measuring inputs for voltage

• Measurable line voltage between phase and 230 V
neutral conductor
• Measurable line voltage between the line con- 400 V

ductors

neutral conductor, min.

neutral conductor, max.

ductors, min.

ductors, max.
• Measuring category for voltage measurement CAT II. CAT III with prescribed protective ele-
in accordance with IEC 61010-2-030 ments
• Internal resistance line conductor and N- 3.4 mΩ

conductor
• Power consumption, per phase 20 mW
• Surge voltage strength 1.2/50µs 1 kV
Measuring inputs for current

• Relative measurable current for AC, min. 5%; in relation to the secondary rated current; 1
A, 5 A
• Relative measurable current for AC, max. 100%; in relation to the secondary rated current;
1 A, 5 A
• Continuous current for AC, maximum permis- 5A
sible
• Apparent power consumption per phase for 0.6 VA

measuring range 5 A
• Rated value of short-time current carrying 100 A

capacity is restricted to 1 s
• Input resistance measuring range 0 to 5 A 25 mΩ; at the terminal
• Zero point suppression Configurable: 20 - 250 mA, default 50 mA
• Impulse withstand capability 10 A; for 1 minute

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 63
6ES7134-6PA01-0BD0
Error limits
• Reference condition for measuring accuracy Symmetrical loading, rated current: 20-100%, 50
Hz; active power: LF = 1, reactive power: LF = 0
• For voltage measured variable ±0.5 %
• For current measured variable ±0.5 %
• For active power measured variable ±0.5 %
• For reactive power measured variable ±0.5 %
• For total active energy measured variable Class 1 according to IEC 62053-21:2003
• For total reactive energy measured variable Class 2 according to IEC 62053-23:2003
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes. 3700 VAC (type test) CATIII
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2300 VAC 1 min. (type test)
Ambient conditions
Vertical mounting position, max. 50 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Weight (without packaging) 45 g
Miscellaneous
Current transformer selection data
Cable length (clamp-type transformer) depending 200 m
on Zn and Imax
ATEX approval
In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;
Dimension drawing
See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)
manual

64 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
A.1 Configuration via parameter data records
The parameter data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether
you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN mode, for example change the diagnostics
behavior.

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module via the respective
data record. The parameters set in STEP 7 do not change in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are still valid after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module (so that the user data size changes) and diagnostics are pending
prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

If errors occur during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module
online help.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 65
A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module
Image A-1 Parameter data record 128
Header information

66 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA

The figure below shows the structure of the header information for a module.
Image A-3 Module header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 67


68 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Image A-4 Module parameter block
You can find the user data variant in the section Overview of the user data variants
(Page 83).

The following figure shows the structure of the header information for a channel.
Image A-5 Channel header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 69


70 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Image A-6 Channel parameter block

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 71

parameter data record 128.
Error code in STATUS parame- Meaning Solution

ter
(hexadecimal)
DF 80 B0 00 Number of the data record unknown Enter a valid number for the data record.
length.
DF 80 B2 00 Slot invalid or cannot be accessed. Check the station whether the module is
plugged or drawn.
Check the assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WRREC instruction
DF 80 E0 01 Incorrect version Check Byte 0. Enter valid values.
DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the length
and number of the parameter blocks.
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 6, 10, 20...21, 28...30, 36 and
37 and set the reserved bits back to 0.
DF 80 E1 02 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 8, 14, 22, and 30 and set the
reserved bits back to 0.
DF 80 E1 05 Measuring range for voltage invalid. Check Byte 5. Permitted values: 01H to
0CH
DF 80 E1 20 Connection type invalid. Check Byte 4. Permitted values: 00H,
0BH ... 01H
DF 80 E1 21 Parameter for user data variant not possi- Check Byte 11. Select a different user data
ble. variant or change the configuration.
DF 80 E1 22 Parameter for user data variant is invalid. Check Byte 11. Select a valid code for the
user data variant.
DF 80 E1 23 Parameter for frequency is invalid. Check Byte 6. Enter valid values.
DF 80 E1 24 Parameter for tolerance line voltage is Check Byte 7. Enter valid values.
invalid.
DF 80 E1 25 Parameter for current transformer second- Check Bit 4...5 in Byte 20, 28, 36. Enter
ary is invalid. valid values.
DF 80 E1 29 Parameter for tolerance factor overcurrent Check Byte 15, 23, 31. Enter valid values.
invalid.
DF 80 E1 30 Parameter for tolerance time overcurrent Check Bytes 16...17, 24...25, 32...33. En-
invalid. ter valid values.
DF 80 E1 2B Parameter for low limit measuring current Check Byte 9. Enter valid values.
invalid
DF 80 E1 2C Parameter for current transformer primary Check Bytes 18...19, 26...27, 34...35. En-
current is invalid. ter valid values.
DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a
valid data record number.

72 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Measured variables for data records and user data
The following table provides an overview of all measured variables that are used in the data
records and user data.
Note that the format and unit differ in the evaluation of records and user data.
Table B- 1 Measured variables for data records and user data
Meas- Measured variables Data Unit Value range Connection type

ured type 1P2W 3P4W
value
ID
1 Voltage UL1-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 ✓ ✓
2 Voltage UL2-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 ✓
3 Voltage UL3-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 ✓
4 Voltage UL1-L2 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 ✓
7 Current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 … 10000.0 ✓ ✓
8 Current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 … 10000.0 ✓
9 Current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 … 10000.0 ✓
10 Apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓ ✓
11 Apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓
12 Apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓
13 Active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓ ✓
14 Active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109
15 Active power L3 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓
16 Reactive power L1 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓ ✓
17 Reactive power L2 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓
18 Reactive power L3 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓
19 Power factor L1 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓
20 Power factor L2 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓
21 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓
30 Frequency 4 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 ✓ ✓
34 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓ ✓
35 Total active power L1L2L3 5 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓ ✓
36 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 ✓ ✓
37 Total power factor L1L2L3 67 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓
38 Amplitude balance for voltage 2 REAL % 0 ... 100 ✓

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 73
Measured variables

ured type 1P2W 3P4W
value
ID
39 Amplitude symmetry for current 2 REAL % 0 ... 200 ✓
200 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
201 Total active energy REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
outflow L1L2L3 6
202 Total reactive energy REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
inflow L1L2L3 6
203 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
204 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
205 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
206 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓
210 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
211 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
212 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
213 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
214 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
215 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
216 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
220 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
221 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
222 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
223 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
224 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
225 Total active energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
226 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 6 UDINT varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
61178 Phase angle L1 3 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 ✓ ✓
61180 Active energy inflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61181 Active energy outflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61182 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61183 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61184 Apparent energy L1 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61185 Active energy L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61186 Reactive energy L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓
61198 Phase angle L2 3 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 ✓
61200 Active energy inflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61201 Active energy outflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61202 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61203 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61204 Apparent energy L2 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61205 Active energy L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61206 Reactive energy L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓

74 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Measured variables

ured type 1P2W 3P4W
value
ID
61218 Phase angle L3 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 ✓
61220 Active energy inflow L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61221 Active energy outflow L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61222 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61223 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61224 Apparent energy L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61225 Active energy L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
61226 Reactive energy L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓
62110 Active energy inflow L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
62111 Active energy outflow L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
62112 Reactive energy inflow L1 6 UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
62113 Reactive energy outflow L1 6 UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
62114 Apparent energy L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓
62210 Active energy inflow L2 6 UDINT Wh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62211 Active energy outflow L2 6 UDINT Wh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62212 Reactive energy inflow L2 6 UDINT Varh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62213 Reactive energy outflow L2 6 UDINT Varh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62214 Apparent energy L2 6 UDINT VAh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62310 Active energy inflow L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62311 Active energy outflow L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62312 Reactive energy inflow L3 6 UDINT Varh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62313 Reactive energy outflow L3 6 UDINT Varh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
62314 Apparent energy L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ...4.294.967.296 ✓
66001 Voltage UL1-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 ✓ ✓
66002 Voltage UL2-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 ✓
66003 Voltage UL3-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 ✓
66004 Voltage UL1-L2 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 30000 ✓
66007 Current L1 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓
66008 Current L2 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 ✓
66009 Current L3 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 ✓
66010 Apparent power L1 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓
66011 Apparent power L2 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓
66012 Apparent power L3 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓
66013 Active power L1 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓
66014 Active power L2 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓
66015 Active power L3 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓
66016 Reactive power L1 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓
66017 Reactive power L2 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 75
Measured variables

ured type 1P2W 3P4W
value
ID
66018 Reactive power L3 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓
66019 Power factor L1 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓
66020 Power factor L2 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓
66021 Power factor L3 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓
66030 Frequency 4 USINT 1 Hz 45 ... 65 ✓ ✓
66034 Total apparent power L1L2L3 5 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓
66035 Total active power L1L2L3 5 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓
66036 Total reactive power L1L2L3 5 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓
66037 Total power factor L1L2L3 6 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓
66038 Frequency 4 UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 ✓ ✓
1 Effective value
2 IEC 61557-12
3 Arithmetical mean value over 200 ms as floating mean
4 Arithmetical mean value over 10 s as floating mean
5 Simple summation
6 Calculation from the start/restart (inflow and outflow values are positive numbers)
7 Determined from ratio of active and apparent power
Format
Table B- 2 Format and its length in bytes
Format in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Format to IEEE Length in bytes Comment

BYTE BYTE 1 byte Bit field with 8 bit
WORD WORD 2 bytes Bit field with 16 bit
USINT INT8 (unsigned) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits without sign
INT INT16 (signed) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits with sign
UINT INT16 (unsigned) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits without sign
UDINT INT32 (unsigned) 4 bytes Fixed-point number 32 bits without sign
REAL Float32 4 bytes Floating-point number 32 bits with sign
LREAL Float64 8 bytes Floating-point number 64 bits with sign

76 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Module versions C
C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q"
User data of the module

The module has 2 bytes of input user data and 2 bytes of output user data for status and
control information. At this module version measured variables can be read solely via
measured value data records (no measured variables can be evaluated via user data).
Structure of input user data

The structure of the input user data is fixed.
Table C- 1 Structure of input user data (2 bytes)
Byte Validity Designation Comment

0 Module User data vari- Constant = 0x80
ant
1 Module Quality infor- Quality bits to describe the quality of the basic measured values
mation

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 77
Module versions
Allocation of the input user data
Image C-1 Allocation of the status bytes in the input user data (2 bytes)
Structure of output user data

The structure of the output user data is fixed.
Table C- 2 Structure of output user data (2 bytes)

0 Module Reserved Reserved
1 Module Control outputs Reset of values and counters, gate

78 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Module versions
Assignment of the output user data

You control the counter gate for the energy counter via the output user data.
Image C-2 Allocation of the control byte in the output user data (1 byte)
Note
For module version 2 I / 2 Q, a reset always acts on all energy counters of the three phases.

The module occupies 32 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output user data. Of these
the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 12 bytes output data for
control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (Bytes 2 to 31)
or acyclically via measured value data records

You can set the contents of the input user data dynamically. You can choose between
different user data variants.

0 Module User data vari- Display of the utilized user data variant
ant
mation
2 ... 31 Module or phase Data 2 or 4 bytes of measured values or calculated values according to
user data variant

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 79
Module versions

You can change the measured variables during operation. You can choose between different
user data variants.
Image C-3 Assignment of the input user data (32 bytes)

80 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Module versions

The structure of the output user data is fixed and is the same at all the selectable user data
variants.
Via the output user data you globally control
● Resetting for energy counter (reset via Byte 1 and selection via Byte 2)
● The counter gate for the energy counter.

0 Module User data vari- Switching the user data variant
ant
1 Module Control byte 1 Reset of values and counters, gate
2 Module Control byte 2 Selection for resetting the energy counters
3 ... 11 Reserved
Control byte for user data variant
Image C-4 Allocation of the control bytes for user data variant (Byte 0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 81
Module versions
Control bytes for all three phases
Image C-5 Allocation of the control bytes for all three phases (bytes 1 and 2)

82 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data
User data
30 bytes are available for transferring the measured values in a cycle at the module version
32 I / 12 Q. Therefore this module version supports dynamic switching between 22
preconfigured user data variants that contain a specific selection of measured values.
For more detailed information, refer to "Selecting the module versions (Page 22)".
Table D- 1 Overview of the user data variants
User data User data variant

Total power L1L2L3 254 (FEH) - default setting
Active power L1L2L3 253 (FDH)
Reactive power L1L2L3 252 (FCH)
Apparent power L1L2L3 251 (FBH)
Basic measured values L1L2L3 250 (FAH)
Total energy L1L2L3 249 (F9H)
Energy L1 248 (F8H)
Energy L2 247 (F7H)
Energy L3 246 (F6H)
Basic variables three-phase measurement 245 (F5H)
L1L2L3

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 83
User data variants
Total power L1L2L3 (ID 254 or FEH)
Table D- 2 Total power L1L2L3

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 …4294967295 225
18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 …4294967295 226

84 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
User data variants
Active power L1L2L3 (ID 253 or FDH)
Table D- 3 Active power L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 253 (FDH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 9 Active power L1 INT 1W -27648 … 27648 66013
20 Power factor L1 USINT 0.01 0 … 100 66019
27 Scaling active power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
30 Scaling active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 85
User data variants
Reactive power L1L2L3 (ID 252 or FCH)
Table D- 4 Reactive power L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 252 (FCH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 9 Reactive power L1 INT 1 var -27648 … 27648 66016
16 ... 19 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 4294967295 226
27 Scaling reactive power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
30 Scaling reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

86 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
User data variants
Apparent power L1L2L3 (ID 251 or FBH)
Table D- 5 Apparent power L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 251 (FBH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 9 Apparent power L1 INT 1 VA -27648 … 27648 66010
16 ... 19 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 4294967295 224
27 Scaling apparent power L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
30 Scaling apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
31 Scaling total apparent energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 87
User data variants
Basic measured values L1L2L3 (ID 250 or FAH)
Table D- 6 Basic measured values L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 250 (FAH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 9 Voltage UL1-N UINT 0.01 V 0 … 30000 66001
14 ... 15 Voltage UL1-UL2 UINT 0.01 V 0 … 60000 66004
27 Reserved BYTE - - -
30 ... 31 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 0 ... 65535 66038

88 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
User data variants
Total energy L1L2L3 (ID 249 or F9H)
Table D- 7 Total energy L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 249 (F9H) -
4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 220
8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 221
11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 222
16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 223
20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 … 4294967295 224
25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 -
Energy L1 (ID 248 or F8H)
Table D- 8 Energy L1

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 7 Active energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 62110
8 ... 11 Active energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 62111
11 ... 15 Reactive energy inflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 62112
16 ... 19 Reactive energy outflow L1 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 62113
20 ... 23 Apparent energy L1 UDINT 1 VAh 0 … 4294967295 62114
25 Scaling active energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
26 Scaling active energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
27 Scaling reactive energy inflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
28 Scaling reactive energy outflow L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
29 Scaling apparent energy L1 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 89
User data variants

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 11 Active energy L3, outflow UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 62311

90 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
User data variants

value ID
Basic variables three-phase measurements (ID 245 or F5H)
Table D- 11 Basic variables three-phase measurements

value ID
2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 66034
109
6 ... 9 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 62418
10 ... 13 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 62417
14 ... 17 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 … 10000.0 7
18 ... 21 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 … 10000.0 8
22 ... 25 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 … 10000.0 9

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 91
E.1 Overview of all measured value data records
Energy Meter 400VAC ST writes the measured values in several data records that you can
read acyclically using the RDREC instruction in the user program.
The following tables show the structure of the individual data records:
● Data record DS 142 for basic measured values (read only).
● Data record DS 143 for energy counters (read and write).
E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142)
Measured variables of the module

The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142
supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some
measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that
are not relevant.
The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the
overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 73)).
Table E- 1 Data record 142

value ID
2...5 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 300.0 1
14...17 Voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0.0 ... 600.0 4
26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 … 10000.0 7
30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 … 10000.0 8
34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 … 10000.0 9
38...41 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19
50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37

92 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA

value ID
54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30
58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 38
62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current REAL % 0 ... 200 39
66...69 Apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 10
78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 34
82...85 Reactive power L1 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 16
94...97 Total reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 36
98...101 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 13
110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 35
114...117 Phase angle L1 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 61178
126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 204
130...133 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 206
134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 205
138...141 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202
142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203
146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 200
150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 201
154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 214
162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 216
170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 215
178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212
186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213
194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210
202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211
Note
• The cumulative value of the energy counters in 3-phase operation is obtained from the
sums of the individual values of the phases.
• Inflow and outflow energy meters are always positive values.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 93
Procedure
Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter 400VAC ST. Use SFB "RDREC" to read
out the data record from the module. This system function block is stored in the STEP 7
library.
Measured values in STEP 7 as of V5.5

Measured values are represented as negative values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 if the value range
of the integer format (32767 dec) is exceeded. This is not an error in the measured value.
Solution: Select hexadecimal representation.
Conversion of 64-bit floating-point numbers

If you cannot process 64-bit floating-point numbers in your automation system, we
recommend conversion to 32-bit floating-point numbers. Note the conversion can cause loss
of accuracy. For a description of the conversion of the 64-bit floating-point numbers (data
type LREAL) into 32-bit floating-point numbers (data type REAL) please refer to the Internet

94 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143)


Table E- 2 Energy meter data record 143

value ID
72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh During reading: 61203
80...87 Apparent energy (initial value) L2 LREAL VAh 0.0...1.8 x 10308 61204
During writing:
0.0...3.4 x 1012

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 95


(hexadecimal)
record.
length.
bits back to 0.
be negative.

96 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA
Tips and tricks F
F.1 Tips and tricks
FAQ and application examples

Several FAQs and application examples are available to help you at work with the AI Energy
Meter .
Measuring and visualizing energy data

You can find these application example at Internet
IT network
You must create an artificial N-conductor (for example, by means of a 1:1 voltage
transformer) in IT networks due to the missing neutral conductor. You can then use the
module.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36063427-AA 97
Preface
___________________
___________________
Product overview 2
AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST
SIMATIC ___________________
Wiring 3
(6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0) ___________________
Configuration / address
space 4
ET 200SP
Quick start 5
AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST ___________________
Reading and processing
6
measured values
(6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0)
___________________
Energy counters 7
Manual ___________________
Operating hours counter 8
___________________
Limit monitoring 9
___________________
Minimum and maximum
values 10
___________________
Phase-based measured
values 11
___________________
Parameters 12
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
Module versions C
___________________
___________________
___________________
Tips and tricks F
12/2015
A5E36061895-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
Note
should be paid.

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Area of application ..................................................................................................................11
2.2 Properties of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST ......................................................................13
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................15
3.2 Connection examples .............................................................................................................18
3.3 Current transformer selection data .........................................................................................21
4 Configuration / address space ............................................................................................................... 25
4.1 Configuring ..............................................................................................................................25
4.2 Selecting the module versions ................................................................................................26
4.2.1 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7 .......................................................................27
4.2.2 Module versions at configuration with GSD file ......................................................................28
4.2.3 Changing over the user data variant during operation ...........................................................29
4.2.4 Recommendations for selecting the module version ..............................................................30
4.3 Applicable modules .................................................................................................................31
5 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 33
6 Reading and processing measured values ............................................................................................ 35
6.1 Basics for reading measured values .......................................................................................35
6.2 Quality information ..................................................................................................................37
6.3 Reading measured values from user data cyclically ..............................................................40
6.4 Read measured value from a measured value data record ...................................................42
7 Energy counters .................................................................................................................................... 43
7.1 How the energy meter works ..................................................................................................43
7.2 Configuring counters ...............................................................................................................46
7.3 Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter ......................................................................47
7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters .................................................................48
7.4.1 Reset energy counters via user data ......................................................................................48
7.4.2 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 ...........................50
7.4.3 Example for energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 .......................52
7.5 Data record for energy counter (DS 143) ...............................................................................55
7.5.1 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ..................................................................................55
7.5.2 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143....................................................60

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 5
Table of contents
8 Operating hours counter ....................................................................................................................... 62

8.1 How the operating hours counter works ................................................................................ 62
8.2 Reset operating hours counters ............................................................................................. 63
8.2.1 Reset operating hours counters via user data ....................................................................... 63
8.2.2 Resetting operating hours counters via data record DS 143 ................................................. 65
9 Limit monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 66
9.1 How limit monitoring works .................................................................................................... 66
9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring .................................................... 67
9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation ..................................................... 69
10 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................................. 71
10.1 Minimum and maximum values ............................................................................................. 71
10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values ............................................................................. 72
11 Phase-based measured values ............................................................................................................. 74
11.1 Phase-based measured values ............................................................................................. 74
12 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 76
12.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 76
12.2 Description of parameters ...................................................................................................... 80
13.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 87
13.2.1 Hardware interrupts ............................................................................................................... 87
13.2.2 Diagnostics interrupt .............................................................................................................. 88
13.3 Diagnostic alarms................................................................................................................... 88
13.4 Diagnostics response ............................................................................................................. 90
A Parameter data records ........................................................................................................................ 97
A.1 Configuration via parameter data records ............................................................................. 97
A.2 Structure of the parameter data record 128 for the entire module ........................................ 98
A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring .......................................... 106
A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping .................................... 110
B Measured variables ..............................................................................................................................113
C Module versions ...................................................................................................................................122
C.1 Module version "2 I / 2 Q" .................................................................................................... 122
C.2 Module version "32 I / 12 Q" ................................................................................................ 125
C.3 "User-specific" module version ............................................................................................ 131
C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" ...................... 133

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Table of contents
D User data variants ............................................................................................................................... 135

D.1 User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data ......................................135
E Measured value data records .............................................................................................................. 155
E.1 Overview of all measured value data records ......................................................................155
E.2 Measured value data record for base measurements (DS 142) ..........................................156
E.3 Structure for energy counters (DS 143) ................................................................................159
E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144) ................................................164
E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145) .................................................165
E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) .....................166
E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150) .......170
F Tips and tricks..................................................................................................................................... 172
F.1 Tips and tricks .......................................................................................................................172

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 7
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 9
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Product overview 2
Introduction
Energy efficiency is playing an increasingly important role in industry. Rising energy prices,
increasing pressure to improve profitability and the growing awareness of climate protection
are important factors for reducing energy costs and for introducing an energy data
management system.
Where can you use the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST?

AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is designed for machine-level deployment in an ET 200SP
distributed I/O system. AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST records over 200 different electrical
measurement and energy values. It lets you create transparency about the energy
requirements of individual components of a production plant even down to the machine level.
Using the measured values provided by the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, you can determine
energy consumption and power consumption. You can determine consumption forecasts and
efficiency from the measured values. Power consumption measurements are relevant for
load management and maintenance. In addition, you can use the measurements for energy
reporting and for determining the CO2 footprint.
Note
Measuring dangerous electrical quantities
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is not tested according to DIN EN 61010-2-030 and may
therefore not be used to verify, measure or monitor protective measures according to DIN
EN 61557.
Qualified personnel must ensure through additional measures that no danger ensues for
humans and the environment in case of an incorrect display.
TN and TT system
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST can be used in TN and TT systems.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 11
Product overview
Measuring with AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST

A typical supply network of a production plant is usually divided into three voltage ranges:
● The infeed of the entire plant
● The subdistribution, for example, to individual lines within the plant
● The end consumers such as the machines in the lines.
The following figure shows the measurement in an electricity supply network:
Image 2-1 Use of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST
Advantages of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST

The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST has the following advantages:
● Space-saving especially for use in control cabinet
● PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP (depending on the interface module in use)
● Multiple modules can be used with one interface module
● Extension of existing stations by components for energy recording

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Product overview
Article number
6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
View of the module
① Module type and name ⑥ LED for supply voltage

② LED for diagnostics ⑦ Function class
③ 2D matrix code ⑧ Color identification label module type
④ Wiring diagram ⑨ Function and firmware version
⑤ LEDs for channel status ⑩ Article number
Image 2-2 View of the module AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 13
Product overview
Properties
● Measurement of electrical variables from single-phase, two-phase and three-phase
supply networks
● Max. nominal voltage between two outer conductors 480 VAC
● Retentive storage of the counter values
● Recording of:
– Voltages
– Currents
– Phase angles
– Power
– Energy / electrical work
– Frequencies
– Minimum and maximum values
– Power factors
– Operating hours
– Limits
● Firmware update
● Diagnostics and hardware interrupts
Accessories
● BaseUnit Type D0
● Labeling strips
system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/es/58649293) system manual.

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Wiring 3
In an ET 200SP station, the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST forms its own potential group
together with its dark BaseUnit.
General safety instructions
WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock
Touching live parts can lead to death or severe injuries.
Before beginning any work deenergize the system and the Energy Meter and short-circuit
installed transformers.
WARNING
Danger to life, dangerous system conditions and material damage possible
Removing and inserting the Energy Meter under live voltage is prohibited! For this reason
the symbol "Do not Hot Swap" is located on the Energy Meter.
If you remove and insert the Energy Meter under live voltage during operation, the
transformers used can produce dangerous induction voltages and electric arcs and
dangerous system conditions can arise.
The Energy Meter may only be removed and inserted during operation if the measuring
voltages applied to the BaseUnit are disconnected at all phases at the terminals UL1 , UL3,
UL3 and special current transformer terminals are used that short-circuit the transformer at
the secondary side when removed.
CAUTION
Use only in three-phase and AC networks
The Energy Meter is destroyed if used with direct voltage / direct current.
Use the Energy Meter solely to measure electrical variables in three-phase and AC
networks.
Supplying the module

The Energy Meter is supplied through the terminals UL1 and N. The required minimum
voltage amounts to 85 VAC.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 15
Wiring
Protecting the connection cables

To protect the connection cables at UL1, UL2 and UL3, make sure there is adequate cable
protection, especially after cross-section transitions.
If short-circuit resistance according to IEC 61439-1:2009 is ensured by the design, there is
no need for separate cable protection for the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST.
Terminal and block diagram
① Microcontroller ULn Voltage connection

② Backplane bus interface ILn Current connection
③ Analog-to-digital converter (ADC) N Neutral conductor
④ Power measurement
Image 3-1 Block diagram of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Wiring
Usable BaseUnit
The ET 200SP Distributed I/O System manual explains that a potential group always starts
with a light BaseUnit. The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST makes an exception in this case and
only uses the dark BaseUnits type D0, 6ES7193-6BP00-0BD0.
The BaseUnit is not in contact with the power bus and passes the potential through from the
left to the right slot.
When using some older CPUs / interface modules, note that the first permissible place for AI
Energy Meter 480VAC ST is slot 2.
Connection types
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST supports the following connection types:
● 3P4W1, 3 phases, 4 conductors, balanced load
● 1P2W, 1 phase, 2 conductors
● 3 x 1P2W, 3 x 1 phase, 2 conductors
The input circuit of the module must correspond to one of the listed connection types. Select
the appropriate connection type for the intended use.
You will find examples of connections in the section Connection examples (Page 18).
Information on the selection of a current transformer is available in the section Current
transformer selection data (Page 21).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 17
Wiring

The following figures show the connection of the Energy Meter for three-phase, two-phase
and single-phase measurements. Note that the Energy Meter must always be connected via
a current transformer. The use of voltage transformers is optional.

3P4W Any load
Three-phase measurement, Connection with three current transformers
4 wires
3P4W Any load

Three-phase measurement, Connection with three current and three
4 wires voltage transformers
3P4W1 Balanced load

Three-phase measurement, Connection with one current transformer
4 wires

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Wiring

3P4W1 Balanced load
Three-phase measurement, Connection with one current and one voltage
4 wires transformer
2P3W Any load

Two-phase measurement, 3 Connection with two current transformers
conductors Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all
measured values of Phase 3 as well as for
some cross-phase measured values.
2P3W Any load

Two-phase measurement, 3 Connection with two current and two voltage
conductors transformers
Energy Meter supplies the value "0" for all
measured values of Phase 3 as well as for
some cross-phase measured values.
1P2W Measurement in an AC network with a cur-

Single-phase measurement, rent transformer

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 19
Wiring

1P2W Measuring the load in an AC network with a
Single-phase measurement, current and a voltage converter
3 x 1P2W Measurement with three current transform-

3 x single-phase measure- ers for any three loads that are each con-
ment nected to one of the three phases
Max. permissible secondary current of the
current transformer is 1 A
3 x 1P2W Measurement with three current transform-

3 x single-phase measure- ers and three voltage transformers for any
ment three loads that are each connected to one
of the three phases
Max. permissible secondary current of the
current transformer is 1 A
If short-circuit resistance is ensured by conformity to IEC 61439-1:2009, there is no need for separate line protection for the
AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST.

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Wiring
Introduction
Connection via a current transformer is always required for the current measurement. Use
toroids with an accuracy class of 0.5, 1 or 3.
Dimensioning of the current transformer

The correct dimensioning of the current transformer is important for the following reasons:
● You achieve correct results from the measurements and
● You do not overload or damage the current transformers.
Selecting a current transformer

Use current transformers with a burden capacity 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power
dissipation in the terminal circuit (consisting of resistance of the connection cables and
burden of energy meter). 1.5 times the power loss is required in order to prevent the
transformer from overloading. 2 times the power dissipation is important to ensure the
current limiting in case of a short-circuit.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 21
Wiring
Maximum length of the connection cable

To avoid overloading or damaging the current transformer, the burden Zn specified on the
data sheet of the current transformer (in VA) must not be exceeded. To prevent this being
exceeded, the entire burden resistance (consisting of the resistance of the connection cable
and the internal resistance of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (see figure below) must be
below a certain resistance value (depending on Zn and Imax).
Image 3-2 Maximum length of the connection cable
The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable is obtained with the following
formula:
RL Cable resistance in ohms Imax Secondary current of the current trans-

former
Zn Rated burden current transformer in VA Rburden Resistance of the Energy Meter (25 mΩ)
Image 3-3 Maximum value for the resistance of the connection cable
Based on the maximum cable resistance in ohms, you then calculate the maximum length of
the connection cable. To do this, check the data sheet of the connection cable you are using.
Note
The length of the connection cable (outwards and return) must not exceed the value of
200 meters.

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Wiring
Example: Usage of a current transformer 500/5 A

You use a current transformer with a transmission ration of 500/5 A that has a rated burden
Zn of 5 VA according to the data sheet.
The maximum primary current in the application amounts to 400 A. This means that the
maximum secondary current Imax. amounts to 4 A. The burden of the AI Energy Meter
including connection resistance amounts to RBurden = 25 mΩ.
The maximum value of the resistance of the connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) is
obtained using the following formula:
The maximum cable resistance between the transformer and the terminals of the Energy
Meter may not exceed 287.5 mΩ in this case. The corresponding cable length (outgoing and
incoming line) depends on the cross-section used of the copper line and can be determined
by using the following table.
The following table shows the resistance values of copper cables for typical cross-sections
with ρ = 0.017857 Ω x mm2/m
Estimating the length for a connection cable

The value in the table must be less than the calculated terminal resistance RL max of the
cable. For the resistance RLmax of 287.5 mΩ used in the above example it is possible to use a
connection cable (outgoing and incoming line) with a length of 10 m from a cross-section of
0.75 mm2 upward.
Cross- AWG Cable overview for copper

section 0.5 m 1m 5m 10 m 50 m
0.25 mm2 24 35.7 mΩ 71.4 mΩ 357.1 mΩ 714.3 mΩ 3571.4 mΩ
0.34 mm2 22 26.3 mΩ 52.5 mΩ 262.6 mΩ 525.2 mΩ 2626.0 mΩ
0.5 mm2 21 17.9 mΩ 35.7 mΩ 178.6 mΩ 357.1 mΩ 1785.7 mΩ
0.75 mm2 19/20 11.9 mΩ 23.8 mΩ 119.0 mΩ 238.1 mΩ 1190.5 mΩ
1.0 mm2 18 8.9 mΩ 17.9 mΩ 89.3 mΩ 178.6 mΩ 892.9 mΩ
1.5 mm2 16 6.0 mΩ 11.9 mΩ 59.5 mΩ 119.0 mΩ 595.2 mΩ
2.5 mm2 14 3.6 mΩ 7.1 mΩ 35.7 mΩ 71.4 mΩ 357.1 mΩ

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 23
Wiring
Checking the ratio of burden load and power loss

The rated burden of the transformer must be 1.5 to 2 times greater than the power loss in the
connection circuit to ensure that the transformer is not overloaded and that the current
limitation is ensured during a short-circuit.
At a maximum secondary current of 4 A the power loss in the connection circuit is calculated
in accordance with the following formula for a connection cable (outgoing and incoming line)
with a length of 10 m and a cross-section of 1.0 mm2 and a burden resistance of the Energy
Meter of 25 mΩ:
The ratio of the rated burden and the power loss in the connection circuit thus amounts to:
The required ratio of rated burden and power loss in the connection circuit lies within the
required range. The transformer is dimensioned sufficiently large.
See also

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Configuration / address space 4
4.1 Configuring
Introduction
To configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST after connecting it, use configuration software
such as STEP 7. In addition, you can also change numerous parameters of the AI Energy
Meter 480VAC ST in RUN via the user program.
Configuring
You configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST with:
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP
● STEP 7 V5.5 SP4 or higher and Hotfix 7
● GSD file for PROFIBUS or PROFINET
Note
Consistency check of the parameter assignment only with STEP 7
If you configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST using STEP 7, STEP 7 already checks the
various parameters for consistency while they are being entered.
If you configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST using a GSD file, a consistency check is
not carried out. The module does not recognize incorrect entries until after the parameter
data record has been transferred. If the module recognizes an invalid parameter, the module
rejects the complete data record.
Preferably use STEP 7 to configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST.
The following instructions show the theoretical procedure for configuring the AI Energy Meter
480VAC ST with STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V13 SP1 or higher with Update 4 and HSP.
1. Select the ET 200SP distributed I/O system you are using in the hardware catalog.
2. Insert the module into your station.
3. Open the device view of the ET 200SP and insert the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST.
4. Configure the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST to suit your requirements.
Once the configuration has been compiled without errors, you can download the
configuration to the CPU and commission the ET 200SP station while the
AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is running.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 25
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST has different module versions.
During the configuration you use the selection of the module version to specify which
measured values can be read.
Each module version supplies quality information via the input user data.
With the exception of the module version "2 I / 2 Q" you can read the measured values as
user data cyclically from the process image. At each module version you have the option to
read measured value records from the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST by using the RDREC
instruction asynchronously.
Influence of the module version on the address space
Note
Influence of the AI Energy Meter 480 VAC ST on the maximum configuration of the
ET 200SP
The available address space of the ET 200SP is influenced by the following factors:
• CPU or interface module
• Plugged I/O modules
The address space made additionally available by the AI Energy Meter 480 VAC ST is
essentially influenced by the length of the user data supplied. The module version
determines the length of the user data, which can be supplied by the AI Energy Meter
480VAC ST at maximum.

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
4.2.1 Module versions at configuration with STEP 7
Module versions with fixed user data assignment
Module version User data Address space Comment

Access to measured values 2-byte outputs module version is available in the appendix Module
through "Read data record". version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 122).
EE@Industry E0 User data in accordance with 12 byte inputs / Information about the structure of the EE@Industry
EE@Industry measurement 12 byte outputs measured data profiles is available in the appendix
EE@Industry E1 data profiles 4 byte inputs / Module version "EE@Industry measurement data
12 byte outputs profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3" (Page 133).
EE@Industry E2 12 byte inputs /
12 byte outputs
EE@Industry E3 104 byte inputs /
12 byte outputs
Module versions with selectable user data variants
Module version User data Address space Comment

32 I / 12 Q User data selectable through 32 byte inputs / You can change over the user data variant during
defined user data variants 12 byte outputs operation.
Information about the structure of the 32 I / 12 Q
module version is available in the appendix Module
version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 125).
Information about the user data variants at 32 I / 12
Q is available in the appendix User data variants
with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data
(Page 135).
User-specific User data selectable through Variable* / You have to activate the check box "User da-
user data mapping or through 12 byte outputs ta-mapping" in STEP 7 to use the module version
defined user data variant user-specifically.
You can change over the user data variant during
operation.
Information about the structure of the user-specific
module version is available in the appendix "User-
specific" module version (Page 131).
* 16 ... 256 bytes in steps of 16 bytes, depending on the mapped measured values

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 27
4.2.2 Module versions at configuration with GSD file
Module versions with fixed user data assignment

sion
Access to measured 2-byte outputs module version is available in the appendix Mod-
values through "Read ule version "2 I / 2 Q" (Page 122).
data record".
E0 User data in accordance 12 byte inputs / Information about the structure of the
with EE@Industry meas- 12 byte outputs EE@Industry measured data profiles is available
E1 urement data profiles 4 byte inputs / in the appendix Module version "EE@Industry
12 byte outputs measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"
(Page 133).
E2 12 byte inputs /
12 byte outputs
E3 104 byte inputs /
12 byte outputs
Module versions with selectable user data variants

sion
32 I / 12 Q User data selectable 32 byte inputs / You can change over the user data variant during
through user data variants 12 byte outputs operation.
64 I / 12 Q or through user-specific 64 byte inputs / If you use user-specific user data, you write your
user data* 12 byte outputs measured value profile into the AI Energy Meter
128 I / 12 Q 128 byte inputs / 480VAC ST with the data record 130. To do this
12 byte outputs use the WRREC instruction. Information about the
structure of data record 130 is available in appen-
256 I / 12 Q 256 byte inputs / dix Structure of the parameter data record 130 for
12 byte outputs user-data mapping (Page 110).
*Ensure that the user data do not exceed the size of the address space of the module version. If necessary, use a module
version with a larger address space

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
4.2.3 Changing over the user data variant during operation
Introduction
You change the user data variant in the output data of each user data variant in Byte 0.
The following figure shows to which user data you can change over at various module
versions during operation.
Requirement
● User program has been created.
● AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is configured as one of the module versions mentioned in
the illustration above.
● The start address of the module is known in the process image output.
Procedure
1. Create one constant with the data type BYTE per user data variant.
2. Enter the user data ID as a value in each case.
3. Write the constant to the start address of the module in the process image output.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 29
Result
The user data variant is switched with the next cycle.
Note
Information about user data changeover
The parameterized user data variant is set in the following cases:
• A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant.
• Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value:
or
– Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant.
4.2.4 Recommendations for selecting the module version

The following table shows which module version is suitable for a given purpose.
Module version Application Note

2I/2Q • Use of many AI Energy Meter • Read the measured values solely via the RDREC instruc-
480VAC ST in an ET 200SP tion from a measured value data record.
or little address space is • Quality information about the measured values is always
available available.
EE@Industry measu- • Cyclic measurement per • Available measured values depend on the configured
rement data profile phase measurement data profile.
E0 / E1 / E2 / E3 • Supplied measured values in • The user data are fixed and cannot be changed dynami-
accordance with the cally. Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically
EE@Industry measured data from a measured value data record via the RDREC in-
profile struction.
• No quality information
32 I / 12 Q • Cyclic measurement per • Quality information about the measured values is always
phase available.
• Flexibility by switching prede- • Depending on the user data variant, you must convert
fined user data variants the measured values in the CPU to physical values using
the supplied scaling factor.
User-specific • Cyclic measurement of up to
With GSD configuration 64 measured values configu- • One cycle elapses for each user data changeover.
rable Measured values from the next user data variant are thus
• 32 I / 12 Q supplied with a slight time offset.
• 64 I / 12 Q • Flexibility by switching prede-
fined user data variants Alternatively, read the measured values acyclically from
• 128 I / 12 Q a measured value data record via the RDREC instruc-
• 256 I / 12 Q tion. Consistent measured values of a measuring cycle
are supplied.

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Configuring with STEP 7

configured with STEP 7.
Table 4- 1 Module versions configured with STEP 7
Module version
Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 12 Q User-specific EE@Industry measurement data profile
E0 E1 E2 E3
IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V1.0 or higher* V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher
V3.1 or higher
IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher* V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher
V3.1 or higher
IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher --- V3.2 or higher ---
IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0 or higher
IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher --- V1.0 or higher ---
CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher
V2.0 or higher
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher
V2.0 or higher
CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V1.6 or higher* V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher
V2.0 or higher
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher
V2.0 or higher
CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher V1.7 or higher* V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher
V2.0 or higher
* Only up to 32 bytes

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 31
Configuring with GSD file

configured using a GSD file.
Table 4- 2 Module versions configuring with GSD file
Module version
Controller 2 I / 2Q 32 I / 12 Q 64 I / 12 Q EE@Industry measurement data
128 I / 12 Q profile
256 I / 12 Q E0 E1 E2 E3
IM 155-6 PN ST V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V1.0 or higher V3.1 or higher
IM 155-6 PN HF V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher V2.0 or higher V3.1 or higher
IM 155-6 PN BA V3.2 or higher --- V3.2 or higher ---
IM 155-6 PN HS V4.0 or higher ---
IM 155-6 DP HF V1.0 or higher --- V1.0 or higher ---
CPU 1510SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher
CPU 1510SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher
CPU 1512SP-1 PN V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.6 or higher V2.0 or higher
CPU 1512SP F-1 PN V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher
CPU 1515SP PC V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher V1.7 or higher V2.0 or higher

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Quick start 5
Introduction
This section shows you how to read and view your first measured values on the Energy
Meter 480 VAC ST in a particularly quick and easy way.
Requirement
You have already connected the Energy Meter to your network with one of the connection
types shown in the section Wiring (Page 15). The Energy Meter 480 VAC ST has already
been integrated in your configuration tool (such as STEP 7), or the Energy Meter 480 VAC
ST has been integrated in your hardware catalog with the GSD/GSDML file.
Procedure
1. Configure an ET 200SP station
Configure an ET 200SP station with a CPU 151xSP or an IM 155-6.
2. Plug module in ET 200S station
Plug the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST into the ET 200SP station and use the module
version with 32 bytes inputs and 12 bytes outputs.
3. Set the module parameters
Set the following parameters for the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST:
– Connection type that you have used for the Energy Meter 480 VAC ST (e.g. 3P4W)
– Measuring range, i.e. the phase voltage (UL1-N) of your electrical network (e.g.
230 V AC)
– Frequency of your network (e.g. 50 Hz)
– Primary and secondary current of the used current transformer (e.g. 100 A and 1 A)
– Primary and secondary voltages of the used voltage transformer (e.g. 230 V and 230
V)
Leave all other parameters at their default settings and do not change them.
4. Load configuration
Switch on the ET 200SP station and download the configuration to the CPU.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 33
Quick start
Result
Once the Energy Meter has been switch on, it provides the measured values for the user
data variant "Basic measurements" with the ID 254 or FEH.
Read and check the measured values provided by the Energy Meter in the output data.
The table below shows the structure of the user data variant, the measured variables and the
data type of the measured values in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) that are stored in the 32 bytes of
output data of the module. Each measured variable is referenced via the measured value ID.
An overview of all the measured variables with their measured value IDs is provided in the
section Measured variables (Page 113).

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
14 ... 17 Total active energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 200
18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 202
If you require further information about the evaluation and interpretation of the measured
values, please refer to the section Reading and processing measured values (Page 35).

34 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Reading and processing measured values 6
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides the measured values and variables through the
following methods:
● Cyclic: User data
● Acyclic: Measured value data records
User data
User data provide pre-defined measured values depending on the configured user data
variant. The supplied measured values are cyclically written to the process image of the
CPU. With some user data variants, the measured values are supplied as raw data, which
you have to convert to the corresponding physical values using a supplied scaling factor.

Each measured value data record supplies physical values that you can further process
immediately. You read the values of a measured value data record acyclically with the
RDREC instruction in a PLC tag. You need a corresponding PLC tag for each measured
value data record to be read.
You can display the read measured values in a watch table in STEP 7.
Note
If you are using CPUs other than S7-1200 or S7-1500, convert 64-bit measured values to
32-bit measured values. Note the conversion can cause loss of accuracy.
For more information, read FAQ: Processing 64-bit-floating-point numbers in S7-300/400
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/56600676)
Validity of the measured values

After turning on the supply voltage UL1, the first measured values are available after
approximately 2 seconds. In the input user data, the content of byte 0 is set to the selected
user data variant. You can use this change in byte 0 as a trigger event.
As soon as the module has valid measured values, the value of this byte changes to a value
within the value range.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 35
Initial startup of the module

After the first startup or restart of the module, the parameters are transferred to the module.
You can preset a user data variant in the parameters of the hardware configuration. This
remains in effect until a different user data variant is selected in the output data (byte 0). This
allows input user data to be modified dynamically according to the requirements of the
process.
The user data variant defined in parameter data record 128 is used under the following
conditions:
● A "0" is written in byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant.
● Byte 0 in the output data of a user data variant contains an invalid value:
or
– Available address space is not sufficient for the selected user data variant.
See "Selecting the module versions (Page 26)".
Current measured values become "0"

The current and all other measured values based on it are suppressed (or set "0") in the data
records and in the user data in the following cases:
● The incoming current of the current transformer is less than the configured "Low limit for
measuring current" parameter
● Incoming secondary current at the channel is higher than 12 A
The following measured values and derived measured variables of the phase involved
become "0":
● Active power
● Reactive power
● Apparent power
● Neutral conductor current
● Phase angle
● Power factor
A floating mean value is formed from the power values. These only become "0" after a
corresponding time. The operating hours counter and the energy counter for active, reactive
and apparent energy of the reset phase stops counting.

The substitute values for input values of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST amount to "0".

36 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
See also
Reading measured values from user data cyclically (Page 40)
Read measured value from a measured value data record (Page 42)
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST supplies quality information about the measurement in a
status word. This information can be used to evaluate the status:
● Currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) and voltages (U1, U2, U3) lie within the valid measuring range
● Operating quadrants for each of the 3 phases
● Direction of rotation of the 3-phase system
Quality information for 3-phase system

The module saves the quality information that can be evaluated under the measuring value
ID 65503 as a bit string in 2 bytes.
You can access the quality information via:
● User data variant "Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or
F0H)
● User data (measured value ID 66503)
● Measured value data record 150
In addition you can evaluate the quality information for the low byte in all the user data
variants for the module version 32 I / 12 Q.
Quality information for individual phases

You can also evaluate the quality information for individual phases via the measured value
data records 147 to 149 or use the user-defined user data variant. You obtain the phase-
specific quality information for the user-defined user data variant under:
● Measured value ID 65500 for Phase 1 (Channel 0).
In contrast to the allocation for measured value 65503, the measured value IDs only contain
the phase-specific information for current, voltage and operating quadrant. The information
about the other phases and the rotating field have the value 0.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 37
Structure of the quality information
Image 6-1 Quality information for low and high byte of the measured value ID 65503

38 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Operating quadrant
Image 6-2 Quadrant in the quality bits
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 39
Requirement
● STEP 7 is open.
Scaling of measured values in the user data

Since the value range of 16-bit values is often smaller than the value range of the physical
value, a scaling factor is supplied together with the basic value in the user data for the
respective measured or calculated values. You determine the actual value of the measured
variable with the following formula:
Actual value of measured quantity = measured value in the user data x 10scaling factor
Procedure
To read measured values from the user data cyclically, proceed as follows:
1. Read the relevant measured value from the input data.
2. Observe the scaling factor at scaled measured values and convert the read measured
value using the scaling factor.

40 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Example
The user data variant 254 (FEH) "Total power L1L2L3" is configured on the AI Energy Meter
480VAC ST. The measured value for "Current L1" should be read.

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
In the user data variant FEH (254) the measured value for the current L1 is stored in Byte 2 +
3. The current is supplied by the module as a 16-bit-fixed-point number in the value range
from 0 to 65535 in the unit 1 mA. In addition the scaling factor for the current L1 has to be
considered additionally. The module supplies the related scaling factor in Byte 24.
The actual value for current L1 is calculated as follows:
Actual value for current L1 = Current L1 x 10Scaling current L1
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 41
Introduction
To read measured values of a measured value data record, use the RDREC instruction. The
read values are stored in a PLC variable with user-defined data type (UDT).
You can find more information on this in the STEP 7 documentation, under the keyword
"RDREC".
Requirement
● STEP 7 is open.
Procedure
1. In STEP 7 create a user-defined data type with the structure of the data record to be
read.
2. Insert the number of structural elements, which corresponds to the number of entries
contained in the measured value data record.
3. Insert the RDREC instruction in the user program.
4. Configure the RDREC instruction as follows:
used).
– INDEX: Number of measured value data record whose entries are read.
– MLEN: Length of the measured value data record in bytes. "0" if all the entries are to
be read.
– RECORD: Target range for the read data record Length depends on MLEN.
5. Call the RDREC instruction with REQ = 1.
Result
The values from the measured value data record were transferred into the target data area.
See also

42 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters 7
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides 42 energy counters that detect both line-based
and phase-based energy values.
● Active energy (total, outflow, inflow)
● Reactive energy (total, outflow, inflow)
● Apparent energy (total)
How energy recording works

Based on the measured currents and voltages and the calculation cycle the Energy Meter
calculates the active, reactive and apparent energy. The active, reactive and apparent
energies are updated in each calculation cycle.
Retentivity
All the counter states of the module are stored retentively in the Energy Meter. After an
interruption (e.g. Power System Off → Power System On), the energy counting resumes with
the retentively stored values.
Configuring
You configure the following settings for the energy counters:
● Activation of the gate for the energy counter
The gate allows you to start and stop the counters via output data (DQ bit). If you
deactivate the gate, the count starts immediately when the Energy Meter is switched on.
● Modes of the energy counters
The energy counters count either infinitely or periodically. For periodic counting, the
adjustable full-scale values are 103, 106, 1012 and 1015. When the full-scale value is
exceeded, the energy counter begins again at 0. At the same time the overflow counter is
increased by 1 (see Resetting energy counters and overflow counters (Page 48)).
The settings apply to the energy counter of all phases.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 43
Energy counters

You can change the following properties of energy counters in runtime:
● Enable / disable energy counter
● Reset energy counter
● Set initial values for the energy counter
● Change the mode of the energy counter
Automatic reset of the energy counter

The energy counters are automatically reset to "0" when parameter settings relevant to the
energy counter are changed. In the case of phase-specific changing of parameter settings
relevant to the energy counter only the energy counters of the respective phases are reset.
Changing of the following parameters results in resetting of the energy counters:
● Measurement type or range
● Current transformer (primary current/secondary current)
● Voltage transformer (primary voltage/secondary voltage)
● Direction of current
● Full-scale value for energy counter
● Mode of the energy counter (infinite / periodic)

44 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
Example
The following figure shows the effect of initial value, reset and start/stop parameters with
activated gating using the energy counter as an example:
① The counter is reset to the value specified in the configuration. The gate is closed. The counter does not count.
② The gate is opened via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts.
③ The configured current low limit has been violated. The counter does not count.
④ The gate is closed. The counter does not count. A new start value is written to the measured value data record 143
with the WRREC instruction.
⑤ The gate is opened again via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts with
the new start value.
⑥ The counter is reset via the control byte 1 in the output data of the user data variant. The counter counts from the
new start value that was transferred via the measured value data record 143.
See also
Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter (Page 47)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 45
Energy counters
Overview
You can configure the energy counters of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST as follows:
● Activate / Deactivate
● Start / stop counters using gate
● Set and reset start value
Energy counter gate

You have the option of starting and stopping the energy counter using the gate. To this
purpose you have to:
● Select the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the configuration of
the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST.
● Set the DQ bit for the "counter gate" in the user data in Control byte 1 of the output data
(Bit 6 in Control byte 1).
The "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter and the DQ bit for the "counter
date" behave like the parallel connection of contacts.
Image 7-1 Gate enabled
If you deselect the "Enable gate control for the energy counter" parameter in the
configuration of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST, the energy counters operate
independently of the DQ bit as long as the current value lies above the configured "Low limit
for measuring current".
Image 7-2 Gate disabled

46 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
7.3 Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter
Set and reset start value

The counters can be set to their start value via the output data of each user data variant.
With energy counters, you have to reset the bit of the energy counter in control byte 2 of the
data record 143.
You can reset each energy counter to the start value or also specify a new start value via the
data record 143. You define the moment for updating of the start values in the data record
143 and in Control byte 1 in the user data. Start values are either applied immediately or
after a reset bit has been set from 0 to 1.
You can find a detailed description for this in section Resetting energy counters and overflow
counters (Page 48).
7.3 Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter
Evaluate energy counter and overflow counter

The energy counters are evaluated by
● Using the input data of the user data variants for energy
– User data variant "Total energy L1 L2 L3" (ID 249 or F9H)
● Using the input data of the user-defined user data variant with the use of the respective
measuring value IDs for energy counters
● By reading data records
– "Data record for basic measured values (DS 142)" for evaluation of the total energies
L1 L2 L3.
– "Data record for energy counter (DS 143)" for evaluation of the phase-specific energy.
– "Data record for phase-specific measured values L1 - L3 (DS 147 - 149) for evaluation
of the phase-specific energies.
The overflow counters are evaluated by:
● Using the input data of the user-defined user data variant with the use of the respective
measuring value IDs for overflow counters
● Reading the "Data record for energy counter (DS 143)".
Evaluate measured values

The evaluation of measured values via the input data of user data variants and reading of
data records with the RDREC instruction is described in the section Reading and processing
measured values (Page 35).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 47
Energy counters
7.4 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters
Introduction
At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the energy and overflow
counter of the Energy Meters Resetting here means setting the energy counters to their start
values and resetting the overflow counters to 0.
● Reset energy counters via the outputs of the user data.
● Reset energy counters and overflow counters via data record 143.
See also
Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 55)
7.4.1 Reset energy counters via user data
Introduction
Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the energy counters depends on
the configured module version.
If you use module versions with 12 bytes output data, you can
● Reset energy counters for all phases separately by active, reactive and apparent energy.
● Reset energy counters for each individual phase separately by active, reactive and
apparent energy.
If you use the module version with 2 bytes output data, you always reset all the energy
counters simultaneously. Differentiated resetting of the counters by active, reactive and
apparent energy is only possible via data set DS 143 for this module version, see section
Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 (Page 50).
Requirements
Resetting of the energy counters is enabled via user data in the default setting and may not
be blocked n Control byte 1 of the data record 143.

48 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters

1. Set the category of the energy counters (active, reactive, apparent energy) to 1 in Control
byte 2 via Bit 0 to 2 (in Byte 1, 6, 8 or 10 of the output data).
2. Set the reset bit (Bit 7) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change (in Byte 2, 7,
9 or 11 of the output data).

Start values
can change the start values for the energy counters via data record DS 143, see section
Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143 (Page 50).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 49
Energy counters
7.4.2 Resetting energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143
Introduction
At all the module versions you can reset the energy counters and their overflow counters via
the data record DS 143. Resetting is possible for:
● Energy counters and overflow counters for each individual phase separately by active,
reactive and apparent energy.

1. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set the reset bit (Bit 2) to 1 and Bit 0 to 1 for the overflow
counter.
2. In Control byte 2 of the DS 143 set the category of the energy counters (active, reactive,
apparent energy) to 1 via Bits 5 to 7.

50 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
3. In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set Bit 7 for the moment of application of the start values
of the desired energy counters:
record
In Control byte 1 of the DS 143 set the reset bit (Bit 2) to 1 and Bit 0 to 1 for the overflow
counter.
Image 7-5 Energy counter control information DS 143
4. Transfer the data record with the WRREC instruction.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 51
Energy counters
Start values
After the reset the energy counters count with the specified start values (default = 0) and the
overflow counters begin again with 0. You can change the start values for the energy
counters via data record DS 143.
7.4.3 Example for energy counters and overflow counters via data record DS 143
Introduction
Before you can transfer the data record DS 143 to the CPU you have to create a user-
defined PLC data type in your user program that has an identical structure to data record DS
143.
Procedure
1. Create a PLC data type that has an identical structure to data record DS 143.
Detailed information on the structure of data record 143 is available in section Structure
for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 159).

value ID
8...15 Active energy inflow LREAL Wh See Section Struc- 61180
(initial value) L1 ture for energy
16...23 Active energy outflow LREAL Wh counters (DS 143) 61181
(initial value) L1 (Page 159)
: : : : : :
162...165 Operating hours coun- REAL h See Section Struc- 65506
ter L2 (initial value) ture for energy
166...169 Operating hours coun- REAL h counters (DS 143) 65507
ter L3 (initial value) (Page 159)

52 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
2. Create a user-defined PLC data type and allocate the values of the data record in a DB or
instance DB.
Byte 0 and byte 1:
Enter the value 01H in Byte 0 and the value 00H to Byte 1.
Byte 2 ... byte 7: Control bytes for energy and overflow counter
In the control byte for the respective phases, specify which energy and overflow counters
you want to reset.
The control bytes specify for each phase (L1, L2, L3) separately if and which energy
meter values are to be reset.
Image 7-6 Control information DS 143 for energy and overflow counter
Byte 8 ... byte 127: Start values for the individual energy meters
The start values for energy counters in data record 143 are 64-bit floating point numbers.
This corresponds to the data type LREAL in S7-1200 and in S7-1500.
Byte 128 ... byte 157: Initial values for overflow counters
The initial values for overflow counters in data record 143 are 16-bit integers. This
corresponds to the data type UINT in S7-1200 and in S7-1500.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 53
Energy counters
3. Write the data record to the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST module using the "WRREC"
instruction.
The input parameters must be allocated as follows:
– REQ: A new write job is triggered if REQ = TRUE.
used).
– INDEX: The data record number: 143
– LEN: The maximum length of the data record: 170
– RECORD: A pointer to the data area in the CPU which includes data record 143.
Note
If you want to write or read several AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST at the same time, keep
in mind the maximum number of active jobs in communication with SFB52/SFB53.
See also

54 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
7.5.1 Structure for energy counters (DS 143)

● Reading the overflow counters
● Reading the operating hours
Table 7- 1 Energy meter data record 143

value ID
2 Status / control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - -
3 Status / control byte 2 - L1 BYTE Bit string
40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh During reading: 61184
48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 0.0...1.8 x 10308 61200
56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh During writing 61201
64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh For continuous counting: 61202
72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 0.0...3.4 x 1012 61203
During writing
For periodic counting:
0...configured full-scale
value (103 ...1015)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 55
Energy counters

value ID
128...129 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 UINT - 61190
130..131 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 61191
132...133 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 61192
134...135 Overflow counter reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 61193
136...137 Overflow counter apparent energy L1 UINT - 61194
138...139 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 UINT - During reading: 61210
140...141 Overflow counter active energy outflow L2 UINT - 0...65535 61211
142...143 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - During writing for contin- 61212
uous counting:
0
During writing for periodic
148...149 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 UINT - counting: 61230
158...161 Operating hours counter L1 (initial value) REAL h During reading: 65505
162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 0...3.4x1038 65506
166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h During writing: 65507
0...109

56 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
Status information
specific status information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating hours
counters.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 57
Energy counters
Control information
phase-specific control information for energy counters, overflow counters and operating
hours counter. The length of the control information amounts to 2 bytes for each phase:
● In control byte 1 you determine which counter you want to reset and the time at which
counters are reset.
● In Control byte 2 you determine which energy counters and which overflow counters you
want to reset.

58 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters


(hexadecimal)
record.
length.
bits back to 0.
be negative.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 59
Energy counters
7.5.2 Structure of the control and feedback interface for DS 143
Introduction
Bytes 2 to 7 of data record 143 form the phase-based control and feedback interface for the
measured value data record of the energy counter.
Status information
counters.

60 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Energy counters
Control information
counters are reset.
want to reset.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 61
Operating hours counter 8
8.1 How the operating hours counter works
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST provides one operating hours counter for each phase,
which counts the operating hours of the load connected to a phase when there is current
greater than the configurable "Low limit for measuring current". The operating hours counter
for the entire module is calculated from the sum of the operating hours of the individual
phases. The operating hours counter has a value range from 0 to 3.4 x 1038. The values are
stored retentively in the module and can be read via the data record 143 (energy counter
data record) and data record 150 (measured value for extended measuring and status
values).
Configuring
You configure the following operating hours counter settings in STEP 7:
● Activation of the gate for the operating hours counter

The following table shows the supported control information:
Control information Default value Available in

Open / close operating hours counter 1 Closed Module version starting at
2 bytes of output data
Set initial value 0 Data record 143
Reset operating hours counter 0 Module version starting at
2 bytes of output data 2
1 Effective only with enabled gate
2 Only module-wide resetting is supported in module version "2 I / 2 Q".
See also
Resetting energy counters and overflow counters (Page 48)
Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150)
(Page 170)

62 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
8.2 Reset operating hours counters
Introduction
At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the operating hours counters
of the Energy Meter. Resetting here means that the operating hours counters are reset to
their start value.
● Reset operating hours counters via the outputs of the user data.
● Reset operating hours counters via data record 143.
8.2.1 Reset operating hours counters via user data
Introduction
Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the operating hours counters
depends on the configured module version.
If you use module versions with 12 bytes output data, you can
● Reset operating hours counters for all phases.
● Reset operating hours counters for each individual phase.
If you use the module version with 2 bytes output data, you always reset all the operating
hours counters simultaneously. Differentiated resetting of the counters by phases is only
possible via data set DS 143 for this module version, see section Structure for energy
counters (DS 143) (Page 159).

Image 8-1 Resetting the operating hours counters at module version with 12 bytes of output data

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 63

Image 8-2 Resetting the operating hours counters at module version with 2 bytes of output data
Start values
After the reset the operating hours counters count with the specified start values (default =
0). You can change the start values for the operating hours counters via data record DS 143,
see section Structure for energy counters (DS 143) (Page 159).

64 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
8.2.2 Resetting operating hours counters via data record DS 143
Introduction
At all the module versions you can reset the operating hours counters via the data record DS
143. Resetting is possible for:
● Operating hours counters for each individual phase.

1. Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 to 1.
2. In Control byte 1 set Bit 7 for the moment of application of the start values:
record
Image 8-3 Operating hours counter control information DS 143
Start values
After the reset the operating hours counters count with the specified start values
(default = 0). You can change the start values for the operating hours counters via data
record DS 143.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 65
Limit monitoring 9
9.1 How limit monitoring works
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST supports monitoring of parameterizable low or high limits
for up to 16 analog measured or calculated variables.
You can also define multiple limits for each measured or calculated variable, in order to
define a high or low value range.
The measured value data record 150 returns the current status limit violations and per limit
one counter that displays the number of limit violations. In addition, a hardware interrupt may
be generated for each limit violation.
The status of the limit violations can also be evaluated in the user data variant 240 (F0H) or
via the user-defined user data variant via the measured value ID 65509.
Benefits
With activated limit monitoring you can already detect any irregularities in the measured
value acquisition already in field level.
Retentivity
All the counter states of the module are stored retentively in the Energy Meter. After an
interruption (e.g. Power System Off → Power System On), the counting resumes with the
retentively stored values.
Configuring
You configure the following limit monitoring settings in STEP 7:
● Measured variable that is to be monitored.
● Activate / Deactivate limit monitoring.
● High or low limit values.
● Delay time and hysteresis for each limit.
● Activate / Deactivate hardware interrupts at limit violation.
● Measured value that is subject to limit monitoring.

66 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Limit monitoring
9.2 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on limit monitoring
Hardware interrupt at a limit violation

The hardware interrupt provides the following information:
● Measured value ID of the monitored measured or calculated variable
● Number of the limit (0 = Limit 1. 15 = Limit 16)
● Information on whether limit was exceeded or fallen below
For more detailed information, refer to section Hardware interrupts (Page 87).


Enable/disable monitoring per limit1 Disabled Module version with 12 bytes of
output data
Reset number of total limit violations 0 Module version starting at
1 Effective only with enabled gate
Delay time and hysteresis

In order to prevent the triggering of limit violations with small fluctuations, you have the
following configuration options in STEP 7:
● Delay time in seconds (0 to 10 s)
With the delay time, you filter faults and thereby prevent limit value monitoring from
triggering too frequently. The limit violation is counted only when the limit violation is
present for longer than the configured delay time. The deceleration time is also taken into
consideration during outgoing of the limit violation.
● Hysteresis as a percentage (0 to 20%)
With the hysteresis, you suppress fluctuations around the limit. The hysteresis is a
tolerance range that you define as a percentage deviation of the configured limit. The limit
violation is considered to be corrected only when the monitored value leaves the
tolerance range.
Note
You can get information about transient underflow and overflow from the calculation of
minimum (Page 165) and maximum values (Page 164) of selected measured variables.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 67
Limit monitoring
The following figure shows the value-over-time for two measured values using the example
of a high and low limit as well as the influence of hysteresis and delay time on the counting
of the limit violations.
Configured limit. Signal wave

Configured delay time. Is taken into consid- ① Limit monitoring with hysteresis and delay
eration during coming and going. time
Hysteresis range. Only considered for out- ② Limit monitoring with hysteresis, but without
going. delay time
Value-over-time for which the limit is moni- ③ Limit monitoring without hysteresis, but with
tored. delay time
Edge change. Counter for limit violations is ④ Limit monitoring without hysteresis and
incremented by 1. If parameterized, a hard- delay time
ware interrupt is triggered.
Image 9-1 Influence of hysteresis and delay time on the limit
See also
How limit monitoring works (Page 66)
Minimum and maximum values (Page 71)

68 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Limit monitoring
9.3 Reset, activate and deactivate counters for limit violation
Introduction
At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset or also activate / deactivate
the counters for limit violations of the Energy Meter.
Resetting here means that the counters for limit violations are reset to 0.
Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the counters for limit violations
depends on the configured module version.
Resetting at module version with 12 bytes of output data

1. Select the counters for limit violations that you want to reset in Control bytes 3 and 4.
2. Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change.
Resetting at module version with 2 bytes of output data

Set the reset bit (Bit 3) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change. Resetting acts
globally on all the configured counters for limit violation.
Image 9-2 Resetting of the counters for limit violations

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 69
Limit monitoring
Activating / Deactivating counters for limit violations

Activating / Deactivating of the counters for limit violations is only possible for module
versions with 12 bytes of output data.
Requirements: "Gate for limit value monitoring" was parameterized during configuration of
the module using STEP 7 or by writing the data record DS 128.
Select the counters for limit violations that you want to activate / deactivate in Control bytes 3
and 4.
Image 9-3 Activating / deactivating of the counters for limit violations

70 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Minimum and maximum values 10
10.1 Minimum and maximum values
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST determines the respective highest and lowest measured or
calculated value for a series of measured and calculated values. The values are stored
retentively in the module and can be read using measured value data records 144 and 145.
Benefits
Using the stored minimum and maximum values, for example, you can detect further
irregularities in addition to limit monitoring.
Calculation of minimum and maximum values

Minimum and maximum values are only calculated for the phases in accordance with the
configured connection type. Existing minimum and maximum values that have not been
calculated are initialized with 0. If faults such as under or overcurrent occur during operation,
new minimum and maximum values are calculated.
The measured and calculated values are initialized as follows during commissioning of the AI
Energy Meter 480VAC ST so that the first calculation of minimum and maximum values
supplies a plausible result:
● Maximum values for measured and calculated values: Minimum values
● Minimum values for measured and calculated values: Maximum values
Configuring
You configure the following settings in STEP 7:
● Enable calculation of minimum and maximum values

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 71
Minimum and maximum values
10.2 Resetting minimum and maximum values


Reset saved maximum values 0 Module version starting at
Reset saved minimum values 0 Module version starting at
Note
Automatic reset
If you change the parameters for current or voltage transformers, the minimum and
maximum values are reset automatically to their initial values.
Description
At the beginning of a new work order, it may be useful to reset the minimum and maximum
values of the Energy Meter. Resetting means that the minimum and maximum values are
reset to their initial values. Initial values are described, see section Measured value data
record for maximum values (DS 144) (Page 164) and section Measured value data record
for minimum values (DS 145) (Page 165).
Due to the differing lengths of the output data resetting of the minimum and maximum values
depends on the configured module version. If you use module versions with 12 bytes output
data, you can
● Reset the minimum and maximum values for all phases.
● Reset minimum and maximum values for each individual phase.
If you use the module version with 2 bytes output data, you always reset all the minimum
and maximum values simultaneously.

72 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Minimum and maximum values

1. Set the category of the measured values to 1 in Control byte 2 via Bit 0 to 4 in the output
data.
2. Set the reset bit (Bit 0 or Bit 1) in Control byte 1 of the output data from 0 to 1 through an
edge change in the output data.
Image 10-1 Resetting the minimum and maximum values at module version with 12 bytes of output
data

Set the reset bit (Bit 0 or Bit 1) in Control byte 1 from 0 to 1 through an edge change.
Image 10-2 Resetting the minimum and maximum values at module version with 2 bytes of output data

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 73
Phase-based measured values 11
11.1 Phase-based measured values
Introduction
The AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST makes the measured values of individual phases
available.
● Through the user data variants
– Phase-specific measurement Phase L1 with user data variants 154 (9AH) and 155
(9BH)
– Phase-specific measurement Phase L2 with user data variants 156 (9CH) and 157
(9DH)
– Phase-specific measurement Phase L3 with user data variants 158 (9EH) and 159
(9FH)
● Via measured value data records
– Phase-specific measurement for the phases L1, L2 and L3 with data record 142
– Phase-specific measurement for phase L1 with data record 147
User data variants

Through the user data variants 154 (9AH) to 159 (9FH) you can evaluate the following
measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network:
● Quality information
● Current and voltage
● Active, reactive and apparent power
● Active, reactive and apparent energy
● Power factor
You can find the structure of the user data variants in section Measured value data record for
phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) (Page 166).

74 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Phase-based measured values
11.1 Phase-based measured values

Through the measured value data records DS 142, DS 147, DS 148 and DS 149 you can
evaluate the following measured values for each phase of an AC / three-phase network:
● Quality information
● Current and voltage
● Minimum current and minimum voltage
● Maximum current and maximum voltage
● Active, reactive and apparent power
● Minimum active, reactive and apparent power
● Maximum active, reactive and apparent power
● Active, reactive and apparent energy
● Minimum active, reactive and apparent energy
● Maximum active, reactive and apparent energy
● Power factor
● Minimum power factor
● Maximum power factor
You can find the structure of the measured value data records in section Measured value
data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147) (Page 166).
See also
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L2 (DS 148) (Page 167)
Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L3 (DS 149) (Page 169)
Minimum and maximum values (Page 71)
User data variants with 32 bytes input data / 12 bytes output data (Page 135)
Overview of all measured value data records (Page 155)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 75
Parameters 12
12.1 Parameters
Parameters of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST (DS 128, DS 129, DS 130)

As a rule the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is already integrated in the hardware catalog of
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7 V5.5 or higher. In this case STEP 7 (TIA Portal) or STEP 7
V5.5 or higher checks the parameterized properties for plausibility during designing.
However, you can also assign parameters to the module by means of the GSD file and the
configuration software of any provider. The module does not check the validity of the
parameterized properties until after the configuration has been loaded. Note that some
parameters depend on the selected connection type of the Energy Meter. For example in the
connection type 1P2W for measurements in single-phase AC network it does not make
sense to enter parameters for Phases 2 and 3 and they are also not checked by the system
in this case.
The effective range of the parameters that can be set using a GSD file depends on the type
of bus system used:
In addition you can change the parameterized properties via the user program in RUN mode.
parameters to the module using data records (refer to the appendix Configuration via
parameter data records (Page 97)). The following table summarizes all the configurable
parameters.
Table 12- 1 AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST parameters
Parameters Value range Default setting Reconfigura- Effective range with configuration
tion in RUN software, e.g. STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Hardware interrupt • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
• Enable
Diagnostics line voltage • Disable Disable Yes Module Module
• Enable

76 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Parameters
12.1 Parameters
GSD file GSD file
Connection type • Disabled 3P4W - 3 phases, Yes Module Module
4 conductors (only 1P2W,
• 1P2W - 1-phase
3P4W, 3P4W1
alternating current
and deactivat-
• 3x1P2W - 3x1 ed)
phase, 2 conductors
each
• 2P3W - 2 phases, 3
conductors
• 3P4W - 3 phases, 4
conductors
• 3P4W1 - 3 phases, 4
conductors, bal-
anced load
Voltage measuring • 100 V 230 V Yes Module Module
range
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 127 V
• 190 V
• 200 V
• 208 V
• 220 V
• 230 V
• 240 V
• 277 V
Line voltage tolerance • 1 ... 50 % 10 % Yes Module Module
[%]
Line frequency • 50 Hz 50 Hz Yes Module Module
• 60 Hz
Enable gate energy • No No Yes Module -
counter
• Yes

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 77
Parameters
12.1 Parameters
GSD file GSD file
Full-scale value for • No full-scale value - No full-scale value Yes Module -
energy counter infinite counting - infinite counting (Default setting.
No full-scale
• 103 - count periodi-
value - infinite
cally
counting)
cally
cally
cally
cally
User data variant See the table Overview Total energy L1 L2 Yes Module Module
of the user data variants L3 (ID 254 or FEH) (only user data
(Page 135) variant FEH,
FAH, F9H, F8H,
9FH, F5H, 80H)
Minimum and maxi- • Disable Disable Yes Module -

mum value calculation (Default setting:
• Enable
Disable)
overflow current
• Enable
overflow voltage
• Enable
underflow voltage
• Enable
Diagnostics • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase -
low limit voltage (blocking is
• Enable
preset)
overflow cumulative
• Enable
values
Overcurrent tolerance • 10 ... 100 [0.1 A] 100 [0.1 A] Yes Channel/phase Module
factor [0.1 A]
Overcurrent tolerance • 1 ... 60000 ms 40000 ms Yes Channel/phase Module
time [ms]
Low limit for current • 2 ... 250 mA 50 mA Yes Channel/phase -
measurement [mA] (Default setting:
2 mA)
Operating hours coun- • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase -
ter (Default setting:
• Enable
Disable)

78 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Parameters
12.1 Parameters
GSD file GSD file
Enable gate of operat- • No No Yes Channel/phase -
ing hours counter
• Yes
Current transformer • 1 ... 99999 A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module
primary current [A] (Value range:
1...65535)
Current transformer • 1A 1A Yes Channel/phase Module
secondary current
• 5A
Voltage transformer • 1 ... 999999 V 230 V Yes Channel/phase Module
primary voltage [V]
Voltage transformer • 1 ... 500 V 230 V Yes Channel/phase -
secondary voltage [V] (same value as
Voltage meas-
uring range
parameter)
Reverse current direc- • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase Module
tion
• Enable
Number of limits • 0 ... 16 0 Yes Module -
Limit monitoring for limit • Disable Disable Yes Module -
• Enable
Measured variable for • Measured value ID, None Yes Limit -
limit see Table B-1
Gate for limit via DQ • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase -
• Enable
Hardware interrupt for • Disable Disable Yes Channel/phase -
limit
• Enable
Limit • depending on the 0 Yes Limit -
selected measured
variable
Type of limit • High limit High limit Yes Channel/phase -
• Low limit
Hysteresis for limit • 0 ... 200 [0.1%] 0% Yes Channel/phase -
monitoring [%]
Delay time for limit • 0 ... 10 s 0s Yes Channel/phase -
monitoring [s]
Number of measured • 0 ... 64 0 Yes Module -
values for user data (no user data
mapping mapping)
Measured variable • Measured value ID, None Yes Measured vari- -
see Table B-1 able (no user data
mapping)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 79
Parameters
Hardware interrupt
Enable the hardware interrupt for the entire module here.
Diagnostics line voltage

Activate the diagnostics line voltage here. If there is no voltage or too little voltage at L1, the
message "No supply voltage at L1" is output and a diagnostic interrupt is triggered.
Connection type
Specify the connection type you used for the Energy Meter here.
For more detailed information, refer to "Connection examples (Page 18)".
Voltage measuring range

Here you can set the voltage measuring range of the power supply system.
Line voltage tolerance

Monitoring the supply voltage based on this tolerance band is a positive or negative value.
Line frequency
Here you can set the line frequency of the power supply system.
Enable gate energy counter

Enable the gate for the energy counter here. When the gate is enabled, the energy counter
only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to "1".
Full-scale value for energy counter

Select here the full-scale value for the periodic counting of the energy counter. You can also
specify that the energy counter is to count without a full-scale value (infinite counting). The
calculated energy counter values are stored retentively in the module.
User data variant

Select here the user data variant with which the module is to operate once it is switched on.

80 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Parameters
Minimum and maximum value calculation

Enable calculation of the minimum and maximum values here. The minimum and maximum
value are calculated from the start of the measurement. The calculated values are stored
retentively in the Energy Meter.
Diagnostics overflow current

The measured current is monitored after expiration of the "Tolerance time" for "Measured
current x 0.1 x Tolerance factor". A violation results in a current overflow.
① The tolerance time starts as soon as the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is exceeded.
② DIAG_UEBERLAST diagnoses the affected phase if the tolerance value of the secondary cur-
rent has been exceeded within the assigned tolerance time (or the maximum value of the sec-
ondary current (10 A) is exceeded).
③ After the set tolerance time has elapsed, the secondary current value (1 A, 5 A) is monitored. A
violation of the secondary current value also returns DIAG_UEBERLAST.
Image 12-1 Diagnostics response in the event of a current overload
Diagnostics overflow voltage

Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the overflow triggers
a diagnostic interrupt.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 81
Parameters
Diagnostics underflow voltage

Line voltage (measuring range) is monitored for tolerance. A violation of the underflow
triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
Diagnostics low limit voltage

Low limit for voltage is monitored. A violation of the low limit triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
Diagnostics overflow cumulative values

A cumulative overflow in the calculated variables is displayed. The values stop at the high or
low limit. A violation triggers a diagnostic interrupt.
Overcurrent tolerance factor

The tolerance factor secondary overcurrent parameter (10 to 100) indicates the tolerable
value of the secondary current in 0.1 A increments (10 = 1 A to 100 = 10 A). Always take
note of the current class of the current transformer being used (1 A, 5 A).
Overcurrent tolerance time

Monitoring time in which the overcurrent is tolerated. 0 means that the monitoring time has
been disabled.
Low limit for measuring current

The configurable low limit for measuring current refers to the secondary currents and is used
to avoid incorrect calculations in the case of very low currents. Incorrect measurements of
very low currents in particular are a cause of inaccuracies in the current transformer used.
Set the low limit for the current measurement to the required value depending on your
process.
Tip: If you want to find the low limit for the current measurement experimentally, set it to a
lower value. Then, feed in a very precise low current and determine the measurement error
that can no longer be tolerated. Afterwards, set the low limit for the current measurement to
the limit value you have determined.
● Active power
● Reactive power
● Apparent power
● Phase angle
● Power factor

82 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Parameters

Enable the operating hours counter here. The counting starts from a programmable
minimum current value. The counter can be reset or pre-defined using data record or output
bit.
Enable gate of operating hours counter

Enable the gate for the operating hours counter here. When the gate is activated, the
operating hours counter only counts when the corresponding output data bit (DQ bit) is set to
"1".
Current transformer primary current

Enter here the nominal value for the primary current of the current transformer used. The
transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary current.
Current transformer secondary current

Enter here the nominal value for the secondary current (1 A or 5 A) of the current
transformer used. The transformer ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary
current.
Voltage transformer primary voltage

To determine the voltage transformer ratio, enter the primary voltage here. The transformer
ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage.
Voltage transformer secondary voltage

Enter the secondary voltage to determine the voltage transformer ratio here. The transformer
ratio is calculated from the primary and secondary voltage.
Reverse current direction

Setting to determine whether or not to reverse the direction of current.
In the event of inadvertent incorrect connection, this parameter can be used to correct the
measured values, thus saving the hassle of rewiring. The direction of the current is only
evident from the power measurement values. The current measurement value is an rms
value.
Number of limits
Enter the number of measured values that you want to monitor for limits.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 83
Parameters
Limit monitoring
Enable the monitoring of the limit for a freely definable measured value here. Limit violations
are counted and the count values stored retentively.
Measured value ID for limit

Enter the ID of a measured value that you want to use for limit monitoring.
Limit gate via DQ

Enable the gate via DQ here. When the gate is enabled, the limit monitoring is only started
when the corresponding bit of the associated output user data is set to "1".
Hardware interrupt for limit

Enable the hardware interrupt here. The hardware interrupt is triggered if a high or low limit
is violated. Without activation of a hardware interrupt, a limit violation is only displayed in the
user data and in DS 150.
Limit
Enter the limit here that is to trigger a limit violation when exceeded or fallen below. Limit
violations are displayed in the user data and in DS 150.
Type of limit
Select here, whether it is an high or low limit. Depending on this selection, the limit violation
or hardware interrupt is triggered when a value exceeds (high limit) or falls below (low limit)
the limit.
Hysteresis for limit monitoring

Enter the hysteresis for limit in percent here. The percentage refers to the numerical value of
the limit when the limit violation occurs. A message is only canceled if the measured value is
outside the limit and its hysteresis range. As long as the measured value is in the hysteresis
range, no new message is output.
Delay time for limit monitoring

Here you can select the delay time for limit violation. The delay refers to the time that must
elapse before an occurrence of a limit violation is reported. Faults can be filtered out by
selection of the delay time. The deceleration time is also taken into consideration during
outgoing of the limit violation.
Number of measured values for user data mapping

Specify the number of measured values/variables that you want to use for the user-specific
user data mapping.
Measured variable
Select the measured variable (with the measured value ID) that you want to use for the user-
specific user data mapping.

84 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
LED display
② Error (red)
③ PWR (green)
④ Status (green)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 85

The following table explains the meaning of the status and error displays. Remedial
measures for diagnostic alarms can be found in the section Diagnostic alarms (Page 88).
DIAG LED
Table 13- 1 Meaning of the DIAG LED
DIAG Meaning
Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Status LED
Table 13- 2 Meaning of the Status LED
Status Meaning
Channel deactivated or error
Off
Channel activated and no error
On
Error LED
Table 13- 3 Meaning of the Error LED
Status Meaning
Channel is OK
Off
Channel is faulty
On
PWR LED
Table 13- 4 Meaning of the PWR LED
PWR Meaning
Line voltage missing
Off
Line voltage available
On

86 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
13.2 Interrupts
13.2 Interrupts
The AI Energy Meter ST analog input module supports hardware and diagnostic interrupts.
13.2.1 Hardware interrupts
Hardware interrupts
● Violation of low limit 1 to 16
● Violation of high limit 1 to 16
You can find detailed information on the event in the hardware interrupt organization block
online help.
of the organization block. The following figure shows the assignment of the local data double
word 8 by the start information of the hardware interrupt organization block.
Image 13-2 Start information of the organization block
Data block name Contents Comment Bytes

Identifier W#16#0001 to W#16#FFFF ID of the measured value for limit monitoring 2
Number of the limit (1 to 16), which has triggered the hardware interrupt
Channel B#16#00 to B#16#0F Number of the limit 1
Event B#16#03 Violation of low limit 1
B#16#04 Violation of high limit

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 87
13.2.2 Diagnostics interrupt
● Channel is temporarily unavailable
● Error
● Low limit voltage violated (measuring voltage < 80 V)
● High limit value voltage exceeded
● Underflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) violated
● Overflow voltage (tolerance for supply voltage) exceeded
● Overload (current measurement > 12 A or tolerance overcurrent exceeded after expiry of
the tolerance time)
● Overflow of the calculated values (measured or calculated values screen exceed the
representable range of values)
See also
Diagnostic alarms (Page 88)
Diagnostic alarms
Note
Assignment channel in diagnostic message ⇔ Phase
In the diagnostic messages the channels are counted from "Channel "0" on, in the AI Energy
Meter 480VAC ST from Phase "1" on.
Note the following assignment:

88 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Table 13- 6 Error types
Diagnostic message Error code Meaning Solution

Undervoltage1 2H Line voltage (measuring range) is moni- Observe the line voltage range
Overvoltage 3H tored for tolerance. Violation leads to volt-
age overflow/underflow
Overload 4H The measured current is monitored after Observe the current range
expiration of the "Tolerance time" for "Tol-
erance factor × Measured current". Ex-
ceeding this results in overflow current.
The maximum value of the secondary
current (12 A) has been exceeded.
High limit 7H Cumulative overflow in the calculated val- -
ues
Low limit1 8H Violation of the low limit for voltage meas- Observe the voltage range
urement. The message occurs when the
configured minimum current or voltage is
below 80 V.
Error 9H Internal module error (diagnostic alarm on Replace the module
channel 0 applies to the entire module).
Load voltage missing 11H Missing or insufficient line voltage on Check supply
phase L1
Channel is temporarily 1FH Firmware upgrade is being performed. --
The module is currently not performing any
measurements.
A user calibration is being executed at the Complete the user calibration
channel.
1 If the "Undervoltage" and "Low limit" diagnostics are active at the same time, the "Low limit" diagnostics has higher
priority and deletes the "Undervoltage" diagnostics.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 89
Diagnostics response
This section describes the response of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST when diagnostics
information is reported.
Measured values in the case of diagnostics

Even in the case of diagnostics, measured values continue to be displayed as long as they
can still be acquired. If measured values cannot be measured or calculated, "0" is displayed.
Zero suppression
If the supplied current is less than the configured "Low limit for measuring current"
parameter, the current measurement and all dependent variables are suppressed or set to
"0".
Overload limitation
If the secondary current fed in at the channel is higher than 12 A, the module changes to
limitation and the measured value of the current and all dependent variables are set to "0".
Value falls below "Low limit current measurement"

● Active power
● Reactive power
● Apparent power
● Phase angle
● Power factor

90 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Loss of the supply voltage

At a loss of supply voltage at UL1 (phase 1), all measurements are interrupted.
After the supply voltage is restored, the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST operates again with the
configuration / parameter assignment stored in the CPU. The retentively stored values are
used at the following counters and calculations:
● Energy and overflow counters
● Operating hours counters
● Counters for limit violation
● Minimum values
● Maximum values
Input data to "0"
Note
If the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST is no longer recognized by the interface module (for
example, because it is defective or not plugged in), all input data are set to "0".

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 91
Technical specifications of the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST 6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
General information
Product type designation AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST
Usable BaseUnits BU type D0, BU20-P12+A0+0B
label
Product function
Voltage measurement Yes
Voltage measurement with voltage transformer Yes
Current measurement Yes
Phase current measurement without current trans- No
former
Phase current measurement with current trans- Yes
former
Energy measurement Yes
Frequency measurement Yes
Power measurement Yes
Active power measurement Yes
Reactive power measurement Yes
I&M data Yes
Isochronous mode No
Operating mode
Cyclic measurement Yes
Acyclic measurement Yes
Via user data Yes
Via data record Yes
Installation type / mounting
Installation position Any
Supply voltage
Description Supply via voltage measurement channel L1
Type of supply voltage 100 - 277 V AC
Permissible range, low limit (AC) 90 V
Permissible range, high limit (AC) 293 V

92 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
Line frequency
Valid range, low limit 47 Hz
Valid range, high limit 63 Hz
Power loss
Address area
Address space per module, max. 256 bytes; for input and output data each
Automatic code
• Mechanical coding element Yes
Time
Operating hours counters
Available Yes
Analog inputs
Cycle time (all channels), typ. 50 ms. Time for the consistent updating of all
measured and calculated values (cyclic and acy-
clic data)
Interrupts
Diagnostic alarm Yes
Limit interrupt Yes
Hardware interrupt Yes
Monitoring of supply voltage (PWR LED) Yes
Channel status display Yes
For channel diagnostics Yes
For module diagnostics Yes
Integrated functions
Measuring functions
Buffering of measured variables No
Parameter length 74 bytes
Measuring method for voltage measurement TRMS
Measuring method for current measurement TRMS
Type of measured data acquisition Complete
Voltage wave form Sinusoidal or distorted
Band width of the measured value detection 2 kHz. Harmonic: 39 / 50 Hz, 32 / 60 Hz
Operating mode for measured value acquisition
• Automatic line frequency acquisition No; can be assigned
• Fixing at 50 Hz No; default setting
• Fixing at 60 Hz No

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 93
6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
Measuring range
• Frequency measurement, min. 45 Hz
• Frequency measurement, max. 65 Hz
Measuring inputs for voltage

neutral conductor

ductors

neutral conductor, min.

neutral conductor, max.

ductors, min.

ductors, max.
• Measuring category for voltage measurement CAT II. CAT III with prescribed protective ele-
in accordance with IEC 61010-2-030 ments
• Internal resistance line conductor and N- 3.4 mΩ

conductor
• Power consumption, per phase 20 mW
• Surge voltage strength 1.2/50µs 1 kV
Measuring inputs for current

• Relative measurable current for AC, min. 1%; in relation to the secondary rated current 5 A
• Relative measurable current for AC, max. 100%; in relation to the secondary rated current 5
A
• Continuous current for AC, maximum permis- 5A
sible
• Apparent power consumption per phase for 0.6 VA

measuring range 5 A
• Rated value of short-time current carrying 100 A

capacity is restricted to 1 s
• Input resistance measuring range 0 to 5 A 25 mΩ; at the terminal
• Zero point suppression Configurable: 2 - 250 mA, default 50 mA
• Impulse withstand capability 10 A; for 1 minute

94 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
6ES7134-6PA20-0BD0
Accuracy class to IEC 61557-12
• Measured variable voltage 0.2
• Measured variable current 0.2
• Measured variable apparent power 0.5
• Measured variable active power 0.5
• Measured variable reactive power 1
• Measured variable power factor 0.5
• Measured variable active energy 0.5
• Measured variable reactive energy 1
• Measured variable neutral current 0.5. Calculated
• Measured variable phase angle +/-1°. Not covered by IEC 61577-12
• Measured variable frequency 0.05

Between the channels and backplane bus Yes. 3700 VAC (type test) CATIII
Insulation
Insulation tested with 2300 VAC 1 min. (type test)
Ambient conditions
Vertical mounting position, max. 50 ℃
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Weight (without packaging) 45 g
Miscellaneous
Current transformer selection data
Cable length (clamp-type transformer) depending 200 m
on Zn and Imax
ATEX approval
In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;
Dimension drawing
See ET 200SP BaseUnits (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59753521)
manual

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 95

96 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
A.1 Configuration via parameter data records
The parameter data records of the module have an identical structure, regardless of whether
you configure the module with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.

You can reassign the module parameters in RUN mode, for example change the diagnostics
behavior, define new limits or configure a modified user data mapping.

The "WRREC" instruction is used to transfer the parameters to the module via the respective
data record. The parameters set in STEP 7 do not change in the CPU, which means the
parameters set in STEP 7 are still valid after a restart.
If you reconfigure a module (so that the user data size changes) and diagnostics are pending
prior to the reconfiguration, these diagnostics are not signaled as "outgoing".

If errors occur during the transfer of parameters with the WRREC instruction, the module
online help.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 97
Image A-1 Parameter data record 128
Header information

98 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA

The figure below shows the structure of the header information for a module.
Image A-3 Module header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 99


100 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Image A-4 Module parameter block
You can find the user data variant in the section Overview of the user data variants
(Page 135).

The following figure shows the structure of the header information for a channel.
Image A-5 Channel header information

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 101


102 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 103
Image A-6 Channel parameter block


ter
(hexadecimal)
length.
plugged or drawn.
Check the assigned values for the parame-
ters of the WRREC instruction
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 10, 11, 14, 22, 30...34, 42,
50...54, 70...74 and set the reserved bits
back to 0.
DF 80 E1 02 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 8 and set the reserved bits
back to 0.
DF 80 E1 05 Measuring range for voltage invalid. Check Byte 5. Permitted values: 01H to
0CH
DF 80 E1 20 Connection type invalid. Check Byte 4. Permitted values: 00H,
0BH ... 01H

104 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA

ter
(hexadecimal)
DF 80 E1 21 Parameter for user data variant not possi- Check Byte 9. Select a different user data
ble. variant or change the configuration.
DF 80 E1 22 Parameter for user data variant is invalid. Check Byte 9. Select a valid code for the
user data variant.
DF 80 E1 23 Parameter for frequency is invalid. Check Byte 6. Enter valid values.
DF 80 E1 24 Parameter for tolerance line voltage is Check Byte 7. Enter valid values.
invalid.
DF 80 E1 25 Parameter for current transformer second- Check Bit 4...5 in Byte 22, 42...62. Enter
ary is invalid. valid values.
DF 80 E1 29 Parameter for tolerance factor overcurrent Check Byte 15, 35...55. Enter valid values.
invalid.
DF 80 E1 2A Parameter for tolerance time overcurrent Check Byte 16...17, 36...37, 56...57. Enter
invalid. valid values.
DF 80 E1 2B Parameter for low limit measuring current Check Byte 23, 43...63. Enter valid values.
invalid
DF 80 E1 2C Parameter for current transformer primary Check Byte 18...21, 38...41, 48...61. Enter
current is invalid. valid values.
DF 80 E1 2D Parameter for voltage converter primary Check Byte 26...29, 46...49, 66...69. Enter
voltage invalid. valid values.
DF 80 E1 2E Parameter for voltage converter secondary Check Byte 24...25, 44...45, 64...65. Enter
voltage invalid. valid values.
DF 80 E1 2F Parameter for full-scale value for energy Check Bit 4...6 in Byte 6. Enter valid val-
counters invalid. ues.
DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter a
valid data record number.
DF 80 E1 3E Only for connection type 3P4W1. Check Bytes 14...33, 34...53, 54...73. En-
Parameters for the different phases are not ter identical values at all three phases.
identical.
DF 80 E1 3F Full-scale value for energy counter too Increase the full-scale value or reduce the
small or transmission ratio of current and transmission ratio of the current and volt-
voltage too high. age transformer.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 105
A.3 Structure of the parameter data record 129 for limit monitoring
Header information
Image A-8 Header information DS 129

106 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Limit parameter block

The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for limit monitoring.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 107
Image A-9 Limit parameter data block

108 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA


(hexadecimal)
length.
plugged or drawn.
Check the assigned values for the pa-
rameters of the WRREC instruction
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 10, 11, 14, 22, 30...34, 42,
50...54, 70...74 and set the reserved bits
back to 0.
DF 80 E1 31 Parameter for length of the parameter Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes
block invalid.
DF 80 E1 32 Parameters for number of parameter Check Byte 2. Enter valid values.
blocks invalid.
DF 80 E1 33 Parameter for measured value ID inva- Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid values.
lid.
DF 80 E1 34 Parameters for monitoring the limits Check Bit 0...3 in Byte 6. Enter valid
values.
DF 80 E1 35 Number for limits in monitoring parame- Check Bit 0...3 in Byte 6. Do not use
ter assigned several times limit number several times.
DF 80 E1 36 Parameters for hysteresis invalid Check Byte 7. Enter valid values.
DF 80 E1 37 Parameter for limit to be monitored Check Byte 8...11. Enter valid values.
invalid.
DF 80 E1 38 Delay time in Hysteresis parameter Check Byte 12. Enter valid values.
invalid.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 109
A.4 Structure of the parameter data record 130 for user-data mapping
Header information
Image A-11 Header information DS 130

110 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Parameter block for user data mapping

The following diagram shows the structure of the parameter blocks for user data mapping.
Image A-12 Parameter block for user data mapping

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 111


(hexadecimal)
record.
length.
DF 80 E0 02 Error in the header information Check Bytes 1 and 2. Correct the
length and number of the parameter
blocks.
DF 80 E1 01 Reserved bits are not 0. Check Byte 10, 11, 14, 22, 30...34,
42, 50...54, 70...74 and set the re-
served bits back to 0.
DF 80 E1 21 Parameter for user data variant not possi- Check Byte 9. Select a different user
ble. data variant or change the configura-
tion.
DF 80 E1 30 Invalid data record number. Check the data record number. Enter
a valid data record number.
DF 80 E1 31 Parameter for length of the parameter Check Byte 1. Length = 10 bytes
block invalid.
DF 80 E1 32 Parameters for number of parameter Check Byte 2. Enter valid values.
blocks invalid.
DF 80 E1 33 Parameter for measured value ID invalid. Check Bytes 4 and 5. Enter valid
values.
DF 80 E1 3B Parameter for user data variant impermis- Check Byte 1. Number for user-
sible. specific user data variant has to be
01H.

112 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Measured variables for data records and user data
The following table provides an overview of all measured variables that are used in the data
records and user data.
Note that the format and unit differ in the evaluation of records and user data.
Table B- 1 Measured variables for data records and user data

ured type 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
value ID
1 Voltage UL1-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2 Voltage UL2-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3 Voltage UL3-N 1 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
4 Voltage UL1-L2 2 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓
7 Current L1 1 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8 Current L2 1 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9 Current L3 1 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
10 Apparent power L1 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
11 Apparent power L2 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
12 Apparent power L3 3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
13 Active power L1 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
14 Active power L2 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓
+3.0 x 109
15 Active power L3 3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
16 Reactive power L1 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
17 Reactive power L2 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
18 Reactive power L3 3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
19 Power factor L1 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
20 Power factor L2 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
21 Power factor L3 3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 113
Measured variables

value ID
30 Frequency 4 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
34 Total apparent power REAL VA -3.0 x 109… ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 5 +3.0 x 109
35 Total active power REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 5 +3.0 x 109
36 Total reactive power REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 5 +3.0 x 109
37 Total power factor REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6 7
38 Amplitude balance for REAL % 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓
voltage 2
39 Amplitude symmetry for REAL % 0 ... 200 ✓ ✓
current 2
40 Max. voltage UL1-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
41 Max. voltage UL2-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
42 Max. voltage UL3-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
43 Max. voltage UL1-UL2 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓
46 Max. current L1 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
47 Max. current L2 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
48 Max. current L3 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
49 Max. apparent power L1 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6 +3.0 x 109
50 Max. apparent power REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6 +3.0 x 109
51 Max. apparent power REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6 +3.0 x 109
52 Max. active power L1 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
53 Max. active power L2 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
54 Max. active power L3 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
55 Max. reactive power L1 6 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
56 Max. reactive power L2 6 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
57 Max. reactive power L3 6 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
58 Max. power factor L1 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
59 Max. power factor L2 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
60 Max. power factor L3 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
61 Max. frequency 6 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

114 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Measured variables

value ID
65 Max. total apparent REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power 6 +3.0 x 109
66 Max. total active power 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
67 Max. total reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power 6 +3.0 x 109
68 Max. total power factor 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
70 Min. voltage UL1-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
71 Min. voltage UL2-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
72 Min. voltage UL3-N 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
73 Min. voltage UL1-UL2 6 REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 ✓ ✓
76 Min. current L1 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
77 Min. current L2 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
78 Min. current L3 6 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
79 Min. apparent power L1 6 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
80 Min. apparent power L2 6 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
81 Min. apparent power L3 6 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
82 Min. active power L1 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
83 Min. active power L2 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
84 Min. active power L3 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
85 Min. reactive power L1 6 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
86 Min. reactive power L2 6 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
87 Min. reactive power L3 6 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
88 Min. power factor L1 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
89 Min. power factor L2 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
90 Min. power factor L3 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
91 Min. frequency 6 REAL Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
95 Min. total apparent p REAL VA -3.0 x 109… ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ower 6 +3.0 x 109
96 Min. total active power 6 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
97 Min. total reactive power REAL var -3.0 x 109 … ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6 +3.0 x 109

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 115
Measured variables

value ID
98 Min. total power factor 6 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
200 Total active energy in- REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
flow L1L2L3 6
201 Total active energy REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
outflow L1L2L3 6
202 Total reactive energy REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
inflow L1L2L3 6
outflow L1L2L3 6
204 Total apparent energy REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
205 Total active energy REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
L1L2L3 6
210 Total active energy in- LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
flow L1L2L3 6
211 Total active energy out- LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
flow L1L2L3 6
212 Total reactive energy LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
inflow L1L2L3 6
outflow L1L2L3 6
214 Total apparent energy LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
215 Total active energy LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
L1L2L3 6
220 Total active energy in- UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
flow L1L2L3 6
221 Total active energy out- UDINT varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
flow L1L2L3 6
222 Total reactive energy UDINT varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
inflow L1L2L3 6
223 Total reactive energy UDINT VAh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
outflow L1L2L3 6
224 Total apparent energy UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
225 Total active energy UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
226 Total reactive energy UDINT varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
61149 Neutral conductor cur- REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 ✓
rent 1
61178 Phase angle L1 3 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

116 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Measured variables

value ID
61180 Active energy inflow L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61181 Active energy outflow LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1 6
61182 Reactive energy inflow LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1 6
61183 Reactive energy outflow LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1 6
61184 Apparent energy L1 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61185 Active energy L1 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61186 Reactive energy L1 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61190 Overflow counter active UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
energy inflow L1 6
61191 Overflow counter active UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
energy outflow L1 6
61192 Overflow counter reac- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tive energy inflow L1 6
61193 Overflow counter reac- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tive energy outflow L1 6
61194 Overflow counter appar- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ent energy L1 6
61198 Phase angle L2 3 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61200 Active energy inflow L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61201 Active energy outflow LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6
61202 Reactive energy inflow LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6
61203 Reactive energy outflow LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6
61204 Apparent energy L2 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61205 Active energy L2 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61206 Reactive energy L2 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61210 Overflow counter active UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
energy inflow L2 6
61211 Overflow counter active UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
energy outflow L2 6
61212 Overflow counter reac- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61213 Overflow counter reac- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
61214 Overflow counter appar- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ent energy L2 6
61218 Phase angle L3 3 REAL 0.0 ... 360.0 ✓ ✓ ✓
61220 Active energy inflow L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 117
Measured variables

value ID
61221 Active energy outflow LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6
61222 Reactive energy inflow LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6
61223 Reactive energy outflow LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6
61224 Apparent energy L3 6 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓
61225 Active energy L3 6 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓
61226 Reactive energy 7L3 6 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 ✓ ✓ ✓
61230 Overflow counter active UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
energy inflow L3 6
61231 Overflow counter active UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
energy outflow L3 6
61232 Overflow counter reac- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
61233 Overflow counter reac- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
61234 Overflow counter appar- UINT - 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
ent energy L3 6
62110 Active energy inflow L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
62111 Active energy outflow L1 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6
62112 Reactive energy inflow UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

L1 6
62113 Reactive energy outflow UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1 6
62114 Apparent energy L1 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
62115 Active energy L1 total UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(inflow - outflow) 6
62116 Reactive energy L1 total UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
62210 Active energy inflow L2 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
62211 Active energy outflow UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6
62212 Reactive energy inflow UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6
62213 Reactive energy outflow UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 6
62214 Apparent energy L2 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
62215 Active energy L2 total UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
62216 Reactive energy L2 total UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
62310 Active energy inflow L3 6 UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓

118 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Measured variables

value ID
62311 Active energy outflow UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6
62312 Reactive energy inflow UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6
62313 Reactive energy outflow UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 6
62314 Apparent energy L3 6 UDINT VAh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
62315 Active energy L3 total UDINT Wh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
62316 Reactive energy L3 total UDINT Varh 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓
65500 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
0b qq 00 00 xx
65501 Qualifier L2 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
0b qq 00 xx 00
65502 Qualifier L3 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 ✓ ✓ ✓
0b qq xx 00 00
65503 Qualifier L1L2L3 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
0b qq xx xx xx
65504 Total operating hours REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
counter L1L2L3 5 8 9
65505 Operating hours counter REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1 5
65506 Operating hours counter REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 5
65507 Operating hours counter REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 5
65508 Status of energy counter WORD Bit field 0x xxxx xxxx ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
overflows
65509 Status of limits WORD Bit field 0x xxxx xxxx ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
65510 Counter limit violation UDINT 0 ... 4294967295 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
GW1 5
GW2 5
GW3 5
GW4 5
GW5 5
GW6 5
GW7 5

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 119
Measured variables

value ID
GW8 5
GW9 5
GW10 5
GW11 5
GW12 5
GW13 5
GW14 5
GW15 5
GW16 5
66001 Voltage UL1-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66002 Voltage UL2-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66003 Voltage UL3-N 1 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
66004 Voltage UL1-L2 2 UINT 0.01 V 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓
66007 Current L1 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66008 Current L2 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66009 Current L3 1 UINT 1 mA 0 ... 65535 ✓ ✓ ✓
66010 Apparent power L1 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66011 Apparent power L2 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66012 Apparent power L3 3 INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓
66013 Active power L1 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66014 Active power L2 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66015 Active power L3 3 INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓
66016 Reactive power L1 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66017 Reactive power L2 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66018 Reactive power L3 3 INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓
66019 Power factor L1 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66020 Power factor L2 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66021 Power factor L3 3 USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓ ✓
66030 Frequency 4 USINT 1 Hz 45 ... 65 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
66034 Total apparent power INT 1 VA -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 5

120 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Measured variables

value ID
66035 Total active power INT 1W -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 5
66036 Total reactive power INT 1 var -27648 ... 27648 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 5
66037 Total power factor USINT 0.01 0 ... 100 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1L2L3 6
66038 Frequency 4 UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1 Effective value
2 IEC 61557-12
3 Arithmetical mean value over 200 ms as floating mean
4 Arithmetical mean value over 10 s as floating mean
5 Simple summation
6 Calculation from the start/restart (inflow and outflow values are positive numbers)
7 Determined from ratio of active and apparent power
8 For mapping both states as UINT (high: Energy counter overflow, low limit)
9 Corresponds to the maximum of the phase-specific operating hours counters
Format
Table B- 2 Format and its length in bytes
Format in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) Format to IEEE Length in bytes Comment

BYTE BYTE 1 byte Bit field with 8 bit
WORD WORD 2 bytes Bit field with 16 bit
USINT INT8 (unsigned) 1 byte Fixed-point number 8 bits without sign
INT INT16 (signed) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits with sign
UINT INT16 (unsigned) 2 bytes Fixed-point number 16 bits without sign
UDINT INT32 (unsigned) 4 bytes Fixed-point number 32 bits without sign
REAL Float32 4 bytes Floating-point number 32 bits with sign
LREAL Float64 8 bytes Floating-point number 64 bits with sign

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 121
Module versions C

The module has 2 bytes of input user data and 2 bytes of output user data for status and
control information. At this module version measured variables can be read solely via
measured value data records (no measured variables can be evaluated via user data).

The structure of the input user data is fixed.

0 Module User data vari- Constant = 0x80
ant
mation

122 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Module versions
Image C-1 Allocation of the status bytes in the input user data (2 bytes)

The structure of the output user data is fixed.

0 Module Reserved Reserved
1 Module Control outputs Reset of values and counters, gate

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 123
Module versions
Assignment of the output user data

Via the output user data you control for all phases
● Resetting for all minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and
energy counters.
● The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters.
Image C-2 Allocation of the control byte in the output user data (1 byte)
Note
For module version 2 I / 2 Q, a reset of the selected variables always acts on all measured
values/counter levels of the three phases.
• Reset energy counter: Acts on all active, reactive and apparent energies of all phases
• Reset operating hours counter: Acts on the counters of Phases 1 to 3
• Reset minimum / maximum values: Acts on the minimum and maximum value
calculations of Phases 1-3
• Reset all counters for limit violations: Acts on all 16 limit values.

124 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Module versions

The module occupies 32 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output user data. Of these
the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 12 bytes output data for
control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data (Bytes 2 to 31)
or acyclically via measured value data records

You can set the contents of the input user data dynamically. You can choose between
different user data variants.

0 Module User data vari- -
ant
mation
2 ... 31 Module or phase Data 2 or 4 bytes of measured values or calculated values according to
user data variant

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 125
Module versions

user data variants.
Image C-3 Assignment of the input user data (32 bytes)

126 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Module versions

The structure of the output user data is fixed and is the same at all the selectable user data
variants.
Via the output user data you control globally or phase-specifically
● Resetting for minimum values, maximum values, limits, operating hours counter and
energy counters.
● The counter gates for operating hours counter and energy counters.

0 Module User data vari- Control byte for switching the user data variant
ant
1 Module Control byte 1 Global resetting of values and counters, gate
2 Module Control byte 2 Selection of the energy counter to be reset
3 Module Control byte 3 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 9 to 16
4 Module Control byte 4 Control of the limit monitoring of limit values 1 to 8
5 Module Reserved -
6 Phase L1 Control byte 6 Phase-specific resetting of values and counters, gate for Phase 1
7 Phase L1 Control byte 7
Control bytes for user data variant
Image C-4 Allocation of the control bytes for user data variant (Byte 0)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 127
Module versions
Control bytes for all three phases
Image C-5 Allocation of the control bytes for all three phases (bytes 1 and 2)

128 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Module versions
Control bytes for limit monitoring
Image C-6 Allocation of the control bytes for limit monitoring (bytes 3 to 5)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 129
Module versions
Control bytes for each individual phase
Image C-7 Allocation of the control bytes for each individual phase (bytes 6 to 11)

130 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Module versions
C.3 "User-specific" module version

The module occupies between 16 and 256 bytes of input user data and 12 bytes of output
user data. Of these the module uses 2 bytes input data for status information and 12 bytes
output data for control information. Measured variables can be read cyclically via user data
(as of Byte 2) or acyclically via measured value data records

You configure the structure of the input user data starting at Byte 2 at this module version
itself. An input user data length of 32 bytes also allows you to set the input user data
dynamically. You can choose between different user data variants.
Table C- 5 Structure of input user data (16 to 256 bytes)

0 Module User data vari- -
ant
mation
2 ... 255 Module or phase Data Measured values or calculated values in accordance with their con-
figuration:
• At configuration in STEP 7 the size of the input user data is calcu-
lated automatically.
• At configuration via the GSD file the size of the input user data
amounts to 32, 64, 128 or 256 bytes. The memory area has to be
sufficiently large for the measured variables defined in parameter
data record 130.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 131
Module versions

user data variants.
The allocation of the status information in Byte 0 and 1 corresponds to the module version
32 I / 12 Q, see appendix Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 125).
Image C-8 Allocation of the input user data ("User-specific" module version"
Note
Behavior at switchover in case of the input user data being too small
If the configured size of the variable input user data is smaller than the sized of the fixed user
data variant, the response depends on the type of switchover:
• Re-configuration via parameter data record 128 / 130: Output of a parameter assignment
error (33). No switchover.
• Switchover using output byte 0 of a user data variant: No switchover and no error
message.

The structure of the 12 output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data
(control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 125).

132 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Module versions
C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"
C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 /

E2 / E3"

The four versions according to EE@Industry use between 4 and 104 bytes of input user data
and 12 bytes of output user data. A dynamic switchover of the input user data is not
possible.

The structure of the input user data for the module versions according to the EE@Industry
standard is fixed and depends on the selected measurement data profile.
Table C- 6 Measurement data profile E0
Byte Allocation Data type Unit Value range Meas-

ured
value ID
0...3 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 7
4...7 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 8
8...11 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 9

ured
value
ID
0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 35

ured
value ID
0...3 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 35
4...7 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 1038 210
inflow
8...11 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 1038 211
outflow

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 133
Module versions
C.4 Module version "EE@Industry measurement data profile E0 / E1 / E2 / E3"

value ID
0...3 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 13
12...15 Reactive power L1 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... +3.0 x 109 16
24...31 Total active energy LREAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210
L1L2L3 inflow
32...39 Total active energy LREAL 1 Wh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211
L1L2L3 outflow
40...47 Total reactive energy LREAL 1 varh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212
L1L2L3 inflow
48...55 Total reactive energy LREAL 1 varh 0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213
L1L2L3 outflow
56...59 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 … 1000000.0 1
68...71 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 … 1000000.0 4
80...83 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 7
84...87 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 8
88...91 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 9
92...95 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 … 1.0 19
3

The structure of the 12 byte output user data is fixed and is identical to the output user data
(control bytes) of the Module version "32 I / 12 Q" (Page 125).

134 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data
30 bytes are available for transferring the measured values in a cycle at the module version
32 I / 12 Q. Therefore this module version supports dynamic switching between 22
preconfigured user data variants that contain a specific selection of measured values.
For more detailed information, refer to "Selecting the module versions (Page 26)".
Table D- 1 Overview of the user data variants
User data User data variant

Total power L1L2L3 254 (FEH) - default setting
Active power L1L2L3 253 (FDH)
Reactive power L1L2L3 252 (FCH)
Apparent power L1L2L3 251 (FBH)
Basic measured values L1L2L3 250 (FAH)
Total energy L1L2L3 249 (F9H)
Energy L1 248 (F8H)
Energy L2 247 (F7H)
Energy L3 246 (F6H)
Basic variables three-phase measurement 245 (F5H)
L1L2L3
Quality values three-phase measurement 240 (F0H)
Energy measurement (periodic) overflow counter 239 (EFH)
EE@Industry measurement data profile E3 227 (E3H)
Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1 159 (9FH)
Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1a 158 (9EH)
Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2 157 (9DH)
Basic variables phase-specific measurement L2a 156 (9CH)
Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3 155 (9BH)
Basic variables phase-specific measurement L3a 154 (9AH)
User-defined user data structure 1 (01H)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 135
User data variants
Total power L1L2L3 (ID 254 or FEH)
Table D- 2 Total power L1L2L3

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
18 ... 21 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 …4294967295 226

136 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Active power L1L2L3 (ID 253 or FDH)
Table D- 3 Active power L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 253 (FDH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
30 Scaling active power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 137
User data variants
Reactive power L1L2L3 (ID 252 or FCH)
Table D- 4 Reactive power L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 252 (FCH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
16 ... 19 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 ... 4294967295 226
30 Scaling reactive power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

138 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Apparent power L1L2L3 (ID 251 or FBH)
Table D- 5 Apparent power L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 251 (FBH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
16 ... 19 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 ... 4294967295 224
30 Scaling apparent power L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -
31 Scaling total apparent energy L1L2L3 USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 139
User data variants
Basic measured values L1L2L3 (ID 250 or FAH)
Table D- 6 Basic measured values L1L2L3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 250 (FAH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
4 ... 5 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008
6 ... 7 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
27 Scaling voltage UL1-N (UL1-UL2) USINT - 0 ... 255 -
30 ... 31 Frequency UINT 0.01 Hz 4500 ... 6500 66038

140 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Total energy L1L2L3 (ID 249 or F9H)
Table D- 7 Total energy L1L2L3

value ID
4 ... 7 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 220
8 ... 11 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 221
11 ... 15 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 222
16 ... 19 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 223
20 ... 23 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 UDINT 1 VAh 0 … 4294967295 224
25 Scaling active energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
26 Scaling active energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
27 Scaling reactive energy, inflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
28 Scaling reactive energy, outflow USINT - 0 ... 255 -
29 Scaling apparent energy USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 141
User data variants

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007

142 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 143
User data variants

value ID
2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009
8 ... 11 Active energy L3, outflow UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 62311
Basic variables three-phase measurements (ID 245 or F5H)
Table D- 11 Basic variables three-phase measurements

value ID
2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... 35
+ 3.0 x 109
6 ... 9 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 211
10 ... 13 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 210
14 ... 17 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 7
18 ... 21 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 8
22 ... 25 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 9

144 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement (ID 240 or F0H)
Table D- 12 Basic variables quality values three-phase measurement

ured
value ID
2 ... 3 Status of the limit monitoring GW 1 ... 16 (*) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509
4 ... 5 Status of the energy counter overflows (**) WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508
6 ... 7 Quality information = WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503
00 DD QQ3 QQ2 QQ1 I3 U3 I2 U2 I1 U1
8 ... 9 Reserved WORD - - -
(*) Limit violation in:

Bit 0 = limit 1 to bit 15 = limit 16
(**) Energy counter count periodically - counter overflow at:
Bit 0 = 1: Active energy inflow L1
Bit 1 = 1: Active energy outflow L1
Bit 2 = 1: Reactive energy inflow L1
Bit 3 = 1: Reactive energy outflow L1
Bit 4 = 1: Apparent energy L1
Bit 15: Reserved

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 145
User data variants
Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter (ID 239 or EFH)
Table D- 13 Basic variables energy counter measurement (periodic) overflow counter

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 239 (EFH) -
2 ... 3 Overflow counter for active energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 … 65535 65120
4 ... 5 Overflow counter for active energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 … 65535 65121
6 ... 7 Overflow counter for reactive energy inflow L1 UINT - 0 … 65535 65122
8 ... 9 Overflow counter for reactive energy outflow L1 UINT - 0 … 65535 65123
10 ... 11 Overflow counter for apparent energy L1 UINT - 0 … 65535 65124

146 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Basic variables measurement data profile (ID 227 or E3H)
Table D- 14 Basic variables measurement data profile Energy E3

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 227 (E3H) -
2 ... 5 Active power L1 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 13
14 ... 17 Reactive power L1 REAL 1 var -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 16
26 ... 33 Total active energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 220
1.8 x 10308
34 ... 41 Total active energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 221
42 ... 49 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 inflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 222
50 ... 57 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 outflow LREAL 1 varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 223
58 ... 61 Voltage UL1-N REAL 1V 0.0 … 1000000.0 1
70 ... 73 Voltage UL1-UL2 REAL 1V 0.0 … 1000000.0 4
82 ... 85 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 7
86 ... 89 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 8
90 ... 93 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 9
94 ... 97 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 … 1.0 19

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 147
User data variants

ured
value ID
2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 35
6 ... 9 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 220
10 ...13 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL 1W 3.0 x 109 221

ured
value ID
2 ... 5 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL 1W -3.0 x 109 ... + 3.0 x 109 35

ured
value ID
2 ... 5 Current L1 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 7
6 ... 9 Current L2 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 8
10 ...13 Current L3 REAL 1A 0.0 … 100000.0 9

148 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 159 or 9FH)
Table D- 18 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 159 (9FH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
12 ... 15 Active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 Wh 0 … 4294967295 62115
16 ... 19 Reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) UDINT 1 varh 0 … 4294967295 62116
28 Scaling active energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 -
29 Scaling reactive energy L1 total (inflow - outflow) USINT - 0 ... 255 -

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 149
User data variants
Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 158 or 9EH)
Table D- 19 Basic variables phase-specific measurement L1a

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 158 (9EH) -
2 ... 3 Current L1 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66007
31 Scaling voltage UL1-N USINT - 0 ... 255 -

150 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 157 or 9DH)

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 157 (9DH) -
2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 151
User data variants
Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 156 or 9CH)

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 156 (9CH) -
2 ... 3 Current L2 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66008

152 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
User data variants
Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 155 or 9BH)

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 155 (9BH) -
2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 153
User data variants
Basic variables phase-specific measurement (ID 154 or 9AH)

value ID
0 User data variant BYTE - 154 (9AH) -
2 ... 3 Current L3 UINT 1 mA 0 … 65535 66009

154 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
E.1 Overview of all measured value data records
Energy Meter 480VAC ST writes the measured values in several data records that you can
read acyclically using the RDREC instruction in the user program.
The following tables show the structure of the individual data records:
● Data record DS 142 for basic measured values (read only).
● Data record DS 143 for energy counters (read and write).
● Data record DS 144 for maximum values (read only).
● Data record DS 145 for minimum values (read only).
● Data record DS 147 for phase-specific measured values L1 (read only).
● Data record DS 150 for advanced measurement and status values (read only).

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 155

The following table provides an overview of all the measured variables that data record 142
supplies. Please note that, depending on the connection type used the display of some
measured variables does not make sense and that the module deletes measured values that
are not relevant.
The measured value identification (measured value ID) is an index which references the
overview table of the measured variables in appendix B (Measured variables (Page 113)).
Table E- 1 Data record 142

value ID
26...29 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 7
30...33 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 8
34...37 Current L3 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 9
50...53 Total power factor L1L2L3 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 37
54...57 Frequency REAL 1 Hz 45.0 ... 65.0 30
58...61 Amplitude unbalance for voltage REAL % 0 ... 100 38
62...65 Amplitude unbalance for current REAL % 0 ... 200 39
78...81 Total apparent power L1L2L3 REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 34
94...97 Total reactive power L1L2L3 REAL var -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 36

156 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA

value ID
110...113 Total active power L1L2L3 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … +3.0 x 109 35
126...129 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 REAL VAh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 204
130...133 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 206
134...137 Total active energy L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 205
138...141 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 202
142...145 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL varh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 203
146...149 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 200
150...153 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 REAL Wh 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 201
154...161 Total apparent energy L1L2L3 LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 214
162...169 Total reactive energy L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 216
170...177 Total active energy L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 215
178...185 Total reactive energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 212
186...193 Total reactive energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 213
194...201 Total active energy inflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 210
202...209 Total active energy outflow L1L2L3 LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 211
210...213 Neutral conductor current REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 61149
Note
• The cumulative value of the energy counters in 3-phase operation is obtained from the
sums of the individual values of the phases.
• Inflow and outflow energy meters are always positive values.
• The operating hours counter for the entire module is calculated from the sum of the
operating hours of the individual phases.
Neutral conductor current

If you operate the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST with connection type 3P4W, the neutral
conductor current is also determined under the following conditions:
● Transmission factors of all phase currents (primary and secondary currents) are identical.
● Measured phase currents are greater than the value of the "Low limit for measuring
current parameter.
The neutral is subject to a "Low limit for measuring current" like all other current
measurements. The lowest value of all three configured low limits is used as the minimum
value.
If one of the conditions is not met, 0 is entered as the value for the neutral conductor current.
You can read the determined neutral conductor current using measured value data record
142.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 157
Procedure
Data record 142 is located on the AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST. Use SFB "RDREC" to read
out the data record from the module. Dieser Systemfunktionsbaustein ist in der STEP 7
Bibliothek hinterlegt.
Measured values in STEP 7 as of V5.5

Measured values are represented as negative values in STEP 7 as of V5.5 if the value range
of the integer format (32767 dec) is exceeded. This is not an error in the measured value.
Solution: Select hexadecimal representation.
Conversion of 64-bit floating-point numbers

If you cannot process 64-bit floating-point numbers in your automation system, we
recommend conversion to 32-bit floating-point numbers. Note the conversion can cause loss
of accuracy. For a description of the conversion of the 64-bit floating-point numbers (data
type LREAL) into 32-bit floating-point numbers (data type REAL) please refer to the Internet

158 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA

● Reading the overflow counters
● Reading the operating hours
Table E- 2 Energy meter data record 143
Byte Measured variable Data Unit Value range Meas-

type ured
value ID
2 Status / control byte 1 - L1 BYTE Bit string - -
40...47 Apparent energy (initial value) L1 LREAL VAh During reading: 61184
48...55 Active energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh 0.0...1.8 x 10308 61200
56...63 Active energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL Wh During writing 61201
64...61 Reactive energy inflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh For continuous counting: 61202
72...79 Reactive energy outflow (initial value) L2 LREAL varh 0.0...3.4 x 1012 61203
During writing
For periodic counting:
0...configured full-scale
value (103 ...1015)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 159
Byte Measured variable Data Unit Value range Meas-

type ured
value ID
128...129 Overflow counter active energy inflow L1 UINT - 61190
130..131 Overflow counter active energy outflow L1 UINT - 61191
138...139 Overflow counter active energy inflow L2 UINT - During reading: 61210
142...143 Overflow counter reactive energy inflow L2 UINT - During writing for continu- 61212
ous counting:
0
During writing for periodic
148...149 Overflow counter active energy inflow L3 UINT - counting: 61230
158...161 Operating hours counter L1 (initial value) REAL h During reading: 65505
162...165 Operating hours counter L2 (initial value) REAL h 0...3.4x1038 65506
166...169 Operating hours counter L3 (initial value) REAL h During writing: 65507
0...109

160 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Status information
counters.
Image E-1 Status information DS 143 (read access)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 161
Control information
counters are reset.
want to reset.
Image E-2 Control information DS 143 (write access)

162 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA


(hexadecimal)
record.
length.
bits back to 0.
be negative.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 163
E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144)
E.4 Measured value data record for maximum values (DS 144)

The largest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST
was started are stored in this data record.
Byte Measured variable Format Unit Default Measured Connection type

value ID 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
0 Version BYTE - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2...5 Max. voltage UL1-N REAL V 0 40 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6...9 Max. voltage UL2-N REAL V 0 41 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
10...13 Max. voltage UL3-N REAL V 0 42 ✓ ✓ ✓
14...17 Max. voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 0 43 ✓ ✓
26...29 Max. current L1 1 REAL A 0 46 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
30...33 Max. current L2 1 REAL A 0. 47 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
34...37 Max. current L3 1 REAL A 0 48 ✓ ✓ ✓
38...41 Max. apparent pow- REAL VA 0 49 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
er L1
42...45 Max. apparent pow- REAL VA 0 50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
er L2
46...49 Max. apparent pow- REAL VA 0 51 ✓ ✓ ✓
er L3
50...53 Max. active REAL W -3.0 x 109 52 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1
54...57 Max. active REAL W -3.0 x 109 53 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L2
58...61 Max. active REAL W -3.0 x 109 54 ✓ ✓ ✓
power L3
62...65 Max. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 55 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1
66...69 Max. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 56 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L2
70...73 Max. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 57 ✓ ✓ ✓
power L3
74...77 Max. power REAL - 0 58 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L1
78...81 Max. power REAL - 0 59 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L2
82...85 Max. power REAL - 0 60 ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L3
86...89 Max. frequency REAL Hz 45 61 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

164 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145)

value ID 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
90...93 Max. total apparent REAL VA 0 65 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power
94...97 Max. total active REAL W -3.0 x 109 66 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power
98...101 Max. total reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 67 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power
102 Max. total power REAL - 0 68 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
factor
1 The values reference the amount of the current measured value
E.5 Measured value data record for minimum values (DS 145)

The smallest values ever measured or calculated from the time AI Energy Meter 480VAC ST
was started are stored in this data record.

value ID
1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
0 Version BYTE - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2...5 Min. voltage UL1-N REAL V 1000000 70 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6...9 Min. voltage UL2-N REAL V 1000000 71 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
10...13 Min. voltage UL3-N REAL V 1000000 72 ✓ ✓ ✓
14...17 Min. voltage UL1-L2 REAL V 1800000 73 ✓ ✓
26...29 Min. current L1 1 REAL A 100000 76 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
30...33 Min. current L2 1 REAL A 100000 77 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
34...37 Min. current L3 1 REAL A 100000 78 ✓ ✓ ✓
38...41 Min. apparent power REAL VA +3.0 x 109 79 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1
42...45 Min. apparent power REAL VA +3.0 x 109 80 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2
46...49 Min. apparent power REAL VA +3.0 x 109 81 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3
50...53 Min. active power L1 REAL W +3.0 x 109 82 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
54...57 Min. active power L2 REAL W +3.0 x 109 83 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
58...61 Min. active power L3 REAL W +3.0 x 109 84 ✓ ✓ ✓
62...65 Min. reactive power REAL var +3.0 x 109 85 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L1

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 165
E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1 (DS 147)

value ID
1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
66...69 Min. reactive power REAL var +3.0 x 109 86 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2
70...73 Min. reactive power REAL var +3.0 x 109 87 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3
74...77 Min. power factor L1 REAL - 1 88 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
78...81 Min. power factor L2 REAL - 1 89 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
82...85 Min. power factor L3 REAL - 1 90 ✓ ✓ ✓
86...89 Min. frequency REAL Hz 65 91 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
90...93 Min. total apparent REAL VA +3.0 x 109 95 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power
94...97 Min. total active pow- REAL W +3.0 x 109 96 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
er
98...101 Min. total reactive REAL var +3.0 x 109 97 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power
102 Min. total power fac- REAL - 1 98 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tor
1 The values reference the amount of the current measured value
E.6 Measured value data record for phase-based measured values L1

(DS 147)
Measured variables of the module (DS 147)
Byte Measured varia- Format Unit Value range Meas- Connection type
ble ured 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
value
ID
0 Version BYTE - 1 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2...3 Qualifier L1 WORD Bit field 0b 00 00 00 00 65500 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
0b qq 00 00 xx
4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8...11 Current L1 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 7 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
12...15 Apparent REAL VA -3.0 x 109
… 10 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
16...19 Active power L1 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … 13 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
20...23 Reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 … 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
24...27 Power factor L1 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 19 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

166 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
value
ID
28...31 Phase angle L1 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 61178 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
32...39 Apparent LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61184 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
energy L1
40...47 Active energy LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61185 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(total) L1
48...55 Reactive energy LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61186 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(total) L1
56...59 Max. voltage REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 40 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
UL1-N
60...63 Max. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 46 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
64...67 Max. apparent REAL VA -3.0 x 109… 49 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
68...71 Max. active REAL W -3.0 x 109 … 52 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
72...75 Max. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 … 55 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
76...79 Max. power REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 58 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L1
80...83 Min. voltage REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 70 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
UL1-N
84...87 Min. current L1 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 76 ✓
88...91 Min. apparent REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … 79 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
92...95 Min. active pow- REAL W -3.0 x 109 … 83 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
er L1 +3.0 x 109
96...99 Min. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 … 85 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L1 +3.0 x 109
100...103 Min. power REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 88 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L1

(DS 148)
value
ID
0 Version BYTE - 1 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1 Reserved BYTE - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 167
value
ID
2...3 Qualifier L2 WORD Bit 0b 00 00 00 00 65501 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
field 0b qq 00 00 xx
4...7 Voltage UL1-N REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 2 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8...11 Current L2 REAL A 0.0 … 100000.0 8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
12...15 Apparent power REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … 11 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 +3.0 x 109
16...19 Active power L2 REAL W -3.0 x 109 … 14 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
+3.0 x 109
20...23 Reactive power REAL var -3.0 x 109 … 17 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 +3.0 x 109
24...27 Power factor L2 REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 20 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
28...31 Phase angle L2 REAL ° 0.0 ... 360.0 61198 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
32...39 Apparent energy LREAL VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61204 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2
40...47 Active energy LREAL Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61205 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(total) L2
48...55 Reactive energy LREAL varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61206 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(total) L2
56...59 Max. voltage REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 41 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
UL1-N
60...63 Max. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 47 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
64...67 Max. apparent REAL VA -3.0 x 109… 50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L2 +3.0 x 109
68...71 Max. active pow- REAL W -3.0 x 109 … 53 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
er L2 +3.0 x 109
72...75 Max. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 … 56 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L2 +3.0 x 109
76...79 Max. power factor REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 59 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2
80...83 Min. voltage UL1- REAL V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 71 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
N
84...87 Min. current L2 REAL A 0.0 ... 100000.0 77
88...91 Min. apparent REAL VA -3.0 x 109 … 80 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L2 +3.0 x 109
92...95 Min. active power REAL W -3.0 x 109 … 84 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2 +3.0 x 109
96...99 Min. reactive REAL var -3.0 x 109 … 86 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
power L2 +3.0 x 109
100...103 Min. power factor REAL - 0.0 ... 1.0 89 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
L2

168 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA

(DS 149)
Byte Measured variable For- Unit Value range Meas- Connection type
mat ured 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
value
ID
0 Version BYT - 1 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
E
1 Reserved BYT - 0 - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
E
2...3 Qualifier L3 WO Bit 0b 00 00 00 00 65502 ✓ ✓ ✓
RD field 0b qq 00 00 xx
4...7 Voltage UL1-N REA V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 3 ✓ ✓ ✓
L
8...11 Current L3 REA A 0.0 … 100000.0 9 ✓ ✓ ✓
L
12...15 Apparent power L3 REA VA -3.0 x 109 … 12 ✓ ✓ ✓
L +3.0 x 109
16...19 Active power L3 REA W -3.0 x 109 … 15 ✓ ✓ ✓
L +3.0 x 109
20...23 Reactive power L3 REA var -3.0 x 109 … 18 ✓ ✓ ✓
L +3.0 x 109
24...27 Power factor L3 REA - 0.0 ... 1.0 21 ✓ ✓ ✓
L
28...31 Phase angle L3 REA ° 0.0 ... 360.0 61218 ✓ ✓ ✓
L
32...39 Apparent energy LRE VAh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61224 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 AL
40...47 Active energy LRE Wh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61225 ✓ ✓ ✓
(total) L3 AL
48...55 Reactive energy LRE varh 0.0 ... 1.8 x 10308 61226 ✓ ✓ ✓
(total) L3 AL
56...59 Max. voltage REA V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 42 ✓ ✓ ✓
UL1-N L
60...63 Max. current L3 REA A 0.0 ... 100000.0 48 ✓ ✓ ✓
L
64...67 Max. apparent REA VA -3.0 x 109 … 51 ✓ ✓ ✓
power L3 L + 3.0 x 109
68...71 Max. active power REA W -3.0 x 109 … 53 ✓ ✓ ✓
L3 L +3.0 x 109
72...75 Max. reactive pow- REA var -3.0 x 109 … 57 ✓ ✓ ✓
er L3 L +3.0 x 109
76...79 Max. power REA - 0.0 ... 1.0 60 ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L3 L

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 169
E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150)
Byte Measured variable For- Unit Value range Meas- Connection type
mat ured 1P2W 3x1P2W 2P3W 3P4W 3P4W1
value
ID
80...83 Min. voltage UL1-N REA V 0.0 ... 1000000.0 72 ✓ ✓ ✓
L
84...87 Min. current L3 REA A 0.0 ... 100000.0 78
L
88...91 Min. apparent REA VA -3.0 x 109 … 81 ✓ ✓ ✓
power L3 L +3.0 x 109
92...95 Min. active REA W -3.0 x 109 … 85 ✓ ✓ ✓
power L3 L +3.0 x 109
96...99 Min. reactive pow- REA var -3.0 x 109 … 87 ✓ ✓ ✓
er L3 L +3.0 x 109
100...103 Min. power REA - 0.0 ... 1.0 90 ✓ ✓ ✓
factor L3 L
E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status
values (DS 150)

Data record 150
Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured

value ID
2...5 Operating hours counter L1L2L3 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65504
6...9 Operating hours counter L1 REAL h 0.0 ... 3.4 x 1038 65505
18...19 Status limit violation GW 1...16 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65509
20...21 Status of energy counter overflows 1 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65508
22...25 Counter limit violation GW 1 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65510

170 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
E.9 Measured value data record for advanced measurement and status values (DS 150)
Byte Measured variable Format Unit Value range Measured

value ID
82..85 Counter limit violation GW 16 UDINT - 0 ... 4294967296 65525
86..87 Qualifier L1L2L3 WORD Bit string xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx 65503
1 Energy counters count periodically - counter overflow at:
Bit 15: Reserved

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA 171
Tips and tricks F
F.1 Tips and tricks
Processing and visualizing energy data

On the basis of an application example we show you how the measured values of the
AI Energy Meter can be processed further and visualized.
You can find this application example on the Internet
IT network
You must create an artificial N-conductor (for example, by means of a 1:1 voltage
transformer) in IT networks due to the missing neutral conductor. You can then use the
module.

172 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36061895-AA
Analog output module AQ 2xU ST ___________________
Preface
(6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog output module AQ 2xU ST
___________________
(6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
12/2015
A5E36105248-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
I/O system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog output module AQ 2xU ST (6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Output ranges .........................................................................................................................13
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................13
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................16
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................19
B.2 Representation of output ranges ............................................................................................29
B.3 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges ..............................................30

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module AQ 2×U ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
● Analog output module with 2 outputs
– for voltage output
● Output range for voltage output:
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AQ 2xU ST module with the terminal
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 11
Wiring
Wiring: Voltage output 2-wire connection

the analog output module AQ 2xU ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for voltage output Qn+ Analog output voltage positive, channel n
② Backplane bus interface Qn- Analog output voltage negative, channel n
③ Microcontroller NC Not connected
④ Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) RES Reserve, must remain unused for future function exten-
sions
⑤ Output conditioner L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored BaseUnit)
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC00 (option- M Ground
al)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
(function cannot be used for this module) Connection to left (dark-colored BaseUnit)
⑧ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
AQ0, AQ1 Channel status LED (green)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for voltage output 2-wire connection

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
4.1 Output ranges
The analog output module AQ 2×U ST has the following output ranges:
Table 4- 1 Output ranges
Output type Output ranges Resolution

Voltage ± 10 V 16 bits incl. sign
±5V 15 bits including sign
0 to 10 V 15 bits
1 to 5 V 13 bits
The tables of the output ranges, overflow, overrange, etc. can be found in section
Representation of analog values (Page 28).
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AQ 2xU ST

in RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Enable
Short-circuit to ground1
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable

13 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
4.2 Parameters

in RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Output type/range • Deactivated Voltage +/- 10 V Yes Channel Channel
• Voltage +/- 5 V
• Voltage 0..10 V
• Voltage 1..5 V
• Keep last value
Substitute value For permissible substitute 0 Yes Channel Channel
values for the various
output ranges, see ap-
pendix Parameter as-
signment and structure of
the parameter data record
(Page 24), Substitute
values → Codes for substi-
tute values table
the left module (mod- group of the left
ule plugged into a module
dark-colored BaseUnit)
group (module
plugged into light-
colored BaseUnit)
1 No diagnostics detection between -0.5 V and +0.5 V (no short-circuit detection)

module is 7 bytes.
Note
Unused channels
A deactivated channel always returns the value "no voltage".

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA

Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange.
Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange, falls below the
minimum output value or reaches underflow.
Output type / output range

See section Output ranges (Page 13)

Determines the behavior of the module at CPU STOP.
Substitute value
The substitute value is the value that the module outputs in case of a CPU STOP.
Potential group
neighbor.
See also

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 15
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 2×U ST with
Image 4-1 Address space of the AQ 2×U ST with value status

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AQ 2xU ST.
③ PWR (green)

17 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel disabled
Off
Channel activated
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The AQ 2×U ST analog output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Short-circuit (voltage)
● Error


Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
High limit violated 7H The output value specified by the user pro- Correct the output value
gram exceeds the overrange.
Low limit violated 8H The output value specified by the user pro- Correct the output value
gram is below the underrange.
ing BaseUnit
output any process or substitute values in this
state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 19
Technical specifications of the AQ 2×U ST
6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AQ 2xU Standard
label
Product function
Scalable output range No
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1W
Address area

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 20
6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1
Analog outputs
Number of analog outputs 2
Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 45 mA
Cycle time (all channels), min. 1 ms
Analog output with oversampling No
Output ranges, voltage
Connection of actuators
for voltage output two-wire connection Yes
for voltage output four-wire connection No
Load resistance (in nominal range of the output)
For voltage outputs, min. 2 kΩ
For voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 µF
Destruction limit for externally applied voltages
and currents
Voltages at the outputs 30 V
Cable length
Analog value generation for the outputs
Oscillation time
For resistive load 0.1 ms
For capacitive load 1 ms
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03%
Temperature error (in relation to output range), 0.005%/K
(+/-)
Crosstalk between outputs, min. -50 dB
tion to output range), (+/-)
Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5%
Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.5%
Isochronous mode
terminal)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 21
6ES7135-6FB00-0BA1
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Group error Yes
electronics
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA

The table lists the properties and their dependencies on the output type and output range for
PROFINET.
Output type Output range Diagnostics Reaction to Substitute

No supply Short-circuit Overflow Underflow CPU STOP value
Voltage ±10 V x x x x x x
±5 V x x x x x x
0 V to 10 V x x x x x x

PROFIBUS.

No supply Short-circuit Overflow Underflow CPU STOP value
Voltage ±10 V x x x x x x
±5 V x x x x x x

23 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA



online help.
Note

24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA
Header information
Parameters

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 25
Codes for output types

The following table contains the codes for the output types of the analog output module. You
enter this coding in byte x (see previous figure).
Table A- 1 Codes for output types
Output type Code

Voltage 0000 0001
Codes for output ranges

The following table contains the codes for the output ranges of the analog output module.
You enter these codes in byte x+1 of data record 128 (see previous figure).
Table A- 2 Codes for output ranges
Output range Code

Voltage
±10 V 0000 0000
±5 V 0000 0001
0 to 10 V 0000 0010
1 to 5 V 0000 0011
Value range for substitute value

The following table contains the value ranges for the substitute values. You must enter the
corresponding codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure).
Output range Permissible value range

Voltage
±10 V -32512 to 32511
±5 V -32512 to 32511
0 to 10 V 0 to 32511
1 to 5 V -6912 to 32511

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)
DF 80 B2 xx Slot invalid or unavailable • Check the station to determine if the module
is plugged in or pulled.
DF 80 I0 xx Incorrect version or error in the Correct the version, length and number of pa-
header information rameter blocks.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 27
This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 2xU ST
analog module.

The digitized analog value is the same for all output values at the same nominal range.
Analog values are output as fixed point numbers in two's complement.
In the following table, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the
associated decimal or hexadecimal units of the analog values.
The resolutions 13, 14, 15 and 16 bits including sign are shown. Each analog value is
entered left aligned into the ACCU. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".
Table B- 1 Possible resolutions of the analog values

13 8 8H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001xxx
14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 28
B.2 Representation of output ranges

range output ranges. The resolution is 16 bits.
Table B- 2 Bipolar output ranges
Dec. value Output Data word Range

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≥32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output
value
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤ -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output
value
Table B- 3 Unipolar output ranges

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≥32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Maximum output
value
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output
value

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 29
B.3 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges

The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
output ranges.
Table B- 4 Voltage output ranges ±10 V and ±5 V
Values Voltage output range Range

118.5149% 32767 7FFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overflow*
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100% 27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0% 0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF -361.7 µV -180.8 µV
-75% -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-100% -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-117.593% -32512 8100 -11.76 V -5.88 V
-32513 80FF -11.76 -5.88 V Underflow*
-118.519% -32768 8000
* Outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value
Table B- 5 Voltage output range 0 V to 10 V

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V
118.519% 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Overflow*
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100% 27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range
75% 20736 5100 7.5 V
0.003617% 1 1 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 0V
-1 FFFF 0V Underflow*
-118.519% -32768 8000

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V
118.519% 32767 7FFF 5.70 V Overflow*
32512 7F00
117.589% 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100% 27648 6C00 5V Nominal range
75% 20736 5100 4V
0.003617% 1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV
0% 0 0 1V
-1 FFFF 1 V - 144.7 µV Underrange
-25% -6912 E500 0V
-6913 E4FF 0V Underflow*
-118.519% -32768 8000
* outputs positive maximum value or negative minimum value

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36105248-AA 31
Analog output module AQ 2xI ST ___________________
Preface
(6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1) ___________________
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200SP
Analog output module AQ 2xI ST
___________________
(6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
12/2015
A5E36104864-AA
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog output module AQ 2xI ST (6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Output ranges .........................................................................................................................13
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges ...............................................32

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Documentation guide

"mySupport"
Support.

CAx or CAe system.
macro files

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 7
Documentation guide
TIA Selection Tool


8 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7135-GB00-0BA1
View of the module

Image 2-1 View of the module AQ 2xI ST

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
– for current output
● Output range for current output:
– 0 mA to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy
● Value status
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

10 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Wiring 3
This section includes the block diagram of the AQ 2xI ST with the terminal assignments.
Note

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 11
Wiring
Wiring: Current output 2-wire connection

the analog output module AQ 2xI ST on the BaseUnit BU type A0/A1.
① 2-wire connection for current output Qn+ Analog output current positive, channel n
② Backplane bus interface Qn- Analog output current negative, channel n
③ Microcontroller RES Reserve, must remain unused for future
function extensions
④ Digital-to-analog converter (DAC) L+ 24 V DC (infeed only with light-colored Ba-
seUnit)
⑤ Output conditioner M Ground
⑥ Color-coded label with color code CC00 (optional) P1, P2, AUX Internal self-assembling voltage buses
BaseUnit)
⑦ Temperature recording for BU type A1 only (function DIAG Diagnostics LED (green, red)
cannot be used for this module)
⑧ Filter connection supply voltage (only when light- AQ0, AQ1 Channel status LED (green)
Image 3-1 Wiring and block diagram for current output 2-wire connection

12 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
4.1 Output ranges
The analog output module AQ 2×I ST has the following output ranges:

Current ± 20 mA 16 bits incl. sign

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 13
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AQ 2xI ST


in RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
• Enable
Overflow 1
• Enable
Underflow 1
• Enable
Wire break 2
• Enable
Output type/range • Deactivated Current 4 - Yes Channel Channel
20 mA
• Current +/- 20 mA
• Current 0 - 20 mA
• Keep last value

14 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
4.2 Parameters

in RUN (TIA Portal)
GSD file GSD file
Substitute value For permissible substitute 0 Yes Channel Channel
values for the various output
ranges, see appendix Pa-
rameter assignment and
structure of the parameter
data record (Page 26), Sub-
stitute values → Codes for
substitute values table
the left module (module group of the
colored BaseUnit)
seUnit)
1 Due to the limited number of parameters of a maximum of 244 bytes per ET 200SP station with a PROFIBUS GSD con-
figuration, the parameter assignment options are restricted. If required, you can assign these parameters using data
module is 7 bytes.
2 No diagnostics detection between -3 and +3 mA (no wire break detection)
Note
Unused channels
A disabled channel always returns the value "no current or voltage".

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 15



See section Output ranges (Page 13).

Substitute value
Potential group
neighbor.

16 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
4.4 Address space
See also
4.4 Address space

Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 2×I ST with
Image 4-1 Address space of the AQ 2×I ST with value status

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 17
LED display
The following figure shows you the LED display of the AQ 2xI ST.
③ PWR (green)

18 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Meaning of the LEDs

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

Off
Flashes
On
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel disabled
Off
Channel activated
On
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

Off
On

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 19
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The AQ 2×I ST analog output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
● Line break (current)
● Error

20 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA


Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or
modify the wiring, e.g. use cables
Channel not connected (open) • Disable the channel ("output
type" parameter)
• Connect the channel
ing BaseUnit
Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware update is currently in progress or • Wait for firmware update.
output any process or substitute values in this
state.

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 21
Technical specifications of the AQ 2×I ST
6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1
General information
Product type designation ET 200SP, AQ 2xI Standard
label
Product function
Scalable output range No
Engineering with
as of version
Operating mode
Oversampling No
MSO No
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Address area

22 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1
Analog outputs
Analog output with oversampling No
Output ranges, current
for current output two-wire connection Yes
For current outputs, max. 500 Ω
For current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH
Destruction limit for externally applied voltages
and currents
Cable length
Analog value generation for the outputs
Oscillation time
For resistive load 0.1 ms; typ. value
For inductive load 0.5 ms
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.03%
Temperature error (in relation to output range), 0.005%/K
(+/-)
tion to output range), (+/-)
Isochronous mode
terminal)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 23
6ES7135-6GB00-0BA1
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break Yes
Group error Yes
electronics
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights
Dimension drawing


24 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA

PROFINET.

No supply Overflow Underflow Wire break CPU STOP value
voltage L+
Current ±20 mA x x x x x x
0 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA
4 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA

PROFIBUS.

No supply Overflow Underflow Wire break CPU STOP value
voltage L+
Current ±20 mA x x x x x x
0 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA
4 mA to x x x x x x
20 mA

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 25

You can change the parameters of the module in RUN. For example, the voltage or current
values of selected channels can be changed in RUN without having an effect on the other
channels.


online help.
Note

26 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Header information
Parameters

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 27
Codes for output types

Table A- 1 Codes for output types
Output type Code

Current 0000 0011
Codes for output ranges

Table A- 2 Codes for output ranges
Output range Code

Current
±20 mA 0000 0000
0 mA to 20 mA 0000 0001
4 mA to 20 mA 0000 0010
Value range for substitute value

The following table contains the value ranges for the substitute values. You must enter the
corresponding codes in bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure).
Output range Permissible value range

Current
±20 mA -29031 to 29030
0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 29030
4 to 20 mA -692 to 29376

28 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA

data record 128.

rameter
(hexadecimal)

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 29
This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges supported by the AQ 2xI ST
analog module.

The resolutions 15 and 16 bits including sign are shown. Each analog value is entered left
aligned into the ACCU. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

30 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA


value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≥32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output
value
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤ -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output
value

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
value
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output
value

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 31
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges

The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
output ranges.
Table B- 4 Current output range ±20 mA
Values Current output range Range

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
118.5149% 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow*
29031 7167
105% 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange
27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA
100% 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
75% 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF -723.4 nA
-75% -20736 AF00 -15 mA
-100% -27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF -20 mA + 723.4 nA Underrange
-105% -29031 8E99 -21 mA
-29032 8E98 -21 mA Underflow*
-118.519% -32768 8000
Table B- 5 Current output range 0 to 20 mA

118.5149% 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow*
29031 7167
105% 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange
27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA
75% 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617% 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF 0 mA Underflow*
-118.519% -32768 8000

32 Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA
Table B- 6 Current output ranges 4 to 20 mA

118.5149% 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow*
29377 72C1
106.25% 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange
27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA
75% 19008 4A40 16 mA
0.003617% 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0% 0 0 4 mA
-1 FFFF 3.9995 mA Underrange
-2.5% -692 FD4C 3.6 mA
-693 FD4B 3.6 mA Underflow*
-118.519% -32768 8000

Manual, 12/2015, A5E36104864-AA 33
Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST ___________________
Preface
(6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1) ___________________
___________________
Product overview 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Wiring up 3
ET 200SP
Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST ___________________ 4
(6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
03/2016
A5E03573365-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Changes compared to previous version

Changes described in this manual, compared to the edition 07/2014:
● 3-wire connection for voltage output
● Derating trend for current output for modules as of hardware version FS 07.
Conventions
automation system as well as to the CPUs/interface modules of the distributed I/O system
ET 200SP.
Note
should be paid.
Analog Output Module AQ 4xU/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)

4 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Preface

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 5
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 11
3 Wiring up .............................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Terminal assignment .............................................................................................................. 14
3.2 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Output ranges ........................................................................................................................ 16
4.2 Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 17
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ............................................................................................... 19
4.4 Address space ....................................................................................................................... 20
5.2 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 24
A.1 Dependencies when configuring with GSD file ...................................................................... 30
A.2 Parameter assignment and structure of the parameter data record ...................................... 31
B.1 Representation of output ranges............................................................................................ 35
B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges .............................................. 36
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges .............................................. 37

6 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
areas.
Basic information
Device information
properties, wiring diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 7
Documentation guide
General information

"mySupport"
Support.

8 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Documentation guide

CAx or CAe system.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 9
Documentation guide
SIMATIC Automation Tool

You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to run commissioning and maintenance activities
simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independently of the TIA
Portal.
The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions:
● Scanning of a PROFINET/Ethernet network and identification of all connected CPUs
● Address assignment (IP, subnet, gateway) and station name (PROFINET device) to a
CPU
● Transfer of the data and the programming device/PC time converted to UTC time to the
module
● Program download to CPU
● Operating mode switchover RUN/STOP
● Localization of the CPU by means of LED flashing
● Reading out CPU error information
● Reading the CPU diagnostic buffer
● Updating the firmware of the CPU and connected modules
You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet

10 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
View of the module
Image 2-1 View of the module AQ 4×U/I ST

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 11
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
– For current output and
– voltage output
● Output range for current output:
● Output range for voltage output:
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

as of module as of

12 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Accessories
● Labeling strips
See also

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 13
Wiring up 3
Terminal assignment for AQ 4×U/I ST (6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1)

Terminal Assign- Terminal Assignment Explanation BaseUnit1 Color identifica-
ment tion label
1 Q0+ 2 Q1+ • Qn+: Analog out- A0 ---
3 Q2+ 4 Q3+ put voltage/current A1
5 Q0- 6 Q1- (positive), chan-
nel n
7 Q2- 8 Q3-
• Qn-: Analog output
9 S0+ 10 S1+
voltage/current
11 S2+ 12 S3+ (negative), chan-
13 S0- 14 S1- nel n
15 S2- 16 S3- • Sn+: Sensor line
L+ 24 VDC M M positive, channel n
• Sn-: Sensor line
negative, chan-
nel n
Voltage 2-wire connection Voltage 3-wire connection Voltage 4-wire con- Current
nection
Note
You will find additional information on the BaseUnit types in the ET 200SP distributed I/O

14 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Wiring up
Image 3-1 Schematic circuit diagram for AQ 4×U/I ST

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 15
4.1 Output ranges
The analog output module AQ 4×U/I ST has the following measuring ranges:

Current ± 20 mA 16 bits including sign
0 to 20 mA 15 bits
4 to 20 mA 14 bits
Voltage ±10 V 16 bits including sign
0 to 10 V 15 bits
1 to 5 V 13 bits

16 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
4.2 Parameters
4.2 Parameters
Parameters of the AQ 4xU/I ST

Parameters Value range Default Configuration Effective range with configuration

GSD file GSD file
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable yes Module Module
Short-circuit1
• Enable
Overflow
• Enable
Underflow
• Enable
wire break2
• Enable
Output type/range • deactivated Current 4 - yes Channel Channel
20 mA
• Voltage +/- 5 V
• Voltage 0..10 V
• Voltage 1..5 V
• Current +/- 20 mA
Reaction to CPU STOP • Turn off Turn off yes Channel Module
• Keep last value

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 17
4.2 Parameters
Parameters Value range Default Configuration Effective range with configuration

GSD file GSD file
Substitute value For permissible substitute 0 yes Channel Channel
values for the various
output ranges, see appen-
dix Parameter data record
(Page 30), Substitute val-
ues → Codes for substitute
value table
Potential group • Use potential group of Use potential no Module Module
left module
• Allow new potential
group
1 no diagnostics detection between -0.5 V and +0.5 V (no short-circuit detection)

2 no diagnostics detection between -3 mA and +3 mA (no wire break detection)
Note
Unused channels
"Disable" the unused channels in the parameter assignment. This improves the temperature
characteristics of the module, see Derating, section Technical specifications (Page 25).
A disabled channel always returns the value "no current or voltage".

18 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD



See section Output ranges (Page 16)

Substitute value
Potential group

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 19
4.4 Address space
4.4 Address space

Bit = 1: There are no faults/errors on the module.
Address space
The following figure shows the assignment of the address space for the AQ 4×U/I ST with
Image 4-1 Address space of the AQ 4×U/I ST with value status

20 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
LED display
The figure below shows the LED displays of the AQ 4xU/I ST.
③ PWR (green)

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 21

DIAG LED
DIAG LED Meaning

off
Flashes
on
Flashes
Channel status LED

LED
Channel disabled
off
Channel enabled
on
PWR LED
PWR LED Meaning

off
on

22 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
5.2 Interrupts
5.2 Interrupts
The analog output module AQ 4×U/I ST supports diagnostic interrupts.
● Short-circuit (voltage)
● Overtemperature
● Line break (current)
● Error
● No load voltage

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 23


Channel temporarily 1FH Firmware being updated. The module is cur- –
unavailable rently not performing any outputs.
Short-circuit 1H Short-circuit of the actuator supply Correct the process wiring
Overtemperature 4H Thermal overload of the I/O module Correct the process wiring
Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high. Use a different actuator type or wire
differently, e.g. use cables with a
Channel not connected (open) • Disable the channel ("output
type" parameter)
• Connect the channel
BaseUnit

24 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Technical specifications of AQ 4×U/I ST
6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
Product type designation AQ 4xU/I ST
General information
Product function
I&M data Yes
Engineering with
Supply voltage
Input current
Power loss
Address area

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 25
6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
Analog outputs
Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 45 mA
Output ranges, voltage
-5 to +5 V Yes; 15 bits including sign
-10 to +10 V Yes; 16 bits including sign
Output ranges, current
-20 to +20 mA Yes; 16 bits including sign
for voltage output two-wire connection Yes
for voltage output three-wire connection Yes
for voltage output four-wire connection Yes
for current output two-wire connection Yes
For voltage outputs, min. 2 kΩ
For voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 µF
For current outputs, max. 500 Ω
For current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH
Destruction limit for externally applied voltages and currents
Cable length
Cable length shielded, max. 1000 m; 200 m for voltage output
Oscillation time
For resistive load 0.1 ms
For capacitive load 1 ms
For inductive load 0.5 ms
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) ±0.03 %
Temperature error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.005 %/K
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in relation to out- ±0.05 %
put range), (+/-)
Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) ±0.5 %
Current in relation to output range, (+/-) ±0.5 %

26 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
6ES7135-6HD00-0BA1
Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) ±0.3 %
Current in relation to output range, (+/-) ±0.3 %
Interrupts
Diagnostics alarms
Diagnostics Yes
Wire break Yes
Short-circuit Yes
Between the channels and the supply voltage of the electron- Yes
ics
Insulation
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Weights

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 27
Derating trend for permitted load during power output and horizontal mounting position:
Image 6-1 Derating trend current output (horizontal)
Derating trend for permitted load during power output and vertical mounting position:
Image 6-2 Derating trend current output (vertical)

28 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Dimension drawing

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 29

PROFINET.
Output type Output Diagnostics Reaction Substitute

range No supply Short-circuit Overflow Underflow Wire to CPU value
voltage L+ to M break STOP
deactivated * * * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x x x x - x x
±10 V x x x x - x x
1..5 V x x x x - x x
0..10 V x x x x - x x
Current ±20 mA x - x x x x x
0..20 mA x - x x x x x
4..20 mA x - x x x x x

PROFIBUS.

No supply Short-circuit Overflow/ Wire break CPU STOP value
voltage L+ to M Underflow
deactivated * * * * * *
Voltage ±5 V x x x - x x
±10 V x x x - x x
1..5 V x x x - x x
0..10 V x x x - x x
Current ±20 mA x - x x x x
0..20 mA x - x x x x
4..20 mA x - x x x x

30 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD



online help.
Note

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 31
Header information
Parameters
Image A-3 Structure byte x up to x+5 for the channel 0 to 3

32 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Codes for output type

Table A- 1 Codes for output type
Output type Coding

Voltage 0000 0001
Current 0000 0011
Codes for output range

Table A- 2 Codes for output range
Output range Coding

Voltage
±10 V 0000 0000
±5 V 0000 0001
0 to 10 V 0000 0010
1 to 5 V 0000 0011
Current
±20 mA 0000 0000
0 to 20 mA 0000 0001
4 to 20 mA 0000 0010
Codes for substitute value

The following table contains the codes for the substitute values. You enter these codes in
bytes x+4 and x+5 (see previous figure).
Output range Permissible substitute value

Voltage
±10 V -32512 to 32511
±5 V -32512 to 32511
0 to 10 V 0 to 32511
1 to 5 V -6912 to 32511
Current
±20 mA -29031 to 29030
0 to 20 mA 0 to 29030
4 to 20 mA -692 to 29376

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 33
This appendix describes the analog values for all output ranges that you can use with the
analog module AQ 4xU/I ST.

The resolutions 14, 15 and 16 bits including sign are shown. Each analog value is entered in
the ACCU left-justified. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".

14 4 4H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000001xx
15 2 2H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000001x
16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000001

34 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD


value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≥32512 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output
value
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 -0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-27648 -100.000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange
-32512 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤ -32513 -117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output
value

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
value
32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange
27649 100.004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0.003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output
value

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 35

The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible voltage
output ranges.
Table B- 4 Voltage output ranges ±10 V and ±5 V

118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overflow*
32512 7F00
117.589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.88 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V
0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV
0% 0 0 0V 0V
-1 FFFF -361.7 µV -180.8 µV
-75 % -20736 AF00 -7.5 V -3.75 V
-100 % -27648 9400 -10 V -5 V
-117.593 % -32512 8100 -11.76 V -5.88 V
-32513 80FF -11.76 -5.88 V Underflow*
-118.519 % -32768 8000

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V
118.519 % 32767 7FFF 11.76 V Overflow*
32512 7F00
117.589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V
0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 0V
-1 FFFF 0V Underflow*
-118.519 % -32768 8000

36 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V
118.519 % 32767 7FFF 5.70 V Overflow*
32512 7F00
117.589 % 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 5V Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 4V
0.003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV
0% 0 0 1V
-1 FFFF 1 V - 144.7 µV Underrange
-25 % -6912 E500 0V
-6913 E4FF 0V Underflow*
-118.519 % -32768 8000

The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values (codes) of the possible current
output ranges.
Table B- 7 Current output range ±20 mA

Dec. Hex. ±20 mA
118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow*
29031 7167
105 % 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange
27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF -723.4 nA
-75 % -20736 AF00 -15 mA
-100 % -27648 9400 -20 mA
-27649 93FF -20 mA + 723.4 nA Underrange
-105 % -29031 8E99 -21 mA
-29032 8E98 -21 mA Underflow*
-118.519 % -32768 8000

Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD 37
Table B- 8 Current output range 0 to 20 mA

118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow*
29031 7167
105 % 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange
27649 6C01 20 mA + 723.4 nA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA
0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF 0 mA Underflow*
-118.519 % -32768 8000
Table B- 9 Current output ranges 4 to 20 mA

118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 21 mA Overflow*
29377 72C1
106.25 % 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange
27649 6C01 20 mA + 578.7 nA
75 % 19008 4A40 16 mA
0.003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0% 0 0 4 mA
-1 FFFF 3.9995 mA Underrange
-2.5 % -692 FD4C 3.6 mA
-693 FD4B 3.6 mA Underflow*
-118.519 % -32768 8000

38 Manual, 03/2016, A5E03573365-AD
Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS ___________________
Preface
(6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1) ___________________
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Connecting
ET 200SP
Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS 4
___________________
(6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)
___________________
Manual
___________________
___________________
___________________
values B
03/2015
A5E03576140-AC
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTICE
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.

Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Conventions
system.
Note
should be paid.
Analog output module AQ 2xU/I HS (6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1)

4 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation Guide ............................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Output types and output ranges .............................................................................................14
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................14
4.4 Oversampling ..........................................................................................................................18
4.5 Address space ........................................................................................................................20
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................24
B.2 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges ..............................................39
B.3 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges ...............................................40

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC 5
areas.
Basic information
Device information
General information

6 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC
Documentation Guide

your own manual.

systems.
macro files
TIA Selection Tool


Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC 7
Product overview 2
2.1 Properties
Article number
6ES7135-6HB00-0DA1
View of the module

Figure 2-1 View of the AQ 2×U/I HS module

8 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC
Product overview
2.1 Properties
Properties
– For current output and
– Voltage output
● Output ranges for current output:
– ±20 mA, resolution 16 bit including sign
● Output ranges for voltage output:
– ±10 V, resolution 16 bit including sign
– ±5 V, resolution 15 bit including sign
● Firmware update
● PROFIenergy

Basic version 1 V1.0.0
Oversampling channel 0 2 V1.1.0
Oversampling channel 0 and 1 2 V2.0.0
Accessories
● Labeling strips

Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC 9
Product overview
2.1 Properties
See also

10 Manual, 03/2015, A5E03576140-AC
Connecting 3
This section

Et200sp Manual Collection en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Et200sp Manual Collection en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMATIC

This document contains a compilation of all Edition 04/2016

Siemens AG A5E03576849-AF Copyright © Siemens AG 2012 - 2015.

Purpose of the documentation

Basic knowledge required

Validity of the documentation

Distributed I/O system

Recycling and disposal

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

5.6 Wiring BaseUnits.................................................................................................................... 62

Distributed I/O system

8 Protection ........................................................................................................................................... 133

Distributed I/O system

11 SIMATIC memory card.........................................................................................................................196

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Manual Collection ET 200SP

CAx Download Manager

TIA Selection Tool

Distributed I/O system

Customer benefits of the system

Figure 2-1 SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I/O system - Customer benefits

Distributed I/O system

Distributed I/O system

Figure 2-2 Configuration example of the ET 200SP

Distributed I/O system

2.2 What are fail-safe automation systems and fail-safe modules?

Fail-safe automation systems

Area of application of ET 200SP with fail-safe I/O modules

Distributed I/O system

2.3 How are SIMATIC Safety F-systems structured with ET 200SP?

SIMATIC Safety F-system with ET 200SP

Figure 2-3 Fail-safe SIMATIC Safety automation system (sample configuration)

Fail-safe ET 200SP I/O modules

Distributed I/O system

Example of a configuration with fail-safe I/O modules

Hardware and software requirements

Distributed I/O system

Use in safety mode only

Achievable safety classes

Safety class in safety mode

Distributed I/O system

Basic components of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Table 2- 2 Basic components of the ET 200SP

Basic component Function Figure

CPU/Fail-safe CPU The (F) CPU:

Distributed I/O system

Basic component Function Figure

Interface module for The interface module:

Interface module for The interface module:

Distributed I/O system

Basic component Function Figure

For mixed ET 200SP/ET 200AL configuration,

Distributed I/O system

Basic component Function Figure

Distributed I/O system

Basic component Function Figure

Coding element The coding element codes the I/O module

Distributed I/O system

Accessories of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system

Table 2- 3 Accessories of the ET 200SP

Accessories Function Figure